Clavis Bibliorum The key of the Bible, unlocking the richest treasury of the Holy Scriptures : whereby the 1 order, 2 names, 3 times, 4 penmen, 5 occasion, 6 scope, and 7 principall parts, containing the subject-matter of every book of Old and New Testament, are familiarly and briefly opened : for the help of the weakest capacity in the understanding of the whole Bible / by Francis Roberts ...
         Roberts, Francis, 1609-1675.
      
       
         
           1648
        
      
       Approx. 503 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 203 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2003-09 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A57377
         Wing R1583
         ESTC R20707
         12356495
         ocm 12356495
         60145
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A57377)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 60145)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 645:23)
      
       
         
           
             Clavis Bibliorum The key of the Bible, unlocking the richest treasury of the Holy Scriptures : whereby the 1 order, 2 names, 3 times, 4 penmen, 5 occasion, 6 scope, and 7 principall parts, containing the subject-matter of every book of Old and New Testament, are familiarly and briefly opened : for the help of the weakest capacity in the understanding of the whole Bible / by Francis Roberts ...
             Roberts, Francis, 1609-1675.
             Calamy, Edmund, 1600-1666.
          
           624 p. : 2 folded charts.
           
             Printed by T.R. and E.M. for George Calvert ...,
             London :
             1648.
          
           
             "An epistle to the reader," signed by Edmund Calamy.
             Imperfect: all pages after p. 336 lacking in filmed copy.
             Reproduction of original in the University of Illinois (Urbana-Champaign Campus). Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Bible. -- O.T. -- Commentaries.
        
      
    
     
        2003-05 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2003-06 SPi Global
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2003-07 Mona Logarbo
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2003-07 Mona Logarbo
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2003-08 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           CLAVIS
           BIBLIORVM
           .
           THE
           KEY
           Of
           the
           BIBLE
           ,
           Vnlocking
           The
           Richest
           Treasury
           of
           the
           Holy
           Scriptures
           .
        
         
           WHEREBY
           The
           1
           Order
           ,
           2
           Names
           ,
           3.
           
           Times
           ,
           4
           Penmen
           ,
           5
           Occasion
           ,
           6
           
             Scope
             ,
             and
          
           7
           
             Principall
             Parts
          
           ,
           Containing
           the
           Subject-Matter
           of
           every
           Book
           of
           Old
           and
           
             New
             Testament
          
           ,
           are
           familiarly
           and
           briefly
           opened
           :
           For
           the
           help
           of
           the
           weakest
           capacity
           in
           the
           understanding
           of
           the
           whole
           BIBLE
           .
        
         
           By
           FRANCIS
           ROBERTS
           ,
           
             A.
             M.
          
           Pastor
           of
           the
           Church
           at
           Augustines
           ,
           LONDON
           .
        
         
           
             Col.
             3.16
             
          
           
             Let
             the
             word
             of
             Christ
             in
             dwell
             in
             you
             richly
             in
             all
             wisdome
             .
          
        
         
           London
           ,
           Printed
           by
           
             T.
             R.
          
           and
           
             E.
             M.
          
           for
           
             George
             Calvert
          
           ,
           and
           are
           to
           sold
           at
           his
           shop
           at
           the
           signe
           of
           the
           Half-Moon
           in
           Watling-street
           ,
           neer
           to
           Pauls
           stump
           .
           1648.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           AN
           EPISTLE
           To
           the
           READER
           .
        
         
           THere
           is
           no
           one
           duty
           more
           commanded
           ,
           or
           commended
           in
           the
           Word
           of
           God
           ,
           or
           more
           practised
           by
           the
           Saints
           of
           God
           ,
           then
           the
           diligent
           and
           conscientious
           reading
           of
           the
           holy
           Scriptures
           .
           Our
           Saviour
           Christ
           commands
           us
           not
           only
           to
           read
           them
           ,
           but
           to
           a
           
             search
             into
             them
          
           .
           The
           Apostle
           Paul
           commands
           us
           not
           only
           to
           have
           them
           
             with
             us
          
           ,
           but
           b
           
             in
             us
          
           ;
           and
           not
           
           only
           to
           have
           them
           
             in
             us
          
           ,
           but
           to
           have
           them
           
             dwelling
             and
             abiding
             in
             us
             ,
             richly
             in
             all
             wisedome
             .
          
           David
           professeth
           of
           himselfe
           that
           the
           c
           
             Law
             was
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             his
             bowels
             .
          
           And
           that
           
             he
             had
          
           d
           
             hid
             the
             word
             in
             his
             heart
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             not
             sinne
             against
             God.
             Austin
          
           saith
           of
           himselfe
           e
           ,
           
             that
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             were
             his
             holy
             delight
             .
          
           And
           Hierome
           tels
           us
           of
           one
           Nepotianus
           ,
           who
           f
           
             by
             long
             and
             assiduous
             meditation
             of
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             ,
             had
             made
             his
             breast
             the
             Library
             of
             Iesus
             Christ.
          
           And
           for
           my
           part
           ,
           I
           have
           alwayes
           observed
           ,
           that
           the
           more
           holy
           and
           humble
           any
           man
           is
           ,
           the
           more
           he
           delighteth
           in
           the
           holy
           Scriptures
           ;
           and
           the
           more
           profane
           and
           proud
           any
           man
           is
           ,
           the
           more
           he
           slighteth
           and
           undervalueth
           
           them
           .
           Cursed
           is
           that
           speech
           of
           Politian
           that
           proud
           Critick
           ,
           that
           he
           never
           
             spent
             his
             time
             worse
          
           then
           in
           reading
           the
           Scriptures
           .
           And
           famous
           is
           the
           Answer
           of
           Basil
           to
           that
           cursed
           Apostate
           Julian
           who
           said
           of
           the
           Sciptures
           ,
           g
           
             That
             he
             had
             read
             them
             ,
             understood
             them
             ,
             and
             condemned
             them
          
           ;
           But
           Basil
           answered
           him
           excellently
           :
           
             That
             he
             had
             read
             them
             ,
             but
             not
             understood
             them
             ,
             for
             if
             he
             had
             understood
             them
             ,
             he
             would
             not
             have
             condemned
             them
             .
          
           No
           man
           that
           hath
           the
           
             Holy
             Spirit
          
           ,
           but
           will
           love
           those
           books
           which
           were
           written
           h
           by
           holy
           men
           as
           they
           were
           moved
           
             by
             the
             Holy
             Spirit
          
           .
           As
           David
           said
           of
           Goliah's
           sword
           .
           i
           
             There
             is
             none
             to
             that
             ,
             give
             it
             me
             ,
          
           So
           may
           I
           say
           of
           the
           Holy
           Scriptures
           .
           
           
             There
             are
             no
             bookes
             like
             these
             Books
             ,
          
           k
           
             which
             are
             able
             to
             make
             thee
             wise
             unto
             salvation
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             the
             man
             of
             God
             absolute
             ,
             and
             perfect
             unto
             every
             good
             worke
             .
          
           And
           therefore
           let
           me
           perswade
           all
           men
           to
           read
           these
           books
           ,
           &
           not
           only
           to
           read
           them
           ,
           but
           to
           l
           
             meditate
             in
             them
             day
             and
             night
          
           :
           And
           to
           hide
           them
           in
           their
           hearts
           as
           a
           
             divine
             cordiall
          
           ,
           to
           m
           comfort
           them
           in
           these
           sad
           dayes
           ;
           as
           a
           n
           
             divine
             lampe
          
           ,
           to
           guide
           them
           in
           this
           houre
           of
           darknesse
           ;
           and
           o
           as
           part
           of
           the
           whole
           
             Armour
             of
             God
          
           ,
           to
           inable
           them
           to
           resist
           temptation
           ,
           in
           this
           
             houre
             of
             temptation
          
           ,
           that
           is
           now
           
             coming
             upon
             the
             whole
             earth
          
           .
           And
           when
           they
           read
           them
           ,
           1
           To
           read
           them
           with
           an
           
             humble
             heart
          
           ,
           for
           God
           hath
           promised
           to
           give
           
           p
           
             grace
             to
             the
             humble
          
           ,
           and
           q
           to
           
             teach
             the
             humble
             his
             way
          
           .
           2
           To
           read
           thē
           with
           
             prayer
             ,
             that
             God
             would
          
           r
           
             open
             their
             eyes
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             understand
             the
             wonders
             of
             his
             law
             .
          
           3
           To
           read
           them
           with
           a
           
             godly
             trembling
          
           ,
           for
           feare
           least
           with
           the
           spider
           these
           should
           suck
           poison
           out
           of
           their
           sweet
           flowers
           ,
           and
           s
           
             wrest
             the
             Scriptures
             to
             their
             owne
             destruction
             ,
             as
             they
             that
             are
             unstable
             and
             unlearned
             .
          
           4
           To
           read
           them
           with
           a
           t
           
             purpose
             to
             practice
             what
             they
             read
             .
             He
             that
             practiseth
             what
             he
             understandeth
             ,
             God
             will
             help
             him
             to
             understand
             what
             he
             understands
             not
             .
          
           5
           To
           read
           them
           in
           an
           
             orderly
             and
             methodicall
             way
          
           ;
           And
           for
           their
           better
           help
           herein
           ,
           to
           take
           this
           
             ensuing
             Treatise
          
           in
           their
           hands
           .
           It
           is
           short
           and
           pithy
           ;
           It
           sets
           the
           whole
           Bible
           before
           
           them
           ,
           in
           an
           orderly
           ,
           plaine
           and
           perspicuous
           manner
           ,
           and
           helps
           them
           to
           understand
           every
           book
           .
           The
           Author
           of
           it
           is
           a
           
             godly
             learned
             Minister
          
           ,
           well
           knowne
           and
           very
           well
           esteemed
           on
           in
           this
           famous
           city
           .
           The
           Book
           it selfe
           is
           called
           the
           
             Key
             of
             the
             Bible
          
           ,
           because
           it
           unlocks
           the
           richest
           Treasury
           of
           the
           Holy
           Scriptures
           .
           Take
           this
           Key
           with
           you
           ,
           whensoever
           you
           goe
           into
           this
           Treasury
           .
           And
           pray
           unto
           him
           that
           hath
           the
           u
           
             Key
             of
          
           David
           ,
           
             that
             openeth
             and
             no
             man
             shutteth
             ,
             and
             shutteth
             and
             no
             man
             openeth
             ,
          
           that
           he
           will
           open
           this
           Treasury
           unto
           you
           .
           The
           Rabbins
           say
           that
           there
           are
           
             foure
             Keyes
          
           that
           are
           in
           Gods
           keeping
           .
           
             The
             Key
             of
             the
             clouds
             ,
             The
             Key
             of
             the
             wombe
             ,
             The
             Key
             of
             the
             grave
             ,
             The
             Key
             of
             
             food
             .
          
           I
           may
           adde
           that
           there
           is
           a
           
             fifth
             Key
          
           also
           in
           Gods
           bestowing
           ,
           which
           is
           
             the
             Key
             of
             the
             Scriptures
          
           .
           The
           God
           that
           made
           these
           books
           ,
           can
           only
           un-riddle
           these
           Books
           .
           And
           therefore
           when
           you
           use
           this
           Key
           ,
           pray
           for
           that
           other
           Key
           ,
           and
           pray
           unto
           Christ
           to
           deale
           with
           you
           as
           he
           did
           with
           his
           Apostles
           ,
           x
           
             To
             open
             your
             understanding
             that
             you
             may
             understand
             the
             Scriptures
             .
          
           So
           prayes
           ,
        
         
           
             Your
             Servant
             in
             Christ
             Iesus
             ,
             
               EDMUND
               CALAMY
            
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           Imprimatur
           ,
        
         
           
             EDMUND
             CALAMY
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           AN
           INTRODUCTORY
           Advertisement
           TO
           THE
           READER
           ;
           Containing
           some
           
             Generall
             Directions
          
           for
           the
           Right
           Understanding
           of
           the
           
             Holy
             Scriptures
          
           ;
           And
           how
           this
           present
           Treatise
           is
           to
           be
           improved
           most
           advantagiously
           to
           that
           end
           .
        
         
           THe
           Holy
           Scriptures
           are
           the
           a
           
             lively
             Oracles
          
           of
           the
           living
           God
           ,
           unfolding
           the
           secrets
           of
           his
           will
           to
           man
           :
           
             The
             Epistle
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
          
           ,
           Revealing
           from
           heaven
           the
           saving
           mysteries
           of
           his
           sweetest
           love
           unto
           his
           Church
           :
           and
           the
           
             Blessed
             Charter
             of
             the
             Saints
          
           ,
           which
           no
           Tract
           of
           time
           shall
           reverse
           ;
           whereby
           they
           hold
           of
           God
           all
           their
           present
           enjoyments
           ,
           
           in
           
             the
             life
             that
             now
             is
          
           ,
           and
           all
           their
           future
           hopes
           of
           that
           
             life
             which
             is
             to
             come
          
           .
           b
           Chrysostom
           prefers
           Scripture
           
             before
             Angels
          
           ;
           &
           saith
           c
           
             Get
             you
             Bibles
             ,
             the
             medicines
             of
             the
             soule
             .
          
           d
           
             Iob
             esteemed
             them
             more
             then
             his
             necessary
             food
             .
             Paul
          
           e
           
             delighted
             therein
             touching
             the
             inward
             man.
             David
          
           preferred
           them
           before
           f
           
             the
             honey
             and
             honey-combe
          
           ;
           before
           g
           
             great
             spoyl
          
           ,
           h
           
             thousands
             of
             gold
             and
             silver
          
           ,
           i
           
             all
             riches
          
           ,
           and
           therefore
           accounted
           them
           his
           k
           heritage
           ,
           his
           l
           Counsellors
           ,
           his
           m
           comfort
           ,
           &c.
           
           Yea
           professeth
           n
           
             his
             heart
             did
             break
             for
             longing
             to
             Gods
             judgements
             at
             all
             times
             .
          
           And
           every
           godly
           and
           truly
           blessed
           man
           should
           make
           the
           Scriptures
           his
           o
           
             delight
             ,
             and
             meditate
             therein
             night
             and
             day
             .
          
        
         
           Notwithstanding
           how
           many
           gracious
           soules
           are
           there
           ,
           
             whose
             delight
          
           it
           is
           to
           repair
           often
           to
           this
           
             Sanctuary
             of
             the
             Scriptures
          
           ,
           (
           as
           p
           Augustine
           stiles
           them
           )
           but
           cannot
           tell
           what
           they
           see
           there
           ,
           of
           the
           Lord
           ,
           and
           of
           his
           glory
           ;
           who
           frequently
           read
           in
           this
           blessed
           Book
           ,
           but
           (
           like
           the
           q
           
             Ethiopian
             Eunuch
          
           )
           
             understand
             not
          
           ,
           or
           not
           to
           purpose
           ,
           
             what
             they
             reade
          
           ?
           And
           this
           comes
           to
           passe
           ,
           1
           Partly
           ,
           through
           the
           sublimity
           of
           those
           supernatural
           and
           heavenly
           mysteries
           therein
           revealed
           ,
           whereby
           r
           
             some
             things
             are
             hard
             to
             be
             understood
             .
          
           2
           Partly
           through
           the
           obscure
           and
           mysterious
           manner
           of
           Scriptures
           ,
           revealing
           
           many
           things
           ,
           whereby
           the
           Lord
           would
           exe●cise
           the
           sharpest
           and
           deepest
           apprehensions
           of
           men
           .
           3
           Partly
           through
           defect
           of
           some
           familiar
           Manu-duction
           into
           the
           whole
           Bible
           ,
           and
           the
           severall
           Books
           of
           Old
           and
           New
           Testament
           therein
           contained
           ,
           which
           might
           like
           a
           
             Clew
             of
             thread
          
           conduct
           into
           these
           sacred
           Treasuryes
           ,
           and
           like
           a
           Key
           unlock
           this
           Cabinet
           of
           Christs
           richest
           Jewels
           .
           Whereupon
           ,
           after
           much
           deliberation
           how
           this
           might
           be
           best
           effected
           ,
           apprehending
           that
           some
           briefe
           and
           solid
           
             Discovery
             of
             the
          
           1
           Order
           ,
           2
           Names
           3
           Times
           ,
           4
           Penmen
           5
           Occasion
           ,
           6
           Scope
           ,
           7
           
             Principall
             parts
             of
             the
             Books
             in
             the
             Bible
             ,
          
           would
           much
           conduce
           o
           ripen
           Christians
           in
           Bible-knowledge
           ,
           spreading
           before
           their
           eyes
           in
           
             A
             Generall
             view
             the
             current
             of
             the
             whole
             Scriptures
             :
          
           I
           entred
           upon
           this
           Task
           and
           finished
           it
           (
           by
           divine
           assistance
           )
           in
           such
           sort
           as
           is
           represented
           in
           the
           ensueing
           Treatise
           .
           It
           was
           immediately
           intended
           for
           the
           help
           and
           benefit
           of
           some
           speciall
           godly
           friends
           ,
           (
           whom
           I
           shall
           ever
           highly
           respect
           and
           honour
           )
           but
           through
           importunity
           is
           now
           made
           publike
           for
           the
           good
           (
           I
           hope
           )
           of
           many
           .
           The
           Lord
           make
           it
           as
           usefull
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           intended
           ,
           and
           is
           desired
           .
        
         
           By
           way
           of
           Preface
           ,
           be
           pleased
           to
           pause
           a
           little
           with
           me
           upon
           the
           serious
           consideration
           of
           1.
           
           
             The
             worth
             of
             Scripture-knowledge
          
           .
           2.
           
           
             The
             way
             how
             to
             attaine
             to
             it
             .
             That
          
           
           will
           quicken
           Christians
           to
           
             Scripture-study
             .
             This
          
           will
           help
           them
           to
           Scripture-understanding
           .
        
         
           
           
             Scripture-knowledge
             is
             of
             great
             worth
             and
             consequence
             to
             every
             Christian.
          
           Or
           ,
           
             The
             Holy
             Scriptures
             are
             most
             worthy
             of
             all
             Christians
             constant
             study
             ,
             and
             utmost
             endeavours
             to
             understand
             them
             .
          
           For
           ,
        
         
           1.
           
           
             The
             Author
             inventing
             and
             inditing
             the
             Holy
             Scriptures
             is
             God
          
           blessed
           for
           ever
           ,
           Father
           ,
           Sonne
           and
           Holy
           Ghost
           ;
           s
           
             all
             Scripture
             is
             divinely
             inspired
          
           .
           Hence
           called
           the
           t
           
             Oracles
             of
             God
          
           ;
           u
           
             The
             word
             of
             Christ.
          
           And
           the
           x
           
             Saying
             of
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
          
           ,
           y
           
             For
             the
             Prophecy
             came
             not
             at
             any
             time
             by
             the
             will
             of
             man
             ,
             but
             holy
             men
             of
             God
             spake
             as
             they
             were
             moved
             by
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             .
          
           We
           are
           apt
           to
           value
           ,
           desire
           to
           study
           and
           understand
           the
           books
           of
           godly
           ,
           learned
           ,
           judicious
           mens
           making
           :
           How
           much
           more
           should
           we
           to
           the
           utmost
           indeavour
           to
           understand
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           which
           are
           the
           only
           
             Books
             of
             Gods
             making
             ?
             Mens
             writings
          
           are
           too
           much
           mingled
           with
           vanity
           ,
           ignorance
           ,
           folly
           ,
           mistakes
           ,
           imperfections
           ,
           infirmities
           and
           corruptions
           ,
           savouring
           much
           of
           a
           carnall
           spirit
           when
           most
           spiritual
           :
           But
           
             Gods
             word
          
           is
           satisfactorily
           full
           ,
           without
           all
           vanity
           :
           most
           wise
           z
           faithfull
           and
           true
           ,
           without
           all
           falshood
           or
           folly
           ;
           Compleatly
           a
           perfect
           ,
           beyond
           all
           imperfection
           ;
           b
           most
           pure
           ,
           and
           c
           
             exceedingly
             refined
          
           ,
           without
           all
           corruption
           ,
           and
           without
           
           all
           carnall
           mixtures
           ;
           wholly
           spirituall
           ,
           sweetly
           resembling
           that
           most
           
             spirituall
             spirit
          
           that
           did
           indite
           them
           .
        
         
           2.
           
           
             The
             Amanuenses
             or
             Penmen
          
           of
           the
           Holy
           Ghost
           for
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           were
           not
           contemptible
           or
           ordinary
           ,
           but
           incomparable
           and
           extraordinary
           persons
           .
           As
           Moses
           the
           d
           
             meekest
             man
             on
             earth
          
           ;
           the
           peculiar
           favourite
           of
           God
           ,
           with
           whom
           e
           
             God
             talked
             face
             to
             face
          
           ;
           the
           f
           
             None-such
             of
             all
             the
             Prophets
             in
          
           Israel
           .
           Samuel
           g
           that
           mighty
           man
           in
           prayer
           .
           David
           the
           King
           ,
           that
           h
           
             man
             after
             Gods
             own
             heart
          
           .
           King
           Solomon
           ,
           that
           i
           
             wisest
             of
             all
             the
             Kings
          
           ,
           whom
           God
           honoured
           with
           the
           k
           
             building
             of
             the
             Temple
             .
             Daniel
          
           in
           whom
           was
           found
           l
           
             an
             excellent
             spirit
          
           ,
           and
           great
           dexterity
           in
           m
           
             expounding
             secrets
             and
             mysteries
             .
             Iohn
          
           n
           
             the
             disciple
             whom
             Iesus
             loved
          
           above
           all
           the
           rest
           ,
           o
           
             who
             leaned
             on
             Iesus
             breast
             .
             Paul
          
           p
           
             who
             was
             caught
             up
             into
             the
             third
             heavens
             ,
          
           whose
           writings
           (
           saith
           q
           Chrysostome
           )
           
             like
             a
             wall
             of
             adamant
             ,
             compasse
             about
             or
             surround
             all
             the
             Churches
             .
          
           In
           a
           word
           r
           
             all
             of
             them
             holy
             men
             of
             God
             ,
             moved
             by
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             .
          
           These
           being
           the
           Penmen
           ,
           how
           incomparable
           and
           extraordinary
           must
           their
           writings
           needs
           be
           ;
           who
           would
           not
           study
           them
           ,
           and
           earnestly
           pry
           into
           them
           ?
        
         
           3.
           
           
             The
             matter
             of
             the
             Scripture
             is
             most
             invi●ing
             ,
          
           able
           to
           allure
           the
           hearts
           of
           men
           and
           Angels
           
             to
             the
             study
             of
             them
          
           ,
           yea
           to
           transport
           and
           ravish
           their
           spirits
           
             in
             the
             understanding
             
             of
             them
             .
          
           Herein
           are
           revealed
           most
           profound
           and
           inexplicable
           mysteries
           .
           
             The
             nature
             of
             the
             blessed
             God
             ,
             Simple
             ,
          
           without
           composition
           ;
           s
           Al-sufficient
           ,
           without
           any
           externall
           addition
           ,
           t
           immutable
           ,
           without
           all
           shadow
           of
           alteration
           ;
           u
           Eternall
           ,
           x
           
             Immense
             ,
             Incomprehensible
          
           ,
           y
           Omnipresent
           ,
           and
           wholly
           z
           Infinite
           ,
           without
           all
           limitation
           ,
           &c.
           
           The
           a
           
             Vnity
             of
             essence
          
           ;
           The
           b
           
             Trinity
             of
             Persons
          
           ;
           The
           father
           not
           being
           the
           Son
           ,
           nor
           either
           of
           them
           the
           Holy
           Ghost
           ;
           yet
           all
           of
           them
           the
           Holy
           God.
           
             The
             Secrets
             of
             Gods
             eternall
             counsels
             ,
          
           especially
           touching
           the
           c
           electing
           of
           his
           owne
           in
           Christ
           ,
           
             predestinating
             them
             to
             the
             adoption
             of
             children
             ,
          
           when
           all
           others
           are
           passed
           by
           .
           The
           curious
           Order
           of
           the
           Creation
           ,
           to
           bring
           his
           purposes
           to
           passe
           .
           The
           Permission
           of
           mans
           fall
           from
           the
           Pinacle
           of
           his
           naturall
           integrity
           ,
           that
           thereby
           he
           might
           take
           occasion
           to
           glorify
           the
           height
           of
           justice
           and
           mercy
           in
           raising
           him
           up
           by
           Christ
           to
           a
           farre
           higher
           pitch
           of
           supernaturall
           felicity
           .
           
             The
             Person
             and
             office
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             the
             Mediatour
             ,
          
           and
           both
           altogether
           d
           wonderfull
           ,
           e
           God
           and
           man
           united
           in
           one
           person
           ,
           to
           unite
           God
           and
           man
           in
           one
           Covenant
           ;
           The
           Son
           of
           God
           became
           the
           Son
           of
           man
           ,
           to
           make
           the
           sons
           of
           men
           sons
           of
           God
           ;
           
             A
             King
          
           to
           subdue
           all
           our
           enemies
           to
           us
           ,
           and
           us
           to
           himselfe
           .
           
             A
             Prophet
          
           ,
           to
           unveyle
           the
           bosome
           secrets
           of
           his
           father
           unto
           us
           .
           
             A
             Priest
          
           ,
           offering
           up
           himselfe
           
           upon
           himselfe
           ,
           by
           himselfe
           ;
           
             offering
             up
             himselfe
          
           the
           sacrifice
           ,
           as
           man
           ;
           
             upon
             himselfe
          
           ,
           the
           Alta●
           ,
           as
           God
           ;
           
             by
             himselfe
          
           ,
           the
           Priest
           ,
           as
           God-man
           .
           Christ
           was
           humbled
           ,
           and
           thereby
           we
           exalted
           ;
           Christ
           wounded
           ,
           we
           healed
           ,
           Christ
           accused
           ,
           we
           cleared
           ;
           Christ
           condemned
           ,
           we
           justified
           and
           acquitted
           ;
           Christ
           accursed
           ,
           we
           blessed
           ;
           Christ
           slaine
           ,
           and
           we
           live
           ;
           and
           Christ
           conquered
           ,
           that
           so
           we
           might
           
             be
             more
             then
             Conquerours
             through
             Christ
             that
             loves
             us
             .
          
           What
           shall
           I
           say
           ?
           In
           Scripture
           is
           revealed
           ,
           how
           enemies
           are
           
             reconciled
             ,
             Sinners
             justified
             ,
             Aliens
             adopted
             ,
             Beggars
          
           made
           Heirs
           and
           co-heirs
           with
           Christ
           ,
           and
           how
           
             dust
             and
             ashes
          
           shall
           be
           glorified
           for
           evermore
           .
        
         
           
             Here
             are
             unfolded
             the
          
           f
           
             Covenant
             of
             grace
          
           ,
           wholly
           made
           up
           of
           heavenly
           cordials
           .
           The
           g
           
             Promises
             of
             the
             life
             that
             now
             is
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             is
             to
             ●ome
             ,
          
           h
           
             exceeding
             great
             and
             previous
          
           .
           The
           i
           comforts
           of
           God
           able
           to
           counterpoise
           the
           deepest
           disconsolations
           ▪
           and
           k
           Commands
           surpassing
           all
           the
           lawes
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           
             in
             holinesse
             ,
             Iustice
             and
             goodnesse
             .
          
        
         
           
             Here
             are
             discovered
          
           ,
           The
           miseries
           of
           all
           that
           a●e
           in
           the
           
             first
             Adam
          
           ,
           the
           felicities
           of
           all
           that
           are
           in
           the
           
             second
             Adam
          
           ,
           and
           the
           way
           how
           poore
           soules
           are
           translated
           from
           those
           miseries
           to
           these
           felicities
           .
        
         
           Here
           you
           shall
           find
           God
           descending
           to
           man
           ,
           
             In
             preparing
          
           all
           Spirituall
           priviledges
           
           for
           sinners
           in
           Jesus
           Christ
           our
           Saviour
           ,
           
             In
             tendering
          
           richest
           Grace
           by
           Covenant-Promises
           and
           Ordinances
           ,
           and
           
             In
             applying
          
           these
           preparations
           and
           tenders
           actually
           to
           the
           Soule
           by
           the
           Spirit
           :
           2
           Man
           ascending
           unto
           God
           ,
           by
           the
           Spiritualizing
           of
           his
           Nature
           ,
           Acting
           of
           his
           Faith
           ,
           Aspiring
           of
           his
           desires
           ,
           Fervency
           of
           his
           prayers
           ,
           and
           
             Holy
             tendency
          
           of
           his
           Conversation
           :
           Yea
           both
           God
           and
           man
           sweetly
           closing
           together
           in
           a
           most
           intimate
           
             Communion
             in
             Iesus
             Christ
          
           ,
           which
           is
           as
           another
           Paradise
           ,
           and
           
             Heaven
             on
             earth
          
           .
        
         
           
             In
             a
             word
             ,
             what
             is
             there
             not
             in
             Holy
             Scriptures
             ?
          
           Are
           we
           poore
           ?
           Here
           's
           a
           Treasury
           of
           riches
           .
           Are
           we
           sick
           ?
           Here
           's
           a
           Shop
           of
           l
           Soule
           Medicines
           .
           Are
           we
           fainting
           ?
           Here
           's
           a
           Cabinet
           of
           Cordials
           .
           Are
           we
           Christlesse
           ?
           Here
           's
           the
           star
           that
           leads
           to
           Christ.
           Are
           we
           Christians
           ?
           Here
           's
           the
           bands
           that
           keep
           in
           Christ.
           Are
           we
           afflicted
           ?
           Here
           's
           our
           Solace
           .
           Are
           we
           persecuted
           ?
           Here
           's
           our
           protection
           .
           Are
           we
           deserted
           ?
           Here
           's
           our
           recovery
           Are
           we
           tempted
           ?
           Here
           's
           m
           our
           sword
           and
           Victory
           .
           Are
           we
           young
           ?
           Here
           's
           our
           beauty
           .
           Are
           we
           Old
           ?
           Here
           's
           our
           wisdome
           .
           While
           we
           live
           ,
           here
           's
           the
           Rule
           of
           our
           conversation
           ;
           when
           we
           dye
           ,
           here
           's
           the
           hope
           of
           our
           Glorification
           .
           So
           that
           I
           may
           (
           with
           
           n
           
             Tertullian
             ,
             I
             Adore
             the
             fulnesse
             of
             the
             Scripture
             .
          
           Oh
           blessed
           Scriptures
           !
           who
           can
           know
           them
           ,
           and
           not
           love
           them
           ?
           Who
           can
           love
           them
           ,
           and
           not
           delight
           to
           meditate
           in
           them
           night
           and
           day
           ?
           Who
           can
           meditate
           in
           them
           and
           not
           desire
           to
           love
           them
           ,
           love
           to
           desire
           them
           ,
           and
           both
           desire
           and
           love
           to
           understand
           them
           ?
           This
           is
           the
           
             Book
             of
             Books
          
           ;
           (
           as
           David
           said
           of
           Goliath's
           Sword
           
             there
             's
             none
             like
             that
          
           .
           Said
           one
           ,
           
             
               Ex
               aliis
               paleae
               viles
               ,
               hinc
               grana
               leguntur
            
             
               Aurea
               :
               tu
               paleas
               linquito
               ,
               grana
               lege
               .
            
          
        
         
           I
           may
           Engish
           it
           ,
           
             
               Other
               writings
               chaffe
               unfold
               ,
            
             
               Scriptures
               yeeld
               the
               purest
               gold
               .
            
             
               Others
               dote
               on
               chasty
               games
               ,
            
             
               Gather
               thou
               these
               golden
               Graines
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             Take
             away
             our
             Papers
          
           (
           said
           p
           Augustine
           )
           
             and
             bring
             amongst
             us
             the
             Book
             of
             God
             ;
             he●re
             Christ
             saying
             ,
             heare
             Truth
             speaking
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           I
           may
           close
           up
           this
           Paragraph
           with
           his
           words
           ,
           who
           thus
           emphatically
           expresseth
           himselfe
           ,
           *
           
             The
             Sacred
             Scripture
             is
             the
             Book
             
             of
             life
             ,
             whose
             Original
             is
             eternall
             ,
             whose
             essence
             is
             incorporeall
             ,
             whose
             knowledge
             is
             life
             ,
             whose
             writing
             is
             indelible
             ,
             whose
             inspect
             is
             desireable
             ,
             whose
             Doctrine
             is
             easie
             ,
             whose
             knowledge
             is
             sweet
             ,
             whose
             depth
             is
             unsearchable
             ,
             whose
             words
             are
             innumerable
             ;
             and
             onely
             one
             word
             ,
             All.
             
          
        
         
           4.
           
           
             The
             forme
             of
             the
             Scripture
          
           ,
           both
           Inward
           and
           Outward
           ,
           if
           well
           considered
           ,
           commands
           all
           possible
           endeavours
           and
           industry
           for
           the
           understanding
           thereof
           .
        
         
           1.
           
           
             The
             Inward
             forme
          
           ,
           is
           ,
           
             That
             accurate
             conformity
             of
             the
             things
             laid
             down
             in
             Scripture
             to
             that
             infallible
             and
             eternall
             truth
             of
             Gods
             own
             understanding
             that
             indited
             and
             revealed
             them
             .
          
           Writings
           compiled
           by
           men
           carry
           in
           them
           a
           conformity
           to
           the
           idea
           in
           their
           understanding
           ,
           which
           being
           subject
           to
           ignorance
           ,
           errour
           and
           corruption
           ,
           through
           the
           imperfection
           that
           is
           in
           them
           ,
           must
           needs
           produce
           writing●
           semblably
           imperfect
           ,
           ignorant
           ,
           erroneous
           and
           corrupt
           :
           But
           no
           such
           thing
           can
           be
           incident
           unto
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           which
           are
           conforme
           to
           the
           Divine
           understanding
           of
           q
           
             the
             only
             wise
             God
          
           ,
           which
           is
           r
           infinite
           ,
           s
           unsearchable
           ,
           and
           wholly
           admirable
           which
           is
           all
           t
           
             Light
             without
             any
             darknesse
             at
             all
          
           ;
           all
           u
           Truth
           ,
           without
           the
           least
           errour
           ;
           
           All
           perfect
           ,
           without
           any
           shadow
           of
           imperfection
           ;
           all
           pure
           ,
           without
           any
           colour
           of
           Corruption
           .
           So
           that
           the
           Scriptures
           of
           themselves
           cannot
           lead
           us
           unto
           errour
           ,
           but
           the
           more
           we
           truly
           understand
           them
           ,
           the
           more
           our
           minds
           shall
           be
           enriched
           with
           truth
           ,
           and
           elevated
           to
           a
           conformity
           to
           the
           supream
           truth
           of
           God.
           
        
         
           2.
           
           
             The
             Outward
             forme
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
          
           o●
           manner
           how
           things
           are
           therein
           revealed
           ,
           is
           not
           onely
           plaine
           and
           easie
           ,
           nor
           only
           darke
           or
           difficult
           ,
           but
           rather
           x
           mixt
           of
           both
           ;
           some
           things
           being
           facile
           ,
           y
           
             some
             things
             being
             hard
             to
             be
             understood
          
           ;
           some
           places
           are
           such
           
             shallowes
             ,
             wherein
             lambs
             need
             not
             be
             afraid
             to
             made
             ,
             some
             againe
             such
             deeps
             as
             Elephants
             may
             be
             enforced
             to
             swim
             .
          
           z
           By
           plainnesse
           God
           nourishes
           the
           weakest
           ,
           by
           obscurenesse
           he
           exercises
           the
           accutest
           ,
           (
           As
           Augustine
           hath
           intimated
           )
           .
           That
           facility
           occasion
           not
           our
           contempt
           of
           Scriptures
           ,
           there
           are
           interwoven
           some
           difficulties
           ;
           that
           difficulties
           deterre
           not
           from
           the
           study
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           there
           are
           intermingled
           some
           facilities
           .
           For
           as
           
           a
           Augustine
           notes
           ,
           
             If
             all
             were
             shut
             up
             ,
             how
             should
             obscure
             things
             be
             revealed
             ?
             If
             all
             things
             were
             hid
             ,
             whence
             should
             the
             soule
             have
             ability
             to
             knock
             for
             the
             opening
             of
             things
             shut
             up
             ?
          
           Is
           therefore
           our
           Capacity
           weaker
           ?
           Here
           's
           reliefe
           for
           our
           infirmity
           :
           Is
           our
           apprehension
           deeper
           ?
           Here
           's
           worke
           enough
           for
           the
           sharpest
           perspicacity
           .
           So
           that
           the
           most
           ignorant
           need
           not
           be
           afraid
           ,
           the
           most
           intelligent
           need
           not
           be
           ashamed
           ,
           of
           endeavours
           after
           
             Scripture
             understanding
          
           .
        
         
           5.
           
           
             The
             End
             is
             manifold
             and
             excellent
             ,
          
           for
           which
           God
           committed
           his
           word
           to
           writing
           ,
           and
           that
           writing
           to
           us
           .
           viz.
           b
           
             For
             Doctrine
          
           ,
           that
           Faith
           and
           Truth
           may
           be
           asserted
           ;
           
             For
             Reproofe
             or
             conviction
          
           ,
           that
           errour
           may
           be
           confuted
           :
           As
           Athanasius
           said
           ,
           
             Hereticks
             are
             to
             be
             stoned
             with
             Scripture
          
           c
           
             Arguments
             ;
             For
             correction
          
           of
           manners
           enormous
           or
           offensive
           ;
           
             For
             instruction
             in
             the
          
           paths
           of
           righteousnesse
           ;
           and
           for
           d
           consolation
           that
           drooping
           dejected
           distressed
           spirits
           may
           not
           be
           overwhelmed
           .
           Now
           then
           if
           we
           study
           not
           to
           understand
           Scriptures
           ,
           How
           in
           Doctrinals
           ,
           They
           ●
           Assert
           the
           Truth
           ,
           2
           Confute
           errour
           ;
           How
           in
           Practicals
           ,
           They
           1
           Direct
           in
           wel-doing
           ,
           2
           Correct
           for
           ill-doing
           ;
           
           we
           frustrate
           the
           chief
           ends
           and
           scope
           why
           the
           Scriptures
           were
           imparted
           unto
           us
           .
        
         
           6.
           
           How
           acceptable
           is
           our
           study
           and
           understanding
           of
           the
           Scripture
           unto
           God!
           For
           ,
        
         
           1.
           
           
             He
             commands
          
           us
           this
           way
           to
           bestow
           our selves
           e
           
             Search
             the
             Scriptures
          
           .
           f
           
             Let
             the
             word
             of
             Christ
             indwell
             in
             you
             richly
             in
             all
             wisdome
             .
          
           Not
           be
           ,
           but
           dwell
           with
           you
           :
           not
           
             dwell
             with
             you
          
           ,
           but
           
             dwell
             in
             you
          
           ,
           yea
           
             indwell
             in
             you
          
           ,
           Greek
           :
           Not
           
             dwell
             in
             you
          
           ,
           but
           
             dwell
             in
             you
             richly
          
           :
           nor
           only
           
             dwell
             in
             you
             richly
          
           ,
           but
           
             in
             all
             wisdome
          
           .
        
         
           2.
           
           
             He
             Commends
          
           them
           that
           have
           industriously
           acquainted
           themselves
           with
           the
           Scripture
           .
           g
           Timothy
           ,
           that
           
             from
             a
             child
             he
             had
             known
             the
             Holy
             Scripture
             ,
             able
             to
             make
             him
             wise
             unto
             Salvation
             .
          
           h
           Apollos
           ,
           That
           
             he
             was
             an
             eloquent
             man
             ,
             and
             mighty
             in
             the
             Scriptures
             .
          
           The
           i
           
             Bereans
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             more
             noble
             then
             those
             of
          
           Thessalonica
           ,
           
             in
             that
             they
             received
             the
             word
             with
             all
             readinesse
             of
             mind
             ,
             and
             searched
             the
             Scriptures
             dayly
             ,
             whether
             those
             things
             were
             so
             .
          
           And
           he
           makes
           it
           one
           Character
           of
           the
           godly
           blessed
           man
           k
           that
           
             His
             delight
             is
             in
             the
             Law
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             and
             therein
             he
             meditates
             day
             and
             night
             .
          
        
         
           3.
           
           
             He
             condemns
          
           the
           contrary
           unskilfulnesse
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           as
           the
           l
           
             infirmity
             of
             Babes
          
           .
           Yea
           as
           the
           root
           of
           all
           errour
           in
           spirituals
           ;
           m
           
             do
             ye
             not
             erre
             because
             yee
             know
             not
             the
             Scriptures
             ?
          
        
         
           Appositely
           saith
           Chrysostome
           to
           this
           purpose
           ;
           n
           
             Ignorance
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             hath
             
             brought
             forth
             Heresies
             ,
             hath
             brought
             in
             corruption
             of
             life
             ,
             hath
             turned
             all
             things
             upside
             down
             .
             —
             Ignorance
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             is
             a
             very
             Hell.
          
           And
           elsewhere
           he
           saith
           ,
           o
           
             It
             is
             the
             cause
             of
             all
             evils
             to
             be
             ignorant
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             .
          
           p
           Hierom
           also
           to
           like
           purpose
           ;
           
             He
             that
             knowes
             not
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             knowes
             not
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             his
             wisdome
             .
             The
             ignorance
             of
             Scriptures
             is
             the
             ignorance
             of
             Christ.
             
          
        
         
           4.
           
           In
           a
           word
           ,
           
             He
             promises
          
           happinesse
           to
           the
           right
           understanding
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           .
           q
           
             If
             yee
             know
             these
             things
             ,
             happy
             are
             yee
             ,
             if
             ye
             do
             them
             .
          
           And
           sometimes
           notably
           rewards
           them
           that
           endeavour
           to
           understand
           them
           .
           While
           the
           r
           
             Ethiopian
             Eunuch
          
           read
           the
           
             Prophet
             Isaiah
          
           ,
           that
           he
           might
           understand
           it
           ▪
           the
           Lord
           sent
           Philip
           to
           
             instruct
             him
             &
          
           to
           
             convert
             him
          
           ;
           The
           
             Eunuch
             was
             Baptized
          
           ,
           and
           
             went
             on
             his
             way
             rejoycing
          
           .
        
         
           7.
           
           Finally
           ,
           
             The
             true
             and
             solid
             understanding
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             is
             the
             foundation
             of
             all
             possible
             benefit
             or
             advantage
             by
             the
             Scripture
             .
          
           For
           how
           should
           we
           forsake
           sin
           ,
           s
           
             deny
             ungodlinesse
             and
             worldly
             lusts
          
           ,
           and
           labour
           to
           get
           out
           of
           our
           carnall
           condition
           ,
           till
           by
           Scripture
           we
           be
           convinced
           of
           the
           sinfulnesse
           of
           sinne
           ,
           and
           danger
           of
           our
           naturall
           condition
           ?
           How
           should
           we
           desire
           Christ
           earnestly
           ,
           or
           accept
           Christ
           delightfully
           ,
           till
           we
           understand
           by
           
           the
           Scripture
           what
           want
           we
           have
           of
           Christ
           what
           worth
           there
           is
           in
           Christ
           ?
           Till
           we
           understand
           Scripture
           -
           Principles
           ,
           how
           shall
           we
           receive
           them
           ?
           Till
           we
           understand
           Scripture-Promises
           ,
           how
           shall
           we
           believe
           them
           ?
           Till
           we
           understand
           Scripture-commands
           ,
           how
           shall
           we
           obey
           them
           ?
           Till
           we
           understand
           Scripture-directions
           ,
           how
           should
           we
           follow
           them
           ?
           And
           till
           we
           understand
           Scripture-comforts
           ,
           what
           supporting
           sweetnesse
           can
           we
           expect
           from
           them
           ?
           O
           therfore
           labour
           diligently
           to
           understand
           the
           Counsels
           of
           God
           ,
           then
           you
           will
           be
           in
           more
           immediate
           capacity
           of
           reaping
           all
           spirituall
           benefits
           by
           the
           word
           of
           God
           ,
           t
           
             The
             understanding
             of
             the
             Scriptures
          
           ▪
           (
           saith
           Hierome
           )
           
             is
             the
             true
             meate
             and
             drink
             which
             we
             have
             from
             the
             word
             of
             God.
          
           Therefore
           (
           as
           he
           saith
           elsewhere
           )
           u
           
             Let
             's
             fetch
             fit
             timber
             out
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             to
             build
             in
             our selves
             an
             house
             of
             wisdome
             .
          
        
         
           Hitherto
           of
           the
           
             worth
             of
             Scripture-knowledge
          
           ;
           
           Now
           of
           the
           
             way
             how
             to
             attaine
             it
          
           .
           That
           Holy
           Scriptures
           may
           be
           more
           profitably
           and
           cleerly
           understood
           ,
           certaine
           Rules
           or
           Directions
           are
           to
           be
           observed
           and
           followed
           .
           These
           Directions
           might
           be
           digested
           into
           two
           Ranks
           ,
           viz.
           
        
         
           I.
           Some
           
             more
             speciall
             and
             peculiar
          
           ,
           more
           
           particularly
           concerning
           Schollers
           ,
           As
           ,
           1
           The
           competent
           understanding
           of
           the
           Originall
           languages
           ,
           
             Hebrew
             ,
             Caldee
             ,
             and
             Greek
          
           ;
           wherein
           the
           Scriptures
           were
           written
           .
           2
           The
           prudent
           use
           of
           Logick
           ,
           for
           orderly
           and
           methodicall
           Resolution
           of
           the
           Text
           ,
           &c.
           3.
           
           The
           subservient
           helps
           of
           other
           Arts
           ,
           as
           
             Rhetorick
             ,
             Naturall
             Philosophy
          
           ,
           &c.
           
           Without
           which
           it
           is
           impossible
           satisfactorily
           to
           interpret
           the
           Scriptures
           .
           For
           as
           x
           Ambrose
           well
           observes
           ,
           
             Though
             Penmen
             of
             Scripture
             wrote
             not
             according
             to
             Art
             ,
             but
             according
             to
             Grace
             ,
             which
             is
             above
             all
             Art
             (
             for
             they
             wrote
             what
             the
             spirit
             did
             Dictate
             to
             them
             ;
             )
             yet
             they
             that
             have
             written
             of
             Art
             ,
             have
             found
             an
             Art
             in
             their
             writings
             ,
          
           &c.
           
           4
           The
           benefit
           of
           humane
           Histories
           to
           illustrate
           and
           cleere
           the
           divine
           .
           5
           The
           conferring
           of
           ancient
           translations
           with
           the
           Originals
           ,
           especially
           the
           Greek
           version
           of
           the
           Old-Testament
           by
           the
           Lxxii
           .
           much
           followed
           in
           the
           Allegations
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           ,
           and
           the
           Syriack
           version
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           .
           6
           The
           prudent
           use
           of
           the
           most
           Orthodox
           learned
           and
           judicious
           Commentators
           .
           7.
           
           Constant
           caution
           ,
           that
           all
           Tongues
           ,
           Arts
           ,
           Histories
           ,
           Translations
           ,
           and
           Comments
           be
           duly
           ranked
           in
           their
           proper
           places
           in
           a
           subserviency
           under
           ,
           not
           a
           Regency
           or
           Predominancy
           over
           the
           Holy
           Scriptures
           ,
           which
           are
           to
           controule
           them
           all
           .
           
           For
           when
           Hagar
           shall
           once
           usurp
           over
           her
           Mistresse
           ,
           its
           high
           time
           to
           cast
           her
           out
           of
           doors
           ,
           till
           shee
           submit
           herselfe
           .
           Many
           such
           things
           ought
           be
           insisted
           upon
           ,
           but
           that
           is
           besides
           my
           present
           intention
           .
        
         
           II.
           
             Some
             more
             generall
             and
             common
             directions
             ,
          
           which
           may
           be
           of
           use
           to
           all
           sorts
           of
           Christians
           ,
           learned
           or
           unlearned
           :
           especially
           unto
           the
           people
           ,
           for
           promoting
           whose
           understanding
           in
           this
           blessed
           
             Book
             of
             God
          
           ,
           these
           ensuing
           Rules
           ,
           faithfully
           followed
           ,
           may
           (
           through
           divine
           blessing
           )
           prove
           abundantly
           advantagious
           .
           viz.
           
        
         
           
             I.
             Rule
             .
          
           
             Beg
             y
             
               wisedome
               of
               the
               only
               wise
               God
               ,
               who
               gives
               liberally
               and
               upbraids
               not
               .
            
             That
             by
             Gods
             wisedome
             you
             may
             know
             Gods
             minde
             ;
             by
             the
             assistance
             of
             that
             spirit
             which
             indited
             the
             Scripture
             ;
             you
             may
             discerne
             the
             true
             sense
             and
             meaning
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             .
             For
             what
             the
             woman
             said
             of
             
               Iacobs
               well
            
             ,
             may
             much
             more
             be
             affirmed
             of
             these
             wels
             of
             salvation
             ,
             z
             
               Thou
               hast
               nothing
               to
               draw
               with
               ,
               and
               the
               well
               is
               deep
               .
            
             Scripture
             mysteries
             are
             profound
             ,
             Our
             capacities
             very
             shallow
             ;
             when
             we
             know
             most
             ,
             a
             
               we
               know
               but
               in
               part
            
             ;
             therefore
             pray
             with
             Hierome
             ,
             b
             
               I
               
               desire
               to
               enter
               into
               thy
               house
               the
               Church
               ,
               by
               thy
               way
               the
               Scriptures
               ;
               O
               direct
               my
               way
               ,
               lest
               I
               fall
               in
               thy
               Scriptures
               by
               which
               I
               desire
               to
               enter
               .
            
             Intreat
             the
             Lord
             
               to
               anoint
               thine
               eyes
               with
               eye-salve
               ,
            
             c
             
               that
               thou
               mayst
               see
               ;
               to
            
             d
             
               open
               thine
               understanding
            
             ,
             as
             sometimes
             he
             did
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             
               to
               understand
               the
               Scriptures
            
             .
             When
             thou
             settest
             thy selfe
             to
             peruse
             the
             Scripture
             from
             day
             to
             day
             ,
             forget
             not
             to
             dart
             up
             Davids
             sweet
             petition
             unto
             God
             ,
             e
             
               Open
               thou
               mine
               eyes
               ,
               that
               I
               may
               behold
               wondrous
               things
               out
               of
               thy
               law
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             II.
             Rule
             .
          
           
             
               Labour
               sincerely
               after
               a
               truly
               gracious
               spirit
               ,
               then
               thou
               shalt
               be
               peculiarly
               able
               to
               penetrate
               into
               the
               inward
               marrow
               and
               mysteries
               of
               the
               Holy
               Scriptures
               .
            
             He
             will
             best
             comprehend
             Scripture
             meaning
             in
             his
             head
             ,
             that
             hath
             got
             the
             Scripture
             law
             written
             in
             his
             heart
             ;
             f
             
               Thou
               wilt
               never
            
             (
             saith
             Bernard
             )
             understand
             Pauls
             
               meaning
               ,
               unlesse
               thou
               drinkest
               of
            
             Pauls
             spirit
             .
             Gracious
             persons
             are
             g
             
               illuminated
               persons
            
             ;
             h
             
               they
               have
               the
               anointing
               that
               teacheth
               them
               all
               things
               ,
            
             viz.
             necessary
             to
             salvation
             .
             The
             Lord
             delights
             to
             impart
             his
             secrets
             to
             them
             that
             feare
             him
             .
             i
             
               What
               man
               is
               he
               that
               feareth
               the
               Lord
               ?
               him
               shall
               he
               teach
               in
               the
               way
               that
               he
               shall
               chuse
               .
               —
               The
               Secret
               of
               the
               Lord
               is
               with
               them
               that
               feare
               him
               ,
               and
               he
               will
               shew
               them
               his
               Covenant
               ,
            
             
             Christ
             hath
             promised
             peculiarly
             to
             k
             
               maniest
               himselfe
               to
               them
               that
               love
               him
               ,
               so
               as
               not
               unto
               the
               world
            
             ;
             and
             where
             Christ
             is
             so
             manifested
             ,
             the
             sense
             of
             Scripture
             is
             singularly
             
               manifested
               ;
               for
               Christ
               is
               the
               Kernell
               of
               the
               Scripture
               .
            
             The
             gracelesse
             man
             though
             by
             light
             of
             nature
             ,
             and
             accomplishments
             of
             Art
             ,
             he
             may
             know
             much
             of
             Scripture
             theoretically
             and
             speculatively
             ,
             yet
             
               his
               light
               is
               but
               darknesse
            
             ,
             he
             reaches
             not
             to
             the
             life
             of
             understanding
             ;
             knowes
             Gods
             minde
             in
             Scripture
             ,
             only
             as
             we
             know
             far
             Countreys
             by
             Maps
             :
             But
             the
             gracious
             person
             understands
             the
             Scriptures
             experimentally
             ,
             feelingly
             ,
             as
             a
             Traveller
             knows
             remote
             countries
             in
             which
             he
             hath
             actually
             been
             .
             l
             
               The
               naturall
               man
               receiveth
               not
               the
               things
               of
               the
               spirit
               of
               God
               ,
               for
               they
               are
               foolishnesse
               unto
               him
               :
               neither
               can
               he
               know
               them
               ,
               because
               they
               are
               spiritually
               discerned
               .
               But
               he
               that
               is
               spirituall
               judgeth
               all
               things
               ,
               —
               we
               have
               the
               minde
               of
               Christ.
               
            
          
        
         
           
             III.
             Rule
             .
          
           
             
               Peruse
               the
               Scripture
               still
               with
               an
               humble
               selfe-denying
               heart
               .
            
             Be
             not
             puffed
             up
             ,
             or
             conceited
             with
             thine
             own
             knowledge
             ,
             or
             other
             perfections
             ;
             m
             
               He
               that
               thinks
               he
               knows
               any
               thing
               ,
               knows
               nothing
               yet
               as
               he
               ought
               to
               know
               .
            
             Empty
             vessels
             are
             most
             receptive
             ;
             so
             are
             selfe-emptying
             mindes
             ,
             
             It
             is
             a
             great
             help
             to
             knowledge
             n
             
               not
               to
               be
               ignorant
               of
               our
               ignorance
            
             ;
             for
             ●ense
             of
             want
             spurs
             on
             indeavours
             after
             enjoyment
             .
             The
             fructifying
             showers
             quickly
             glide
             away
             from
             the
             
               lofty
               hils
            
             ,
             but
             they
             stay
             and
             soake
             into
             the
             
               low
               valleys
            
             .
             God
             that
             o
             
               resists
               the
               proud
               ,
               yet
               gives
               grace
               to
               the
               humble
               and
               lowly
            
             ;
             And
             among
             other
             graces
             the
             grace
             of
             knowledge
             and
             understanding
             :
             For
             p
             
               with
               the
               lowly
               is
               wisedome
            
             .
             q
             
               The
               meek
            
             (
             or
             humble
             )
             
               will
               he
               guide
               in
               judgement
               ;
               and
               the
               meek
               will
               he
               teach
               his
               way
               .
            
             Thus
             Christ
             saith
             ,
             r
             
               I
               thanke
               thee
               O
               Father
               ,
               Lord
               of
               heaven
               and
               earth
               ,
               because
               thou
               hast
               hid
               these
               things
               from
               the
               wise
               and
               prudent
               ,
               but
               hast
               revealed
               them
               unto
               Babes
            
             ?
             whence
             Becanus
             s
             notes
             ,
             that
             
               such
               as
               are
               proud
               and
               attribute
               to
               their
               own
               wisedome
               ,
               attaine
               not
               to
               the
               true
               sense
               of
               Scripture
               .
            
             Be
             therefore
             
               clothed
               with
               humility
            
             in
             use
             of
             Scripture
             ,
             that
             true
             Scripture-knowledge
             may
             increase
             .
          
        
         
           
             IV.
             Rule
             .
          
           
             
               Familiarize
               the
               Scripture
               to
               thy selfe
               ,
               by
               constant
               and
               methodicall
               exercise
               therein
               .
            
             Method
             and
             order
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             
               the
               mother
               of
               memory
            
             ,
             so
             it
             is
             a
             singular
             
               friend
               to
               a
               clear
               understanding
            
             .
             The
             generality
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             have
             such
             a
             contexture
             and
             coherence
             one
             part
             with
             another
             ,
             that
             small
             insight
             into
             it
             will
             be
             gained
             ,
             by
             reading
             it
             confusedly
             ,
             
             disorderly
             ;
             therefore
             read
             the
             whole
             in
             Order
             .
             Divers
             have
             published
             Directions
             ,
             how
             to
             read
             over
             the
             whole
             Scripture
             methodica●ly
             ,
             once
             a
             yeare
             ,
             &c.
             consult
             them
             .
          
           
             But
             be
             constant
             in
             perusall
             and
             studying
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             ;
             hereby
             Scripture
             phrase
             and
             sense
             will
             become
             familiar
             and
             facile
             .
             How
             hard
             at
             first
             to
             write
             ,
             to
             play
             on
             an
             instrument
             ▪
             &c.
             but
             by
             multiplying
             Acts
             ,
             men
             get
             habits
             and
             write
             ,
             play
             ,
             &c.
             with
             facility
             and
             dexterity
             .
             Use
             not
             Scripture
             only
             by
             fits
             and
             starts
             ,
             in
             some
             good
             pangs
             or
             moods
             ,
             &c.
             but
             habitually
             converse
             with
             Scripture
             ,
             trade
             in
             them
             ,
             t
             
               meditate
               therein
               night
               and
               day
            
             ;
             u
             
               Let
               the
               word
               of
               Christ
            
             ,
             (
             not
             only
             lodge
             or
             sojourne
             in
             you
             ,
             but
             even
             )
             
               dwell
               in
               you
            
             .
             Hence
             those
             commands
             of
             God
             to
             his
             people
             of
             old
             .
             x
             
               This
               Book
               of
               the
               Law
               shall
               not
               depart
               out
               of
               thy
               mouth
               ,
               but
               thou
               shalt
               meditate
               therein
               day
               and
               night
               .
            
             —
             y
             
               These
               words
               shall
               be
               in
               thine
               heart
               ,
               and
               thou
               shalt
               whet
               them
               diligently
               upon
               thy
               children
               ,
               and
               shalt
               talke
               of
               them
               ,
               when
               thou
               sittest
               in
               thine
               house
               ,
               and
               when
               thou
               walkest
               by
               the
               way
               ,
               and
               when
               thou
               lyest
               down
               ,
               and
               when
               thou
               risest
               up
               .
               And
               thou
               shalt
               bind
               them
               for
               a
               signe
               upon
               thine
               hand
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
        
         
           
             V.
             Rule
          
           
             
               Vnderstand
               Scripture
               according
               to
               the
               
               Theologicall
            
             z
             Analogy
             ,
             or
             
               Certaine
               rule
               of
               faith
               and
               love
               .
               Anomaly
               ,
            
             i.
             e.
             Irregularity
             ,
             is
             some
             deviation
             from
             the
             rule
             ,
             or
             exception
             against
             the
             rule
             ;
             To
             this
             here
             Analogy
             is
             opposed
             .
             By
             this
             Analogy
             ,
             understand
             ,
             
               A
               certaine
               Epitome
               of
               Scriptures
               ,
               or
               briefe
               Abridgement
               of
               Christian
               Religion
               ,
               collected
               out
               of
               the
               plaine
               places
               of
               Scripture
               ,
            
             according
             to
             which
             other
             darke
             and
             figurative
             expressions
             in
             Scripture
             are
             to
             be
             explained
             .
             
               This
               Analogy
               of
               faith
               and
               love
               ,
               Paul
            
             charges
             Timothy
             to
             hold
             fast
             ,
             a
             saying
             ,
             
               Hold
               fast
            
             [
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ]
             i.
             e.
             That
             [
             
               Delineation
               ,
               Draught
               ,
               Platforme
               ,
               Patterne
               ,
            
             or
             ,
             ]
             
               forme
               of
               sound
               words
               ,
               which
               thou
               hast
               heard
               of
               me
               in
               faith
               and
               love
               ,
               which
               is
               in
               Christ
               Iesus
               .
            
             Where
             seems
             to
             be
             intimated
             ,
             
               a
               Systeme
               ,
               or
               forme
               of
               doctrine
               ,
            
             communicated
             from
             Paul
             to
             Timothy
             ,
             according
             to
             which
             Timothy
             was
             to
             steer
             as
             by
             a
             Compasse
             .
             This
             forme
             of
             doctrine
             is
             described
             here
             1
             ▪
             By
             the
             generall
             nature
             of
             it
             .
             
               A
               forme
               of
               sound
               words
            
             ,
             A
             draught
             or
             model
             of
             wholesome
             doctrine
             .
             2.
             
             By
             the
             principall
             parts
             of
             it
             ,
             into
             which
             it
             is
             branched
             ▪
             viz.
             1
             Faith
             ,
             2
             Love.
             Faith
             ,
             compriseth
             credenda
             ,
             All
             things
             to
             be
             believed
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Creed
             taken
             out
             of
             Scripture
             .
             Love
             containes
             facienda
             ,
             All
             things
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Decalogue
             ,
             
               Lords
               prayer
            
             and
             Sacramental
             Institutions
             ,
             which
             are
             Scripture
             ;
             into
             these
             two
             ,
             the
             whole
             
               Body
               of
               divinity
            
             is
             usually
             
             distributed
             .
             3.
             
             By
             the
             primary
             foundation
             upon
             which
             this
             forme
             of
             sound
             words
             is
             built
             ,
             
               viz.
               Christ
               Iesus
            
             ;
             compare
             herewith
             ,
             1
             Cor.
             3.11
             .
             Eph.
             2.20
             .
             So
             that
             if
             in
             any
             place
             of
             Scripture
             ,
             the
             word
             ,
             or
             letter
             of
             the
             text
             be
             repugnant
             to
             the
             
               Analogy
               of
               faith
               and
               love
            
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             to
             be
             understood
             
               properly
               and
               literally
            
             ,
             but
             
               improperly
               and
               figuratively
            
             .
             As
             for
             instance
             ,
             b
             
               This
               is
               my
               body
               ,
               —
               This
               is
               my
               blood
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             This
             cannot
             be
             understood
             properly
             ,
             that
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             are
             Christs
             body
             and
             bloud
             ,
             for
             that
             is
             contrary
             to
             the
             
               Analogy
               or
               rule
               of
               faith
            
             ,
             w
             ch
             tels
             us
             that
             Christs
             human
             nature
             is
             
               ascended
               into
               heaven
            
             ,
             c
             
               whom
               the
               heavens
               must
               containe
               till
               the
               restitution
               of
               all
               thing●
            
             ;
             therefore
             it
             is
             to
             be
             understood
             figuratively
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             
               ●acramentall
               sense
            
             ,
             The
             signe
             being
             put
             for
             the
             thing
             signified
             ,
             by
             a
             Met●●ymie
             .
             So
             we
             are
             commanded
             d
             
               To
               eate
               Christs
               flesh
            
             ,
             —
             e
             
               To
               pluck
               out
               our
               right
               eye
               ,
               cut
               off
               our
               right
               hand
               ,
               if
               they
               offend
               us
               .
            
             We
             cannot
             read
             any
             of
             these
             
               literaelly
               and
               properly
            
             ,
             for
             that
             were
             against
             the
             
               Analogy
               or
               rule
               of
               love
            
             ,
             f
             
               Thou
               shalt
               not
               kill
            
             ;
             therefore
             we
             must
             seek
             for
             
               a
               spirituall
               and
               improper
               sense
               ,
               viz.
            
             Eating
             Christs
             flesh
             ,
             not
             carnally
             with
             our
             teeth
             ,
             but
             spiritually
             by
             faith
             ,
             
               i.
               e.
               beleeving
               in
               Christ
               crucified
               ,
            
             &c.
             
             As
             also
             denying
             all
             corruptions
             ,
             corrupt
             affections
             ,
             inclinations
             ,
             or
             occasions
             ,
             though
             as
             dea●
             and
             usefull
             ,
             
               as
               right
               hand
            
             or
             
               right
               eye
            
             unto
             us
             .
             Thus
             this
             rule
             faithfully
             followed
             ,
             
             will
             cleare
             many
             hard
             and
             intricate
             passages
             in
             Scripture
             .
             It
             is
             therefore
             of
             singular
             consequence
             to
             every
             one
             that
             desires
             solidly
             to
             understand
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             to
             be
             well
             grounded
             in
             the
             fundamentals
             &
             
               Principles
               of
               Christian
               Religion
            
             ,
             without
             which
             ,
             like
             a
             ship
             without
             ballast
             ,
             a
             man
             g
             shall
             
               be
               carried
               away
               with
               every
               winde
               of
               vaine
               doctrine
               ,
            
             perverting
             or
             mistaking
             the
             Scriptures
             .
          
        
         
           
             VI.
             Rule
             .
          
           
             
               Be
               well
               acquainted
               with
               the
            
             1
             Order
             ,
             2
             Titles
             ,
             3
             Times
             ,
             4
             Penmen
             ,
             5
             Occasion
             ,
             6
             
               Scope
               ,
               and
            
             7
             
               Principall
               parts
               of
               the
               books
               both
               of
               the
               Old
               and
               N.
               Testament
               .
            
             These
             will
             much
             promote
             the
             solid
             &
             judicious
             understanding
             of
             the
             whole
             Bible
             in
             a
             short
             space
             .
             For
             1
             Hereby
             you
             shall
             have
             the
             very
             Idea
             or
             character
             of
             every
             book
             ,
             lively
             describing
             the
             nature
             and
             Contents
             of
             it
             before
             your
             eyes
             ,
             as
             in
             a
             Map
             ,
             before
             you
             begin
             to
             peruse
             them
             .
             2
             Hereby
             you
             shall
             have
             a
             Clew
             to
             conduct
             you
             ,
             a
             Compasse
             to
             saile
             and
             steere
             by
             ,
             in
             the
             perusall
             of
             any
             book
             ;
             3
             Hereby
             also
             you
             shall
             have
             a
             summary
             Recapitulation
             or
             Recollection
             of
             the
             chief
             Aime
             ,
             and
             subject
             matters
             of
             every
             book
             ,
             much
             tending
             both
             to
             help
             judgement
             ,
             and
             strengthen
             memory
             ,
             after
             the
             Perusall
             of
             any
             book
             of
             old
             or
             New
             Testament
             .
             And
             therefore
             this
             course
             must
             needs
             be
             as
             an
             usefull
             
               Key
               ,
               to
               unlock
               the
               rich
               Cabinet
               of
               the
               Holy
               Scriptures
               ,
            
             and
             to
             discover
             
             the
             precious
             Treasures
             thereof
             unto
             you
             .
          
           
             Now
             this
             is
             the
             
               Intent
               and
               Scope
            
             of
             this
             Manuall
             ,
             this
             small
             Treatise
             ;
             viz.
             so
             familiarly
             to
             open
             and
             unfold
             .
             The
             1
             Order
             ,
             2
             Titles
             ,
             3
             Times
             ,
             4
             Penmen
             ,
             5
             Occasion
             ,
             6
             Scope
             ,
             and
             7
             
               Principall
               Parts
               of
               the
               Books
               of
               Old
               and
               New
               Testament
               .
            
             That
             the
             whole
             Tenour
             of
             the
             Bible
             ,
             might
             be
             spread
             open
             in
             a
             
               Generall
               view
            
             ,
             to
             the
             meanest
             capacity
             .
             For
             ,
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Order
                   of
                   the
                   Books
                
                 ,
                 especially
                 of
                 the
                 Historicall
                 Books
                 (
                 observed
                 all
                 along
                 ,
                 and
                 compendiously
                 represented
                 in
                 the
                 two
                 Tables
                 ,
                 before
                 the
                 Old
                 and
                 New
                 Testament
                 ,
                 )
                 more
                 evidently
                 help
                 to
                 discover
                 the
                 
                   Order
                   of
                   Histories
                
                 and
                 matters
                 handled
                 therein
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 
                   Order
                   of
                   Gods
                   governing
                
                 his
                 Church
                 in
                 severall
                 conditions
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Titles
                
                 ,
                 1
                 Some
                 of
                 them
                 summarily
                 signify
                 to
                 us
                 the
                 chief
                 matter
                 of
                 the
                 Book
                 ,
                 as
                 
                   Genesis
                   ,
                   The
                   Generations
                   of
                   the
                   heaven
                   and
                   earth
                   :
                   Exodus
                
                 Israel's
                 
                   departure
                   out
                   of
                
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 2
                 Some
                 of
                 them
                 declare
                 the
                 instrumentall
                 Authors
                 ,
                 or
                 Penmen
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Titles
                 of
                 Prophets
                 Books
                 ,
                 
                   Isaiah
                   ,
                   &c.
                
                 who
                 being
                 extraordinary
                 men
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 guided
                 by
                 the
                 Spirit
                 ,
                 their
                 books
                 are
                 of
                 divine
                 Authority
                 .
                 3
                 Some
                 denote
                 the
                 Churches
                 or
                 particular
                 persons
                 for
                 whose
                 sakes
                 immediately
                 some
                 parts
                 of
                 Scripture
                 were
                 penned
                 ,
                 which
                 affords
                 light
                 to
                 divers
                 passages
                 therein
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Times
                
                 of
                 the
                 Books
                 set
                 forth
                 ,
                 
                 Partly
                 ,
                 the
                 length
                 or
                 space
                 of
                 time
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 things
                 related
                 were
                 done
                 ,
                 as
                 in
                 Historicall
                 Books
                 ,
                 which
                 serve
                 to
                 disclose
                 the
                 connection
                 and
                 continuance
                 of
                 the
                 History
                 and
                 Chronology
                 .
                 Partly
                 the
                 time
                 or
                 season
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 bookes
                 were
                 written
                 ,
                 which
                 serves
                 to
                 cleare
                 the
                 understanding
                 of
                 divers
                 particular
                 passages
                 ,
                 which
                 otherwise
                 would
                 be
                 very
                 difficult
                 ,
                 both
                 in
                 the
                 Prophets
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 Apostles
                 .
                 See
                 therefore
                 those
                 
                   two
                   Tables
                
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 Timeing
                 of
                 the
                 Prophets
                 and
                 Epistles
                 ,
                 p.
                 104.
                 to
                 107.
                 and
                 p.
                 177.
                 to
                 186.
                 
                 Distinguish
                 well
                 betwixt
                 times
                 and
                 times
                 ,
                 &
                 you
                 dissolve
                 many
                 knots
                 .
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 Penmen
                 ,
                 being
                 holy
                 men
                 of
                 God
                 extraordinarily
                 inspired
                 ,
                 intimate
                 to
                 us
                 the
                 divine
                 Authority
                 of
                 their
                 writings
                 .
                 This
                 incites
                 faith
                 ,
                 love
                 ,
                 and
                 awfull
                 Reverence
                 to
                 their
                 books
                 .
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Occasion
                
                 upon
                 which
                 the
                 books
                 were
                 written
                 ,
                 together
                 with
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Scope
                   ,
                   drift
                
                 ,
                 or
                 End
                 of
                 the
                 book
                 ,
                 being
                 well
                 considered
                 ,
                 give
                 great
                 light
                 to
                 the
                 whole
                 Book
                 ;
                 the
                 whole
                 frame
                 ,
                 disposition
                 and
                 chiefe
                 Arguments
                 handled
                 in
                 the
                 book
                 ,
                 having
                 a
                 singular
                 tendency
                 to
                 the
                 Scope
                 ;
                 therefore
                 as
                 the
                 Archer
                 fixeth
                 his
                 eye
                 steadily
                 on
                 the
                 mark
                 ,
                 when
                 he
                 would
                 shoot
                 accurately
                 :
                 so
                 still
                 fix
                 your
                 thought
                 upon
                 the
                 Occasion
                 and
                 Scope
                 of
                 every
                 book
                 ,
                 when
                 you
                 would
                 peruse
                 them
                 understandingly
                 .
              
               
                 7.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 of
                 the
                 Book
                 ,
                 here
                 Analytically
                 laid
                 down
                 ,
                 exhibit
                 clearly
                 
                 to
                 your
                 view
                 ,
                 both
                 the
                 
                   chiefe
                   Subject
                
                 ,
                 or
                 matters
                 insisted
                 upon
                 in
                 every
                 Book
                 ;
                 as
                 also
                 the
                 
                   methodicall
                   and
                   orderly
                   coherence
                
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 parts
                 of
                 the
                 book
                 with
                 one
                 another
                 .
                 Books
                 lookt
                 upon
                 confusedly
                 ,
                 are
                 but
                 darkly
                 and
                 
                   confusedly
                   apprehended
                
                 :
                 But
                 considered
                 distinctly
                 ,
                 as
                 in
                 these
                 distinct
                 Analyses
                 or
                 Resolutions
                 into
                 their
                 Principall
                 parts
                 ,
                 must
                 needs
                 be
                 distinctly
                 ,
                 and
                 much
                 more
                 
                   clearly
                   discerned
                
                 .
              
            
          
           
             This
             the
             
               chiefe
               Purpose
               and
               Aime
               of
               this
               Book
            
             ;
             By
             these
             particulars
             to
             familiarize
             the
             Scriptures
             unto
             Christians
             ,
             that
             delight
             to
             converse
             with
             God
             in
             his
             owne
             book
             ;
             
               To
               whom
               I
               earnestly
               commend
               this
               direction
               ,
               for
               the
               more
               profitable
               use
               of
               this
               Book
               ,
               viz.
            
             That
             1
             Before
             they
             read
             any
             Book
             of
             Scripture
             ,
             they
             would
             first
             read
             what
             is
             in
             this
             Key
             said
             of
             that
             Book
             .
             2
             
               In
               reading
            
             they
             would
             still
             remember
             the
             Occasion
             and
             Scope
             of
             the
             book
             ,
             and
             now
             and
             then
             compare
             the
             Principall
             Parts
             here
             ,
             with
             the
             Text
             :
             And
             3
             
               After
               the
               Perusall
               of
               the
               Book
               ,
            
             they
             would
             read
             againe
             what
             this
             Key
             speaks
             of
             it
             .
             Hereby
             the
             understaning
             will
             be
             cleared
             ,
             the
             Memory
             confirmed
             .
          
        
         
           
             VII
             .
             Rule
             .
          
           
             
               Heedfully
               and
               judiciously
               observe
               the
               accurate
               Concord
               and
               Harmony
               of
               the
               Holy
               Scriptures
               :
            
             though
             written
             by
             severall
             persons
             at
             severall
             times
             ,
             in
             severall
             places
             ;
             yet
             one
             and
             the
             same
             spirit
             inditing
             all
             ,
             is
             still
             like
             himselfe
             ,
             consonant
             to
             himselfe
             in
             
             all
             .
             The
             Discord
             is
             in
             our
             mindes
             ,
             rather
             then
             in
             Gods
             word
             .
             Hence
             z
             
               Augustine
               ,
               let
               us
               be
               at
               concord
               in
               our
               own
               heart
               ,
               and
               the
               Scripture
               will
               have
               no
               discord
               in
               it
               .
            
             There
             are
             
               Principally
               five
               notable
               respects
            
             ,
             in
             which
             Scriptures
             sometimes
             seem
             most
             contrary
             ,
             repugnant
             and
             opposite
             one
             to
             another
             ,
             when
             yet
             they
             
               are
               not
            
             dissonant
             ,
             but
             consonant
             and
             sweetly
             concording
             one
             with
             another
             ,
             As
             ,
             1
             
               When
               the
               Word
               or
               Phrase
               is
               used
               in
               severall
               Places
               ,
               not
               in
               the
               same
               ,
               but
               in
               severall
               senses
               and
               Acceptations
               .
            
             2
             
               When
               they
               treat
               not
               of
               the
               same
               ,
               but
               of
               severall
               subjects
               .
            
             3
             
               When
               they
               speak
               not
               of
               the
               same
               ,
               but
               severall
               parts
               of
               a
               thing
               .
            
             4
             
               When
               they
               speak
               not
               in
               severall
               places
               according
               to
               the
               same
               ,
               but
               severall
               respects
               .
            
             5
             
               When
               they
               intend
               not
               the
               same
               ,
               but
               severall
               times
               .
            
             These
             things
             well
             considered
             ,
             will
             lay
             a
             notable
             foundation
             for
             reconciling
             all
             places
             of
             Scripture
             that
             seem
             to
             be
             any
             way
             opposite
             one
             to
             another
             .
             Take
             the
             illustrations
             of
             thē
             severally
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             
               Scriptures
               seem
               opposite
               ,
               but
               are
               not
               ,
               when
               the
               same
            
             a
             
               word
               or
               phrase
               in
               severall
               places
               is
               used
               not
               in
               the
               same
               ,
               but
               in
               severall
               senses
               and
               acceptations
            
             ;
             for
             the
             same
             words
             have
             oft
             times
             severall
             significations
             .
             In
             such
             case
             ,
             distinguish
             the
             severall
             Acceptations
             ,
             and
             the
             Scriptures
             agree
             .
             As
             Paul
             saith
             ,
             b
             
               Work
               out
               your
               own
               salvation
               with
               feare
               and
               trembling
               .
            
             But
             Iohn
             saith
             ,
             c
             
               There
               is
               no
               feare
               in
               love
               ,
               but
               perfect
               love
               casteth
               out
               fear
               ,
            
             &c.
             
             These
             places
             are
             not
             opposite
             :
             because
             the
             
             word
             [
             Fear
             ]
             in
             Iohn
             signifies
             a
             
               base
               servile
               stavish
               fear
            
             ;
             in
             Paul
             ,
             a
             
               filial
               childlike
               religious
               fear
            
             .
             In
             this
             sense
             it
             is
             said
             of
             the
             d
             
               Samaritās
               ,
               they
               feared
               the
               Lord
               :
            
             &
             again
             
               they
               feared
               not
               the
               Lord
            
             ,
             i.
             e.
             they
             feared
             the
             Lord
             servilly
             ,
             and
             hypocritically
             for
             his
             Lyons
             ,
             but
             they
             feared
             him
             not
             religiously
             ▪
             ●ilially
             ,
             sincerely
             .
             Not
             to
             feare
             God
             aright
             ,
             is
             not
             to
             feare
             him
             at
             all
             .
             Again
             Christ
             saith
             ,
             e
             
               If
               a
               man
               keep
               my
               saying
               ,
               he
               shall
               never
               see
               death
               .
            
             But
             Paul
             saith
             ,
             f
             
               It
               is
               appointed
               to
               all
               men
               once
               to
               dye
            
             ;
             yet
             here
             's
             no
             opposition
             ;
             for
             Christ
             speaks
             
               of
               death
               spiritual
               and
               eternall
               :
               Paul
            
             of
             
               death
               temporal
               or
               corporall
            
             .
             Further
             Ieremiah
             saith
             ,
             g
             
               Cursed
               be
               the
               man
               that
               trusteth
               in
               man
            
             ;
             Christ
             saith
             ,
             h
             
               except
               yee
               eat●
               the
               flesh
               of
               the
               Son
               of
               man
               ,
               —
               yee
               have
               no
               life
               in
               you
               ,
            
             by
             eating
             understand
             believing
             ,
             v.
             47.
             yet
             here
             's
             no
             opposition
             .
             [
             Man
             ]
             signifies
             either
             
               meer
               man
            
             ,
             who
             is
             vaine
             ,
             deceitful
             ,
             &c.
             
             Of
             him
             Ieremiah
             speaks
             :
             Or
             
               man
               subsisting
               in
               the
               second
               person
               of
               God
            
             ;
             of
             him
             Christ
             speaks
             .
             Moses
             saith
             ,
             God
             i
             
               rested
               on
               the
               seventh
               day
               from
               all
               his
               work
               ,
            
             But
             k
             Christ
             saith
             ,
             
               My
               father
               worketh
               hitherto
               and
               I
               worke
               ,
            
             yet
             here
             's
             no
             opposition
             ;
             For
             the
             works
             of
             God
             are
             either
             
               Works
               of
               Creation
            
             ,
             whereby
             new
             kinds
             of
             Creatures
             are
             made
             ;
             so
             Moses
             intended
             that
             God
             rested
             from
             his
             work
             ;
             or
             
               Works
               of
               Conservation
               and
               Providence
            
             ,
             sustaining
             and
             governing
             his
             works
             created
             ,
             so
             Christ
             meant
             the
             father
             and
             he
             wrought
             
             still
             .
             Adde
             hereunto
             ;
             Christ
             saith
             ,
             l
             
               If
               any
               man
               come
               to
               me
               and
               hate
               not
               his
               father
               and
               mother
               ,
               and
               wife
               and
               children
               ,
               and
               brethren
               and
               sisters
               ,
               yea
               and
               his
               own
               life
               also
               ,
               he
               cannot
               be
               my
               disciple
               ,
            
             But
             Paul
             saith
             ,
             m
             
               Husbands
               ,
               love
               your
               wives
            
             ,
             n
             
               No
               man
               ever
               yet
               hated
               his
               own
               flesh
               ,
            
             yet
             no
             opposition
             ;
             for
             Hatred
             is
             taken
             either
             Properly
             and
             absolutely
             ;
             so
             understand
             Paul
             :
             or
             comparatively
             ,
             a
             lesse
             love
             being
             counted
             hatred
             ;
             of
             that
             ,
             understand
             Christ.
             Moreover
             Paul
             saith
             ,
             o
             
               Therefore
               we
               conclude
               that
               a
               man
               is
               justified
               by
               faith
               without
               the
               deeds
               of
               the
               law
               .
            
             But
             p
             Iames
             saith
             ,
             
               yee
               see
               then
               how
               that
               by
               works
               a
               man
               is
               justified
               ,
               and
               not
               by
               faith
               onely
               ,
            
             yet
             no
             reall
             opposition
             ;
             For
             Iustification
             in
             Pauls
             sense
             ,
             signifyes
             an
             
               instrumentall
               Application
            
             of
             Gods
             righteousnesse
             ,
             viz.
             Jesus
             Christ
             to
             our selves
             ,
             and
             so
             Faith
             alone
             justifies
             before
             God
             :
             but
             Iustification
             in
             Iame's
             sense
             signifies
             a
             
               Declarative
               Manifestation
            
             of
             the
             Truth
             of
             that
             Faith
             whereby
             we
             are
             justified
             ,
             by
             the
             fruits
             and
             workes
             of
             it
             .
             Paul
             speakes
             of
             our
             justification
             before
             God
             :
             James
             of
             our
             justification
             be●ore
             men
             .
             Paul
             of
             the
             justification
             of
             our
             persons
             by
             Faith
             :
             Iames
             of
             the
             justification
             of
             our
             Faith
             it self
             ,
             by
             works
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             
               Holy
               Scriptures
               seeme
               opposite
               but
               are
               not
               ,
               when
               they
               treat
               not
               of
               the
               same
               ,
               but
               of
               severall
               subjects
               ,
               or
               severall
               matters
               .
            
             As
             ,
             Christ
             promised
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             
             q
             
               When
               the
               Spirit
               of
               Truth
               should
               come
               ,
               he
               should
               guide
               them
               into
               all
               truth
               .
            
             But
             Paul
             testifieth
             ,
             that
             Peter
             erred
             ,
             and
             r
             
               was
               to
               be
               blamed
            
             ;
             here
             are
             severall
             Subjects
             ,
             
               viz.
               Doctrine
            
             and
             Practise
             ,
             As
             to
             Doctrine
             the
             Apostles
             erred
             not
             therein
             ,
             because
             they
             had
             it
             immediately
             from
             God.
             But
             as
             to
             matter
             of
             
               Practise
               ,
               Peter
            
             there
             erred
             ,
             dissembling
             fellowship
             with
             the
             Gentiles
             for
             feare
             of
             the
             Jewes
             .
             Nor
             were
             any
             of
             the
             Apostles
             exempted
             from
             sinne
             and
             errour
             in
             Practise
             .
             Again
             ,
             It
             is
             said
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             That
             s
             
               Elijah
               went
               up
               by
               a
               whirlewind
               into
               heaven
               .
            
             And
             in
             another
             ,
             t
             
               Behold
               I
               will
               send
               you
               Elijah
               the
               Prophet
               ,
               before
               the
               coming
               of
               the
               great
               and
               dreadfull
               day
               of
               the
               Lord.
            
             Yet
             these
             places
             oppose
             not
             one
             another
             ,
             because
             here
             are
             severall
             Subjects
             spoken
             of
             ;
             the
             former
             being
             Elijah
             the
             Tishbite
             ;
             the
             latter
             Iohn
             the
             Baptist
             ,
             the
             New-Testament
             -
             Elijah
             ,
             so
             called
             because
             he
             came
             u
             
               in
               the
               Spirit
               and
               power
               of
               Elijah
               .
            
             Furthermore
             ,
             Iohn
             the
             Baptist
             being
             asked
             ,
             if
             he
             were
             Elias
             ,
             x
             
               Answered
               ,
               I
               am
               not
            
             ;
             And
             yet
             y
             Christ
             saith
             ,
             
               Iohn
               Baptist
               was
               that
               Elias
               which
               was
               for
               to
               come
               .
               viz.
            
             Not
             personally
             ,
             but
             virtually
             ;
             so
             here
             's
             no
             opposition
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             
               Scriptures
               seeme
               opposite
               but
               are
               not
               ,
               when
               though
               they
               speak
               of
               the
               same
               matter
               or
               subject
               ,
               yet
               they
               intend
               not
               the
               same
               ,
               but
               severall
               parts
               therof
               .
            
             As
             Paul
             saith
             ,
             z
             
               In
               me
               dwels
               no
               good
               thing
               ,
            
             And
             yet
             he
             saith
             ,
             a
             
               I
               delight
               in
               the
               Law
               of
               God
            
             ;
             which
             doubtlesse
             is
             good
             .
             
             Yet
             these
             oppose
             not
             ,
             because
             in
             the
             former
             Paul
             speakes
             of
             his
             carnall
             unregenerate
             part
             ,
             
               in
               me
               ,
               that
               is
               my
               flesh
               ,
               dwels
               no
               good
               thing
               :
            
             in
             the
             latter
             of
             his
             spirituall
             regenerate
             part
             ,
             
               I
               delight
               in
               the
               Law
               of
               God
               ,
               after
               the
               inner
               man.
            
             Again
             ;
             Christ
             saith
             ,
             b
             
               My
               father
               is
               greater
               then
               I.
            
             But
             Paul
             ,
             saith
             ,
             c
             
               Christ
               Iesus
               being
               in
               the
               forme
               of
               God
               ,
               thought
               it
               no
               robbery
               to
               be
               equall
               with
               God.
            
             Yet
             no
             opposition
             ;
             for
             in
             Christs
             person
             are
             two
             Natures
             ,
             viz.
             d
             of
             God
             and
             man
             ;
             Now
             as
             Christ
             is
             God
             ,
             so
             he
             is
             equall
             to
             the
             Father
             ,
             as
             Paul
             meant
             :
             As
             Christ
             is
             man
             so
             the
             Father
             is
             greater
             then
             he
             ,
             as
             himselfe
             said
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             
               Scriptures
               seeme
               opposite
               and
               contrary
               ,
               but
               are
               not
               ,
               when
               they
               speak
               of
               things
               ,
               not
               in
               the
               same
               ,
               but
               in
               severall
               respects
               ,
               notions
               or
               considerations
               .
            
             For
             the
             severall
             respect
             ,
             removes
             all
             contradiction
             or
             opposition
             .
             As
             Christ
             saith
             ,
             e
             
               If
               I
               beare
               witnesse
               of
               my selfe
               ,
               my
               witnesse
               is
               not
               true
               .
            
             But
             elsewhere
             he
             saith
             f
             
               Though
               I
               beare
               record
               of
               my selfe
               ,
               yet
               my
               Record
               is
               true
               .
            
             Yet
             here
             's
             no
             opposition
             indeed
             ,
             because
             Christ
             speaks
             of
             
               bearing
               witnesse
            
             of
             himselfe
             in
             
               severall
               respects
            
             ;
             In
             the
             former
             place
             ,
             of
             
               bearing
               witnesse
            
             to
             himselfe
             ,
             
               disjunctly
               and
               solely
               without
               the
               Father
               ,
            
             so
             his
             witnesse
             were
             not
             true
             :
             In
             the
             latter
             of
             
               bearing
               witnesse
            
             of
             himselfe
             ,
             
               conjunctly
               or
               jointly
               with
               the
               Father
            
             ;
             so
             his
             witnesse
             of
             himselfe
             is
             true
             .
             Againe
             Iohn
             saith
             g
             ,
             
               He
               that
               is
               borne
               of
               God
               ,
               committeth
               not
               sinne
               ,
               nor
               can
               sinne
               .
            
             —
             And
             yet
             elsewhere
             ,
             
             h
             
               If
               we
               say
               that
               we
               have
               no
               sin
               ,
               we
               deceive
               our selves
               ,
               and
               the
               truth
               is
               not
               in
               us
               .
               If
               we
               say
               that
               we
               have
               not
               sinned
               ,
               we
               make
               him
               a
               lyar
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             Yet
             here
             's
             no
             reall
             opposition
             ;
             for
             in
             
               some
               respects
            
             they
             that
             are
             
               born
               of
               God
            
             ,
             may
             be
             said
             
               to
               sin
            
             ,
             in
             some
             respects
             they
             
               sin
               not
            
             .
             They
             have
             
               sinne
               originall
            
             in
             them
             ;
             and
             
               actuall
               sin
            
             ,
             through
             infirmity
             ,
             &c.
             is
             done
             by
             them
             ,
             while
             they
             are
             in
             this
             world
             :
             But
             
               they
               sin
               not
               as
               unregenerate
               men
               sin
               .
               viz.
            
             i
             1
             Not
             against
             the
             Gospel-Remedy
             ,
             Jesus
             Christ.
             2
             Not
             as
             under
             the
             Reign
             of
             Sinne
             ;
             3
             Not
             with
             a
             full
             will
             ;
             4
             Not
             presumptuously
             ;
             5
             Not
             habitually
             ;
             6
             Not
             with
             allowance
             of
             themselves
             in
             any
             bosome
             corruption
             ;
             7
             Not
             totally
             and
             Finally
             .
             Furthermore
             ,
             God
             saith
             k
             
               I
               am
               the
               Lord
               ,
               I
               change
               not
            
             ;
             And
             elsewhere
             saith
             l
             
               I
               will
               repent
               of
               the
               evil
               that
               I
               thought
               to
               do
               unto
               them
               .
               —
               And
               I
               will
               repent
               of
               the
               good
               wherewith
               I
               said
               ,
               I
               would
               benefit
               them
               .
            
             Yet
             no
             reall
             contradiction
             ;
             for
             in
             some
             sense
             God
             cannot
             repent
             ,
             
               viz.
               Affectively
            
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             his
             essence
             ,
             no
             nor
             in
             respect
             of
             his
             
               eternall
               Decree
            
             :
             In
             some
             sense
             ,
             after
             the
             manner
             of
             men
             he
             is
             said
             to
             repent
             ,
             
               viz.
               Effectively
            
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             his
             works
             which
             he
             effecteth
             ,
             when
             he
             doth
             something
             crosse
             to
             what
             he
             had
             formerly
             done
             ,
             as
             when
             he
             drowned
             the
             world
             ,
             which
             he
             had
             made
             ;
             dethroned
             Saul
             ,
             whom
             he
             had
             annointed
             King
             ,
             &c.
             
             Adde
             to
             these
             ;
             it
             is
             said
             of
             Christs
             Kingdom
             m
             
               It
               shall
               have
               no
               end
               ,
               but
               be
               established
               for
               ever
               .
            
             
             But
             Paul
             saith
             ,
             n
             
               Christ
               at
               the
               end
               shall
               deliver
               up
               the
               Kingdome
               to
               God
               even
               the
               Father
               .
            
             Yet
             no
             reall
             opposition
             ,
             For
             ,
             
               Christs
               Kingdome
            
             may
             be
             considered
             in
             divers
             respects
             ,
             viz.
             1
             As
             it
             is
             Essentiall
             belonging
             to
             Christ
             as
             God
             :
             So
             he
             he
             shall
             never
             deliver
             up
             his
             Kingdome
             .
             2
             As
             
               Oeconomicall
               ,
               Dispensatory
            
             or
             Mediatory
             ;
             The
             Mediatory
             Kingdome
             of
             Christ
             is
             considerable
             in
             respect
             of
             ,
             The
             substance
             of
             it
             ,
             so
             Christ
             our
             Mediatour
             shall
             be
             head
             of
             his
             Church
             ,
             and
             mysticall
             body
             for
             ever
             ;
             The
             Circumstance
             of
             it
             ,
             or
             
               manner
               of
               administration
            
             of
             it
             ,
             by
             Word
             ,
             Sacraments
             ,
             Effusion
             of
             the
             Spirit
             ,
             &c.
             
             And
             thus
             at
             last
             Christ
             shall
             deliver
             up
             the
             Kingdome
             to
             the
             Father
             ,
             for
             then
             God
             in
             Christ
             ,
             face
             to
             face
             ,
             shall
             be
             an
             endlesse
             Sabbath
             ,
             Sermon
             ,
             Sacrament
             ,
             all
             in
             all
             .
          
           
             5
             Finally
             ,
             
               Scriptures
               may
               seeme
               but
               are
               not
               really
               opposite
               ,
               when
               they
               intend
               not
               the
               same
               ,
               but
               severall
               times
               .
               Or
               at
               least
               when
               they
               speake
               of
               the
               same
               times
               in
               severall
               respects
               .
            
             Distinguish
             wisely
             the
             times
             ,
             and
             respects
             ,
             and
             the
             opposition
             ceaseth
             ,
             As
             o
             Iotham
             the
             sonne
             of
             Vzziah
             is
             said
             to
             
               Reigne
               sixteen
               yeeres
               in
               Ierusalem
            
             ;
             And
             yet
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             the
             p
             
               twentieth
               yeer
               of
            
             Jotham
             
               son
               of
            
             Uzziah
             .
             Notwithstanding
             here
             's
             no
             reall
             opposition
             in
             this
             computation
             ;
             For
             Iotham
             reigned
             alone
             onely
             16.
             yeers
             :
             but
             he
             reigned
             
               with
               his
               Father
               Vzziah
            
             (
             who
             could
             not
             mannage-the
             affaires
             of
             the
             Kingdome
             ,
             being
             smitten
             with
             leprosie
             )
             4.
             yeers
             before
             ;
             in
             al
             20
             
             years
             .
             Again
             ,
             Matthew
             saith
             ,
             q
             
               After
               six
               dayes
               ,
               Iesus
               taketh
            
             Peter
             ,
             James
             ,
             and
             John
             his
             brother
             ,
             
               and
               bringeth
               them
               up
               into
               an
               high
               mountaine
               apart
               .
            
             But
             Luke
             saith
             r
             ,
             About
             an
             
               eight
               dayes
               after
               these
               sayings
               ,
               he
               took
            
             Peter
             ,
             and
             John
             and
             James
             ,
             
               and
               went
               up
               into
               a
               mountaine
            
             —
             yet
             no
             opposition
             :
             For
             1
             either
             it
             may
             be
             said
             ,
             Luke's
             expression
             of
             ,
             [
             
               about
               an
               eight
               dayes
               after
            
             ,
             ]
             hath
             a
             latitude
             ,
             and
             may
             beare
             a
             day
             under
             :
             and
             Matthew's
             expression
             hath
             a
             latitude
             ,
             [
             
               After
               ▪
               six
               dayes
            
             ]
             and
             may
             beare
             a
             day
             or
             two
             over
             :
             2
             Or
             Matthew
             numbers
             the
             dayes
             exclusively
             ,
             Luke
             inclusively
             .
             Furthermore
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Government
             by
             Judges
             ,
             in
             the
             s
             
               Book
               of
               Iudges
            
             ,
             is
             computed
             to
             be
             
               about
               two
               hundred
               ninety
               and
               nine
               years
               .
            
             But
             Paul
             in
             his
             Sermon
             at
             Antioch
             ,
             saith
             ,
             t
             
               And
               when
               he
               had
               destroyed
               seven
               Nations
               in
               the
               Land
               of
            
             Canaan
             ,
             
               he
               divided
               their
               Land
               to
               them
               by
               Lot
               ,
               And
               after
               that
               ,
               he
               gave
               unto
               them
               Iudges
               ,
               about
               the
               space
               of
               foure
               hundred
               and
               fifty
               years
               ,
               untill
            
             Samuel
             
               the
               Prophet
            
             .
             Here
             seems
             to
             be
             a
             great
             opposition
             ,
             but
             if
             things
             be
             well
             examined
             ,
             there
             is
             none
             at
             all
             .
             Yet
             it
             may
             not
             be
             dissembled
             that
             this
             is
             so
             hard
             a
             knot
             ,
             that
             it
             much
             puzzles
             writers
             satisfactorily
             to
             unty
             it
             .
             1
             Partly
             ,
             because
             this
             Computation
             of
             450.
             years
             ,
             is
             so
             punctually
             confuted
             by
             this
             text
             ,
             viz.
             to
             begin
             after
             
               Canaan
               was
               divided
               by
               Lot
            
             ,
             and
             to
             end
             at
             
               Samuel
               exclusively
               .
               〈◊〉
               Partly
            
             ,
             Because
             that
             noted
             Chronology
             
             mentioned
             in
             1
             King.
             6.1
             .
             assures
             us
             expresly
             ,
             That
             the
             time
             
               from
               Israels
               coming
               out
               of
               Egypt
               till
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               building
               of
               the
               Temple
               in
               the
               fourth
               yeere
               of
               Solomon
               ,
            
             was
             precisely
             but
             480.
             yeeres
             .
             But
             if
             we
             allow
             for
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Iudges
             450.
             yeers
             ,
             in
             this
             account
             ;
             we
             shal
             find
             the
             whole
             time
             from
             going
             out
             of
             Aegypt
             till
             the
             Temples
             founding
             ,
             will
             arise
             to
             591
             yeeres
             in
             all
             ,
             viz.
             From
             
               
                 Their
                 departure
                 out
                 of
                 Aegypt
                 ,
                 till
                 their
                 entrance
                 into
                 Canaan
              
               
                 40.
                 yeere
              
               
                 Thence
                 to
                 Ioshuah's
                 death
                 ,
                 about
              
               
                 17.
                 y.
                 
              
               
                 Thence
                 to
                 Elies
                 death
                 ,
                 (
                 
                   for
                   Samuels
                   time
                   is
                   included
                   in
                   Sauls
                   Reigne
                   ,
                
                 Act.
                 13.21
                 .
                 )
                 according
                 to
                 this
                 supposition
                 .
              
               
                 450.
                 y.
                 
              
               
                 Thence
                 to
                 the
                 Death
                 of
                 David
                 ,
              
               
                 80.
                 y.
                 
              
               
                 Thence
                 to
                 the
                 founding
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 in
                 Solomons
                 fourth
                 yeere
                 ,
              
               
                 4.
                 y.
                 
              
               
                 In
                 all
                 ,
              
               
                 591.
                 yeeres
                 .
              
            
             So
             that
             in
             these
             regards
             ,
             it
             is
             no
             easie
             matter
             clearly
             and
             undoubtedly
             to
             reconcile
             these
             times
             .
             Many
             opinions
             are
             offered
             in
             Writers
             to
             this
             end
             ,
             
               yet
               most
               of
               them
               ,
               if
               not
               all
               ,
               labour
               under
               some
               inconvenience
               or
               other
               .
            
             To
             omit
             the
             variety
             of
             opinions
             ,
             Let
             it
             suffice
             to
             mention
             only
             two
             ,
             which
             learned
             men
             seem
             most
             to
             incline
             unto
             .
             u
             
               Some
               thinke
            
             ,
             that
             here
             Paul
             intended
             not
             to
             reckon
             up
             the
             time
             while
             the
             Iudges
             ruled
             ,
             (
             because
             so
             it
             were
             impossible
             to
             reconcile
             these
             foure
             hundred
             and
             fifty
             years
             with
             those
             foure
             hundred
             and
             eighty
             years
             ,
             in
             1
             King.
             6.1
             .
             as
             hath
             been
             intimated
             )
             :
             
             but
             to
             point
             out
             at
             what
             time
             God
             gave
             Israel
             Judges
             ,
             viz.
             after
             these
             things
             w
             ch
             were
             declared
             .
             v
             ,
             17
             ,
             18
             ,
             19.
             viz.
             from
             the
             birth
             of
             Isaac
             ,
             (
             which
             seems
             to
             be
             noted
             in
             that
             phrase
             ,
             
               God
               chose
               our
               fathers
               ,
               v.
            
             17.
             among
             all
             people
             God
             choosing
             Abraham
             ,
             among
             all
             Abrahams
             children
             choosing
             Isaac
             ,
             and
             making
             a
             Covenant
             with
             him
             ,
             )
             till
             the
             beginning
             of
             Iudges
             ,
             which
             is
             computed
             to
             be
             foure
             hundred
             fourty
             seven
             years
             ,
             that
             's
             
               about
               foure
               hundred
               and
               fifty
               years
               ,
            
             wants
             but
             three
             years
             ;
             and
             its
             usuall
             in
             Scripture
             to
             put
             the
             
               round
               number
            
             for
             the
             
               punctuall
               number
            
             .
             This
             Computation
             they
             make
             thus
             ,
             
               
                 From
                 Isaac's
                 birth
                 ,
                 to
                 Iacobs
                 birth
                 ,
                 yeers
              
               
                 60.
                 
              
               
                 From
                 Iacobs
                 birth
                 to
                 the
                 
                   going
                   down
                   into
                
                 Egypt
              
               
                 130.
                 
              
               
                 Thence
                 to
                 the
                 
                   Comming
                   forth
                   of
                
                 Egypt
                 ,
              
               
                 210.
                 
              
               
                 Thence
                 to
                 the
                 
                   entring
                   into
                   the
                   land
                   of
                
                 Canaan
              
               
                 40.
                 
              
               
                 Thence
                 to
                 the
                 
                   dividing
                   of
                   the
                   Land
                   by
                   Lot
                   ,
                
              
               
                 7.
                 
              
               
                 Which
                 make
                 up
                 in
                 all
              
               
                 447.
                 
              
            
          
           
             But
             this
             opinion
             is
             attended
             with
             these
             two
             inconveniences
             .
             1.
             
             The
             present
             text
             in
             the
             Acts
             seems
             plainly
             to
             confine
             us
             for
             these
             foure
             hundred
             and
             fifty
             years
             ,
             
               between
               the
               dividing
               of
               the
               land
               of
            
             Canaan
             
               by
               Lot
            
             ,
             and
             
               the
               beginning
               of
            
             Samuels
             Rule
             ;
             which
             limits
             this
             Computation
             transgresseth
             .
             2.
             
             The
             number
             computed
             doth
             
             not
             exactly
             amount
             to
             foure
             hundred
             and
             fifty
             ,
             wants
             three
             .
             x
             Others
             therefore
             to
             avoid
             these
             inconveniences
             ,
             confine
             and
             bound
             their
             computation
             according
             to
             this
             text
             ,
             to
             the
             space
             of
             time
             betwixt
             the
             dividing
             Canaan
             by
             
               Lot
               ,
               and
            
             Samuels
             Rule
             .
             And
             they
             thinke
             Paul
             reckoned
             up
             
               all
               the
               years
               mentioned
               in
               the
            
             Judges
             ,
             and
             so
             they
             compute
             both
             the
             
               years
               of
               the
            
             Judges
             ,
             and
             the
             
               years
               of
            
             Israels
             oppressours
             ,
             distinctly
             and
             severally
             ;
             (
             though
             the
             years
             of
             the
             Oppressours
             are
             indeed
             comprized
             under
             the
             years
             of
             the
             Iudges
             )
             and
             both
             together
             do
             punctually
             make
             up
             the
             foure
             hundred
             and
             fifty
             years
             ,
             here
             mentioned
             in
             the
             Acts.
             As
             followeth
             ,
             
               
                 The
                 Iudges
                 mentioned
                 in
                 the
                 Book
                 of
                 Iudges
                 ,
                 governed
                 in
                 all
                 .
              
               
                 299.
                 years
                 .
              
               
                 To
                 these
                 adde
                 the
                 fourty
                 years
                 of
                 
                   Eli
                   ,
                   who
                   so
                   long
                   judged
                
                 Israel
                 ,
                 1
                 Sam.
                 4.18
                 .
              
               
                 40.
                 
              
               
                 So
                 the
                 
                   whole
                   time
                
                 of
                 the
                 Iudges
                 rule
                 ,
                 till
                 Samuel
                 ,
                 was
                 ,
              
               
                 339.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               Israels
               Oppressours
            
             were
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 Cushan
                 who
                 oppressed
                 them
                 ,
                 Iudges
                 38.
                 
              
               
                 8
                 years
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Moab
                 ,
                 Iudg.
                 3.14
                 ,
              
               
                 18.
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 Iabin
                 ,
                 Iudg.
                 4.3
                 .
              
               
                 ●0
                 .
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 Midian
                 ,
                 Iudg.
                 6.
                 
                 ●
                 .
              
               
                 7.
                 
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 Ammon
                 Iudg.
                 10.8
                 .
              
               
                 18.
                 
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 Philistims
                 ,
                 Iudg.
                 13.1
                 .
              
               
                 40.
                 
              
               
                 So
                 the
                 
                   whole
                   time
                
                 of
                 their
                 Oppressors
                 ,
                 was
              
               
                 111.
                 
              
            
          
           
             Now
             adde
             these
             together
             ▪
             viz.
             the
             years
             
             of
             their
             Iudges
             ,
             and
             the
             years
             of
             their
             Oppressours
             ,
             three
             hundred
             thirty
             and
             nine
             ,
             and
             one
             hundred
             and
             eleven
             ,
             and
             the
             totall
             resulting
             is
             foure
             hundred
             and
             fifty
             years
             exactly
             ;
             (
             only
             th●s
             inconvenience
             remaines
             ,
             
               the
               same
               years
               are
               reckoned
               twice
               over
               ,
            
             yet
             it
             is
             not
             in
             the
             same
             ,
             but
             several
             respects
             )
             .
             Now
             if
             out
             of
             the
             number
             of
             years
             ,
             
               from
               departure
               out
               of
            
             Egypt
             ,
             till
             the
             
               Founding
               of
               the
               Temple
            
             ,
             as
             first
             computed
             viz.
             —
             591
             ,
             You
             subduct
             the
             
               years
               of
               the
               Oppressours
               of
            
             Israel
             under
             their
             Iudges
             ,
             which
             seems
             to
             be
             twice
             reckoned
             up
             ,
             viz.
             one
             hundred
             and
             eleven
             years
             .
             The
             remaine
             is
             just
             foure
             hundred
             and
             eighty
             years
             ,
             according
             to
             that
             of
             1
             Kings
             6.1
             .
             And
             so
             the
             Scripture
             on
             all
             sides
             are
             reconciled
             accurately
             ;
             
               And
               therefore
               this
               opinion
               seems
               most
               to
               be
               embraced
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             VIII
             .
             Rule
             .
          
           
             
               Learne
               that
               excellent
               Art
               of
               explaining
               and
               understanding
               the
               Scriptures
               ,
               by
               the
               Scriptures
               .
            
             The
             Scriptures
             in
             some
             places
             speak
             more
             darkly
             and
             dubiously
             ,
             in
             other
             places
             they
             expresse
             the
             same
             things
             more
             clearly
             and
             certainly
             :
             y
             
               the
               doubtfull
               are
               to
               be
               explained
               by
               the
               certaine
               ,
               as
               darke
               places
               by
               those
               that
               are
               clear
               ,
            
             As
             Augustine
             noteth
             ;
             As
             ,
             Peter
             being
             to
             prove
             to
             the
             Iewes
             Christs
             resurrection
             by
             Scripture
             ,
             viz.
             z
             
               Thou
               wilt
               not
               leave
               my
               soule
               in
               hell
               ,
               nor
               suffer
               thine
               holy
               one
               to
               see
               corruption
            
             :
             he
             alledgeth
             for
             clearing
             this
             another
             Scripture
             to
             evince
             that
             this
             promise
             was
             made
             to
             David
             concerning
             Christ
             ,
             and
             could
             not
             properly
             be
             intended
             of
             David
             himselfe
             ,
             a
             Men
             
               and
               
               brethren
               let
               me
               speak
               freely
               to
               you
               ,
               of
               the
               Patriarch
            
             David
             ,
             
               that
               he
               is
               both
               dead
               and
               buried
               ,
               and
               his
               sepulchre
               is
               with
               us
               unto
               this
               day
               .
               Therefore
               he
               being
               a
               Prophet
               ,
               and
               knowing
               that
               God
               had
               sworne
               with
               an
               oath
               ,
            
             &c.
             
             Certainly
             Scripture
             is
             the
             best
             expounder
             of
             it self
             ,
             Scripture-exposition
             of
             it self
             ,
             (
             as
             b
             Augustine
             ,
             and
             before
             him
             c
             Irenaeus
             observed
             )
             
               is
               most
               regular
               and
               safe
               .
               Let
               us
            
             (
             saith
             d
             Chrysostome
             )
             
               attend
               to
               the
               Scope
               of
               Scripture
               ,
               which
               interprets
               it selfe
               and
               suffers
               not
               his
               hearer
               to
               erre
               .
               The
               gold
               was
               not
               sanctified
            
             (
             saith
             e
             Origen
             )
             
               without
               the
               Temple
               ,
               no
               more
               any
               sense
               but
               what
               is
               drawn
               out
               of
               the
               Scripture
               .
            
             And
             most
             excellently
             f
             
               Hilary
               ,
               He
               is
               the
               best
               Reader
               ,
               who
               interprets
               sayings
               by
               sayings
               ;
               who
               brings
               not
               an
               interpretation
               to
               Scripture
               ,
               nor
               imposeth
               a
               sense
               upon
               Scripture
               ,
               but
               findeth
               a
               sense
               in
               Scripture
               ,
               and
               drawes
               it
               from
               Scripture
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             Now
             that
             we
             may
             more
             successefully
             and
             clearly
             understand
             Scripture
             by
             Scripture
             ,
             these
             ensueing
             particulars
             are
             to
             be
             observed
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             
               That
               Iesus
               Christ
               our
               Mediatour
               ,
               and
               the
               salvation
               of
               sinners
               by
               him
               ,
               is
               the
               very
               substance
               ,
               marrow
               ,
               soule
               ,
               and
               Scope
               of
               the
               whole
               Scriptures
               .
            
             As
             many
             g
             passages
             not
             obscurely
             intimate
             unto
             us
             .
             
               What
               are
               the
               whole
               Scriptures
               ,
               but
               as
               it
               were
               the
               spirituall
               swadling-cloathes
               of
               the
               Holy
               child
               Iesus
            
             ?
             1
             Christ
             is
             the
             truth
             and
             substance
             of
             all
             the
             
               types
               and
               shadows
            
             .
             2
             Christ
             is
             the
             
               matter
               and
               substance
            
             of
             the
             
               Covenant
               of
               Grace
            
             under
             all
             administrations
             therof
             ;
             under
             the
             Old-Testament
             Christ
             is
             veyled
             ,
             
             under
             the
             New
             Covenant
             Revealed
             .
             3
             Christ
             is
             the
             Center
             and
             meeting
             place
             of
             all
             the
             Promises
             ,
             for
             h
             
               in
               him
               all
               the
               promises
               of
               God
               are
               yea
               ,
               and
               they
               are
               Amen
               .
            
             4
             Christ
             is
             the
             
               thing
               signified
               ,
               sealed
               ,
               and
               exhibited
            
             in
             all
             the
             Sacraments
             of
             Old
             or
             New
             Testament
             ,
             whether
             ordinary
             or
             extraordinary
             .
             5
             Scripture
             -
             Genealogies
             are
             to
             lead
             us
             on
             to
             the
             true
             
               Line
               of
               Christ.
            
             6
             Scripture
             -
             Chronologies
             ,
             are
             to
             discover
             to
             us
             the
             
               times
               and
               seasons
               of
               Christ.
            
             7
             Scripture
             -
             lawes
             ,
             are
             i
             our
             
               Schoole-Master
               to
               bring
               us
               unto
               Christ
            
             ;
             the
             Morall
             by
             correcting
             ,
             the
             Ceremoniall
             by
             Directing
             ;
             and
             8
             Scripture
             -
             Gospel
             is
             Christs
             light
             ,
             whereby
             we
             know
             him
             ;
             k
             Christs
             voice
             whereby
             we
             heare
             and
             follow
             him
             ;
             Christs
             
               cords
               of
               love
            
             whereby
             we
             are
             drawn
             into
             sweet
             union
             and
             Communion
             with
             him
             ;
             yea
             it
             is
             the
             l
             
               power
               of
               God
               unto
               Salvation
               unto
               all
               them
               that
               believe
               in
               Christ
               Iesus
               .
            
             Keep
             therefore
             still
             Jesus
             Christ
             in
             your
             eye
             ,
             in
             the
             perusall
             of
             the
             Scripture
             as
             the
             
               end
               ,
               Scope
               ,
               and
               substance
               thereof
               .
            
             For
             as
             the
             Sunne
             gives
             light
             to
             all
             the
             heavenly
             bodies
             :
             so
             Jesus
             Christ
             m
             
               the
               Sunne
               of
               righteousnesse
            
             gives
             light
             to
             all
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             
               Still
               remember
               how
               Iesus
               Christ
               is
               revealed
               in
               Scripture
               ,
               gradually
               in
               Promises
               and
               Covenants
               ,
               till
               the
               noon
               day
               of
               the
               Gospell
               shined
               most
               clearly
               .
            
             Especially
             in
             these
             more
             remarkeable
             Periods
             of
             time
             :
             1
             To
             Adam
             immediately
             upon
             his
             fall
             ,
             most
             obscurely
             and
             imperfectly
             .
             2.
             
             To
             Noah
             more
             clearly
             then
             to
             Adam
             .
             3.
             
             To
             
               Abraham
               ,
               Isaac
            
             and
             Iacob
             more
             
             clearly
             then
             to
             Noah
             .
             4.
             
             To
             Moses
             and
             Israel
             at
             
               Mount
               Sinai
            
             more
             clearly
             then
             to
             Abraham
             .
             5.
             
             To
             David
             and
             his
             seed
             more
             clearly
             then
             to
             Moses
             .
             6.
             
             To
             Israel
             after
             the
             Babylonish
             captivity
             ,
             more
             clearly
             then
             to
             David
             .
             7.
             
             To
             the
             Church
             under
             the
             N.
             Testament
             ,
             the
             N.
             Covenant
             is
             laid
             open
             more
             clearly
             then
             to
             all
             others
             .
             For
             ,
             1
             
               God
               is
               a
               God
               of
               order
               ,
            
             and
             he
             makes
             knowne
             his
             gracious
             contrivances
             orderly
             :
             2
             Christ
             and
             salvation
             by
             him
             are
             treasures
             too
             high
             and
             precious
             to
             be
             disclosed
             all
             at
             once
             to
             the
             Church
             :
             3
             The
             state
             of
             the
             Church
             is
             various
             ,
             she
             hath
             her
             infancy
             ,
             her
             youth
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             degrees
             of
             her
             minority
             ,
             as
             also
             her
             
               riper
               age
            
             ;
             and
             therfore
             God
             revealed
             Christ
             not
             according
             to
             his
             own
             
               ability
               of
               revealing
            
             ,
             but
             according
             to
             his
             Churches
             
               capacity
               of
               receiving
            
             :
             4
             This
             gradual
             revealing
             of
             Christ
             suits
             well
             with
             our
             condition
             in
             this
             world
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             perfect
             but
             
               growing
               on
               to
               perfectiō
            
             ,
             fully
             attainable
             in
             Heaven
             only
             .
             Now
             this
             gradual
             unveiling
             of
             the
             Covenant
             and
             promises
             in
             Christ
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             much
             considered
             throughout
             the
             whole
             Scripture
             ;
             that
             we
             may
             see
             the
             wisedome
             of
             Gods
             Dispensations
             ,
             the
             Imperfection
             of
             the
             Churches
             Condition
             here
             ,
             especially
             in
             her
             minority
             ,
             and
             the
             usefulnesse
             of
             comparing
             the
             more
             dark
             and
             imperfect
             ,
             with
             the
             more
             clear
             and
             compleat
             manifestations
             of
             the
             mysteries
             of
             Gods
             grace
             in
             Christ.
             
          
           
             3.
             
             
               Well
               compare
               the
               texts
               ,
               you
               would
               understand
               ,
               with
               the
               Context
               :
               and
               note
               the
            
             n
             coherence
             .
             For
             (
             though
             some
             Scriptures
             are
             laid
             
             downe
             in
             certain
             independing
             Aphorismes
             ,
             like
             an
             heap
             of
             gold
             rings
             or
             distinct
             Jewels
             ,
             as
             most
             part
             of
             the
             Proverbs
             ;
             yet
             )
             the
             generality
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             is
             concatenated
             or
             linked
             together
             part
             with
             part
             like
             a
             golden
             chaine
             ,
             intwisted
             or
             woven
             together
             like
             a
             curious
             
               silken
               web
            
             ,
             one
             thing
             so
             depending
             upon
             another
             ,
             as
             o
             that
             they
             mutually
             help
             to
             the
             interpreting
             of
             one
             another
             .
             Consider
             therefore
             still
             the
             coherence
             and
             dependance
             ,
             otherwise
             you
             will
             runne
             into
             a
             thousand
             misunderstandings
             .
             As
             where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             p
             
               If
               the
               righteous
               scarcely
               be
               saved
               ,
               where
               &c.
               
            
             A
             weak
             Christian
             perhaps
             is
             discouraged
             hereby
             ,
             thinks
             he
             shall
             scarce
             ever
             come
             to
             heaven
             :
             now
             the
             context
             clears
             it
             ,
             for
             the
             Apostle
             speaks
             q
             
               that
               judgement
            
             [
             or
             affliction
             ]
             
               must
               begin
               at
               the
               house
               of
               God
               ,
            
             Gods
             people
             ;
             and
             thence
             argues
             to
             the
             certainty
             of
             wicked
             mens
             greater
             punishments
             :
             so
             that
             here
             [
             
               scarcely
               be
               saved
            
             ]
             is
             to
             be
             understood
             not
             of
             
               spirituall
               and
               eternal
               salvation
            
             from
             hell
             ,
             but
             of
             
               temporall
               salvation
            
             from
             temporall
             afflictions
             and
             persecutions
             ,
             from
             which
             the
             righteous
             shall
             not
             be
             free
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             
               Compare
               dark
               places
               with
               clearer
            
             ,
             what
             is
             in
             one
             place
             veyled
             ,
             is
             in
             another
             oft-times
             unveyled
             .
             As
             ,
             with
             Parables
             r
             conferre
             the
             exposition
             ;
             with
             visions
             ,
             s
             the
             Interpretation
             ;
             with
             laws
             ,
             t
             the
             explication
             thereof
             ,
             &c.
             
             For
             as
             u
             Augustine
             hath
             observed
             ,
             
               In
               those
               things
               that
               are
               plainly
               laid
               downe
               in
               Scripture
               ,
               are
               found
               all
               things
               containing
               faith
               and
               manners
               ;
               and
               places
               obscure
               are
               to
               be
               illustrated
               by
               those
               that
               are
               manifest
               .
            
          
           
           
             5.
             
             
               Explaine
               those
               places
               ,
               wherein
               any
               matter
               or
               subject
               of
               Divinity
               is
               touched
               only
               occasionally
               or
               accidentally
               ,
               with
               sundry
               other
               places
               wherein
               it
               is
               handled
               and
               insisted
               upon
               purposely
               and
               professedly
               ,
               which
               are
               the
               very
               seate
               and
               chief
               fountain
               of
               the
               Argument
               .
            
             As
             if
             you
             would
             understand
             
               Iames
               ,
               c
            
             2.
             touching
             justification
             by
             works
             as
             well
             as
             faith
             ,
             where
             justification
             is
             spoken
             of
             more
             accidentally
             ;
             compare
             it
             with
             the
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Romans
             ,
             c.
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4
             &c.
             wherein
             justification
             is
             purposely
             and
             fully
             handled
             .
             So
             if
             you
             would
             truly
             understand
             any
             texts
             about
             the
             matter
             of
             Creation
             ,
             consult
             with
             places
             where
             the
             Creation
             is
             professedly
             handled
             ,
             as
             in
             
               Gen.
               c.
            
             1.
             and
             c.
             2.
             and
             Psal.
             104.
             
          
           
             6.
             
             
               Parallel
               Types
               ,
               with
               Anti-Types
               or
               things
               typified
               .
            
             The
             Types
             more
             familiarly
             lead
             us
             to
             the
             understanding
             and
             apprehending
             of
             things
             typified
             ,
             and
             consequently
             more
             firmly
             fix
             them
             in
             our
             memories
             :
             The
             Anti-types
             more
             evidently
             unfold
             and
             unveyle
             the
             Types
             unto
             us
             .
             As
             ,
             the
             Type
             of
             the
             
               brazen
               Serpent
            
             ,
             x
             paralleld
             with
             
               Christ
               the
               truth
            
             .
             The
             Type
             of
             Mannah
             ,
             y
             
               and
               water
               out
               of
               the
               Rock
               ,
            
             with
             the
             Anti-type
             Christ
             ,
             
               whose
               body
               and
               bloud
               are
               meat
               and
               drinke
               indeed
               ,
            
             &c.
             
          
           
             7.
             
             
               Carefully
               ponder
               what
               Prophecyes
               and
               Promises
               are
               already
               actually
               fulfilled
               ,
               and
               what
               remain
               further
               to
               be
               fulfilled
               in
               their
               season
               .
            
             For
             so
             farre
             as
             any
             Scripture
             clearly
             testifies
             the
             fulfilling
             of
             any
             of
             them
             ,
             so
             farre
             we
             have
             a
             clear
             and
             undoubted
             Commentary
             
             upon
             them
             ,
             As
             Isa.
             7.14
             .
             fulfilled
             and
             so
             cleared
             ,
             Matth.
             1.22
             ,
             23.
             
             So
             Exod.
             12.46
             .
             fulfilled
             and
             cleared
             ,
             Iohn
             19.26
             .
             So
             Isa
             61.1
             ,
             2.
             fulfilled
             and
             cleared
             ,
             Luk.
             4.18
             ,
             19.21
             .
             with
             many
             such
             like
             ;
             And
             where
             Prophecyes
             or
             Promises
             are
             found
             to
             be
             yet
             unfulfilled
             ,
             we
             shall
             thereby
             be
             incited
             to
             study
             them
             ,
             and
             the
             intended
             time
             of
             their
             Accomplishment
             ,
             exercising
             faith
             and
             prayer
             thereupon
             .
          
           
             8.
             
             
               Finally
               ,
               Parallel
               heedfully
               the
               Old
               and
               New
               Testament
               together
            
             ;
             and
             specially
             all
             those
             places
             in
             the
             Old
             Testament
             ,
             which
             are
             in
             any
             respect
             alledged
             in
             the
             New
             Testament
             ,
             whether
             1
             
               the
               phrase
               and
               words
               only
               ,
               or
            
             2
             
               the
               sense
               and
               matter
               only
               ,
               or
            
             3
             
               both
               words
               and
               matter
            
             ,
             be
             cited
             .
             This
             would
             give
             wonderfull
             light
             to
             many
             hundreds
             of
             passages
             in
             the
             Bible
             .
             And
             for
             this
             end
             I
             have
             with
             much
             care
             and
             diligence
             compiled
             ,
             
               a
               Parallel
               of
               the
               Places
               of
               the
               Old
               Testament
               ,
               any
               way
               alledged
               in
               the
               New
            
             ;
             and
             had
             once
             resolved
             to
             have
             inserted
             it
             in
             this
             place
             ;
             But
             to
             avoid
             prolixity
             ,
             I
             must
             now
             forbeare
             it
             ,
             least
             the
             Porch
             prove
             too
             big
             for
             the
             building
             .
          
        
         
           
             IX
             .
             Rule
             .
          
           
             The
             last
             Direction
             I
             shall
             commend
             to
             the
             Reader
             for
             the
             improvement
             of
             heavenly
             dexterity
             in
             ,
             and
             understanding
             of
             the
             holy
             Scriptures
             ,
             is
             ;
             
               Endeavour
               sincerely
               to
               practise
               Scripture
               ,
               and
               you
               shall
               solidly
               understand
               Scripture
               ▪
            
             z
             Bernard
             said
             truely
             ,
             
               He
               rightly
               reads
               the
               Scriptures
               that
               turne●s
               Words
               into
               workes
               ;
               Knowing
            
             into
             Doing
             .
             The
             mightiest
             man
             in
             practise
             ,
             
             will
             in
             the
             end
             prove
             the
             mightiest
             man
             in
             Scripture
             .
             Theory
             is
             the
             guide
             of
             Practice
             ,
             Practise
             the
             Life
             of
             Theory
             .
             Where
             Scripture-contemplation
             and
             experience
             meet
             both
             together
             in
             the
             same
             person
             ,
             true
             Scripture
             understanding
             must
             needs
             be
             heightned
             and
             doubled
             .
             To
             this
             effect
             is
             Christs
             promise
             a
             
               My
               Doctrine
               is
               not
               mine
               ,
               but
               his
               that
               sent
               me
               .
               If
               any
               man
               will
               do
               his
               will
               ,
               he
               shall
               know
               of
               the
               doctrine
               ,
               whether
               it
               be
               of
               God.
            
             To
             like
             purpose
             subscribes
             the
             experience
             of
             David
             .
             b
             
               Thou
               through
               thy
               Commandements
               hast
               made
               me
               wiser
               then
               mine
               enemies
               :
               for
               they
               are
               ever
               with
               me
               .
               I
               have
               more
               understanding
               then
               all
               my
               Teachers
               :
               for
               thy
               testimonies
               are
               my
               meditation
               .
               I
               understand
               more
               then
               the
               Antients
               ;
               because
               I
               keep
               thy
               Precepts
               .
            
          
           
             These
             things
             (
             Christian
             Reader
             )
             I
             thought
             fit
             to
             commend
             to
             thee
             by
             way
             of
             Preface
             ;
             But
             shall
             detaine
             thee
             no
             longer
             from
             the
             Perusall
             of
             the
             Book
             it selfe
             .
             The
             Lord
             ,
             that
             c
             
               teacheth
               his
               people
               to
               profit
            
             ,
             advance
             thy
             spiritual
             profiting
             abundantly
             by
             both
             :
             So
             prayeth
          
           
             
               He
               who
               earnestly
               desires
               to
               be
               serviceable
               to
               Iesus
               Christ
               ,
               and
               usefull
               to
               his
               Church
               and
               people
               ,
               Fran.
               Roberts
               .
            
             
               Augustine's
               ,
               London
               ,
               
                 Aug.
                 26
                 —
                 1647
              
               
                 Aug.
                 21
                 —
                 1648
              
            
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           CLAVIS
           BIBLIORVM
           .
           THE
           KEY
           OF
           THE
           BIBLE
           :
           Unlocking
           The
           richest
           Treasury
           of
           the
           Holy
           Scriptures
           .
        
         
           THE
           HOLY
           SCRIPTURES
           ,
           Rom.
           1.2
           .
           were
           written
           by
           Moses
           ,
           the
           Prophets
           ,
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           and
           other
           
             holy
             men
             of
             God
          
           ,
           Luk.
           16.29.31
           .
           Eph.
           2.20
           .
           and
           3.5
           .
           and
           2
           Pet.
           1.21
           .
           The
           Covenant
           of
           God
           with
           man
           in
           Christ
           the
           Mediatour
           ,
           that
           substantiall
           or
           begotten
           WORD
           ,
           
           Iohn
           1.1
           .
           is
           the
           Principall
           Subject
           Revealed
           and
           explained
           in
           the
           whole
           Scripturall
           ,
           or
           written
           WORD
           .
        
         
           Gods
           COVENANT
           with
           man
           in
           Christ
           is
           represented
           to
           us
           in
           Holy
           Scripture
           principally
           two
           wayes
           .
           viz.
           1.
           
           
             As
             Promised
          
           ,
           fore-prophecied
           and
           typified
           In
           Christ
           to
           be
           manifested
           afterwards
           in
           the
           flesh
           .
           Hence
           called
           
             the
             Covenants
             of
             Promise
          
           ,
           Eph.
           2.10
           .
           Covenants
           ,
           not
           Covenant
           :
           because
           of
           the
           severall
           Publications
           of
           the
           Covenant
           with
           more
           and
           more
           Augmentations
           ,
           in
           severall
           Points
           or
           Periods
           of
           time
           .
           Thus
           the
           Covenant
           is
           made
           known
           in
           all
           the
           Bookes
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           written
           before
           Christs
           comming
           :
           which
           are
           therefore
           called
           the
           OLD-COVENANT
           ,
           Heb.
           8.13
           .
           or
           the
           OLD-TESTAMENT
           ,
           2
           Cor.
           3.14
           .
        
         
           2.
           
           
             As
             performed
          
           ,
           fulfilled
           and
           actually
           accomplished
           in
           Christ
           already
           come
           ,
           and
           manifested
           in
           our
           flesh
           
             in
             fulnesse
             of
             time
          
           ,
           Gal.
           4.4
           ,
           5.
           
           Heb.
           9.
           
           Heb.
           10.
           
           Thus
           the
           Covenant
           is
           most
           clearly
           and
           fully
           unveyled
           to
           us
           in
           all
           the
           Books
           of
           Scripture
           written
           since
           Christs
           coming
           ;
           
           
           
           
           which
           are
           therefore
           stiled
           the
           NEW
           COVENANT
           or
           the
           NEW
           TESTAMENT
           Heb.
           8.8
           .
           Matth.
           26.28
           .
           Heb.
           9.15
           .
        
         
           Thus
           the
           whole
           BIBLE
           is
           distributed
           into
           the
           1
           
             Old
             ;
             and
          
           2
           
             New
             Testament
          
           .
        
         
           
             THE
             OLD
             TESTAMENT
             .
             
          
           
             THE
             OLD
             TESTAMENT
             ,
             (
             revealing
             
               the
               Covenants
               of
               promise
            
             )
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             Penmen
             whom
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             imployed
             to
             write
             the
             Books
             thereof
             ,
             is
             disparted
             by
             the
             Holy
             Ghost
             himselfe
             into
             two
             generall
             heads
             ,
             viz.
             1
             
               Moses
               ,
               and
            
             2
             
               the
               Prophets
            
             ,
             Luk.
             16.29.31
             .
             and
             24.27
             .
             Iohn
             1.45
             .
             or
             ,
             
               The
               Law
               of
               Moses
               ;
               and
               the
               Prophets
               ,
            
             Act.
             28.23
             .
          
           
             
               J.
               MOSES
               .
            
             
               MOSES
               (
               
                 the
                 man
                 of
                 God
              
               ,
               Psal.
               90.1
               .
               The
               first
               Penman
               of
               Scripture
               :
               )
               was
               an
               Ebrew
               borne
               in
               Egypt
               ,
               after
               the
               worlds
               creation
               about
               2432
               years
               ,
               before
               Christ
               about
               1496.
               years
               ;
               *
               
                 The
                 
                 seventh
                 from
                 Abraham
              
               ,
               the
               father
               of
               the
               faithfull
               ,
               1
               Chron.
               6.1
               ,
               2
               ,
               3.
               and
               2.1
               .
               and
               1.34
               .
               As
               Enoch
               was
               
                 the
                 seventh
                 from
              
               Adam
               the
               father
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               Iude
               14.
               
               When
               Moses
               was
               borne
               
                 he
                 was
                 very
                 fair
                 ,
                 Act.
              
               7.20
               ,
               21
               ,
               22.
               
               He
               was
               marvellously
               saved
               from
               death
               being
               drawne
               out
               of
               the
               water
               ,
               whence
               his
               name
               MOSES
               ,
               
                 i.
                 e.
                 Drawn-forth
              
               ,
               was
               given
               to
               him
               ,
               Exod.
               2
               10
               He
               was
               nourished
               by
               King
               Pharao●s
               daughter
               
                 for
                 her
                 own
                 sonne
                 ,
                 Ex.
              
               2.9
               ,
               10.
               
               Act.
               7.21
               .
               
                 Learned
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 wisedome
                 of
                 the
                 Egyptians
                 ,
                 and
                 mighty
                 in
                 words
                 and
                 in
                 deeds
                 ,
              
               Act.
               7.22
               .
               He
               lived
               in
               Pharaohs
               Court
               40.
               years
               ,
               and
               then
               left
               the
               Court
               ,
               
                 choosing
                 rather
                 to
                 suffer
                 affliction
                 with
                 the
                 people
                 of
                 God
                 ,
              
               &c
               ,
               Act.
               7.23
               .
               Heb.
               11.24
               ,
               25
               ,
               26.
               
               
                 He
                 was
                 a
                 stranger
              
               ,
               a
               shepheard
               
                 in
                 the
                 land
                 of
              
               Madian
               40.
               years
               ,
               Act.
               7.29.30
               .
               Exod.
               3.
               thence
               God
               called
               him
               to
               feed
               Iacob
               his
               people
               ,
               and
               Israel
               his
               inheritance
               .
               He
               fed
               Israel
               most
               faithfully
               40.
               years
               ,
               Numb
               .
               12.7
               .
               Heb.
               3.2.5
               .
               being
               
                 in
                 the
                 Church
                 in
                 the
                 wildernesse
                 ,
              
               Act.
               7.38
               .
               with
               the
               Angel
               that
               spoke
               to
               him
               on
               
                 Mount
                 Sinai
              
               ,
               and
               with
               our
               fathers
               ,
               where
               he
               received
               the
               
                 lively
                 Oracles
                 
                 to
                 give
                 unto
                 us
                 ,
              
               and
               commanded
               us
               a
               law
               which
               is
               the
               inheritance
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               Iacob
               ,
               Deut.
               33.4
               .
               
                 Of
                 all
                 the
                 Prophets
                 that
                 arose
                 in
              
               Israel
               ,
               
                 there
                 was
                 none
                 like
              
               Moses
               
                 whom
                 God
                 knew
                 face
                 to
                 face
                 ,
              
               Deut.
               34.10
               .
               He
               dyed
               120.
               years
               old
               ,
               
                 his
                 eye
                 not
                 being
                 dimme
                 nor
                 his
                 naturall
                 strength
                 abated
                 ,
              
               and
               was
               buried
               of
               God
               ,
               no
               man
               knowing
               of
               his
               sepulcher
               to
               this
               day
               .
               Deut.
               34.5.6.7
               .
            
             
               MOSES
               wrote
               the
               Law
               of
               God
               in
               the
               five
               first
               Bookes
               ,
               called
               in
               Greek
               the
               Pentateuch
               ,
               i.
               e.
               
                 The
                 five-fold-volume
              
               .
               At
               first
               it
               seemes
               to
               be
               written
               
                 in
                 one
                 volume
              
               or
               Roll
               ,
               there
               being
               such
               a
               continued
               connection
               of
               Book
               with
               Book
               ,
               Exod.
               1.1
               .
               Levit.
               1.1
               .
               Num.
               1.1
               .
               Deut.
               1.1
               .
               But
               was
               afterwards
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               several
               subject
               matters
               therin
               contained
               ,
               divided
               into
               
                 five
                 severall
                 Books
              
               ,
               Containing
               1
               An
               History
               of
               things
               past
               :
               2
               A
               Covenant
               between
               God
               and
               his
               Church
               then
               present
               :
               3
               And
               a
               Prophecy
               of
               further
               grace
               to
               come
               ,
               now
               exhibited
               by
               Iesus
               Christ
               ,
               Deut.
               18.15
               .
               &c.
               Iohn
               5.46
               .
               and
               1.17
               .
               
                 In
                 Propounding
                 of
                 which
                 things
              
               ,
               (
               as
               Ainsworth
               observes
               )
               
                 Moses
                 hath
                 a
                 veile
                 upon
                 his
                 glorious
                 
                 face
                 :
                 for
                 in
                 the
                 Histories
                 are
                 implied
                 Allegories
                 ,
              
               Gal.
               2.24
               .
               
                 And
                 in
                 the
                 Lawes
                 are
                 types
                 and
                 shadows
                 of
                 good
                 things
                 to
                 come
                 ;
                 the
                 body
                 whereof
                 is
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
              
               Heb.
               9.9
               .
               and
               10.1
               .
               Col.
               2.17
               .
               In
               Genesis
               (
               
                 which
                 History
                 endeth
                 with
              
               Israels
               
                 going
                 downe
                 into
              
               Egypt
               ,
               )
               
                 we
                 have
                 the
                 image
                 of
                 a
                 naturall
                 man
                 ,
                 fallen
                 from
                 God
                 into
                 the
                 bondage
                 of
                 sin
                 .
                 In
              
               Exodus
               ,
               
                 is
                 the
                 type
                 of
                 our
                 Regeneration
                 ,
                 and
                 State
                 renewed
                 by
                 Iesus
                 Christ.
                 In
              
               Leviticus
               
                 the
                 shadow
                 of
                 our
                 mortification
                 ,
                 whilst
                 we
                 are
                 made
                 sacrifices
                 unto
                 God.
                 In
              
               Numbers
               ,
               
                 our
                 spirituall
                 warfare
                 ,
                 whereunto
                 we
                 are
                 mustered
                 ,
                 and
                 armed
                 to
                 ●ight
                 the
                 good
                 fight
                 of
                 faith
                 .
                 In
              
               Deuteronomie
               ,
               
                 the
                 Doctrine
                 of
                 our
                 sanctification
                 ,
                 and
                 Preparation
                 to
                 enter
                 into
                 our
                 heavenly
              
               Canaan
               ,
               after
               Moses
               
                 death
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 conduct
                 of
              
               Iesus
               
                 the
                 son
                 of
                 God.
              
               So
               H.
               Ainsworth
               in
               his
               Preface
               before
               his
               Annotat.
               on
               Gen.
               &c.
               
            
             
               
                 Genesis
                 .
              
               
                 
                 GENESIS
                 
                   i.
                   e.
                   Generation
                
                 ,
                 so
                 called
                 by
                 the
                 Greek
                 ;
                 because
                 it
                 
                 sets
                 forth
                 the
                 
                   Generations
                   of
                   the
                   heavens
                   &
                   of
                   the
                   earth
                   ,
                
                 in
                 their
                 first
                 creation
                 ,
                 Gen.
                 2.4
                 .
                 The
                 Hebrews
                 name
                 their
                 Books
                 of
                 the
                 Old
                 Testament
                 ,
                 either
                 1
                 From
                 the
                 Prophets
                 ,
                 the
                 Penmen
                 of
                 them
                 .
                 Or
                 2
                 From
                 the
                 Principall
                 subject
                 or
                 Argument
                 handled
                 in
                 them
                 :
                 Or
                 3
                 From
                 the
                 
                   first
                   Hebrew
                   word
                
                 wherewith
                 they
                 begin
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 5.
                 
                 Books
                 of
                 Moses
                 ,
                 &
                 the
                 
                   Lament
                   .
                   of
                
                 Ieremiah
                 .
                 Hence
                 Genesis
                 is
                 called
                 in
                 Hebrew
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Bereschith
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   In
                   the
                   beginning
                
                 .
              
               
                 Penman
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 not
                 probable
                 this
                 Book
                 was
                 written
                 by
                 Moses
                 whilst
                 a
                 
                   Private
                   man
                
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 shepheard
                 in
                 Madian
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 desert
                 :
                 but
                 rather
                 after
                 he
                 was
                 a
                 
                   Publick
                   person
                
                 ,
                 and
                 furnished
                 with
                 a
                 Prophetick
                 spirit
                 ;
                 otherwise
                 the
                 credit
                 and
                 authority
                 of
                 this
                 History
                 would
                 be
                 too
                 much
                 enfeebled
                 .
                 Nor
                 is
                 it
                 absurd
                 which
                 some
                 Hebrew
                 writers
                 think
                 ,
                 who
                 referre
                 this
                 writing
                 to
                 that
                 of
                 Exod
                 .
                 24.12
                 .
                 
                   Come
                   up
                   to
                   me
                   into
                   the
                   mount
                   ,
                   and
                   be
                   thou
                   there
                   ,
                   and
                   I
                   will
                   give
                   thee
                   the
                   Tables
                   of
                   stone
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   Law
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   Precepts
                   ,
                   which
                   I
                   have
                   written
                   to
                   teach
                   them
                   .
                
                 Understanding
                 by
                 the
                 Tables
                 ,
                 the
                 Decalogue
                 :
                 by
                 the
                 Precepts
                 all
                 the
                 
                   Ceremoniall
                   ,
                   
                   and
                   Iudiciall
                   Ordinances
                   :
                
                 and
                 by
                 the
                 Law
                 all
                 other
                 writings
                 of
                 Moses
                 ,
                 whether
                 
                   Historicall
                   or
                   Dogmaticall
                   ,
                   D.
                   Paraeus
                   in
                   Prolegom
                   .
                   in
                   Genes
                   .
                   p.
                
                 14.15
                 .
                 
                   in
                   fol.
                
                 
              
               
                 This
                 Book
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 absolutely
                 the
                 ancientest
                 writing
                 extant
                 in
                 the
                 world
                 :
                 so
                 it
                 is
                 most
                 compendious
                 ;
                 being
                 an
                 History
                 of
                 2369
                 years
                 ,
                 as
                 Ainsw
                 .
                 thinks
                 ,
                 or
                 rather
                 of
                 2368
                 as
                 Iunius
                 and
                 Paraeus
                 comput
                 .
                 
                   Iun.
                   Annot.
                   in
                   Gen.
                
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Parae
                   .
                   Prologom
                   .
                   in
                   Genes
                   .
                
                 This
                 may
                 appeare
                 in
                 three
                 eminent
                 Intervals
                 or
                 Periods
                 of
                 time
                 recorded
                 in
                 Genesis
                 .
                 viz.
                 
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       From
                       the
                       Creation
                       to
                       the
                       beginning
                       of
                       the
                       flood
                       ,
                    
                     in
                     Noahs
                     600
                     th
                     yeare
                     ,
                     through
                     10
                     Generations
                     ;
                     1656
                     yeares
                     .
                     Gen.
                     5.
                     and
                     6.11
                     .
                     viz.
                     From
                     Adams
                     Creation
                     to
                     Seth's
                     Nativity
                     ,
                     130
                     years
                     .
                     From
                     Seth
                     to
                     Enos
                     ,
                     105.
                     
                     From
                     Enos
                     to
                     Cainan
                     90.
                     
                     From
                     Cainan
                     to
                     Mahalee●
                     70.
                     
                     From
                     Mahaleel
                     to
                     Iared
                     ▪
                     65.
                     
                     From
                     Iared
                     to
                     Enoch
                     ,
                     162.
                     
                     From
                     Enoch
                     to
                     Mathusalah
                     .
                     65.
                     
                     From
                     Mathusalah
                     to
                     Lamech
                     ,
                     187.
                     
                     From
                     Lamech
                     to
                     Noah's
                     birth
                     ,
                     182.
                     
                     From
                     Noah's
                     birth
                     to
                     the
                     beginning
                     of
                     the
                     flood
                     ,
                     600
                     in
                     all
                     1656.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     The
                     second
                     Period
                     of
                     time
                     ,
                     is
                     ;
                     
                       From
                       the
                       beginning
                       of
                       the
                       flood
                       ,
                       through
                       other
                    
                     10
                     
                     
                       Generations
                       to
                    
                     Abrahams
                     birth
                     ,
                     352
                     years
                     ,
                     Gen.
                     11.
                     viz.
                     From
                     the
                     Flood
                     to
                     Arphaxad
                     ,
                     2
                     years
                     .
                     From
                     Arphaxad
                     to
                     Selah
                     ,
                     35
                     years
                     .
                     From
                     Selah
                     to
                     Heber
                     ,
                     30
                     years
                     From
                     Eber
                     to
                     Peleg
                     ,
                     34
                     years
                     .
                     From
                     Peleg
                     to
                     Reu
                     ,
                     30
                     years
                     .
                     From
                     Reu
                     to
                     Serug
                     ,
                     32
                     years
                     .
                     From
                     Serug
                     to
                     Nachor
                     ,
                     30
                     years
                     .
                     From
                     Nachor
                     to
                     Terah
                     ,
                     29
                     years
                     .
                     From
                     Terah
                     to
                     Abraham
                     ,
                     130
                     years
                     .
                     In
                     all
                     352
                     years
                     .
                     So
                     that
                     Abraham
                     was
                     borne
                     in
                     the
                     2008
                     yeare
                     from
                     the
                     Creation
                     .
                  
                   
                     III.
                     The
                     third
                     Period
                     ,
                     is
                     ;
                     From
                     Abrahams
                     
                       birth
                       to
                    
                     Josephs
                     
                       death
                       ,
                       through
                       foure
                       Generations
                    
                     ,
                     360
                     years
                     ,
                     viz.
                     From
                     Birth
                     of
                     Abraham
                     to
                     the
                     birth
                     of
                     Isaac
                     ,
                     100
                     years
                     ,
                     Gen.
                     17.17
                     .
                     and
                     21.5
                     .
                     From
                     Isaacs
                     birth
                     to
                     Iacobs
                     birth
                     ,
                     60
                     years
                     ,
                     Gen.
                     25.26
                     .
                     From
                     Iacobs
                     birth
                     to
                     his
                     going
                     down
                     into
                     Egypt
                     ,
                     130
                     years
                     ,
                     Gen.
                     47.9
                     .
                     From
                     Iacobs
                     descent
                     into
                     Egypt
                     to
                     his
                     death
                     ,
                     17
                     years
                     ,
                     Gen.
                     47.28
                     .
                     From
                     death
                     of
                     Iacob
                     to
                     the
                     death
                     of
                     Ioseph
                     53
                     years
                     ,
                     which
                     may
                     be
                     thus
                     gathered
                     .
                     Ioseph
                     died
                     when
                     he
                     was
                     110
                     years
                     old
                     ,
                     Gen.
                     50.26
                     .
                     He
                     stood
                     before
                     Pharaoh
                     when
                     he
                     was
                     30
                     years
                     old
                     ,
                     Gen.
                     41.46
                     .
                     After
                     the
                     seven
                     years
                     
                     of
                     plenty
                     ,
                     in
                     the
                     third
                     yeare
                     of
                     famine
                     Iacob
                     came
                     into
                     Egypt
                     ,
                     in
                     the
                     one
                     hundred
                     and
                     thirtieth
                     yeare
                     of
                     Iacob
                     ,
                     and
                     fourtieth
                     yeare
                     of
                     
                       Ioseph
                       ,
                       Gen.
                    
                     45.6
                     .
                     Ioseph
                     lived
                     with
                     his
                     father
                     in
                     Egypt
                     seventeen
                     years
                     .
                     Therefore
                     when
                     his
                     father
                     dyed
                     ,
                     Ioseph
                     was
                     57
                     years
                     old
                     .
                     Consequently
                     he
                     lived
                     after
                     his
                     fathers
                     death
                     53
                     years
                     ,
                     Gen.
                     50.26
                     .
                     So
                     that
                     the
                     totall
                     of
                     this
                     third
                     Intervall
                     ,
                     amounts
                     to
                     360
                     years
                     .
                     And
                     therefore
                     1656
                     and
                     352
                     and
                     360
                     being
                     added
                     together
                     :
                     This
                     History
                     of
                     Genesis
                     ,
                     is
                     evidently
                     an
                     History
                     of
                     2368
                     yeares
                     continuance
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   The
                   scope
                
                 of
                 Genesis
                 ,
                 is
                 to
                 set
                 forth
                 ,
                 The
                 Generation
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 :
                 The
                 corruption
                 thereof
                 by
                 sin
                 :
                 The
                 Restauration
                 thereof
                 by
                 Christ
                 the
                 seed
                 of
                 the
                 woman
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 the
                 Government
                 of
                 the
                 old
                 world
                 before
                 the
                 flood
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 foll●●ing
                 world
                 after
                 the
                 flood
                 ,
                 especially
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 God
                 in
                 particular
                 families
                 in
                 both
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                   of
                   this
                   Book
                
                 .
                 In
                 Genesis
                 are
                 described
                 ▪
                 
                   
                   
                     I.
                     The
                     Originall
                     1
                     Of
                     the
                     world
                     .
                     chap.
                     1.
                     2.
                     
                     Of
                     Mankinde
                     ,
                     and
                     so
                     of
                     the
                     Church
                     .
                     ch
                     .
                     2.3
                     .
                     Of
                     sinne
                     and
                     punishment
                     thereof
                     ,
                     ch
                     .
                     3.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     The
                     Government
                     .
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         Of
                         the
                         
                           Old
                           World
                        
                         before
                         the
                         Flood
                         ,
                         where
                         are
                         1.
                         
                         The
                         Propogation
                         of
                         sin
                         and
                         punishment
                         from
                         Adam
                         to
                         posterity
                         .
                         c.
                         4.
                         2.
                         
                         Preservation
                         of
                         the
                         Church
                         in
                         the
                         sinfull
                         world
                         .
                         c.
                         5.
                         3.
                         
                         
                           Iudgements
                           of
                           God
                        
                         upon
                         the
                         world
                         ,
                         Foretold
                         .
                         c.
                         6.
                         
                         Inflicted
                         ,
                         c.
                         7.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         Of
                         the
                         
                           World
                           following
                        
                         after
                         the
                         Flood
                         ;
                         according
                         to
                         the
                         times
                         of
                         divers
                         renowned
                         Patriarchs
                         ,
                         
                           Noah
                           ,
                           Abraham
                           ,
                           Isaac
                           ,
                           Iacob
                           .
                        
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             Noah
                             ,
                             whose
                             1
                             Deliverance
                             from
                             the
                             Flood
                             c.
                             8.
                             2.
                             
                             Benediction
                             .
                             c.
                             9.
                             3.
                             
                             Family
                             ,
                             1
                             as
                             united
                             ,
                             c.
                             10.
                             2
                             as
                             dispersed
                             c.
                             11.
                             are
                             recorded
                             .
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             Abraham
                             ,
                             touching
                             whom
                             are
                             laid
                             down
                             1
                             
                               His
                               Calling
                            
                             from
                             his
                             Country
                             and
                             kindred
                             c.
                             12.1
                             to
                             ver
                             .
                             10.
                             2.
                             
                             
                               His
                               going
                               down
                            
                             ,
                             Into
                             Egypt
                             ,
                             ver
                             .
                             10.
                             to
                             the
                             end
                             ,
                             Into
                             Canaan
                             c.
                             13.
                             3.
                             
                             
                               His
                               rescuing
                               of
                               Lot
                            
                             ,
                             c.
                             14.
                             4.
                             
                             
                               His
                               dealing
                               with
                               God
                            
                             ,
                             who
                             ,
                             1
                             Promises
                             him
                             issue
                             c.
                             15.
                             2
                             
                             Performes
                             to
                             him
                             by
                             Hagar
                             .
                             c.
                             16.
                             3
                             
                             Makes
                             a
                             Covenant
                             with
                             Abraham
                             ;
                             whereof
                             
                             note
                             ,
                             The
                             forme
                             c.
                             17.
                             
                             The
                             fruit
                             or
                             effect
                             of
                             it
                             1
                             
                               On
                               Gods
                               part
                            
                             ,
                             viz.
                             Communication
                             of
                             his
                             Counsels
                             to
                             him
                             .
                             ch
                             .
                             18.
                             and
                             of
                             his
                             Benefits
                             ch
                             .
                             19
                             ,
                             20
                             ,
                             21.
                             2
                             
                             
                               On
                               Abrahams
                               part
                            
                             divers
                             sweet
                             fruits
                             ,
                             viz.
                             1
                             The
                             obedience
                             of
                             his
                             faith
                             ,
                             c.
                             22.
                             2
                             
                             His
                             Humanity
                             c.
                             23.
                             3
                             
                             His
                             Piety
                             in
                             the
                             matching
                             of
                             his
                             sonne
                             c.
                             24.
                             
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             Isaac
                             ,
                             whose
                             1
                             Posterity
                             ,
                             c.
                             25.
                             2.
                             
                             Peregrination
                             into
                             the
                             land
                             of
                             
                               Egypt
                               ,
                               c.
                            
                             26.
                             3.
                             
                             Benediction
                             of
                             his
                             two
                             sons
                             ,
                             c.
                             27.
                             are
                             mentioned
                             .
                          
                           
                             4.
                             
                             Iacob
                             ,
                             whose
                             
                               three
                               Peregrinations
                            
                             are
                             declared
                             .
                             viz.
                             I.
                             
                               Into
                               Mesopotamia
                            
                             ,
                             wherin
                             note
                             ,
                             1.
                             
                             His
                             journey
                             c.
                             28.
                             2.
                             
                             His
                             Arrivall
                             and
                             marriage
                             ,
                             c.
                             29.
                             3.
                             
                             His
                             increase
                             in
                             goods
                             ,
                             and
                             children
                             c.
                             30.
                             
                             II.
                             
                               Into
                               Canaan
                            
                             ,
                             where
                             observe
                             ,
                             His
                             passage
                             hither
                             ,
                             c.
                             31.
                             4
                             
                             His
                             abode
                             there
                             ,
                             where
                             the
                             things
                             that
                             befell
                             him
                             are
                             recited
                             ,
                             viz.
                             1.
                             
                             His
                             meeting
                             of
                             his
                             brother
                             Esau
                             ,
                             with
                             1
                             preparation
                             for
                             it
                             ,
                             c.
                             32.
                             2
                             manner
                             of
                             it
                             ,
                             c.
                             33.
                             
                             His
                             daughter
                             Dinah's
                             defilement
                             c.
                             34.
                             2.
                             
                             Rachels
                             death
                             c.
                             35.
                             
                             &
                             3.
                             
                             Isaacs
                             death
                             and
                             buriall
                             by
                             Iacob
                             and
                             Esau
                             ,
                             where
                             is
                             mentioned
                             Esaus
                             
                             race
                             ,
                             c
                             35.36
                             .
                             Selling
                             of
                             
                               Ioseph
                               c.
                            
                             37.
                             
                             Incest
                             of
                             
                               Iudah
                               ,
                               c.
                            
                             38.
                             
                             III.
                             
                               Into
                               Egypt
                            
                             :
                             of
                             which
                             Peregrination
                             of
                             Iacob
                             ,
                             are
                             mentioned
                             ,
                             
                               The
                               Antecedents
                               ,
                               The
                               Manner
                               ,
                               and
                               Consequents
                               .
                               Antecedents
                               .
                            
                             viz.
                             1.
                             
                             Iosephs
                             being
                             made
                             knowne
                             to
                             the
                             Egyptians
                             ,
                             and
                             to
                             his
                             owne
                             kindred
                             .
                             To
                             the
                             Egyptians
                             in
                             Prison
                             ,
                             c.
                             39.48
                             .
                             out
                             of
                             Prison
                             to
                             the
                             King
                             and
                             his
                             people
                             .
                             c.
                             41.
                             
                             To
                             his
                             owne
                             ,
                             Not
                             at
                             their
                             first
                             coming
                             into
                             Egypt
                             to
                             buy
                             corne
                             .
                             c.
                             42.
                             
                             But
                             at
                             their
                             second
                             coming
                             ,
                             c.
                             43.44.45
                             .
                             where
                             all
                             the
                             circumstances
                             thereof
                             are
                             noted
                             .
                             2.
                             
                             Iosephs
                             sending
                             for
                             his
                             father
                             ,
                             c.
                             45.
                             
                             Manner
                             ,
                             1.
                             
                             Of
                             Iacobs
                             going
                             thither
                             ,
                             c.
                             46.
                             2.
                             
                             Of
                             Iacobs
                             being
                             there
                             ,
                             Where
                             note
                             ,
                             his
                             conference
                             with
                             
                               Pharaoh
                               c.
                            
                             47.
                             
                             His
                             blessing
                             of
                             
                               Ioseph
                               c.
                            
                             48.
                             
                             His
                             Propheticall
                             benedictions
                             to
                             all
                             his
                             sonnes
                             ,
                             c.
                             49.
                             
                             Consequents
                             upon
                             Iacobs
                             death
                             c.
                             50.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 Exodus
                 .
              
               
                 
                 EXODUS
                 .
                 
                   i.
                   e.
                   Going-out
                
                 ;
                 or
                 Departure
                 ,
                 so
                 called
                 by
                 the
                 Greek
                 ,
                 because
                 it
                 declares
                 
                   Israels
                   Departure
                   out
                   of
                
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 after
                 they
                 had
                 been
                 long-oppressed
                 there
                 under
                 Tyrannicall
                 servitude
                 .
                 In
                 Heb.
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 
                   veelleh
                   schemoth
                
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   And
                   these
                   are
                   the
                   names
                
                 ,
                 Exod.
                 1.1
                 .
              
               
                 Scope
                 ;
                 To
                 set
                 forth
                 Gods
                 governing
                 and
                 ordering
                 of
                 his
                 Church
                 ,
                 now
                 reduced
                 and
                 united
                 into
                 one
                 body
                 ,
                 out
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 severall
                 families
                 of
                 
                   Israel
                   .
                   This
                   is
                   the
                   Church
                   in
                   the
                   wildernesse
                   ,
                
                 Act.
                 7.38
                 .
              
               
                 Exodus
                 is
                 an
                 History
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 death
                 of
                 Ioseph
                 till
                 the
                 erecting
                 of
                 the
                 Tabernacle
                 ,
                 for
                 about
                 142.
                 years
                 .
                 viz.
                 From
                 death
                 of
                 Ioseph
                 to
                 the
                 birth
                 of
                 Moses
                 ,
                 60
                 years
                 .
                 
                   As
                   Iunius
                   computes
                   .
                   Annot.
                   in
                   Ex.
                
                 From
                 Moses
                 birth
                 to
                 the
                 Departure
                 out
                 of
                 Egypt
                 .
                 80
                 years
                 ,
                 Exod.
                 7.7
                 .
                 From
                 the
                 departure
                 out
                 of
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 erecting
                 of
                 the
                 Tabernacle
                 two
                 years
                 
                 Exod.
                 40.17
                 .
                 
                   in
                   the
                   second
                   yeare
                   .
                   viz.
                
                 the
                 second
                 yeare
                 after
                 their
                 coming
                 out
                 of
                 
                   Egypt
                   .
                   Iun.
                   Annotat.
                
                 
              
               
                 
                   Principal
                   Parts
                
                 of
                 this
                 Book
                 .
                 Exodus
                 contains
                 an
                 Historicall
                 Narration
                 of
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       Gods
                       Actions
                    
                     for
                     Israels
                     deliverance
                     out
                     of
                     Egypt
                     .
                     Things
                     done
                     of
                     God
                     ,
                     were
                     Before
                     ,
                     In
                     ,
                     or
                     After
                     Israels
                     deliverance
                     .
                     
                       
                         I.
                         
                           Before
                           their
                           deliverance
                        
                         ,
                         are
                         1.
                         
                         His
                         permission
                         of
                         the
                         Egyptian
                         Tyranny
                         over
                         them
                         ,
                         which
                         was
                         the
                         occasion
                         of
                         the
                         deliverance
                         c.
                         1.
                         2.
                         
                         His
                         Preparation
                         both
                         of
                         Instruments
                         and
                         Actions
                         ,
                         for
                         deliverance
                         1.
                         
                         Of
                         Instruments
                         .
                         
                           viz.
                           Moses
                        
                         who
                         is
                         Borne
                         c.
                         2.
                         
                         Called
                         c.
                         3.
                         
                         
                           Aaron
                           c.
                        
                         4.
                         2.
                         
                         Of
                         Actions
                         viz.
                         Words
                         c.
                         5.6
                         .
                         Signes
                         ,
                         both
                         Confirming
                         their
                         words
                         c.
                         7.
                         and
                         Punishing
                         the
                         Egyptians
                         for
                         not
                         letting
                         Israel
                         go
                         ,
                         with
                         ten
                         plagues
                         ,
                         viz.
                         1
                         Turning
                         water
                         into
                         blood
                         ,
                         c.
                         7.
                         2
                         
                         Frogs
                         ,
                         3
                         Lice
                         ,
                         4
                         And
                         a
                         mixed
                         swarme
                         of
                         Flyes
                         ,
                         c.
                         8.
                         5
                         
                         Pestilence
                         ,
                         6
                         Boyles
                         ,
                         7
                         Haile
                         ,
                         c.
                         9.
                         8
                         
                         Locusts
                         ,
                         and
                         9
                         Darknesse
                         ,
                         c.
                         10.
                         10
                         
                         Death
                         of
                         the
                         first-borne
                         ,
                         Foretold
                         ,
                         c.
                         11.
                         
                         Fulfilled
                         ,
                         c.
                         12.
                         
                      
                       
                         II.
                         
                           In
                           their
                           deliverance
                        
                         ,
                         where
                         note
                         
                         1.
                         
                         The●r
                         departure
                         ,
                         Egresse
                         or
                         going
                         out
                         ,
                         Acted
                         c.
                         12.
                         
                         Attested
                         for
                         the
                         benefit
                         of
                         Posterity
                         ,
                         with
                         signes
                         and
                         observations
                         c.
                         13.
                         2.
                         
                         Their
                         Progresse
                         or
                         going
                         on
                         .
                         Whereof
                         1
                         Their
                         passing
                         through
                         the
                         Red
                         sea
                         ,
                         c.
                         14.
                         2
                         
                         Their
                         thanksgiving
                         for
                         this
                         wonder
                         of
                         mercy
                         in
                         a
                         gratulatory
                         Song
                         ,
                         c.
                         15.
                         
                      
                       
                         III.
                         
                           After
                           their
                           deliverance
                        
                         ,
                         when
                         God
                         did
                         1.
                         
                         Supply
                         them
                         with
                         food
                         and
                         necessaries
                         c.
                         16.
                         2.
                         
                         Defend
                         them
                         from
                         evils
                         c.
                         17.
                         3.
                         
                         Appoint
                         Judicatories
                         ,
                         for
                         all
                         matters
                         of
                         difference
                         ,
                         that
                         might
                         fall
                         out
                         among
                         them
                         c.
                         18.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       Gods
                       institutions
                    
                     ,
                     in
                     which
                     regard
                     consider
                     
                       Gods
                       Prescriptions
                       ,
                       Israels
                       performances
                    
                     .
                     
                       
                         I.
                         
                           Gods
                           prescriptions
                        
                         ,
                         where
                         note
                         ,
                         1.
                         
                         Preparation
                         of
                         the
                         people
                         c.
                         19.
                         2.
                         
                         The
                         promulgation
                         of
                         his
                         lawes
                         ,
                         1
                         Moral
                         with
                         their
                         Appendixes
                         ,
                         c.
                         20.
                         2
                         
                         Iudicial
                         both
                         in
                         humane
                         and
                         sacred
                         things
                         c.
                         21
                         ,
                         22
                         ,
                         23.
                         3
                         
                         Ceremoniall
                         .
                         Touching
                         the
                         Ceremoniall
                         lawes
                         ,
                         here
                         are
                         laid
                         down
                         ,
                         1.
                         
                         The
                         Preparation
                         to
                         them
                         c.
                         24.
                         2.
                         
                         The
                         parts
                         of
                         them
                         .
                         viz.
                         1
                         The
                         Tabernacle
                         with
                         the
                         Appurtenances
                         and
                         Utensils
                         
                         thereof
                         ,
                         c.
                         25.26
                         ,
                         27.
                         2
                         
                         The
                         Priests
                         and
                         their
                         Ornaments
                         or
                         Vestments
                         for
                         Ministration
                         ,
                         c.
                         28.
                         3
                         
                         Sacrifices
                         ,
                         c.
                         29.
                         and
                         divers
                         sacred
                         things
                         ,
                         c.
                         30.
                         3.
                         
                         The
                         close
                         of
                         ceremoniall
                         directions
                         ,
                         c.
                         31.
                         
                      
                       
                         II.
                         
                           Israels
                           performances
                        
                         of
                         Gods
                         Prescriptions
                         .
                         Here
                         consider
                         Israels
                         obedience
                         .
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             About
                             Morals
                             ;
                             1
                             Violated
                             by
                             idolatry
                             ,
                             c.
                             32.
                             2.
                             
                             Restored
                             and
                             renewed
                             againe
                             By
                             reconciliation
                             with
                             God
                             ,
                             c.
                             33.
                             and
                             Renewing
                             of
                             the
                             Tables
                             ,
                             c.
                             34.
                             
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             About
                             Ceremonials
                             ;
                             viz.
                             1.
                             
                             The
                             Parts
                             of
                             the
                             Tabernacle
                             ;
                             The
                             matter
                             chap.
                             35.
                             
                             The
                             fashioning
                             of
                             the
                             Tabernacle
                             ,
                             c.
                             36.
                             &
                             of
                             the
                             Ark
                             ,
                             c.
                             37.
                             
                             The
                             making
                             of
                             sacred
                             things
                             belonging
                             ,
                             To
                             the
                             people
                             ,
                             c.
                             38.
                             
                             To
                             the
                             Priests
                             ,
                             c.
                             39.
                             2.
                             
                             The
                             totall
                             disposing
                             ,
                             ordering
                             ,
                             and
                             erecting
                             of
                             the
                             Tabernacle
                             ,
                             c.
                             40.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 Leviticus
              
               
                 
                 LEVITICUS
                 .
                 So
                 denominated
                 by
                 the
                 Greek
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 chiefe
                 Subject
                 or
                 matter
                 of
                 the
                 Book
                 ,
                 which
                 principally
                 describes
                 the
                 lawes
                 ,
                 sacrifices
                 and
                 services
                 of
                 the
                 LEVITICAL
                 Priesthood
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 stiled
                 among
                 the
                 Hebrewes
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Vajikra
                 .
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   And
                   he
                   called
                
                 .
                 This
                 being
                 the
                 first
                 Hebrew
                 word
                 in
                 the
                 Hebrew
                 text
                 ,
                 beginning
                 this
                 book
                 .
              
               
                 Scope
                 of
                 this
                 Book
                 .
                 To
                 make
                 known
                 Leviticall
                 Lawes
                 Sacrifices
                 and
                 Ordinances
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 those
                 shadows
                 to
                 lead
                 Israel
                 by
                 the
                 hand
                 to
                 Jesus
                 Christ
                 the
                 true
                 Priest
                 and
                 sacrifice
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 
                   See
                   Levit.
                
                 11.44
                 .
                 and
                 20.26
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 Book
                 relates
                 the
                 memorable
                 words
                 ,
                 Acts
                 and
                 Leviticall
                 Ceremoniall
                 Laws
                 made
                 known
                 from
                 God
                 to
                 Israel
                 ,
                 for
                 one
                 Moneths
                 space
                 viz.
                 from
                 about
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 second
                 yeare
                 ,
                 after
                 Israels
                 departure
                 out
                 of
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 the
                 Tabernacle
                 being
                 already
                 reared
                 ,
                 till
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 second
                 moneth
                 of
                 the
                 
                 same
                 yeare
                 ,
                 
                   As
                   Jun.
                   in
                   Annot.
                   compare
                   Exod.
                
                 40.17
                 .
                 with
                 Numb
                 .
                 1.1
                 .
                 which
                 was
                 in
                 the
                 yeare
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 worlds
                 Creation
                 ,
                 2514.
                 
                 
                   As
                   Ainsw
                   .
                   computes
                
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Principal
                   Parts
                
                 .
                 Leviticus
                 describes
                 the
                 sacred
                 Ceremoniall
                 law
                 ▪
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Of
                   things
                
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Of
                   Persons
                
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 
                   Of
                   Actions
                
                 .
              
               
                 I.
                 
                   The
                   Ceremoniall
                   law
                   of
                   things
                   ,
                   c.
                
                 1.
                 to
                 c.
                 8.
                 either
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 substance
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 as
                 of
                 1.
                 
                 Burnt-offerings
                 ,
                 c.
                 1.
                 2.
                 
                 Meat-offerings
                 ,
                 c.
                 2.
                 3.
                 
                 Peace-offerings
                 ,
                 c.
                 3.
                 4.
                 
                 Sin-offerings
                 ,
                 in
                 case
                 of
                 ignorance
                 ,
                 c.
                 4.
                 or
                 of
                 infirmity
                 ,
                 c.
                 5.
                 
                 Or
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 Rite
                 and
                 Ceremony
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 c.
                 6.7
                 .
              
               
                 II.
                 
                   The
                   Ceremoniall
                   law
                   of
                   persons
                   ,
                   c.
                
                 8.
                 to
                 16.
                 viz.
                 1.
                 
                 Of
                 the
                 Priests
                 ,
                 In
                 their
                 consecration
                 to
                 their
                 office
                 ,
                 c.
                 8.
                 
                 In
                 their
                 discharge
                 of
                 their
                 office
                 ,
                 either
                 according
                 to
                 Gods
                 assistance
                 ,
                 c.
                 9.
                 
                 Or
                 mens
                 infirmity
                 ,
                 c.
                 10.
                 2.
                 
                 Of
                 all
                 the
                 people
                 ,
                 touching
                 whom
                 are
                 lawes
                 about
                 their
                 sanctification
                 ,
                 both
                 from
                 uncleannesse
                 without
                 them
                 ,
                 in
                 matter
                 of
                 their
                 food
                 ,
                 c.
                 11.
                 or
                 In
                 them
                 ▪
                 By
                 reason
                 of
                 1
                 Child-bearing
                 ,
                 c.
                 12.
                 2
                 
                 Leprosie
                 ,
                 whereof
                 its
                 Rise
                 and
                 State
                 ,
                 c.
                 13.
                 
                 It
                 s
                 cure
                 ,
                 c.
                 14.
                 3
                 
                 Issue
                 of
                 seed
                 or
                 bloud
                 ,
                 c.
                 15.
                 
              
               
                 III.
                 
                   The
                   Ceremonial
                   Law
                   touching
                   Actions
                
                 ,
                 Necessary
                 or
                 Voluntary
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 Necessary
                 ,
                 whereof
                 are
                 laid
                 down
                 The
                 Particulars
                 and
                 the
                 Confirmation
                 of
                 them
                 .
                 1
                 
                   the
                   Particulars
                
                 of
                 these
                 Necessary
                 
                 Actions
                 ,
                 are
                 1.
                 
                 
                   In
                   purification
                
                 ,
                 Common
                 to
                 the
                 whole
                 Church
                 ,
                 c.
                 16.
                 
                 Proper
                 to
                 every
                 godly
                 person
                 ,
                 c.
                 17.
                 2.
                 
                 In
                 Sanctimony
                 or
                 Holinesse
                 ,
                 Both
                 of
                 the
                 people
                 ;
                 1
                 To
                 be
                 observed
                 ,
                 not
                 only
                 in
                 their
                 own
                 bodies
                 ,
                 c.
                 18.
                 but
                 also
                 among
                 one
                 another
                 mutually
                 ,
                 c.
                 19.
                 2
                 
                 To
                 be
                 maintained
                 in
                 their
                 judgements
                 ,
                 c.
                 20.
                 
                 As
                 also
                 in
                 the
                 holinesse
                 of
                 the
                 Priests
                 in
                 their
                 Persons
                 ,
                 c.
                 21.
                 
                 Things
                 ,
                 c.
                 22.
                 3.
                 
                 In
                 exercise
                 Ecclesiasticall
                 ,
                 In
                 legall
                 Times
                 c.
                 23.
                 
                 In
                 legall
                 Rites
                 ,
                 c.
                 24.
                 
                 Politicall
                 ,
                 c.
                 25.
                 2
                 
                 
                   The
                   Confirmation
                
                 or
                 obsignation
                 of
                 these
                 particular
                 lawes
                 ,
                 by
                 Promises
                 and
                 Threats
                 ,
                 c.
                 26.
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Voluntary
                 ,
                 viz.
                 touching
                 vows
                 ,
                 c.
                 27.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 Numbers
              
               
                 
                 NUMBERS
                 Gr.
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 ,
                 so
                 called
                 because
                 a
                 great
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 Book
                 is
                 spent
                 
                   in
                   Numbring
                   the
                   Tribes
                   and
                   Families
                   of
                
                 Israel
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 their
                 journeys
                 from
                 Egypt
                 to
                 Canaan
                 .
                 In
                 Hebr.
                 its
                 called
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 
                   Bammidbar
                   i.
                   e.
                   In
                   the
                   Desert
                   ▪
                
                 Because
                 this
                 is
                 the
                 first
                 word
                 of
                 this
                 Book
                 in
                 the
                 Hebrew
                 text
                 .
              
               
                 Numbers
                 containes
                 an
                 History
                 from
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 second
                 moneth
                 of
                 the
                 second
                 yeare
                 ,
                 after
                 Israels
                 coming
                 
                 ●ut
                 of
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 eleventh
                 moneth
                 of
                 the
                 fourtieth
                 yeare
                 .
                 viz.
                 38.
                 years
                 and
                 upwards
                 ,
                 as
                 Iun.
                 and
                 Ainsw
                 .
                 observe
                 .
                 And
                 this
                 may
                 remarkably
                 be
                 evinced
                 ,
                 by
                 comparing
                 Numb
                 .
                 1.1
                 .
                 and
                 36.13
                 .
                 diligently
                 with
                 Deut.
                 1.3
                 .
                 which
                 ,
                 as
                 above
                 ,
                 demonstrate
                 both
                 the
                 beginning
                 and
                 ending
                 of
                 this
                 History
                 of
                 Numbers
                 .
              
               
                 Scope
                 .
                 Lively
                 to
                 set
                 forth
                 the
                 rich
                 blessing
                 of
                 God
                 upon
                 Israel
                 ,
                 in
                 their
                 wonderfull
                 increase
                 ;
                 his
                 vigilant
                 providence
                 over
                 them
                 in
                 all
                 their
                 wildernes
                 journeyes
                 and
                 difficulties
                 ;
                 and
                 yet
                 his
                 severity
                 against
                 their
                 corruption
                 ,
                 for
                 which
                 many
                 of
                 them
                 perished
                 in
                 the
                 wildernesse
                 ,
                 after
                 they
                 had
                 been
                 delivered
                 out
                 of
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 they
                 could
                 not
                 enter
                 into
                 his
                 rest
                 because
                 of
                 their
                 unbeliefe
                 ,
                 Heb.
                 3.19
                 .
                 
                   Iude
                   ver
                
                 .
                 5.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   Parts
                
                 .
              
               
                 
                   This
                   Book
                   of
                   Numbers
                
                 containes
                 an
                 Historicall
                 narration
                 of
                 Israels
                 1
                 Preparation
                 for
                 their
                 Journey
                 ,
                 2
                 Iourney
                 it selfe
                 ,
                 and
                 3
                 of
                 their
                 Station
                 ,
              
               
                 I.
                 
                   Israels
                   Preparation
                
                 for
                 their
                 Journey
                 ,
                 wherein
                 three
                 things
                 .
              
               
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     Numbring
                     of
                     them
                  
                   ,
                   which
                   was
                   1.
                   
                   Civil
                   ,
                   both
                   of
                   all
                   the
                   heads
                   of
                   the
                   people
                   
                   according
                   to
                   the
                   families
                   ,
                   c.
                   1.
                   and
                   of
                   the
                   order
                   of
                   the
                   Tribes
                   in
                   their
                   Tents
                   ,
                   c.
                   2.
                   2.
                   
                   Sacred
                   ,
                   where
                   is
                   reckoned
                   up
                   ,
                   both
                   the
                   number
                   of
                   Levites
                   and
                   other
                   officers
                   about
                   the
                   Tabernacle
                   c.
                   3.
                   as
                   also
                   their
                   order
                   and
                   ministry
                   c.
                   4.
                   
                
                 
                   II.
                   Lawes
                   ,
                   1.
                   
                   Common
                   about
                   Sanctimony
                   ,
                   whether
                   necessary
                   c.
                   5.
                   or
                   voluntary
                   ,
                   c.
                   6.
                   2.
                   
                   Particular
                   for
                   the
                   Princes
                   offering
                   of
                   every
                   Tribe
                   ,
                   at
                   the
                   dedication
                   of
                   the
                   Tabernacle
                   and
                   Altar
                   .
                   c.
                   7.
                   
                   For
                   the
                   Levites
                   service
                   ,
                   c.
                   8.
                   
                
                 
                   III.
                   
                     The
                     manner
                  
                   1.
                   
                   Of
                   their
                   sanctification
                   and
                   order
                   ,
                   c.
                   9.
                   
                   And
                   of
                   their
                   Journeying
                   ,
                   c.
                   10.
                   
                
              
               
                 II.
                 Israels
                 journeys
                 ,
                 which
                 are
                 distinguished
                 by
                 the
                 history
                 of
                 their
                 eight
                 notable
                 Murmurings
                 in
                 their
                 way
                 ,
                 viz.
                 1.
                 
                 Irksomenesse
                 of
                 their
                 Journey
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 Loathing
                 of
                 
                   Mannah
                   ,
                   c.
                
                 11.
                 3.
                 
                 Aarons
                 and
                 Miriams
                 emulation
                 against
                 
                   Moses
                   ,
                   c.
                
                 12.
                 4.
                 
                 Their
                 unbelief
                 at
                 Kadesh
                 ,
                 where
                 are
                 recorded
                 ,
                 Their
                 murmuring
                 c.
                 13.
                 
                 The
                 judgement
                 of
                 God
                 for
                 it
                 c.
                 14.
                 
                 Their
                 reconcilement
                 to
                 God
                 afterwards
                 ,
                 c.
                 15.
                 5.
                 
                 The
                 envy
                 of
                 the
                 Levites
                 and
                 others
                 against
                 the
                 Priests
                 ,
                 c.
                 16.
                 6.
                 
                 The
                 indignation
                 of
                 the
                 people
                 for
                 the
                 precedent
                 judgement
                 ,
                 where
                 are
                 set
                 down
                 both
                 their
                 Murmur●ng
                 ,
                 c.
                 16.41
                 ,
                 42
                 ,
                 43.
                 and
                 their
                 Reconcilement
                 ,
                 c.
                 16.
                 vers
                 .
                 44.
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 ,
                 and
                 c.
                 17
                 ,
                 18
                 ,
                 19.
                 7.
                 
                 Murmuring
                 for
                 want
                 of
                 
                 water
                 ,
                 c.
                 20.
                 8.
                 
                 Murmuring
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 way
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 light
                 bread
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 were
                 plagued
                 with
                 fiery
                 serpents
                 ,
                 c.
                 21.
                 
              
               
                 III.
                 
                   Israels
                   Station
                
                 ,
                 State
                 or
                 condition
                 when
                 they
                 were
                 now
                 nigh
                 to
                 the
                 possession
                 of
                 their
                 inheritance
                 ,
                 c.
                 21.
                 
                   to
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   Book
                   .
                
                 Here
                 is
                 set
                 down
                 a
                 double
                 State
                 or
                 Condition
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 Of
                 the
                 people
                 themselves
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 Of
                 their
                 inheritance
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 Of
                 the
                 people
                 themselves
                 ,
                 either
                 as
                 1.
                 overcoming
                 their
                 enemies
                 ,
                 and
                 possessing
                 the
                 land
                 ,
                 c.
                 21.
                 2.
                 
                 Tempted
                 by
                 Magicall
                 Arts
                 and
                 inchantments
                 ,
                 c.
                 22
                 ,
                 23
                 ,
                 24.
                 3.
                 
                 ●nsnared
                 with
                 ,
                 and
                 plagued
                 for
                 idolatry
                 and
                 fornication
                 c.
                 25.
                 4.
                 
                 Reconciled
                 to
                 God
                 and
                 numbred
                 for
                 the
                 entring
                 upon
                 the
                 inheritance
                 ,
                 c.
                 26.
                 5.
                 
                 Furnished
                 with
                 a
                 new
                 Governour
                 Ioshuah
                 ,
                 that
                 was
                 to
                 succeed
                 
                   Moses
                   ,
                   c.
                
                 27.
                 6.
                 
                 Instructed
                 in
                 sacred
                 things
                 ,
                 Necessary
                 ,
                 c.
                 28
                 ,
                 29.
                 
                 Voluntary
                 ,
                 c.
                 30.
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Of
                 the
                 inheritance
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 considered
                 ,
                 either
                 1.
                 
                 In
                 part
                 ,
                 As
                 possessed
                 ,
                 c.
                 31.
                 
                 As
                 assigned
                 to
                 
                   Gad
                   ,
                   Reuben
                
                 ,
                 and
                 halfe
                 the
                 Tribe
                 of
                 
                   Manasseh
                   ,
                   c.
                
                 32.
                 
                 (
                 Here
                 by
                 way
                 of
                 digression
                 is
                 a
                 summary
                 recapitulation
                 of
                 the
                 severall
                 stations
                 of
                 Israel
                 in
                 their
                 march
                 through
                 the
                 wildernesse
                 ,
                 c.
                 33.
                 )
                 2.
                 
                 In
                 whole
                 ,
                 And
                 that
                 either
                 ,
                 As
                 it
                 is
                 circumscribed
                 with
                 Bounds
                 or
                 Borders
                 ,
                 whereof
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 dividing
                 the
                 land
                 ,
                 c.
                 34.
                 
                 Or
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 circumscribed
                 with
                 lawes
                 ,
                 Both
                 of
                 refuge
                 for
                 the
                 man-slayer
                 ,
                 that
                 slew
                 any
                 unawares
                 ,
                 c.
                 35.
                 
                 
                 And
                 of
                 successions
                 in
                 their
                 inheritances
                 .
                 c.
                 36
              
            
             
               
                 Deuteron
                 :
              
               
                 
                 DEUTERONOMIE
                 
                   i.
                   e.
                   The
                   second
                   law
                
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Law
                   repeated
                
                 ,
                 Thus
                 denominated
                 by
                 the
                 Greek
                 ,
                 because
                 this
                 book
                 containeth
                 a
                 
                   Repetition
                   of
                   Gods
                   law
                   given
                   by
                
                 Moses
                 to
                 Israel
                 ,
                 AS
                 in
                 Hebrew
                 it
                 is
                 sometimes
                 from
                 the
                 same
                 ground
                 called
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 mischneh
                 i.
                 e.
                 Repetition
                 of
                 the
                 law
                 .
                 From
                 the
                 first
                 words
                 in
                 the
                 Book
                 it
                 s
                 cal'd
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 
                   Elleh
                   Haddebarim
                
                 ,
                 i
                 e.
                 
                   These
                   are
                   the
                   words
                
                 ,
                 or
                 only
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Debarim
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   The
                   words
                
                 .
              
               
                 Penman
                 of
                 this
                 Book
                 ,
                 as
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 foure
                 former
                 Books
                 was
                 Moses
                 ,
                 who
                 also
                 wrote
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 his
                 own
                 death
                 aforehand
                 in
                 the
                 last
                 chapter
                 by
                 a
                 Prophetick
                 spirit
                 ;
                 or
                 Ioshua
                 wrote
                 it
                 for
                 him
                 .
                 
                   Alsted
                   .
                   Praecog
                   .
                   Theol.
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 118.
                 
              
               
                 This
                 Book
                 containes
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 but
                 a
                 few
                 dayes
                 ,
                 viz.
                 from
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 eleventh
                 moneth
                 ,
                 to
                 about
                 the
                 seventh
                 day
                 of
                 the
                 twelfth
                 moneth
                 of
                 the
                 fourtieth
                 yeare
                 ,
                 after
                 Israels
                 departure
                 
                 out
                 of
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 for
                 Moses
                 began
                 to
                 speak
                 these
                 words
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 day
                 of
                 the
                 eleventh
                 moneth
                 of
                 the
                 said
                 fourtieth
                 yeare
                 ,
                 Deut.
                 1.3
                 .
                 which
                 was
                 a
                 little
                 before
                 his
                 death
                 ;
                 he
                 died
                 when
                 he
                 was
                 one
                 hundred
                 and
                 twenty
                 years
                 old
                 Deut.
                 34.7
                 ▪
                 after
                 which
                 Israel
                 mourned
                 for
                 Moses
                 in
                 the
                 land
                 of
                 Moab
                 thirty
                 dayes
                 ,
                 Deut.
                 34.8
                 .
                 this
                 determines
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 the
                 History
                 ?
                 
                   As
                   Iun.
                   well
                   observes
                
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Thus
                   Alsted
                   in
                   Praecog
                   .
                   Theol.
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 118.
                 
                   computes
                   the
                   time
                   of
                   this
                   History
                   .
                
                 viz.
                 
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 first
                 Part
                 of
                 this
                 Book
                 containes
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 day
                 of
                 the
                 eleventh
                 moneth
                 of
                 the
                 fourtieth
                 yeare
                 ,
                 after
                 their
                 coming
                 out
                 of
                 
                   Egypt
                   ,
                   c.
                
                 1
                 ,
                 2
                 ,
                 3
                 ▪
                 4.
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 second
                 part
                 contains
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 the
                 second
                 day
                 ,
                 c.
                 5.
                 to
                 11
                 ▪
                 3.
                 
                 The
                 third
                 part
                 containes
                 the
                 History
                 ,
                 (
                 as
                 is
                 probable
                 )
                 of
                 foure
                 dayes
                 at
                 most
                 c.
                 11.
                 to
                 26.
                 4.
                 
                 The
                 fourth
                 part
                 containes
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 one
                 day
                 ,
                 c.
                 27.28
                 .
                 5.
                 
                 The
                 fifth
                 containes
                 the
                 History
                 also
                 of
                 one
                 day
                 ,
                 c.
                 29
                 ,
                 30.
                 6.
                 
                 The
                 sixth
                 containes
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 one
                 day
                 ,
                 c.
                 31.
                 &c.
                 7.
                 
                 The
                 7
                 th
                 part
                 contains
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 their
                 mourning
                 for
                 Moses
                 thirty
                 daies
                 c.
                 34.
                 
              
               
               
                 Proofe
                 hereof
                 may
                 be
                 drawn
                 from
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 Ioshua
                 ,
                 by
                 computing
                 backwards
                 from
                 the
                 day
                 of
                 the
                 Passeover
                 .
                 For
                 in
                 the
                 land
                 of
                 Canaan
                 the
                 first
                 Passeover
                 was
                 celebrated
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 one
                 and
                 fourtieth
                 year
                 after
                 Israels
                 coming
                 ou●
                 of
                 Egypt
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 fourteenth
                 day
                 of
                 the
                 moneth
                 Nisan
                 Josh.
                 5
                 ,
                 10.
                 
                 Before
                 which
                 they
                 were
                 circumcised
                 ,
                 which
                 probably
                 took
                 up
                 foure
                 dayes
                 ,
                 Josh.
                 5.
                 
                 One
                 day
                 they
                 were
                 passing
                 thorough
                 Jordan
                 ,
                 two
                 dayes
                 in
                 preparation
                 for
                 it
                 .
                 Adde
                 to
                 these
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 searching
                 out
                 the
                 land
                 ,
                 and
                 lastly
                 the
                 thirty
                 dayes
                 mourning
                 .
                 And
                 thus
                 going
                 backwards
                 ,
                 we
                 shall
                 find
                 that
                 Deuteronomie
                 containes
                 an
                 History
                 of
                 but
                 a
                 very
                 few
                 dayes
                 .
              
               
                 Scope
                 .
                 That
                 the
                 law
                 formerly
                 given
                 of
                 God
                 may
                 by
                 this
                 
                   New
                   Repetition
                
                 of
                 it
                 be
                 more
                 declared
                 ,
                 confirmed
                 and
                 applied
                 to
                 the
                 present
                 condition
                 of
                 Israel
                 ;
                 and
                 they
                 thereby
                 fitted
                 and
                 better
                 prepared
                 for
                 the
                 promised
                 Canaan
                 ,
                 upon
                 which
                 they
                 were
                 entring
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   Parts
                
                 ,
                 are
                 ;
                 The
                 Preface
                 ;
                 Narration
                 ;
                 and
                 Conclusion
                 of
                 the
                 Book
                 .
                 I.
                 
                   Preface
                   or
                   Prologue
                
                 ,
                 c.
                 1.
                 to
                 5.
                 contayning
                 ,
                 
                   
                   
                     1.
                     
                     A
                     Narration
                     .
                     1.
                     
                     Of
                     Gods
                     calling
                     of
                     Israel
                     from
                     Horeb
                     to
                     the
                     promised
                     Land.
                     c.
                     1.
                     2.
                     
                     Of
                     the
                     execution
                     of
                     this
                     call
                     ,
                     Both
                     by
                     divine
                     conduct
                     against
                     their
                     enemies
                     .
                     c.
                     2.
                     
                     And
                     by
                     appointment
                     to
                     enter
                     the
                     Land.
                     c.
                     3.
                     
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     An
                     exhortation
                     to
                     obed
                     .
                     c.
                     4.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 II
                 Narrative
                 containing
                 the
                 main
                 bulk
                 and
                 substance
                 of
                 the
                 book
                 ,
                 c.
                 5.
                 to
                 32.
                 viz.
                 The
                 Law
                 ,
                 and
                 Confirmation
                 thereof
                 .
              
               
                 
                   I.
                   The
                   Law
                   ,
                   shewing
                   the
                   way
                   of
                   well
                   living
                   .
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Universall
                       .
                       c.
                       5.
                       
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       Particular
                       ;
                       where
                       ,
                       Of
                       the
                       Decalogues
                       Principle
                       ,
                       and
                       things
                       Principled
                       .
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           
                             The
                             Principle
                          
                           of
                           the
                           Decalogue
                           is
                           Gods
                           love
                           ,
                           whereof
                           you
                           have
                           ,
                           
                             
                               1.
                               
                               The
                               Proposition
                               .
                               Wherein
                               note
                               .
                               1.
                               
                               The
                               manner
                               and
                               object
                               of
                               it
                               ,
                               c.
                               6.
                               2.
                               
                               The
                               opposites
                               ,
                               Idolatry
                               ,
                               c.
                               7.
                               
                               Ingratitude
                               ,
                               c.
                               8.
                               
                               Pride
                               ,
                               c
                               9.
                               
                            
                             
                               2.
                               
                               The
                               Conclusion
                               .
                               c.
                               10.
                               
                            
                          
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           
                             The
                             things
                             Principled
                          
                           ,
                           touching
                           ,
                           1.
                           
                           The
                           place
                           of
                           divine
                           worship
                           c.
                           11
                           ▪
                           12.
                           2.
                           
                           The
                           manner
                           ,
                           c.
                           13.14
                           .
                           3.
                           
                           The
                           time
                           ,
                           c.
                           15.16
                           .
                           4.
                           
                           The
                           persons
                           which
                           are
                           to
                           performe
                           worship
                           to
                           him
                           .
                           Who
                           are
                           informed
                           according
                           to
                           the
                           
                           three
                           parts
                           of
                           the
                           soule
                           ,
                           and
                           this
                           either
                           joyntly
                           or
                           severally
                           .
                           Jointly
                           .
                           1.
                           
                           According
                           to
                           the
                           Rationall
                           part
                           ;
                           Where
                           ,
                           Of
                           persons
                           Ecclesiasticall
                           and
                           Politicall
                           together
                           ,
                           c.
                           17.
                           
                           Of
                           persons
                           Ecclesiasticall
                           apart
                           ,
                           c.
                           18.
                           
                           Of
                           persons
                           Politicall
                           apart
                           ,
                           c.
                           19.
                           2.
                           
                           According
                           to
                           the
                           Irascible
                           part
                           ,
                           in
                           case
                           of
                           war
                           c.
                           20.
                           3.
                           
                           According
                           to
                           the
                           Concupiscible
                           part
                           ,
                           c.
                           21
                           ,
                           22.
                           
                           Severally
                           ,
                           where
                           are
                           both
                           Lawes
                           ,
                           c.
                           23
                           ,
                           24
                           ,
                           25.
                           
                           And
                           the
                           close
                           of
                           them
                           ,
                           c.
                           26.
                           
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
                 
                   II.
                   The
                   confirmation
                   of
                   the
                   Law
                   by
                   certain
                   Arguments
                   ,
                   viz.
                   1.
                   
                   Signes
                   c.
                   27.
                   2.
                   
                   Promises
                   and
                   threats
                   .
                   c.
                   28.
                   3.
                   
                   By
                   solemn
                   renewing
                   of
                   the
                   Covenant
                   :
                   partly
                   ,
                   1
                   By
                   word
                   ,
                   Comminatory
                   ,
                   c.
                   29.
                   
                   Promissory
                   ,
                   c.
                   30.
                   2
                   
                   By
                   writing
                   and
                   instruments
                   ,
                   c.
                   31.
                   
                
              
               
                 III.
                 Conclusion
                 of
                 the
                 whole
                 book
                 c.
                 32
                 ,
                 33
                 ,
                 34.
                 
                 Which
                 is
                 either
                 ,
                 
                   
                     I.
                     Propheticall
                     and
                     Hortatory
                     ,
                     wherein
                     is
                     a
                     double
                     Prophecy
                     .
                     1.
                     
                     Common
                     ,
                     touching
                     the
                     Church
                     of
                     the
                     Jewes
                     till
                     the
                     time
                     of
                     the
                     Messiah
                     ▪
                     c.
                     32.
                     2.
                     
                     Speciall
                     ,
                     containing
                     the
                     blessing
                     of
                     the
                     12
                     Tribes
                     c.
                     33.
                     
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     Historicall
                     ,
                     concerning
                     the
                     death
                     of
                     Moses
                     ,
                     c.
                     34.
                     
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             
             
               IJ.
               
                 THE
                 PROPHETS
              
               .
            
             
               THe
               PROPHETS
               wrote
               all
               the
               Bookes
               of
               the
               
                 Old
                 Testament
              
               ,
               besides
               the
               Pentateuch
               of
               Moses
               .
               These
               Prophets
               inspired
               infallibly
               by
               the
               Holy-Spirit
               of
               Prophecy
               ,
               wrote
               Books
               of
               three
               severall
               sorts
               ,
               viz.
               1
               Historicall
               ,
               2
               Dogmaticall
               or
               Doctrinall
               ,
               and
               3
               Propheticall
               .
               The
               Hebrews
               thus
               distinguish
               the
               Books
               of
               the
               Old
               Testament
               .
               1.
               
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Thorah
               i.
               e.
               The
               Law.
               viz.
               the
               five
               books
               of
               Moses
               .
               2.
               
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               Nebi●m
               i.
               e.
               
                 The
                 Prophets
              
               .
               The
               Prophets
               they
               distinguish
               into
               two
               sorts
               ,
               viz.
               1.
               
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               
                 Nebiim
                 Rishonim
              
               i.
               e.
               
                 The
                 former
                 Prophets
              
               ;
               perhaps
               so
               called
               because
               they
               treat
               of
               the
               first
               Prophets
               ,
               These
               are
               foure
               ,
               
                 viz.
                 Ioshua
                 ,
                 Iudges
                 ,
                 Samuel
                 and
                 Kings
                 .
              
               And
               2
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               
                 Nebiim
                 Acharonim
              
               i.
               e.
               
                 the
                 later
                 Prophets
              
               ;
               which
               they
               reckon
               up
               in
               foure
               Books
               also
               .
               
                 viz.
                 Isaiah
                 ,
                 Ieremiah
                 ,
                 Ezekiel
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 twelve
                 minor
                 Prophets
              
               which
               were
               anciently
               ,
               joyned
               all
               in
               one
               volume
               ,
               lest
               they
               through
               their
               smalnesse
               should
               
               be
               lost
               ;
               That
               phrase
               seemes
               to
               favour
               this
               ,
               
                 It
                 is
                 written
                 in
                 the
                 Book
                 of
                 the
                 Prophets
                 ,
              
               Act.
               7.42
               .
               the
               Prophet
               Amos
               being
               cited
               ,
               which
               is
               one
               of
               the
               
                 Minor
                 ,
                 or
                 lesser
                 Prophets
              
               .
               3.
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               
                 i.
                 e.
                 The
                 writings
              
               ;
               by
               way
               of
               emphasis
               .
               
                 See
                 the
                 Reason
                 hereof
                 in
                 Rivet
                 .
                 Isag.
                 ad
                 sucr
                 .
                 scrip
                 .
                 c.
              
               29.
               
               Sect.
               16.
               
               The
               Greek
               cals
               these
               Books
               ,
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ;
               Hagiographa
               i.
               e.
               
                 The
                 holy
                 writings
              
               ,
               upon
               some
               such
               ground
               .
               Of
               this
               sort
               are
               eleven
               in
               this
               order
               in
               Hebrew
               ,
               
                 Ruth
                 ;
                 Psalmes
                 ;
                 Iob
                 ;
                 Proverbs
                 ;
                 Ecclesiastes
                 ;
                 Song
                 of
                 Songs
                 ;
                 Lamentations
                 ;
                 Daniel
                 ;
                 Esther
                 ;
                 Ezra
                 ;
                 Chronicles
              
               ;
               under
               Ezra
               comprehending
               Nehemiah
               ,
               which
               sometimes
               is
               called
               the
               
                 second
                 of
                 Ezra
              
               ,
               and
               the
               two
               Books
               of
               the
               Chronicles
               being
               reckoned
               as
               but
               one
               Book
               .
            
             
               But
               the
               former
               Distribution
               of
               the
               PROPHETS
               bookes
               into
               1
               Historicall
               ,
               2
               Doctrinall
               ,
               and
               3
               Propheticall
               ,
               (
               being
               both
               more
               consonant
               to
               the
               matter
               of
               these
               books
               ,
               and
               to
               the
               method
               of
               our
               Bibles
               )
               shall
               here
               be
               followed
               .
            
             
               
                 I.
                 
                   HISTORICAL
                   BOOKS
                
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 HISTORICAL
                 BOOKS
                 of
                 the
                 Prophets
                 Relate
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 
                 the
                 Jewes
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 God
                 among
                 them
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 death
                 of
                 Moses
                 ,
                 which
                 was
                 ,
                 when
                 he
                 was
                 one
                 hundred
                 and
                 twenty
                 years
                 old
                 ,
                 Deut.
                 34.7
                 .
                 
                   Ioseph
                   Ant.
                   l.
                
                 4.
                 c.
                 3.
                 
                 In
                 2493
                 year
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 ;
                 Helvic
                 .
                 untill
                 the
                 Period
                 of
                 the
                 Persian
                 Monarchy
                 ,
                 possessed
                 by
                 Alexander
                 the
                 Macedonian
                 ,
                 called
                 Alexander
                 the
                 great
                 ,
                 who
                 conquered
                 the
                 Persians
                 ,
                 and
                 got
                 Dominion
                 of
                 Asia
                 ,
                 about
                 Ann.
                 3614
                 after
                 the
                 worlds
                 Creation
                 ,
                 
                   Helvic
                   .
                   in
                   Chronolog
                
                 .
                 So
                 that
                 these
                 Books
                 contain
                 an
                 History
                 of
                 about
                 1121
                 years
                 continuance
                 .
              
               
                 Of
                 this
                 History
                 of
                 the
                 Jews
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 there
                 are
                 two
                 Principall
                 Parts
                 or
                 Periods
                 ;
                 viz.
                 1.
                 
                 Of
                 the
                 Israelites
                 Entrance
                 into
                 the
                 promised
                 land
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 Of
                 their
                 
                   Government
                   and
                   Condition
                
                 ,
                 after
                 that
                 entrance
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Joshuah
                   .
                
                 
                   1.
                   
                   
                     ISraels
                     entrance
                  
                   into
                   the
                   promised
                   land
                   ,
                   is
                   described
                   in
                   the
                   Book
                   of
                   
                   JOSHUAH
                   .
                   So
                   called
                   from
                   the
                   chiefe
                   subject
                   handled
                   therein
                   ,
                   viz.
                   The
                   Acts
                   of
                   Ioshuah
                   ,
                   the
                   successour
                   of
                   Moses
                   ,
                   the
                   Governour
                   and
                   chiefe
                   Captaine
                   of
                   Israel
                   ,
                   under
                   whose
                   conduct
                   they
                   conquered
                   the
                   Land
                   ;
                   Divided
                   it
                   by
                   Line
                   and
                   Lot
                   among
                   the
                   Tribes
                   ;
                   and
                   possessed
                   it
                   ,
                   according
                   to
                   all
                   Gods
                   faithfull
                   promises
                   in
                   that
                   behalfe
                   unto
                   their
                   Fathers
                   ,
                   Josh.
                   21.43
                   ,
                   44
                   ,
                   45.
                   
                   &
                   23.14
                   ,
                   15.
                   
                
                 
                   Penman
                   of
                   this
                   Booke
                   some
                   conceive
                   to
                   be
                   Ioshuah
                   ,
                   because
                   it
                   beares
                   his
                   name
                   .
                   But
                   that
                   Reason
                   is
                   not
                   cogent
                   ;
                   1
                   partly
                   because
                   the
                   Bookes
                   of
                   
                     Iudges
                     ,
                     Ruth
                  
                   ,
                   and
                   Kings
                   ,
                   bear
                   their
                   name
                   ,
                   yet
                   not
                   Penned
                   by
                   them
                   :
                   2
                   partly
                   because
                   the
                   denomination
                   of
                   this
                   Book
                   is
                   rather
                   from
                   the
                   
                     Subject
                     matter
                  
                   ,
                   then
                   the
                   Author
                   .
                   Other
                   thinke
                   Eleazer
                   the
                   High-Priest
                   (
                   whose
                   death
                   is
                   recorded
                   Iosh.
                   24.33
                   .
                   Gathered
                   together
                   the
                   chief
                   materials
                   of
                   which
                   this
                   Booke
                   is
                   compiled
                   .
                   It
                   being
                   the
                   Priests
                   duty
                   ,
                   to
                   leave
                   upon
                   Record
                   all
                   memorable
                   Ecclesiastical
                   
                   affairs
                   for
                   the
                   benefit
                   of
                   after
                   ages
                   ,
                   and
                   propagation
                   of
                   Religion
                   .
                   This
                   more
                   probable
                   :
                   but
                   not
                   certain
                   .
                   
                     Alsted
                     .
                     Praecog
                     .
                     Theol.
                     l.
                  
                   2.
                   c.
                   119.
                   
                   
                     Iohan.
                     Calvin
                     .
                     Argument
                     .
                     in
                     Lib.
                     Iosuae
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   This
                   book
                   containes
                   an
                   History
                   of
                   almost
                   eighteene
                   yeeres
                   .
                   viz.
                   From
                   the
                   death
                   of
                   Moses
                   to
                   the
                   death
                   of
                   Joshuah
                   .
                   
                     Iun.
                     Arg.
                     in
                     lib.
                     Iehosh
                     .
                     Gerh.
                     loc
                     .
                     prim
                     .
                     de
                     Scriptura
                     .
                     in
                     exegesi
                     .
                     Sect.
                  
                   125.
                   
                
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   Of
                   this
                   booke
                   to
                   demonstrate
                   Gods
                   exact
                   faithfulnesse
                   in
                   performing
                   all
                   his
                   Promises
                   made
                   to
                   the
                   Fathers
                   ;
                   that
                   all
                   his
                   people
                   may
                   be
                   encouraged
                   to
                   trust
                   to
                   him
                   the
                   better
                   for
                   ever
                   ▪
                   Iosh.
                   21.45
                   .
                   &
                   23.14
                   ,
                   15.
                   
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   In
                   this
                   Book
                   is
                   an
                   History
                   of
                   Ioshuah's
                   Life
                   and
                   Death
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       Of
                       Ioshua's
                       Life
                    
                     .
                     Wherein
                     consider
                     ▪
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         His
                         vocation
                         .
                         God
                         cals
                         him
                         to
                         be
                         Governour
                         of
                         Israel
                         in
                         Moses
                         stead
                         ,
                         c.
                         1.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         His
                         Administration
                         ,
                         both
                         in
                         time
                         of
                         warre
                         ,
                         and
                         Peace
                         .
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             
                               In
                               time
                               of
                               warre
                            
                             ,
                             Whereof
                             is
                             laid
                             down
                             ;
                             
                               
                               
                                 1.
                                 
                                 
                                   A
                                   Narration
                                
                                 .
                                 1.
                                 
                                 Of
                                 sending
                                 the
                                 Spies
                                 to
                                 search
                                 the
                                 Land
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 2.
                                 2.
                                 
                                 Of
                                 the
                                 passing
                                 thorow
                                 Jordan
                                 ,
                                 where
                                 The
                                 Antecedent
                                 passages
                                 and
                                 manner
                                 of
                                 it
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 3.
                                 
                                 The
                                 Consequents
                                 upon
                                 it
                                 .
                                 c.
                                 4.5
                                 .
                                 3.
                                 
                                 Of
                                 the
                                 Seiges
                                 and
                                 Victories
                                 ;
                                 His
                                 first
                                 Victory
                                 over
                                 Jericho
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 6.
                                 
                                 The
                                 impediment
                                 of
                                 his
                                 proceedings
                                 ,
                                 the
                                 Accursed
                                 thing
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 7.
                                 
                                 His
                                 manifold
                                 and
                                 happy
                                 successe
                                 after
                                 removal
                                 of
                                 the
                                 Accursed
                                 thing
                                 ,
                                 he
                                 conquered
                                 all
                                 the
                                 Country
                                 c.
                                 8
                                 ,
                                 9
                                 ,
                                 10
                                 ,
                                 11.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 2.
                                 
                                 
                                   A
                                   Repetition
                                
                                 of
                                 his
                                 warlike
                                 exploits
                                 ,
                                 &c.
                                 c.
                                 12.
                                 
                              
                            
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             
                               In
                               time
                               of
                               Peace
                            
                             .
                             Wherein
                             are
                             ,
                             
                               
                                 1.
                                 
                                 The
                                 distribution
                                 of
                                 the
                                 land
                                 of
                                 Canaan
                                 ,
                                 under
                                 which
                                 are
                                 described
                                 ,
                                 1
                                 The
                                 borders
                                 of
                                 the
                                 Land
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 13.
                                 2
                                 
                                 The
                                 manner
                                 of
                                 the
                                 distribution
                                 ,
                                 by
                                 Lot.
                                 c.
                                 14.
                                 3
                                 
                                 The
                                 parties
                                 among
                                 whom
                                 the
                                 Land
                                 was
                                 divided
                                 ,
                                 viz.
                                 The
                                 Israelites
                                 c
                                 15.
                                 to
                                 20.
                                 4
                                 
                                 The
                                 menslayers
                                 ,
                                 &c.
                                 c.
                                 20
                                 5
                                 The
                                 Levites
                                 c.
                                 21.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 2.
                                 
                                 The
                                 dismission
                                 and
                                 remanding
                                 of
                                 the
                                 
                                   Reubenites
                                   ,
                                   Gadites
                                
                                 &
                                 
                                 half
                                 tribe
                                 of
                                 Manasseh
                                 to
                                 their
                                 Lot
                                 on
                                 the
                                 other
                                 side
                                 Iordan
                                 .
                                 c.
                                 22
                              
                               
                                 3.
                                 
                                 The
                                 exhortation
                                 and
                                 charge
                                 of
                                 Joshuah
                                 to
                                 the
                                 people
                                 before
                                 his
                                 death
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 23.
                                 
                              
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       Of
                       Ioshuah's
                       death
                    
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     things
                     immediately
                     Antecedent
                     ,
                     and
                     Consequent
                     thereto
                     ,
                     c.
                     24.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     Israels
                     condition
                     and
                     Government
                     after
                     their
                     entrance
                     into
                     the
                     Promised
                     Land.
                  
                   Which
                   is
                   Historically
                   described
                   ,
                   what
                   it
                   was
                   .
                   1.
                   
                   Before
                   their
                   carrying
                   away
                   into
                   Babylon
                   .
                   2.
                   
                   During
                   the
                   Captivity
                   .
                   3.
                   
                   After
                   the
                   Captivity
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     Before
                     their
                     carrying
                     away
                     into
                  
                   Babylon
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   either
                   under
                   the
                   Iudges
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   Kings
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     Vnder
                     the
                     Iudges
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   And
                   here
                   we
                   have
                   two
                   Histories
                   ,
                   viz.
                   One
                   Common
                   and
                   Generall
                   :
                   Another
                   Particular
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Judges
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     THe
                     Common
                     or
                     Generall
                     History
                  
                   ,
                   is
                   the
                   Book
                   of
                   IUDGES
                   ,
                   
                   so
                   called
                   ,
                   not
                   from
                   the
                   Authors
                   of
                   it
                   ,
                   but
                   from
                   the
                   
                     subject
                     matter
                  
                   of
                   it
                   ,
                   in
                   Hebr.
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   Shophtim
                   ,
                   i.
                   e.
                   Iudges
                   .
                
                 
                   Penman
                   of
                   this
                   Book
                   the
                   Hebrewes
                   thinke
                   to
                   be
                   
                     Samuel
                     .
                     Alsted
                     .
                     Praecog
                     .
                     Theol.
                     l.
                  
                   2.
                   c.
                   119.
                   
                   O●hers
                   thinke
                   that
                   every
                   Iudge
                   recorded
                   the
                   things
                   acted
                   in
                   his
                   owne
                   dayes
                   respectively
                   :
                   and
                   that
                   Samuel
                   ,
                   or
                   Ezra
                   ,
                   or
                   Ieremiah
                   ,
                   or
                   
                     King
                     Hezekiah
                  
                   ,
                   (
                   whose
                   men
                   copied
                   out
                   some
                   of
                   Solomons
                   Proverbs
                   ,
                   Prov.
                   25.1
                   .
                   )
                   collected
                   and
                   digested
                   them
                   into
                   one
                   volume
                   .
                   
                     Hugo
                     Cardinal●s
                     in
                     Prolog
                     .
                     in
                     hunc
                     .
                     lib.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   This
                   book
                   containes
                   an
                   History
                   of
                   Israels
                   Politie
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   state
                   thereof
                   from
                   the
                   death
                   of
                   Ioshuah
                   ,
                   till
                   the
                   Priesthood
                   of
                   Eli.
                   How
                   during
                   that
                   time
                   Israel
                   oftimes
                   Apostatized
                   from
                   God
                   ,
                   for
                   which
                   God
                   delivered
                   them
                   into
                   their
                   enemies
                   hands
                   ;
                   but
                   upon
                   their
                   conversion
                   to
                   him
                   ,
                   he
                   saved
                   them
                   by
                   Iudges
                   raised
                   up
                   from
                   among
                   their
                   Tribes
                   ,
                   out
                   of
                   their
                   enemies
                   
                   hands
                   .
                   It
                   is
                   an
                   History
                   of
                   about
                   299
                   years
                   ,
                   which
                   may
                   be
                   thus
                   computed
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     From
                     Ioshuah's
                     death
                     ,
                     to
                     Othniel's
                     40
                     y.
                     
                  
                   
                     Iudg.
                     3.11
                     .
                  
                   
                     From
                     Othniel's
                     death
                     to
                     Ehud's
                     and
                     Shamgar's
                     80
                     ▪
                     y.
                     
                  
                   
                     3.30
                     .
                  
                   
                     Thence
                     to
                     Deborah's
                     death
                     40
                     y.
                     
                  
                   
                     5
                     31.
                     
                  
                   
                     Thence
                     to
                     Gideons
                     death-40
                     y.
                     
                  
                   
                     8
                     28
                  
                   
                     Thence
                     to
                     Abimilech's
                     death
                     3
                     y.
                     
                  
                   
                     9
                     22.
                     
                  
                   
                     Thence
                     to
                     Tholah's
                     death
                     23
                     y.
                     
                  
                   
                     10
                     2
                  
                   
                     Thence
                     to
                     Iair's
                     death
                     22
                     y.
                     
                  
                   
                     10
                     3
                  
                   
                     Thence
                     to
                     Iephte's
                     death
                     6
                     y.
                     
                  
                   
                     12
                     7
                  
                   
                     Thence
                     to
                     Ibzan's
                     death
                     7
                     y.
                     
                  
                   
                     12
                     9
                  
                   
                     Thence
                     to
                     Elon's
                     death
                     10
                     y.
                     
                  
                   
                     12
                     11
                  
                   
                     Thence
                     to
                     Abdon's
                     death
                     8
                     y.
                     
                  
                   
                     12
                     14
                  
                   
                     Thence
                     to
                     Samson's
                     death-20
                     y.
                     
                  
                   
                     16
                     31
                  
                
                 
                   Scope
                   of
                   this
                   book
                   ,
                   to
                   shew
                   what
                   happy
                   Haleyonian
                   dayes
                   Gods
                   Church
                   enjoyes
                   under
                   pious
                   magistrates
                   .
                   How
                   severe
                   God
                   is
                   against
                   the
                   sins
                   ,
                   especially
                   the
                   idolatry
                   of
                   his
                   own
                   people
                   :
                   and
                   yet
                   how
                   he
                   remembers
                   mercy
                   in
                   midst
                   of
                   severest
                   judgements
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                   This
                   book
                   being
                   a
                   Glasse
                   discovering
                   Israels
                   
                   calamity
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   cause
                   thereof
                   their
                   sin
                   .
                   Describes
                   their
                   sin
                   ;
                   
                     
                       I.
                       
                         As
                         General
                      
                       ,
                       Universal
                       and
                       Common
                       to
                       all
                       the
                       tribes
                       ,
                       viz.
                       by
                       the
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           Kinds
                           or
                           sorts
                           of
                           their
                           sinnes
                           .
                           
                             
                               1.
                               
                               Negligence
                               in
                               driving
                               the
                               Canaanites
                               out
                               of
                               the
                               land
                               .
                               c.
                               1.
                               
                            
                             
                               2.
                               
                               Perfidiousnesse
                               ,
                               in
                               Apostatizing
                               from
                               God
                               to
                               Idols
                               .
                               c.
                               2.
                               
                            
                          
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           Effects
                           or
                           fruits
                           of
                           their
                           sinnes
                           .
                           viz.
                           Five
                           severall
                           oppressions
                           by
                           their
                           enemies
                           ,
                           
                             i.
                             e.
                          
                           
                           
                             
                               1.
                               
                               Syrians
                               ,
                               c.
                               3.
                               
                            
                             
                               2.
                               
                               Canaanites
                               c.
                               4.
                               and
                               5.
                               
                            
                             
                               3.
                               
                               Midianites
                               ,
                               where
                               of
                               Gideon's
                               1.
                               
                               Call.
                               c.
                               6.
                               2.
                               
                               Acts
                               Polemical
                               c.
                               7.
                               and
                               Political
                               .
                               c.
                               8.
                               3
                               
                               Successour
                               ,
                               
                                 Abimilech
                                 c.
                              
                               9.
                               
                            
                             
                               4.
                               
                               Ammonites
                               .
                               Here
                               1.
                               
                               The
                               cause
                               and
                               effect
                               of
                               the
                               oppression
                               ,
                               Israels
                               Apostacy
                               and
                               Repentance
                               c.
                               10.
                               2.
                               
                               The
                               Remedy
                               .
                               viz.
                               warre
                               undertaken
                               against
                               Ammonites
                               c.
                               11.
                               
                               Ephraimites
                               .
                               c.
                               12.
                               
                            
                             
                               5.
                               
                               
                                 Philistines
                                 .
                                 Sampson
                              
                               being
                               avenger
                               :
                               Samsons
                               Birth
                               c.
                               13.
                               
                               Prosperity
                               c.
                               14.
                               adversity
                               c.
                               15.
                               and
                               death
                               c.
                               16.
                               are
                               at
                               large
                               delineated
                               .
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       II.
                       
                         As
                         speciall
                      
                       viz.
                       1.
                       
                       Idolatry
                       ,
                       Of
                       
                       one
                       family
                       c.
                       17.
                       
                       Of
                       the
                       Tribe
                       of
                       
                         Dan
                         c.
                      
                       18.
                       2.
                       
                       Lust
                       of
                       uncleannesse
                       ,
                       Perpetrated
                       ,
                       c.
                       19.
                       
                       Punished
                       c.
                       20
                       ,
                       21.
                       
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Ruth
                
                 
                   II
                   
                     THe
                     particular
                     History
                     under
                     the
                     Iudges
                     ,
                  
                   is
                   the
                   Book
                   of
                   RUTH
                   ,
                   so
                   stiled
                   from
                   RUTH
                   the
                   Moabitesse
                   ,
                   a
                   Gentile
                   (
                   Moab
                   being
                   one
                   of
                   the
                   incestuous
                   sons
                   of
                   
                     Lot
                     Gen.
                  
                   18.
                   )
                   concerning
                   whom
                   this
                   Book
                   treats
                   ,
                   especially
                   of
                   her
                   marriage
                   with
                   Boaz
                   ,
                   whose
                   Pedigree
                   ,
                   by
                   a
                   Prophetick
                   spirit
                   ,
                   is
                   brought
                   down
                   to
                   
                     K.
                     David
                  
                   ,
                   Ruth
                   4.18
                   .
                   to
                   the
                   end
                   ,
                   Ruth
                   bearing
                   to
                   
                     Boaz
                     ,
                     Obed
                  
                   ;
                   the
                   Grandfather
                   of
                   David
                   ,
                   of
                   whom
                   according
                   to
                   the
                   flesh
                   Christ
                   came
                   ,
                   Matth.
                   1.5
                   ,
                   6.
                   
                   The
                   
                     Chald.
                     Paraphrast
                  
                   thinks
                   that
                   Ruth
                   was
                   the
                   daughter
                   of
                   Eglon
                   King
                   of
                   Moab
                   ,
                   but
                   that
                   is
                   not
                   proved
                   by
                   any
                   Scripture
                   ,
                   nor
                   is
                   it
                   likely
                   that
                   a
                   Kings
                   daughter
                   would
                   marry
                   a
                   Stranger
                   ,
                   and
                   
                   leave
                   her
                   native
                   Countrey
                   to
                   seek
                   bread
                   in
                   another
                   land
                   ,
                   saith
                   
                     Gerh.
                     Augustine
                  
                   refers
                   the
                   time
                   of
                   this
                   History
                   ,
                   to
                   the
                   Beginning
                   of
                   the
                   Kings
                   .
                   
                     Aug.
                     l.
                  
                   2.
                   
                     de
                     Doctrin
                     .
                     Christian
                  
                   .
                   c.
                   8.
                   
                   
                     Ioseph
                     .
                     l.
                  
                   5.
                   
                   Antiq.
                   and
                   
                     Hugo
                     Cardinalis
                  
                   referre
                   it
                   to
                   the
                   time
                   of
                   Eli
                   ,
                   the
                   Priest.
                   D.
                   
                     Kimchi
                     in
                     c.
                  
                   1.
                   
                   Ruth
                   .
                   and
                   other
                   of
                   the
                   Rabbines
                   (
                   as
                   some
                   note
                   )
                   conceive
                   ;
                   That
                   ,
                   Boaz
                   who
                   married
                   Ruth
                   ,
                   was
                   that
                   Judge
                   which
                   is
                   called
                   Ibzan
                   Judg.
                   12.8
                   .
                   who
                   immediately
                   succeeded
                   
                     Iephte
                     .
                     Iunius
                  
                   and
                   Tremellius
                   comparing
                   this
                   History
                   of
                   Ruth
                   with
                   Matth.
                   1.5
                   .
                   are
                   of
                   opinion
                   ,
                   that
                   this
                   History
                   fell
                   out
                   in
                   the
                   dayes
                   of
                   
                     Deborah
                     .
                     Annot
                     .
                     in
                     Ruth
                  
                   1.1
                   .
                
                 
                   But
                   it
                   s
                   certaine
                   it
                   fell
                   out
                   in
                   the
                   time
                   of
                   the
                   Iudges
                   ,
                   Ruth
                   1.1
                   .
                   though
                   the
                   particular
                   time
                   perhaps
                   cannot
                   so
                   punctually
                   be
                   demonstrated
                   .
                
                 
                   Penman
                   of
                   this
                   History
                   is
                   not
                   certainly
                   knowne
                   .
                   Hebrews
                   thinke
                   Samu●l
                   penned
                   it
                   .
                   
                     Alsted
                     .
                     in
                     Praecog
                     .
                     Theol.
                     l.
                  
                   2.
                   c.
                   119.
                   
                
                 
                 
                   Many
                   Writers
                   annex
                   this
                   Book
                   of
                   Ruth
                   as
                   an
                   Appendix
                   to
                   the
                   Book
                   of
                   Iudges
                   ,
                   as
                   they
                   do
                   the
                   Lamentations
                   ,
                   to
                   the
                   Prophecy
                   of
                   
                     Ieremiah
                     .
                     Andr.
                     Rivet
                     .
                     Isag.
                     ad
                     sacr
                     .
                     Script
                     .
                     c.
                  
                   29.
                   p.
                   501.
                   
                
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     of
                     this
                     Book
                  
                   .
                   To
                   delineate
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Genealogy
                   of
                   Christ
                   ,
                   Ruth
                   4.18
                   .
                   &c.
                   compared
                   with
                   Mat.
                   1.5.6
                   .
                   And
                   to
                   shew
                   that
                   salvation
                   by
                   
                     Iesus
                     Christ
                  
                   belongs
                   to
                   sinners
                   of
                   the
                   Gentiles
                   ,
                   as
                   well
                   as
                   to
                   the
                   Iewes
                   :
                   Christ
                   deriving
                   his
                   line
                   not
                   only
                   from
                   Iewes
                   ,
                   but
                   also
                   from
                   Gentiles
                   and
                   sinners
                   ,
                   for
                   the
                   raising
                   up
                   of
                   their
                   Hope
                   and
                   Consolation
                   in
                   him
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                   In
                   this
                   History
                   are
                   described
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     
                       Ruths
                       Distresse
                    
                     in
                     her
                     widowhood
                     c.
                     1.
                     
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     
                       Ruths
                       Deliverance
                    
                     from
                     this
                     distresse
                     ,
                     which
                     is
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         Inohoate
                         .
                         1.
                         
                         By
                         her
                         gleaning
                         in
                         Boaz
                         his
                         field
                         with
                         his
                         approbation
                         ,
                         c.
                         2.
                         2.
                         
                         By
                         her
                         lodging
                         at
                         Boaz
                         his
                         feet
                         in
                         the
                         threshing
                         floor
                         at
                         her
                         mothers
                         appointment
                         ,
                         he
                         being
                         a
                         neer
                         Kinsman
                         c.
                         3.
                         
                      
                       
                         
                         2.
                         
                         Consummate
                         ,
                         By
                         Boaz
                         his
                         marrying
                         of
                         her
                         c.
                         4.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     Vnder
                     the
                     Kings
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   And
                   here
                   we
                   have
                   three
                   Histories
                   compiled
                   in
                   six
                   books
                   viz.
                   the
                   two
                   Books
                   of
                   Samuel
                   ,
                   the
                   two
                   Books
                   of
                   Kings
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   two
                   Books
                   of
                   Chronicles
                   ,
                   which
                   Histories
                   set
                   forth
                   the
                   State
                   of
                   the
                   Kingdome
                   of
                   Israel
                   three
                   wayes
                   .
                   viz.
                   1.
                   
                   As
                   the
                   Kingdome
                   was
                   Vnited
                   of
                   which
                   the
                   two
                   Books
                   of
                   Samuel
                   .
                   2.
                   
                   As
                   The
                   Kingdome
                   was
                   Divided
                   ,
                   of
                   which
                   the
                   two
                   Books
                   of
                   Kings
                   .
                   3.
                   
                   As
                   the
                   Kingdom
                   was
                   both
                   
                     Vnited
                     and
                     Divided
                  
                   ,
                   of
                   which
                   the
                   two
                   Books
                   of
                   
                     Chronicles
                     .
                     As
                     Trelcatius
                     in
                     Oeconomiâ
                     Bibliorum
                     ,
                  
                   well
                   observes
                   ,
                   :
                   And
                   as
                   the
                   matter
                   of
                   these
                   Histories
                   doth
                   clearly
                   evince
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   The
                   UNITED
                   State
                   of
                   the
                   Kingdome
                   of
                   Israel
                   ,
                   is
                   described
                   what
                   it
                   was
                   ,
                   both
                   under
                   the
                   Kings
                   .
                   1.
                   
                   By
                   Election
                   .
                   and
                   2.
                   
                   By
                   Succession
                   .
                   And
                   how
                   it
                   increased
                   and
                   flourished
                   whilest
                   so
                   united
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                 
                   I
                   Samuel
                
                 
                   I
                   UNder
                   Kings
                   by
                   ELECTION
                   ,
                   The
                   kingdomes
                   Condition
                   is
                   recorded
                   in
                   the
                   I.
                   Book
                   OF
                   SAMUEL
                   .
                   So
                   called
                   ,
                   either
                   from
                   the
                   matter
                   or
                   subject
                   herein
                   handled
                   .
                   viz.
                   The
                   History
                   of
                   SAMUEL
                   ,
                   which
                   takes
                   up
                   a
                   great
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Book
                   .
                   
                     As
                     Alsted
                     .
                     in
                     Praecog
                     .
                     Theol.
                     l.
                  
                   2.
                   c.
                   120.
                   
                   Or
                   also
                   from
                   the
                   instrumentall
                   efficient
                   cause
                   ,
                   or
                   Penman
                   of
                   this
                   of
                   this
                   Book
                   ,
                   Samuel
                   being
                   supposed
                   to
                   have
                   penned
                   this
                   Book
                   ,
                   till
                   c.
                   25.
                   
                   David
                   the
                   rest
                   .
                   
                     Gloss.
                     ordinar
                     .
                     Iunius
                     and
                     Trem.
                  
                   are
                   of
                   opinion
                   ,
                   that
                   Samuel
                   had
                   a
                   great
                   share
                   in
                   penning
                   of
                   these
                   two
                   Books
                   that
                   bare
                   his
                   name
                   ;
                   and
                   that
                   Nathan
                   the
                   Prophet
                   ,
                   and
                   Gad
                   the
                   Seer
                   penned
                   part
                   thereof
                   ,
                   from
                   that
                   intimation
                   ,
                   1
                   Chron.
                   29.29
                   .
                   which
                   words
                   of
                   
                     Samuel
                     ,
                     Nathan
                  
                   
                   and
                   Gad
                   seem
                   to
                   be
                   the
                   
                     two
                     Books
                     of
                     Samuel
                  
                   ,
                   penned
                   by
                   them
                   three
                   .
                   
                     Iun.
                     in
                     Annot.
                     in
                  
                   1
                   Chron.
                   29.29
                   .
                   By
                   the
                   Greek
                   and
                   Latin
                   ,
                   it
                   is
                   also
                   called
                   the
                   1.
                   
                   
                     Book
                     of
                     Kings
                  
                   ,
                   because
                   the
                   later
                   part
                   of
                   it
                   containes
                   the
                   History
                   of
                   Saul
                   ,
                   the
                   first
                   King
                   of
                   Israel
                   .
                
                 
                   This
                   history
                   treats
                   of
                   the
                   last
                   Judges
                   ,
                   viz.
                   Eli
                   ,
                   and
                   Samuel
                   ,
                   and
                   of
                   the
                   first
                   King
                   ,
                   viz.
                   Saul
                   .
                   Declaring
                   when
                   and
                   upon
                   what
                   occasion
                   the
                   Lord
                   changed
                   the
                   government
                   by
                   Iudges
                   into
                   a
                   
                     Regall
                     government
                  
                   ,
                   viz.
                   In
                   days
                   of
                   Samuel
                   ,
                   and
                   upon
                   occasion
                   of
                   the
                   extreame
                   wickednesse
                   of
                   both
                   Elye's
                   and
                   Samuels
                   Sons
                   ,
                   c.
                   1.
                   to
                   9.
                   
                   As
                   also
                   how
                   Saul
                   carryed
                   himselfe
                   both
                   in
                   life
                   and
                   death
                   :
                   and
                   how
                   God
                   prepared
                   David
                   for
                   the
                   Throne
                   ,
                   Saul
                   being
                   rejected
                   .
                   It
                   is
                   an
                   history
                   of
                   about
                   80
                   yeeres
                   continuance
                   .
                   viz.
                   Under
                   Ely
                   40
                   yeeres
                   ,
                   1
                   Sam.
                   4.18
                   .
                   And
                   under
                   Samuel
                   and
                   Saul
                   40
                   yeeres
                   ,
                   Act.
                   13.21
                   .
                
                 
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   To
                   discover
                   mans
                   mutability
                   ,
                   but
                   Gods
                   immutability
                   in
                   all
                   the
                   Revolutions
                   and
                   alterations
                   of
                   Families
                   ,
                   and
                   Common-wealths
                   :
                   viz.
                   In
                   their
                   Constitution
                   ,
                   Administration
                   ,
                   and
                   Alteration
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   This
                   booke
                   treats
                   of
                   the
                   affaires
                   of
                   Israel
                   under
                   a
                   double
                   kind
                   of
                   civill
                   Government
                   ,
                   
                     
                       I.
                       Aristocraticall
                       under
                       Samuel
                       the
                       Prophet
                       and
                       Judge
                       .
                       Whose
                       ,
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           Birth
                           is
                           recorded
                           ,
                           c.
                           1.
                           
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           Calling
                           .
                           Where
                           ,
                           of
                           Eli
                           his
                           Predecessour
                           ,
                           and
                           of
                           his
                           Sonnes
                           ;
                           whose
                           I.
                           Grievous
                           sinne
                           is
                           recorded
                           ,
                           c.
                           2.
                           
                           II.
                           Severe
                           punishment
                           is
                           ,
                           1
                           ,
                           Foretold
                           by
                           Samuel
                           .
                           c.
                           3.
                           2.
                           
                           Inflicted
                           by
                           God.
                           where
                           ,
                           of
                           the
                           warre
                           ,
                           Acted
                           c.
                           4.
                           
                           Finished
                           ,
                           where
                           we
                           have
                           a
                           descripti●n
                           .
                           1.
                           
                           Of
                           the
                           Philistines
                           punishment
                           ,
                           c.
                           5.
                           
                           And
                           of
                           their
                           restoring
                           the
                           captivated
                           Ark
                           ,
                           c.
                           6.
                           2.
                           
                           Of
                           Israels
                           Repentance
                           ,
                           c.
                           7.
                           
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       II.
                       Monarchicall
                       ,
                       under
                       a
                       King.
                       
                       
                         
                         
                           1.
                           
                           To
                           be
                           elected
                           ,
                           what
                           a
                           one
                           he
                           was
                           like
                           to
                           be
                           ,
                           c.
                           8.
                           
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           Actually
                           elected
                           ,
                           what
                           a
                           one
                           he
                           proved
                           ;
                           evidenced
                           ,
                           in
                           
                             Saul
                             ,
                             David
                          
                           ▪
                           
                             
                               1.
                               
                               Saul
                               ,
                               described
                               .
                               1.
                               
                               As
                               elected
                               ,
                               where
                               are
                               laid
                               down
                               his
                               calling
                               ,
                               c.
                               9.
                               
                               Unction
                               ,
                               c.
                               10.
                               
                               Warlike
                               successe
                               ,
                               c.
                               11.
                               2.
                               
                               As
                               rejected
                               .
                               The
                               causes
                               of
                               which
                               rejection
                               are
                               recited
                               ,
                               viz.
                               1.
                               
                               The
                               peoples
                               sin
                               ,
                               c.
                               12.
                               2.
                               
                               Sauls
                               unbeliefe
                               ,
                               c.
                               13.
                               
                               Rashnesse
                               in
                               judging
                               ,
                               c.
                               14.
                               
                               And
                               disobedience
                               ,
                               c.
                               15.
                               
                            
                             
                               2.
                               
                               David
                               .
                               Touching
                               whom
                               are
                               declared
                               ,
                               His
                               
                                 
                                   1.
                                   
                                   Election
                                   .
                                   Where
                                   note
                                   1.
                                   
                                   His
                                   call
                                   ,
                                   c.
                                   16.
                                   2.
                                   
                                   His
                                   Preparatory
                                   1
                                   conquest
                                   of
                                   Goliath
                                   c.
                                   17.
                                   2
                                   
                                   Advancement
                                   into
                                   Sauls
                                   family
                                   ,
                                   c.
                                   18.
                                   
                                
                                 
                                   2.
                                   
                                   
                                     Ejection
                                     .
                                     David
                                  
                                   being
                                   exiled
                                   .
                                   1.
                                   
                                   In
                                   his
                                   own
                                   Country
                                   ,
                                   c.
                                   19
                                   ,
                                   20.
                                   2.
                                   
                                   Out
                                   of
                                   his
                                   Country
                                   ,
                                   c.
                                   21.
                                   to
                                   30.
                                   
                                
                                 
                                   3.
                                   
                                   Advancement
                                   .
                                   1.
                                   
                                   By
                                   his
                                   Victory
                                   ,
                                   c.
                                   30.
                                   2.
                                   
                                   By
                                   Saul's
                                   Death
                                   ,
                                   c.
                                   31.
                                   
                                
                              
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                 
                   II
                   Samuel
                
                 
                   II
                   UNder
                   Kings
                   by
                   SUCCESSION
                   .
                   In
                   this
                   respect
                   the
                   Kingdome
                   's
                   state
                   is
                   declared
                   in
                   the
                   II.
                   of
                   SAMUEL
                   .
                   So
                   called
                   for
                   Reasons
                   formerly
                   mentioned
                   .
                   It
                   s
                   also
                   by
                   the
                   Greek
                   and
                   Latin
                   stiled
                   
                     The
                     second
                     Book
                     of
                     Kings
                  
                   ,
                   because
                   therein
                   the
                   History
                   of
                   David
                   the
                   
                     second
                     King
                  
                   of
                   Israel
                   is
                   continued
                   .
                
                 
                   This
                   is
                   an
                   History
                   of
                   about
                   40
                   yeeres
                   continuance
                   ,
                   2
                   Sam.
                   5.5
                   .
                   An
                   History
                   of
                   Davids
                   Kingdome
                   .
                   may
                   well
                   be
                   called
                   
                     The
                     Annals
                     of
                     David
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   Penman
                   ;
                   some
                   thinke
                   to
                   be
                   the
                   High-Priest
                   ;
                   or
                   some
                   Disciple
                   of
                   Samuel
                   ,
                   who
                   yet
                   for
                   honours
                   sake
                   gave
                   the
                   Booke
                   his
                   Masters
                   name
                   .
                   
                     Alsted
                     .
                     Praecog
                     .
                     Theol.
                     l.
                  
                   2.
                   c.
                   120.
                   
                   But
                   rather
                   it
                   is
                   probable
                   that
                   the
                   latter
                   part
                   of
                   
                   the
                   I.
                   
                     Of
                     Samuel
                  
                   ;
                   and
                   this
                   whole
                   Booke
                   of
                   the
                   II.
                   
                     Of
                     Samuel
                  
                   ,
                   were
                   Penned
                   by
                   Nathan
                   the
                   Prophet
                   ,
                   and
                   Gad
                   the
                   Seer
                   .
                   1
                   Chron.
                   29.29
                   .
                
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   To
                   declare
                   Gods
                   Faithfulnesse
                   in
                   delivering
                   of
                   his
                   own
                   from
                   distresses
                   .
                   That
                   divers
                   great
                   infirmities
                   are
                   incident
                   to
                   Gods
                   uprightest
                   servants
                   .
                   And
                   That
                   (
                   like
                   checker-worke
                   )
                   their
                   prosperity
                   is
                   intermingled
                   with
                   crosses
                   and
                   calamities
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Principal
                     Parts
                  
                   .
                   In
                   this
                   Booke
                   ;
                   (
                   which
                   is
                   a
                   description
                   of
                   Davids
                   Kingdome
                   )
                   we
                   have
                   a
                   Narration
                   of
                   Davids
                   1
                   Life
                   and
                   2
                   Death
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       Davids
                       Life
                    
                     is
                     represented
                     as
                     it
                     was
                     1
                     Glorious
                     ;
                     and
                     as
                     it
                     was
                     2
                     Ignominious
                     .
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         As
                         it
                         was
                         Glorious
                         in
                         his
                         Royall
                         inauguration
                         .
                         Where
                         consider
                         things
                         ,
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             Antecedent
                             viz.
                             1.
                             
                             His
                             mourning
                             for
                             Sauls
                             death
                             ,
                             c.
                             1.
                             2.
                             
                             His
                             returne
                             into
                             Judea
                             ,
                             c.
                             2.
                             3.
                             
                             His
                             war
                             with
                             the
                             House
                             of
                             Saul
                             ,
                             c.
                             3.4
                             .
                          
                           
                             
                             2.
                             
                             Concomitant
                             .
                             He
                             is
                             confirmed
                             King
                             by
                             all
                             Israel
                             ,
                             c.
                             5.
                             
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             Consequent
                             ,
                             viz.
                             1.
                             
                             Ecclesiasticall
                             ,
                             as
                             His
                             fetching
                             up
                             the
                             Ark
                             to
                             Sion
                             c.
                             6.
                             
                             His
                             purpose
                             of
                             building
                             God
                             an
                             House
                             ,
                             c.
                             7.
                             2.
                             
                             Polemicall
                             or
                             warlike
                             ,
                             c.
                             8.
                             3.
                             
                             Politicall
                             ,
                             or
                             civil
                             ,
                             c.
                             9
                             ,
                             10.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         As
                         it
                         was
                         Ignominious
                         ;
                         and
                         that
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             By
                             his
                             sins
                             ,
                             Adultery
                             and
                             Murder
                             ,
                             committed
                             c.
                             11.
                             corrected
                             c.
                             12.
                             
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             By
                             his
                             sorrowes
                             .
                             
                               
                                 1.
                                 
                                 Private
                                 ,
                                 1.
                                 
                                 In
                                 Amnon
                                 ,
                                 by
                                 his
                                 Incest
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 13.
                                 2.
                                 
                                 In
                                 Absolom
                                 ,
                                 where
                                 are
                                 declared
                                 ,
                                 his
                                 Restitution
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 14.
                                 
                                 His
                                 Sedition
                                 begun
                                 c.
                                 15.
                                 
                                 Continued
                                 c.
                                 16.
                                 
                                 Concluded
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 17
                                 ,
                                 18
                                 ,
                                 19.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 2.
                                 
                                 Publique
                                 .
                                 1.
                                 
                                 Sedition
                                 of
                                 the
                                 people
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 20.
                                 2.
                                 
                                 Famine
                                 three
                                 yeeres
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 21.
                                 
                              
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       Davids
                       death
                    
                     .
                     Occurrents
                     Antecedent
                     thereunto
                     .
                     1.
                     
                     His
                     gratulatory
                     and
                     laudatory
                     Psalme
                     ,
                     c.
                     22
                     ▪
                     2
                     ,
                     His
                     sweet
                     Swanlike
                     Song
                     ,
                     and
                     Testament
                     ,
                     c.
                     23.
                     3.
                     
                     The
                     Pestilence
                     upon
                     his
                     numbring
                     the
                     people
                     ,
                     c.
                     24.
                     
                  
                
                 
                 
                   II.
                   The
                   DIVIDED
                   state
                   of
                   the
                   Kingdome
                   of
                   Israel
                   ,
                   and
                   how
                   upon
                   that
                   division
                   it
                   decreased
                   and
                   came
                   to
                   ruine
                   ,
                   is
                   laid
                   down
                   in
                   the
                   
                     two
                     Books
                     of
                     Kings
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   This
                   d●vision
                   and
                   decay
                   of
                   the
                   Kingdome
                   is
                   laid
                   downe
                   two
                   wayes
                   .
                   1.
                   
                   According
                   to
                   the
                   causes
                   and
                   Beginnings
                   thereof
                   .
                   2.
                   
                   According
                   to
                   the
                   Progresse
                   thereof
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   I
                   Kings
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     ACcording
                     to
                     the
                     causes
                     ,
                     and
                     first
                     beginnings
                     of
                     this
                     Division
                     and
                     decay
                  
                   thereupon
                   ensuing
                   .
                   These
                   are
                   set
                   forth
                   in
                   the
                   I.
                   of
                   KINGS
                   .
                   This
                   book
                   is
                   stiled
                   in
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   1.
                   
                   Melacim
                   .
                   i.
                   e.
                   1.
                   
                   
                     Of
                     Kings
                  
                   .
                   By
                   the
                   Greek
                   and
                   Latine
                   the
                   III.
                   
                     of
                     Kings
                  
                   .
                   The
                   history
                   of
                   the
                   Kings
                   both
                   of
                   Iudah
                   and
                   Israel
                   ,
                   being
                   the
                   subject
                   matter
                   of
                   the
                   book
                   .
                
                 
                 
                   In
                   this
                   book
                   the
                   causes
                   and
                   first
                   beginnings
                   of
                   the
                   Kingdomes
                   division
                   and
                   decay
                   are
                   laid
                   downe
                   ,
                   partly
                   by
                   way
                   of
                   Opposition
                   of
                   the
                   flourishing
                   state
                   of
                   Davids
                   kingdome
                   united
                   under
                   Solomon
                   ,
                   c.
                   1.
                   to
                   c.
                   11.
                   
                   Partly
                   by
                   way
                   of
                   Exposition
                   of
                   the
                   occasions
                   (
                   viz.
                   Solomons
                   sinnes
                   ,
                   Gods
                   justice
                   ,
                   Solomons
                   death
                   ,
                   c.
                   11.
                   )
                   and
                   of
                   the
                   first
                   beginnings
                   of
                   the
                   division
                   and
                   decay
                   of
                   the
                   kingdome
                   under
                   Rehoboam
                   ,
                   to
                   whom
                   onely
                   two
                   Tribes
                   were
                   left
                   subject
                   ,
                   Iudah
                   and
                   Benjamin
                   ,
                   1
                   King.
                   11.21
                   .
                   And
                   under
                   Ieroboam
                   to
                   whom
                   the
                   other
                   tenne
                   Tribes
                   revolted
                   :
                   and
                   afterwards
                   under
                   their
                   successours
                   severally
                   .
                   So
                   that
                   in
                   this
                   book
                   are
                   the
                   Acts
                   of
                   five
                   Kings
                   of
                   Iudah
                   after
                   Solomon
                   ,
                   viz.
                   
                     Rehoboam
                     ,
                     ●bijam
                     ,
                     Asa
                     ,
                     Iehoshaphat
                     ,
                     Iehoram
                  
                   :
                   and
                   of
                   eight
                   Kings
                   of
                   Israel
                   ,
                   viz.
                   
                     Ieroboam
                     ,
                     Nadab
                     ,
                     Baasha
                     ,
                     Elah
                     ,
                     Zimri
                     ,
                     Omri
                     and
                     Tibni
                     ,
                     Ahab
                     ,
                     Ahaziah
                     .
                  
                
                 
                 
                   This
                   is
                   an
                   history
                   of
                   118.
                   yeeres
                   viz.
                   Under
                   Solomon
                   40
                   yeeres
                   ,
                   1
                   King.
                   11.42
                   .
                   Under
                   the
                   rest
                   of
                   Kings
                   of
                   Iudah
                   ,
                   78.
                   yeeres
                   ,
                   for
                   Rehoboam
                   Reigned
                   17
                   yeeres
                   .
                   1
                   King.
                   17.31
                   .
                   —
                   Ab●jam
                   3
                   yeeres
                   .
                   1
                   King.
                   15.2
                   .
                   —
                   Asa
                   ,
                   41.
                   yeeres
                   .
                   1
                   King.
                   15.10
                   .
                   —
                   Iehoshaphat
                   ,
                   17.
                   yeers
                   .
                   1
                   King.
                   22.51
                   .
                   —
                   In
                   all
                   118
                   yeeres
                   .
                
                 
                   Penman
                   of
                   this
                   book
                   ,
                   and
                   also
                   of
                   the
                   
                     second
                     booke
                     of
                     Kings
                  
                   is
                   conceived
                   not
                   to
                   be
                   any
                   one
                   man
                   ,
                   but
                   divers
                   .
                   Though
                   the
                   Hebrewes
                   would
                   have
                   them
                   to
                   be
                   written
                   by
                   Ieremiah
                   .
                   Others
                   think
                   that
                   the
                   Churches
                   history
                   ,
                   which
                   was
                   written
                   by
                   divers
                   ,
                   was
                   digested
                   and
                   collected
                   into
                   volumes
                   ,
                   either
                   by
                   
                     E●ra
                     ;
                     Gerh.
                     loc
                     .
                     Com.
                  
                   1
                   
                     de
                     Scriptura
                     .
                     in
                     Exegesi
                  
                   .
                   §
                   .
                   129.
                   
                   Or
                   by
                   the
                   chiefe
                   Priests
                   and
                   Prophets
                   as
                   the
                   Churches
                   Pub.
                   Actuari●s
                   .
                   
                     Alsted
                     Proecog
                     .
                     Theol.
                     l.
                  
                   2.
                   c.
                   120.
                   
                   However
                   ,
                   it
                   seemes
                   evident
                   ,
                   that
                   the
                   beginning
                   of
                   1.
                   
                     of
                     
                     Kings
                  
                   ,
                   touching
                   Solomons
                   Reign
                   ,
                   was
                   written
                   by
                   
                     Nathan
                     ,
                     Abijah
                  
                   and
                   Iddo
                   ,
                   2
                   Chron.
                   9.29
                   .
                   See
                   
                     Iun.
                     in
                     loc
                  
                   .
                   And
                   other
                   parts
                   by
                   Iehu
                   son
                   of
                   Canani
                   ,
                   2
                   Chron.
                   20.3
                   .
                   See
                   
                     Iun.
                     Annot
                     ▪
                     ibid.
                  
                   And
                   by
                   the
                   Prophet
                   Isaiah
                   ,
                   (
                   as
                   Iunius
                   thinks
                   ▪
                   )
                   partly
                   in
                   his
                   Prophecy
                   ,
                   par●ly
                   in
                   the
                   Book
                   of
                   Kings
                   ,
                   2
                   Chron.
                   26.22
                   .
                
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   To
                   shew
                   how
                   the
                   Piety
                   of
                   Kings
                   ,
                   preserves
                   their
                   kingdomes
                   in
                   unity
                   ,
                   and
                   flourishing
                   Prosperity
                   :
                   But
                   the
                   sins
                   and
                   wickednesse
                   of
                   Kings
                   ,
                   especially
                   their
                   idolatry
                   ,
                   whereby
                   they
                   divide
                   themselves
                   from
                   God
                   ,
                   brings
                   Divisions
                   into
                   their
                   Kingdomes
                   ,
                   and
                   consequently
                   ruine
                   upon
                   themselves
                   ,
                   their
                   families
                   and
                   Dominions
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     parts
                  
                   ,
                   might
                   be
                   pointed
                   out
                   ,
                   according
                   to
                   the
                   periods
                   of
                   every
                   severall
                   Kings
                   reigne
                   ,
                   but
                   rather
                   thus
                   .
                   This
                   book
                   containes
                   the
                   increase
                   and
                   decrease
                   of
                   the
                   kingdome
                   of
                   Israel
                   .
                
                 
                   
                   
                     I.
                     Increase
                     of
                     the
                     Kingdome
                     under
                     Solomon
                     ;
                     whose
                     Life
                     and
                     Death
                     are
                     recorded
                     .
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         Solomons
                         Life
                         .
                         Therein
                         consider
                         his
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             Election
                             ,
                             c.
                             1
                             ,
                             2.
                             
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             Administration
                             or
                             Government
                             of
                             the
                             Kingd●m
                             ,
                             where
                             note
                             1.
                             
                             His
                             great
                             Prudence
                             ,
                             c.
                             3
                             ,
                             4.
                             2.
                             
                             His
                             Magnificence
                             in
                             Building
                             ,
                             The
                             Temple
                             ,
                             c.
                             5
                             ,
                             6
                             ,
                             8.
                             
                             His
                             own
                             house
                             ,
                             In
                             
                               Lebanon
                               ,
                               c.
                            
                             7.
                             
                             The
                             Kings
                             house
                             more
                             publique
                             ,
                             c.
                             9.
                             3.
                             
                             His
                             condition
                             ,
                             Prosperous
                             ,
                             c.
                             10.
                             
                             Adverse
                             ,
                             c.
                             11.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         
                           Solomons
                           death
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         11.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     II.
                     Decrease
                     of
                     the
                     Kingdom
                     once
                     Divided
                     ;
                     and
                     this
                     under
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         The
                         Kings
                         of
                         Iudah
                         1.
                         
                         
                           Rehoboam
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         12
                         ,
                         14.
                         2.
                         
                         
                           Abijah
                           ,
                           c
                           ▪
                        
                         15.3
                         .
                         
                           Asa
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         15.
                         4.
                         
                         
                           Iehoshaphat
                           .
                           c
                        
                         ,
                         22.
                         5
                         
                         
                           Iehoram
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         22.
                         ver
                         .
                         50.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         The
                         Kings
                         of
                         Israel
                         contemporary
                         to
                         the
                         Kings
                         of
                         Iudah
                         ,
                         viz.
                         1.
                         
                         
                           Ieroboam
                           c.
                        
                         12
                         ,
                         13
                         ,
                         14.
                         2
                         
                         
                           Nadab
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         15.
                         3.
                         
                         
                           Baasha
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         16.4
                         .
                         Elah
                         ,
                         5.
                         
                         Zimri
                         6.
                         
                         
                           Omri
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         16.7
                         .
                         Ahab
                         .
                         1
                         whose
                         stock
                         is
                         recorded
                         ,
                         c.
                         16.
                         
                           from
                           ver
                        
                         .
                         28.
                         2
                         
                         Whose
                         prosperous
                         state
                         is
                         declared
                         ,
                         In
                         respect
                         of
                         Elijahs
                         Presence
                         .
                         
                         Here
                         are
                         considered
                         ,
                         Elijah's
                         Ambassadge
                         to
                         the
                         King
                         ,
                         c.
                         17
                         ,
                         18.
                         
                         Elijah's
                         exile
                         ,
                         c.
                         19.
                         
                         In
                         respect
                         of
                         Ahabs
                         double
                         victory
                         ,
                         c.
                         20.
                         3
                         
                         Whose
                         Acts
                         and
                         manners
                         are
                         described
                         ,
                         c.
                         21.
                         4
                         
                         Whose
                         Death
                         is
                         delineated
                         ,
                         c.
                         22.
                         8.
                         
                         
                           Ahaziah
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         22.
                         ver
                         .
                         51.
                         &c.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   II
                   Kings
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   
                     ACcording
                     to
                     the
                     Progresse
                     and
                     Growth
                     of
                     the
                     Kingdom
                     's
                     division
                     ,
                  
                   and
                   the
                   miserable
                   calamities
                   ,
                   growing
                   and
                   increasing
                   thereupon
                   ,
                   This
                   is
                   related
                   in
                   the
                   11.
                   of
                   KINGS
                   called
                   in
                   Hebr.
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   11.
                   
                   
                     Melacim
                     ,
                     i.
                     c.
                     The
                     second
                     of
                     Kings
                     ,
                  
                   By
                   the
                   Greek
                   and
                   Latin
                   ,
                   The
                   IV.
                   
                     of
                     Kings
                  
                   .
                   The
                   History
                   of
                   the
                   Kings
                   being
                   still
                   continued
                   in
                   this
                   Book
                   .
                
                 
                   This
                   Book
                   is
                   an
                   History
                   of
                   about
                   320.
                   years
                   ,
                   under
                   12.
                   
                   Kings
                   of
                   Israel
                   ,
                   and
                   16.
                   
                   Kings
                   of
                   Iudah
                   .
                
                 
                   
                   
                     Vnder
                     12.
                     
                     
                       Kings
                       of
                       Israel
                    
                     ,
                     162
                     years
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ahazia
                     1
                     yeare
                     .
                     1
                     Kings
                     22.52
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ioram
                     11
                     yeare
                     .
                     2
                     Kings
                     3.1
                     .
                     &
                     8.25
                     .
                  
                   
                     Iehu
                     28
                     yeare
                     .
                     2
                     Kings
                     10.36
                     .
                  
                   
                     Iehoahaz
                     17
                     yeare
                     .
                     viz.
                     15
                     alone
                     ,
                     and
                     two
                     with
                     his
                     son
                     ,
                     2
                     Kings
                     13.1.10
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ioash
                     16
                     yeare
                     .
                     2
                     Kings
                     13.10
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ieroboam
                     41
                     yeare
                     .
                     2
                     Kings
                     14.23
                     .
                  
                   
                     Zechariah
                     6
                     moneths
                     2
                     Kings
                     15.8
                     .
                  
                   
                     Shallum
                     1
                     moneth
                     2
                     Kings
                     15.13
                     .
                  
                   
                     Menachem
                     10
                     yeare
                     .
                     2
                     Kings
                     15.17
                     .
                  
                   
                     Pekachijah
                     2
                     year
                     .
                     2
                     Kings
                     15.23
                     .
                  
                   
                     Pekah
                     20
                     year
                     .
                     2
                     Kings
                     15.27
                     .
                  
                   
                     Hosheah
                     who
                     reigned
                     18
                     y.
                     viz.
                     9
                     y.
                     free
                     .
                     2
                     Kings
                     17.1
                     .
                     and
                     9.
                     y.
                     a
                     tributary
                     to
                     the
                     King
                     of
                     Assyria
                     ,
                     by
                     whom
                     at
                     last
                     he
                     was
                     carried
                     captive
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     6.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Vnder
                     16
                     
                       Kings
                       of
                       Iudah
                    
                     ,
                     320
                     year
                     .
                  
                   
                     Iehoram
                     12
                     y.
                     viz.
                     8.
                     alone
                     ,
                     and
                     4.
                     with
                     his
                     father
                     Iehoshaphat
                     2
                     Kings
                     8.17
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ahazia
                     1.
                     y.
                     2
                     King.
                     8.26
                     .
                  
                   
                     Athalia
                     6
                     year
                     ,
                     2
                     Kings
                     11.3
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ioash
                     40.
                     y.
                     2
                     King.
                     12.1.39
                     .
                     Iunius
                     .
                  
                   
                     Amaziah
                     29
                     yeare
                     12
                     of
                     which
                     in
                     exile
                     ,
                     —
                     2
                     Kings
                     14.2
                     .
                  
                   
                     Azariah
                     or
                     Vzziah
                     52.
                     yeare
                     .
                     2
                     Kings
                     —
                     15
                     ,
                     5.
                     
                  
                   
                     Iotham
                     16.
                     yeare
                     .
                     2
                     King
                     15.33
                     .
                     —
                     15.
                     yeare
                     Iun.
                     
                  
                   
                     Ahaz
                     16.
                     yeare
                     ,
                     2
                     Kings
                     16.2
                     .
                     —
                     14.
                     year
                     Iun.
                     
                  
                   
                     
                     Hezekiah
                     29.
                     year
                     ,
                     2
                     King.
                     18.2
                     .
                  
                   
                     Manasses
                     55.
                     yeare
                     ,
                     2
                     King.
                     21.2
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ammon
                     2
                     yeare
                     ,
                     2
                     Kings
                     21.19
                     .
                  
                   
                     Iosiah
                     31.
                     yeare
                     .
                     2
                     King.
                     22.1
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ioahaz
                     3.
                     moneths
                     .
                     2
                     Kings
                     23.36
                     .
                  
                   
                     Ichoiakim
                     11
                     yeare
                     ,
                     2
                     Kings
                     23.36
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       Ichoiachin
                       three
                       moneths
                    
                     .
                     2
                     Kings
                     24.8
                  
                   
                     Zedekiah
                     11.
                     year
                     ,
                     2
                     Kings
                     24.18
                     .
                  
                   
                     Thence
                     till
                     Iehoiakins
                     advancement
                     ,
                     26.
                     year
                     ,
                     2
                     Kings
                     25.27
                     ,
                     30.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   Penmen
                   of
                   this
                   11.
                   of
                   Kings
                   ,
                   See
                   in
                   Penmen
                   of
                   1.
                   
                     of
                     Kings
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   Scope
                   ;
                   to
                   delineate
                   Gods
                   verity
                   in
                   his
                   Promises
                   and
                   Threats
                   ,
                   together
                   with
                   his
                   severity
                   in
                   his
                   judgements
                   .
                   The
                   continuall
                   Revolution
                   of
                   Families
                   and
                   States
                   ,
                   The
                   mischief
                   of
                   sin
                   ,
                   especially
                   in
                   Magistrates
                   ,
                   dividing
                   them
                   and
                   their
                   people
                   from
                   God
                   ,
                   and
                   consequently
                   themselves
                   amongst
                   themselves
                   ,
                   till
                   both
                   Kings
                   ,
                   people
                   and
                   Kingdomes
                   be
                   ripe
                   and
                   ready
                   for
                   desolation
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     parts
                  
                   ,
                   may
                   be
                   considered
                   either
                   according
                   to
                   the
                   Reign
                   of
                   the
                   severall
                   Kings
                   of
                   Israel
                   and
                   Iudah
                   ,
                   as
                   afore
                   .
                   Or
                   as
                   followeth
                   ;
                   This
                   Book
                   declareth
                   .
                
                 
                 
                   The
                   state
                   of
                   the
                   Kingdomes
                   of
                   Israel
                   and
                   Iudah
                   ;
                   together
                   with
                   their
                   defection
                   and
                   declining
                   ,
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Severally
                       of
                       the
                       Kingdome
                       of
                       Israel
                       under
                       1.
                       
                       
                         Ahaziah
                         ,
                         c.
                      
                       1.2
                       .
                       2.
                       
                       Ioram
                       ,
                       where
                       of
                       Elishah's
                       miracles
                       ,
                       c.
                       3.4.5
                       .
                       Oracles
                       or
                       Prophecies
                       ,
                       c
                       ,
                       6.7.8
                       .
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       Joyntly
                       of
                       
                         Israel
                         and
                         Iudah
                      
                       ,
                       parallel'd
                       as
                       it
                       were
                       together
                       ,
                       c.
                       9.
                       to
                       18.
                       
                    
                     
                       3
                       Severally
                       of
                       the
                       Kingdome
                       of
                       Iudah
                       ,
                       whose
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           Weakning
                           ,
                           is
                           recorded
                           1.
                           
                           Under
                           a
                           good
                           King
                           
                             Hezekiah
                             ,
                             c.
                          
                           18.
                           19.20
                           .
                           2.
                           
                           Under
                           a
                           bad
                           King
                           
                             Manasseh
                             ,
                             c.
                          
                           20.21
                           .
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           Reparation
                           is
                           indeavoured
                           by
                           
                             Iosiah
                             ,
                             c.
                          
                           22.23
                           .
                        
                         
                           3.
                           
                           Subversion
                           is
                           1.
                           
                           Begun
                           c.
                           23.
                           24.
                           2.
                           
                           Accomplished
                           c.
                           25.
                           
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
                 
                   III.
                   The
                   UNITED
                   and
                   DIVIDED
                   State
                   of
                   the
                   kingdome
                   is
                   laid
                   downe
                   in
                   the
                   two
                   Books
                   of
                   Chronicles
                   ,
                   with
                   some
                   further
                   Additions
                   and
                   Amplifications
                   to
                   the
                   former
                   Histories
                   .
                   This
                   is
                   done
                   two
                   wayes
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                 
                   I
                   Chron.
                   
                
                 
                   1.
                   
                   ACording
                   to
                   the
                   UNITED
                   State
                   of
                   the
                   kingdome
                   in
                   I.
                   OF
                   CHRONICLES
                   ,
                   so
                   called
                   because
                   the
                   Acts
                   of
                   former
                   times
                   are
                   herein
                   Recorded
                   ,
                   or
                   Chronicled
                   .
                   In
                   Hebr.
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     Dihre
                     Haijamim
                  
                   ,
                   i.
                   e.
                   THE
                   WORDS
                   OF
                   DAYES
                   ,
                   because
                   they
                   are
                   as
                   a
                   Sacred
                   DIARY
                   ;
                   reporting
                   the
                   Acts
                   and
                   Occurrents
                   in
                   the
                   Church
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                   and
                   Civil
                   States
                   both
                   Domestique
                   and
                   Forrein
                   .
                   Munsterus
                   not
                   unfitly
                   stiles
                   them
                   
                     Libros
                     Annalium
                  
                   ,
                   i.
                   e.
                   
                     The
                     Books
                     of
                     Annals
                     .
                     Annals
                  
                   barely
                   declaring
                   matters
                   of
                   fact
                   for
                   divers
                   years
                   in
                   order
                   ;
                   as
                   ,
                   
                     Gellius
                     notes
                     l.
                  
                   5.
                   
                   N.
                   A.
                   c.
                   18.
                   
                   These
                   two
                   Books
                   are
                   
                     the
                     CHVRCHES
                     ANNALS
                  
                   .
                   In
                   Greek
                   these
                   two
                   Books
                   are
                   called
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   ,
                   
                     Bibloi
                     Paralipomenon
                  
                   ,
                   i.
                   e.
                   
                     The
                     Books
                     of
                     things
                     omitted
                  
                   :
                   or
                   ,
                   THE
                   BOOKS
                   OF
                   REMAINES
                   :
                   
                   because
                   some
                   things
                   omitted
                   ,
                   or
                   not
                   fully
                   described
                   in
                   the
                   
                     Pentateuch
                     ,
                     Ioshuah
                     ,
                     Iudges
                     ,
                     Ruth
                     ,
                     Samuel
                     and
                     Kings
                     ,
                  
                   are
                   here
                   Summarily
                   explicated
                   ,
                   and
                   supplyed
                   .
                
                 
                   This
                   I.
                   
                     of
                     Chron.
                  
                   Principally
                   insists
                   upon
                   the
                   History
                   of
                   David
                   ,
                   Relating
                   his
                   Genealogy
                   from
                   the
                   
                     first
                     Adam
                  
                   and
                   so
                   forwards
                   towards
                   the
                   
                     second
                     Adam
                  
                   ;
                   wherein
                   the
                   12.
                   tribes
                   and
                   their
                   families
                   ,
                   &c.
                   are
                   recorded
                   c.
                   1.
                   to
                   10.
                   
                   And
                   his
                   famous
                   Acts
                   c.
                   10.
                   to
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   Book
                   ;
                   so
                   that
                   this
                   Book
                   is
                   a
                   
                     Compendious
                     Chronology
                  
                   of
                   all
                   the
                   former
                   Books
                   to
                   the
                   
                     Books
                     of
                     Kings
                  
                   ,
                   of
                   things
                   from
                   the
                   worlds
                   Creation
                   ,
                   till
                   about
                   the
                   yeare
                   2985.
                   viz.
                   of
                   
                     
                       Genesis
                       —
                       2368
                       y.
                       All
                       which
                       have
                       been
                       aboue
                       particularly
                       explained
                       and
                       demonstrated
                       .
                       So
                       the
                       I.
                       of
                       Chronicles
                       is
                       the
                       longest
                       History
                       of
                       any
                       one
                       Book
                       in
                       the
                       whole
                       Bible
                       .
                    
                     
                       Exodus
                       142.
                       y.
                       All
                       which
                       have
                       been
                       aboue
                       particularly
                       explained
                       and
                       demonstrated
                       .
                       So
                       the
                       I.
                       of
                       Chronicles
                       is
                       the
                       longest
                       History
                       of
                       any
                       one
                       Book
                       in
                       the
                       whole
                       Bible
                       .
                    
                     
                       The
                       other
                       Books
                       of
                       Moses
                       39
                       y.
                       All
                       which
                       have
                       been
                       aboue
                       particularly
                       explained
                       and
                       demonstrated
                       .
                       So
                       the
                       I.
                       of
                       Chronicles
                       is
                       the
                       longest
                       History
                       of
                       any
                       one
                       Book
                       in
                       the
                       whole
                       Bible
                       .
                    
                     
                       Joshuah
                       17.
                       almost
                       18
                       y.
                       All
                       which
                       have
                       been
                       aboue
                       particularly
                       explained
                       and
                       demonstrated
                       .
                       So
                       the
                       I.
                       of
                       Chronicles
                       is
                       the
                       longest
                       History
                       of
                       any
                       one
                       Book
                       in
                       the
                       whole
                       Bible
                       .
                    
                     
                       Judges
                       —
                       299
                       y.
                       All
                       which
                       have
                       been
                       aboue
                       particularly
                       explained
                       and
                       demonstrated
                       .
                       So
                       the
                       I.
                       of
                       Chronicles
                       is
                       the
                       longest
                       History
                       of
                       any
                       one
                       Book
                       in
                       the
                       whole
                       Bible
                       .
                    
                     
                       I.
                       Of
                       Samuel
                       80
                       y.
                       All
                       which
                       have
                       been
                       aboue
                       particularly
                       explained
                       and
                       demonstrated
                       .
                       So
                       the
                       I.
                       of
                       Chronicles
                       is
                       the
                       longest
                       History
                       of
                       any
                       one
                       Book
                       in
                       the
                       whole
                       Bible
                       .
                    
                     
                       II.
                       Of
                       Samuel
                       40
                       y.
                       All
                       which
                       have
                       been
                       aboue
                       particularly
                       explained
                       and
                       demonstrated
                       .
                       So
                       the
                       I.
                       of
                       Chronicles
                       is
                       the
                       longest
                       History
                       of
                       any
                       one
                       Book
                       in
                       the
                       whole
                       Bible
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                 
                   Hierom
                   calls
                   the
                   Chronicles
                   ,
                   Instrumenti
                   veteris
                   Epitomen
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                   
                     The
                     Epitome
                     of
                     the
                     Old
                     Testament
                  
                   ;
                   and
                   that
                   it
                   is
                   of
                   such
                   Consequence
                   ,
                   that
                   whosoever
                   would
                   arrogate
                   to
                   himselfe
                   the
                   knowledge
                   of
                   the
                   Scriptures
                   without
                   it
                   ,
                   doth
                   but
                   mock
                   and
                   abuse
                   himselfe
                   .
                   
                     Hieronym
                     .
                     in
                     Ep.
                     ad
                     Paulin.
                  
                   And
                   again
                   stiles
                   it
                   ,
                   
                     Totius
                     divinae
                     Historiae
                  
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   ,
                   i.
                   e.
                   
                     The
                     Chronicle
                     of
                     the
                     whole
                     Divine
                     History
                     .
                  
                   Hier.
                   in
                   Prolog
                   .
                   Galeat
                   .
                
                 
                   Penman
                   of
                   this
                   and
                   the
                   second
                   Book
                   is
                   uncertaine
                   .
                   R.
                   Salomo
                   .
                   R.
                   D.
                   Kimchi
                   ,
                   think
                   it
                   was
                   Ezra
                   .
                   Saith
                   
                     Alsted
                     in
                     Praecog
                     .
                     Theol.
                     l.
                  
                   2.
                   c.
                   120.
                   
                   Iunius
                   also
                   is
                   of
                   the
                   same
                   judgement
                   .
                   
                     Iun.
                     Annot.
                     in
                  
                   1
                   King.
                   11.41
                   .
                   
                     and
                     in
                     his
                     argument
                     before
                  
                   1
                   Chron.
                   The
                   Argument
                   that
                   generally
                   inclines
                   them
                   all
                   to
                   this
                   opinion
                   ,
                   is
                   ,
                   That
                   the
                   same
                   words
                   which
                   are
                   used
                   in
                   the
                   close
                   of
                   the
                   Chronicles
                   2
                   Chron.
                   36.23
                   .
                   are
                   also
                   used
                   in
                   the
                   beginning
                   of
                   Ezra
                   .
                   Ezr.
                   1.1
                   ,
                   2
                   ,
                   3.
                   
                
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   The
                   primary
                   Scope
                   of
                   this
                   Book
                   seemes
                   to
                   be
                   this
                   ;
                   Clearly
                   to
                   describe
                   the
                   Line
                   and
                   Genealogy
                   
                   of
                   CHRIST
                   ,
                   the
                   Messiah
                   promised
                   to
                   
                     David
                     ,
                     Abraham
                  
                   ,
                   and
                   Adam
                   :
                   That
                   when
                   in
                   fulnesse
                   of
                   time
                   Christ
                   should
                   be
                   revealed
                   and
                   performed
                   ;
                   the
                   Church
                   might
                   infallibly
                   know
                   ,
                   that
                   he
                   was
                   the
                   Promised
                   SEED
                   OF
                   THE
                   WOMAN
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     Parts
                  
                   .
                   This
                   
                     first
                     Book
                     of
                     Chron.
                  
                   describes
                   the
                   Israelitish
                   kingdome
                   in
                   its
                   1
                   Foundation
                   ,
                   and
                   2
                   Administration
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     Foundation
                     .
                     Where
                     ,
                     of
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         The
                         General
                         Genealogy
                         of
                         all
                         Nations
                         from
                         Adam
                         to
                         Iacob
                         ,
                         c.
                         1.
                         
                         Here
                         is
                         a
                         Chronicle
                         of
                         
                           
                             1
                             The
                             Pentateuch
                             .
                          
                           
                             2
                             Ioshuah
                             .
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             Iudges
                             .
                          
                        
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         Particular
                         Geneal
                         of
                         the
                         Nation
                         of
                         Israel
                         by
                         the
                         twelve
                         Tribes
                         ,
                         c.
                         2.
                         to
                         9.
                         
                         Here
                         is
                         a
                         Chronicle
                         of
                         
                           
                             1
                             The
                             Pentateuch
                             .
                          
                           
                             2
                             Ioshuah
                             .
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             Iudges
                             .
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     II.
                     Administrat●on
                     under
                     .
                     
                       
                         1
                         Saul
                         ,
                         whose
                         
                           
                             1
                             Genealogy
                             is
                             in
                             c.
                             9.
                             
                          
                           
                             2
                             Death
                             c.
                             10.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                       
                         2
                         David
                         whose
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             Kingly
                             condition
                             ,
                             c.
                             11
                             ,
                             12
                             ,
                             14.
                             
                          
                           
                             2
                             Acts
                             
                               
                                 1
                                 Sacred
                                 ,
                                 restoring
                                 Gods
                                 ●orship
                                 ,
                                 in
                                 respect
                                 of
                                 the
                                 
                                   
                                     1
                                     Place
                                     ,
                                     c.
                                     13
                                     ,
                                     15
                                     ,
                                     17
                                     ,
                                     22.
                                     
                                  
                                   
                                     2
                                     Persons
                                     ministring
                                     in
                                     the
                                     
                                       
                                         1
                                         Tabernacle
                                         c.
                                         16
                                      
                                       
                                         2
                                         Temple
                                         ,
                                         c.
                                         23.
                                         24
                                         ,
                                         25
                                         ,
                                         26
                                         Here
                                         is
                                         a
                                         Chronicle
                                         of
                                         the
                                         
                                           two
                                           Books
                                           of
                                           Samuel
                                        
                                         .
                                      
                                    
                                  
                                
                              
                               
                                 2
                                 Polemical
                                 or
                                 Martial
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 18
                                 ,
                                 19
                                 ,
                                 20.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 3.
                                 
                                 Political
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 21.27
                                 .
                              
                            
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             Death
                             ,
                             c.
                             28
                             ,
                             29.
                             where
                             is
                             declared
                             
                             how
                             David
                             before
                             his
                             Death
                             in
                             a
                             Solemne
                             Assembly
                             at
                             Ierusalem
                             took
                             his
                             leave
                             of
                             his
                             Kindred
                             .
                             Set
                             Solomon
                             or
                             his
                             Throne
                             ,
                             after
                             he
                             had
                             given
                             him
                             Directions
                             about
                             the
                             Temple
                             ,
                             and
                             himself
                             with
                             his
                             Princes
                             had
                             offered
                             willingly
                             towards
                             the
                             building
                             of
                             it
                             .
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   II
                   Chron
                   :
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   ACcording
                   to
                   the
                   UNITED
                   and
                   DIVIDED
                   state
                   of
                   the
                   kingdom
                   in
                   the
                   II
                   of
                   CHRONICLES
                   .
                   So
                   called
                   for
                   the
                   reasons
                   formerly
                   alledged
                   .
                
                 
                   This
                   booke
                   relates
                   the
                   history
                   of
                   the
                   Israelitish
                   State
                   from
                   the
                   beginning
                   of
                   king
                   Solomons
                   Reigne
                   ,
                   till
                   their
                   returne
                   from
                   the
                   Babylonish
                   Captivity
                   ,
                   which
                   fell
                   out
                   about
                   the
                   first
                   yeare
                   of
                   Cyrus
                   king
                   of
                   Persians
                   .
                   Setting
                   down
                   both
                   the
                   union
                   and
                   flourishing
                   condition
                   of
                   the
                   kingdome
                   ,
                   under
                   Solomon
                   .
                   but
                   the
                   division
                   and
                   decay
                   of
                   the
                   kingdome
                   thence
                   ensuing
                   ,
                   till
                   it
                   came
                   to
                   utter
                   ruine
                   .
                   So
                   this
                   book
                   contains
                   an
                   History
                   of
                   about
                   472
                   yeeres
                   .
                
                 
                   
                   
                     From
                     Solomon
                     to
                     carrying
                     away
                     of
                     Iechonias
                     ,
                     401.
                     
                     As
                     Jun.
                     and
                     Tremell
                     .
                     compute
                     .
                  
                   
                     In
                     the
                     Captivity
                     ,
                     —
                     70
                     As
                     Jun.
                     and
                     Tremell
                     .
                     compute
                     .
                  
                   
                     Under
                     Cyrus
                     the
                     Persian
                     ,
                     —
                     1.
                     
                     As
                     Jun.
                     and
                     Tremell
                     .
                     compute
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   So
                   that
                   this
                   book
                   is
                   an
                   
                     Epitome
                     or
                     Chronicle
                     of
                     the
                     two
                     Books
                     of
                     Kings
                     ,
                  
                   with
                   Additions
                   .
                   If
                   we
                   consider
                   the
                   books
                   of
                   
                     Samuel
                     ,
                     Kings
                  
                   ,
                   and
                   Chronicles
                   ,
                   all
                   together
                   ,
                   they
                   containe
                   an
                   Historicall
                   Narration
                   ,
                   How
                   the
                   kingdome
                   of
                   Israel
                   1
                   Began
                   under
                   Samuel
                   :
                   2
                   Increased
                   under
                   David
                   :
                   3
                   Flourished
                   under
                   Solomon
                   :
                   and
                   4
                   Failed
                   under
                   Zedekiah
                   ;
                   thus
                   it
                   endured
                   almost
                   565
                   yeers
                   .
                
                 
                   Penman
                   ,
                   see
                   in
                   1.
                   of
                   Chron.
                   
                
                 
                   Scope
                   ,
                   For
                   substance
                   the
                   same
                   with
                   that
                   of
                   the
                   two
                   books
                   of
                   Kings
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   This
                   book
                   containes
                   an
                   Historicall
                   Narration
                   of
                   the
                   kingdome
                   of
                   Israel's
                   ,
                   
                     
                       I.
                       Flourishing
                       ,
                       or
                       increase
                       under
                       King
                       Solomon
                       .
                       Touching
                       Solomon
                       are
                       recorded
                       ,
                       his
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           Vertues
                           ,
                           c.
                           1.
                           
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           Buildings
                           .
                           
                             
                             
                               1.
                               
                               Sacred
                               ,
                               viz.
                               The
                               Temple
                               ,
                               where
                               ,
                               1.
                               
                               His
                               preparation
                               for
                               it
                               ,
                               c
                               2.
                               2.
                               
                               His
                               extruction
                               or
                               building
                               of
                               it
                               ,
                               viz.
                               Of
                               the
                               Temple
                               ,
                               contayning
                               ▪
                               c.
                               3.
                               
                               And
                               of
                               the
                               Holy
                               utensils
                               ,
                               contayned
                               in
                               it
                               ,
                               c.
                               4.
                               3.
                               
                               His
                               Dedication
                               of
                               the
                               Temple
                               ,
                               partly
                               by
                               Dedicated
                               things
                               ,
                               especially
                               the
                               Arke
                               brought
                               into
                               the
                               Temple
                               c.
                               5.
                               
                               Partly
                               by
                               praise
                               and
                               prayer
                               ,
                               c.
                               6.
                               
                               Partly
                               by
                               Sacrifice
                               ,
                               c.
                               7.
                               
                            
                             
                               2.
                               
                               Civil
                               ,
                               viz.
                               Severall
                               Cities
                               which
                               he
                               builded
                               ,
                               c.
                               8.
                               
                            
                          
                        
                         
                           3.
                           
                           Condition
                           and
                           Death
                           ,
                           c.
                           9.
                           
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       II.
                       Fading
                       ,
                       or
                       decrease
                       under
                       the
                       following
                       Kings
                       of
                       Iudah
                       and
                       Israel
                       (
                       the
                       kingdome
                       being
                       divided
                       )
                       till
                       the
                       returne
                       from
                       Captivity
                       in
                       the
                       Reigne
                       of
                       Cyrus
                       .
                       Where
                       note
                       five
                       concussions
                       of
                       shakings
                       of
                       the
                       Kingdome
                       under
                       these
                       ensuing
                       Kings
                       .
                       viz.
                       
                       
                         
                           Rehoboam
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           10
                           ,
                           11
                           ,
                           12
                        
                         
                           Abia
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           13
                        
                         
                           Asa
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           14
                           ,
                           15
                           ,
                           16
                        
                         
                           Jehoshaphat
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           17
                           ,
                           18
                           ,
                           19
                           ,
                           20
                        
                         
                           Jehoram
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           21
                        
                         
                           Ahaziah
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           22
                        
                         
                           Joash
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           23
                           ,
                           24
                        
                         
                           Amaziah
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           25
                        
                         
                           
                           Uzziah
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           26
                        
                         
                           Jotham
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           27
                        
                         
                           Ahaz
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           28
                        
                         
                           Hezekiah
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           29
                           ,
                           30
                           ,
                           31
                           ,
                           32
                        
                         
                           Manas●eh
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           33
                        
                         
                           Amon
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           33
                        
                         
                           Josi●h
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           34
                           ,
                           35
                        
                         
                           Joahaz
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           36.
                           
                        
                         
                           Jehoakim
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           36.
                           
                        
                         
                           Jechoniah
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           36.
                           
                        
                         
                           Zedekiah
                           ,
                        
                         
                           c.
                           36.
                           
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
                 
                   II.
                   After
                   the
                   people
                   of
                   Israels
                   CAPTIVITY
                   in
                   which
                   regard
                   we
                   have
                   their
                   REDUCTION
                   ,
                   or
                   bringing
                   back
                   from
                   the
                   Captivity
                   of
                   Babylon
                   Hystorically
                   declared
                   :
                   And
                   that
                   two
                   wayes
                   .
                   1.
                   
                   According
                   to
                   the
                   truth
                   and
                   manner
                   of
                   it
                   .
                   2.
                   
                   According
                   to
                   the
                   fruit
                   and
                   event
                   of
                   it
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Ezra
                   .
                
                 
                   1
                   
                     THe
                     truth
                     and
                     manner
                     of
                     Gods
                     peoples
                  
                   RETURNE
                   FROM
                   BABYLON
                   ,
                   is
                   contained
                   in
                   the
                   book
                   of
                   EZRA
                   .
                   So
                   called
                   from
                   
                   Ezra
                   the
                   Penman
                   of
                   it
                   ;
                   whose
                   Acts
                   also
                   are
                   the
                   chief
                   subject-matter
                   of
                   it
                   .
                   Some
                   count
                   and
                   call
                   Ezra
                   a
                   Prophet
                   .
                   
                     Lactant.
                     lib.
                  
                   4.
                   
                   
                     Iust.
                     c.
                  
                   11.
                   but
                   Augustine
                   doubts
                   whether
                   he
                   may
                   be
                   called
                   a
                   Prophet
                   ,
                   
                     Aug.
                     l.
                  
                   18
                   
                     de
                     Civit
                     .
                     Dei
                     c.
                  
                   36.
                   
                   Hierome
                   saith
                   he
                   was
                   Iosedech
                   ,
                   whose
                   son
                   was
                   Iesus
                   the
                   High-Priest
                   .
                   
                     See
                     Ludovic
                     .
                     Viv.
                     in
                     Lib.
                  
                   18
                   
                     de
                     Civit.
                     dei
                     .
                     c.
                  
                   36.
                   
                   But
                   how
                   can
                   he
                   be
                   denyed
                   to
                   be
                   a
                   Prophet
                   ,
                   when
                   Christ
                   himselfe
                   stiles
                   all
                   the
                   books
                   of
                   the
                   Old
                   Testament
                   
                     Moses
                     and
                     the
                     Prophets
                  
                   ,
                   Luk.
                   16.29.31
                   ?
                
                 
                   This
                   is
                   certaine
                   ,
                   Ezra
                   was
                   a
                   Priest
                   ,
                   Ezr.
                   7
                   ,
                   11
                   ,
                   12.
                   
                   He
                   was
                   of
                   the
                   house
                   and
                   linage
                   of
                   Aaron
                   ;
                   see
                   his
                   pedigree
                   ,
                   Ezr.
                   7.1.2
                   ,
                   3
                   ,
                   4
                   ,
                   5.
                   
                   A
                   most
                   expert
                   and
                   ready
                   Scribe
                   in
                   the
                   Law
                   of
                   Moses
                   ,
                   Ezr.
                   7.6
                   ,
                   10
                   ,
                   11.
                   
                   He
                   was
                   sent
                   with
                   Commission
                   by
                   Artaxerxes
                   from
                   Babylon
                   to
                   Ierusalem
                   ,
                   &c.
                   ver
                   .
                   11.
                   &c.
                   
                
                 
                   Zerubbabel
                   restored
                   the
                   Temple
                   :
                   Ezra
                   the
                   worship
                   of
                   God
                   :
                   Nehemiah
                   the
                   City
                   Ierusalem
                   .
                
                 
                   This
                   book
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   of
                   Nehemiah
                   following
                   ,
                   are
                   by
                   the
                   Hebrewes
                   ,
                   
                   reputed
                   as
                   but
                   one
                   volume
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   is
                   called
                   by
                   them
                   the
                   I.
                   
                     of
                     Ezra
                  
                   ,
                   this
                   the
                   II.
                   
                     of
                     Ezra
                     .
                     Hieronym
                     .
                     in
                     Epist.
                     ad
                     Paulin.
                  
                   and
                   
                     Lactant.
                     Instit.
                     l.
                  
                   4.
                   c.
                   11.
                   
                   The
                   Greek
                   and
                   Latin
                   divide
                   them
                   (
                   as
                   our
                   English
                   )
                   into
                   two
                   books
                   ,
                   the
                   former
                   being
                   ascribed
                   to
                   Ezra
                   ,
                   the
                   latter
                   to
                   Nehemiah
                   .
                   The
                   Book
                   of
                   Ezra
                   ,
                   in
                   Order
                   well
                   followes
                   the
                   Chronicles
                   ;
                   for
                   the
                   very
                   words
                   which
                   conclude
                   the
                   Chronicles
                   ,
                   2
                   Chron.
                   36.
                   last
                   ,
                   do
                   begin
                   this
                   Book
                   of
                   Ezra
                   ,
                   Ezra
                   1.1
                   ,
                   2
                   ,
                   3.
                   not
                   only
                   intimating
                   ,
                   that
                   Ezra
                   was
                   probably
                   Penman
                   of
                   them
                   both
                   ,
                   but
                   also
                   that
                   in
                   this
                   Book
                   the
                   History
                   is
                   continued
                   .
                   In
                   Ezra
                   is
                   declared
                   the
                   Iewes
                   returne
                   from
                   Babylon
                   .
                   And
                   it
                   is
                   an
                   History
                   for
                   about
                   146.
                   years
                   ,
                   viz.
                   From
                   the
                   Edict
                   of
                   Cyrus
                   ,
                   to
                   the
                   nineteenth
                   year
                   of
                   
                     Artaxerxes
                     Mnemon
                  
                   .
                   As
                   Iunius
                   computes
                   ,
                   of
                   
                     
                       Cyrus
                       and
                       Cambyses
                    
                     
                       9
                    
                     
                       Magi
                    
                     
                       1
                    
                     
                       Darius
                       Histaspis
                    
                     
                       36
                    
                     
                       Xerxes
                    
                     
                       22
                    
                     
                       Artaxerxes
                       Longimanus
                    
                     
                       40
                    
                     
                       Darius
                       Nothus
                    
                     
                       19
                    
                     
                       
                       
                         Artaxerxes
                         Mnemon
                      
                    
                     
                       19
                    
                  
                
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   To
                   evidence
                   how
                   punctually
                   faithfull
                   and
                   alsufficiently
                   able
                   God
                   is
                   ,
                   in
                   performing
                   of
                   his
                   Promises
                   to
                   his
                   Church
                   and
                   people
                   in
                   their
                   season
                   ,
                   touching
                   their
                   deliverance
                   and
                   Restauration
                   ,
                   against
                   all
                   impediments
                   ,
                   improbabilities
                   and
                   seeming
                   impossibilities
                   .
                   For
                   he
                   made
                   Cyrus
                   an
                   heathen
                   King
                   his
                   shepheard
                   ,
                   and
                   nursing
                   father
                   to
                   his
                   Church
                   ,
                   to
                   bring
                   them
                   out
                   of
                   Babylon
                   ,
                   wherein
                   they
                   were
                   as
                   helplesse
                   and
                   hopelesse
                   ,
                   as
                   dead
                   bodies
                   or
                   dry
                   bones
                   in
                   a
                   grave
                   .
                   Ezek.
                   37.
                   2
                   ,
                   3
                   ,
                   11
                   ,
                   12
                   ,
                   13.
                   
                   To
                   build
                   the
                   Temple
                   and
                   Ierusalem
                   ,
                   Isa.
                   44.
                   28.
                   and
                   45.
                   1.
                   
                   &c.
                   compared
                   with
                   Ezra
                   1.1
                   ,
                   2.
                   &c.
                   
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                   In
                   this
                   Book
                   are
                   laid
                   downe
                   ,
                   touching
                   the
                   Jewes
                   returne
                   ,
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       
                         The
                         causes
                      
                       of
                       their
                       return
                       from
                       Babylon
                       ,
                       viz.
                       1.
                       
                       Instrumentall
                       ,
                       Cyrus
                       his
                       Grant
                       ,
                       c.
                       1.
                       2.
                       
                       Materiall
                       ,
                       Persons
                       returning
                       ,
                       c.
                       2.
                       3.
                       
                       Finall
                       ,
                       the
                       Restauration
                       of
                       the
                       Temple
                       ,
                       and
                       worship
                       of
                       God
                       ,
                       c.
                       3.
                       
                    
                     
                       
                       2.
                       
                       
                         The
                         Impediments
                      
                       of
                       their
                       Returne
                       ,
                       1.
                       
                       Recited
                       ,
                       viz.
                       The
                       
                         Samaritanes
                         .
                         c.
                      
                       4.
                       and
                       the
                       Ruler
                       of
                       
                         Canaan
                         ,
                         c.
                      
                       5.
                       2.
                       
                       Removed
                       ,
                       by
                       the
                       Renewing
                       of
                       Cyrus
                       his
                       Edict
                       ,
                       c.
                       6.
                       
                    
                     
                       3.
                       
                       
                         The
                         successe
                      
                       of
                       their
                       Returne
                       ,
                       where
                       are
                       described
                       ,
                       1
                       Ezra's
                       Commission
                       ,
                       c.
                       7.
                       2.
                       
                       His
                       execution
                       of
                       his
                       Commission
                       ,
                       c.
                       8.
                       3.
                       
                       The
                       Reformation
                       of
                       mixed
                       marriages
                       ,
                       which
                       are
                       Described
                       ,
                       c.
                       9.
                       
                       Abolished
                       ,
                       c.
                       10.
                       
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Nehemia
                   :
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     THe
                     Fruit
                     and
                     Event
                  
                   of
                   the
                   Jews
                   RETURNE
                   FROM
                   BABYLON
                   ,
                   is
                   laid
                   down
                   in
                   the
                   Book
                   of
                   NEHEMIAH
                   .
                   So
                   called
                   ,
                   1
                   partly
                   because
                   Nehemiah
                   was
                   Pen-man
                   of
                   it
                   ,
                   Neh.
                   1.1
                   .
                   2
                   Partly
                   because
                   the
                   Acts
                   of
                   Nehemiah
                   are
                   the
                   Principall
                   subject-matter
                   of
                   the
                   Book
                   ,
                   Nehemiah
                   being
                   the
                   great
                   Repairer
                   &
                   Restorer
                   of
                   the
                   holy
                   City
                   Ierusalem
                   .
                   It
                   is
                   by
                   some
                   called
                   the
                   II.
                   of
                   Ezra
                   ;
                   because
                   the
                   History
                   begun
                   by
                   Ezra
                   touching
                   the
                   Iewes
                   returne
                   from
                   Babylon
                   is
                   here
                   continued
                   .
                   Nehemiah
                   is
                   supposed
                   to
                   aeb
                   the
                   same
                   who
                   is
                   called
                   the
                   
                     Tirshatha
                     
                     Ezr.
                  
                   2.63
                   .
                   So
                   
                     Munsterus
                     .
                     Neh.
                  
                   8.9
                   .
                   which
                   signifies
                   ,
                   a
                   
                     Cup-bearer
                     ,
                     Gerh.
                     exeg
                     .
                     in
                     loc
                     .
                  
                   1.
                   
                     de
                     Scrip.
                  
                   §
                   .
                   132.
                   but
                   in
                   the
                   Chaldee
                   tongue
                   is
                   a
                   Title
                   of
                   Dignity
                   and
                   Honour
                   .
                   
                     R.
                     Aben
                     Ezra
                  
                   .
                   saith
                   Gerh.
                   Translated
                   
                     Legatus
                     Regis
                  
                   ;
                   i.
                   e.
                   
                     The
                     Kings
                     legate
                  
                   ,
                   Ambassadour
                   or
                   Commissary
                   .
                   by
                   
                     Iun.
                     &
                     Trem.
                  
                   (
                   who
                   yet
                   interpret
                   this
                   rather
                   of
                   Shazbazzar
                   ,
                   whom
                   many
                   think
                   to
                   be
                   Zerubbabel
                   :
                   )
                   In
                   the
                   margin
                   of
                   our
                   English
                   Bibles
                   it
                   is
                   rendred
                   ,
                   
                     Governour
                     .
                     He
                     was
                     the
                  
                   son
                   of
                   
                     Hachaliah
                     ,
                     Neh.
                  
                   1.1
                   .
                   and
                   Cup-bearer
                   to
                   King
                   Artaxerxes
                   ,
                   in
                   the
                   twentieth
                   yeare
                   of
                   his
                   Reigne
                   ,
                   Neh.
                   ●
                   .
                   11
                   .
                   and
                   2.1
                   .
                   The
                   kings
                   Palace
                   was
                   at
                   
                     Shushan
                     ,
                     Neh.
                  
                   1.1
                   .
                   that
                   being
                   the
                   Metropolis
                   of
                   Persia
                   ,
                   which
                   
                     Darius
                     Hystaspis
                  
                   built
                   .
                   Plin.
                   N.
                   H.
                   l.
                   6
                   c.
                   27.
                   
                
                 
                   In
                   this
                   Book
                   are
                   declared
                   the
                   happy
                   fruits
                   of
                   the
                   Jews
                   returne
                   both
                   in
                   reference
                   to
                   the
                   Politique
                   and
                   Ecclesiastick
                   state
                   .
                   It
                   contains
                   an
                   History
                   of
                   about
                   55
                   years
                   ,
                   as
                   
                     Gerh.
                     Loc.
                     Com.
                     Supradict
                     .
                     &
                     Iunius
                     in
                     Annot.
                  
                   shew
                   .
                   viz.
                   
                
                 
                   
                     From
                     the
                     twentieth
                     yeare
                     of
                     
                       Artaerxes
                       Mnemon
                       Neh.
                    
                     2.1
                     .
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     Thence
                     of
                     
                       Darius
                       Ochus
                    
                  
                   
                     23
                  
                   
                     
                     Thence
                     of
                     Asrenes
                  
                   
                     3
                  
                   
                     Thence
                     of
                     Darius
                     the
                     last
                  
                   
                     5
                  
                
                 
                   Scope
                   ,
                   To
                   let
                   us
                   know
                   how
                   deep
                   and
                   desperate
                   the
                   distresses
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   may
                   grow
                   ,
                   before
                   God
                   will
                   restore
                   her
                   .
                   How
                   difficult
                   ,
                   slow
                   and
                   perplexed
                   a
                   work
                   the
                   work
                   of
                   Reformation
                   is
                   ,
                   both
                   by
                   reason
                   of
                   adversaries
                   to
                   be
                   opposed
                   ,
                   and
                   Publick
                   corruptions
                   to
                   be
                   removed
                   .
                   How
                   easily
                   and
                   wonderfully
                   God
                   can
                   bring
                   Reformation
                   to
                   perfection
                   against
                   all
                   impediments
                   whatsoever
                   ,
                   when
                   he
                   is
                   resolved
                   to
                   carry
                   it
                   on
                   .
                   What
                   excellent
                   and
                   usefull
                   instruments
                   ,
                   pious
                   and
                   faithfull
                   Magistrates
                   are
                   for
                   the
                   accomplishing
                   both
                   of
                   Civil
                   and
                   Ecclesiasticall
                   Reformation
                   ;
                   Nehemiah
                   being
                   a
                   lively
                   Patterne
                   of
                   a
                   true
                   Reformer
                   indeed
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                   This
                   Book
                   sets
                   forth
                   the
                   Restauration
                   of
                   Hierusalem
                   ,
                   and
                   this
                   By.
                   
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     Reparation
                     of
                     the
                     wals
                     ,
                     gates
                     and
                     buildings
                     where
                     consider
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         The
                         cause
                         of
                         it
                         .
                         1.
                         
                         Principall
                         God
                         ▪
                         c.
                         1.
                         2.
                         
                         Instrumentall
                         ,
                         Nehemiah
                         ,
                         c.
                         2.
                         
                      
                       
                         
                         2.
                         
                         The
                         work
                         it selfe
                         .
                         1.
                         
                         Begun
                         .
                         c.
                         3.
                         2.
                         
                         Hindred
                         by
                         impediments
                         ;
                         Externall
                         .
                         c.
                         4.
                         
                         Internall
                         .
                         c.
                         5.
                         
                         Mixt
                         c.
                         6.
                         3.
                         
                         Perfected
                         .
                         c.
                         6.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       Reformation
                       both
                       of
                       the
                       state
                       Politick
                       and
                       Ecclesiastick
                       ,
                    
                     c.
                     7.
                     to
                     13.
                     
                     Hereunto
                     appertain
                     .
                     1.
                     
                     The
                     Custody
                     of
                     the
                     City
                     .
                     The
                     Number
                     of
                     the
                     Captives
                     that
                     returned
                     ,
                     (
                     viz.
                     49942.
                     
                     Neh.
                     7.66.67
                     .
                     )
                     and
                     the
                     Oblation
                     c.
                     7.
                     2.
                     
                     A
                     Description
                     of
                     two
                     Festivals
                     .
                     c.
                     8.
                     3.
                     
                     The
                     peoples
                     publick
                     repentance
                     in
                     a
                     Solemne
                     Fast
                     ,
                     testified
                     by
                     a
                     Solemne
                     Covenant
                     made
                     and
                     subscribed
                     for
                     Reformation
                     c.
                     9
                     ,
                     10.
                     4.
                     
                     The
                     inhabitants
                     of
                     Ierusalem
                     ,
                     viz.
                     Rulers
                     ,
                     Voluntiers
                     ,
                     and
                     men
                     chosen
                     by
                     lot
                     .
                     c.
                     11.
                     5.
                     
                     The
                     number
                     and
                     offices
                     of
                     the
                     Priests
                     :
                     with
                     the
                     Dedication
                     of
                     the
                     wals
                     of
                     Ierusalem
                     ,
                     c.
                     12.
                     
                  
                   
                     III.
                     Correction
                     of
                     such
                     corruptions
                     and
                     miscarriages
                     ,
                     as
                     had
                     risen
                     in
                     Iudea
                     ,
                     in
                     Nehemiah's
                     absence
                     ▪
                     c.
                     13.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Esther
                   .
                
                 
                   III.
                   VNder
                   the
                   IEWES
                   CAPTIVITY
                   in
                   Babylon
                   ,
                   and
                   other
                   places
                   out
                   of
                   Iudea
                   ;
                   The
                   condition
                   
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   is
                   described
                   in
                   the
                   Book
                   of
                   ESTHER
                   ;
                   stiled
                   by
                   the
                   Hebrewes
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     megillath
                     Esther
                  
                   ,
                   i.
                   e.
                   
                     The
                     volume
                     of
                     Esther
                  
                   ,
                   so
                   denominated
                   from
                   Esther
                   the
                   Queen
                   a
                   Iewesh
                   ,
                   whose
                   faithfull
                   service
                   ,
                   done
                   for
                   the
                   oppressed
                   Church
                   and
                   people
                   of
                   God
                   in
                   extremity
                   of
                   straits
                   ,
                   is
                   the
                   primary
                   subject
                   of
                   this
                   Book
                   .
                   Some
                   writers
                   exclude
                   this
                   Book
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   Canon
                   of
                   Scripture
                   ,
                   as
                   
                     Melito
                     in
                     Eusebius
                     ,
                     lib.
                  
                   4.
                   c.
                   25.
                   
                   
                     Athan●sius
                     in
                     Synopsi
                     .
                     and
                     Nazianzen
                     .
                     in
                     Carm.
                     de
                     Script
                     .
                  
                   But
                   the
                   Hebrews
                   and
                   primitive
                   Christians
                   with
                   other
                   writers
                   unanimously
                   receive
                   it
                   as
                   part
                   of
                   the
                   Canon
                   .
                
                 
                   Penman
                   is
                   not
                   so
                   unanimously
                   determined
                   upon
                   among
                   Authors
                   .
                   Some
                   thinks
                   it
                   was
                   written
                   by
                   the
                   men
                   of
                   the
                   great
                   Synagogue
                   .
                   R.
                   Moses
                   is
                   said
                   to
                   be
                   of
                   this
                   opinion
                   .
                   Or
                   by
                   Ioachim
                   the
                   Priest
                   ,
                   sonne
                   of
                   Iesus
                   the
                   High-Priest
                   .
                   
                     Philo
                     Iudeus
                     in
                     Chronol
                  
                   .
                   Or
                   ,
                   by
                   Mordecay
                   ,
                   as
                   is
                   conjectured
                   partly
                   from
                   chap.
                   9.20
                   ,
                   23.
                   
                   As
                   
                     The
                     Latin
                     Fathers
                  
                   .
                   The
                   ground
                   of
                   whose
                   conjecture
                   seemes
                   to
                   come
                   short
                   .
                   Or
                   by
                   Ezra
                   or
                   Nehemiah
                   ,
                   
                   who
                   wrote
                   the
                   two
                   former
                   Histories
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   of
                   like
                   Nature
                   .
                   
                     Isidorus
                     .
                     Alsted
                     .
                     Praecog
                     .
                     Theol
                     l.
                     c.
                     c.
                  
                   120.
                   
                   But
                   Eusebius
                   in
                   his
                   Chronicles
                   ,
                   supposeth
                   that
                   the
                   Penman
                   was
                   after
                   Ezra
                   .
                
                 
                   This
                   Book
                   containes
                   an
                   History
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   under
                   the
                   Reigne
                   of
                   Ahashuerus
                   King
                   of
                   Persia
                   ,
                   from
                   the
                   third
                   yeare
                   of
                   his
                   Reigne
                   ,
                   Esth.
                   1.1
                   ,
                   2
                   ,
                   3.
                   till
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   his
                   Reigne
                   ,
                   viz.
                   about
                   20.
                   years
                   (
                   for
                   he
                   reigned
                   in
                   all
                   about
                   21.
                   or
                   22.
                   years
                   )
                   This
                   Ahashuerus
                   is
                   conceived
                   to
                   be
                   Xerxes
                   sonne
                   of
                   
                     Hystaspis
                     ,
                     Ezr.
                  
                   4.6
                   .
                   
                     Iun.
                     Annot.
                  
                   
                
                 
                   The
                   time
                   of
                   this
                   History
                   is
                   thus
                   computed
                   .
                
                 
                   Ahashuerus
                   makes
                   his
                   feast
                   in
                   his
                   third
                   yeare
                   ,
                   —
                   Esth.
                   1.3
                   .
                
                 
                   Marrieth
                   Esther
                   ,
                   in
                   his
                   seventh
                   yeare
                   ,
                   Esth.
                   2.16
                   .
                
                 
                   Haman
                   conspires
                   against
                   the
                   Iewes
                   ,
                   and
                   is
                   hanged
                   ,
                   in
                   his
                   twelfth
                   yeare
                   ,
                   Esth.
                   3.7
                   .
                   and
                   7.10
                   .
                
                 
                   Thence
                   Esther
                   reigns
                   till
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   his
                   Reigne
                   ,
                   Mordecai
                   being
                   chief
                   Governour
                   ,
                   10.
                   y.
                   
                     Helvic
                     .
                     chron
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   S●ope
                   ,
                   most
                   lively
                   to
                   manifest
                   ;
                   How
                   singularly
                   vigilant
                   God
                   is
                   over
                   
                   his
                   Church
                   in
                   extreamest
                   straits
                   and
                   deepest
                   dangers
                   ;
                   not
                   only
                   to
                   preserve
                   her
                   from
                   them
                   ,
                   and
                   advantage
                   her
                   by
                   them
                   ;
                   but
                   also
                   to
                   returne
                   the
                   plots
                   of
                   her
                   cruell
                   enemies
                   upon
                   their
                   own
                   heads
                   ,
                   when
                   they
                   are
                   nearest
                   execution
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                   This
                   Book
                   declares
                   the
                   Jewes
                   deliverance
                   from
                   Hamans
                   plot
                   ,
                   both
                   by
                   what
                   meanes
                   and
                   in
                   what
                   manner
                   it
                   was
                   delivered
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     Meanes
                     of
                     deliverance
                     ,
                     Esther
                     advanced
                     .
                     Of
                     whose
                     advancement
                     ,
                     here
                     's
                     1.
                     
                     The
                     occasion
                     c.
                     1.
                     2.
                     
                     The
                     manner
                     of
                     it
                     .
                     c.
                     2.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       manner
                    
                     of
                     the
                     deliverance
                     ,
                     where
                     are
                     laid
                     downe
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         Hamans
                         cruell
                         Plot
                         against
                         the
                         Jewes
                         .
                         c.
                         3.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         The
                         perill
                         ensuing
                         upon
                         this
                         Plot
                         ,
                         1.
                         
                         Generally
                         to
                         all
                         the
                         Jewes
                         .
                         c.
                         4.
                         2.
                         
                         Particularly
                         to
                         Mordecai
                         himselfe
                         .
                         c.
                         5.
                         
                      
                       
                         3.
                         
                         Gods
                         countermining
                         of
                         Hamans
                         undermining
                         designe
                         .
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             By
                             advancement
                             of
                             
                               Mordecai
                               .
                               c.
                            
                             6.
                             2.
                             
                             By
                             ruining
                             of
                             ,
                             1
                             
                               Haman
                               .
                               c.
                            
                             7.
                             2
                             
                             Of
                             the
                             rest
                             of
                             the
                             Jewes
                             enemies
                             .
                             whose
                             slaughter
                             was
                             Impetrated
                             ,
                             
                             c.
                             8.
                             
                             Perpetrated
                             .
                             c.
                             9.
                             3.
                             
                             By
                             producing
                             out
                             of
                             all
                             an
                             happy
                             ,
                             prosperous
                             quiet
                             condition
                             to
                             his
                             owne
                             people
                             .
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 II.
                 
                   DOCTRINAL
                   BOOKS
                
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 DOGMATICAL
                 ,
                 or
                 DOCTRINALL
                 Books
                 .
                 Thus
                 farre
                 of
                 those
                 Books
                 which
                 are
                 more
                 properly
                 Historicall
                 ;
                 Now
                 of
                 the
                 Bookes
                 which
                 were
                 written
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 times
                 with
                 the
                 former
                 ,
                 which
                 declare
                 to
                 us
                 the
                 will
                 of
                 God
                 in
                 a
                 more
                 Doctrinall
                 way
                 ,
                 and
                 therefore
                 for
                 distinction
                 sake
                 called
                 ,
                 DOCTRINALL
                 .
                 They
                 are
                 also
                 called
                 the
                 
                   Poeticall
                   Books
                
                 ,
                 because
                 it
                 is
                 conceived
                 that
                 they
                 ,
                 or
                 most
                 of
                 them
                 in
                 Hebrew
                 were
                 written
                 in
                 Metre
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Poeticall
                   Measures
                
                 ;
                 which
                 now
                 are
                 not
                 so
                 easie
                 to
                 be
                 found
                 out
                 .
              
               
                 These
                 DOGMATICALL
                 Books
                 containe
                 in
                 them
                 Doctrines
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 Of
                 more
                 speciall
                 and
                 particular
                 reference
                 to
                 some
                 particular
                 individuall
                 person
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 Or
                 of
                 more
                 Generall
                 reference
                 and
                 respect
                 to
                 all
                 .
              
               
                 
                 
                   Job
                   .
                
                 
                   1.
                   
                   DOctrines
                   of
                   more
                   speciall
                   reference
                   to
                   a
                   
                     particular
                     person
                  
                   ▪
                   are
                   laid
                   down
                   in
                   the
                   Book
                   of
                   IOB
                   .
                   so
                   called
                   ,
                   because
                   that
                   precious
                   man
                   Iob
                   and
                   his
                   various
                   condition
                   is
                   the
                   chiefe
                   subject-matter
                   of
                   the
                   Booke
                   .
                   Some
                   think
                   that
                   there
                   never
                   was
                   such
                   a
                   man
                   in
                   the
                   world
                   as
                   this
                   Iob
                   of
                   which
                   this
                   Book
                   speaks
                   :
                   but
                   account
                   this
                   booke
                   rather
                   Parabolicall
                   ,
                   then
                   
                     Historicall
                     .
                     R.
                     Moses
                     Ben.
                     Maimon
                     in
                     more
                     Nebuchim
                     part
                  
                   3.
                   
                   §
                   .
                   22.
                   
                   
                     And
                     Thalmud
                     Ord.
                  
                   4.
                   
                   Tract
                   .
                   3.
                   
                   But
                   this
                   dreame
                   is
                   sufficiently
                   refelled
                   by
                   that
                   honourable
                   mention
                   that
                   is
                   made
                   of
                   this
                   renowned
                   Iob
                   in
                   other
                   Scriptures
                   both
                   in
                   Old
                   and
                   New
                   Testament
                   Ezek.
                   14.14
                   ,
                   20.
                   
                   Iam.
                   5.11
                   .
                
                 
                   Who
                   this
                   Iob
                   was
                   ,
                   is
                   more
                   doubted
                   .
                
                 
                   1.
                   
                   Some
                   thinke
                   that
                   Iob
                   came
                   of
                   
                   
                     Nahor
                     Abrahams
                  
                   brother
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   he
                   was
                   the
                   third
                   from
                   Nahor
                   :
                   thus
                   ;
                   
                     Nahor
                     —
                     Vz
                     —
                     rIob
                  
                   ;
                   and
                   that
                   he
                   lived
                   about
                   that
                   time
                   that
                   Israel
                   was
                   in
                   
                     Egypt
                     .
                     Alsted
                     .
                     Chron.
                     p.
                  
                   100
                   
                     and
                     p.
                  
                   115.
                   
                     and
                     p.
                  
                   502.
                   
                   And
                   
                     Hieronym
                     .
                     in
                  
                   Q.
                   
                     Hebr.
                     Tom.
                  
                   4.
                   fol.
                   96.
                   
                   Seemes
                   to
                   incline
                   hereunto
                   ,
                   especially
                   ,
                   seeing
                   Iob
                   is
                   said
                   to
                   dwell
                   in
                   the
                   Land
                   of
                   Vz
                   ,
                   Iob
                   1.1
                   .
                   and
                   Vz
                   was
                   one
                   of
                   Nahors
                   sonnes
                   ,
                   Gent
                   22.
                   
                   ●1
                   .
                   But
                   that
                   Land
                   seems
                   not
                   to
                   have
                   received
                   its
                   name
                   of
                   Vz
                   coetaneous
                   to
                   Abraham
                   ;
                   but
                   rather
                   from
                   Vz
                   son
                   of
                   
                     Aram
                     ,
                     Sem's
                  
                   Nephew
                   presently
                   after
                   the
                   flood
                   ,
                   Gen.
                   10.23
                   .
                   As
                   Gerh.
                   well
                   notes
                   ,
                   
                     in
                     exegesi
                     .
                     loc
                     ▪
                     Com.
                     de
                     Scrip.
                  
                   §
                   .
                   136.
                   
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   Others
                   rather
                   are
                   of
                   opinion
                   ,
                   that
                   Iob
                   is
                   the
                   same
                   which
                   Iobab
                   King
                   of
                   the
                   Idumeans
                   ,
                   of
                   the
                   race
                   of
                   Esau
                   Gen.
                   36.34
                   .
                   And
                   that
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   might
                   be
                   changed
                   into
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   ;
                   the
                   name
                   Iobab
                   into
                   Iob
                   ;
                   either
                   from
                   the
                   custome
                   of
                   the
                   Hebrew
                   tongue
                   ,
                   which
                   oft-times
                   changeth
                   one
                   letter
                   for
                   another
                   ;
                   or
                   from
                   the
                   
                     Aramick
                     ,
                     Idumean
                  
                   ,
                   or
                   other
                   dialect
                   of
                   the
                   Country
                   
                   where
                   he
                   sojourned
                   ;
                   or
                   from
                   the
                   change
                   of
                   his
                   condition
                   in
                   the
                   world
                   ;
                   while
                   prosperous
                   he
                   might
                   be
                   called
                   Iobab
                   ,
                   the
                   letter
                   being
                   doubled
                   ;
                   when
                   in
                   distresse
                   his
                   name
                   contracted
                   into
                   Iob.
                   See
                   the
                   like
                   in
                   case
                   of
                   Abraham
                   ,
                   Gen.
                   17.5
                   .
                   Of
                   Naomi
                   ,
                   Ruth
                   1.20
                   .
                
                 
                   This
                   latter
                   opinion
                   is
                   urged
                   by
                   Arguments
                   not
                   to
                   be
                   neglected
                   .
                   1.
                   
                   From
                   the
                   circumstances
                   of
                   place
                   .
                   Iobab
                   lived
                   in
                   the
                   Land
                   of
                   Idumea
                   ,
                   Gen.
                   36.33
                   .
                   Iob
                   in
                   the
                   Land
                   of
                   Vz
                   ,
                   a
                   chiefe
                   tract
                   in
                   Idumea
                   ,
                   Iob
                   1.1
                   .
                   Lam.
                   4.21
                   .
                   Hence
                   Kings
                   of
                   Edom
                   are
                   called
                   Kings
                   of
                   the
                   Land
                   of
                   Vz
                   ,
                   Ier.
                   25.20
                   .
                   2.
                   
                   From
                   description
                   of
                   their
                   possessions
                   ,
                   Iobab
                   had
                   Regall
                   Majesty
                   Gen.
                   36.33
                   .
                   Iob
                   had
                   a
                   Princely
                   state
                   ,
                   not
                   usuall
                   to
                   private
                   men
                   ,
                   Iob
                   1.1
                   ,
                   2
                   ,
                   3.
                   
                   And
                   also
                   Princely
                   Dignity
                   ,
                   Habit
                   ,
                   and
                   Office
                   ,
                   Iob
                   29.9
                   ,
                   12
                   ,
                   14.
                   3.
                   
                   From
                   Similitude
                   of
                   names
                   .
                   As
                   Moses
                   reckons
                   up
                   among
                   Esau's
                   sons
                   ,
                   one
                   Eliphaz
                   who
                   brought
                   forth
                   one
                   Theman
                   builder
                   of
                   a
                   Town
                   of
                   his
                   own
                   name
                   ,
                   Gen.
                   36.10
                   ,
                   15.
                   
                   So
                   Iobs
                   History
                   
                   mentions
                   ,
                   Eliphaz
                   the
                   Temanite
                   Iob
                   2.11
                   .
                   Many
                   Authors
                   ,
                   as
                   the
                   LXX
                   interpret
                   .
                   at
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   Iob.
                   
                     Euseb.
                     demonstr
                     .
                     Evangel
                     .
                     l.
                  
                   1.
                   c.
                   5.
                   
                   
                     Ambros.
                     in
                     Com.
                     in
                     Rom.
                  
                   9.
                   
                   
                     August
                     .
                     de
                     Civit.
                     dei
                     ,
                     l.
                  
                   18.
                   c.
                   47.
                   
                   
                     Gerh.
                     quo
                     supr
                  
                   .
                   §
                   134.
                   vid.
                   
                     Mercer
                     .
                     in
                     Praefat
                     in
                     Lib
                     ▪
                     Iob
                     &
                     Com.
                     in
                     Iob
                  
                   1.1
                
                 
                   Penman
                   of
                   this
                   book
                   is
                   not
                   certainly
                   known
                   .
                   Some
                   think
                   it
                   was
                   Solomon
                   ;
                   but
                   that
                   's
                   scarce
                   probable
                   ,
                   Iob
                   living
                   so
                   long
                   before
                   Solomon
                   ,
                   and
                   many
                   Penmen
                   of
                   Holy
                   Scripture
                   intervening
                   betwixt
                   them
                   .
                   Some
                   that
                   Iob
                   penned
                   this
                   book
                   himselfe
                   ,
                   because
                   the
                   expressions
                   and
                   speeches
                   of
                   Iob
                   are
                   laid
                   down
                   in
                   such
                   emphaticall
                   and
                   patheticall
                   terms
                   .
                   Some
                   rather
                   thinke
                   that
                   Moses
                   wrote
                   Genesis
                   and
                   Iob
                   about
                   the
                   same
                   time
                   ,
                   viz.
                   a
                   little
                   before
                   Israels
                   departure
                   out
                   of
                   Aegypt
                   ,
                   in
                   the
                   yeare
                   of
                   the
                   world
                   ,
                   2452.
                   
                   
                     Alsted
                     .
                     Chron.
                     p.
                  
                   100.
                   
                   
                     R.
                     Solomon
                     ,
                     and
                     other
                     Hebrewes
                     favour
                     this
                     opinion
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   Scope
                   ,
                   To
                   evidence
                   as
                   in
                   a
                   mirrour
                   the
                   wise
                   ,
                   just
                   and
                   fatherly
                   Providence
                   of
                   God
                   to
                   his
                   own
                   faithfull
                   
                   and
                   upright
                   servants
                   ,
                   even
                   in
                   midst
                   of
                   manifold
                   ,
                   deepest
                   ,
                   strangest
                   and
                   longest
                   afflictions
                   .
                   Hebrewes
                   say
                   ,
                   Iob's
                   calamity
                   lasted
                   12
                   moneths
                   .
                   Suidas
                   saith
                   ,
                   seaven
                   yeeres
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Principal
                     Parts
                  
                   .
                   In
                   this
                   book
                   Iobs
                   threefold
                   condition
                   is
                   described
                   viz.
                   His
                   Prosperity
                   ,
                   His
                   Adversity
                   ,
                   and
                   his
                   recovery
                   out
                   of
                   all
                   his
                   distresses
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       Iobs
                       Prosperity
                    
                     ,
                     is
                     described
                     c.
                     1.1
                     ,
                     to
                     ver
                     .
                     6.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       Iobs
                       Adversity
                    
                     ,
                     is
                     deciphered
                     to
                     us
                     .
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         By
                         the
                         Occasion
                         ,
                         variety
                         and
                         extremity
                         of
                         it
                         ,
                         c.
                         1.
                         ver
                         .
                         6.
                         to
                         chap.
                         3.1
                         .
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         By
                         the
                         distemper
                         of
                         his
                         spirit
                         under
                         the
                         extremity
                         of
                         his
                         dolours
                         ,
                         c.
                         3.
                         
                      
                       
                         3.
                         
                         By
                         the
                         Dialogue
                         had
                         under
                         his
                         Affliction
                         ,
                         wherein
                         this
                         Q.
                         is
                         for
                         substance
                         fully
                         discussed
                         ,
                         
                           Whether
                           strange
                           ,
                           heavy
                           ,
                           and
                           long
                           afflictions
                           be
                           infallible
                           signes
                           either
                           of
                           Gods
                           hatred
                           ,
                           or
                           of
                           afflicted
                           persons
                           Hypocrisy
                           ?
                        
                         Likewise
                         Jobs
                         Faith
                         ,
                         patience
                         ,
                         courage
                         ,
                         perseverance
                         and
                         commendable
                         deportment
                         is
                         interwoven
                         in
                         the
                         Dialogue
                         ;
                         though
                         now
                         and
                         then
                         he
                         discovered
                         
                         some
                         infirmities
                         .
                         Here
                         consider
                         the
                         dispute
                         betwixt
                         Iob
                         and
                         his
                         three
                         friends
                         and
                         the
                         Moderatours
                         of
                         the
                         Dispute
                         .
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             The
                             Dispute
                             hath
                             in
                             it
                             8
                             severall
                             Acts.
                             1.
                             
                             Eliphaz
                             his
                             first
                             reproofe
                             c.
                             4.5
                             .
                             And
                             Iobs
                             Answer
                             ,
                             c.
                             6
                             ,
                             7.
                             2.
                             
                             Bildads
                             first
                             reproofe
                             of
                             Iob
                             ,
                             c.
                             8.
                             
                             And
                             Iobs
                             answer
                             ,
                             c.
                             9
                             ,
                             10.
                             3.
                             
                             Zophar's
                             first
                             rebuke
                             c.
                             11.
                             
                             With
                             Iobs
                             answer
                             ,
                             c.
                             12
                             ,
                             13
                             ,
                             14.
                             4.
                             
                             Eliphaz
                             his
                             second
                             reproofe
                             ,
                             c.
                             15.
                             
                             And
                             Iobs
                             defence
                             ,
                             c.
                             16
                             ,
                             17.
                             5.
                             
                             Bildad's
                             second
                             rebuke
                             ,
                             c.
                             ●8
                             .
                             Iobs
                             answer
                             ,
                             c.
                             19.
                             6.
                             
                             Zophar's
                             second
                             reproofe
                             ,
                             c.
                             20.
                             
                             Iobs
                             answer
                             c.
                             21.
                             7.
                             
                             Elephaz
                             his
                             third
                             reproofe
                             ,
                             c.
                             22.
                             
                             Iobs
                             answer
                             ,
                             c.
                             23
                             ,
                             24.
                             8.
                             
                             Bildad's
                             third
                             reproofe
                             ,
                             c.
                             25.
                             
                             Iobs
                             answer
                             by
                             shewing
                             Gods
                             Majesty
                             ,
                             c.
                             26
                             ,
                             27
                             ,
                             28.
                             and
                             by
                             paralleling
                             his
                             present
                             calamity
                             with
                             his
                             former
                             felicity
                             ,
                             c.
                             29
                             ,
                             30
                             ,
                             31.
                             
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             The
                             Moderatours
                             in
                             this
                             dispute
                             are
                             ,
                             
                               
                                 1.
                                 
                                 Elihu
                                 ;
                                 who
                                 first
                                 reproves
                                 Iobs
                                 friends
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 32.
                                 
                                 Iob
                                 himselfe
                                 c.
                                 33.
                                 2.
                                 
                                 Renders
                                 the
                                 Reasons
                                 of
                                 his
                                 reproofe
                                 drawn
                                 from
                                 the
                                 Majesty
                                 of
                                 God
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 34.
                                 3.
                                 
                                 Exhorts
                                 
                                 Iob
                                 to
                                 Repentance
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 35.
                                 4.
                                 
                                 Returnes
                                 to
                                 the
                                 description
                                 of
                                 Gods
                                 Majesty
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 36
                                 ,
                                 37.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 2.
                                 
                                 God
                                 himselfe
                                 who
                                 reprehends
                                 and
                                 convinceth
                                 Job
                                 of
                                 ignorance
                                 ,
                                 and
                                 infirmity
                                 ,
                                 by
                                 Arguments
                                 drawn
                                 from
                                 the
                                 Creation
                                 and
                                 Gubernation
                                 .
                                 1.
                                 
                                 Of
                                 the
                                 Meteors
                                 c.
                                 38.
                                 2.
                                 
                                 Of
                                 other
                                 creatures
                                 ,
                                 especially
                                 of
                                 the
                                 more
                                 considerable
                                 creatures
                                 ,
                                 viz.
                                 The
                                 Lyon
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 39.
                                 
                                 Elephant
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 40.
                                 
                                 Whale
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 41.
                                 
                              
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       Iobs
                       recovery
                    
                     out
                     of
                     his
                     adversity
                     ,
                     described
                     .
                     1.
                     
                     By
                     his
                     preparative
                     to
                     it
                     ,
                     viz.
                     Iobs
                     penitentiall
                     confession
                     of
                     his
                     sin
                     ,
                     &c.
                     
                     This
                     was
                     the
                     sweet
                     fruit
                     of
                     the
                     Dialogue
                     with
                     Iob.
                     2.
                     
                     By
                     the
                     manner
                     of
                     his
                     Restitution
                     &c.
                     c.
                     42.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   Doctrines
                   of
                   more
                   generall
                   reference
                   unto
                   all
                   sorts
                   of
                   persons
                   ,
                   are
                   contained
                   partly
                   in
                   Davids
                   ,
                   partly
                   in
                   Solomons
                   Books
                   ,
                   whereof
                   some
                   were
                   written
                   originally
                   in
                   prose
                   ,
                   others
                   in
                   Metre
                   ,
                   
                     Trelcat
                     .
                     in
                     Oecon.
                     Bibl.
                  
                   
                
              
               
                 
                 
                   Psalmes
                   .
                
                 
                   1.
                   
                   
                     IN
                     Davids
                     Book
                     viz.
                  
                   That
                   which
                   was
                   (
                   if
                   not
                   wholly
                   ,
                   as
                   some
                   thinke
                   ,
                   
                     August
                     .
                     de
                     Civitat
                     .
                     Dei
                     ,
                     l.
                  
                   17.
                   c.
                   14.
                   
                   Yet
                   )
                   principally
                   Penned
                   by
                   David
                   ,
                   i.
                   e.
                   THE
                   BOOK
                   OF
                   PSALMES
                   .
                   It
                   is
                   called
                   in
                   Hebrew
                   ,
                   by
                   the
                   latter
                   Hebrewes
                   (
                   who
                   gave
                   names
                   or
                   Titles
                   to
                   Books
                   ,
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     Sepher
                     Tehillim
                  
                   .
                   i.
                   e.
                   
                     The
                     Book
                     of
                     Hymnes
                  
                   ,
                   or
                   Prayses
                   :
                   because
                   the
                   Divine
                   Praises
                   of
                   God
                   are
                   the
                   chiefe
                   subject-matter
                   of
                   the
                   Psalmes
                   .
                   In
                   the
                   Old
                   Testament
                   ,
                   THE
                   PSALMS
                   OF
                   ISRAEL
                   2
                   Sam.
                   23.1
                   .
                   Because
                   penned
                   for
                   the
                   use
                   of
                   the
                   Israel
                   of
                   God.
                   In
                   the
                   New
                   Testament
                   ,
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   The
                   PSALMES
                   Luk
                   24.44
                   .
                   And
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   i.
                   e.
                   The
                   BIBLE
                   or
                   BOOK
                   OF
                   PSALMES
                   ,
                   Luk.
                   20.42
                   .
                   Act.
                   1.20
                   .
                   Because
                   the
                   Psalmes
                   are
                   digested
                   into
                   one
                   volume
                   .
                   
                   The
                   Greeke
                   cals
                   it
                   also
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   i.
                   e.
                   The
                   Psalter
                   ;
                   from
                   the
                   Psaltery
                   a
                   musicall
                   instrument
                   ,
                   used
                   in
                   singing
                   of
                   the
                   psalmes
                   .
                   Anciently
                   it
                   was
                   called
                   Soliloquium
                   i.
                   e.
                   
                     The
                     Soliloquy
                  
                   ;
                   because
                   it
                   containes
                   the
                   Saints
                   sweetest
                   and
                   secret
                   talkings
                   with
                   God
                   in
                   prayers
                   and
                   prayses
                   ,
                   and
                   Gods
                   with
                   them
                   in
                   precious
                   returnes
                   .
                   
                     Parva
                     Biblia
                     ,
                     &
                     Summarium
                     V.
                     Test.
                  
                   i.
                   e.
                   
                     The
                     little
                     Bible
                  
                   ,
                   and
                   
                     the
                     Summary
                     of
                     the
                     Old
                     Testament
                     .
                  
                   Luth
                   
                     Totius
                     Scripturae
                     Epitome
                  
                   .
                   i.
                   e.
                   The
                   Epitome
                   of
                   the
                   whole
                   Scriptures
                   .
                   
                     Athanas.
                     in
                     Epist.
                     ad
                     Marcel
                  
                   .
                   It
                   is
                   a
                   compendium
                   of
                   all
                   divinity
                   ,
                   a
                   common
                   shop
                   of
                   Medicines
                   for
                   the
                   soule
                   ,
                   an
                   universall
                   store-house
                   of
                   good
                   Doctrines
                   profitable
                   to
                   every
                   one
                   in
                   all
                   conditions
                   .
                   
                     Basil
                     in
                     Psal.
                  
                   1.
                   
                   By
                   
                     August
                     .
                     lib.
                     Psalmorū
                     Prol.
                  
                   it
                   s
                   call'd
                   
                     Tutela
                     pueris
                     ,
                     juvenibus
                     ornamentum
                     ,
                     solatium
                     senibus
                     ,
                     mulieribus
                     aptissimus
                     decor
                     .
                  
                   i.
                   e.
                   
                     A
                     safeguard
                     for
                     children
                     ,
                     an
                     Ornament
                     to
                     youth
                     ,
                     a
                     solace
                     to
                     aged
                     men
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     fittest
                     comelinesse
                     for
                     women
                     .
                  
                   The
                   psalmes
                   are
                   a
                   Iewel
                   made
                   up
                   of
                   the
                   Gold
                   of
                   Doctrine
                   ,
                   
                   of
                   the
                   pearles
                   of
                   comfort
                   ,
                   of
                   the
                   Gemmes
                   of
                   prayer
                   .
                   This
                   book
                   is
                   a
                   Theater
                   of
                   Gods
                   works
                   .
                   A
                   sweet
                   field
                   and
                   Rosary
                   of
                   promises
                   .
                   A
                   Paradise
                   of
                   sweet
                   fruits
                   and
                   heavenly
                   delights
                   .
                   An
                   ample
                   Sea
                   wherein
                   tempest-tossed
                   soules
                   find
                   richest
                   pearles
                   of
                   consolation
                   .
                   An
                   heavenly
                   schoole
                   wherein
                   God
                   himself
                   is
                   chiefe
                   instructer
                   .
                   The
                   abridgment
                   ,
                   flower
                   and
                   quintessence
                   of
                   Scriptures
                   .
                   A
                   glasse
                   of
                   divine
                   grace
                   ,
                   representing
                   to
                   us
                   the
                   sweetest
                   smiling
                   fatherly
                   countenance
                   of
                   God
                   in
                   Christ.
                   And
                   a
                   most
                   accurate
                   Anatomie
                   of
                   a
                   Christian
                   soule
                   ,
                   delineating
                   all
                   its
                   affections
                   ,
                   motions
                   ,
                   temptations
                   ,
                   plunges
                   with
                   their
                   proper
                   remedies
                   .
                   
                     Incipientibus
                     primum
                     efficitur
                     elementum
                     ,
                     proficientibus
                     incremen●um
                     ,
                     perfectis
                     stabile
                     firmamentum
                     ,
                     totius
                     Ecclesiae
                     vox
                     una
                     .
                  
                   i.
                   e.
                   
                     It
                     is
                     rudiment
                     for
                     the
                     young
                     ,
                     increase
                     for
                     the
                     proficient
                     ,
                     firm
                     establishment
                     for
                     the
                     perfect
                     ,
                     it
                     s
                     as
                     but
                     one
                     voice
                     of
                     the
                     whole
                     Church
                     .
                  
                   August
                   .
                   ibid.
                   
                
                 
                   In
                   a
                   word
                   ,
                   
                     Quid
                     est
                     quod
                     non
                     discatur
                     in
                     Psalmis
                     ?
                     Non
                     omnis
                     magnitudo
                     
                     virtutis
                     ,
                     non
                     norma
                     justitiae
                     ,
                     non
                     pudicitiae
                     decor
                     ,
                     non
                     prudentiae
                     consummatio
                     ,
                     non
                     patientiae
                     regula
                     ,
                     non
                     omne
                     quicquid
                     potest
                     dici
                     bonum
                     procedit
                     ex
                     ipsis
                     ?
                     Dei
                     scientia
                     ,
                     perfecta
                     praenunciatio
                     Christi
                     in
                     carne
                     venturi
                     ,
                     &
                     communis
                     resurrectionis
                     spes
                     ,
                     suppliciorum
                     metus
                     ,
                     gloriae
                     pollicitatio
                     ,
                     mysteriorum
                     revelatio
                     .
                     Omnia
                     prorsus
                     in
                     his
                     velut
                     magno
                     quodam
                     &
                     communi
                     thesauro
                     recondita
                     atque
                     conferta
                     sunt
                     bona
                     .
                  
                   i.
                   e.
                   What
                   is
                   it
                   that
                   may
                   not
                   be
                   learned
                   in
                   the
                   Psalmes
                   ?
                   Doth
                   not
                   the
                   greatnesse
                   of
                   all
                   vertue
                   ,
                   the
                   Rule
                   of
                   Righteousnesse
                   ,
                   the
                   gracefulnesse
                   of
                   charity
                   ,
                   the
                   Consummation
                   of
                   prudence
                   ,
                   the
                   law
                   of
                   patience
                   ,
                   and
                   every
                   thing
                   that
                   may
                   be
                   called
                   good
                   ,
                   flow
                   from
                   them
                   ?
                   The
                   knowledge
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                   the
                   perfect
                   Prediction
                   of
                   Christ
                   to
                   come
                   in
                   the
                   flesh
                   ,
                   the
                   common
                   hope
                   of
                   the
                   Resurrection
                   ,
                   the
                   feare
                   of
                   punishments
                   ,
                   the
                   Promise
                   of
                   glory
                   ,
                   the
                   revelation
                   of
                   mysteries
                   ,
                   yea
                   all
                   good
                   things
                   are
                   hid
                   and
                   heaped
                   together
                   in
                   these
                   Psalmes
                   ,
                   as
                   in
                   some
                   great
                   and
                   common
                   
                   Treasury
                   .
                   
                     Aug.
                     in
                     lib.
                     Psalmorunt
                     Prolog
                  
                   .
                   For
                   ,
                   if
                   we
                   look
                   at
                   the
                   matter
                   of
                   the
                   Psalmes
                   ,
                   how
                   rich
                   is
                   it
                   !
                   Consider
                   ,
                
                 
                   In
                   the
                   Book
                   of
                   Psalms
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       God
                       dealeth
                       with
                       us
                       ,
                       by
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           Information
                           ;
                           thence
                           arise
                           Psalmi
                           
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                          
                           ,
                           the
                           Didacticall
                           or
                           Teaching
                           Psalms
                           .
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           Exhortation
                           ;
                           thence
                           the
                           
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                          
                           or
                           
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                          
                           ,
                           i.
                           e.
                           the
                           Hortatory
                           Psalmes
                           ;
                           or
                           Admonitory
                           Ps.
                           
                        
                         
                           3.
                           
                           Consolation
                           ;
                           thence
                           the
                           
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                          
                           ,
                           i.
                           e.
                           Consolatory
                           Psalms
                           .
                        
                         
                           4.
                           
                           Narratiō
                           of
                           things
                           already
                           past
                           ;
                           thence
                           
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                          
                           ,
                           i.
                           e.
                           the
                           Historicall
                           Psalmes
                           .
                        
                         
                           5.
                           
                           Prediction
                           ,
                           or
                           foretelling
                           of
                           things
                           to
                           come
                           ;
                           thence
                           Psalmi
                           
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                          
                           ,
                           i.
                           e.
                           the
                           Propheticall
                           Psalmes
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       We
                       deal
                       with
                       God
                       ,
                       by
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           Prayer
                           ;
                           whence
                           Psalmi
                           
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                          
                           ,
                           i.
                           e
                           Petitory
                           or
                           Praying
                           Psalms
                           .
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           Prayse
                           &
                           thanksgiving
                           ;
                           thence
                           
                           Psalmi
                           
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                             〈◊〉
                          
                           ,
                           i.
                           e.
                           the
                           Gratulatory
                           or
                           Thanksgiving
                           Psalms
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
                 
                   Penmen
                   of
                   the
                   Book
                   of
                   Psalmes
                   are
                   supposed
                   by
                   some
                   to
                   be
                   many
                   ;
                   and
                   the
                   Titles
                   of
                   divers
                   Psalmes
                   do
                   import
                   as
                   much
                   unto
                   us
                   .
                   Ten
                   Pen-men
                   are
                   enumerated
                   .
                   
                     viz.
                     David
                     ,
                     Solomon
                     ,
                     Moses
                     ,
                     Asaph
                     ,
                     Ethan
                     ,
                     Heman
                     ,
                     Ieduthun
                     ,
                  
                   and
                   the
                   three
                   sons
                   of
                   Korah
                   ;
                   but
                   Augustine
                   thinks
                   David
                   was
                   Penman
                   of
                   them
                   all
                   ,
                   
                     de
                     Civitat
                     .
                     dei
                     l.
                  
                   17.
                   c.
                   14.
                   
                   However
                   David
                   penned
                   greatest
                   part
                   of
                   them
                   ,
                   as
                   the
                   Titles
                   and
                   Testimonies
                   in
                   the
                   New
                   Testament
                   do
                   intimate
                   .
                
                 
                   Some
                   thinke
                   that
                   Ezra
                   after
                   the
                   Babylonish
                   Captivity
                   ,
                   collected
                   these
                   Psalmes
                   ,
                   (
                   before
                   dispersed
                   )
                   into
                   one
                   volume
                   .
                   Some
                   think
                   this
                   was
                   done
                   by
                   
                     King
                     Hezekiah's
                  
                   friends
                   or
                   servants
                   before
                   the
                   Babylonish
                   Captivity
                   ,
                   
                     Athanasius
                     in
                     Synopsi
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   Sum
                   and
                   Scope
                   of
                   the
                   Psalms
                   ,
                   seems
                   to
                   be
                   .
                   
                     To
                     set
                     out
                     the
                     sweet
                     entercourse
                     
                     and
                     Communion
                     betwixt
                     God
                     &
                     his
                     Church
                     and
                     people
                     in
                     all
                     outward
                     Conditions
                     ,
                  
                   and
                   inward
                   soul
                   cases
                   ;
                   how
                   therin
                   they
                   are
                   weak
                   or
                   strong
                   ▪
                   believe
                   ,
                   hope
                   ,
                   
                     joy
                     ,
                     lament
                     ,
                     confesse
                     ,
                     pray
                     ,
                     vow
                     ,
                     praise
                     the
                     Lord
                     ,
                     &c.
                     as
                     occasion
                     requires
                     ;
                     and
                     how
                     God
                     tries
                     ,
                     delivers
                     ,
                     comforts
                     ,
                     supports
                     ,
                     encourages
                     ,
                     instructs
                     ,
                     enables
                     them
                     ,
                     and
                     faithfully
                     deales
                     with
                     them
                     ,
                     in
                     all
                     variety
                     of
                     their
                     cases
                     and
                     conditions
                     .
                  
                   But
                   every
                   particular
                   Psalme
                   hath
                   his
                   particular
                   Scope
                   ;
                   handling
                   distinct
                   matters
                   upon
                   distinct
                   occasions
                   .
                   Some
                   being
                   penned
                   before
                   ,
                   some
                   under
                   ,
                   some
                   after
                   the
                   Babylonish
                   Captivity
                   ,
                   as
                   is
                   evident
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Principal
                     parts
                  
                   .
                   This
                   Book
                   is
                   by
                   the
                   Hebrews
                   divided
                   into
                   
                     five
                     Books
                  
                   ,
                   viz.
                   
                
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     From
                     Psal.
                     1.
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     Psal.
                     41.
                     concluded
                     with
                     ,
                     Amen
                     and
                     Amen
                     .
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     From
                     Psal.
                     42.
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     Psal.
                     72.
                     shut
                     up
                     with
                     .
                     
                       Amen
                       and
                       Amen
                       .
                       Ended
                       ▪
                       are
                       the
                       Prayers
                       of
                       David
                       son
                       of
                       Iesse
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     3.
                     
                     From
                     Psal.
                     73.
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     Psal.
                     89.
                     closed
                     with
                     ,
                     
                       Amen
                       and
                       Amen
                    
                     .
                  
                   
                     4.
                     
                     From
                     Psal.
                     90.
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     Psal.
                     106.
                     ended
                     with
                     ,
                     
                       Amen
                       ,
                       Halelu-jah
                    
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                     5.
                     
                     From
                     beginning
                     of
                     Psal.
                     107.
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     Psal.
                     150.
                     concluding
                     with
                     Halelu-jah
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   This
                   Division
                   seems
                   to
                   arise
                   from
                   the
                   peculiar
                   close
                   of
                   these
                   five
                   Psalmes
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Or
                     thus
                  
                   ,
                   The
                   Psalmes
                   are
                   either
                   1
                   Directed
                   from
                   man
                   to
                   God
                   ,
                   as
                   the
                   1
                   Praying
                   ,
                   and
                   2
                   Thankesgiving
                   Psalms
                   .
                   2
                   Or
                   from
                   God
                   to
                   man.
                   As
                   the
                   Psalmes
                   which
                   are
                   1
                   Hortatory
                   ,
                   2
                   Consolatory
                   ,
                   3
                   Didacticall
                   .
                   4
                   Propheticall
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     The
                     Particular
                     unfolding
                     of
                     the
                  
                   Penman
                   ,
                   Kind
                   ,
                   Occasion
                   ,
                   Matter
                   ,
                   Scope
                   and
                   Principall
                   Parts
                   
                     of
                     every
                     Psalme
                     severally
                     ;
                     will
                     make
                     a
                     large
                     Appendix
                     to
                     this
                     Tract
                     ,
                     and
                     is
                     reserved
                     till
                     some
                     other
                     opportunity
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   
                     In
                     Solomons
                     Books
                  
                   ,
                   (
                   the
                   wisest
                   of
                   Kings
                   ,
                   1
                   King.
                   3.12
                   .
                   &
                   4.29
                   .
                   )
                   His
                   Bookes
                   are
                   three
                   ,
                   which
                   according
                   to
                   the
                   severall
                   Doctrines
                   ,
                   and
                   matters
                   comprised
                   in
                   them
                   ,
                   we
                   may
                   distinguish
                   into
                   1
                   Proverbiall
                   ,
                   2
                   Penitentiall
                   and
                   3
                   Nuptiall
                   .
                   It
                   is
                   hard
                   to
                   say
                   at
                   what
                   time
                   these
                   severall
                   Books
                   were
                   penned
                   by
                   Solomon
                   ,
                   yet
                   perhaps
                   the
                   Nuptiall
                   Book
                   ,
                   was
                   penned
                   in
                   his
                   younger
                   years
                   ,
                   when
                   his
                   affections
                   were
                   more
                   warme
                   ,
                   active
                   ,
                   lively
                   in
                   spirituals
                   .
                   The
                   Proverbiall
                   Book
                   in
                   his
                   manly
                   ripe
                   age
                   ,
                   when
                   his
                   
                   prudence
                   and
                   parts
                   were
                   at
                   highest
                   ,
                   most
                   grave
                   ,
                   solid
                   ,
                   setled
                   :
                   And
                   the
                   Penitentiall
                   Book
                   in
                   his
                   old
                   age
                   ▪
                   after
                   all
                   the
                   vaine
                   courses
                   which
                   he
                   had
                   lost
                   himselfe
                   in
                   ,
                   as
                   the
                   current
                   of
                   the
                   Book
                   seems
                   clearly
                   to
                   evidence
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Proverbs
                   .
                
                 
                   1.
                   
                   HIs
                   Proverbiall
                   Book
                   called
                   the
                   PROVERBS
                   OF
                   SOLOMON
                   ,
                   because
                   though
                   it
                   containe
                   other's
                   Proverbs
                   ,
                   yet
                   most
                   are
                   Solomon's
                   Prov.
                   1.1
                   .
                   In
                   Hebr.
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     Mis●le
                     Shelomoh
                  
                   ,
                   i.
                   e.
                   either
                   Similitudes
                   ,
                   or
                   
                     excelling
                     sentences
                     ,
                     that
                     overcome
                     and
                     beare
                     rule
                     over
                     the
                     rest
                     ,
                  
                   from
                   mashal
                   ,
                   which
                   notes
                   dominion
                   .
                
                 
                   This
                   book
                   was
                   penned
                   not
                   by
                   one
                   ,
                   but
                   by
                   divers
                   :
                   and
                   that
                   not
                   at
                   one
                   ,
                   but
                   at
                   severall
                   times
                   .
                   Solomon
                   penned
                   the
                   nine
                   first
                   chapters
                   ,
                   in
                   that
                   Order
                   ,
                   as
                   they
                   are
                   ,
                   as
                   also
                   c.
                   10.
                   to
                   c.
                   25.
                   
                   
                     Cartwright
                     in
                     loc
                     .
                     
                     Solomon
                  
                   was
                   Author
                   of
                   the
                   Proverbs
                   also
                   ,
                   from
                   c.
                   25.
                   to
                   c.
                   30.
                   
                   But
                   
                     the
                     men
                     of
                     Hezekiah
                     King
                     of
                     Iudah
                     copied
                     them
                     out
                     ,
                  
                   Prov.
                   25.1
                   .
                   probably
                   they
                   collected
                   them
                   out
                   of
                   other
                   writings
                   of
                   Solomon
                   ,
                   and
                   ranked
                   them
                   in
                   this
                   Order
                   ,
                   wherein
                   we
                   now
                   have
                   them
                   .
                   
                     Alsted
                     .
                     Praecog
                     .
                     Theol.
                     l.
                  
                   2.
                   c.
                   120.
                   
                   
                     Cartw.
                     in
                     Prov.
                  
                   25.1
                   .
                   
                     and
                     Iun.
                     ibid.
                  
                   who
                   thinkes
                   they
                   extracted
                   these
                   Proverbs
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   Records
                   of
                   the
                   Acts
                   of
                   Solomon
                   ,
                   and
                   digested
                   them
                   into
                   a
                   body
                   ;
                   most
                   of
                   these
                   Proverbs
                   appertaining
                   to
                   Ethicall
                   and
                   Civil
                   administration
                   .
                   The
                   thirtieth
                   chapter
                   was
                   penned
                   by
                   Agur
                   sonne
                   of
                   
                     Iakeh
                     ,
                     c.
                  
                   30.1
                   .
                   of
                   him
                   we
                   read
                   elsewhere
                   no
                   further
                   mention
                   in
                   Scripture
                   .
                   He
                   was
                   a
                   Prophet
                   ,
                   Prov.
                   30.1
                   .
                   His
                   
                     Proverbiall
                     Prophecy
                  
                   is
                   annexed
                   to
                   
                     Solomons
                     Proverbs
                  
                   ,
                   perhaps
                   because
                   of
                   mutuall
                   resemblance
                   between
                   them
                   .
                
                 
                   The
                   31
                   th
                   chapter
                   containes
                   the
                   Proverbiall
                   instructions
                   ,
                   with
                   which
                   Bathsheba
                   trained
                   up
                   Solomon
                   (
                   here
                   called
                   Lemuel
                   )
                   in
                   his
                   tender
                   
                   years
                   ,
                   which
                   instructions
                   
                     King
                     Solomon
                  
                   committed
                   to
                   writing
                   afterwards
                   .
                   
                     Iun.
                     in
                     loc
                     .
                     Cartw.
                     in
                     loc
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   The
                   Scope
                   .
                   To
                   instruct
                   men
                   in
                   true
                   wisedome
                   and
                   understanding
                   ,
                   the
                   very
                   head
                   and
                   height
                   whereof
                   is
                   the
                   sincere
                   feare
                   of
                   the
                   Lord
                   ,
                   Prov.
                   1.2
                   .
                   to
                   8.
                   
                   To
                   this
                   end
                   the
                   Book
                   is
                   filled
                   with
                   choice
                   succinct
                   sententious
                   
                     Aphorismes
                     ,
                     Adages
                  
                   ,
                   or
                   Proverbs
                   ,
                   compendiously
                   holding
                   forth
                   duties
                   of
                   Piety
                   to
                   God
                   ,
                   Equity
                   to
                   man
                   ,
                   Sobriety
                   towards
                   ones
                   selfe
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     Distribution
                  
                   of
                   the
                   Book
                   take
                   thus
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     Here
                     's
                     
                       Solomons
                       Preface
                    
                     to
                     his
                     Proverbs
                     ,
                     w
                     ch
                     hath
                     a
                     methodicall
                     texture
                     and
                     coherence
                     in
                     it self
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.
                     to
                     10.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     Here
                     is
                     the
                     whole
                     Body
                     or
                     Book
                     of
                     the
                     Proverbs
                     themselves
                     ,
                     which
                     are
                     either
                     ,
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         
                           Solomons
                           owne
                           Proverbs
                        
                         ,
                         which
                         or
                         most
                         part
                         are
                         pithy
                         ,
                         distinct
                         Aphotismes
                         ,
                         without
                         method
                         ,
                         dependance
                         ,
                         coherence
                         ,
                         &c.
                         and
                         these
                         .
                         1.
                         
                         Written
                         by
                         Solomon
                         himselfe
                         ,
                         c.
                         10.1
                         .
                         to
                         c.
                         25.1
                         .
                         2.
                         
                         Written
                         by
                         him
                         ,
                         and
                         collected
                         by
                         the
                         men
                         of
                         King
                         Hezekiah
                         ,
                         as
                         c.
                         25.1
                         .
                         to
                         ●
                         .
                         30.1
                         .
                      
                       
                         
                         2.
                         
                         Or
                         others
                         Proverbs
                         by
                         way
                         of
                         Appendix
                         annexed
                         to
                         Solomons
                         .
                         viz
                         ▪
                         1
                         ▪
                         Of
                         
                           Agur.
                           c.
                        
                         30.
                         2.
                         
                         Of
                         Bathsheba
                         ,
                         but
                         written
                         by
                         Solomon
                         ,
                         c.
                         31.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Ecclesi
                   :
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   
                     HIs
                     Penitential
                     Book
                     ,
                     Solomons
                     Retractations
                     or
                     Recantations
                     ,
                  
                   called
                   in
                   Hebr.
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     i.
                     e.
                  
                   The
                   WORDS
                   OF
                   THE
                   PREACHER
                   Eccles.
                   1.1
                   .
                   and
                   to
                   the
                   same
                   sense
                   in
                   Greek
                   ,
                   Latin
                   ,
                   and
                   English
                   ,
                   ECCLESIASTES
                   ,
                   or
                   
                     The
                     Preacher
                  
                   ,
                   because
                   Solomon
                   being
                   furnished
                   with
                   wisedome
                   and
                   manifold
                   experience
                   touching
                   the
                   vanity
                   of
                   all
                   things
                   besides
                   true
                   Religion
                   ,
                   preacheth
                   the
                   same
                   to
                   the
                   Church
                   for
                   the
                   instruction
                   and
                   warning
                   of
                   all
                   Gods
                   people
                   :
                   This
                   Book
                   he
                   wrote
                   in
                   extream
                   Old
                   age
                   ,
                   Repenting
                   of
                   his
                   fall
                   :
                   This
                   seemes
                   to
                   be
                   one
                   of
                   his
                   last
                   Acts
                   ,
                   according
                   to
                   that
                   ,
                   2
                   Chron.
                   9.29
                   .
                
                 
                 
                   Scope
                   of
                   this
                   Book
                   is
                   to
                   evidence
                   wherein
                   a
                   mans
                   true
                   happinesse
                   consists
                   .
                   viz.
                   not
                   in
                   any
                   sublunary
                   ,
                   naturall
                   ,
                   created
                   excellency
                   ,
                   all
                   such
                   being
                   vanity
                   of
                   vanities
                   ,
                   extreamest
                   vanity
                   and
                   vexation
                   of
                   Spirit
                   ;
                   but
                   only
                   in
                   true
                   sincere
                   feare
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                   and
                   truth
                   of
                   Religion
                   ,
                   compare
                   Eccles.
                   1.2
                   .
                   with
                   Eccles.
                   12.13
                   ,
                   14.
                   
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     parts
                  
                   ;
                   To
                   this
                   end
                   ,
                   touching
                   true
                   happinesse
                   ,
                   he
                   insists
                   upon
                   it
                   ,
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Negatively
                       ,
                       showing
                       where
                       it
                       is
                       not
                       to
                       be
                       found
                       .
                       
                         viz
                         Generally
                      
                       ,
                       not
                       in
                       any
                       meer
                       ,
                       naturall
                       ,
                       sublunary
                       treasure
                       in
                       this
                       world
                       .
                       Specially
                       ,
                       not
                       in
                       1.
                       
                       Knowledge
                       of
                       all
                       naturall
                       things
                       .
                       2.
                       
                       Pleasures
                       ,
                       or
                       sweetest
                       earthly
                       delights
                       .
                       3.
                       
                       Highest
                       Honours
                       ,
                       Or
                       4.
                       
                       Compleatest
                       riches
                       ,
                       c.
                       1.
                       to
                       c.
                       7.
                       
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       
                         Positively
                         and
                         Affirmatively
                      
                       ,
                       wherein
                       true
                       felicity
                       is
                       to
                       be
                       found
                       ,
                       and
                       this
                       he
                       showes
                       .
                       1.
                       
                       Particularly
                       ,
                       declaring
                       what
                       are
                       the
                       degrees
                       and
                       meanes
                       of
                       happinesse
                       ,
                       so
                       farre
                       as
                       a
                       man
                       may
                       attaine
                       thereunto
                       in
                       this
                       imperfect
                       life
                       ,
                       c.
                       7.
                       to
                       c.
                       12.8
                       .
                       2.
                       
                       Summarily
                       in
                       the
                       close
                       of
                       the
                       whole
                       Book
                       ,
                       c.
                       12.8
                       .
                       to
                       the
                       end
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                 
                   
                     This
                     Book
                     is
                     an
                     undeniable
                     Argument
                     of
                  
                   Solomons
                   
                     repentance
                     after
                     his
                     Relapse
                     ,
                     and
                     consequently
                     of
                     his
                     salvation
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Song
                   of
                   Songs
                   .
                
                 
                   3.
                   
                   HIs
                   
                     Nuptiall
                     Book
                  
                   treating
                   of
                   the
                   spiritual
                   Contract
                   ,
                   and
                   Marraiage
                   betwixt
                   Christ
                   and
                   his
                   Church
                   ,
                   called
                   the
                   SONG
                   OF
                   SONGS
                   ,
                   
                     which
                     was
                  
                   Solomons
                   ,
                   c.
                   1.1
                   .
                   and
                   CANTICLES
                   ,
                   because
                   of
                   all
                   
                     Solomons
                     Songs
                  
                   ,
                   which
                   were
                   1005.
                   1
                   
                   King.
                   4.32
                   .
                   This
                   was
                   the
                   choycest
                   and
                   most
                   excellent
                   ;
                   the
                   matter
                   thereof
                   being
                   one
                   of
                   the
                   sweetest
                   spirituall
                   mysteries
                   .
                   viz.
                   the
                   Churches
                   spirituall
                   espousals
                   to
                   ,
                   and
                   Communion
                   with
                   Jesus
                   Christ
                   ,
                   that
                   
                     great
                     mystery
                  
                   ,
                   Eph.
                   5.32
                   .
                
                 
                 
                   Scope
                   of
                   this
                   
                     Song
                     ,
                     is
                     ,
                     (
                     under
                     the
                     Metaphor
                     or
                     Allegory
                     of
                     lovers
                     upon
                     Contract
                     ,
                     and
                     intending
                     marriage
                     ,
                     )
                     to
                     shadow
                     out
                     to
                     us
                     that
                     sublime
                     spirituall
                     happy
                     union
                     and
                     Communion
                     betwixt
                     Christ
                     and
                     his
                     Church
                     ,
                     inchoate
                     in
                     this
                     life
                     ,
                     more
                     imperfectly
                     with
                     the
                     Iewes
                     ,
                     more
                     perfectly
                     with
                     the
                     Gentiles
                     :
                     Consummate
                     in
                     the
                     life
                     to
                     come
                     .
                  
                   This
                   is
                   carried
                   on
                   dialogue-wise
                   betwixt
                   Christ
                   and
                   his
                   Church
                   ;
                   His
                   friends
                   and
                   her
                   Damosels
                   ,
                   being
                   the
                   foure
                   speakers
                   ,
                   especially
                   the
                   two
                   first
                   .
                   As
                   is
                   the
                   Custome
                   of
                   a
                   Bridegroome
                   and
                   a
                   Bride
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     parts
                  
                   ,
                   of
                   this
                   
                     Song
                     of
                     Songs
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       The
                       Inscription
                    
                     ,
                     denoting
                     the
                     1
                     kind
                     of
                     writing
                     ;
                     2
                     Excellency
                     3
                     and
                     Penman
                     of
                     it
                     c.
                     1.1
                     .
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       substance
                       of
                       the
                       Song
                    
                     ,
                     Streaming
                     out
                     a
                     Torrent
                     of
                     spirituall
                     love
                     betwixt
                     Christ
                     and
                     the
                     Church
                     ,
                     laid
                     down
                     Dialogue-wise
                     ,
                     in
                     a
                     familiar
                     Colloquy
                     betwixt
                     1
                     Christ
                     as
                     the
                     Bridegroome
                     .
                     2
                     The
                     Church
                     as
                     the
                     Bride
                     ,
                     and
                     3
                     the
                     friends
                     of
                     them
                     both
                     rejoycing
                     in
                     the
                     marriage
                     ;
                     All
                     in
                     a
                     continued
                     Allegory
                     .
                     Herein
                     are
                     particularly
                     ,
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         The
                         Ardent
                         desires
                         of
                         the
                         Church
                         after
                         Christ
                         ,
                         as
                         impatient
                         of
                         his
                         absence
                         :
                         with
                         Christs
                         acceptance
                         thereof
                         .
                         c.
                         1.
                         ver
                         .
                         2.
                         to
                         9.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         The
                         Reciprocall
                         invitatory
                         Commendations
                         
                         of
                         one
                         another
                         ;
                         and
                         the
                         mutuall
                         gratulations
                         and
                         contentment
                         of
                         Christ
                         and
                         the
                         Church
                         in
                         one
                         another
                         ,
                         c.
                         1.9
                         .
                         to
                         the
                         end
                         of
                         c.
                         2.
                         
                      
                       
                         3.
                         
                         The
                         Churches
                         
                           renewed
                           desires
                        
                         night
                         and
                         day
                         ,
                         at
                         home
                         and
                         abroad
                         ,
                         in
                         the
                         City
                         in
                         the
                         fields
                         (
                         as
                         it
                         were
                         )
                         to
                         bring
                         Christ
                         neerer
                         to
                         her self
                         ,
                         c.
                         3.1
                         .
                         to
                         6.
                         yea
                         rather
                         to
                         have
                         her selfe
                         brought
                         immediately
                         to
                         the
                         full
                         enjoyment
                         of
                         Christ
                         in
                         heaven
                         ,
                         v.
                         6.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                      
                       
                         4.
                         
                         Christ
                         most
                         affectionately
                         Prayseth
                         his
                         Church
                         in
                         her
                         Members
                         ,
                         professing
                         himselfe
                         ravished
                         with
                         her
                         faith
                         ,
                         graces
                         ,
                         and
                         spirituall
                         beauty
                         ,
                         c.
                         4.1
                         .
                         to
                         15.
                         which
                         is
                         amplified
                         ,
                         1.
                         
                         By
                         the
                         Churches
                         selfe-denying
                         acknowledging
                         all
                         her
                         graces
                         to
                         come
                         from
                         Christ
                         as
                         the
                         fountaine
                         ,
                         v
                         15.
                         2.
                         
                         By
                         her
                         Prayer
                         for
                         his
                         influence
                         to
                         make
                         her
                         (
                         as
                         a
                         Garden
                         of
                         spices
                         )
                         more
                         and
                         more
                         fruitfull
                         ;
                         and
                         for
                         his
                         presence
                         to
                         accept
                         her
                         fruit
                         ,
                         v.
                         16.
                         3.
                         
                         By
                         Christs
                         satisfying
                         her
                         desires
                         ,
                         comming
                         into
                         his
                         Garden
                         ,
                         Accepting
                         the
                         fruits
                         thereof
                         ,
                         and
                         welcoming
                         his
                         friends
                         ,
                         c.
                         5.1
                         .
                      
                       
                         5.
                         
                         The
                         Churches
                         
                           Spirituall
                           Desertion
                        
                         ,
                         in
                         Christs
                         withdrawing
                         himselfe
                         from
                         her
                         .
                         Where
                         are
                         ,
                         I.
                         
                           The
                           occasion
                           of
                           it
                        
                         ,
                         Her
                         carnall
                         Scurity
                         ,
                         c.
                         5.2.3
                         .
                         II.
                         
                           The
                           Manner
                           of
                           it
                        
                         ;
                         withdrawing
                         ,
                         yet
                         leaving
                         some
                         quickning
                         grace
                         behinde
                         him
                         .
                         v.
                         4
                         ,
                         5.
                         
                         III.
                         
                           The
                           Consequents
                           of
                           it
                        
                         ,
                         in
                         respect
                         of
                         ,
                         1.
                         
                         The
                         
                         Church
                         her selfe
                         ,
                         v.
                         4
                         ,
                         5
                         ,
                         6.
                         2.
                         
                         The
                         Watchmen
                         abusing
                         her
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         7.
                         3.
                         
                         
                           The
                           Daughters
                           of
                           Ierusalem
                        
                         ,
                         whom
                         she
                         charged
                         to
                         signifie
                         her
                         distresse
                         to
                         her
                         beloved
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         8.
                         
                         This
                         charge
                         is
                         amplified
                         ,
                         1
                         Partly
                         by
                         the
                         inquiry
                         of
                         the
                         
                           Daughters
                           of
                           Ierusalem
                        
                         ,
                         what
                         Christ
                         is
                         ?
                         ver
                         .
                         9.
                         2
                         
                         Partly
                         by
                         the
                         Churches
                         Patheticall
                         description
                         of
                         Christs
                         transcendent
                         excellencies
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         10.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                         3
                         Partly
                         ,
                         by
                         the
                         inquiry
                         of
                         the
                         daughters
                         of
                         Jerusalem
                         ,
                         after
                         Christ
                         ,
                         c.
                         6.1
                         .
                         4
                         Partly
                         by
                         the
                         Churches
                         declaring
                         to
                         them
                         ,
                         where
                         Christ
                         was
                         ,
                         viz.
                         He
                         was
                         now
                         returned
                         ,
                         and
                         gone
                         down
                         into
                         his
                         Garden
                         c.
                         6.2
                         .
                         5
                         Partly
                         by
                         her
                         affectionate
                         complacency
                         in
                         Christ
                         returned
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         3.
                         
                      
                       
                         6.
                         
                         Christs
                         sweet
                         and
                         
                           consolatory
                           deportment
                           towards
                           his
                           Church
                           after
                           her
                           Desertion
                           ,
                        
                         and
                         his
                         returne
                         to
                         her
                         .
                         Wherein
                         ,
                         1.
                         
                         He
                         assures
                         her
                         she
                         is
                         as
                         precious
                         in
                         his
                         eyes
                         ,
                         and
                         as
                         deare
                         to
                         his
                         heart
                         as
                         ever
                         ,
                         c.
                         6.4
                         .
                         to
                         11.
                         2.
                         
                         He
                         declares
                         his
                         desire
                         after
                         the
                         Spirituall
                         Spring
                         of
                         the
                         Churches
                         graces
                         ,
                         after
                         the
                         winter
                         of
                         her
                         afflictions
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         11.
                         3.
                         
                         He
                         discovers
                         the
                         Rapture
                         of
                         his
                         ravished
                         affections
                         to
                         her
                         ,
                         most
                         sweetly
                         inviting
                         her
                         to
                         himselfe
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         12
                         ,
                         13.
                         most
                         highly
                         commending
                         her
                         throughout
                         ,
                         c.
                         7.1
                         .
                         to
                         8.
                         and
                         promising
                         his
                         presence
                         ,
                         and
                         what
                         he
                         will
                         do
                         for
                         her
                         ;
                         that
                         she
                         may
                         become
                         most
                         delightfull
                         to
                         him
                         ,
                         v.
                         8.9
                         .
                      
                       
                         7.
                         
                         Finally
                         ,
                         the
                         Church
                         reciprocates
                         her
                         utmost
                         
                         affection
                         to
                         Christ
                         ,
                         for
                         his
                         love
                         .
                         And
                         this
                         ,
                         I.
                         More
                         
                           Generally
                           c.
                        
                         7.10
                         .
                         II.
                         More
                         Particularly
                         ,
                         Her
                         desire
                         ,
                         1
                         That
                         Christ
                         and
                         she
                         may
                         go
                         together
                         to
                         view
                         their
                         Husbandry
                         ,
                         whether
                         their
                         plants
                         did
                         flourish
                         and
                         fructifie
                         ,
                         viz.
                         The
                         Gospel
                         thrive
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         11
                         ,
                         12
                         13.
                         2
                         
                         That
                         she
                         may
                         enjoy
                         Christ
                         most
                         intimately
                         and
                         familiarly
                         ,
                         c.
                         8.
                         1
                         ,
                         2
                         ,
                         3.
                         3.
                         
                         That
                         the
                         Daughters
                         of
                         Jerusalem
                         may
                         not
                         disturbe
                         him
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         4.
                         4.
                         
                         That
                         it
                         may
                         be
                         considered
                         ,
                         what
                         she
                         hath
                         forgone
                         and
                         undergone
                         for
                         Christs
                         love
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         5.
                         5.
                         
                         That
                         Christ
                         would
                         give
                         her
                         a
                         fuller
                         1
                         Confirmation
                         of
                         his
                         love
                         ,
                         
                           setting
                           her
                           as
                           a
                           seale
                           upon
                           his
                           heart
                        
                         :
                         and
                         a
                         fuller
                         2
                         Manifestation
                         or
                         evident
                         assurance
                         therof
                         ,
                         
                           Setting
                           her
                           as
                           a
                           Seale
                           upon
                           his
                           Arme
                           ,
                        
                         strengthning
                         ,
                         helping
                         her
                         ,
                         &c.
                         and
                         this
                         because
                         she
                         beares
                         to
                         Christ
                         an
                         invincible
                         and
                         unquenchable
                         love
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         6
                         ,
                         7.
                         6.
                         
                         That
                         the
                         Gentiles
                         called
                         
                           A
                           little
                           Sister
                        
                         ,
                         may
                         be
                         called
                         ,
                         and
                         incorporated
                         into
                         the
                         Church
                         with
                         the
                         Jewes
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         8
                         ,
                         9
                         ,
                         10.
                         
                         This
                         is
                         amplified
                         by
                         Christs
                         common
                         care
                         of
                         both
                         ,
                         as
                         one
                         Vineyard
                         ,
                         kept
                         by
                         himselfe
                         ,
                         not
                         by
                         others
                         ,
                         as
                         Solomons
                         was
                         ▪
                         ver
                         .
                         11
                         ,
                         12.
                         
                         Christ
                         teaching
                         his
                         Spouse
                         her
                         duty
                         ,
                         
                           To
                           her
                           neighbours
                        
                         in
                         publishing
                         and
                         bearing
                         witnesse
                         to
                         his
                         Truth
                         ;
                         
                           To
                           himselfe
                        
                         in
                         Prayer
                         and
                         Thanksgiving
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         13.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       The
                       Conclusion
                    
                     of
                     the
                     Song
                     ,
                     containing
                     the
                     Churches
                     most
                     Ardent
                     Desire
                     after
                     
                     Christs
                     second
                     coming
                     ,
                     that
                     the
                     marriage
                     betwixt
                     Christ
                     and
                     her selfe
                     ,
                     may
                     be
                     compleatly
                     consummated
                     in
                     Heaven
                     those
                     
                       Mountaines
                       of
                       spices
                       ,
                       c.
                    
                     8.14
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 III.
                 
                   THE
                   PROPHETICALL
                   BOOKS
                
                 .
              
               
                 THus
                 farre
                 of
                 Books
                 Historicall
                 and
                 Doctrinal
                 ,
                 Now
                 to
                 the
                 Books
                 Propheticall
                 .
                 For
                 distinction
                 sake
                 they
                 are
                 called
                 PROPHETICALL
                 ,
                 because
                 the
                 matter
                 of
                 them
                 is
                 principally
                 Propheticall
                 ,
                 though
                 many
                 Historical
                 and
                 Doctrinal
                 passages
                 are
                 also
                 inserted
                 in
                 them
                 all
                 along
                 ;
                 as
                 there
                 are
                 many
                 prophecies
                 of
                 things
                 to
                 come
                 ,
                 dispersed
                 up
                 and
                 down
                 the
                 other
                 Books
                 ,
                 which
                 yet
                 are
                 principally
                 Historical
                 and
                 Doctrinal
                 .
              
               
                 These
                 
                   Prophetical
                   Books
                
                 are
                 in
                 all
                 16
                 ,
                 (
                 Lamentations
                 being
                 counted
                 an
                 Appendix
                 to
                 Ieremiah
                 )
                 they
                 may
                 be
                 considered
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 According
                 to
                 the
                 times
                 of
                 their
                 prophecy
                 and
                 writing
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 According
                 to
                 their
                 Order
                 as
                 set
                 in
                 our
                 Bibles
                 .
                 They
                 are
                 not
                 placed
                 in
                 our
                 Bibles
                 in
                 that
                 method
                 and
                 Order
                 as
                 they
                 were
                 at
                 the
                 first
                 spoken
                 and
                 written
                 by
                 the
                 prophets
                 .
              
               
                 I.
                 
                   According
                   to
                   the
                   times
                   wherein
                   they
                   were
                   
                   first
                   prophesied
                   and
                   written
                   .
                
                 These
                 times
                 are
                 for
                 most
                 part
                 discovered
                 in
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 the
                 severall
                 Prophesies
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 such
                 we
                 may
                 determine
                 certainly
                 :
                 or
                 they
                 may
                 be
                 collected
                 from
                 other
                 Scriptures
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 matter
                 of
                 the
                 Prophesies
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 we
                 cannot
                 conclude
                 altogether
                 so
                 cleerly
                 .
              
               
                 These
                 times
                 may
                 be
                 referred
                 (
                 as
                 the
                 Historical
                 books
                 )
                 to
                 three
                 principall
                 Periods
                 ,
                 viz.
                 1.
                 
                 Before
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 Neere
                 or
                 under
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 After
                 the
                 Babylonish
                 captivity
                 .
                 And
                 if
                 in
                 these
                 three
                 periods
                 we
                 parallel
                 these
                 Prophets
                 ,
                 with
                 those
                 
                   Historical
                   Books
                
                 ,
                 they
                 will
                 notably
                 help
                 to
                 cleer
                 and
                 explain
                 one
                 another
                 .
              
               
                 
                   I.
                   
                     Before
                     the
                     transportation
                     of
                     Israel
                     into
                     Babylon
                     ,
                  
                   These
                   Prophets
                   prophesied
                   and
                   wrote
                   ,
                   viz.
                   
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Under
                       Vzziah
                       King
                       of
                       Judah
                       ,
                       and
                       Ieroboam
                       the
                       second
                       ,
                       King
                       of
                       Israel
                       .
                       
                         
                           IONAH
                           ,
                           he
                           prophecied
                           before
                           or
                           about
                           beginning
                           of
                           Ieroboams
                           Reigne
                           ,
                           See
                           2
                           King.
                           14
                           25.
                           
                           
                             As
                             Iun.
                             noteth
                             in
                             Ionah
                          
                           1.1
                           .
                           About
                           the
                           close
                           of
                           his
                           Reigne
                           ,
                           thinkes
                           
                             Drusius
                             in
                             Quaesitis
                             Epist.
                          
                           9.
                           
                        
                         
                           
                           1.
                           
                           AMOS
                           .
                           See
                           Amos
                           1.1
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       Under
                       
                         Vzziah
                         ,
                         Iotham
                         ,
                         Ahaz
                      
                       and
                       Hezekiah
                       Kings
                       of
                       Judah
                       ,
                       and
                       Ieroboam
                       King
                       of
                       Israel
                       .
                       
                         
                           HOSEA
                           .
                           Hos.
                           1.1
                           .
                        
                         
                           
                             IOEL
                             .
                             Ioel
                          
                           prophesied
                           about
                           the
                           same
                           time
                           with
                           Hosea
                           ,
                           as
                           is
                           thought
                           ;
                           because
                           the
                           things
                           prophecied
                           in
                           Ioel
                           ,
                           relate
                           to
                           the
                           dayes
                           of
                           Vzziah
                           and
                           Ieroboam
                           .
                           See
                           
                             Iun.
                             Annot.
                             in
                             Ioel
                          
                           1.1
                           .
                        
                         
                           ISAIAH
                           .
                           Isa.
                           1.1
                           .
                           (
                           here
                           the
                           days
                           of
                           King
                           Ieroboam
                           are
                           not
                           mentioned
                           .
                           )
                        
                         
                           MICHAH
                           .
                           Only
                           under
                           
                             Iotham
                             ,
                             Ahaz
                          
                           ,
                           and
                           Hezekiah
                           ,
                           Mich.
                           1.1
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       3.
                       
                       Under
                       Iosiah
                       .
                       
                         
                           IEREMIAH
                           .
                           Till
                           the
                           eleventh
                           yeere
                           of
                           Zedekiah
                           ,
                           Jer.
                           1
                           ,
                           2
                           ,
                           3.
                           being
                           compared
                           with
                           Ier.
                           51.64
                           .
                           
                             Iun.
                             Annot.
                          
                           ibid.
                           
                        
                         
                           LAMENTATIONS
                           .
                           Written
                           by
                           Ieremiah
                           ,
                           upon
                           occasion
                           of
                           King
                           Josiah's
                           Death
                           2
                           Chr.
                           35.25
                           .
                        
                         
                           ZEPHANIAH
                           .
                           Zeph.
                           1.1
                           .
                        
                         
                           OBADIAH
                           .
                           Seems
                           to
                           be
                           contemporary
                           with
                           Ieremiah
                           ,
                           compare
                           his
                           prophecy
                           with
                           
                           Ier.
                           49.7
                           .
                           &c.
                           And
                           Ezek.
                           25.
                           13.
                           
                           &c.
                           
                             See
                             Iun.
                             in
                             Obad.
                          
                           1.
                           
                        
                         
                           NAHVM
                           .
                           About
                           the
                           close
                           of
                           Iosiah's
                           Reigne
                           as
                           the
                           matter
                           of
                           the
                           Book
                           ,
                           and
                           the
                           harmony
                           of
                           the
                           History
                           import
                           .
                           
                             So
                             Iun.
                             in
                             Nah.
                          
                           1.1
                           .
                        
                         
                           HABBAKKVK
                           .
                           About
                           the
                           end
                           of
                           Iosiahs
                           Reigne
                           ,
                           or
                           in
                           his
                           sons
                           Reign
                           ,
                           
                             Iunius
                             in
                             Hab.
                          
                           1.1
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     Neere
                     upon
                     ,
                     and
                     under
                     the
                     Babylonish
                     Captivity
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       DANIEL
                       .
                       In
                       the
                       third
                       yeere
                       of
                       Iehoiakim's
                       Reigne
                       ,
                       Dan.
                       1.1
                       .
                    
                     
                       EZEKIEL
                       .
                       In
                       the
                       fifth
                       yeere
                       of
                       
                         King
                         Iehoiakin's
                      
                       Captivity
                       ,
                       Ezek.
                       1.1
                       ,
                       2
                       ,
                       3.
                       
                    
                  
                
                 
                   III.
                   
                     After
                     their
                     returne
                     from
                     Babylons
                     Captivity
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       HAGGAI
                       .
                       In
                       the
                       second
                       yeere
                       of
                       Darius
                       ,
                       and
                       the
                       sixth
                       moneth
                       ,
                       Hag.
                       1.1
                       .
                    
                     
                       ZECHARIAH
                       .
                       In
                       the
                       second
                       yeere
                       of
                       Darius
                       ,
                       the
                       eighth
                       moneth
                       ,
                       Zech.
                       1.1
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                         MALACHI
                         ▪
                      
                       Last
                       Prophecy
                       of
                       the
                       Old-Testament
                       .
                       Reproves
                       the
                       corruptions
                       after
                       building
                       of
                       the
                       Temple
                       .
                       
                         See
                         Iun.
                         in
                         Mal.
                      
                       1.1
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
               
               
                 II.
                 
                   According
                   to
                   their
                   Order
                   as
                   they
                   are
                   placed
                   in
                   our
                   Bibles
                   .
                
                 And
                 so
                 they
                 are
                 resolved
                 into
                 two
                 Ranks
                 ,
                 viz.
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 
                   Greater
                   Prophets
                   ,
                   viz.
                
                 The
                 foure
                 first
                 (
                 the
                 Lamentations
                 being
                 annexed
                 as
                 an
                 Appendix
                 to
                 Ieremiah
                 ,
                 )
                 so
                 called
                 ,
                 not
                 because
                 these
                 had
                 
                   greater
                   authority
                
                 ,
                 then
                 the
                 others
                 ,
                 but
                 from
                 the
                 
                   greatnesse
                   of
                   their
                   Bookes
                
                 ;
                 The
                 prophecy
                 of
                 Isaiah
                 ,
                 being
                 neer
                 as
                 big
                 or
                 bigger
                 then
                 all
                 the
                 
                   lesser
                   prophets
                
                 ,
                 together
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 
                   Lesser
                   Prophets
                   .
                   viz.
                
                 The
                 twelve
                 latter
                 ,
                 Hosea
                 ,
                 &c.
                 Which
                 were
                 digested
                 into
                 one
                 volumne
                 of
                 old
                 by
                 the
                 Jewes
                 ,
                 (
                 called
                 the
                 
                   Booke
                   of
                   the
                   Prophets
                
                 ,
                 Act.
                 7.42
                 .
                 )
                 some
                 of
                 them
                 being
                 very
                 small
                 ,
                 lest
                 any
                 of
                 them
                 should
                 be
                 lost
                 .
                 All
                 these
                 books
                 are
                 named
                 from
                 their
                 Penmen
                 ,
                 except
                 the
                 Lamentations
                 .
              
               
                 I.
                 
                   The
                   Greater
                   Prophets
                
                 ,
                 are
                 ●he
                 Books
                 of
                 
                   Isaiah
                   ,
                   Ieremiah
                   ,
                   Ezekiel
                   ,
                   Daniel
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                 
                   Isaiah
                
                 
                   ISAIAH
                   .
                   This
                   Book
                   is
                   set
                   first
                   ,
                   (
                   though
                   in
                   time
                   
                     Ionah
                     ,
                     Amos
                     ,
                     Hosea
                  
                   ,
                   and
                   Ioel
                   ,
                   seeme
                   to
                   have
                   been
                   before
                   him
                   )
                   perhaps
                   ,
                   because
                   of
                   the
                   excellency
                   of
                   the
                   Prophecy
                   ,
                   most
                   frequently
                   ,
                   fully
                   and
                   clearly
                   prophecying
                   of
                   Christ
                   ,
                   as
                   if
                   Christ
                   had
                   been
                   exhibited
                   already
                   ,
                   had
                   suffered
                   already
                   .
                   Hence
                   the
                   Ancients
                   called
                   him
                   
                     Evangelisticus
                     Propheta
                     ,
                     &
                     Propheticus
                     Evangelista
                     ,
                     The
                     Evangelicall
                     Prophet
                     ,
                  
                   and
                   
                     Propheticall
                     Evangelist
                  
                   ,
                   Or
                   the
                   
                     Evangelist
                     and
                     Apostle
                     of
                     the
                     Old
                     Testament
                     .
                  
                   Christ
                   and
                   his
                   Apostles
                   greatly
                   esteemed
                   this
                   Book
                   ▪
                   it
                   being
                   oftner
                   alledged
                   in
                   the
                   New
                   Testament
                   ,
                   then
                   any
                   other
                   Book
                   of
                   the
                   Old
                   Testament
                   ▪
                   except
                   the
                   psalms
                   .
                   Some
                   observe
                   Isaiah
                   to
                   be
                   quoted
                   sixty
                   times
                   ,
                   the
                   Psalmes
                   sixty
                   foure
                   times
                   .
                   
                     Alsted
                     .
                     Ethiopians
                  
                   had
                   great
                   respect
                   to
                   
                   this
                   Book
                   as
                   appears
                   ,
                   Act.
                   8.27.28
                   .
                
                 
                   Time
                   of
                   this
                   Prophecy
                   was
                   in
                   foure
                   Kings
                   Reigns
                   ,
                   Isa.
                   1.1
                   .
                   if
                   we
                   reckon
                   from
                   the
                   death
                   of
                   
                     Vzziah
                     ,
                     Isa.
                  
                   6.1
                   .
                   till
                   the
                   fifteenth
                   yeare
                   of
                   King
                   Hezekiah
                   ,
                   when
                   the
                   Babilonish
                   Ambassadours
                   came
                   to
                   Hezekiah
                   and
                   saw
                   all
                   his
                   Treasures
                   ,
                   2
                   King.
                   20.
                   12
                   ,
                   13
                   ,
                   14.
                   
                   He
                   must
                   at
                   the
                   least
                   prophecy
                   fourty
                   five
                   years
                   :
                   but
                   its
                   probable
                   he
                   prophecied
                   longer
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     ;
                     To
                     hold
                     forth
                     the
                     true
                  
                   Messiah
                   
                     clearly
                     ,
                     as
                     the
                     only
                     sufficient
                     Remedy
                     against
                     all
                     sin
                     and
                     misery
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     parts
                  
                   ,
                   This
                   Prophecy
                   is
                   either
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     Comminatory
                     ,
                     as
                     it
                     is
                     for
                     the
                     most
                     part
                     ,
                     till
                     c.
                     40.
                     these
                     promises
                     are
                     now
                     and
                     then
                     inter-woven
                     ;
                     Herein
                     1.
                     
                     The
                     Jewes
                     are
                     threatned
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.
                     to
                     c.
                     13.
                     2.
                     
                     Enemies
                     of
                     the
                     Jewesh
                     Church
                     are
                     threatned
                     ,
                     for
                     the
                     Churches
                     benefit
                     ,
                     c
                     ,
                     13.
                     to
                     c.
                     29.
                     3.
                     
                     The
                     Jewes
                     againe
                     are
                     threatned
                     with
                     the
                     Babylonish
                     Captivity
                     ,
                     c.
                     29.
                     to
                     40.
                     
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     Promissory
                     ,
                     and
                     that
                     1.
                     
                     For
                     the
                     Restauration
                     of
                     the
                     Old
                     Church
                     of
                     the
                     Jews
                     from
                     the
                     misery
                     of
                     that
                     Captivity
                     ,
                     c.
                     40.
                     to
                     c.
                     49.
                     2.
                     
                     For
                     the
                     compleating
                     and
                     consummation
                     of
                     the
                     Churches
                     glory
                     in
                     
                     Gospel
                     times
                     by
                     Christ
                     himselfe
                     ,
                     c.
                     49.
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                       of
                       the
                       Prophecy
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Jeremiah
                   .
                
                 
                   JEREMIAH
                   .
                   He
                   was
                   of
                   the
                   Towne
                   of
                   Anatho●h
                   ,
                   Jer.
                   1.1
                   .
                   a
                   very
                   young
                   man
                   when
                   he
                   began
                   to
                   prophesie
                   ,
                   Ier.
                   1.6
                   .
                
                 
                   Time
                   of
                   his
                   prophecy
                   was
                   in
                   days
                   
                     of
                     Iosiah
                     ,
                     Iehoiakin
                  
                   and
                   Zedekiah
                   ,
                   Jer.
                   1.2
                   ,
                   3.
                   which
                   must
                   needs
                   be
                   fourty
                   three
                   years
                   at
                   least
                   by
                   computation
                   ,
                   both
                   in
                   Iudea
                   and
                   Egypt
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     .
                     To
                     divorce
                     the
                     Iewes
                     in
                     his
                     times
                     from
                     their
                     many
                     horrid
                     sins
                     ,
                     denouncig
                     heavy
                     judgemenas
                     against
                     them
                     :
                     But
                     to
                     comfort
                     the
                     true
                     servants
                     of
                     God
                     in
                     their
                     lowest
                     misery
                     ,
                     with
                     promises
                     of
                     Christ
                     ,
                     and
                     threatnings
                     against
                     all
                     their
                     enemies
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                   Herein
                   are
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       
                         The
                         Preface
                      
                       ,
                       containing
                       the
                       vocation
                       of
                       
                         Ieremiah
                         ,
                         c.
                      
                       1.
                       
                    
                     
                       2
                       
                         The
                         Prophecy
                         it self
                      
                       ,
                       which
                       is
                       directed
                       both
                       against
                       the
                       Iews
                       &
                       the
                       enemies
                       of
                       the
                       Jewes
                       ,
                       ●
                       Against
                       the
                       Jews
                       1.
                       in
                       Iudea
                       ,
                       
                       under
                       King
                       
                         Iosiah
                         ,
                         c.
                      
                       2.
                       to
                       c.
                       21.
                       
                       Under
                       
                         Iehoiachim
                         and
                         Zedekiah
                         ,
                         c.
                      
                       21.
                       to
                       c.
                       43.
                       2.
                       
                       In
                       
                         Egypt
                         ,
                         c.
                      
                       43.44.45
                       .
                       2
                       Against
                       the
                       Jewes
                       enemies
                       .
                       viz.
                       Egyptians
                       ,
                       c.
                       46.
                       
                       Philistines
                       and
                       Tyrians
                       ,
                       c.
                       47.
                       
                       Moabites
                       .
                       c.
                       48.
                       
                       Ammonites
                       ,
                       Edomites
                       ,
                       &c.
                       c.
                       49.
                       
                       Babylonians
                       ,
                       c.
                       50.51
                       .
                    
                     
                       3.
                       
                       
                         Conclusion
                         Historicall
                      
                       ,
                       annexed
                       to
                       the
                       Prophecy
                       ,
                       by
                       some
                       other
                       then
                       
                         Ierem●ah
                         ,
                         c.
                      
                       52.
                       
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Lamenta
                   :
                
                 
                   UNto
                   the
                   prophecy
                   of
                   JEREMIAH
                   may
                   be
                   annexed
                   as
                   an
                   Appendix
                   the
                   Book
                   of
                   LAMENTATIONS
                   .
                   called
                   in
                   Hebr.
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   Kinoth
                   ,
                   i.
                   e.
                   Lamentations
                   ;
                   2
                   Chron.
                   35.25
                   .
                   and
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   
                     Echah
                     ,
                     viz.
                  
                   the
                   first
                   Hebrew
                   word
                   of
                   the
                   Book
                   (
                   as
                   many
                   other
                   Books
                   are
                   named
                   by
                   the
                   first
                   word
                   of
                   the
                   Book
                   )
                   .
                   This
                   Book
                   seems
                   to
                   be
                   penned
                   by
                   Ieremiah
                   the
                   Prophet
                   ,
                   upon
                   the
                   death
                   of
                   that
                   precious
                   
                     King
                     ●osiah
                  
                   ,
                   2
                   Chron.
                   35.25
                   .
                   when
                   the
                   Jewes
                   fell
                   to
                   their
                   sinfull
                   
                   confidence
                   in
                   Egypt
                   ,
                   which
                   Beginnings
                   of
                   sorrows
                   and
                   miseries
                   gave
                   Ieremy
                   occasion
                   ,
                   (
                   he
                   knowing
                   by
                   the
                   spirit
                   of
                   Prophecy
                   the
                   judgments
                   which
                   should
                   befall
                   them
                   )
                   to
                   lament
                   all
                   the
                   miseries
                   from
                   Iosiahs
                   death
                   ,
                   till
                   the
                   destruction
                   of
                   the
                   Temple
                   and
                   Ierusalem
                   ,
                   and
                   captivity
                   of
                   the
                   people
                   in
                   Babylon
                   .
                   The
                   foure
                   first
                   chapters
                   are
                   penned
                   alphebetically
                   ,
                   (
                   as
                   many
                   Psalmes
                   are
                   for
                   help
                   of
                   memory
                   in
                   such
                   an
                   excellent
                   piece
                   as
                   this
                   is
                   ,
                   )
                   In
                   1.2
                   ,
                   4.
                   chapters
                   ,
                   every
                   verse
                   begins
                   with
                   a
                   distinct
                   letter
                   of
                   the
                   
                     Hebrew
                     Alphabet
                     ,
                     c.
                  
                   3.
                   hath
                   only
                   every
                   third
                   verse
                   so
                   beginning
                   .
                   Most
                   mournefull
                   melting
                   ,
                   patheticall
                   affections
                   abound
                   in
                   the
                   whole
                   Book
                   .
                   
                     Greg.
                     Nazianzen
                  
                   .
                   Affirmed
                   thus
                   of
                   himselfe
                   ,
                   
                     As
                     oft
                     as
                     I
                     take
                     this
                     Book
                     into
                     my
                     hands
                     ,
                     and
                     read
                     the
                     Lamentations
                     ,
                     I
                     perceive
                     my
                     speech
                     to
                     be
                     stopped
                     ,
                     and
                     I
                     am
                     overwhelmed
                     with
                     tears
                     ,
                     and
                     methinks
                     I
                     see
                     that
                     Calamity
                     as
                     it
                     were
                     set
                     before
                     mine
                     eyes
                     ,
                     and
                     I
                     joyne
                     Lamentations
                     with
                  
                   Jeremiah
                   ;
                   
                     Greg.
                     Nazianzen
                     .
                     Or.
                  
                   12.
                   pag.
                   202.
                   
                   Paris
                   ,
                   1630.
                   
                
                 
                 
                   Scope
                   ,
                   seemes
                   to
                   be
                   this
                   ▪
                   
                     Lively
                     to
                     point
                     out
                     the
                     severity
                     and
                     impartiality
                     of
                     Gods
                     judgements
                     ,
                     even
                     against
                     his
                     own
                     dearest
                     people
                     the
                     Iewes
                     for
                     their
                     iniquities
                     ,
                     inviting
                     them
                     to
                     repentance
                     ,
                     faith
                     and
                     prayer
                     ,
                     for
                     obtaining
                     of
                     Gods
                     favour
                     in
                     pardoning
                     of
                     sin
                     ,
                     and
                     removall
                     of
                     judgement
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Principall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                   Are
                   :
                   
                     
                       I.
                       Narratory
                       ,
                       wherein
                       are
                       contained
                       .
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           A
                           most
                           
                             Patheticall
                             Description
                          
                           of
                           the
                           wofull
                           miseries
                           ,
                           overwhelming
                           Ierusalem
                           and
                           Iudea
                           ,
                           yet
                           all
                           acknowledged
                           to
                           be
                           most
                           justly
                           inflicted
                           for
                           their
                           sin
                           ,
                           c.
                           1.
                           
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           A
                           mournfull
                           
                             expostulating
                             lamentation
                          
                           for
                           the
                           desolating
                           miseries
                           upon
                           all
                           persons
                           and
                           affairs
                           ,
                           Civil
                           or
                           Ecclesiasticall
                           in
                           the
                           whole
                           Kingdome
                           ,
                           c.
                           2.
                           1.
                           to
                           19.
                           
                        
                         
                           3.
                           
                           The
                           
                             Prophets
                             counsell
                          
                           to
                           them
                           to
                           Convert
                           to
                           God
                           and
                           pray
                           ;
                           and
                           he
                           gives
                           them
                           a
                           forme
                           of
                           words
                           ,
                           c.
                           2.
                           verse
                           19.20
                           ,
                           21
                           ,
                           22.
                           
                        
                         
                           4.
                           
                           The
                           
                             Churches
                             sad
                             complaints
                          
                           (
                           in
                           one
                           mans
                           person
                           )
                           of
                           Gods
                           many
                           and
                           heavy
                           afflictions
                           upon
                           her
                           ,
                           c.
                           3.
                           1.
                           to
                           18.
                           
                        
                         
                           5.
                           
                           The
                           
                             Arguments
                             of
                             comfort
                          
                           ,
                           wherewith
                           the
                           Church
                           supported
                           her selfe
                           in
                           
                           these
                           extremities
                           v.
                           18.
                           to
                           42.
                           
                        
                         
                           6.
                           
                           How
                           the
                           Church
                           
                             eased
                             her
                             heart
                          
                           in
                           crying
                           to
                           God
                           for
                           her selfe
                           ,
                           against
                           her
                           enemies
                           ,
                           v.
                           42.
                           
                             to
                             the
                             end
                          
                           .
                        
                         
                           7.
                           
                           Most
                           
                             Patheticall
                             Aggravations
                          
                           of
                           her
                           calamities
                           .
                           c.
                           4.1
                           .
                           to
                           21.
                           
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       II.
                       Minatory
                       ,
                       against
                       the
                       enemies
                       of
                       
                         Israel
                         ,
                         c.
                      
                       4.21
                       .
                    
                     
                       III.
                       Promissory
                       ,
                       to
                       the
                       afflicted
                       daughter
                       of
                       Sion
                       ,
                       c.
                       4.22
                       .
                    
                     
                       IIII.
                       Petitory
                       ,
                       wherein
                       the
                       Church
                       of
                       God
                       ,
                       1
                       bewaileth
                       her
                       miseries
                       ,
                       2
                       Acknowledgeth
                       sin
                       to
                       be
                       the
                       cause
                       thereof
                       ,
                       3
                       Deprecats
                       his
                       wrath
                       ,
                       4
                       And
                       implores
                       his
                       mercy
                       ,
                       c.
                       5.
                       
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Ezekiel
                   .
                
                 
                   EZEKIEL
                   .
                   He
                   was
                   descended
                   of
                   the
                   Priestly
                   stock
                   ,
                   Ezek.
                   1.3
                   .
                   Prophecyed
                   in
                   the
                   land
                   of
                   Chaldea
                   ,
                   to
                   the
                   Captives
                   and
                   Gentiles
                   ,
                   in
                   the
                   fifth
                   yeare
                   of
                   Iehoiachin's
                   captivity
                   ,
                   Ezek.
                   1.1
                   ,
                   2
                   ,
                   3.
                   
                
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     .
                     To
                     comfort
                     the
                     Church
                     of
                     God
                     in
                     Captivity
                     ,
                     and
                     to
                     instruct
                     them
                     how
                     to
                     behave
                     themselves
                     therein
                     ,
                     amongst
                     
                     profane
                     Heathenish
                     Idolaters
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                   Herein
                   are
                   ,
                
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     Preface
                  
                   setting
                   forth
                   the
                   Prophets
                   calling
                   to
                   this
                   office
                   ;
                   Gods
                   call
                   ,
                   c.
                   1.
                   
                   Ezekiels
                   fearfulnes
                   ,
                   c.
                   2.
                   
                   Gods
                   confirming
                   and
                   strengthning
                   him
                   ,
                   c.
                   3.
                   
                
                 
                   II.
                   The
                   
                     Prophecy
                     it self
                  
                   ,
                   containing
                   three
                   Ranks
                   of
                   Sermons
                   preached
                   at
                   severall
                   times
                   ,
                   to
                   severall
                   persons
                   ,
                   &c.
                   1.
                   
                   
                     To
                     the
                     Iews
                  
                   ,
                   whom
                   he
                   sharply
                   rebuks
                   &
                   threatens
                   for
                   their
                   impieties
                   in
                   seventeen
                   severall
                   sermons
                   ,
                   c.
                   4.
                   to
                   c.
                   25.
                   2.
                   
                   
                     To
                     the
                     enemies
                     of
                     Gods
                     people
                     ,
                  
                   whose
                   ruine
                   and
                   destruction
                   he
                   foretels
                   in
                   eight
                   sermons
                   ,
                   c.
                   25.
                   to
                   c.
                   33.
                   3.
                   
                   To
                   the
                   Jewes
                   ,
                   exhorting
                   them
                   to
                   repentance
                   ,
                   and
                   encouraging
                   them
                   to
                   hope
                   ,
                   not
                   only
                   for
                   an
                   inchoate
                   deliverance
                   from
                   Babylons
                   slavery
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   in
                   six
                   sermons
                   ,
                   c.
                   33.
                   to
                   c.
                   40.
                   
                   But
                   also
                   for
                   a
                   consummate
                   spirituall
                   deliverance
                   from
                   spirituall
                   misery
                   by
                   Christ
                   the
                   Messiah
                   ,
                   and
                   this
                   is
                   set
                   out
                   in
                   vision
                   1
                   Of
                   the
                   new
                   Temple
                   to
                   be
                   erected
                   ,
                   c.
                   40.41
                   ,
                   42.
                   1
                   
                   Of
                   the
                   new
                   Worship
                   of
                   God
                   to
                   be
                   restored
                   ,
                   c.
                   43.44
                   .
                   3
                   Of
                   the
                   new
                   Ierusalem
                   ,
                   and
                   new
                   earth
                   that
                   should
                   be
                   discovered
                   ,
                   c.
                   45.46
                   ,
                   47
                   ,
                   48.
                   
                
              
               
                 
                 
                   Daniel
                   :
                
                 
                   DANIEL
                   ,
                   Daniel
                   was
                   carried
                   captive
                   with
                   the
                   Jewes
                   into
                   Babylon
                   ,
                   Dan.
                   1.6
                   .
                   living
                   and
                   prophecying
                   among
                   the
                   Captives
                   ,
                   a
                   long
                   time
                   ,
                   foretold
                   future
                   events
                   to
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   world
                   .
                   Was
                   a
                   man
                   of
                   an
                   excellent
                   spirit
                   ,
                   Dan.
                   5.12
                   .
                   Author
                   of
                   this
                   Book
                   ,
                   Matth.
                   24.15
                   .
                   Dan.
                   12.4
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     ,
                     To
                     display
                     unto
                     Gods
                     Church
                     and
                     people
                     Gods
                     wise
                     and
                     faithfull
                     dealings
                     with
                     them
                     in
                     all
                     states
                     ,
                     from
                     dayes
                     of
                  
                   Nebuchadnezzar
                   
                     till
                     Christ
                     ,
                     for
                     the
                     comfort
                     of
                     the
                     Iews
                     ,
                     and
                     from
                     Christ
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     the
                     world
                     ,
                     his
                     peculiar
                     Providence
                     over
                     his
                     own
                     in
                     all
                     their
                     distresses
                     and
                     deliverances
                     ,
                     for
                     the
                     comfort
                     of
                     the
                     Saints
                     under
                     the
                     New
                     Testament
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     Parts
                  
                   .
                   This
                   book
                   relates
                   principally
                   two
                   sorts
                   of
                   matters
                   ,
                   viz.
                   
                   
                     
                     
                       1.
                       
                       
                         Matters
                         done
                         already
                         for
                         time
                         past
                         ,
                      
                       laid
                       down
                       
                         Historically
                         ,
                         c.
                      
                       1.
                       to
                       7.
                       and
                       these
                       things
                       are
                       reported
                       1.
                       
                       Summarily
                       .
                       c.
                       1.
                       2
                       
                       Severally
                       under
                       the
                       
                         Babylonian
                         Monarchy
                      
                       ,
                       whereof
                       we
                       have
                       1
                       The
                       Rise
                       ,
                       c.
                       2.3
                       .
                       2
                       The
                       Growth
                       ,
                       c.
                       4.
                       3
                       
                       The
                       close
                       ,
                       c.
                       5.
                       
                       Or
                       under
                       the
                       
                         Persian
                         Monarchy
                      
                       ,
                       c.
                       6.
                       
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       
                         Matters
                         to
                         be
                         done
                         afterwards
                         for
                         future
                         ,
                      
                       laid
                       down
                       Prophetically
                       ,
                       c.
                       7.
                       to
                       the
                       end
                       of
                       the
                       book
                       .
                       He
                       prophecies
                       ,
                       1.
                       
                       
                         Of
                         future
                         Calamities
                      
                       ,
                       where
                       ,
                       in
                       days
                       of
                       Belshazzar
                       ,
                       he
                       had
                       a
                       double
                       vision
                       Of
                       the
                       foure
                       beasts
                       c.
                       7.
                       
                       Of
                       the
                       Ram
                       and
                       He-goat
                       ,
                       c.
                       8.
                       
                       In
                       the
                       time
                       of
                       the
                       
                         Persian
                         Monarchy
                      
                       ,
                       where
                       he
                       hath
                       a
                       double
                       vision
                       ,
                       One
                       in
                       the
                       first
                       yeare
                       of
                       Darius
                       the
                       Mede
                       ,
                       c.
                       9.
                       
                       The
                       other
                       in
                       the
                       third
                       yeare
                       of
                       Cyrus
                       ,
                       c
                       10.
                       with
                       the
                       exposition
                       of
                       them
                       c.
                       ●1
                       .
                       2.
                       
                       
                         Of
                         the
                         Elects
                         deliverance
                         from
                         these
                         calamities
                         ,
                      
                       both
                       before
                       and
                       after
                       Christ
                       to
                       the
                       worlds
                       end
                       ;
                       though
                       calamities
                       of
                       the
                       Saints
                       be
                       sharp
                       and
                       long
                       ,
                       yet
                       at
                       last
                       deliverance
                       shall
                       fully
                       come
                       ,
                       and
                       the
                       promise
                       thereof
                       not
                       faile
                       ,
                       but
                       be
                       exactly
                       fulfilled
                       ,
                       c.
                       12.
                       
                    
                  
                
                 
                   2
                   
                     The
                     Lesser
                     Prophets
                  
                   or
                   
                     Minor
                     Prophets
                  
                   so
                   called
                   ,
                   not
                   because
                   they
                   had
                   
                     lesser
                     Authority
                  
                   from
                   
                   God
                   for
                   their
                   Propheticall
                   office
                   ,
                   but
                   because
                   their
                   Books
                   are
                   of
                   a
                   
                     farre
                     lesse
                  
                   bulk
                   and
                   volume
                   then
                   the
                   former
                   .
                   They
                   are
                   twelve
                   ,
                   
                     Hosea
                     ,
                     Ioel
                     ,
                     &c.
                  
                   
                
              
               
                 
                   Hoshea
                
                 
                   HOSHEAH
                   .
                   he
                   was
                   sonne
                   of
                   Beeri
                   ,
                   Prophecyed
                   the
                   same
                   time
                   that
                   Isaiah
                   did
                   ,
                   Hos.
                   1.1
                   .
                   with
                   Isa.
                   1.1
                   .
                   2.
                   
                   He
                   prophecyed
                   (
                   as
                   is
                   probable
                   )
                   longer
                   then
                   any
                   other
                   of
                   the
                   Prophets
                   ;
                   in
                   all
                   about
                   seventy
                   years
                   .
                   Principally
                   deals
                   against
                   the
                   ten
                   Tribes
                   of
                   Israel
                   ,
                   now
                   and
                   then
                   against
                   Iudah
                   .
                   His
                   stile
                   is
                   sharp
                   and
                   succinct
                   ,
                   which
                   makes
                   him
                   somewhat
                   more
                   dark
                   and
                   obscure
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     ,
                     To
                     convince
                     the
                     Iewes
                     ,
                     especially
                     the
                     ten
                     Tribes
                     of
                     their
                     many
                     great
                     iniquities
                     ,
                     especially
                     of
                     their
                     idolatryes
                     ,
                     and
                     to
                     perswade
                     them
                     to
                     repentance
                     with
                     hope
                     of
                     mercy
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                   This
                   Prophecy
                   is
                   either
                   
                     
                     
                       I.
                       Parabolicall
                       ,
                       comprehending
                       two
                       Types
                       .
                       The
                       first
                       being
                       propounded
                       ,
                       c.
                       1.
                       
                       Accommodated
                       ,
                       c.
                       2.
                       
                       The
                       second
                       in
                       ,
                       c.
                       3.
                       
                       In
                       both
                       which
                       under
                       the
                       Person
                       of
                       a
                       Prophet
                       ,
                       he
                       signifies
                       in
                       himselfe
                       future
                       events
                       ,
                       and
                       evils
                       that
                       should
                       befall
                       the
                       Kingdome
                       and
                       kingly
                       house
                       of
                       Israel
                       ,
                       Captivity
                       .
                       Blindnesse
                       of
                       the
                       people
                       ,
                       Illumination
                       and
                       Conversion
                       of
                       a
                       remnant
                       by
                       Christ.
                       
                    
                     
                       II.
                       
                         Plaine
                         and
                         naked
                      
                       ,
                       And
                       so
                       it
                       is
                       ,
                       Comminatory
                       ,
                       and
                       Consolatory
                       .
                       1.
                       
                       Comminatory
                       ,
                       which
                       is
                       laid
                       downe
                       chiefly
                       in
                       three
                       sermons
                       ,
                       or
                       speciall
                       Prophecies
                       ,
                       viz.
                       1.
                       
                       
                         Against
                         all
                         Israel
                      
                       ,
                       for
                       their
                       vanity
                       ,
                       inhumanity
                       ,
                       impiety
                       ;
                       too
                       evident
                       in
                       the
                       Kingdomes
                       present
                       bad
                       Government
                       ,
                       dehorting
                       Iudah
                       from
                       Israels
                       sins
                       ,
                       both
                       by
                       the
                       horrour
                       of
                       their
                       injustice
                       and
                       feare
                       of
                       punishment
                       ,
                       c.
                       4.
                       2.
                       
                       
                         Against
                         Priests
                      
                       ,
                       Israel
                       ,
                       
                         and
                         the
                         kings
                         house
                      
                       ,
                       threatning
                       ruine
                       for
                       their
                       spirituall
                       whoredome
                       ,
                       and
                       obstinate
                       backsliding
                       from
                       God
                       ,
                       observance
                       of
                       humane
                       Traditions
                       ,
                       carnall
                       con●idence
                       in
                       forraine
                       Aid
                       of
                       Assyrians
                       ,
                       Contempt
                       of
                       Gods
                       word
                       ,
                       casting
                       off
                       Gods
                       Covenant
                       ,
                       and
                       other
                       wickednesses
                       and
                       hypocrisies
                       ,
                       c.
                       5
                       ,
                       6
                       ,
                       7.
                       
                       And
                       all
                       this
                       under
                       the
                       Person
                       of
                       a
                       judge
                       .
                       3.
                       
                       
                         Vnder
                         the
                         Person
                         of
                         an
                         Herauld
                         ,
                         he
                         proclaimes
                         Gods
                         judgements
                         against
                         them
                         and
                         the
                         causes
                         thereof
                         .
                      
                       viz.
                       for
                       their
                       defection
                       from
                       his
                       worship
                       and
                       spirituall
                       Kingdome
                       ,
                       and
                       from
                       the
                       temporall
                       Kingdome
                       of
                       David
                       ,
                       Hypocrisie
                       ,
                       departing
                       
                       from
                       all
                       good
                       ,
                       secure
                       joyfulnesse
                       ,
                       sacriledge
                       and
                       other
                       hereditary
                       sins
                       ,
                       threatning
                       poverty
                       ,
                       deportation
                       ,
                       losse
                       of
                       Gods
                       worship
                       ,
                       death
                       and
                       devastation
                       ,
                       c.
                       8
                       ,
                       9
                       ,
                       10
                       2.
                       
                       Consolatory
                       ,
                       which
                       containes
                       two
                       sermons
                       .
                       1.
                       
                       Under
                       the
                       person
                       of
                       a
                       Father
                       ,
                       God
                       promising
                       in
                       Christ
                       ,
                       that
                       (
                       though
                       neither
                       Prophet
                       ,
                       law
                       ,
                       mercies
                       nor
                       judgements
                       had
                       brought
                       them
                       to
                       repentance
                       ,
                       yet
                       )
                       his
                       Elect
                       should
                       be
                       converted
                       ,
                       embrace
                       Christ
                       and
                       the
                       promises
                       ,
                       c.
                       11.
                       2.
                       
                       Disswading
                       them
                       from
                       Per●idiousnesse
                       ,
                       Idolatry
                       ,
                       Avarice
                       ,
                       Pride
                       ,
                       he
                       promiseth
                       ,
                       (
                       the
                       wicked
                       being
                       destroyed
                       )
                       to
                       preserve
                       a
                       remnant
                       ,
                       and
                       to
                       heale
                       the
                       penitent
                       ,
                       c.
                       12
                       ,
                       13
                       ,
                       14.
                       in
                       c.
                       14.
                       putting
                       on
                       the
                       person
                       of
                       a
                       Friend
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Joel
                   .
                
                 
                   JOEL
                   .
                   Ioel
                   was
                   sonne
                   of
                   Pethuel
                   ,
                   Joel
                   1.1
                   .
                   Some
                   think
                   this
                   Pethuel
                   was
                   Samuel
                   so
                   called
                   ,
                   i.
                   e.
                   
                     A
                     perswader
                     of
                     God
                  
                   ,
                   Because
                   what
                   he
                   asked
                   of
                   God
                   in
                   Prayer
                   ,
                   he
                   obtained
                   .
                   Alst.
                   
                
                 
                   Scope
                   ;
                   to
                   
                     convince
                     the
                     Iewes
                     of
                     their
                     sins
                     by
                     occasion
                     of
                     an
                     imminent
                     famine
                     
                     and
                     to
                     draw
                     them
                     to
                     repentance
                     ,
                     holding
                     forth
                     many
                     inviting
                     promises
                     to
                     the
                     penitent
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     Parts
                  
                   .
                   This
                   Prophecy
                   is
                   ,
                   1.
                   
                   Comminatory
                   ,
                   threatning
                   a
                   grievous
                   famine
                   (
                   taking
                   occasion
                   thereof
                   ,
                   by
                   the
                   Loc●sts
                   Caterpillers
                   ,
                   and
                   Palmer
                   wormes
                   ,
                   the
                   forerunners
                   of
                   a
                   famine
                   )
                   labouring
                   to
                   make
                   the
                   people
                   sensible
                   of
                   present
                   evils
                   ,
                   and
                   sins
                   the
                   cause
                   thereof
                   ▪
                   c.
                   1.
                   
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   Hortatory
                   ,
                   stirring
                   them
                   up
                   to
                   publique
                   repentance
                   ,
                   c.
                   2.
                   ver
                   .
                   1.
                   to
                   19.
                   
                   Which
                   Exhortation
                   is
                   urged
                   ,
                   1.
                   
                   By
                   promises
                   to
                   his
                   people
                   both
                   touching
                   ,
                   Temporall
                   deliverances
                   from
                   present
                   evils
                   ,
                   ver
                   .
                   19.
                   to
                   28.
                   
                   Eternall
                   Evangelicall
                   mercies
                   in
                   Christ
                   ,
                   ver
                   .
                   28.
                   to
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   chap.
                   2.
                   
                   By
                   threats
                   against
                   their
                   adversaries
                   on
                   every
                   side
                   ,
                   c.
                   3.
                   
                
              
               
                 
                   Amos.
                   
                
                 
                   AMOS
                   .
                   Amos
                   an
                   heardman
                   of
                   Tekoa
                   ,
                   yet
                   furnished
                   with
                   a
                   Propheticall
                   spirit
                   ,
                   Amos
                   1.1
                   .
                   Severely
                   denounceth
                   judgements
                   ;
                   is
                   thought
                   to
                   be
                   slaine
                   by
                   Amaziah
                   the
                   Priest.
                   
                
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     ,
                     To
                     hold
                     forth
                     the
                     severity
                     of
                     
                     Gods
                     judgements
                     against
                     his
                     Churches
                     enemies
                     ,
                     and
                     his
                     Church
                     it selfe
                     ;
                     for
                     their
                     sins
                     .
                     Annexing
                     some
                     Evangelicall
                     Promises
                     to
                     a
                     Remnant
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     Parts
                  
                   Herein
                   are
                   ,
                   
                     
                       I.
                       Comminations
                       .
                       1.
                       
                       Against
                       the
                       enemies
                       of
                       the
                       Church
                       ,
                       for
                       their
                       insolencies
                       against
                       his
                       people
                       ,
                       &c.
                       c.
                       1.
                       2.
                       
                       Against
                       the
                       Jewes
                       and
                       Israelites
                       themselves
                       for
                       their
                       own
                       wickednesses
                       ▪
                       which
                       threatnings
                       are
                       laid
                       down
                       .
                       1.
                       
                       More
                       plainely
                       against
                       their
                       Idolatry
                       ,
                       c
                       2
                       ,
                       3.
                       
                       Violence
                       ,
                       c.
                       4.
                       
                       Impiety
                       ,
                       Pride
                       ,
                       inhumanity
                       ,
                       luxury
                       ,
                       c.
                       5.6
                       .
                       2.
                       
                       More
                       darkly
                       and
                       obscurely
                       under
                       three
                       severall
                       Types
                       ,
                       the
                       first
                       c.
                       7.
                       
                       The
                       second
                       c.
                       8.
                       
                       The
                       third
                       c.
                       9.
                       ad
                       ver
                       .
                       11.
                       
                    
                     
                       II.
                       Consolations
                       and
                       Evangelicall
                       Promises
                       ,
                       c.
                       9.
                       ver
                       .
                       11.
                       to
                       the
                       end
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Obadiah
                   .
                
                 
                   OBADIAH
                   .
                   Who
                   he
                   was
                   ,
                   is
                   not
                   evident
                   by
                   Scripture
                   ,
                   but
                   only
                   by
                   this
                   Booke
                   ,
                   that
                   he
                   was
                   a
                   Prophet
                   .
                   He
                   prophesied
                   against
                   the
                   Edomites
                   or
                   Idumeans
                   ,
                   who
                   came
                   of
                   Edom
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   Esau
                   ,
                   Gen.
                   36
                   ,
                   1.8
                   ,
                   19.
                   and
                   hated
                   Israelites
                   
                   Iacobs
                   race
                   ,
                   as
                   Esau
                   hated
                   Jacob
                   himselfe
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     ,
                     To
                     threaten
                     ruine
                     to
                     the
                     Edomites
                     ,
                     for
                     their
                     enmity
                     against
                     the
                     Israelites
                     ,
                     and
                     to
                     comfort
                     the
                     Church
                     with
                     promised
                     Salvation
                     and
                     deliverance
                     in
                     Christ.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     A
                     Commination
                     of
                     imminent
                     ruine
                     to
                     the
                     Edomites
                     for
                     their
                     enmity
                     against
                     the
                     Israelites
                     ver
                     .
                     1.
                     to
                     12.
                     
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     A
                     Prohibition
                     of
                     Edom
                     from
                     further
                     injur●ng
                     his
                     people
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     12.
                     to
                     17.
                     
                  
                   
                     3.
                     
                     Ample
                     promises
                     of
                     deliverance
                     and
                     salvation
                     to
                     the
                     Church
                     ,
                     by
                     the
                     kingdom
                     of
                     Christ
                     ,
                     from
                     all
                     her
                     enemies
                     .
                     ver
                     .
                     17
                     ,
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Jonah
                   .
                
                 
                   JONAH
                   .
                   He
                   was
                   son
                   of
                   Amitta●
                   ,
                   Ionah
                   1.1
                   .
                   Some
                   call
                   him
                   
                     The
                     Prophet
                     and
                     Apostle
                     of
                     the
                     Gentiles
                  
                   ;
                   because
                   he
                   was
                   sent
                   to
                   preach
                   to
                   Ninive
                   the
                   Metropolis
                   of
                   the
                   Assyrians
                   ,
                   a
                   Gentilish
                   City
                   .
                   This
                   Booke
                   is
                   chiefly
                   Historicall
                   .
                
                 
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     .
                     To
                     shew
                     how
                     God
                     invited
                     the
                     City
                     of
                     Niniveh
                     to
                     repentance
                     by
                     Ionas
                     preaching
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     Gods
                     first
                     calling
                     of
                     Jonas
                     to
                     preach
                     ,
                     to
                     Niniveh
                     ,
                     with
                     Jonas
                     his
                     refusall
                     ,
                     Gods
                     humbling
                     him
                     for
                     it
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     effects
                     of
                     that
                     humiliation
                     ,
                     Ionas
                     his
                     Prayer
                     ,
                     and
                     deliverance
                     ,
                     c.
                     1
                     ,
                     2.
                     
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     Gods
                     second
                     calling
                     of
                     him
                     to
                     the
                     same
                     taske
                     ,
                     together
                     with
                     Jonas
                     his
                     obedience
                     ,
                     Ninive's
                     Repentance
                     ,
                     Gods
                     forbearance
                     of
                     the
                     Judgement
                     threatned
                     ,
                     and
                     Ionas
                     his
                     passionate
                     causelesse
                     discontent
                     ,
                     c.
                     3
                     ,
                     4.
                     
                     Nineveh
                     Repenting
                     ,
                     aggravated
                     Israel's
                     and
                     Judah's
                     impenitency
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Micah
                   :
                
                 
                   MICAH
                   .
                   He
                   is
                   described
                   ,
                   Mic.
                   1.1
                   .
                   Coetaneous
                   to
                   Esay
                   ,
                   imitator
                   of
                   Esay
                   ,
                   compare
                   them
                   together
                   .
                   Prophecied
                   in
                   corruptest
                   times
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     .
                     To
                     threaten
                     destruction
                     to
                     Iudah
                     and
                     Israel
                     for
                     their
                     great
                     impieties
                     fomented
                     among
                     them
                     by
                     their
                     Rulers
                     
                     and
                     Prophets
                     ;
                     but
                     to
                     comfort
                     the
                     remnant
                     of
                     the
                     Elect
                     by
                     Evangelicall
                     Promises
                     in
                     Christ.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       His
                       first
                       Sermon
                    
                     .
                     1.
                     
                     Minatory
                     ,
                     both
                     in
                     generall
                     against
                     Iudah
                     and
                     Israel
                     for
                     their
                     sins
                     ,
                     c.
                     1
                     ,
                     2.
                     and
                     in
                     especiall
                     against
                     Magistrates
                     for
                     their
                     injustice
                     ,
                     c.
                     3.
                     2.
                     
                     Consolatory
                     ,
                     through
                     the
                     mercies
                     of
                     God
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     coming
                     of
                     the
                     Messiah
                     c.
                     4
                     ,
                     5.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       His
                       second
                       Sermon
                    
                     ,
                     contaninig
                     Gods
                     1.
                     contestations
                     against
                     their
                     sinnes
                     c.
                     6.
                     2.
                     
                     Gods
                     Consolations
                     of
                     his
                     Elect
                     remnant
                     ,
                     with
                     Gospel
                     promises
                     ,
                     c.
                     7.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Nahum
                   ,
                
                 
                   NAHUM
                   .
                   He
                   is
                   described
                   ,
                   Nah.
                   1.1
                   .
                   About
                   same
                   time
                   that
                   Ieremiah
                   prophecyed
                   in
                   
                     Iudea
                     ,
                     Nahum
                  
                   prophecyed
                   against
                   Nineveh
                   the
                   Metropolis
                   of
                   Assyria
                   ,
                   relapsing
                   to
                   impiety
                   after
                   Ionas
                   his
                   preaching
                   ;
                   before
                   Babylons
                   Captivity
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     .
                     To
                     comfort
                     the
                     Iewes
                     and
                     
                     the
                     godly
                     Israelites
                     by
                     the
                     denouncing
                     of
                     judgments
                     against
                     the
                     Assyrians
                     ,
                     who
                     under
                     Pul
                     ,
                     Tiglath-Pelesar
                     ,
                     Salmanazar
                     ,
                     Senacherib
                     and
                     Esarhaddon
                     their
                     Kings
                     ,
                     grievously
                     infested
                     Israel
                     :
                     Esarhaddon
                     carrying
                     Israel
                     Captive
                     to
                     Assyria
                     in
                     dayes
                     of
                     Mannasseh
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     A
                     Preface
                     to
                     the
                     prophecy
                     from
                     the
                     Nature
                     of
                     God
                     ,
                     1.
                     
                     Most
                     potent
                     and
                     severe
                     against
                     all
                     his
                     wicked
                     enemies
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.
                     ver
                     .
                     2.
                     to
                     7.
                     2.
                     
                     Kind
                     and
                     gracious
                     to
                     the
                     godly
                     and
                     faithfull
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     7.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       Denunciation
                       of
                       judgement
                       against
                       Nineveh
                    
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     kingdom
                     of
                     Assyria
                     ,
                     under
                     the
                     Metaphor
                     of
                     a
                     mighty
                     ●lood
                     that
                     should
                     at
                     last
                     destroy
                     them
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.8
                     ,
                     9
                     ,
                     10.
                     
                     Together
                     with
                     the
                     causes
                     of
                     those
                     judgements
                     ver
                     .
                     11.
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     the
                     chap.
                     
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       Amplification
                       of
                       these
                       threatned
                       judgments
                    
                     ,
                     1.
                     
                     Partly
                     by
                     a
                     lively
                     Ad-umbration
                     and
                     description
                     of
                     them
                     ,
                     c.
                     2.
                     2.
                     
                     Partly
                     by
                     a
                     Narration
                     of
                     the
                     causes
                     procuring
                     these
                     judgmēts
                     ,
                     viz
                     Their
                     Cruelties
                     ,
                     whordoms
                     ,
                     sorceries
                     ,
                     Idolatries
                     ,
                     c.
                     3.1
                     ▪
                     to
                     8.
                     3.
                     
                     Partly
                     by
                     confirmation
                     of
                     these
                     threatnings
                     fore-prophecied
                     ,
                     by
                     example
                     of
                     Gods
                     judgements
                     upon
                     Alexandria
                     in
                     Aegypt
                     ,
                     c.
                     3.8
                     .
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                    
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                 
                   Habakk
                   :
                
                 
                   HABAKKUK
                   .
                   As
                   Nahum
                   prophesied
                   against
                   Niniveh
                   and
                   Assyrians
                   ;
                   so
                   Habakkuk
                   against
                   both
                   Iewes
                   and
                   Babylonians
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     .
                     Both
                     to
                     warne
                     the
                     Iewes
                     of
                     their
                     overthrow
                     by
                     the
                     Chaldeans
                     for
                     their
                     sinnes
                     ,
                     and
                     to
                     comfort
                     them
                     afterwards
                     by
                     their
                     enemies
                     destruction
                     ,
                     but
                     their
                     own
                     life
                     of
                     Faith
                     in
                     deepest
                     afflictions
                     .
                  
                   The
                   prophesy
                   is
                   laid
                   down
                   Dialogue-wise
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   I.
                   The
                   prophets
                   Complaint
                   and
                   Expostulation
                   to
                   the
                   LORD
                   against
                   the
                   extreame
                   wickednesse
                   of
                   the
                   Iewes
                   ,
                   c.
                   1.2
                   ,
                   3
                   ,
                   4.
                   
                   II.
                   The
                   LORDS
                   answer
                   to
                   the
                   prophet
                   ,
                   threatning
                   great
                   calamities
                   to
                   the
                   Iewes
                   by
                   the
                   proud
                   destructive
                   Caldeans
                   .
                   ver
                   .
                   5.
                   to
                   12.
                   
                   III.
                   A
                   second
                   Expostulation
                   of
                   the
                   prophet
                   ,
                   against
                   the
                   cruel
                   oppression
                   of
                   Iewes
                   ,
                   as
                   well
                   good
                   as
                   bad
                   ,
                   under
                   the
                   wicked
                   blaspemous
                   King
                   of
                   Caldeans
                   ,
                   ver
                   .
                   12.
                   
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     the
                     chap.
                  
                   IIII.
                   Gods
                   second
                   
                   answer
                   to
                   the
                   Prophet
                   .
                   1.
                   
                   Directing
                   the
                   good
                   to
                   manage
                   such
                   deep
                   afflictions
                   under
                   the
                   Caldeans
                   ,
                   viz.
                   By
                   living
                   by
                   Faith
                   in
                   hope
                   of
                   deliverance
                   ,
                   c.
                   2.1
                   ,
                   to
                   5.
                   2.
                   
                   Threatning
                   to
                   be
                   avenged
                   upon
                   the
                   Caldeans
                   for
                   all
                   their
                   wickednesse
                   and
                   cruelty
                   against
                   his
                   people
                   ,
                   ver
                   .
                   5.
                   to
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   c.
                   V.
                   The
                   prophets
                   sealing
                   up
                   the
                   Doctrine
                   of
                   the
                   life
                   of
                   Faith
                   in
                   his
                   excellent
                   prayer
                   penned
                   in
                   his
                   own
                   and
                   the
                   Churches
                   name
                   ,
                   c.
                   3.
                   
                
              
               
                 
                   Zephania
                   ,
                
                 
                   ZEPHANIAH
                   .
                   His
                   stock
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   time
                   of
                   his
                   prophecy
                   is
                   described
                   ,
                   c.
                   1.1
                   .
                   He
                   was
                   coetaneous
                   to
                   Ieremiah
                   ,
                   prophecied
                   the
                   same
                   things
                   for
                   substance
                   ,
                   but
                   farre
                   more
                   briefly
                   and
                   succinctly
                   .
                   He
                   prophesied
                   against
                   both
                   Iewes
                   and
                   forraigne
                   Nations
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Chiefe
                     Scope
                     .
                     To
                     Reprove
                     the
                     wickednesse
                     of
                     the
                     Iewes
                     ,
                     especially
                     of
                     the
                     Princes
                     and
                     many
                     of
                     the
                     people
                     ,
                     for
                     hankering
                     after
                     Idolatry
                     ,
                     expecting
                     it
                     should
                     be
                     set
                     up
                     againe
                     ,
                     Hiding
                     their
                     Idols
                     ;
                     even
                     
                     after
                     that
                     glorious
                     Reformation
                     of
                     King
                     Iosiah
                     .
                     And
                     to
                     comfort
                     the
                     Elect
                     remnant
                     with
                     Evangelicall
                     promises
                     ,
                     and
                     Reformation
                     by
                     Christ.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   1.
                   
                   
                     A
                     most
                     severe
                     denunciation
                  
                   of
                   desolation
                   and
                   other
                   judgements
                   to
                   befall
                   all
                   sorts
                   both
                   in
                   Jerusalem
                   and
                   Iudea
                   ,
                   for
                   their
                   secret
                   idolatries
                   ,
                   oppressions
                   and
                   injurious
                   coveteousnesse
                   ,
                   c.
                   1.
                   2.
                   
                   
                     An
                     exhortation
                  
                   of
                   the
                   Jewes
                   to
                   Repentance
                   and
                   self-Reformation
                   both
                   the
                   gracelesse
                   Iewes
                   and
                   those
                   that
                   had
                   some
                   sparkes
                   of
                   Grace
                   appearing
                   in
                   them
                   .
                   Partly
                   by
                   the
                   exemplary
                   formidable
                   judgements
                   which
                   God
                   would
                   execute
                   upon
                   forraigne
                   Nations
                   in
                   sight
                   of
                   the
                   Iewes
                   ,
                   c.
                   2.
                   
                   Partly
                   by
                   threatnings
                   of
                   judgements
                   against
                   Iewes
                   themselves
                   for
                   their
                   sins
                   if
                   they
                   repented
                   not
                   ,
                   c.
                   3.1
                   .
                   to
                   8.
                   3.
                   
                   
                     A
                     sweet
                     consolation
                  
                   made
                   up
                   of
                   Evangelicall
                   promises
                   touching
                   the
                   calling
                   of
                   the
                   Gentiles
                   ,
                   Restauration
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   ,
                   pardon
                   of
                   sins
                   ,
                   Purity
                   and
                   everlasting
                   glory
                   by
                   Christ
                   ,
                   c.
                   3.8
                   .
                   
                     to
                     the
                     end
                  
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Haggai
                   .
                
                 
                   HAGGAI
                   .
                   Of
                   him
                   and
                   the
                   time
                   of
                   his
                   prophecy
                   ,
                   See
                   Hag.
                   1.1
                   .
                
                 
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     .
                     To
                     quicken
                     the
                     Iewes
                     that
                     had
                     returned
                     from
                     the
                     Babylon●sh
                     Captivity
                     ,
                     (
                     being
                     now
                     extreame
                     ingratefully
                     dull
                     in
                     the
                     worke
                     of
                     Reformation
                     ,
                     )
                     to
                     lay
                     aside
                     all
                     sluggish
                     delayes
                     and
                     excuses
                     ,
                     and
                     to
                     make
                     haste
                     with
                     the
                     repaire
                     of
                     the
                     Temple
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       Gods
                       sharp
                       reprehension
                    
                     of
                     the
                     ingratefull
                     sluggish
                     Jewes
                     for
                     their
                     great
                     sin
                     in
                     not
                     repairing
                     the
                     Temple
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.1
                     .
                     to
                     12.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       Gods
                       singular
                       encouragement
                    
                     of
                     the
                     Iewes
                     to
                     fall
                     speedily
                     and
                     vigorously
                     to
                     this
                     work
                     ,
                     by
                     divers
                     sorts
                     of
                     excellent
                     promises
                     ▪
                     viz.
                     1.
                     
                     Of
                     his
                     promoting
                     and
                     perfecting
                     the
                     worke
                     ,
                     when
                     they
                     should
                     sit
                     close
                     to
                     it
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.12
                     .
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                    
                     .
                     2.
                     
                     Of
                     the
                     surpassing
                     glory
                     that
                     he
                     would
                     communicate
                     to
                     this
                     latter
                     Temple
                     (
                     though
                     the
                     structure
                     was
                     not
                     so
                     stately
                     )
                     beyond
                     that
                     of
                     the
                     former
                     Temple
                     .
                     c.
                     2.1
                     .
                     to
                     10.
                     3.
                     
                     Of
                     Gods
                     singular
                     benediction
                     upon
                     the
                     Corne
                     and
                     all
                     the
                     fruits
                     of
                     the
                     earth
                     for
                     their
                     use
                     ,
                     if
                     they
                     would
                     buckle
                     diligently
                     to
                     this
                     Temple-worke
                     ,
                     ver
                     ,
                     10.
                     to
                     20.
                     4.
                     
                     Of
                     the
                     glorious
                     excellency
                     of
                     Christs
                     kingdome
                     ,
                     the
                     perfection
                     and
                     complement
                     of
                     all
                     Reformation
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     20.
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                    
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                 
                   Zechariah
                
                 
                   ZECHARIAH
                   ,
                   His
                   descent
                   and
                   the
                   time
                   of
                   his
                   Prophecy
                   ,
                   
                     See
                     in
                     Zech.
                  
                   1.1
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     ,
                     To
                     encourage
                     and
                     incite
                     the
                     people
                     returned
                     from
                     Captivity
                     ,
                     especially
                     the
                     Governours
                     ,
                  
                   Zerubbabel
                   and
                   Joshuah
                   ,
                   
                     to
                     the
                     building
                     of
                     the
                     Temple
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                   This
                   Prophecy
                   seems
                   to
                   comprize
                   the
                   summe
                   of
                   five
                   Sermons
                   severally
                   preached
                   by
                   the
                   Prophet
                   .
                   viz.
                   
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       His
                       penitentiall
                       sermon
                    
                     calling
                     the
                     Jews
                     to
                     repentance
                     .
                     This
                     is
                     prefixed
                     as
                     A
                     Preface
                     ,
                     before
                     the
                     following
                     Sermons
                     of
                     mercy
                     and
                     judgement
                     ,
                     to
                     prepare
                     f●r
                     the
                     receiving
                     of
                     that
                     ,
                     the
                     avoiding
                     of
                     this
                     ,
                     Zech.
                     1
                     ,
                     1.2
                     .
                     to
                     7.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       His
                       visionall
                       Sermon
                    
                     .
                     viz.
                     His
                     Propheticall
                     visions
                     ,
                     which
                     are
                     in
                     all
                     eight
                     ,
                     some
                     very
                     obstruse
                     ;
                     some
                     light
                     may
                     be
                     brought
                     to
                     them
                     ,
                     by
                     comparing
                     them
                     with
                     Daniels
                     Prophecy
                     .
                     These
                     visions
                     seem
                     to
                     be
                     delivered
                     at
                     once
                     ;
                     are
                     contained
                     from
                     c.
                     1
                     ,
                     7.
                     to
                     c.
                     7
                     ,
                     1.
                     
                     These
                     visions
                     are
                     I.
                     
                       Uisions
                       of
                       Mercy
                    
                     ,
                     as
                     1.
                     
                     
                       The
                       vision
                       of
                       men
                       on
                       horse
                       back
                       among
                       
                       the
                       myrrtle-trees
                       in
                       the
                       bottome
                       :
                    
                     pointing
                     out
                     Christs
                     singular
                     presence
                     with
                     ,
                     and
                     providence
                     over
                     his
                     Church
                     ,
                     in
                     lowest
                     state
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.
                     7.
                     to
                     18.
                     2.
                     
                     
                       The
                       vision
                       of
                       four
                       Carpenters
                       ,
                       &c.
                    
                     intimating
                     how
                     God
                     would
                     break
                     and
                     scatter
                     the
                     horns
                     of
                     his
                     Churches
                     enemies
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.18
                     .
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                    
                     .
                     3.
                     
                     
                       The
                       vision
                       of
                       the
                       man
                       with
                       the
                       measuring
                       line
                       in
                       his
                       hand
                       to
                       measure
                    
                     Ierusalem
                     ,
                     promising
                     the
                     Restauration
                     and
                     re-peopling
                     of
                     
                       Ierusalem
                       ,
                       c.
                    
                     2.
                     4.
                     
                     
                       The
                       vision
                       of
                    
                     Ioshuah
                     
                       the
                       High-Priest
                       in
                       filthy
                       garments
                       ,
                       and
                    
                     Sathan
                     
                       at
                       his
                       right
                       hand
                       accusing
                       him
                    
                     :
                     Showing
                     that
                     though
                     sins
                     of
                     people
                     and
                     Priest
                     might
                     be
                     objected
                     against
                     them
                     ,
                     and
                     their
                     intercessors
                     ,
                     yet
                     they
                     had
                     another
                     High
                     Priest
                     ,
                     who
                     would
                     plead
                     their
                     cause
                     ,
                     pardon
                     their
                     sin
                     ,
                     build
                     the
                     Temple
                     ,
                     and
                     quiet
                     his
                     Church
                     ,
                     viz.
                     Christ
                     the
                     Branch
                     ,
                     c.
                     3.
                     5.
                     
                     
                       The
                       vision
                       of
                       the
                       golden
                       candlestick
                       and
                       the
                       two
                       olive
                       trees
                       standing
                       by
                       it
                    
                     :
                     declaring
                     that
                     Gods
                     grace
                     alone
                     is
                     sufficient
                     for
                     the
                     reparation
                     and
                     preservation
                     of
                     his
                     Church
                     ,
                     without
                     all
                     other
                     created
                     meanes
                     ,
                     against
                     greatest
                     mountaines
                     of
                     opposition
                     ,
                     c.
                     4.
                     
                     II.
                     
                       Uisions
                       of
                       judgement
                       .
                       c.
                    
                     5.
                     and
                     6.
                     
                     
                       The
                       vision
                       of
                       the
                       flying
                       Book
                       :
                       and
                       of
                       the
                       Ephah
                       .
                    
                     evidencing
                     ,
                     that
                     though
                     their
                     state
                     should
                     be
                     restored
                     ,
                     and
                     his
                     Church
                     established
                     amongst
                     them
                     :
                     yet
                     he
                     would
                     severely
                     punish
                     them
                     for
                     their
                     sins
                     at
                     present
                     ,
                     and
                     subvert
                     them
                     for
                     future
                     ,
                     if
                     their
                     sins
                     grow
                     riper
                     and
                     riper
                     ,
                     c.
                     5.
                     
                     III
                     
                       Uisions
                       of
                       comfort
                       ,
                       viz.
                    
                     c.
                     7.
                     
                     
                       The
                       vision
                       of
                       foure
                       chariots
                       
                       drawne
                       with
                       foure
                       sorts
                       of
                       Horses
                       ;
                       comming
                       out
                       from
                       between
                       two
                       Mountaines
                       of
                       brasse
                    
                     ;
                     Comfortably
                     pointing
                     out
                     ,
                     the
                     Provident
                     Decrees
                     and
                     Counsels
                     of
                     God
                     immoveable
                     as
                     mountaines
                     of
                     brasse
                     ,
                     and
                     directing
                     (
                     for
                     his
                     Providence
                     begins
                     and
                     steers
                     all
                     actions
                     )
                     the
                     course
                     and
                     motion
                     of
                     the
                     foure
                     chariots
                     and
                     horses
                     ,
                     (
                     viz.
                     either
                     the
                     foure
                     Empires
                     of
                     the
                     earth
                     ,
                     or
                     (
                     as
                     some
                     think
                     ,
                     )
                     the
                     Angels
                     of
                     heaven
                     ,
                     those
                     ministring
                     spirits
                     )
                     for
                     the
                     fulfilling
                     of
                     his
                     will
                     for
                     his
                     Churches
                     good
                     ;
                     so
                     that
                     whatsoever
                     his
                     Church
                     had
                     or
                     should
                     further
                     suffer
                     under
                     them
                     ,
                     was
                     foreseen
                     and
                     fore-appointed
                     by
                     God
                     himselfe
                     ;
                     a
                     great
                     comfort
                     to
                     them
                     that
                     were
                     come
                     out
                     of
                     captivity
                     already
                     ,
                     and
                     to
                     them
                     that
                     as
                     yet
                     remained
                     in
                     captivity
                     ,
                     c.
                     6.1
                     .
                     to
                     9.
                     8.
                     
                     
                       The
                       vision
                    
                     or
                     rather
                     
                       the
                       Historical
                       Praediction
                       of
                       what
                       was
                       really
                       to
                       be
                       done
                       ,
                       for
                       his
                       Churches
                       comfort
                       ,
                    
                     viz.
                     the
                     oblation
                     of
                     some
                     Iewes
                     which
                     came
                     from
                     Babylon
                     ,
                     as
                     Embassadors
                     from
                     the
                     rest
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     typical
                     coronation
                     of
                     Ioshuah
                     the
                     High-Priest
                     under
                     which
                     is
                     declared
                     the
                     Kingdome
                     and
                     Priest-hood
                     of
                     Christ
                     ,
                     together
                     with
                     the
                     re-establishment
                     and
                     enlargement
                     of
                     the
                     Church
                     under
                     him
                     ,
                     c.
                     6.9
                     .
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                    
                     .
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       His
                       Casuisticall
                       Sermon
                    
                     ,
                     wherein
                     the
                     Prophet
                     at
                     large
                     resolves
                     the
                     Iews
                     in
                     a
                     Case
                     of
                     conscience
                     touching
                     Fasting
                     ,
                     proposed
                     to
                     him
                     and
                     the
                     Priests
                     ,
                     with
                     many
                     other
                     Lessons
                     excellently
                     inserted
                     ,
                     c.
                     7.
                     and
                     c.
                     8.
                     
                  
                   
                     
                     IV.
                     
                       His
                       Propheticall
                       Sermon
                    
                     ,
                     foretelling
                     future
                     events
                     ,
                     c.
                     9.10
                     .
                     and
                     11.
                     wherein
                     are
                     principally
                     considerable
                     .
                     1.
                     
                     Threatnings
                     of
                     destruction
                     to
                     the
                     Churches
                     enemies
                     ,
                     Land
                     of
                     
                       Hadrach
                       ,
                       Damascus
                       ,
                       Hamath
                    
                     ,
                     &c.
                     c
                     9
                     ,
                     1.
                     to
                     7.
                     2.
                     
                     Promises
                     of
                     deliverance
                     and
                     protection
                     to
                     his
                     Church
                     against
                     al
                     their
                     enemies
                     ,
                     c.
                     9
                     ,
                     7
                     ,
                     8
                     3.
                     
                     Promissory
                     predictions
                     of
                     Christs
                     
                       Incarnation
                       ,
                       Kingdom
                    
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     Benefits
                     thereof
                     to
                     his
                     people
                     ,
                     from
                     whom
                     all
                     comfort
                     and
                     salvation
                     principally
                     flowes
                     ,
                     c.
                     9
                     ,
                     9.
                     to
                     c.
                     11
                     ,
                     1.
                     4.
                     
                     Denunciations
                     of
                     dreadfull
                     judgements
                     even
                     to
                     the
                     Jewes
                     themselves
                     ,
                     for
                     their
                     ingratefull
                     and
                     abominable
                     rejection
                     of
                     Christ
                     and
                     his
                     Gospel
                     ,
                     c.
                     11.
                     
                  
                   
                     V.
                     
                       His
                       Evangelicall
                       Sermon
                    
                     ,
                     peculiarly
                     belonging
                     to
                     the
                     Church
                     which
                     Christ
                     had
                     gathered
                     by
                     his
                     Gospel
                     ,
                     c.
                     12.13
                     ,
                     and
                     14.
                     wherein
                     are
                     laid
                     down
                     many
                     sweet
                     priviledges
                     of
                     the
                     Church
                     .
                     1.
                     
                     The
                     Churches
                     victory
                     over
                     all
                     her
                     enemies
                     ,
                     to
                     whom
                     shee
                     shall
                     be
                     
                       A
                       cup
                       of
                       trembling
                    
                     ,
                     A
                     
                       Burdensome
                       stone
                       ,
                       A
                       torch
                       of
                       fire
                       in
                       a
                       sheaf
                    
                     c.
                     12
                     ,
                     1.
                     to
                     7.
                     2.
                     
                     The
                     Churches
                     safety
                     and
                     protection
                     only
                     from
                     the
                     Lord.
                     c.
                     12
                     ,
                     7
                     ,
                     8.
                     3.
                     
                     The
                     Benefits
                     enwrapped
                     in
                     this
                     salvation
                     for
                     the
                     Church
                     ,
                     viz.
                     1
                     Heart-wounding
                     repentance
                     for
                     their
                     sinnes
                     that
                     pierced
                     Christ
                     ,
                     c.
                     12
                     ,
                     9.
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                    
                     ,
                     2
                     Remission
                     of
                     all
                     sins
                     to
                     the
                     penitent
                     by
                     faith
                     in
                     the
                     blood
                     of
                     Christ
                     ,
                     c.
                     13
                     ,
                     1.
                     3
                     
                     Purifying
                     of
                     the
                     Evangelicall
                     doctrine
                     from
                     all
                     pollution
                     and
                     desilement
                     ,
                     v.
                     
                     2.
                     to
                     7.
                     4.
                     
                     A
                     select
                     separation
                     of
                     the
                     remnant
                     appertaining
                     to
                     the
                     Election
                     from
                     the
                     drossy
                     multitude
                     ,
                     c.
                     13.7
                     .
                     to
                     c.
                     14
                     ,
                     1●
                     .
                     4.
                     
                     The
                     removall
                     of
                     all
                     the
                     Churches
                     ruined
                     enemies
                     ,
                     from
                     offending
                     the
                     Church
                     any
                     more
                     ,
                     or
                     su●duing
                     them
                     to
                     the
                     Church
                     ,
                     and
                     consecrating
                     all
                     their
                     wealth
                     to
                     holy
                     uses
                     ,
                     c.
                     14
                     ,
                     12
                     to
                     
                       th●
                       end
                       of
                       the
                       Book
                    
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Malachi
                   .
                
                 
                   MALACHI
                   .
                   he
                   prophecyed
                   after
                   the
                   Babylonish
                   captivity
                   ,
                   the
                   Temple
                   being
                   now
                   repaired
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   publike
                   worship
                   restored
                   ,
                   against
                   the
                   many
                   notorious
                   corruptions
                   remaining
                   among
                   them
                   ,
                   even
                   after
                   such
                   wonderfull
                   mercyes
                   .
                   He
                   is
                   the
                   last
                   Prophet
                   of
                   the
                   Old
                   Testament
                   ,
                   deciphering
                   out
                   in
                   the
                   close
                   of
                   his
                   Book
                   
                     Iohn
                     the
                     Baptist
                  
                   ,
                   the
                   first
                   Prophet
                   of
                   the
                   New
                   Testament
                   ,
                   Mal.
                   4.5
                   ,
                   6.
                   with
                   Luk.
                   16.16
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Scope
                     .
                     To
                     call
                     the
                     I●wes
                     ,
                     after
                     this
                     Reparation
                     of
                     Gods
                     Temple
                     and
                     worship
                     ,
                     to
                     Repentance
                     ,
                     from
                     their
                     many
                     and
                     foule
                     corruptions
                     ;
                     especially
                     the
                     comming
                     of
                     
                     Christ
                     the
                     Messiah
                     ,
                     the
                     great
                     Reformer
                     and
                     Refiner
                     of
                     his
                     Church
                     ,
                     being
                     so
                     neare
                     at
                     hand
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Generall
                     parts
                  
                   .
                   Besides
                   the
                   Title
                   ,
                   herein
                   are
                   wrapped
                   up
                   in
                   one
                   continued
                   Sermon
                   ,
                   these
                   principall
                   matters
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       A
                       Preface
                    
                     (
                     aggravating
                     the
                     ingratefull
                     wickednesse
                     of
                     the
                     Jewes
                     )
                     drawne
                     from
                     Gods
                     singular
                     love
                     in
                     Election
                     of
                     them
                     in
                     Iacob
                     ,
                     when
                     he
                     rejected
                     the
                     Edomites
                     in
                     
                       Esau.
                       c.
                    
                     1.2
                     .
                     to
                     6.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       A
                       sharp
                       contestation
                       against
                       the
                       People
                       ,
                       especially
                       the
                       Priest
                    
                     the
                     keepers
                     of
                     the
                     law
                     ,
                     for
                     their
                     corruptions
                     .
                     viz.
                     1.
                     
                     Against
                     their
                     contempt
                     and
                     pollution
                     of
                     the
                     worship
                     of
                     God
                     ,
                     which
                     Priests
                     should
                     have
                     vindicated
                     ,
                     by
                     office
                     c
                     1.6
                     .
                     
                       to
                       c.
                    
                     2.10
                     .
                     2.
                     
                     Against
                     their
                     corrupt
                     Marriages
                     ,
                     both
                     Marriages
                     with
                     infidels
                     ,
                     and
                     Polygamies
                     .
                     c.
                     2
                     10.
                     to
                     17.
                     3.
                     
                     Against
                     the
                     wickednesse
                     and
                     perversenesse
                     of
                     many
                     ,
                     that
                     made
                     a
                     mock
                     of
                     Gods
                     justice
                     and
                     judgements
                     ,
                     c.
                     2.17
                     .
                     
                       to
                       c.
                    
                     3.7
                     .
                     4.
                     
                     Against
                     their
                     Sacriledge
                     ,
                     in
                     robbing
                     God
                     of
                     Tiths
                     and
                     Offerings
                     &c.
                     c
                     3.7
                     .
                     to
                     13.
                     5.
                     
                     Against
                     their
                     Atheisticall
                     contempt
                     of
                     Gods
                     feare
                     ,
                     worship
                     ,
                     and
                     true
                     repentance
                     c.
                     3.15
                     .
                     to
                     4.5
                     .
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       An
                       earnest
                       invitation
                       of
                       all
                       to
                       repentance
                       ,
                    
                     that
                     so
                     they
                     might
                     be
                     prepared
                     ,
                     duely
                     to
                     entertaine
                     the
                     Messiah
                     ,
                     who
                     with
                     his
                     forerunner
                     Iohn
                     the
                     Baptist
                     ,
                     in
                     the
                     spirit
                     and
                     power
                     of
                     Elias
                     ,
                     was
                     now
                     immediately
                     to
                     
                     appeare
                     in
                     humane
                     flesh
                     ,
                     c.
                     4
                     ,
                     5
                     ,
                     6.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Thus
                     farre
                     of
                     the
                  
                   Old
                   Testament
                   ,
                   
                     wherein
                     the
                     New
                     Testament
                     is
                  
                   veiled
                   :
                   
                     Come
                     we
                     next
                     to
                     consider
                     of
                     the
                  
                   New
                   Testament
                   ,
                   
                     wherein
                     the
                     Old
                     Testament
                     is
                  
                   Revealed
                   .
                
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
           
             THE
             NEW-TESTAMENT
             .
             
          
           
             THE
             NEW
             TESTAMENT
             ,
             Revealing
             fully
             and
             cleerly
             the
             NEW
             COVENANT
             in
             Christ
             ,
             and
             the
             Spirituall
             administrations
             thereof
             ,
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             Books
             written
             since
             Christs
             manifestation
             in
             the
             flesh
             .
             In
             Reading
             of
             the
             Old-Testament
             ,
             the
             veile
             is
             untaken
             away
             :
             —
             But
             (
             in
             the
             NEW
             TESTAMENT
             )
             the
             veile
             is
             done
             away
             in
             Christ.
             
               And
               we
               all
               with
               open
               face
               ,
               beholding
               as
               in
               a
               glasse
               the
               glory
               of
               the
               Lord
               ,
               are
               changed
               into
               the
               same
               image
               from
               glory
               to
               glory
               .
            
             2
             Cor.
             3.14.18
             .
             in
             the
             Books
             of
             the
             
               Old
               Testament
            
             ,
             God
             describes
             to
             us
             ,
             
               The
               Old
               Covenant
               of
               Grace
            
             in
             Christ
             veiled
             under
             
             
               Promises
               ,
               Prophecies
            
             and
             Types
             :
             In
             the
             Books
             of
             the
             
               New
               Testament
            
             The
             Lord
             delineates
             to
             us
             
               The
               New
               Covenant
               of
               Grace
            
             in
             Christ
             
               unveyled
               ,
               actually
               exhibited
            
             and
             performed
             ;
             Christ
             being
             the
             body
             and
             substance
             of
             all
             those
             ancient
             Types
             and
             Shadowes
             ,
             Iohn
             1.17
             .
             Hebr.
             10.1
             .
             Coloss.
             2.17
             .
             The
             Center
             and
             meeting-place
             of
             all
             the
             Prophecyes
             and
             Promises
             ,
             Luke
             1.70
             .
             and
             24.27
             .
             Acts
             10.43
             .
             2
             Cor.
             1.20
             .
          
           
             The
             Bookes
             of
             the
             New
             Testament
             are
             either
             1
             Historicall
             .
             2
             Epistolicall
             ,
             or
             3
             Propheticall
             ,
             as
             further
             appears
             in
             the
             annexed
             Table
             .
             ☞
          
           
           
           
             
             
               I.
               
                 HISTORICAL
                 BOOKS
              
               .
            
             
               THE
               HISTORICAL
               BOOKS
               of
               the
               
                 New
                 Testament
              
               are
               such
               a●
               containe
               principally
               matters
               of
               Fact
               ,
               though
               matters
               of
               Faith
               and
               Doctrine
               are
               also
               interwoven
               .
               The
               Histories
               of
               the
               
                 New
                 Testament
              
               ,
               are
               I.
               
                 Of
                 Christ
                 the
                 head
              
               of
               the
               Church
               .
               II.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 Church
              
               of
               Christ
               ,
               his
               body
               .
            
             
               The
               HISTORY
               OF
               JESUS
               
               CHRIST
               himselfe
               is
               contained
               in
               the
               
                 Foure
                 Evangelists
              
               ,
               wherein
               Christs
               
                 Genealogy
                 ,
                 Nativity
                 ,
                 Life
                 ,
                 Doctrine
                 ,
                 Miracles
                 ,
                 Death
                 ,
                 Resurrection
              
               and
               Ascension
               ,
               are
               described
               .
               
                 Matthew
                 ,
                 Mark
                 ,
                 Luke
              
               and
               Iohn
               ,
               are
               usually
               called
               by
               way
               of
               emphasis
               ,
               
                 The
                 foure
                 Evangelists
              
               ,
               because
               they
               alone
               wrote
               the
               
                 Evangelicall
                 History
              
               of
               Iesus
               Christ.
               Matthew
               and
               Iohn
               were
               Apostles
               Matth.
               10.23
               .
               Mark
               3.18
               ,
               19.
               
               Mark
               and
               Luke
               were
               (
               though
               not
               Apostles
               ,
               yet
               )
               holy
               Apostolicall
               men
               ,
               the
               Apostles
               disciples
               ,
               Companions
               and
               assistants
               in
               the
               work
               of
               the
               Ministry
               .
            
             
               
                 The
                 generall
                 and
                 common
                 Scope
                 
                 of
                 these
                 foure
                 Histories
                 ,
              
               and
               of
               the
               writing
               of
               them
               is
               that
               which
               Iohn
               expresseth
               in
               particular
               ,
               viz.
               That
               we
               
                 might
                 believe
                 that
                 Iesus
                 is
                 the
                 Christ
                 ,
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 God
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 beleeving
                 we
                 might
                 have
                 life
                 through
                 his
                 name
                 ,
              
               John
               20.31
               .
               Particular
               ends
               ,
               and
               occasions
               may
               be
               noted
               in
               the
               particular
               considerations
               of
               them
               .
            
             
               
                 This
                 one
                 History
                 of
                 Iesus
                 Christ
                 ,
                 is
                 written
                 by
                 foure
                 severall
                 Penmen
                 .
                 The
                 Reasons
                 thereof
                 are
                 worthy
                 to
                 be
                 inquired
                 into
                 .
              
            
             
               Ancient
               writers
               (
               who
               much
               please
               themselves
               with
               the
               mysteriousnesse
               of
               Numbers
               )
               have
               excogitated
               divers
               ;
               Some
               fetch
               a
               Reason
               from
               the
               foure
               Rivers
               of
               Paradise
               .
               Origen
               .
               Some
               ,
               from
               the
               foure
               rings
               of
               the
               Ark
               wherein
               the
               the
               Tables
               of
               the
               law
               were
               contained
               ,
               Hieronym
               .
               Some
               from
               the
               foure
               chief
               ,
               Cardinall
               winds
               
                 Iraen
                 .
                 Advers
                 .
                 Haeres
              
               .
               l.
               3.
               c.
               11.
               
               Some
               thinke
               that
               the
               Gospel
               being
               to
               be
               dispersed
               to
               the
               whole
               world
               ,
               the
               world
               being
               divided
               into
               foure
               chiefe
               parts
               ,
               therefore
               there
               were
               foure-Evangelists
               ,
               and
               hence
               this
               History
               of
               Christ
               ,
               written
               by
               foure
               Evangelists
               ,
               
               is
               called
               
                 Sancta
                 Quadriga
                 Domini
              
               i.
               e.
               
                 The
                 Lords
                 chariot
                 drawn
                 of
                 foure
                 ,
                 wherein
                 Christ
                 rides
                 as
                 in
                 triumph
                 throughout
                 the
                 world
                 ,
                 to
                 spread
                 abroad
                 the
                 sweet
                 odour
                 of
                 his
                 knowledge
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               D.
               Aurel.
               Augustin
               .
               de
               consensu
               .
               Evangelistarum
               ,
               lib.
               1.
               c.
               5
               ,
               6
               ,
               7.
               
               Tom.
               4.
               
               
                 August
                 .
                 Expos.
                 in
                 Evang.
                 Ioan.
                 Tract
                 .
              
               36.
               
               
                 Iraen
                 .
                 quo
                 supra
              
               Most
               accommodate
               that
               of
               
                 the
                 four
              
               *
               
                 living
                 creatures
              
               ,
               Ezek
               ▪
               1.5
               .
               and
               Rev.
               4.6
               .
               to
               the
               number
               of
               the
               Evangelists
               ,
               but
               severally
               .
               Ambrose
               gives
               ,
               the
               Man
               to
               Matthew
               ,
               who
               begins
               with
               Christs
               pedigree
               ;
               The
               Lyon
               to
               Mark
               ,
               who
               begins
               his
               History
               of
               the
               Lyon-like
               ministry
               of
               
                 Iohn
                 Baptist
              
               ,
               that
               Evangelicall
               Elias
               ,
               Christs
               immediate
               forerunner
               ;
               The
               Calfe
               to
               Luke
               ,
               who
               begins
               ▪
               his
               Gospel
               with
               the
               Nativity
               of
               Christ
               ,
               and
               that
               
                 in
                 a
                 stable
              
               ,
               there
               being
               
                 no
                 room
                 for
                 him
                 in
                 the
                 Inne
              
               ;
               and
               the
               Eagle
               to
               Iohn
               ,
               who
               in
               the
               beginning
               of
               his
               Gospel
               soares
               aloft
               to
               that
               high
               mystery
               of
               Christs
               Divinity
               and
               Godhead
               ,
               
                 D.
                 Ambros.
                 Praefat.
                 in
                 Evang.
                 secund
                 .
                 Luc.
              
               But
               leave
               we
               these
               notions
               of
               wit
               ,
               which
               seem
               rather
               to
               be
               
                 similitudes
                 ,
                 allusions
              
               ,
               or
               Allegories
               ,
               used
               for
               illustration
               ,
               rather
               then
               
               Arguments
               for
               demonstration
               ,
               why
               these
               foure
               should
               write
               our
               blessed
               Saviours
               History
               .
            
             
               
                 We
                 may
                 rather
                 conceive
                 Christs
                 History
                 was
                 written
                 by
                 these
                 foure
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 Because
                 God
                 ,
                 who
                 appointed
                 many
                 witnesses
                 of
                 Christs
                 doctrine
                 and
                 works
                 ,
                 &c.
                 not
                 only
                 to
                 Ierusalem
                 ,
                 all
                 Iudea
                 ,
                 and
                 Samaria
                 ,
                 but
                 to
                 the
                 utmost
                 parts
                 of
                 the
                 earth
                 ,
                 Act.
                 1.8
                 .
                 &
                 10.39
                 ,
                 41
                 ,
                 24.
                 did
                 peculiarly
                 stirre
                 up
                 these
                 foure
                 persons
                 by
                 his
                 spirit
                 to
                 this
                 work
                 ;
                 for
                 holy
                 men
                 writ
                 who
                 were
                 moved
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   as
                   moved
                   by
                   the
                   Holy
                   Ghost
                   ,
                
                 2
                 Pet.
                 1.20
                 ,
                 21.
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 This
                 History
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 is
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 Histories
                 ,
                 of
                 greatest
                 worth
                 in
                 it selfe
                 ,
                 and
                 concernement
                 to
                 us
                 :
                 and
                 likely
                 to
                 be
                 most
                 opposed
                 by
                 the
                 Devil
                 ,
                 &
                 the
                 wicked
                 world
                 ,
                 &c.
                 therfore
                 God
                 (
                 that
                 requires
                 two
                 or
                 three
                 witnesses
                 ,
                 for
                 confirmation
                 of
                 things
                 ,
                 Deut.
                 17.
                 6.
                 
                 Heb.
                 10.28
                 .
                 )
                 makes
                 use
                 of
                 foure
                 witnesses
                 to
                 write
                 Christs
                 story
                 ,
                 that
                 by
                 the
                 writings
                 of
                 foure
                 ,
                 every
                 thing
                 might
                 he
                 established
                 ,
                 beyond
                 suspition
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 That
                 we
                 may
                 see
                 the
                 authority
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 depends
                 not
                 upon
                 the
                 Pen-men
                 thereof
                 ,
                 but
                 upon
                 the
                 Holy
                 Ghost
                 
                 that
                 indites
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 therefore
                 this
                 History
                 is
                 written
                 ,
                 not
                 only
                 by
                 Matthew
                 and
                 Iohn
                 ,
                 Apostles
                 ,
                 who
                 were
                 eye
                 and
                 eare-witnesses
                 of
                 what
                 Christ
                 did
                 and
                 spake
                 ;
                 but
                 also
                 by
                 Mark
                 and
                 Luke
                 the
                 Apostles
                 followers
                 ,
                 who
                 stedfastly
                 believed
                 the
                 Apostles
                 report
                 ,
                 Luk.
                 1.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 though
                 not●
                 eye-witnesses
                 themselves
                 ,
                 yet
                 were
                 incited
                 thereto
                 by
                 the
                 spirit
                 .
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 That
                 this
                 Gospel-History
                 might
                 be
                 compleated
                 ,
                 one
                 explaining
                 what
                 another
                 left
                 obscure
                 ,
                 for
                 matter
                 or
                 order
                 ,
                 one
                 supplying
                 what
                 another
                 had
                 omitted
                 ,
                 As
                 ,
                 Matthew
                 ,
                 who
                 wrote
                 first
                 ,
                 (
                 as
                 Pareus
                 thinks
                 
                   Proem
                   .
                   in
                   Matth.
                   p.
                
                 599.
                 )
                 viz.
                 in
                 the
                 ninth
                 yeare
                 after
                 Christs
                 ascension
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 most
                 part
                 relates
                 the
                 things
                 done
                 ,
                 but
                 seldome
                 insists
                 upon
                 the
                 order
                 of
                 doing
                 them
                 .
                 Mark
                 who
                 wrote
                 next
                 ,
                 viz.
                 in
                 the
                 tenth
                 yeare
                 after
                 Christs
                 ascension
                 ,
                 briefly
                 relates
                 what
                 Matthew
                 did
                 more
                 largely
                 ,
                 (
                 Mark
                 being
                 as
                 an
                 Abstract
                 ,
                 or
                 Epitome
                 of
                 Matthew
                 ,
                 )
                 but
                 withall
                 he
                 more
                 insists
                 upon
                 the
                 ordering
                 and
                 timing
                 of
                 things
                 done
                 .
                 Luke
                 ,
                 who
                 wrote
                 in
                 the
                 fifteenth
                 year
                 ,
                 after
                 Christs
                 ascension
                 ,
                 having
                 seen
                 others
                 writings
                 ,
                 propounds
                 to
                 himselfe
                 
                 to
                 write
                 of
                 things
                 from
                 the
                 very
                 first
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 methodically
                 ;
                 
                   It
                   seemed
                   good
                   to
                   me
                   also
                   ,
                   having
                   had
                   perfect
                   understanding
                   of
                   things
                   ,
                   from
                   the
                   very
                   first
                   ,
                   to
                   write
                   unto
                   thee
                   in
                   Order
                   ,
                
                 Luke
                 1.3
                 .
                 In
                 many
                 things
                 he
                 shews
                 the
                 order
                 of
                 things
                 by
                 circumstances
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 most
                 agrees
                 with
                 Mark
                 ,
                 whence
                 Tertullian
                 cals
                 Lukes
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 
                   Digestum
                   Historiae
                   Evangelicae
                
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   An
                   orderly
                   digesting
                   of
                   the
                   Evangelicall
                   Story
                
                 :
                 but
                 sometimes
                 things
                 manifest
                 in
                 Matthew
                 and
                 Mark
                 ,
                 he
                 puts
                 not
                 in
                 their
                 own
                 place
                 .
                 Iohn
                 who
                 wrote
                 his
                 Gospel
                 in
                 the
                 two
                 and
                 thirtieth
                 yeare
                 after
                 Christs
                 ascension
                 ,
                 professedly
                 ,
                 (
                 as
                 
                   Eusebius
                   in
                   hist.
                   Eccles.
                
                 testifies
                 )
                 addes
                 the
                 Acts
                 of
                 Christ
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 yeare
                 of
                 his
                 Ministry
                 ,
                 omitted
                 by
                 the
                 rest
                 .
                 And
                 in
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 his
                 History
                 ,
                 he
                 not
                 only
                 insists
                 much
                 upon
                 Christs
                 doctrine
                 not
                 formerly
                 spoken
                 to
                 ,
                 but
                 also
                 expressely
                 notes
                 the
                 Feasts
                 of
                 certaine
                 distinct
                 years
                 ,
                 incident
                 in
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 Christs
                 ministry
                 ,
                 intimating
                 that
                 the
                 Evangelicall
                 History
                 penned
                 by
                 others
                 ,
                 should
                 be
                 distributed
                 into
                 certain
                 years
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 those
                 Feasts
                 .
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 Finally
                 ,
                 though
                 the
                 Holy
                 Ghost
                 
                 could
                 by
                 one
                 and
                 the
                 same
                 contexture
                 of
                 words
                 ,
                 have
                 given
                 us
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 Christs
                 words
                 and
                 deeds
                 ,
                 (
                 as
                 Gerson
                 noteth
                 )
                 yet
                 not
                 without
                 some
                 great
                 mystery
                 therein
                 ,
                 he
                 pleased
                 ,
                 
                   sub
                   quadam
                   concordissima
                   ,
                   (
                   si
                   it
                   a
                   dicipossit
                   )
                   dissonantia
                
                 —
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   under
                   a
                   certain
                   Harmonious
                   &
                   most
                   concording
                   dissonancy
                   ,
                   (
                   if
                   we
                   may
                   so
                   speake
                   )
                   to
                   excite
                   the
                   mindes
                   of
                   the
                   faithfull
                   ,
                   to
                   the
                   more
                   humble
                   and
                   vigilant
                   investigation
                   of
                   the
                   truth
                   ;
                   that
                   so
                   it
                   might
                   appear
                   ,
                
                 the
                 foure
                 Evangelists
                 )
                 
                   did
                   not
                   speak
                   by
                   mutuall
                
                 Conspiration
                 ,
                 
                   but
                   by
                   divine
                
                 Inspiration
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Matthew
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 GOSPEL
                 ACCORDING
                 TO
                 MATTHEW
                 .
                 The
                 English
                 word
                 [
                 Gospel
                 ]
                 comes
                 from
                 the
                 old
                 Saxon
                 word
                 ,
                 [
                 Godspel
                 ]
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   Good
                   speech
                
                 ▪
                 The
                 Greek
                 word
                 signifies
                 Good-tydings
                 ,
                 or
                 a
                 Good-Message
                 :
                 This
                 word
                 Gospel
                 in
                 New
                 Testament
                 ,
                 is
                 of
                 severall
                 acceptations
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 used
                 .
              
               
                 
                 
                   1.
                   
                   
                     In
                     bad
                     sense
                  
                   for
                   a
                   false
                   pretended
                   Gospel
                   ,
                   Gal.
                   1.6
                   ,
                   7.
                   
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   
                     In
                     good
                     sense
                  
                   and
                   that
                   either
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Properly
                       ,
                       and
                       so
                       the
                       word
                       is
                       used
                       ,
                       either
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           Generally
                           ,
                           For
                           the
                           Doctrine
                           or
                           Promise
                           of
                           salvation
                           freely
                           by
                           Christ
                           to
                           all
                           that
                           will
                           believe
                           .
                           Thus
                           the
                           Gospel
                           is
                           everlasting
                           ,
                           Rev.
                           14.6
                           .
                           one
                           and
                           the
                           same
                           under
                           Old
                           and
                           New
                           Testament
                           ,
                           Gal.
                           3.8
                           .
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           Specially
                           ,
                           for
                           the
                           Doctrine
                           of
                           grace
                           in
                           accomplishing
                           the
                           Promise
                           by
                           Christ
                           exhibited
                           ,
                           this
                           is
                           peculiar
                           to
                           the
                           New
                           Testament
                           Rom.
                           1.1.2
                           .
                           2
                           Cor.
                           4.4
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       Metonymically
                       .
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           For
                           the
                           Preaching
                           ,
                           or
                           Ministery
                           of
                           the
                           Gospel
                           ,
                           1
                           Cor.
                           9.12.14
                           .
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           For
                           the
                           
                             History
                             of
                             Christ
                          
                           ,
                           who
                           is
                           the
                           prime
                           Subject
                           of
                           the
                           Gospel
                           .
                           Thus
                           the
                           Books
                           of
                           
                             the
                             four
                             Evangelists
                          
                           are
                           called
                           Gospells
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 This
                 Book
                 is
                 called
                 
                   The
                   Gospel
                   according
                   to
                   Mat.
                
                 because
                 he
                 was
                 Penman
                 of
                 it
                 .
                 Matthew
                 ,
                 an
                 Hebr.
                 name
                 ,
                 in
                 Syriack
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Mattha
                 ,
                 some
                 derive
                 it
                 from
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Mas.
                 i.
                 e.
                 Tribute
                 ,
                 others
                 from
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Mathach
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   to
                   extend
                   ,
                   to
                   explaine
                
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 
                 So
                 that
                 Matthew
                 should
                 sound
                 as
                 much
                 as
                 ,
                 
                   An
                   explainer
                
                 ,
                 viz.
                 of
                 Scripture
                 .
                 But
                 rather
                 it
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 deriv'd
                 from
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Nathan
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   he
                   hath
                   given
                   or
                   bestowed
                
                 ,
                 whence
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 
                   Matthan
                   ,
                   A
                   gift
                
                 ;
                 so
                 Matthew
                 no●es
                 a
                 Gift
                 ,
                 viz.
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 
                   vid.
                   Greg.
                   Gregori
                   Lexicon
                   sanctum
                   ,
                   Sect.
                
                 858.
                 p.
                 641.
                 
                 Matthew
                 was
                 also
                 surnamed
                 Levi
                 ,
                 in
                 Hebr.
                 
                   i.
                   e.
                   associated
                
                 ,
                 Mark.
                 2.14
                 .
                 Luk.
                 5.29
                 .
                 so
                 he
                 had
                 two
                 names
                 .
                 He
                 was
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Alpheus
                 Mark.
                 2.14
                 .
                 By
                 profession
                 a
                 publicane
                 ,
                 sitting
                 at
                 the
                 Receipt
                 of
                 Custome
                 ,
                 Luk.
                 5.27
                 .
                 Mark.
                 2.14
                 .
                 with
                 Matth.
                 9.9
                 .
                 his
                 calling
                 was
                 very
                 infamous
                 among
                 the
                 Jews
                 ,
                 yet
                 Christ
                 cals
                 him
                 from
                 the
                 Receipt
                 of
                 custome
                 ,
                 to
                 be
                 a
                 disciple
                 ,
                 who
                 presently
                 obeyed
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 Christ
                 a
                 
                   great
                   feast
                
                 ,
                 Luk.
                 5.27
                 ,
                 28.29
                 .
                 Mark
                 2.14
                 ,
                 15.
                 
                 Matth.
                 9.9
                 ,
                 10.
                 
                 He
                 was
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 twelve
                 Apostles
                 .
                 Matth.
                 10.3
                 .
                 Penman
                 of
                 this
                 book
                 ,
                 Authority
                 whereof
                 was
                 never
                 questioned
                 by
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 Christ.
                 He
                 is
                 called
                 ,
                 
                   A
                   most
                   faithfull
                   Commentator
                   of
                   the
                   Gospel
                   ,
                
                 by
                 
                   Tertul.
                   lib.
                   de
                   carne
                   Christi
                
                 ,
                 c.
                 22.
                 p.
                 310.
                 
                   edit
                   Franeher
                
                 ,
                 1597.
                 
                 He
                 preached
                 the
                 Gospel
                 to
                 sinners
                 ,
                 not
                 only
                 by
                 word
                 ,
                 but
                 by
                 exemplary
                 correcting
                 
                 his
                 own
                 life
                 ▪
                 
                   Chrysost.
                   in
                   Praesat
                   .
                   oper
                   .
                   imperfect
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Matthew
                   wrote
                
                 his
                 Gospel
                 as
                 some
                 think
                 in
                 the
                 one
                 and
                 twentieth
                 yeare
                 after
                 Christs
                 ascension
                 ,
                 Iraen
                 .
                 l.
                 3.
                 c.
                 1.
                 
                 Or
                 the
                 fifteenth
                 yeare
                 ,
                 As
                 
                   Nicephorus
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 45.
                 
                 Or
                 the
                 ninth
                 yeare
                 after
                 Christs
                 ascension
                 ,
                 as
                 
                   Pareus
                   Proem
                   .
                   in
                   Matth.
                   p.
                
                 599.
                 and
                 
                   Alsted
                   in
                   Praecog
                   .
                   Theol
                   .
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 123.
                 p.
                 710
              
               
                 Occasion
                 of
                 
                   Matthews
                   Gospel
                
                 ,
                 some
                 declare
                 thus
                 .
                 Matthew
                 after
                 he
                 had
                 first
                 preached
                 to
                 the
                 Hebrews
                 ,
                 and
                 thence
                 was
                 to
                 go
                 to
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 ,
                 he
                 committed
                 his
                 Gospel
                 to
                 writing
                 ;
                 that
                 so
                 he
                 might
                 supply
                 and
                 compensate
                 his
                 absence
                 by
                 his
                 writing
                 ,
                 left
                 behind
                 with
                 them
                 ,
                 
                   Euseb.
                   Hist.
                   Eccles.
                   l.
                
                 3
                 ,
                 c.
                 24.
                 and
                 out
                 of
                 him
                 
                   Nicephorus
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 45
              
               
                 
                   The
                   language
                
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 Matthew
                 wrote
                 ,
                 some
                 thinke
                 was
                 Hebrew
                 ;
                 tha●
                 he
                 being
                 an
                 Hebrew
                 ,
                 wrote
                 in
                 Hebrew
                 to
                 the
                 Hebrews
                 ,
                 divers
                 Ancient
                 writers
                 embrace
                 this
                 opinion
                 ,
                 
                   Iraen
                   .
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Athan●s
                   .
                   in
                   Synops.
                   p.
                
                 141.
                 
                 
                   Euseb.
                   Hist.
                   Eccles.
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 24.
                 
                 
                   Nazianz.
                   in
                   Carm.
                   Hieron
                   .
                   Praefat.
                   in
                
                 4.
                 
                 
                   Evang.
                   ad
                   Damas.
                   &
                   in
                   c.
                
                 11.
                 
                 
                   Hoseae
                   .
                   August
                   de
                   consens
                   ▪
                   
                   Evang.
                   l.
                
                 1.
                 c.
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Nicephor
                   .
                   l.
                
                 4.
                 c.
                 32.
                 
                 And
                 that
                 it
                 was
                 translated
                 into
                 Greek
                 ,
                 By
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Evangelist
                 ,
                 as
                 some
                 ;
                 By
                 Iames
                 ,
                 as
                 o●hers
                 ;
                 By
                 Luke
                 and
                 Paul
                 ,
                 as
                 others
                 ;
                 By
                 Mark
                 ,
                 as
                 o●hers
                 are
                 of
                 opinion
                 .
                 Some
                 thinke
                 he
                 wrote
                 not
                 in
                 pure
                 Hebrew
                 ,
                 but
                 in
                 Syriack
                 ,
                 being
                 the
                 Dialect
                 then
                 most
                 commonly
                 used
                 ,
                 
                   Alsted
                   .
                   Praecog
                   .
                   Theol.
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 123.
                 
                 But
                 others
                 Judge
                 ,
                 Matthew
                 wrote
                 not
                 his
                 Gospel
                 originally
                 in
                 Hebrew
                 ,
                 but
                 in
                 Greek
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 upon
                 these
                 grounds
                 ▪
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 Hebrew
                 Gospel
                 of
                 Munsterus
                 his
                 Edition
                 is
                 such
                 for
                 language
                 ,
                 as
                 it
                 is
                 improbable
                 it
                 should
                 be
                 written
                 by
                 Matthew
                 ,
                 or
                 any
                 other
                 skilfull
                 in
                 the
                 Hebrew
                 tongue
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 same
                 Authors
                 who
                 report
                 Matthew
                 ,
                 to
                 have
                 writ
                 in
                 Hebrew
                 ,
                 acknowledge
                 the
                 Greek
                 Gospel
                 of
                 Matthew
                 in
                 the
                 Apostles
                 times
                 ,
                 to
                 be
                 commended
                 to
                 the
                 Church
                 as
                 Authentick
                 .
                 
                   Iren.
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 39.
                 
                 
                   Hieron
                   .
                   in
                   Catal
                   .
                   illustr
                   .
                   Euseb.
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 34.
                 and
                 39.
                 and
                 l.
                 5.
                 c.
                 10.
                 &c.
                 3.
                 
                 The
                 other
                 Apostles
                 originally
                 wrote
                 in
                 the
                 Greek
                 tongue
                 ,
                 (
                 as
                 then
                 most
                 common
                 )
                 and
                 that
                 not
                 only
                 promiscuously
                 to
                 all
                 both
                 Jewes
                 and
                 Gentiles
                 ,
                 but
                 peculiarly
                 
                 when
                 they
                 wrote
                 to
                 the
                 Iewes
                 .
                 
                   As
                   Author
                   of
                   the
                   Epistle
                   to
                   Hebrews
                   ,
                   Peter
                   ,
                   Iames.
                
                 And
                 their
                 Apostolicall
                 function
                 required
                 them
                 to
                 write
                 in
                 the
                 most
                 knowne
                 tongue
                 ,
                 as
                 most
                 to
                 edifying
                 .
                 4.
                 
                 Matthew's
                 stile
                 plainly
                 agrees
                 with
                 Mark
                 's
                 ,
                 differs
                 not
                 much
                 from
                 Iohn's
                 ,
                 and
                 though
                 therein
                 there
                 be
                 some
                 Hebraismes
                 ,
                 so
                 there
                 are
                 in
                 most
                 books
                 of
                 the
                 
                   New
                   Testament
                
                 ▪
                 5.
                 
                 Matthew
                 interprets
                 Hebrew
                 names
                 by
                 Greek
                 ,
                 therefore
                 he
                 wrote
                 in
                 Greek
                 not
                 in
                 Hebrew
                 ,
                 
                   e.
                   g.
                   Immanuel
                
                 Matth.
                 1.23
                 .
                 Golgotha
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 27.33
                 .
                 
                   Eli
                   Eli
                   lamasabachtani
                   ,
                   Matth.
                
                 27.46
                 .
                 6.
                 
                 None
                 can
                 certainly
                 tell
                 who
                 should
                 be
                 the
                 Author
                 of
                 the
                 
                   Greek
                   version
                
                 ,
                 if
                 Matthew
                 wrote
                 in
                 Hebrew
                 .
                 And
                 this
                 opinion
                 tends
                 to
                 destroy
                 the
                 credit
                 and
                 authority
                 of
                 Matthew's
                 Gospel
                 in
                 Greek
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Stope
                   ,
                   To
                   evidence
                   to
                   all
                   ,
                   but
                   especially
                   to
                   the
                   beleeving
                   Hebrews
                   ,
                   with
                   whom
                   he
                   had
                   preached
                   ,
                   that
                   this
                   Iesus
                   Christ
                   ,
                   was
                   the
                   true
                   Messiah
                   ;
                   the
                   true
                   promised
                   seed
                   of
                
                 David
                 and
                 Abraham
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 1.1
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 .
                 This
                 History
                 describes
                 .
              
               
                 
                 
                   I.
                   
                     Christs
                     Birth
                  
                   ,
                   and
                   there
                   ,
                   His
                   Genealogy
                   ,
                   Conception
                   ,
                   Nativity
                   ,
                   Place
                   where
                   ,
                   and
                   some
                   Consequents
                   thereupon
                   ,
                   c.
                   1.2
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     Christs
                     Life
                  
                   ,
                   wherein
                   are
                   deciphered
                   ,
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       The
                       things
                       done
                       in
                       reference
                       to
                       Christs
                       threefold
                       office
                       .
                       viz.
                       I.
                       Priestly
                       ;
                       His
                       inauguration
                       by
                       Iohns
                       publike
                       promulgation
                       ,
                       c.
                       3.
                       
                       II.
                       Kingly
                       ,
                       he
                       combates
                       with
                       Sathan
                       and
                       conquers
                       him
                       ,
                       c.
                       4.
                       
                       III.
                       Propheticall
                       ,
                       which
                       he
                       executed
                       .
                       1.
                       
                       Alone
                       by
                       himselfe
                       ,
                       and
                       that
                       either
                       ,
                       
                         As
                         a
                         Prophet
                         only
                      
                       ,
                       teaching
                       ,
                       1
                       The
                       Causes
                       of
                       Godlinesse
                       ,
                       c.
                       5.
                       2
                       
                       The
                       Duties
                       of
                       Godlinesse
                       ,
                       c.
                       6.
                       3
                       
                       The
                       impediments
                       unto
                       Godlinesse
                       ,
                       c.
                       7.
                       
                       
                         As
                         a
                         Prophet
                         and
                         King
                         joyntly
                         ,
                      
                       doing
                       miracles
                       ,
                       c.
                       8.
                       and
                       9.
                       2.
                       
                       Together
                       with
                       ,
                       or
                       by
                       his
                       Apostles
                       in
                       their
                       mjnistry
                       ,
                       c.
                       10.
                       
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       The
                       authority
                       and
                       esteem
                       that
                       Christ
                       had
                       .
                       1.
                       
                       With
                       his
                       owne
                       ,
                       c.
                       11.
                       2.
                       
                       With
                       others
                       ,
                       both
                       1
                       Ecclesiasticall
                       Persons
                       who
                       conferred
                       with
                       him
                       ,
                       that
                       they
                       might
                       ensna●e
                       him
                       and
                       accuse
                       him
                       ,
                       c.
                       12.
                       2
                       
                       And
                       Politicall
                       ,
                       whether
                       with
                       the
                       people
                       ,
                       who
                       flocked
                       no
                       heare
                       him
                       preach
                       .
                       c.
                       13.
                       
                       Or
                       with
                       the
                       Magistrate
                       ,
                       Herods
                       opinion
                       of
                       him
                       ,
                       c.
                       14.
                       
                    
                  
                
                 
                   III.
                   
                     Christs
                     death
                  
                   .
                   Set
                   forth
                   by
                   the
                   
                     Antecedents
                     ,
                     Manner
                  
                   ,
                   and
                   Consequents
                   of
                   it
                   .
                   
                     
                       I.
                       
                         By
                         the
                         Antecedents
                         of
                         it
                      
                       ,
                       comprised
                       in
                       his
                       journey
                       to
                       Ierusalem
                       ,
                       wherein
                       no●e
                       ,
                       
                         
                         
                           1.
                           
                           Whence
                           he
                           went
                           ,
                           the
                           terme
                           from
                           which
                           ,
                           viz.
                           From
                           
                             Galilee
                             ,
                             c.
                          
                           15.
                           compared
                           with
                           c.
                           19.
                           1.
                           while
                           Christ
                           was
                           in
                           Galilee
                           .
                           1.
                           
                           He
                           answers
                           the
                           Pharisees
                           and
                           Sadduces
                           about
                           a
                           signe
                           ,
                           c.
                           16.
                           2.
                           
                           He
                           is
                           transfigured
                           to
                           encourage
                           both
                           himselfe
                           and
                           his
                           Apostles
                           against
                           his
                           passion
                           ,
                           c.
                           17.
                           3.
                           
                           He
                           preacheth
                           humility
                           and
                           love
                           to
                           his
                           disciples
                           ,
                           c.
                           18.
                           
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           What
                           way
                           he
                           went
                           ,
                           viz.
                           through
                           the
                           coasts
                           of
                           Iudea
                           ,
                           where
                           are
                           recorded
                           his
                           words
                           and
                           deeds
                           ,
                           c.
                           19.
                           and
                           20.
                           
                        
                         
                           3.
                           
                           Whither
                           he
                           went
                           ,
                           the
                           terme
                           to
                           which
                           ,
                           viz.
                           To
                           Ierusalem
                           .
                           Here
                           are
                           declared
                           ,
                           1.
                           
                           How
                           he
                           was
                           entertained
                           at
                           
                             Ierusalem
                             ,
                             c.
                          
                           21.
                           2.
                           
                           What
                           he
                           did
                           there
                           ,
                           viz.
                           He
                           disputed
                           with
                           Sadduces
                           and
                           
                             Pharisees
                             ,
                             c.
                          
                           22.
                           
                           Accused
                           the
                           Pharisees
                           of
                           Hypocrisy
                           ,
                           &c.
                           c.
                           23.
                           
                           Foretold
                           Ierusalems
                           destruction
                           ,
                           and
                           the
                           signes
                           of
                           his
                           comming
                           to
                           Judgement
                           ,
                           c.
                           24.
                           
                           Admonisheth
                           all
                           to
                           prepare
                           for
                           the
                           last
                           judgement
                           ,
                           and
                           describeth
                           it
                           .
                           c.
                           25.
                           
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       II.
                       
                         By
                         the
                         manner
                         of
                         his
                         death
                         ,
                      
                       where
                       note
                       1.
                       
                       The
                       Preface
                       ,
                       or
                       Harbenger
                       of
                       it
                       ,
                       his
                       Agony
                       in
                       the
                       Garden
                       ,
                       Iudas
                       his
                       Treachery
                       ,
                       &c.
                       c.
                       26.
                       2.
                       
                       The
                       Progresse
                       made
                       to
                       bring
                       him
                       to
                       his
                       end
                       ,
                       both
                       in
                       the
                       Ecclesiasticall
                       and
                       Civil
                       consistory
                       .
                       c.
                       27.
                       3.
                       
                       The
                       Consummation
                       of
                       his
                       passion
                       ,
                       c.
                       27.
                       
                    
                     
                       III.
                       
                         By
                         the
                         Consequents
                         of
                         his
                         death
                         ,
                         c.
                      
                       28.
                       
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 Mark.
                 
              
               
                 THE
                 GOSPEL
                 ACCORDING
                 TO
                 MARK
                 .
                 So
                 denominated
                 from
                 Mark
                 the
                 Penman
                 of
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 MARK
                 ,
                 some
                 derive
                 from
                 the
                 Hebr.
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Marak
                 .
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   He
                   hath
                   polished
                
                 ,
                 &c.
                 As
                 Hebrewes
                 .
                 Others
                 rather
                 take
                 it
                 to
                 be
                 a
                 Latine
                 name
                 (
                 made
                 a
                 Denizon
                 in
                 the
                 Greek
                 tongue
                 )
                 and
                 derived
                 from
                 the
                 moneth
                 of
                 March
                 ,
                 because
                 Mark
                 was
                 borne
                 in
                 that
                 moneth
                 ,
                 it
                 being
                 usuall
                 so
                 to
                 denominate
                 men
                 that
                 were
                 born
                 in
                 
                   March
                   ,
                   Probus
                
                 .
                 He
                 was
                 also
                 called
                 Iohn
                 Act.
                 12.12
                 .
                 &
                 15.37
                 .
                 
                   viz.
                   Iohn
                   Mark.
                
                 His
                 Father
                 seemes
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 mentioned
                 in
                 Scripture
                 .
                 His
                 mother
                 was
                 that
                 Mary
                 in
                 whose
                 house
                 they
                 were
                 praying
                 for
                 Peter
                 ,
                 when
                 Peter
                 brought
                 out
                 of
                 prison
                 by
                 the
                 Angel
                 ,
                 came
                 and
                 knockt
                 at
                 the
                 doore
                 ,
                 Act.
                 12.12
                 .
                 He
                 was
                 cousin
                 to
                 
                   Barnabas
                   ,
                   his
                   Sisters
                   Son
                
                 ,
                 Col.
                 4.10
                 .
                 Though
                 he
                 was
                 not
                 an
                 Apostle
                 ,
                 yet
                 he
                 was
                 an
                 Apostolicall
                 man.
                 Some
                 think
                 he
                 was
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 70
                 Disciples
                 .
                 Hieronym
                 ▪
                 
                 If
                 so
                 ,
                 he
                 both
                 heard
                 and
                 saw
                 Christ.
                 However
                 he
                 was
                 the
                 follower
                 of
                 Paul
                 and
                 Barnabas
                 ,
                 Act.
                 12.25
                 .
                 And
                 they
                 
                   had
                   him
                   to
                   their
                   Minister
                
                 ,
                 Act.
                 13.5
                 .
                 Afterwards
                 when
                 there
                 arose
                 a
                 sharp
                 controversie
                 betwixt
                 Paul
                 and
                 Barnabas
                 about
                 
                   Mark
                   ;
                   Paul
                
                 and
                 Barnabas
                 departed
                 a
                 sunder
                 ,
                 and
                 Barnabas
                 took
                 Mark
                 along
                 with
                 him
                 to
                 Cyprus
                 ,
                 Act.
                 15.37
                 ,
                 38
                 ,
                 39.
                 
                 And
                 after
                 this
                 (
                 as
                 some
                 thinke
                 )
                 Mark
                 lived
                 with
                 Peter
                 ,
                 who
                 cals
                 him
                 Marcus
                 my
                 sonne
                 ,
                 1
                 Pet.
                 5.13
                 .
                 From
                 whose
                 mouth
                 he
                 wrote
                 the
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 as
                 some
                 think
                 ,
                 yet
                 others
                 are
                 of
                 opinion
                 ,
                 there
                 were
                 two
                 
                   Marks
                   ,
                   Vid
                   ▪
                   Iacob
                   .
                   Laurent
                   .
                   in
                
                 1
                 Pet.
                 5.13
                 .
                 Irenaeus
                 stiles
                 him
                 
                   The
                   Disciple
                   and
                   interpreter
                   of
                   Peter
                   .
                
                 Iraen
                 .
                 advers
                 .
                 Heraes
                 .
                 l.
                 3.
                 c.
                 1.
                 p.
                 229.
                 edit
                 .
                 Colon.
                 1596.
                 
              
               
                 Mark
                 wrote
                 his
                 Gospel
                 two
                 yeares
                 after
                 Matthew
                 ,
                 as
                 some
                 think
                 ,
                 
                   vid.
                   Annotat
                   .
                   in
                   Irenaeum
                   quo
                   supr
                   .
                   p.
                
                 229.230
                 .
                 And
                 he
                 wrote
                 it
                 upon
                 occasion
                 of
                 the
                 request
                 of
                 some
                 Brethren
                 at
                 Rome
                 ,
                 as
                 some
                 conceive
                 .
                 
                   Epiphan
                   Haeres
                
                 .
                 51.
                 
                 
                   Euseb.
                   Eccles.
                   Hist.
                   l.
                
                 6.
                 c.
                 11.
                 
                   &
                   l.
                
                 1.
                 c.
                 15.
                 
                 
                   Niceph.
                   lib.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 15.
                 
                 
                   Hieron
                   .
                   Catal.
                   illust
                
                 .
                 That
                 conceit
                 of
                 Baronius
                 that
                 he
                 
                 wrote
                 his
                 Gospel
                 in
                 Latin
                 ,
                 is
                 rejected
                 as
                 groundlesse
                 .
                 
                   Gerh.
                   loc
                   .
                   com
                   .
                   de
                   Sac.
                   Script
                   .
                   exeg
                   .
                   c.
                
                 9.
                 
                 §
                 .
                 244.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Scope
                   ;
                   To
                   describe
                   the
                   true
                   Christ
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   prove
                   that
                   Iesus
                   is
                   the
                   Christ.
                
                 And
                 this
                 he
                 doth
                 compendiously
                 ,
                 as
                 Matthew
                 had
                 done
                 before
                 more
                 Copiously
                 .
                 He
                 also
                 notes
                 the
                 Series
                 and
                 Order
                 of
                 the
                 History
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 .
                 An
                 Historicall
                 Narration
                 of
                 Christs
                 life
                 ,
                 and
                 death
                 is
                 orderly
                 and
                 compendiously
                 laid
                 down
                 ;
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       Christs
                       life
                       and
                       conversation
                    
                     is
                     described
                     ,
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         By
                         his
                         fore-runner
                         
                           Iohn
                           Baptist
                        
                         ,
                         c.
                         1.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         By
                         things
                         done
                         by
                         Iesus
                         Christ
                         ,
                         either
                         ,
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             
                               Before
                               his
                               transfiguration
                            
                             ;
                             as
                             the
                             Oracles
                             which
                             he
                             preached
                             ,
                             and
                             the
                             Miracles
                             which
                             he
                             wrought
                             ;
                             The
                             splendour
                             and
                             glory
                             of
                             both
                             which
                             are
                             much
                             augmented
                             ,
                             both
                             by
                             men
                             ,
                             and
                             by
                             God.
                             I.
                             
                               By
                               men
                            
                             ,
                             and
                             those
                             both
                             Christs
                             friends
                             ,
                             and
                             Christs
                             Foes
                             ,
                             1.
                             
                             Christs
                             friends
                             ,
                             as
                             By
                             Matthewes
                             calling
                             to
                             the
                             Apostleship
                             ,
                             c.
                             2.
                             
                             By
                             the
                             12
                             Apostles
                             being
                             sent
                             forth
                             to
                             preach
                             ,
                             c.
                             3.
                             
                             By
                             the
                             peoples
                             flocking
                             together
                             to
                             heare
                             Christs
                             Doctrine
                             ,
                             c.
                             4.5
                             .
                             2.
                             
                             
                             Christs
                             foes
                             ,
                             viz
                             ,
                             By
                             Christs
                             own
                             Country-men
                             that
                             despised
                             him
                             ,
                             c.
                             6.
                             
                             By
                             the
                             Scribes
                             and
                             Pharisees
                             ,
                             cavilling
                             at
                             him
                             and
                             his
                             Disciples
                             ,
                             c.
                             7.8
                             .
                             II.
                             
                               By
                               God
                            
                             ,
                             in
                             his
                             trans-figuration
                             ,
                             c.
                             9.
                             
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             
                               In
                               his
                               Trans-figuration
                            
                             ,
                             c.
                             9.
                             
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             
                               After
                               his
                               trans-figuration
                            
                             ,
                             where
                             we
                             have
                             Christs
                             acts
                             .
                             
                               
                                 1.
                                 
                                 Before
                                 his
                                 entring
                                 into
                                 the
                                 Holy
                                 City
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 10.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 2.
                                 
                                 At
                                 his
                                 entring
                                 into
                                 Ierusalem
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 11.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 3.
                                 
                                 After
                                 his
                                 entrance
                                 ,
                                 his
                                 1.
                                 
                                 Disputation
                                 with
                                 the
                                 Scribes
                                 ,
                                 
                                   Pharises
                                   ,
                                   Sadduces
                                   ,
                                   Herodians
                                
                                 .
                                 c.
                                 12.
                                 2.
                                 
                                 Predictions
                                 of
                                 Ierusalem's
                                 destruction
                                 ,
                                 and
                                 the
                                 end
                                 of
                                 the
                                 world
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 13.
                                 
                              
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     II
                     ,
                     
                       Christs
                       Passion
                       and
                       Death
                    
                     ,
                     is
                     set
                     forth
                     ,
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         By
                         the
                         Antecedents
                         of
                         it
                         ,
                         c.
                         14.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         By
                         the
                         manner
                         of
                         it
                         ,
                         c.
                         15
                         ,
                      
                       
                         3.
                         
                         By
                         the
                         Consequents
                         of
                         it
                         .
                         His
                         Buriall
                         ,
                         Resurrection
                         ,
                         Ascension
                         ,
                         &c.
                         c.
                         15.16
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 Luke
                 .
              
               
                 THe
                 Gospel
                 according
                 to
                 LUKE
                 .
                 So
                 denominated
                 from
                 Luke
                 the
                 Penman
                 of
                 it
                 ,
              
               
               
                 LUKE
                 some
                 account
                 an
                 Hebrew
                 name
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Lokam
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   To
                   him
                   the
                   Resurrection
                   ;
                   Theophilact
                
                 thinkes
                 ,
                 that
                 Luke
                 and
                 Cleophas
                 first
                 met
                 Christ
                 after
                 his
                 Resurrection
                 .
                 But
                 this
                 is
                 lesse
                 probable
                 ,
                 because
                 Luke
                 testifies
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 wrote
                 this
                 History
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 according
                 as
                 things
                 were
                 delivered
                 to
                 him
                 by
                 Ministers
                 of
                 the
                 word
                 ,
                 that
                 were
                 eye-witnesses
                 —
                 Luke
                 1.1.2
                 .
                 Others
                 rather
                 count
                 Luke
                 a
                 Latin
                 name
                 from
                 
                   Lucius
                   .
                   Lucius
                
                 derived
                 a
                 
                   Luce
                   Oriente
                
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   from
                   the
                   morning
                   light
                
                 ,
                 they
                 were
                 wont
                 to
                 impose
                 this
                 name
                 upon
                 such
                 as
                 were
                 borne
                 in
                 the
                 morning
                 ,
                 about
                 Sun-rising
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 He
                 was
                 of
                 Antioch
                 in
                 Syria
                 ,
                 as
                 Hieronym
                 .
                 and
                 Theophylact.
                 By
                 particular
                 vocation
                 ,
                 a
                 Physician
                 ,
                 
                   Luke
                   the
                   beloved
                   Physition
                
                 ,
                 Col.
                 4.14
                 .
                 And
                 some
                 think
                 he
                 was
                 a
                 most
                 excellent
                 Painter
                 .
                 
                   Niceph.
                   l.
                
                 6.
                 c.
                 16.
                 
                   &
                   l.
                
                 15.
                 c.
                 14.
                 
                 He
                 was
                 a
                 faithfull
                 and
                 constant
                 companion
                 of
                 Paul
                 ,
                 2
                 Tim.
                 4.11
                 .
                 His
                 
                   fellow
                   labourer
                
                 ,
                 Philem.
                 24.
                 
                 And
                 some
                 think
                 Luke
                 is
                 intended
                 by
                 that
                 
                   brother
                   whose
                   praise
                   is
                   in
                   the
                   Gospel
                   throughout
                   all
                   the
                   Churches
                   ,
                
                 2
                 Cor.
                 8.18
                 .
                 
                   Bez.
                   in
                   loc
                
                 .
                 intimates
                 this
                 was
                 Hierom's
                 opinion
                 .
                 Though
                 Chrysostome
                 
                 rather
                 thinks
                 it
                 was
                 Barnabas
                 ,
                 to
                 whom
                 Calvin
                 subscribes
                 ,
                 
                   Calv.
                   in
                   loc
                   .
                   Piscat
                   in
                   loc
                   .
                   Luke
                   was
                   an
                   inseparable
                   Companion
                   of
                   Paul
                   and
                   his
                   fellow-worker
                   in
                   the
                   Gospel
                   ;
                   saith
                   Irenalis
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 14.
                 
                 Pauls
                 follower
                 ;
                 and
                 though
                 
                   not
                   an
                   Apostle
                   ,
                   yet
                   Apostolicall
                
                 ;
                 saith
                 
                   Tertull.
                   advers
                   .
                   Marcion
                   .
                   l.
                
                 4.
                 c.
                 2.
                 
                 That
                 Luke
                 was
                 most
                 skilfull
                 in
                 the
                 Greek
                 tongue
                 ,
                 not
                 onely
                 Hieronym
                 .
                 in
                 Isaiah
                 c.
                 6.
                 testifies
                 ;
                 but
                 also
                 his
                 very
                 stile
                 cleerly
                 evidenceth
                 .
                 Whereupon
                 one
                 saith
                 ,
                 
                   It
                   is
                   known
                   to
                   the
                   learned
                   ,
                   that
                   Luke
                   observed
                   a
                   more
                   pure
                   Hellenisme
                   then
                   the
                   rest
                   of
                   the
                   Evangelists
                   ,
                
                 Causab
                 .
                 Exerc.
                 2.
                 c.
                 1.
                 
                 Paul
                 converted
                 
                   Luke
                   at
                   The●es
                
                 ,
                 think
                 
                   Hieronym
                   .
                   Eusebius
                
                 ▪
                 and
                 
                   Niceporus
                   .
                   Luke
                
                 lived
                 a
                 single
                 life
                 ,
                 and
                 taught
                 first
                 in
                 
                   France
                   ,
                   Italy
                   ,
                   Macedonia
                
                 ,
                 and
                 Dalmatia
                 ;
                 thinks
                 Epiphan
                 .
                 His
                 death
                 is
                 variously
                 reported
                 ;
                 he
                 lived
                 84
                 yeares
                 saith
                 
                   Hieron
                   .
                   in
                   Catal.
                
                 and
                 then
                 dyed
                 in
                 
                   Bithynia
                   .
                   Hicrony
                   .
                   in
                   Catal.
                
                 At
                 Ephesus
                 ,
                 thinks
                 Dorotheus
                 .
                 He
                 was
                 hanged
                 on
                 a
                 fruitfull
                 Olive-tree
                 ;
                 thinks
                 Nicephorus
                 .
              
               
                 He
                 wrote
                 his
                 Gospel
                 about
                 fifteene
                 yeeres
                 after
                 Christs
                 Ascension
                 Niceph.
                 and
                 that
                 in
                 the
                 parts
                 of
                 Achaiah
                 ,
                 Hieronym
                 .
              
               
               
                 Occasion
                 of
                 his
                 writing
                 ,
                 some
                 say
                 was
                 the
                 appointment
                 of
                 Peter
                 or
                 Paul
                 ,
                 that
                 's
                 doubtfull
                 .
                 Probably
                 the
                 request
                 of
                 Theophilus
                 (
                 supposed
                 to
                 be
                 some
                 eminent
                 Senator
                 )
                 to
                 whom
                 he
                 directs
                 both
                 his
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Acts.
                 Though
                 some
                 take
                 this
                 name
                 Theophilus
                 ,
                 for
                 any
                 go●ly
                 man
                 ,
                 
                   Lover
                   of
                   God.
                   Luke
                
                 himselfe
                 cleerely
                 sets
                 down
                 one
                 occasion
                 ,
                 viz.
                 The
                 unsuccessefull
                 attempts
                 of
                 many
                 who
                 wrote
                 false
                 Gospels
                 ,
                 Luke
                 1.1.2
                 .
              
               
                 Scope
                 ,
                 Besides
                 the
                 generall
                 ayme
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Evangelists
                 ,
                 
                   Luke
                   seemes
                   particularly
                   to
                   intend
                   to
                   supply
                   what
                   others
                   had
                   omitted
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   record
                   thing●
                   from
                   the
                   very
                   first
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   methodically
                   in
                   order
                   ;
                   that
                   Theophilus
                   might
                   know
                   the
                   certainty
                   of
                   things
                   wherein
                   he
                   had
                   been
                   instructed
                   ,
                
                 Luke
                 1.3
                 ,
                 4.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 .
                 In
                 Lukes
                 Evangelical
                 History
                 ,
                 are
                 ,
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       The
                       Preface
                    
                     to
                     the
                     whole
                     History
                     c.
                     1.
                     v.
                     1
                     ,
                     2
                     ,
                     3
                     ,
                     4.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       Body
                       of
                       the
                       History
                       it selfe
                       ,
                    
                     which
                     containes
                     a
                     Narration
                     of
                     ,
                     
                       
                         I.
                         
                           Christs
                           life
                        
                         ,
                         Private
                         or
                         publique
                         .
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             Private
                             where
                             1.
                             
                             Of
                             things
                             before
                             his
                             Nativitie
                             ,
                             and
                             of
                             his
                             conception
                             ,
                             c.
                             1.
                             
                             2.
                             
                             Of
                             his
                             Nativity
                             it selfe
                             ,
                             and
                             his
                             education
                             ,
                             c.
                             2.
                             
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             Publique
                             in
                             the
                             Ministery
                             of
                             the
                             Gospel
                             ,
                             where
                             are
                             ,
                             I.
                             
                               His
                               instalment
                            
                             into
                             his
                             publique
                             Ministry
                             ,
                             c.
                             3.
                             
                             II.
                             
                               His
                               executing
                            
                             of
                             his
                             Ministry
                             .
                             1.
                             
                             By
                             himselfe
                             alone
                             ,
                             both
                             in
                             teaching
                             ,
                             c.
                             4.
                             and
                             in
                             acting
                             ,
                             c.
                             5.
                             2.
                             
                             By
                             his
                             Disciples
                             also
                             ,
                             which
                             Disciples
                             are
                             either
                             ,
                             Primary
                             ,
                             the
                             12
                             Apostles
                             called
                             and
                             instructed
                             ,
                             c.
                             6
                             ,
                             7
                             ,
                             8.
                             
                             And
                             sent
                             forth
                             ,
                             ●
                             .
                             9.
                             
                             Or
                             secondary
                             ,
                             as
                             the
                             70
                             Disciples
                             sent
                             to
                             preach
                             ,
                             c.
                             10.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                       
                         II.
                         
                           Christs
                           Death
                        
                         is
                         described
                         .
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             
                               By
                               the
                               Antecedents
                               of
                               it
                            
                             ,
                             viz.
                             Christs
                             words
                             and
                             workes
                             in
                             his
                             journey
                             to
                             Hierusalem
                             ;
                             here
                             are
                             considerable
                             ,
                             
                               
                                 1.
                                 
                                 The
                                 terme
                                 from
                                 which
                                 Christ
                                 went
                                 ,
                                 from
                                 Galile
                                 c.
                                 9.
                                 v.
                                 51.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 2.
                                 
                                 His
                                 passage
                                 it selfe
                                 ,
                                 wherein
                                 Christ
                                 discoursed
                                 of
                                 Gods
                                 worship
                                 and
                                 service
                                 ,
                                 inward
                                 ,
                                 and
                                 outward
                                 .
                                 
                                   
                                     1.
                                     
                                     Inward
                                     ,
                                     as
                                     1.
                                     
                                     Prayer
                                     ,
                                     c.
                                     11.
                                     2.
                                     
                                     Faith
                                     ,
                                     c.
                                     12.
                                     3.
                                     
                                     Repentance
                                     ,
                                     whereof
                                     are
                                     laid
                                     down
                                     ,
                                     The
                                     Motives
                                     c.
                                     13.
                                     
                                     The
                                     impediments
                                     ,
                                     c.
                                     14.
                                     
                                     The
                                     effects
                                     or
                                     fruits
                                     ,
                                     c.
                                     15.
                                     
                                  
                                   
                                     2.
                                     
                                     Outward
                                     ,
                                     viz.
                                     1.
                                     
                                     Of
                                     eschewing
                                     evil
                                     ,
                                     
                                       i.
                                       e.
                                    
                                     The
                                     abuse
                                     of
                                     riches
                                     c.
                                     16.
                                     
                                     And
                                     scandall
                                     c.
                                     17.
                                     2.
                                     
                                     Of
                                     doing
                                     good
                                     duties
                                     ,
                                     c.
                                     18.
                                     
                                  
                                
                              
                               
                                 3.
                                 
                                 The
                                 terme
                                 to
                                 which
                                 he
                                 came
                                 ,
                                 viz.
                                 
                                 to
                                 Ierusalem
                                 ,
                                 where
                                 of
                                 his
                                 1.
                                 
                                 Entertainment
                                 c.
                                 19.
                                 2.
                                 
                                 Disputation
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 20.
                                 3.
                                 
                                 Prophecy
                                 c
                                 21.
                                 
                              
                            
                          
                           
                             2
                             ,
                             
                               By
                               the
                               manner
                               of
                               it
                            
                             .
                             Beginning
                             of
                             his
                             Passion
                             ,
                             c.
                             22.
                             
                             Progresse
                             c.
                             23.
                             
                             Period
                             ,
                             c.
                             23.
                             
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             
                               By
                               the
                               consequents
                            
                             of
                             his
                             death
                             ,
                             c.
                             24.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 John.
                 
              
               
                 THe
                 Gospel
                 according
                 to
                 JOHN
                 .
                 This
                 book
                 is
                 thus
                 intituled
                 from
                 the
                 Penman
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 viz.
                 Not
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Baptist
                 (
                 as
                 he
                 is
                 surnamed
                 Luke
                 1.63
                 .
                 )
                 Nor
                 Iohn
                 surnamed
                 Marke
                 ,
                 Act.
                 15.37
                 .
                 but
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Apostle
                 ,
                 compare
                 Matth.
                 10.2
                 .
                 with
                 John
                 21.20
                 ,
                 24.
                 
                 This
                 is
                 the
                 Disciple
                 which
                 testifyeth
                 of
                 these
                 things
                 ,
                 and
                 wrote
                 these
                 things
                 .
                 He
                 wrote
                 also
                 
                   three
                   Epistles
                
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Revelation
                 in
                 Patmos
                 .
                 JOHN
                 is
                 Originally
                 an
                 Hebrew
                 name
                 ,
                 viz.
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Iochanan
                 .
                 1
                 Chron
                 12.22
                 .
                 Ierem.
                 40.13
                 .
                 it
                 is
                 also
                 sometimes
                 written
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 I●hochanan
                 ,
                 as
                 in
                 1
                 Chron.
                 26.3
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 compounded
                 of
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Iehovah
                 ,
                 the
                 proper
                 and
                 essentiall
                 name
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 
                 chanan
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   He
                   hath
                   been
                   gracious
                
                 ;
                 whence
                 comes
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 chen
                 i.
                 e.
                 Grace
                 ;
                 so
                 that
                 IOHN
                 imports
                 ,
                 THE
                 LORD
                 HATH
                 BEEN
                 GRACIOUS
                 ;
                 or
                 ,
                 THE
                 GRACE
                 OF
                 THE
                 LORD
                 .
                 This
                 Iohn
                 was
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Zebedee
                 ,
                 and
                 brother
                 of
                 Iames
                 ,
                 all
                 of
                 them
                 Fishermen
                 by
                 trade
                 :
                 Matth.
                 4.21
                 .
                 and
                 10.2
                 .
                 Mark
                 1.19
                 .
                 Luke
                 5.10
                 .
                 Salome
                 (
                 mentioned
                 Mark
                 15
                 40.
                 and
                 16.1
                 .
                 )
                 is
                 supposed
                 to
                 be
                 Iohn's
                 mother
                 .
                 As
                 Iohn
                 was
                 with
                 his
                 Father
                 ,
                 and
                 Brother
                 in
                 the
                 Ship
                 ,
                 mending
                 their
                 nets
                 ,
                 Jesus
                 called
                 him
                 and
                 his
                 Brother
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 4.21
                 .
                 Luke
                 5.10
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 thought
                 that
                 Iohn
                 lived
                 a
                 single
                 life
                 :
                 yet
                 some
                 are
                 of
                 opinion
                 that
                 Iohn
                 was
                 the
                 Bridegroome
                 
                   at
                   Cana
                   in
                   Galilie
                
                 .
                 Ioh.
                 2.1.9
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 certain
                 ;
                 that
                 Iohn
                 was
                 one
                 1
                 of
                 the
                 three
                 whom
                 Christ
                 took
                 up
                 with
                 him
                 to
                 mount
                 Tabor
                 to
                 behold
                 his
                 trans-figuration
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 17.1
                 .
                 &c.
                 Mark
                 9.2
                 .
                 Luke
                 9.28
                 .
                 &c.
                 And
                 z
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 ,
                 whom
                 Christ
                 sent
                 to
                 prepare
                 his
                 last
                 Passeover
                 ,
                 Luke
                 22.8
                 .
                 And
                 3
                 that
                 Disciple
                 whom
                 Iesus
                 peculiarly
                 loved
                 above
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 ,
                 Ioh.
                 13.23
                 .
                 and
                 19.26
                 .
                 and
                 20.2
                 ,
                 &
                 21.7.20
                 .
                 4
                 Who
                 leaned
                 on
                 Iesus
                 breast
                 at
                 supper
                 ;
                 and
                 5
                 to
                 
                 whom
                 Christ
                 by
                 a
                 private
                 token
                 discovered
                 that
                 Iudas
                 should
                 betray
                 him
                 ,
                 Ioh.
                 13.23
                 ,
                 24
                 ,
                 25
                 ,
                 26.
                 
                 And
                 6
                 to
                 whom
                 Christ
                 dying
                 on
                 the
                 Crosse
                 ,
                 commenced
                 his
                 own
                 mother
                 ,
                 Ioh.
                 19.25
                 ,
                 26
                 ,
                 27.
                 
                 After
                 Christs
                 Ascension
                 ,
                 Iohn
                 ,
                 with
                 Peter
                 ,
                 healed
                 miraculously
                 the
                 lame
                 man
                 as
                 they
                 were
                 going
                 into
                 the
                 Temple
                 ,
                 Act.
                 3.3
                 ,
                 4
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Preached
                 boldly
                 against
                 all
                 prohibitions
                 ,
                 Act.
                 4.13
                 ,
                 19.
                 
                 Was
                 sent
                 to
                 Samaria
                 having
                 received
                 the
                 word
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 Apostles
                 at
                 Ierusalem
                 ,
                 Acts
                 8.14
                 .
                 Tertullian
                 saith
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Apostle
                 Iohn
                 ,
                 after
                 he
                 in
                 Rome
                 had
                 been
                 cast
                 into
                 burning
                 Oyle
                 ,
                 and
                 suffered
                 nothing
                 thereby
                 ,
                 was
                 banished
                 into
                 an
                 Iland
                 
                   Tertul.
                   lib.
                   de
                   Praescriptione
                   adversus
                   Haereticos
                   cap.
                   XXXVI
                   .
                   p.
                
                 211
                 
                   edit
                   .
                   Franeker
                
                 .
                 1597.
                 
                 Nero
                 slung
                 him
                 into
                 the
                 burning
                 Oyle
                 ,
                 as
                 is
                 thought
                 :
                 Domitian
                 Banished
                 him
                 into
                 the
                 
                   Isle
                   Patmos
                
                 Rev.
                 1.9
                 ,
                 10.
                 
                 Whence
                 it
                 s
                 supposed
                 ,
                 he
                 returned
                 under
                 Nerva
                 ;
                 came
                 to
                 Ephesus
                 in
                 the
                 97
                 yeere
                 of
                 his
                 age
                 ,
                 where
                 he
                 lived
                 and
                 taught
                 till
                 he
                 was
                 99.
                 
                 He
                 made
                 his
                 Sepulcher
                 with
                 his
                 own
                 hands
                 .
                 Left
                 his
                 Disciples
                 ,
                 Papias
                 at
                 
                   Ierusalem
                   ;
                   Policarpus
                
                 at
                 Smyrna
                 ;
                 and
                 Ignatius
                 at
                 Antioch
                 .
                 
                 He
                 is
                 supposed
                 to
                 write
                 his
                 Gospel
                 towards
                 the
                 end
                 of
                 his
                 life
                 .
                 
                   Alsted
                   .
                   Praecog
                   .
                   Theol.
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 123.
                 
                 
                   Iohn's
                   Gospel
                
                 hath
                 still
                 been
                 had
                 of
                 most
                 high
                 account
                 with
                 Antiquity
                 .
                 See
                 
                   Basil.
                   in
                   Homil
                   .
                   sub
                   Princ.
                   Ioan.
                   Chrysost
                   in
                   Prolog
                   .
                   Comment
                   .
                   super
                   Ioan
                   ▪
                   Ambros.
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 
                   de
                   sacram
                   .
                   c.
                
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Cyrill
                   in
                   Prolog
                   .
                   Ioan.
                   Hieronym
                   .
                   Proem
                   .
                   Comment
                   .
                   in
                   Matth.
                   August
                   .
                   de
                   Civit.
                   dei
                   .
                   l.
                
                 10.
                 c.
                 29.
                 
                   and
                   Tract
                
                 .
                 56.
                 
                   in
                   Ioan.
                
                 
              
               
                 Occasion
                 of
                 Iohn's
                 writing
                 his
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 Ecclesiasticall
                 Writers
                 tels
                 us
                 was
                 twofold
                 .
                 viz.
                 1.
                 
                 To
                 oppose
                 and
                 confute
                 the
                 blasphemous
                 heresies
                 of
                 Ebion
                 and
                 Cerinthus
                 ,
                 who
                 denyed
                 the
                 Divinity
                 of
                 Christ
                 ;
                 hence
                 Iohn
                 so
                 clearly
                 asserts
                 it
                 ,
                 Iohn
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 See
                 
                   Iren.
                   Advers
                   .
                   haeres
                   .
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 11.
                 p.
                 257.
                 
                   edit
                   .
                   Colon.
                
                 1596.
                 
                 
                   Hieronym
                   ,
                   in
                   Proem
                   .
                   Comment
                   .
                   in
                   Matth.
                
                 2.
                 
                 To
                 supply
                 what
                 the
                 other
                 three
                 Evangelists
                 had
                 omitted
                 ,
                 who
                 principally
                 relate
                 things
                 done
                 by
                 Christ
                 ,
                 but
                 for
                 one
                 yeare
                 wherein
                 Christ
                 suffered
                 ,
                 after
                 Iohn
                 was
                 cast
                 into
                 prison
                 ,
                 
                   Euseb.
                   Hist
                   l.
                
                 6.
                 c.
                 13.
                 
                   ex
                   Clem.
                   Alexandr
                
                 .
              
               
                 Scope
                 of
                 Iohn's
                 writing
                 is
                 expressely
                 noted
                 ,
                 Iohn
                 20.31
                 .
                 
                   These
                   are
                   written
                   
                   that
                   yee
                   might
                   believe
                   that
                   Iesus
                   is
                   the
                   Christ
                   ,
                   the
                   sonne
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   believing
                   yee
                   might
                   have
                   life
                   through
                   his
                   name
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   The
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Generall
                   Branches
                
                 of
                 this
                 Hist.
                 are
                 ,
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       A
                       Description
                       of
                       Christs
                       Person
                    
                     according
                     to
                     his
                     divine
                     and
                     humane
                     nature
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       A
                       Delineation
                       of
                       Christs
                       office
                    
                     ,
                     discharged
                     by
                     him
                     in
                     his
                     foure
                     ominent
                     journeys
                     to
                     Ierusalem
                     ,
                     viz.
                     
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         
                           At
                           the
                           feast
                           of
                           the
                           Passeover
                           ,
                        
                         John
                         2.12
                         ,
                         13.
                         
                         Here
                         are
                         considerable
                         1.
                         
                         The
                         terme
                         whence
                         he
                         went
                         ,
                         from
                         Cana
                         of
                         
                           Galilee
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         2.
                         2.
                         
                         His
                         abode
                         there
                         ,
                         the
                         doctrine
                         that
                         he
                         preached
                         ,
                         and
                         the
                         Acts
                         he
                         did
                         ,
                         c.
                         2.14
                         .
                         &c.
                         and
                         ●
                         3
                         ,
                         and
                         4.1
                         ,
                         2
                         ,
                         3.
                         3.
                         
                         His
                         returne
                         from
                         Ierusalem
                         through
                         Samaria
                         ,
                         and
                         his
                         deeds
                         and
                         act●
                         there
                         ,
                         c.
                         4.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         
                           At
                           the
                           feast
                           of
                           Pentecost
                        
                         ▪
                         wherein
                         1.
                         
                         He
                         cured
                         him
                         that
                         had
                         the
                         palsie
                         thirty
                         eight
                         years
                         ,
                         c.
                         5.
                         2.
                         
                         He
                         fed
                         the
                         multitude
                         aboue
                         five
                         thousand
                         with
                         five
                         loaves
                         and
                         two
                         fishes
                         ,
                         and
                         preached
                         himselfe
                         the
                         true
                         
                           Mannah
                           ,
                           c
                        
                         6.
                         
                      
                       
                         3.
                         
                         
                           At
                           the
                           feast
                           of
                           Tabernacles
                        
                         ,
                         where
                         are
                         1.
                         
                         Christs
                         comming
                         to
                         
                           Ierusalem
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         7
                         ,
                         1.
                         to
                         15.
                         2.
                         
                         His
                         abode
                         there
                         ;
                         during
                         which
                         ,
                         he
                         taught
                         ,
                         c.
                         7
                         ,
                         14.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                         He
                         disputed
                         ,
                         c.
                         8.
                         
                         He
                         cured
                         the
                         man
                         
                         borne
                         blinde
                         ,
                         c.
                         9.
                         
                         He
                         preached
                         himselfe
                         ,
                         the
                         true
                         shepheard
                         of
                         his
                         sheep
                         ,
                         c.
                         10.
                         3.
                         
                         His
                         returne
                         thence
                         beyond
                         
                           Iordan
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         10.40
                         .
                         &c
                         ,
                         whence
                         he
                         came
                         againe
                         into
                         Iudea
                         to
                         Bethany
                         ,
                         to
                         raise
                         Lazarus
                         from
                         the
                         dead
                         ,
                         c.
                         11.
                         
                      
                       
                         4.
                         
                         
                           At
                           the
                           Celebration
                           of
                           the
                           true
                           Passeover
                           ,
                        
                         when
                         Christ
                         our
                         Passeover
                         was
                         sacrificed
                         for
                         us
                         .
                         Where
                         Christs
                         death
                         is
                         described
                         by
                         the
                         
                           Antecedents
                           ,
                           Manner
                        
                         ,
                         and
                         Consequents
                         of
                         it
                         .
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             
                               By
                               the
                               Antecedents
                            
                             going
                             before
                             his
                             death
                             ,
                             viz.
                             1.
                             
                             His
                             actions
                             ,
                             entring
                             into
                             the
                             City
                             ,
                             c.
                             12.
                             
                             Washing
                             his
                             disciples
                             feet
                             at
                             supper
                             ,
                             c.
                             13.
                             2.
                             
                             His
                             words
                             spoken
                             ,
                             either
                             At
                             supper
                             ,
                             c.
                             13
                             ,
                             31.
                             
                               to
                               the
                               end
                            
                             ,
                             and
                             c.
                             14.
                             as
                             they
                             were
                             going
                             to
                             the
                             garden
                             of
                             Gethsemane
                             ,
                             1
                             Warning
                             his
                             disciples
                             of
                             the
                             worlds
                             persecution
                             ,
                             c.
                             15.
                             2
                             
                             Comforting
                             them
                             against
                             the
                             Crosse
                             ,
                             c.
                             16.
                             3
                             
                             Praying
                             for
                             them
                             and
                             all
                             his
                             Elect
                             ,
                             c.
                             17.
                             
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             
                               By
                               the
                               manner
                               of
                               his
                               Passion
                               ,
                            
                             1.
                             
                             In
                             the
                             garden
                             ,
                             c.
                             18
                             ,
                             1.
                             to
                             15.
                             2.
                             
                             In
                             the
                             High-Priests
                             palace
                             ,
                             c.
                             18
                             ,
                             15.
                             to
                             28.
                             3.
                             
                             In
                             the
                             Hall
                             of
                             judgement
                             before
                             Pilate
                             ,
                             c.
                             18
                             ,
                             28.
                             to
                             c.
                             19.
                             v.
                             17.
                             4.
                             
                             In
                             the
                             place
                             of
                             execution
                             ,
                             c.
                             19.
                             ver
                             .
                             17.
                             
                               to
                               the
                               end
                            
                             .
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             
                               By
                               the
                               Consequents
                            
                             of
                             his
                             Passion
                             ,
                             viz.
                             Christs
                             appearing
                             after
                             his
                             Resurrection
                             ,
                             
                             1.
                             
                             To
                             
                               Mary
                               Magdalene
                            
                             and
                             the
                             disciples
                             in
                             
                               Iudea
                               ,
                               c.
                            
                             20.
                             2.
                             
                             To
                             the
                             disciples
                             fishing
                             in
                             
                               Galilee
                               ,
                               c.
                            
                             21.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 Acts
                 :
              
               
                 THE
                 HISTORY
                 OF
                 THE
                 CHURCH
                 OF
                 CHRIST
                 ,
                 his
                 body
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 in
                 the
                 purest
                 Primitive
                 Apostolicall
                 times
                 ,
                 is
                 contained
                 in
                 the
                 Acts
                 OF
                 THE
                 HOLY
                 APOSTLES
                 .
                 So
                 denominated
                 from
                 the
                 principall
                 subject
                 matter
                 of
                 this
                 Book
                 ,
                 viz.
                 The
                 Acts
                 of
                 the
                 Apostles
                 in
                 the
                 infancy
                 of
                 the
                 Primitive
                 Church
                 ,
                 therein
                 recorded
                 Historically
                 .
              
               
                 Penman
                 of
                 this
                 History
                 was
                 
                   Luke
                   the
                   beloved
                   Physitian
                
                 ,
                 who
                 also
                 wrote
                 the
                 Gospel
                 (
                 of
                 whom
                 see
                 what
                 is
                 there
                 spoken
                 )
                 as
                 appears
                 1.
                 
                 
                   By
                   the
                   Preface
                   or
                   Introduction
                
                 here
                 prefixed
                 ,
                 wherein
                 he
                 mentions
                 the
                 former
                 Treatise
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 penned
                 by
                 him
                 ;
                 names
                 Theophilus
                 to
                 whom
                 he
                 directed
                 particularly
                 
                 this
                 History
                 of
                 the
                 Apostles
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 that
                 History
                 of
                 Christ
                 ;
                 and
                 also
                 he
                 connects
                 or
                 knits
                 this
                 Book
                 to
                 his
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 by
                 continuing
                 the
                 History
                 where
                 he
                 formerly
                 left
                 .
                 viz.
                 At
                 the
                 Resurrection
                 and
                 Ascension
                 of
                 Iesus
                 Christ
                 ,
                 which
                 here
                 is
                 somewhat
                 more
                 fully
                 described
                 ,
                 and
                 what
                 followed
                 thereupon
                 ,
                 Act.
                 1.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 So
                 that
                 his
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Acts
                 of
                 the
                 Apostles
                 are
                 but
                 as
                 one
                 continued
                 History
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 
                   By
                   the
                   very
                   stile
                
                 ,
                 which
                 seems
                 notably
                 to
                 indigitate
                 Luke
                 unto
                 us
                 ,
                 partly
                 it
                 being
                 compleat
                 and
                 polished
                 Greek
                 becomming
                 Luke
                 an
                 accurate
                 Grecian
                 ,
                 who
                 had
                 also
                 most
                 diligently
                 perused
                 the
                 
                   Septuagint
                   version
                   ;
                   partly
                
                 it
                 being
                 replenished
                 with
                 Hebraismes
                 ,
                 suitable
                 to
                 Luke's
                 native
                 Genius
                 ,
                 being
                 by
                 country
                 a
                 Syrian
                 of
                 Antioch
                 ,
                 (
                 the
                 Syrian
                 language
                 being
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 Hebrew
                 dialects
                 )
                 partly
                 because
                 herein
                 somtimes
                 is
                 the
                 Language
                 of
                 a
                 Physitian
                 ,
                 very
                 agreeable
                 to
                 Lukes
                 profession
                 ,
                 as
                 Act.
                 17.16
                 .
                 
                   His
                   spirit
                   was
                   stirred
                   in
                   him
                   .
                
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   His
                   spirit
                   was
                   in
                   a
                   Paroxysme
                
                 ;
                 the
                 word
                 is
                 used
                 by
                 Physitians
                 to
                 signifie
                 a
                 
                   sharp
                   fit
                   of
                   an
                   ague
                   ,
                   fever
                   ,
                   &c.
                
                 &
                 again
                 ,
                 
                   the
                   Contention
                   was
                   so
                   sharp
                
                 ,
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   there
                   befell
                   a
                   Paroxysme
                
                 ,
                 —
                 this
                 word
                 is
                 not
                 used
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 New
                 Testament
                 by
                 any
                 ,
                 but
                 Luke
                 ,
                 and
                 Paul
                 ,
                 (
                 whose
                 companion
                 Luke
                 was
                 )
                 1
                 Cor.
                 13.5
                 .
                 Heb.
                 10.24
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 
                   By
                   the
                   consent
                   of
                   ancient
                   and
                   moderne
                   writers
                   .
                
                 No
                 doubt
                 this
                 Book
                 was
                 written
                 by
                 Luke
                 of
                 Antioch
                 ,
                 the
                 Physitian
                 ,
                 
                   Hieron
                   in
                   Praefa●
                   .
                   Act.
                   Luke
                
                 the
                 follower
                 of
                 the
                 Apopostle
                 and
                 companion
                 of
                 all
                 his
                 Travell
                 ,
                 wrote
                 the
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 —
                 and
                 put
                 forth
                 also
                 another
                 excellent
                 volume
                 entituled
                 the
                 Acts
                 of
                 the
                 Apostles
                 .
                 
                   Hieronym
                   .
                   de
                   vir
                   illustr
                
                 .
                 And
                 againe
                 ,
                 the
                 Acts
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 Apostles
                 seem
                 to
                 import
                 a
                 bare
                 history
                 of
                 the
                 infancy
                 of
                 the
                 new-born
                 Christ
                 ,
                 but
                 if
                 we
                 know
                 Luke
                 the
                 Physi●ian
                 to
                 be
                 the
                 penman
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 whose
                 praise
                 is
                 in
                 the
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 we
                 shall
                 consider
                 also
                 that
                 all
                 his
                 words
                 are
                 a
                 medicine
                 for
                 a
                 languishing
                 soule
                 .
                 
                   Hieron
                   .
                   praefat
                   .
                   in
                   Act.
                   and
                   out
                   of
                   him
                
                 Beda
                 ,
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   The
                   book
                   of
                   the
                   Acts
                   which
                
                 Luke
                 wrote
                 .
                 Oecumen
                 .
                 in
                 Scholiis
                 .
                 None
                 but
                 the
                 unlearned
                 and
                 unskilfull
                 ,
                 can
                 doubt
                 whether
                 Luke
                 were
                 Penman
                 of
                 the
                 Acts
                 ,
                 &c.
                 Erasmus
                 .
              
               
                 Occasion
                 .
                 It
                 is
                 thought
                 that
                 Luke
                 
                 wrote
                 this
                 History
                 at
                 Rome
                 ,
                 during
                 Pauls
                 imprisonment
                 there
                 .
                 
                   Hieron
                   .
                   de
                   vir
                   illustr
                
                 .
                 And
                 that
                 at
                 the
                 request
                 of
                 the
                 faithfull
                 brethren
                 at
                 Rome
                 :
                 and
                 by
                 the
                 command
                 of
                 
                   Paul
                   ,
                   Dorotheus
                   and
                   Nicephor
                   .
                   Hist.
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 43.
                 
                 
                   Alsted
                   .
                   Praecog
                   .
                   Theol.
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 123.
                 
                 The
                 time
                 of
                 writing
                 is
                 referred
                 to
                 the
                 sixtieth
                 year
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 the
                 fourth
                 of
                 Nero
                 ,
                 27th
                 .
                 after
                 Pauls
                 conversion
                 .
                 But
                 the
                 peculiar
                 guidance
                 of
                 the
                 Holy
                 Ghost
                 ,
                 was
                 the
                 principall
                 cause
                 of
                 Lukes
                 writing
                 both
                 this
                 and
                 the
                 former
                 Book
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   To
                   describe
                   unto
                   us
                   the
                   Rise
                   ,
                   Growth
                   ,
                   State
                   and
                   practice
                   of
                   the
                   Primitive
                   Christian
                   Church
                   in
                   her
                   infancy
                   ,
                   in
                   the
                   purest
                   Apostolicall
                   times
                   ,
                   how
                   she
                   observed
                   and
                   obeyed
                   Christs
                   Commandements
                   to
                   his
                   Apostles
                   ,
                   after
                   his
                   Resurrection
                   and
                   before
                   his
                   Ascension
                   ,
                   speaking
                   to
                   them
                   of
                   the
                   things
                   pertaining
                   to
                   the
                   Kingdome
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                
                 Acts
                 1.2
                 ,
                 3.
                 
                   and
                   this
                   both
                   in
                   matters
                   of
                   faith
                   ,
                   worship
                   ,
                   Church-Communion
                   ,
                   and
                   Church-Government
                   ;
                   that
                   herein
                   the
                   Primitive
                   Church
                   might
                   be
                   an
                   exemplary
                   Patterne
                   to
                   the
                   following
                   Churches
                   in
                   all
                   succeeding
                   ages
                   .
                
                 So
                 that
                 this
                 is
                 a
                 most
                 usefull
                 Book
                 to
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 God.
                 
              
               
               
                 
                   Principall
                   branches
                
                 .
                 The
                 
                   Acts
                   of
                   the
                   Apostles
                
                 ,
                 are
                 laid
                 down
                 in
                 this
                 History
                 ,
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     
                       More
                       generally
                    
                     .
                     The
                     Acts
                     of
                     all
                     the
                     Apostles
                     .
                     
                       
                         I.
                         After
                         Christs
                         Resurrection
                         ,
                         till
                         his
                         Ascension
                         ,
                         c.
                         1
                         ,
                         1.
                         to
                         12.
                         
                      
                       
                         II.
                         After
                         Christs
                         Ascension
                         till
                         the
                         feast
                         of
                         Pentecost
                         .
                         viz.
                         Their
                         devotion
                         ,
                         and
                         their
                         Election
                         of
                         Matthias
                         to
                         the
                         Apostleship
                         in
                         room
                         of
                         
                           Iudas
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         1
                         ,
                         12.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                      
                       
                         III.
                         At
                         the
                         feast
                         of
                         Pentecost
                         ,
                         how
                         they
                         preached
                         and
                         walked
                         after
                         they
                         had
                         extraordinarily
                         received
                         the
                         Holy-Ghost
                         ,
                         c.
                         2.
                         
                      
                       
                         IIII.
                         After
                         the
                         feast
                         of
                         Pentecost
                         ,
                         viz.
                         1.
                         
                         How
                         the
                         Apostles
                         ,
                         (
                         upon
                         report
                         of
                         the
                         miracle
                         that
                         Peter
                         and
                         Iohn
                         had
                         wrought
                         upon
                         the
                         lame
                         man
                         ,
                         and
                         the
                         doctrine
                         they
                         had
                         boldly
                         taught
                         ,
                         against
                         all
                         the
                         oppositions
                         and
                         threats
                         of
                         the
                         Priests
                         and
                         Elders
                         )
                         powred
                         forth
                         their
                         prayers
                         against
                         the
                         enemies
                         of
                         Christ
                         and
                         his
                         Gospel
                         .
                         c.
                         3
                         ,
                         4.
                         to
                         32.
                         2.
                         
                         How
                         themselves
                         provided
                         for
                         the
                         necessities
                         of
                         Christians
                         that
                         wanted
                         ,
                         c.
                         4
                         ,
                         32.
                         to
                         c.
                         5.
                         3.
                         
                         How
                         they
                         wrought
                         wonders
                         to
                         the
                         conversion
                         of
                         many
                         ,
                         c.
                         5
                         ,
                         12.
                         to
                         17.
                         4.
                         
                         How
                         the
                         Apostles
                         were
                         imprisoned
                         and
                         beaten
                         for
                         preaching
                         Iesus
                         Christ
                         ,
                         and
                         how
                         stoutly
                         they
                         behaved
                         themselves
                         under
                         these
                         sufferings
                         .
                         c.
                         5
                         ,
                         17.
                         
                           to
                           
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                         5.
                         
                         How
                         thu●
                         Apostles
                         appointed
                         seven
                         Deacons
                         to
                         take
                         care
                         of
                         the
                         poore
                         ,
                         whereof
                         Steven
                         being
                         one
                         ,
                         wrought
                         miracles
                         ,
                         disputed
                         ,
                         was
                         accused
                         ,
                         answered
                         his
                         Accusation
                         ,
                         and
                         is
                         barbarously
                         stoned
                         to
                         death
                         ,
                         c.
                         6.
                         
                         &
                         7.
                         6.
                         
                         How
                         the
                         Apostles
                         continuing
                         at
                         Ierusalem
                         ,
                         in
                         the
                         great
                         persecution
                         occasioning
                         the
                         dispersion
                         ,
                         sent
                         Peter
                         and
                         Iohn
                         to
                         Samaria
                         to
                         preach
                         to
                         them
                         .
                         The
                         Holy
                         Ghost
                         also
                         sending
                         Philip
                         to
                         baptize
                         the
                         
                           Ethiopian
                           Eunuch
                        
                         ,
                         and
                         to
                         preach
                         ,
                         c.
                         8.
                         
                         In
                         which
                         persecution
                         ,
                         Saul
                         being
                         a
                         great
                         actor
                         ,
                         was
                         wonderfully
                         converted
                         and
                         called
                         to
                         the
                         Apostleship
                         ,
                         c.
                         9
                         ,
                         1.
                         to
                         v.
                         32.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     2
                     
                       More
                       specially
                    
                     .
                     The
                     Acts
                     of
                     Peter
                     and
                     Paul
                     are
                     storied
                     .
                     
                       
                         I.
                         
                           Peters
                           acts
                        
                         .
                         viz.
                         1.
                         
                         His
                         miracles
                         wrought
                         ,
                         recovering
                         Aeneas
                         and
                         raising
                         Dorcas
                         from
                         death
                         ,
                         c.
                         9
                         ,
                         32.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                         2.
                         
                         His
                         doctrine
                         ,
                         preached
                         to
                         Cornelius
                         a
                         Gentile
                         ,
                         c.
                         10.
                         
                         Defended
                         against
                         them
                         of
                         the
                         circumcision
                         ,
                         that
                         opposed
                         his
                         communion
                         with
                         the
                         uncircumcised
                         ,
                         c.
                         11.
                         3.
                         
                         His
                         imprisonment
                         and
                         miraculous
                         release
                         ,
                         c.
                         12.
                         
                      
                       
                         II.
                         
                           Pauls
                           Acts
                        
                         are
                         recorded
                         according
                         to
                         foure
                         remarkable
                         per●grinations
                         or
                         journeys
                         which
                         he
                         took
                         ;
                         viz.
                         
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             His
                             first
                             journey
                             was
                             with
                             Barnabas
                             ,
                             to
                             the
                             Gentiles
                             .
                             His
                             Deeds
                             and
                             Acts
                             in
                             that
                             journey
                             ,
                             are
                             in
                             c.
                             13.14
                             .
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             His
                             second
                             journey
                             with
                             Silas
                             ,
                             from
                             Antioch
                             to
                             Ierusalem
                             ,
                             where
                             1.
                             
                             The
                             occasion
                             
                             of
                             the
                             journey
                             ,
                             viz.
                             the
                             doctrine
                             of
                             certaine
                             comming
                             from
                             Ierusalem
                             ,
                             That
                             circumcision
                             was
                             necessary
                             to
                             salvation
                             ;
                             whereupon
                             that
                             famous
                             Synod
                             was
                             called
                             at
                             Ierusalem
                             ,
                             c.
                             15.
                             2.
                             
                             Pauls
                             Deeds
                             and
                             Acts
                             ,
                             while
                             he
                             was
                             in
                             Asia
                             ,
                             c.
                             16.
                             3.
                             
                             Pauls
                             Deeds
                             and
                             Acts
                             while
                             he
                             abode
                             in
                             Graecia
                             ,
                             untill
                             he
                             returned
                             againe
                             to
                             
                               Antioch
                               ,
                               c.
                            
                             17.
                             to
                             c.
                             18.
                             vers
                             .
                             22.
                             
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             His
                             third
                             journey
                             undertaken
                             for
                             the
                             Ephisians
                             sakes
                             ,
                             where
                             note
                             1.
                             
                             Whence
                             he
                             went.
                             c.
                             18.23
                             ,
                             &c.
                             2.
                             
                             What
                             way
                             he
                             travelled
                             ,
                             Going
                             ,
                             c.
                             19.
                             
                             Comming
                             ,
                             c.
                             20
                             3.
                             
                             Whither
                             he
                             came
                             ,
                             viz.
                             to
                             
                               Ierusalem
                               .
                               c.
                            
                             21.22
                             ,
                             23.
                             
                             Then
                             to
                             Cesarea
                             ,
                             where
                             consider
                             things
                             done
                             under
                             
                               Felix
                               ,
                               c.
                            
                             24.
                             under
                             ,
                             
                               Festus
                               ,
                               c.
                            
                             25.
                             under
                             
                               ●grippa
                               ,
                               c.
                            
                             26.
                             
                          
                           
                             4
                             His
                             fourth
                             and
                             last
                             Journey
                             which
                             he
                             took
                             towards
                             
                               Rome
                               ,
                               c.
                            
                             27
                             ,
                             28.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             
               II.
               EPISTOLICAL
               BOOKS
               .
            
             
               THE
               EPISTOLICAL
               BOOKS
               of
               the
               New
               Testament
               ,
               are
               ,
               All
               the
               Epistles
               ,
               written
               by
               the
               Apostles
               ;
               the
               Apostles
               being
               oft-times
               unable
               to
               instruct
               by
               their
               personall
               presence
               ,
               supplyed
               that
               by
               writing
               Epistles
               .
               These
               Epistles
               are
               either
               written
               ,
               1.
               
               To
               the
               
                 Beleeving
                 Gentiles
              
               ,
               Or
               2.
               
               To
               the
               
                 Beleeving
                 
                 Iews
              
               ;
               as
               was
               formerly
               noted
               ,
            
             
               
               To
               the
               beleeving
               Gentiles
               ,
               
                 The
                 Apostle
                 Paul
              
               wrote
               his
               Epistles
               ,
               which
               are
               either
               1.
               
               Generall
               written
               to
               whole
               Churches
               :
               Or
               2.
               
               Particular
               to
               some
               select
               particular
               persons
               .
               Some
               do
               rank
               Pauls
               Epistles
               thus
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               persons
               to
               whom
               they
               were
               written
               ,
               viz.
               
            
             
               Pauls
               Epistles
               were
               written
               either
               
                 
                   To
                   whole
                   Churches
                   ,
                   either
                   in
                   
                     
                       Europe
                       ,
                       as
                       to
                       the
                       Churches
                       at
                       
                         
                           Rome
                           .
                           —
                           in
                           Italie
                           .
                        
                         
                           Corinth
                           .
                           in
                           Grecia
                        
                         
                           Thessalonica
                           in
                           Grecia
                        
                         
                           Philippi
                           .
                           —
                           in
                           Thracia
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       Asia
                       ,
                       as
                       to
                       the
                       Churches
                       at
                       
                         
                           Galatia
                           in
                           
                             Asia
                             Minor
                          
                        
                         
                           Ephesus
                           in
                           
                             Asia
                             Minor
                          
                        
                         
                           Colosse
                           in
                           
                             Asia
                             Minor
                          
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       Iudea
                       ,
                       and
                       in
                       other
                       Nations
                       dispersed
                       ,
                       as
                       the
                       Epistle
                       to
                       the
                       Hebrewes
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   To
                   particular
                   persons
                   ;
                   as
                   to
                   
                     
                       Timothy
                       .
                    
                     
                       Titus
                       .
                    
                     
                       Philemon
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               Others
               endeavour
               ,
               and
               that
               not
               unprofitably
               to
               marshall
               
                 Pauls
                 Epistles
              
               ,
               in
               the
               Order
               of
               times
               and
               seasons
               ,
               wherein
               they
               were
               severally
               written
               ,
               which
               Order
               is
               not
               observed
               as
               they
               are
               placed
               in
               our
               Bibles
               .
               And
               though
               the
               
               punctuall
               time
               when
               every
               Epistle
               was
               written
               ,
               cannot
               evidently
               and
               infallibly
               be
               demonstrated
               either
               by
               the
               Epistles
               themselves
               ,
               or
               other
               Ecclesiasticall
               Histories
               ,
               yet
               we
               may
               have
               good
               probabilities
               hereof
               ,
               as
               may
               appeare
               in
               this
               Type
               or
               Table
               ensuing
               ,
               viz.
               
            
             
               
                 Pauls
                 Epistles
                 were
                 written
              
               ,
               1.
               
               
                 Before
                 his
                 Bonds
                 and
                 Captivity
                 at
                 Rome
                 .
              
               2.
               
               
                 In
                 his
                 Bonds
                 and
                 Imprisonment
                 there
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 I.
                 
                   Before
                   his
                   Bonds
                   and
                   Captivity
                   at
                   Rome
                   ,
                   as
                   these
                   seven
                   Epistles
                   in
                   this
                   Order
                   ,
                
                 viz.
                 
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     First
                     of
                     all
                     seems
                     to
                     be
                     written
                     the
                     I.
                     
                       To
                       Thessal
                    
                     .
                     From
                     Athenes
                     by
                     Tychicus
                     .
                     For
                     Paul
                     by
                     reason
                     of
                     the
                     tumultuous
                     Jews
                     going
                     from
                     Thessalonica
                     to
                     Berea
                     ,
                     and
                     thence
                     to
                     
                       Athenes
                       Act.
                    
                     17.
                     thence
                     he
                     confirmes
                     the
                     Thessalonians
                     in
                     the
                     faith
                     by
                     his
                     first
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     written
                     about
                     seventeen
                     years
                     after
                     his
                     Conversion
                     ,
                     ninth
                     yeare
                     of
                     Claudius
                     ,
                     and
                     nineteenth
                     yeare
                     after
                     Christs
                     passion
                     ,
                     when
                     the
                     Councell
                     at
                     Ierusalem
                     was
                     held
                     .
                     Hieron
                     .
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     About
                     the
                     same
                     time
                     ,
                     and
                     in
                     the
                     
                     same
                     place
                     Paul
                     seemes
                     to
                     have
                     written
                     the
                     II.
                     
                       To
                       Thessal
                    
                     .
                     by
                     Tychicus
                     also
                     .
                     For
                     what
                     he
                     had
                     written
                     in
                     the
                     former
                     of
                     Christs
                     coming
                     ,
                     and
                     of
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     the
                     world
                     ,
                     he
                     further
                     explaines
                     in
                     this
                     ,
                     and
                     vindicates
                     .
                  
                   
                     3.
                     
                     The
                     I.
                     
                       To
                       Timothy
                    
                     seems
                     written
                     by
                     Paul
                     ,
                     from
                     Laodicea
                     ,
                     of
                     
                       Phrygia
                       Palatina
                    
                     ,
                     sent
                     by
                     Tychicus
                     the
                     Deacon
                     ,
                     when
                     returning
                     the
                     second
                     time
                     from
                     Ierusalem
                     ,
                     he
                     passed
                     through
                     the
                     Region
                     of
                     Galatia
                     and
                     Phrygia
                     ,
                     Acts
                     18.23
                     .
                     and
                     before
                     he
                     returned
                     to
                     Ephesus
                     ,
                     Acts
                     19.1
                     .
                     For
                     he
                     promiseth
                     to
                     Timothy
                     ,
                     that
                     he
                     would
                     shortly
                     come
                     thither
                     .
                     1
                     Tim.
                     3.14
                     .
                     viz.
                     in
                     the
                     nineteenth
                     yeare
                     after
                     his
                     Conversion
                     ,
                     (
                     as
                     is
                     thought
                     )
                     in
                     the
                     eleventh
                     of
                     Claudius
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     one
                     and
                     twentieth
                     after
                     Christs
                     death
                     .
                  
                   
                     4.
                     
                     Next
                     seems
                     written
                     the
                     I.
                     
                       To
                       Corinth
                    
                     ,
                     from
                     Ephesus
                     ,
                     while
                     Paul
                     stayed
                     there
                     ,
                     Act.
                     19.9
                     .
                     (
                     and
                     this
                     rather
                     then
                     from
                     Philippi
                     ,
                     as
                     the
                     Greek
                     postscript
                     intimates
                     ,
                     )
                     
                     and
                     before
                     he
                     went
                     through
                     Macedonia
                     ,
                     )
                     1
                     Cor.
                     16.5
                     .
                     for
                     he
                     passed
                     through
                     Macedonia
                     ,
                     after
                     his
                     three
                     years
                     abode
                     at
                     Ephesus
                     .
                     See
                     Acts
                     19.1.8.10
                     .
                     compared
                     with
                     Act.
                     20.1
                     .
                     about
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     which
                     time
                     he
                     is
                     supposed
                     to
                     write
                     this
                     Epistle
                     at
                     Ephesus
                     before
                     Pentecost
                     .
                     For
                     he
                     saith
                     ,
                     
                       I
                       will
                       tarry
                       at
                    
                     Ephesus
                     ,
                     
                       until
                       Pentecost
                    
                     ;
                     1
                     Cor.
                     16.8
                     .
                     which
                     when
                     he
                     wrote
                     ,
                     he
                     seems
                     plainly
                     to
                     be
                     at
                     Ephesus
                     :
                     And
                     this
                     Pentecost
                     went
                     before
                     that
                     Pentecost
                     ,
                     when
                     he
                     intended
                     to
                     be
                     at
                     Ierusalem
                     ,
                     Act.
                     20.16
                     .
                     which
                     fell
                     out
                     about
                     the
                     sixty
                     fourth
                     yeare
                     after
                     Christs
                     death
                     ,
                     in
                     the
                     ninth
                     of
                     Nero
                     ,
                     which
                     yeare
                     coming
                     to
                     Ierusalem
                     with
                     the
                     Contribution
                     ,
                     he
                     was
                     cast
                     into
                     Bonds
                     ,
                     in
                     the
                     thirtieth
                     yeare
                     after
                     his
                     Conversion
                     ,
                     
                       Athanas.
                       in
                       Synops
                       .
                       Chrysostome
                    
                     .
                  
                   
                     5.
                     
                     Not
                     much
                     after
                     this
                     first
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     Paul
                     wrote
                     his
                     II.
                     
                       To
                       Corinth
                    
                     ,
                     from
                     Philippi
                     when
                     after
                     Demetrius
                     his
                     tumult
                     ,
                     he
                     left
                     Ephesus
                     and
                     came
                     into
                     Macedonia
                     ,
                     Acts
                     
                     20.1
                     ,
                     2
                     ,
                     3.
                     for
                     then
                     he
                     must
                     needs
                     come
                     to
                     Philippi
                     ,
                     (
                     which
                     was
                     the
                     first
                     city
                     upon
                     the
                     coast
                     of
                     
                       Macedonia
                       ,
                       Act.
                    
                     16.12
                     .
                     )
                     Hither
                     referre
                     that
                     promise
                     of
                     his
                     that
                     he
                     would
                     come
                     to
                     Corinth
                     ,
                     with
                     them
                     of
                     Macedonia
                     ,
                     2
                     Cor.
                     9.4
                     .
                     that
                     is
                     there
                     said
                     to
                     be
                     done
                     ,
                     when
                     after
                     he
                     had
                     passed
                     thorough
                     Macedonia
                     into
                     Greece
                     ,
                     he
                     had
                     stayed
                     three
                     moneths
                     ,
                     Ast.
                     20.2
                     ,
                     3.
                     and
                     after
                     ,
                     we
                     never
                     read
                     that
                     he
                     returned
                     into
                     Greece
                     .
                  
                   
                     6.
                     
                     In
                     the
                     same
                     passing
                     through
                     Macedonia
                     ;
                     At
                     Nicopolis
                     not
                     farre
                     distant
                     from
                     Philippi
                     ,
                     before
                     he
                     came
                     into
                     
                       Greece
                       ,
                       Paul
                    
                     is
                     supposed
                     to
                     have
                     written
                     his
                     Epistle
                     To
                     Titus
                     whom
                     he
                     cals
                     from
                     Creet
                     to
                     Nicopolis
                     ,
                     because
                     
                       there
                       he
                       had
                       determined
                       to
                       winter
                       ,
                    
                     Tit.
                     3.12
                     .
                     though
                     he
                     seems
                     after
                     to
                     have
                     altered
                     his
                     purpose
                     ,
                     and
                     to
                     have
                     wintred
                     in
                     Grecia
                     ,
                     as
                     is
                     thought
                     at
                     Corinth
                     .
                  
                   
                     7.
                     
                     The
                     eminent
                     Epistle
                     to
                     the
                     Romanes
                     seems
                     to
                     have
                     been
                     written
                     ,
                     whilst
                     Paul
                     was
                     wintring
                     
                     at
                     Corinth
                     .
                     For
                     after
                     that
                     ,
                     we
                     read
                     not
                     that
                     he
                     returned
                     to
                     Corinth
                     ,
                     but
                     having
                     wintred
                     in
                     Greece
                     because
                     of
                     the
                     treacheries
                     of
                     the
                     Jewes
                     ,
                     returning
                     through
                     Macedonia
                     ,
                     he
                     came
                     into
                     Syria
                     with
                     the
                     Contribution
                     ,
                     whence
                     at
                     last
                     he
                     was
                     carried
                     bound
                     to
                     Rome
                     ,
                     in
                     the
                     sixty
                     fourth
                     yeare
                     of
                     Christ
                     ,
                     the
                     ninth
                     of
                     Nero
                     ,
                     and
                     in
                     the
                     thirtieth
                     year
                     after
                     his
                     own
                     Conversion
                     .
                     So
                     that
                     the
                     II.
                     To
                     Corinth
                     ,
                     To
                     Titus
                     ,
                     and
                     To
                     the
                     Romans
                     ,
                     all
                     these
                     three
                     seems
                     to
                     bewritten
                     ,
                     as
                     is
                     said
                     ,
                     and
                     all
                     within
                     the
                     space
                     of
                     halfe
                     a
                     yeare
                     :
                     but
                     the
                     
                       Epistle
                       to
                       the
                       Romans
                    
                     seems
                     to
                     be
                     the
                     last
                     he
                     wrote
                     before
                     he
                     came
                     captive
                     to
                     
                       Rome
                       .
                       Origen
                       &
                       Chrysost
                    
                     prove
                     it
                     was
                     written
                     after
                     both
                     the
                     Epistles
                     to
                     Corinth
                     :
                     because
                     in
                     both
                     those
                     Epistles
                     he
                     stirs
                     them
                     up
                     to
                     a
                     Collection
                     for
                     the
                     poor
                     Saints
                     at
                     Ierusalem
                     ,
                     1
                     Cor.
                     16.1
                     .
                     to
                     6.
                     2
                     
                     Cor.
                     8.
                     and
                     9.
                     which
                     contribution
                     he
                     saith
                     he
                     had
                     received
                     from
                     the
                     Churches
                     of
                     Macedonia
                     and
                     Achaia
                     ,
                     
                     Rom.
                     15.25
                     .
                     to
                     carry
                     it
                     into
                     Iudea
                     ;
                     and
                     he
                     brought
                     it
                     to
                     Ierusalem
                     ,
                     in
                     his
                     last
                     journey
                     into
                     Syria
                     ,
                     described
                     Act.
                     20.
                     and
                     21.
                     as
                     himselfe
                     testifies
                     in
                     his
                     Apology
                     before
                     Felix
                     ,
                     Act.
                     24.17
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 II.
                 
                   In
                   his
                   Bonds
                   and
                   imprisonment
                   at
                   Rome
                   ,
                   and
                   this
                   under
                   ,
                
                 1.
                 
                 
                   His
                   former
                
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 
                   His
                   later
                   imprisonment
                
                 .
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       Vnder
                       his
                       former
                       imprisonment
                    
                     ,
                     when
                     he
                     was
                     in
                     more
                     
                       free
                       custody
                    
                     at
                     his
                     first
                     coming
                     to
                     
                       Rome
                       Act.
                    
                     28.16
                     ,
                     20
                     ,
                     30
                     ,
                     31.
                     
                     Then
                     probably
                     he
                     wrote
                     his
                     
                       Epistle
                       to
                       the
                       Hebrewes
                    
                     ,
                     for
                     he
                     promiseth
                     the
                     Hebrews
                     to
                     come
                     and
                     see
                     them
                     ,
                     Heb.
                     13.23
                     .
                     therefore
                     then
                     he
                     had
                     some
                     hopes
                     of
                     liberty
                     ,
                     or
                     it
                     may
                     be
                     he
                     had
                     liberty
                     at
                     that
                     time
                     and
                     preached
                     in
                     Italy
                     .
                     whence
                     perhaps
                     the
                     Epistle
                     is
                     said
                     to
                     be
                     written
                     ,
                     not
                     from
                     Rome
                     ,
                     but
                     from
                     Italy
                     .
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       Vnder
                       his
                       latter
                       imprisonment
                    
                     when
                     he
                     was
                     clapt
                     up
                     in
                     
                       close●
                       restraint
                    
                     .
                     Then
                     he
                     wrote
                     his
                     other
                     six
                     Epistles
                     (
                     in
                     which
                     he
                     mentions
                     
                     his
                     chains
                     )
                     and
                     probably
                     he
                     wrote
                     them
                     in
                     this
                     order
                     ,
                     viz.
                     
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         
                           To
                           the
                           Galatians
                        
                         to
                         whom
                         he
                         writes
                         that
                         he
                         
                           beares
                           in
                           his
                           body
                           the
                           mark●●
                           of
                           the
                           Lord
                           Iesus
                           ,
                        
                         Gal.
                         6.17
                         .
                         i.
                         e.
                         either
                         his
                         chaines
                         ,
                         torments
                         ,
                         or
                         brands
                         .
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         
                           To
                           the
                           Ephesians
                        
                         ,
                         to
                         whom
                         he
                         mentions
                         his
                         chain
                         ,
                         Eph.
                         6.20
                         .
                      
                       
                         3.
                         
                         
                           To
                           the
                           Philippians
                        
                         ,
                         whom
                         he
                         salutes
                         in
                         the
                         name
                         of
                         divers
                         of
                         
                           Caesar's
                           houshould
                        
                         ,
                         Phil.
                         4.22
                         ,
                      
                       
                         4.
                         
                         
                           To
                           the
                           Colossians
                        
                         whom
                         he
                         requests
                         to
                         remember
                         his
                         bonds
                         ,
                         Colossians
                         4.18
                         .
                      
                       
                         5
                         ,
                         
                           To
                           Philemon
                        
                         ,
                         Paul
                         wrote
                         being
                         a
                         
                           Prisoner
                           and
                           now
                           aged
                        
                         ,
                         Phil.
                         9.
                         and
                         it
                         is
                         thought
                         he
                         wrote
                         this
                         Epistle
                         after
                         his
                         first
                         Apology
                         ,
                         in
                         which
                         
                           all
                           men
                           forsook
                           him
                           ,
                           but
                           the
                           Lord
                           stood
                           by
                           him
                           ,
                           and
                           delivered
                           him
                           from
                           the
                           mouth
                           of
                           the
                           Lyon
                           ,
                        
                         2
                         Tim.
                         4.17
                         .
                         Therefore
                         having
                         some
                         dawnings
                         of
                         hope
                         that
                         he
                         should
                         be
                         delivered
                         ,
                         he
                         desires
                         Philemon
                         to
                         prepare
                         him
                         a
                         lodging
                         ,
                         
                           for
                           I
                           trust
                        
                         (
                         saith
                         he
                         )
                         
                           that
                           through
                           your
                           prayers
                           I
                           shall
                           be
                           
                           given
                           unto
                           you
                           ,
                        
                         Phil.
                         22.
                         but
                         the
                         Lord
                         had
                         otherwise
                         determined
                         .
                         Some
                         think
                         this
                         Epistle
                         was
                         written
                         after
                         the
                         II
                         
                           to
                           Timothy
                        
                         ,
                         because
                         there
                         he
                         bids
                         Timothy
                         and
                         Mark
                         to
                         come
                         to
                         him
                         ,
                         whom
                         here
                         he
                         intimates
                         to
                         be
                         with
                         him
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         1.24
                         .
                         But
                         others
                         collect
                         rather
                         the
                         contrary
                         ,
                         1
                         Partly
                         because
                         here
                         he
                         desires
                         a
                         lodging
                         to
                         be
                         provided
                         for
                         him
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         22.
                         but
                         in
                         that
                         Epistle
                         he
                         is
                         not
                         solicitous
                         about
                         his
                         lodging
                         ,
                         but
                         about
                         his
                         departure
                         out
                         of
                         this
                         life
                         ,
                         2
                         Tim.
                         4.6
                         .
                         2
                         Partly
                         because
                         ,
                         there
                         he
                         complains
                         that
                         
                           Demas
                           had
                           forsaken
                           him
                        
                         ,
                         2
                         Tim.
                         4.10
                         .
                         But
                         here
                         he
                         salutes
                         Philemon
                         in
                         Demas
                         his
                         name
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         24.
                         
                         Therefore
                         this
                         Epistle
                         was
                         written
                         before
                         Demas
                         his
                         desertion
                         ,
                         or
                         Demas
                         had
                         returned
                         againe
                         unto
                         him
                         .
                      
                       
                         6.
                         
                         Last
                         of
                         all
                         ,
                         a
                         little
                         before
                         his
                         Martyrdome
                         (
                         whichfell
                         out
                         in
                         the
                         thirty
                         seventh
                         yeer
                         of
                         Christ
                         ,
                         in
                         the
                         fourteenth
                         yeer
                         of
                         Nero
                         ,
                         &
                         in
                         the
                         thirty
                         fifth
                         yeer
                         after
                         his
                         
                         own
                         conversion
                         )
                         Paul
                         wrote
                         his
                         II.
                         
                           to
                           Timothy
                        
                         ,
                         as
                         all
                         Circumstances
                         evince
                         ,
                         and
                         the
                         Epistle
                         it selfe
                         intimates
                         .
                         
                           I
                           am
                           now
                           ready
                           to
                           be
                           offered
                           ,
                           and
                           the
                           time
                           of
                           my
                           departure
                           is
                           at
                           hand
                           ,
                        
                         2
                         Tim.
                         4.6
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               This
               noting
               the
               severall
               times
               of
               the
               Apostles
               writing
               his
               Epistles
               is
               usefull
               ,
               To
               let
               us
               see
               why
               the
               Apostle
               wrote
               so
               variously
               about
               the
               same
               things
               ,
               as
               Circumcision
               and
               other
               Ceremonies
               ,
               As
               ;
               To
               the
               Romanes
               ,
               that
               they
               should
               receive
               the
               weake
               ,
               &c.
               about
               Ceremonies
               and
               indifferent
               things
               ,
               Rom.
               14.
               1.
               
               &c.
               But
               to
               the
               Galatians
               ,
               and
               Colossians
               ,
               utterly
               condemns
               use
               of
               Circumcision
               ,
               &c.
               Gal.
               5.2
               .
               &c.
               Col.
               2
               ,
               the
               reason
               is
               the
               difference
               of
               times
               ,
               
                 Chrisostome
                 .
                 Ceremonies
              
               were
               alwayes
               Mortales
               ,
               mortall
               ;
               at
               Christs
               death
               became
               Mortuae
               ,
               dead
               ;
               onely
               Moses
               must
               be
               honourably
               buried
               ,
               for
               the
               weak
               Iewes
               the
               use
               of
               them
               was
               permitted
               a
               while
               ;
               but
               after
               that
               they
               became
               Mortiferae
               ,
               deadly
               to
               them
               that
               used
               them
               .
            
             
             
               But
               here
               
                 Pauls
                 Epistles
              
               shall
               be
               considered
               according
               to
               the
               method
               and
               distribution
               of
               all
               the
               Books
               of
               the
               New
               Testament
               first
               proposed
               :
               and
               that
               the
               rather
               ,
               because
               so
               we
               shall
               view
               them
               as
               they
               stand
               in
               order
               in
               our
               Bibles
               .
            
             
               And
               first
               of
               Pauls
               
                 Generall
                 Epistles
              
               to
               whole
               Churches
               ,
               which
               are
               nine
               ,
               viz.
               
            
             
               
                 Romanes
                 .
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   Epistle
                   of
                   the
                   Apostle
                   Paul
                   to
                   the
                
                 ROMANES
                 .
                 So
                 denominated
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Partly
                 from
                 the
                 object
                 to
                 whom
                 the
                 Epistle
                 is
                 written
                 ,
                 viz.
                 The
                 believing
                 Romanes
                 ,
                 Rom.
                 1.7
                 .
                 When
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 there
                 was
                 so
                 famous
                 a
                 Church
                 at
                 Rome
                 ,
                 that
                 their
                 Faith
                 was
                 spoken
                 of
                 throughout
                 the
                 whole
                 World
                 ,
                 Rom.
                 1.8
                 .
                 Yea
                 there
                 were
                 even
                 in
                 Caesars
                 houshould
                 that
                 had
                 received
                 the
                 faith
                 .
                 Phil.
                 4.22
                 .
                 But
                 by
                 whom
                 or
                 when
                 was
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 the
                 Romanes
                 first
                 planted
                 ?
                 Answ.
                 Scripture
                 is
                 silent
                 ,
                 Papists
                 say
                 by
                 
                   Peter
                   ,
                   Bel●●m
                   .
                   de
                   
                   Pont.
                   Rom.
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 2.
                 
                 But
                 Peter
                 never
                 was
                 at
                 Rome
                 ,
                 much
                 lesse
                 planted
                 the
                 Church
                 there
                 
                   D.
                   Pareus
                   in
                   Rom.
                
                 16.
                 
                 Pub.
                 II.
                 Barnabas
                 is
                 supposed
                 to
                 have
                 preached
                 Christ
                 at
                 Rome
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 have
                 converted
                 the
                 Romanes
                 ,
                 under
                 the
                 Reign
                 of
                 Tyberius
                 ,
                 if
                 Clement
                 may
                 be
                 believed
                 .
                 
                   Recognition
                   .
                   Clementis
                   lib.
                
                 1.
                 
                 But
                 now
                 Rome
                 is
                 as
                 infamous
                 as
                 once
                 it
                 was
                 famous
                 ,
                 being
                 the
                 seat
                 of
                 Antichrist
                 ,
                 Rev.
                 17
                 ,
                 9
                 ,
                 &c.
                 the
                 
                   Spirituall
                   Egypt
                
                 Rev.
                 11.8
                 .
                 Sodome
                 Rev.
                 11.8
                 .
                 And
                 Babylon
                 devoted
                 to
                 destruction
                 ,
                 Rev.
                 18.2
                 ,
                 &c.
                 2.
                 
                 Partly
                 from
                 the
                 Penman
                 of
                 the
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 
                   viz.
                   Paul
                
                 ,
                 Rom.
                 1.1
                 .
              
               
                 PAUL
                 is
                 a
                 Latin
                 name
                 from
                 Paulus
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   a
                   little
                   one
                
                 ,
                 so
                 the
                 Romanes
                 were
                 wont
                 to
                 call
                 them
                 that
                 were
                 of
                 a
                 lesser
                 stature
                 ,
                 he
                 seemes
                 most
                 to
                 be
                 delighted
                 with
                 this
                 Romane
                 name
                 ,
                 being
                 appointed
                 Apostle
                 to
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 .
                 Some
                 think
                 he
                 first
                 had
                 this
                 name
                 given
                 him
                 ,
                 upon
                 occasion
                 of
                 his
                 conversion
                 of
                 
                   Sergius
                   Paulus
                   the
                   Deputy
                
                 ,
                 Act.
                 13.7.9.12
                 ▪
                 
                   Hieronym
                   .
                   de
                   claris
                   Script
                
                 ,
                 Before
                 he
                 was
                 called
                 Saul
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   desired
                   ,
                   asked
                
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 Hebrew
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Shaal
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   he
                   hath
                   asked
                   ,
                   desired
                
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 It
                 is
                 not
                 likely
                 that
                 he
                 
                 changed
                 his
                 name
                 Saul
                 into
                 Paul
                 :
                 but
                 rather
                 that
                 he
                 had
                 two
                 names
                 ,
                 as
                 all
                 the
                 Iews
                 had
                 that
                 were
                 freemē
                 of
                 
                   Rome
                   ;
                   Saul
                
                 then
                 denoted
                 his
                 nation
                 and
                 Religion
                 ,
                 Paul
                 signified
                 his
                 Roman
                 freedome
                 .
                 And
                 Scripture
                 favours
                 this
                 that
                 he
                 had
                 two
                 names
                 ,
                 saying
                 ,
                 Saul
                 ,
                 which
                 also
                 is
                 Paul
                 ,
                 Act.
                 13.9
                 .
                 The
                 History
                 of
                 Paul
                 is
                 notably
                 described
                 in
                 the
                 New
                 Testament
                 ,
                 especially
                 in
                 Phil.
                 3.
                 1
                 
                 Tim
                 ▪
                 1.
                 
                 And
                 in
                 Act.
                 13.
                 
                   to
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   Book
                   ,
                
                 but
                 more
                 summarily
                 ,
                 Act.
                 22.3
                 ,
                 to
                 22.
                 and
                 26.4
                 .
                 to
                 24.
                 
                 He
                 was
                 a
                 Iew
                 by
                 Nation
                 ;
                 of
                 the
                 Tribe
                 of
                 Benjamin
                 ;
                 of
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Cilicia
                 ;
                 borne
                 in
                 the
                 City
                 Tarsus
                 ,
                 (
                 which
                 being
                 a
                 Colony
                 and
                 having
                 the
                 priviledge
                 of
                 the
                 Romane
                 freedome
                 ,
                 Paul
                 though
                 of
                 Iewish
                 Parents
                 ,
                 yet
                 saith
                 he
                 was
                 a
                 Roman
                 free-born
                 ,
                 Act.
                 22.7.28
                 .
                 )
                 circumcised
                 the
                 eighth
                 day
                 ;
                 brought
                 up
                 at
                 the
                 feet
                 of
                 Gamaliel
                 ;
                 a
                 great
                 proficient
                 above
                 many
                 in
                 the
                 Iewish
                 Religion
                 ;
                 in
                 his
                 Zeale
                 persecuting
                 all
                 that
                 seemed
                 to
                 oppose
                 it
                 ;
                 held
                 the
                 garments
                 of
                 those
                 that
                 stoned
                 Stephen
                 ,
                 consenting
                 to
                 his
                 death
                 ;
                 made
                 havock
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 But
                 at
                 last
                 ,
                 as
                 he
                 was
                 in
                 his
                 Circuit
                 of
                 persecution
                 ,
                 he
                 
                 was
                 miraculously
                 converted
                 of
                 a
                 Wolfe
                 to
                 become
                 a
                 Lamb
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 a
                 Persecuter
                 to
                 be
                 a
                 prime
                 Apostle
                 ,
                 in
                 his
                 Apostleship
                 he
                 suffered
                 and
                 laboured
                 more
                 then
                 all
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 Apostles
                 ;
                 was
                 peculiarly
                 sent
                 to
                 teach
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 .
                 At
                 last
                 he
                 was
                 carryed
                 bound
                 to
                 Rome
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 he
                 was
                 be
                 headed
                 by
                 Nero
                 in
                 seventeenth
                 yeere
                 after
                 Christ's
                 Ascension
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 fourteenth
                 yeer
                 of
                 Nero
                 ,
                 and
                 thirty
                 fifth
                 yeere
                 after
                 his
                 conversion
                 ,
                 and
                 buried
                 in
                 the
                 
                   Ostiense
                   way
                
                 .
                 Hieronym
                 .
                 He
                 wrote
                 fourteen
                 Epistles
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 one
                 said
                 ,
                 
                   As
                   oft
                   as
                   I
                   read
                   Paul
                   ,
                   me
                   thinks
                   I
                   heare
                   not
                   words
                   so
                   much
                   as
                   thunders
                   ,
                
                 Paulum
                 quotiesc●nque
                 lego
                 ,
                 videor
                 mihi
                 non
                 verba
                 au●dire
                 ,
                 sed
                 tonitrua
                 .
                 
                   Hieronym
                   .
                   contr
                   .
                   Iovinian
                   .
                   de
                   Epist.
                   Paulin.
                   
                
              
               
                 
                   His
                   Epistle
                   to
                   the
                   Romanes
                
                 ,
                 though
                 no●
                 first
                 written
                 ,
                 yet
                 is
                 
                   set
                   first
                
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 By
                 reason
                 of
                 the
                 dignity
                 of
                 the
                 Romanes
                 to
                 whom
                 it
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 Rome
                 being
                 the
                 Seate
                 of
                 the
                 Empire
                 ,
                 and
                 Head
                 of
                 the
                 World.
                 2.
                 
                 Because
                 of
                 the
                 largenesse
                 of
                 the
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 this
                 being
                 the
                 longest
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Epistles
                 .
                 As
                 Isaiah
                 is
                 set
                 first
                 being
                 the
                 longest
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Prophets
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 But
                 especially
                 from
                 the
                 dignity
                 of
                 
                 the
                 matter
                 ,
                 and
                 dexterity
                 in
                 handling
                 it
                 .
                 The
                 Body
                 of
                 Divinity
                 is
                 so
                 admirably
                 herein
                 handled
                 ,
                 espicially
                 the
                 principall
                 points
                 of
                 
                   Election
                   ,
                   Reprobation
                   ,
                   Redemption
                   ,
                   Faith
                
                 and
                 
                   Iustification
                   by
                   Faith
                
                 ,
                 &c.
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 deservedly
                 called
                 by
                 some
                 
                   Clavis
                   Theologiae
                
                 ,
                 the
                 
                   Key
                   of
                   Divinity
                
                 ;
                 and
                 
                   Methodus
                   Scripturae
                   ,
                   the
                   Method
                   of
                   Scripture
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   When
                   it
                   was
                   written
                
                 ,
                 See
                 in
                 former
                 
                   Table
                   .
                   Where
                
                 it
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 considered
                 .
                 
                   Origen
                   in
                   Praefat.
                   Comment
                
                 .
                 thinks
                 at
                 Corinth
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 Because
                 he
                 commends
                 Phaebe
                 to
                 the
                 Romans
                 ,
                 Rom.
                 16.1
                 .
                 She
                 was
                 a
                 servant
                 to
                 the
                 Church
                 at
                 Cenchrea
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 a
                 Port
                 of
                 Corinth
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 Because
                 he
                 salutes
                 them
                 in
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 Gaius
                 his
                 Host
                 ,
                 &c.
                 Rom.
                 16.23
                 .
                 And
                 Gaius
                 a
                 Corinthian
                 ,
                 and
                 there
                 Baptized
                 by
                 Paul
                 1
                 Cor.
                 1.14
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 Because
                 he
                 salutes
                 them
                 in
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 
                   Erastus
                   Chamberlaine
                   of
                   the
                   City
                
                 ,
                 Rom.
                 16.23
                 .
                 Who
                 abode
                 at
                 Corinth
                 ,
                 2
                 Tim.
                 4.20
                 .
                 4.
                 
                 The
                 postscript
                 testifies
                 thus
                 much
                 .
              
               
                 Occasion
                 and
                 Scope
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 seemes
                 to
                 be
                 this
                 .
                 The
                 report
                 that
                 Paul
                 had
                 received
                 of
                 some
                 disagreements
                 both
                 in
                 judgement
                 and
                 affection
                 ,
                 in
                 them
                 
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 Rome
                 ,
                 who
                 were
                 partly
                 believing
                 Jewes
                 ,
                 partly
                 believing
                 Gentiles
                 .
                 The
                 Iewes
                 either
                 wholly
                 opposing
                 the
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 or
                 mingling
                 Law
                 and
                 Gospel
                 together
                 in
                 the
                 case
                 of
                 Justification
                 ▪
                 and
                 all
                 of
                 them
                 excluding
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 from
                 the
                 fellowship
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 and
                 despising
                 them
                 ,
                 insisting
                 too
                 much
                 upon
                 the
                 Prerogative
                 of
                 the
                 Jew
                 :
                 Contrariwise
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 ,
                 knowing
                 that
                 the
                 Jewes
                 were
                 rejected
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 implanted
                 in
                 their
                 stead
                 ,
                 too
                 much
                 insulted
                 over
                 them
                 as
                 a
                 people
                 cast
                 away
                 ,
                 boasting
                 of
                 their
                 own
                 wisdome
                 and
                 vertues
                 ,
                 and
                 using
                 their
                 Christian
                 liberty
                 with
                 offence
                 .
                 Now
                 to
                 reconcile
                 these
                 Controversies
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 settle
                 them
                 both
                 in
                 the
                 truth
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 unity
                 of
                 judgement
                 and
                 affection
                 ,
                 the
                 Apostle
                 being
                 hindred
                 from
                 coming
                 to
                 them
                 deals
                 by
                 letters
                 ;
                 
                   Demonstrating
                   that
                   neither
                   Iewes
                   had
                   cause
                   to
                   boast
                   of
                   their
                   righteousnesse
                   and
                   Prerogatives
                   ,
                   nor
                   Gentiles
                   of
                   their
                   wisdome
                   :
                   both
                   of
                   them
                   naturally
                   being
                   liable
                   to
                   eternal
                   condemnation
                   notwithstanding
                   ,
                   and
                   both
                   of
                   them
                   being
                   to
                   be
                   justified
                   by
                   Faith
                   in
                   Christ
                   alone
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   they
                   should
                   not
                   abuse
                   Grace
                   ,
                   but
                   walke
                   in
                   newnesse
                   of
                   life
                   ,
                
                 &c.
                 
              
               
               
                 
                   Generall
                   parts
                
                 .
                 In
                 this
                 Epistle
                 to
                 the
                 Romanes
                 are
                 chiefly
                 three
                 parts
                 .
              
               
                 
                   I.
                   
                     A
                     Preface
                  
                   to
                   the
                   whole
                   Epistle
                   ,
                   c.
                   1.1
                   .
                   to
                   17
                   ,
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     A
                     Treatise
                  
                   ,
                   contayning
                   the
                   main
                   substance
                   of
                   the
                   Epistle
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   either
                   ,
                   Informatory
                   and
                   Doctrinall
                   .
                   or
                   Hortatory
                   ,
                   and
                   Practicall
                   .
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Doctrinall
                       ,
                       viz
                       ,
                       Touching
                       the
                       cause
                       of
                       our
                       justification
                       ,
                       more
                       neere
                       ,
                       more
                       remote
                       .
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           
                             More
                             neere
                             cause
                             of
                             justification
                          
                           Where
                           ,
                           
                             
                               1.
                               
                               The
                               false
                               cause
                               ,
                               viz.
                               Works
                               ,
                               is
                               removed
                               ,
                               c.
                               1.17
                               .
                               
                                 to
                                 end
                                 .
                                 c.
                              
                               2.
                               
                               &
                               3.1
                               ,
                               
                                 to
                                 ver
                              
                               .
                               21.
                               
                            
                             
                               2.
                               
                               The
                               true
                               cause
                               ,
                               viz.
                               Faith
                               ,
                               is
                               
                                 
                                   1.
                                   
                                   Defended
                                   from
                                   Calumnies
                                   ,
                                   c.
                                   2.21
                                   .
                                   
                                     to
                                     the
                                     end
                                     ,
                                     &
                                  
                                   c.
                                   3.
                                   
                                
                                 
                                   2.
                                   
                                   Confirmed
                                   by
                                   Abrahams
                                   example
                                   ,
                                   and
                                   testimonies
                                   ,
                                   c.
                                   4.
                                   
                                
                                 
                                   3.
                                   
                                   Explicated
                                   by
                                   the
                                   fruits
                                   or
                                   effects
                                   thereof
                                   ;
                                   1.
                                   
                                   Inward
                                   ,
                                   viz.
                                   Peace
                                   with
                                   God
                                   ,
                                   and
                                   full
                                   assurance
                                   of
                                   Faith
                                   ,
                                   c.
                                   5.
                                   2.
                                   
                                   Outward
                                   ,
                                   viz.
                                   1
                                   Newnesse
                                   of
                                   life
                                   ,
                                   c.
                                   6.
                                   2
                                   
                                   Freedom
                                   from
                                   the
                                   curse
                                   of
                                   the
                                   Law
                                   ,
                                   c.
                                   7.
                                   3
                                   
                                   Constancy
                                   in
                                   the
                                   state
                                   of
                                   Grace
                                   ,
                                   against
                                   all
                                   condemnation
                                   ,
                                   notwithstanding
                                   al
                                   infirmities
                                   or
                                   afflictions
                                   ,
                                   within
                                   or
                                   without
                                   them
                                   that
                                   are
                                   in
                                   Christ
                                   ,
                                   c.
                                   8.
                                   
                                
                              
                            
                          
                        
                         
                           
                           2.
                           
                           
                             More
                             Remote
                             cause
                             of
                             justification
                             viz.
                          
                           Predestination
                           where
                           ,
                           of
                           
                             
                               1.
                               
                               The
                               Jewes
                               rejection
                               ,
                               described
                               ,
                               
                                 
                                   1.
                                   
                                   By
                                   the
                                   cause
                                   thereof
                                   ,
                                   Gods
                                   pleasure
                                   ,
                                   the
                                   Jewes
                                   unbeliefe
                                   ,
                                   c.
                                   9.
                                   
                                
                                 
                                   2.
                                   
                                   By
                                   the
                                   signes
                                   and
                                   effects
                                   thereof
                                   ,
                                   their
                                   blindnesse
                                   c.
                                   10.
                                   
                                
                              
                            
                             
                               2.
                               
                               The
                               Jewes
                               Restauration
                               ,
                               and
                               of
                               the
                               remnant
                               to
                               be
                               saved
                               ,
                               c.
                               11.
                               
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       
                         Practicall
                         and
                         Hortatory
                      
                       ,
                       inciting
                       to
                       good-works
                       ,
                       and
                       duties
                       ;
                       either
                       ,
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           Generall
                           ,
                           towards
                           God
                           and
                           man
                           ,
                           c.
                           12.
                           
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           Speciall
                           duties
                           ,
                           either
                           in
                           1.
                           
                           Things
                           necessary
                           ,
                           towards
                           Superiours
                           ,
                           c
                           ▪
                           13
                           ▪
                           2
                           Things
                           indifferent
                           and
                           Arbitrary
                           ,
                           towards
                           inferiours
                           ,
                           and
                           the
                           more
                           infirm
                           in
                           Faith
                           ,
                           c.
                           14.
                           &
                           ,
                           c.
                           15.
                           ver
                           .
                           1.
                           to
                           14.
                           
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
                 
                   III.
                   
                     A
                     conclusion
                  
                   of
                   the
                   whole
                   Epistle
                   ,
                   consisting
                   of
                   1
                   Excuses
                   about
                   his
                   freedome
                   in
                   writing
                   to
                   them
                   ,
                   his
                   not
                   coming
                   to
                   them
                   ;
                   and
                   other
                   advertisements
                   touching
                   his
                   purpose
                   of
                   seeing
                   them
                   ,
                   and
                   his
                   desires
                   of
                   their
                   prayers
                   ,
                   c.
                   15.
                   ver
                   .
                   14.
                   
                     to
                     the
                     end
                  
                   .
                   2.
                   
                   Commendations
                   and
                   Salutations
                   ,
                   c.
                   16.
                   
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 I
                 Corinth
                 :
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   first
                   Epistle
                   of
                   the
                   Apostle
                   Paul
                   to
                   the
                
                 CORINTHIANS
                 .
              
               
                 So
                 denominated
                 from
                 the
                 Penman
                 thereof
                 ,
                 Paul
                 (
                 of
                 whom
                 in
                 Epistle
                 to
                 the
                 Romanes
                 )
                 and
                 from
                 the
                 object
                 to
                 whom
                 he
                 wrote
                 it
                 ,
                 viz.
                 The
                 Corinthians
                 ;
                 or
                 the
                 
                   Church
                   of
                   God
                   at
                   Corinth
                
                 ,
                 1
                 Cor.
                 1.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 CORINTH
                 was
                 an
                 eminent
                 City
                 of
                 Achaia
                 (
                 which
                 Achaia
                 by
                 an
                 Isthmus
                 was
                 annexed
                 to
                 Greece
                 ,
                 neer
                 to
                 Athens
                 )
                 seated
                 in
                 an
                 Isthmus
                 ,
                 or
                 a
                 little
                 tract
                 of
                 Land
                 betwixt
                 two
                 Seas
                 ,
                 the
                 Aegean
                 and
                 Ionian
                 Sea
                 ,
                 A
                 most
                 famous
                 Mart
                 ,
                 very
                 populous
                 ,
                 and
                 flowing
                 with
                 wealth
                 ,
                 it
                 was
                 
                   Lumen
                   &
                   decus
                   totius
                   Graeciae
                
                 .
                 Cic.
                 pro
                 leg
                 .
                 Manil.
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   The
                   Light
                   and
                   glory
                   of
                   all
                   Greece
                
                 :
                 yet
                 very
                 infamous
                 for
                 luxury
                 and
                 multitudes
                 of
                 vices
                 .
                 Once
                 utterly
                 destroyed
                 by
                 L.
                 Mummius
                 the
                 Roman
                 Consul
                 ;
                 but
                 after
                 for
                 the
                 opportunity
                 of
                 situation
                 restored
                 to
                 its
                 ancient
                 splendour
                 by
                 
                   Augustus
                   .
                   
                   D.
                   Pareus
                   in
                   prolegom
                   .
                   in
                
                 I
                 
                   ad
                   Corinth
                   .
                   Paul
                
                 coming
                 from
                 Athens
                 to
                 Corinth
                 ,
                 laid
                 the
                 first
                 foundation
                 of
                 a
                 Church
                 there
                 ,
                 1
                 Cor.
                 3.10
                 .
                 He
                 was
                 the●r
                 Spirituall
                 Father
                 that
                 begot
                 them
                 ,
                 1
                 Cor.
                 4.15
                 .
                 Converting
                 ,
                 by
                 his
                 preaching
                 ,
                 Crispus
                 and
                 Sosthenes
                 chiefe
                 Rulers
                 of
                 the
                 Jewish
                 Synagogue
                 there
                 ;
                 and
                 many
                 other
                 Corinthians
                 ;
                 among
                 whom
                 Paul
                 continued
                 preaching
                 ,
                 a
                 yeare
                 and
                 six
                 Moneths
                 ;
                 God
                 assuring
                 him
                 by
                 night
                 in
                 a
                 Vision
                 ,
                 that
                 
                   he
                   had
                   much
                   people
                   in
                   that
                   City
                   .
                
                 Act.
                 18.1
                 ,
                 8
                 ,
                 9
                 ,
                 10
                 ,
                 11
                 ,
                 17.
                 
                 And
                 this
                 Church
                 of
                 Corinth
                 grew
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 most
                 eminen●
                 Churches
                 for
                 all
                 manner
                 of
                 spirituall
                 gifts
                 ,
                 1
                 Cor.
                 1.5
                 ,
                 6
                 ,
                 7.
                 
              
               
                 
                   When
                   and
                   where
                
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 See
                 in
                 the
                 Table
                 before
                 Epistle
                 to
                 Romanes
                 .
                 As
                 the
                 Epistle
                 to
                 Romanes
                 is
                 set
                 first
                 for
                 
                   Doctrine
                   of
                   Faith
                
                 :
                 So
                 this
                 is
                 set
                 second
                 for
                 
                   Doctrine
                   of
                   Church-government
                
                 ,
                 excellently
                 handled
                 therein
                 .
              
               
                 Occasion
                 of
                 writing
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 seemes
                 to
                 be
                 twofold
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 information
                 that
                 Paul
                 had
                 from
                 them
                 of
                 
                   the
                   House
                   of
                   Cloe
                
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 many
                 and
                 wofull
                 
                 distempers
                 that
                 infested
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 Corinth
                 after
                 Paul's
                 departure
                 ,
                 as
                 1
                 
                   Schismes
                   and
                   Divisions
                
                 1
                 Cor.
                 1.11
                 .
                 &c.
                 2
                 
                   Many
                   notorious
                   scandals
                
                 ,
                 as
                 Lusts
                 ,
                 Incest
                 ,
                 Covetousnesse
                 ,
                 Law-suits
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 1
                 Cor.
                 5.
                 
                 &
                 6.
                 3
                 
                 
                   Idolatrous
                   Communion
                   with
                   Infidels
                
                 in
                 their
                 Idoll-feasts
                 ,
                 1
                 Cor.
                 8.
                 
                 &
                 10.
                 4
                 
                 
                   Vncomely
                   habits
                
                 in
                 publique
                 Assemblies
                 ,
                 1
                 Cor.
                 11.3
                 ,
                 to
                 17.
                 5
                 
                 
                   Prophanations
                   of
                   the
                   Lords
                   Supper
                
                 ,
                 1
                 Cor.
                 11.17
                 .
                 
                   to
                   the
                   end
                
                 .
                 6
                 
                   Barbarous
                   confusion
                   in
                   their
                   publique
                   Church-Assemblies
                   ,
                
                 1
                 Cor.
                 14.
                 
                 And
                 7
                 finally
                 
                   such
                   Epicure-like
                   profanesse
                
                 ,
                 as
                 to
                 deny
                 the
                 Resurrection
                 and
                 eternall
                 life
                 ,
                 1
                 Cor.
                 15.12
                 ,
                 &c.
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 writing
                 of
                 some
                 of
                 the
                 Corinthians
                 unto
                 the
                 Apostle
                 for
                 satisfaction
                 in
                 some
                 particular
                 cases
                 ,
                 as
                 1
                 about
                 Marriage
                 .
                 2
                 About
                 
                   Things
                   sacrificed
                   to
                   Idols
                
                 .
                 3
                 About
                 
                   Spirituall
                   gifts
                
                 .
                 4
                 About
                 Prophesying
                 .
                 And
                 5
                 about
                 
                   charitable
                   Collections
                   for
                   the
                   Saints
                   in
                   Iudea
                   .
                
                 1
                 Cor.
                 7.1
                 .
              
               
                 Scope
                 .
                 The
                 Apostle
                 therefore
                 in
                 this
                 Epistle
                 principally
                 endeavours
                 ,
                 
                   To
                   apply
                   healing
                   medicines
                   speedily
                   to
                   all
                   the
                   evils
                   and
                   maladies
                   that
                   began
                   to
                   grow
                   in
                   that
                   Church
                   ;
                   and
                   to
                   give
                   them
                   satisfactory
                   Resolutions
                   in
                   all
                   the
                   particulars
                   ,
                   
                   wherein
                   they
                   craved
                   his
                   advise
                   from
                   the
                   Lord.
                   
                
              
               
                 
                   Generall
                   parts
                
                 .
                 In
                 this
                 I.
                 
                   Epistle
                   to
                   Corinthians
                
                 ,
                 consider
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       The
                       exordium
                       or
                       Preface
                    
                     to
                     the
                     whole
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.
                     v.
                     1.
                     to
                     10.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       A
                       Treatise
                    
                     of
                     severall
                     subjects
                     ,
                     according
                     as
                     the
                     present
                     state
                     and
                     necessity
                     of
                     the
                     Church
                     required
                     ,
                     in
                     respect
                     of
                     their
                     present
                     corruptions
                     abounding
                     ;
                     and
                     Paul's
                     Resolution
                     in
                     some
                     doubts
                     propounded
                     .
                     Herein
                     therefore
                     the
                     Apostle
                     ,
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         
                           Sharply
                           taxeth
                           their
                           Schismes
                           and
                           divisions
                           about
                           their
                           Ministers
                           ,
                           and
                           their
                           diversity
                           of
                           gifts
                           ,
                        
                         as
                         eloquence
                         ,
                         &c.
                         for
                         which
                         some
                         factiously
                         admired
                         one
                         ,
                         some
                         another
                         ,
                         c.
                         1
                         ,
                         10.
                         to
                         c.
                         5.
                         
                         Herein
                         note
                         1.
                         
                         An
                         emphaticall
                         exhortation
                         to
                         unity
                         ,
                         c.
                         1.10
                         .
                         to
                         14.
                         2.
                         
                         Paul's
                         tacit
                         clearing
                         himselfe
                         from
                         being
                         any
                         cause
                         of
                         these
                         divisions
                         among
                         them
                         ,
                         either
                         1
                         
                           By
                           His
                           Baptism
                        
                         ,
                         he
                         baptizing
                         very
                         few
                         ,
                         and
                         none
                         in
                         his
                         own
                         name
                         ,
                         v.
                         14.
                         to
                         17.
                         or
                         2
                         
                           By
                           his
                           Preaching
                        
                         amongst
                         them
                         ,
                         for
                         he
                         preached
                         Christ
                         crucified
                         ,
                         not
                         with
                         wisedome
                         of
                         words
                         to
                         entice
                         them
                         ,
                         but
                         in
                         demonstration
                         of
                         the
                         spirit
                         and
                         power
                         to
                         save
                         them
                         ,
                         yet
                         his
                         doctrine
                         was
                         farre
                         above
                         the
                         reach
                         of
                         carnall
                         men
                         c.
                         1
                         ,
                         17.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         and
                         ,
                         c.
                         2.
                         3.
                         
                         He
                         
                         shows
                         why
                         he
                         preached
                         to
                         thē
                         so
                         plainly
                         ,
                         because
                         they
                         were
                         carnal
                         ,
                         c.
                         3
                         ,
                         1.
                         to
                         5.
                         4.
                         
                         That
                         their
                         Teachers
                         should
                         be
                         no
                         such
                         cause
                         of
                         divisions
                         ;
                         They
                         are
                         but
                         Ministers
                         ,
                         can
                         do
                         nothing
                         without
                         God
                         ,
                         and
                         therefore
                         he
                         warnes
                         their
                         Teachers
                         to
                         take
                         heed
                         that
                         they
                         build
                         upon
                         Christ
                         the
                         foundation
                         ;
                         and
                         people
                         not
                         to
                         admire
                         mens
                         persons
                         ,
                         c.
                         3
                         ,
                         5.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                         5.
                         
                         He
                         directs
                         them
                         what
                         account
                         to
                         have
                         of
                         him
                         and
                         his
                         Ministry
                         ,
                         and
                         how
                         little
                         cause
                         they
                         have
                         to
                         prefer
                         their
                         other
                         eloquent
                         teachers
                         before
                         him
                         ,
                         c.
                         4.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         He
                         severely
                         reproveth
                         divers
                         notorious
                         scandals
                         amongst
                         them
                         .
                         As
                         1.
                         
                         Their
                         suffering
                         of
                         the
                         
                           incestuous
                           person
                        
                         among
                         them
                         ,
                         who
                         should
                         have
                         been
                         delivered
                         to
                         Sathan
                         by
                         their
                         Church-Governours
                         ,
                         c.
                         5.
                         2.
                         
                         Their
                         covetous
                         and
                         quarrelsome
                         law-suits
                         even
                         before
                         Infidels
                         ,
                         c.
                         6
                         ,
                         1.
                         to
                         12.
                         3.
                         
                         Their
                         fornications
                         ,
                         which
                         they
                         counted
                         as
                         indifferent
                         things
                         ,
                         c.
                         6.12
                         .
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                      
                       
                         3.
                         
                         He
                         resolveth
                         their
                         doubts
                         or
                         questions
                         propounded
                         to
                         him
                         ,
                         touching
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             Marriage
                             ,
                             and
                             therein
                             concerning
                             
                               
                                 1.
                                 
                                 Conjugall
                                 benevolence
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 7.1
                                 .
                                 to
                                 .
                                 8.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 2.
                                 
                                 The
                                 unmarried
                                 and
                                 widowes
                                 ,
                                 v.
                                 8
                                 ,
                                 9.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 3.
                                 
                                 Divorce
                                 ,
                                 v.
                                 10.
                                 to
                                 25.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 4.
                                 
                                 Virgins
                                 ,
                                 
                                   v
                                   ▪
                                
                                 25.
                                 
                                   to
                                   the
                                   end
                                
                                 .
                              
                            
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             Idolothytes
                             ,
                             or
                             things
                             sacrificed
                             to
                             Idols
                             ,
                             shewing
                             that
                             they
                             ought
                             not
                             
                             (
                             under
                             pretence
                             of
                             Christian
                             liberty
                             ,
                             )
                             eat
                             to
                             the
                             scandal
                             of
                             their
                             brethren
                             ,
                             c.
                             8
                             :
                             as
                             he
                             preached
                             without
                             wages
                             (
                             which
                             yet
                             were
                             due
                             to
                             him
                             )
                             that
                             he
                             might
                             avoid
                             the
                             calumny
                             of
                             his
                             Antagonists
                             ;
                             and
                             became
                             all
                             things
                             to
                             all
                             men
                             to
                             gaine
                             them
                             .
                             c.
                             9.
                             
                             By
                             other
                             arguments
                             he
                             condems
                             eating
                             things
                             sacrificed
                             to
                             Idols
                             ,
                             as
                             being
                             idolatry
                             ,
                             or
                             communion
                             with
                             devils
                             ,
                             and
                             inconsistent
                             with
                             communion
                             with
                             Christ
                             in
                             his
                             supper
                             ,
                             c.
                             10.
                             &
                             c.
                             11.1
                             .
                          
                        
                      
                       
                         4.
                         
                         He
                         directs
                         and
                         endeavours
                         to
                         reforme
                         their
                         practice
                         in
                         divers
                         particulars
                         .
                         1.
                         
                         How
                         men
                         and
                         women
                         are
                         to
                         behave
                         themselves
                         in
                         point
                         of
                         their
                         outward
                         Habits
                         ,
                         in
                         publique
                         Assemblies
                         ,
                         c.
                         11
                         ,
                         2.
                         to
                         17.
                         2.
                         
                         How
                         the
                         Lords
                         Saints
                         ought
                         to
                         be
                         managed
                         and
                         received
                         c.
                         11.
                         v.
                         17.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                         3.
                         
                         How
                         all
                         spirituall
                         gifts
                         are
                         to
                         be
                         employed
                         for
                         promoting
                         the
                         Churches
                         profit
                         and
                         preserving
                         the
                         unity
                         of
                         the
                         mysticall
                         body
                         ,
                         c.
                         12.
                         beyond
                         all
                         which
                         gifts
                         ,
                         grace
                         ,
                         as
                         love
                         ,
                         &c
                         ,
                         is
                         much
                         to
                         be
                         preferred
                         ;
                         yea
                         gifts
                         without
                         grace
                         are
                         as
                         nothing
                         ,
                         c.
                         13.
                         4.
                         
                         How
                         they
                         should
                         prophecy
                         ,
                         (
                         
                           the
                           woman
                           still
                           keeping
                           silence
                           in
                           their
                           Churches
                        
                         )
                         c.
                         14.
                         
                      
                       
                         5.
                         
                         He
                         condemnes
                         and
                         confutes
                         the
                         prophane
                         errour
                         of
                         them
                         that
                         denied
                         the
                         
                           Resurrection
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         15.
                         
                      
                       
                         
                         6.
                         
                         He
                         instructs
                         them
                         about
                         the
                         
                           Collections
                           for
                           the
                           Saints
                           at
                        
                         Jerusalem
                         ,
                         ●c
                         .
                         16
                         ,
                         1.2
                         ,
                         3
                         ,
                         4.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     III
                     ,
                     
                       The
                       Conclusion
                       of
                       the
                       whole
                       Epistle
                       ,
                    
                     with
                     certain
                     advertisements
                     about
                     more
                     private
                     affairs
                     ,
                     exhortations
                     to
                     certain
                     duties
                     ,
                     and
                     salutations
                     ,
                     c.
                     16.5
                     .
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 II
                 Corinth
                 .
              
               
                 THe
                 II.
                 Epistle
                 of
                 Paul
                 the
                 Apostle
                 to
                 the
                 CORINTHIANS
                 ,
                 So
                 called
                 from
                 Paul
                 the
                 Penman
                 of
                 it
                 .
                 (
                 of
                 whom
                 see
                 before
                 in
                 
                   Epistle
                   to
                   the
                   Romans
                
                 )
                 and
                 from
                 the
                 parties
                 to
                 whom
                 he
                 wrote
                 ,
                 viz.
                 The
                 
                   Church
                   at
                   Corinth
                
                 ,
                 (
                 of
                 which
                 see
                 in
                 I.
                 
                   to
                   Corinth
                
                 .
                 )
                 
                   and
                   to
                   all
                   the
                   Saints
                   in
                   all
                
                 Achaia
                 ,
                 2
                 Cor.
                 1.1
                 .
                 probably
                 there
                 being
                 many
                 Saints
                 in
                 that
                 Province
                 ,
                 who
                 could
                 not
                 so
                 safely
                 and
                 conveniently
                 meet
                 in
                 Church-Assemblyes
                 ,
                 but
                 were
                 dispersed
                 up
                 and
                 down
                 by
                 reason
                 of
                 the
                 turbulency
                 of
                 those
                 times
                 .
                 
                   Calvin
                   in
                   loc
                
                 .
              
               
                 When
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 see
                 before
                 in
                 the
                 Table
                 .
              
               
               
                 Occasion
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 seems
                 to
                 be
                 ,
                 
                   those
                   Calumnies
                   and
                   aspersions
                   cast
                   upon
                
                 Pa●ls
                 
                   words
                   and
                   actions
                   by
                   false
                   Apostles
                   and
                   other
                   his
                   adversaries
                   after
                   his
                   former
                   Epistle
                
                 ;
                 they
                 charged
                 him
                 with
                 l●vity
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 came
                 not
                 to
                 them
                 according
                 to
                 his
                 premise
                 :
                 
                   with
                   pride
                   and
                   tyrannicall
                   severity
                
                 ,
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 incestuous
                 person
                 :
                 with
                 
                   less●ning
                   the
                   authority
                   of
                   the
                   law
                
                 :
                 and
                 that
                 however
                 he
                 was
                 glorious
                 in
                 his
                 letters
                 ,
                 
                   yet
                   in
                   person
                   he
                   was
                   but
                   base
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                   Paul
                
                 therefore
                 wipes
                 off
                 these
                 aspersions
                 ,
                 &
                 shows
                 that
                 he
                 wrote
                 not
                 his
                 former
                 Epistle
                 to
                 them
                 for
                 any
                 such
                 ends
                 ,
                 but
                 for
                 promoting
                 of
                 their
                 salvation
                 .
                 So
                 that
                 this
                 Epistle
                 is
                 for
                 most
                 part
                 of
                 it
                 Apologeticall
                 ,
                 viz.
                 
                   Pauls
                   Apology
                   against
                   his
                   adversaries
                   calumnies
                   ,
                
                 and
                 this
                 the
                 end
                 and
                 Scope
                 of
                 it
                 ;
                 
                   as
                   also
                   to
                   testify
                   his
                   love
                   to
                   them
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   prevent
                   his
                   having
                   sorrow
                   from
                   them
                   ,
                   when
                   he
                   should
                   come
                   unto
                   them
                   .
                
                 2
                 Cor.
                 2.3
                 ,
                 4.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 .
                 are
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       An
                       introduction
                       or
                       Exordium
                    
                     to
                     his
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     c.
                     1
                     ,
                     1.
                     to
                     8.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       substance
                       of
                       his
                       Epistle
                    
                     ,
                     containing
                     a
                     Treatise
                     Apologeticall
                     and
                     Hortatory
                     .
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         
                           In
                           the
                           Apologeticall
                           or
                           excusatory
                           part
                        
                         of
                         he
                         Epistle
                         .
                         
                           
                           
                             1.
                             
                             He
                             purgeth
                             himselfe
                             both
                             from
                             the
                             charge
                             of
                             l●vity
                             and
                             temerity
                             that
                             he
                             came
                             not
                             to
                             them
                             according
                             to
                             his
                             promise
                             ,
                             1
                             Cor.
                             16.2
                             .
                             to
                             8.
                             
                             And
                             of
                             severity
                             in
                             the
                             case
                             of
                             the
                             incestuous
                             person
                             ,
                             showing
                             them
                             the
                             true
                             causes
                             of
                             his
                             absence
                             ,
                             wherein
                             (
                             to
                             clear
                             himself
                             from
                             severity
                             ,
                             &c
                             ,
                             )
                             he
                             inserts
                             his
                             exhortation
                             to
                             them
                             ,
                             touching
                             the
                             restoring
                             and
                             comforting
                             of
                             the
                             
                               incestuous
                               person
                            
                             ,
                             excommunicated
                             according
                             to
                             his
                             former
                             Epistle
                             ,
                             but
                             now
                             repenting
                             c.
                             1
                             ,
                             8.
                             
                               to
                               the
                               end
                               ,
                               and
                               c.
                            
                             2.
                             
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             He
                             commends
                             and
                             magnifies
                             his
                             ministery
                             to
                             them
                             ,
                             1
                             Partly
                             from
                             the
                             effect
                             it
                             had
                             on
                             them
                             ,
                             Converting
                             them
                             ,
                             c.
                             3
                             ,
                             1.
                             to
                             6.
                             2
                             
                             Partly
                             from
                             the
                             subject
                             matter
                             of
                             his
                             ministry
                             ,
                             viz.
                             The
                             Gospel
                             farre
                             surpassing
                             the
                             law
                             in
                             glory
                             ,
                             c.
                             3
                             ,
                             6.
                             
                               to
                               the
                               end
                            
                             .
                             3
                             Partly
                             from
                             his
                             undaunted
                             constancy
                             in
                             preaching
                             the
                             Gospel
                             ,
                             notwithstanding
                             all
                             afflictions
                             thereupon
                             incident
                             unto
                             him
                             ,
                             those
                             afflictions
                             working
                             for
                             him
                             a
                             far
                             more
                             exceeding
                             and
                             eternall
                             weight
                             of
                             glory
                             ,
                             c.
                             4.
                             
                             His
                             assurance
                             of
                             which
                             glory
                             he
                             demonstrates
                             upon
                             divers
                             grounds
                             ,
                             c.
                             5.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         
                           In
                           the
                           Hortatory
                           part
                           of
                           the
                           Epistle
                           ,
                        
                         He
                         exhorts
                         the
                         Corinthians
                         ,
                         and
                         beseecheth
                         them
                         
                           
                           
                             1.
                             
                             To
                             walke
                             worthy
                             of
                             the
                             Gospel
                             ,
                             and
                             not
                             to
                             receive
                             the
                             grace
                             of
                             God
                             in
                             vaine
                             ,
                             and
                             this
                             is
                             done
                             more
                             Generally
                             ,
                             c.
                             6
                             ,
                             1
                             ,
                             to
                             14.
                             
                             More
                             specially
                             by
                             avoiding
                             the
                             fellowship
                             of
                             insidels
                             and
                             idolaters
                             ,
                             c.
                             6
                             ,
                             14.
                             
                               to
                               the
                               end
                            
                             ,
                             and
                             c.
                             7
                             ,
                             1.
                             
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             To
                             beare
                             him
                             like
                             affection
                             in
                             receiving
                             his
                             doctrine
                             and
                             exhortations
                             ,
                             as
                             he
                             beares
                             towards
                             them
                             for
                             their
                             repentance
                             ;
                             and
                             kindnesse
                             to
                             
                               Titus
                               ,
                               c.
                            
                             7
                             ,
                             2.
                             
                               to
                               the
                               end
                            
                             .
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             To
                             a
                             liberall
                             contribution
                             ,
                             to
                             the
                             poor
                             Saints
                             at
                             Ierusalem
                             ,
                             and
                             in
                             Iudea
                             ;
                             and
                             this
                             by
                             many
                             emphaticall
                             Arguments
                             ,
                             c.
                             8
                             ,
                             and
                             c.
                             9.
                             
                          
                           
                             4.
                             
                             To
                             behave
                             themselves
                             with
                             such
                             du●ifull
                             obedience
                             to
                             his
                             doctrine
                             and
                             ministry
                             ,
                             that
                             he
                             may
                             have
                             cause
                             to
                             use
                             lenity
                             and
                             gentlenesse
                             towards
                             them
                             ,
                             and
                             not
                             be
                             put
                             to
                             exercise
                             that
                             severity
                             against
                             them
                             which
                             he
                             intended
                             against
                             some
                             ,
                             c
                             ,
                             10.
                             whereupon
                             (
                             that
                             he
                             may
                             vindicate
                             himselfe
                             and
                             his
                             Apostleship
                             from
                             contempt
                             in
                             their
                             eyes
                             ,
                             who
                             preferred
                             the
                             false
                             Apostles
                             before
                             him
                             )
                             he
                             enters
                             upon
                             a
                             necessitated
                             and
                             forced
                             commendation
                             of
                             himselfe
                             and
                             his
                             Apostleship
                             by
                             many
                             considerations
                             ,
                             c.
                             11.
                             and
                             c.
                             12.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       The
                       Conclusion
                       of
                       the
                       whole
                       Epistle
                       ,
                    
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         With
                         Comminations
                         of
                         severity
                         and
                         
                         sharpnesse
                         ,
                         which
                         he
                         will
                         use
                         towards
                         them
                         ,
                         if
                         they
                         repent
                         not
                         ,
                         c.
                         13
                         ,
                         1.
                         to
                         11.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         With
                         valedictory
                         exhortations
                         and
                         salutations
                         ,
                         c.
                         13.
                         v.
                         11
                         ,
                         12
                         ,
                         13
                         ,
                         14.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 Galatians
                 .
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   Epistle
                   of
                
                 Paul
                 
                   the
                   Apostle
                   to
                   the
                
                 GALATIANS
                 .
                 So
                 intituled
                 from
                 the
                 
                   Penman
                   Paul
                
                 ,
                 who
                 wrote
                 it
                 :
                 and
                 from
                 the
                 Churches
                 in
                 Galatia
                 to
                 whom
                 he
                 wrote
                 it
                 .
                 Gal.
                 1.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 Galatia
                 ,
                 so
                 called
                 from
                 Galli
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   The
                   French
                
                 ,
                 that
                 came
                 and
                 inhabited
                 there
                 ,
                 who
                 called
                 the
                 countrey
                 after
                 their
                 name
                 .
                 That
                 they
                 were
                 French
                 ,
                 all
                 agree
                 ;
                 but
                 from
                 what
                 part
                 of
                 France
                 they
                 came
                 ,
                 is
                 lesse
                 evident
                 ;
                 see
                 Calvin's
                 judgement
                 herein
                 ,
                 
                   Calv.
                   in
                   Argum.
                   Epist.
                   ad
                   Galat.
                   Galatia
                
                 was
                 an
                 ample
                 Province
                 of
                 
                   Asia
                   Minor
                
                 ,
                 neer
                 to
                 Phrygia
                 ,
                 into
                 which
                 anciently
                 entred
                 a
                 people
                 from
                 Gallia
                 of
                 Europe
                 ,
                 and
                 seated
                 themselves
                 betwixt
                 Bithynia
                 and
                 Cappadocia
                 ,
                 as
                 is
                 testified
                 by
                 
                   Strabo
                   .
                   l.
                
                 12.
                 
                 
                   Iustin.
                   l.
                
                 25.
                 
                   ab
                   initio
                   .
                   
                   Livi.
                   l.
                
                 8.
                 decad
                 .
                 4.
                 
                 
                   Plin.
                   Nat.
                   Hist.
                   l.
                
                 5.
                 c.
                 32.
                 
                 The
                 more
                 principall
                 cities
                 in
                 the
                 Province
                 of
                 Galatia
                 ,
                 (
                 as
                 
                   Appianus
                   in
                   Chronolog
                   .
                   fol.
                
                 44.
                 notes
                 )
                 were
                 these
                 
                   Synopa
                   ,
                   Pompriopolis
                   ,
                   Claudiopolis
                   ,
                   Ancyra
                   ,
                
                 (
                 the
                 Metropolis
                 ,
                 famous
                 for
                 an
                 ancient
                 Councel
                 there
                 ,
                 )
                 
                   Laodicea
                   ,
                   Antioch
                
                 and
                 Nicopolis
                 ,
                 D.
                 Pareus
                 
                   in
                   Com.
                   in
                   Gal.
                
                 1.2
                 .
                 Paul
                 with
                 Silas
                 and
                 Timothy
                 ,
                 travelled
                 through
                 the
                 region
                 of
                 Galatia
                 once
                 ,
                 but
                 were
                 forbidden
                 
                   of
                   the
                   Holy
                   Ghost
                   to
                   preach
                   the
                   word
                   in
                
                 Asia
                 ,
                 Act.
                 15.40
                 .
                 and
                 16.1
                 ,
                 2.3.6
                 But
                 afterwards
                 he
                 went
                 
                   over
                   all
                   the
                   Countrey
                   of
                
                 Galatia
                 and
                 Phrygia
                 
                   in
                   order
                   ,
                   strengthening
                   all
                   the
                   disciples
                   ,
                
                 Act.
                 18.23
                 .
                 In
                 which
                 countrey
                 of
                 Galatia
                 ,
                 in
                 most
                 of
                 the
                 famous
                 cities
                 ,
                 Paul
                 had
                 planted
                 famous
                 Churches
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 as
                 is
                 conceived
                 ,
                 Gal.
                 1.8
                 .
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 Occasion
                 .
                 It
                 seemes
                 by
                 the
                 current
                 of
                 the
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 that
                 after
                 Pauls
                 departure
                 from
                 Galatia
                 ,
                 having
                 planted
                 the
                 Gospel
                 there
                 :
                 there
                 came
                 among
                 them
                 false
                 Apostles
                 and
                 corrupt
                 teachers
                 ,
                 who
                 endeavoured
                 to
                 disgrace
                 Paul's
                 Apostleship
                 among
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 pervert
                 the
                 purity
                 and
                 simplicity
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 among
                 
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 pervert
                 the
                 purity
                 and
                 simplicitie
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 by
                 mixtures
                 of
                 legall
                 doctrines
                 :
                 urging
                 the
                 observance
                 of
                 both
                 morall
                 and
                 ceremoniall
                 law
                 ,
                 and
                 particularly
                 of
                 circumcision
                 ,
                 as
                 necessary
                 to
                 Justification
                 ;
                 so
                 mingling
                 and
                 blending
                 together
                 Law
                 and
                 
                   Gospell
                   ,
                   works
                
                 and
                 
                   faith
                   ,
                   Iudaisme
                
                 and
                 Christianisme
                 :
                 tending
                 dangerously
                 to
                 the
                 subversion
                 of
                 that
                 Church
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   Hence
                   the
                   Apostle
                   yearning
                   over
                   these
                   Churches
                   ,
                   writes
                   this
                   Epistle
                   to
                   them
                   ,
                   to
                   recover
                   them
                   out
                   of
                   this
                   errour
                   in
                   that
                   fundamentall
                   point
                   of
                   Iustification
                   :
                   to
                   convince
                   them
                   of
                   Iustification
                   by
                   faith
                   only
                   ;
                   to
                   demonstrate
                   unto
                   them
                   the
                   nature
                   and
                   use
                   of
                   morall
                   and
                   ceremoniall
                   law
                   :
                   and
                   incite
                   them
                   to
                   a
                   holy
                   Christian
                   Conversation
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 to
                 this
                 end
                 ,
                 are
                 ,
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       An
                       Exordium
                    
                     ,
                     preface
                     ,
                     or
                     entrance
                     into
                     the
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     wherein
                     he
                     notably
                     asserts
                     the
                     divine
                     authority
                     of
                     his
                     Apostleship
                     ,
                     against
                     false
                     Apostles
                     denying
                     it
                     ,
                     c
                     ,
                     1
                     ,
                     1.
                     to
                     6.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       A
                       Treatise
                    
                     containing
                     matters
                     ,
                     
                       Reprehensory
                       ,
                       Informatory
                    
                     or
                     doctrinall
                     ,
                     and
                     
                       Hortatory
                       ▪
                    
                     
                       
                       
                         I
                         ,
                         Reprehensory
                         ,
                         wherein
                         he
                         sharply
                         taxeth
                         them
                         that
                         they
                         had
                         so
                         soon
                         fallen
                         from
                         the
                         Gospell
                         doctrine
                         of
                         Justification
                         by
                         faith
                         ,
                         which
                         he
                         had
                         preached
                         to
                         them
                         ,
                         to
                         an
                         opinion
                         of
                         Justification
                         by
                         the
                         works
                         of
                         the
                         law
                         ,
                         c.
                         1
                         ,
                         6.
                         to
                         c.
                         3
                         ,
                         1.
                         
                         To
                         this
                         end
                         that
                         he
                         may
                         more
                         fully
                         convince
                         them
                         of
                         their
                         errour
                         in
                         forsaking
                         the
                         Gospel
                         which
                         he
                         preached
                         ,
                         he
                         shewes
                         ,
                         after
                         his
                         serious
                         obtestation
                         ,
                         1.
                         
                         How
                         he
                         had
                         his
                         doctrine
                         from
                         God
                         ,
                         who
                         called
                         him
                         to
                         preach
                         to
                         the
                         Gentiles
                         ,
                         c.
                         1
                         ,
                         11.
                         to
                         16.
                         2.
                         
                         How
                         faithfully
                         he
                         had
                         preached
                         the
                         Gospell
                         committed
                         to
                         him
                         ,
                         withstanding
                         all
                         legall
                         mixtures
                         in
                         point
                         of
                         Justification
                         ,
                         c.
                         1
                         ,
                         16.
                         to
                         c.
                         3
                         ,
                         1.
                         
                      
                       
                         II.
                         
                           Informatory
                           or
                           Doctrinall
                        
                         ,
                         wherein
                         he
                         asserts
                         and
                         proves
                         the
                         doctrine
                         of
                         Justification
                         by
                         faith
                         alone
                         ,
                         and
                         not
                         by
                         legall
                         works
                         ,
                         by
                         many
                         Arguments
                         ,
                         c.
                         3
                         ,
                         4.
                         
                         As
                         for
                         example
                         ,
                         because
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             They
                             received
                             the
                             spirit
                             not
                             by
                             preaching
                             of
                             the
                             law
                             ,
                             but
                             by
                             preaching
                             of
                             faith
                             ,
                             c.
                             3
                             ,
                             1.
                             to
                             6.
                             
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             Abraham
                             the
                             father
                             of
                             the
                             faithfull
                             was
                             justified
                             by
                             faith
                             ;
                             consequently
                             so
                             must
                             his
                             faithfull
                             seed
                             be
                             justified
                             whether
                             Jews
                             or
                             Gentiles
                             ,
                             c.
                             3
                             ,
                             6.
                             to
                             15.
                             
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             The
                             heavenly
                             inheritance
                             is
                             not
                             by
                             law
                             ,
                             but
                             by
                             promise
                             ,
                             therefore
                             of
                             faith
                             ,
                             c.
                             3
                             ,
                             15.
                             to
                             19.
                             
                             And
                             here
                             by
                             way
                             of
                             prolepsis
                             to
                             prevent
                             objections
                             ,
                             he
                             shews
                             what
                             was
                             the
                             use
                             
                             of
                             the
                             law
                             before
                             Christ
                             ,
                             and
                             why
                             the
                             ceremoniall
                             law
                             is
                             abolished
                             at
                             Christs
                             comming
                             ;
                             c.
                             3
                             ,
                             20.
                             to
                             c.
                             4.
                             v.
                             12.
                             
                             And
                             he
                             lenisies
                             the
                             sharpnesse
                             of
                             his
                             former
                             rebukes
                             ,
                             by
                             signifying
                             his
                             humble
                             ,
                             modest
                             and
                             tender
                             carriage
                             towards
                             them
                             ,
                             c.
                             4
                             ,
                             12.
                             to
                             21.
                             
                          
                           
                             4.
                             
                             The
                             very
                             testimony
                             of
                             the
                             law
                             it selfe
                             condemnes
                             this
                             Justification
                             by
                             the
                             works
                             of
                             the
                             Law
                             ,
                             as
                             he
                             evidences
                             in
                             the
                             Allegory
                             of
                             Hagar
                             and
                             
                               Sarah
                               ,
                               c.
                            
                             4
                             ,
                             21.
                             
                               to
                               the
                               end
                            
                             .
                          
                        
                      
                       
                         III.
                         Hortatory
                         ,
                         here
                         the
                         Apostle
                         exhorts
                         them
                         1.
                         
                         Constantly
                         to
                         persist
                         in
                         their
                         Christian
                         Liberty
                         from
                         the
                         ceremoniall
                         law
                         ,
                         c.
                         5
                         ,
                         1.
                         to
                         13.
                         2.
                         
                         Not
                         to
                         abuse
                         their
                         Christian
                         liberty
                         ,
                         v.
                         13.
                         3.
                         
                         To
                         severall
                         generall
                         duties
                         of
                         Christianity
                         ,
                         c.
                         5
                         ,
                         14.
                         to
                         c.
                         6
                         ,
                         11.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       A
                       Conclusion
                    
                     of
                     the
                     whole
                     Epistle
                     containing
                     ,
                     1
                     
                       A
                       Testification
                    
                     of
                     his
                     love
                     unto
                     them
                     ,
                     in
                     writing
                     to
                     them
                     with
                     his
                     own
                     hand
                     .
                     2
                     
                       A
                       commonefaction
                    
                     against
                     false
                     teachers
                     .
                     3
                     
                       An
                       opposition
                    
                     of
                     his
                     owne
                     example
                     against
                     that
                     of
                     the
                     false
                     Apostles
                     ,
                     he
                     preaching
                     the
                     Gospel
                     sincerely
                     ,
                     walking
                     accordingly
                     ,
                     and
                     being
                     willing
                     to
                     suffer
                     for
                     it
                     ;
                     and
                     his
                     4
                     
                       Valediction
                       ,
                       c.
                    
                     6
                     ,
                     11.
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                    
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 Ephesians
                 .
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   Epistle
                   of
                   the
                   Apostle
                
                 Paul
                 
                   to
                   the
                
                 EPHESIANS
                 .
                 So
                 denominated
                 from
                 the
                 
                   Saints
                   at
                   Ephesus
                
                 to
                 whom
                 Paul
                 wrote
                 ,
                 Eph.
                 1.1
                 .
                 EPHESUS
                 was
                 a
                 city
                 on
                 the
                 shore
                 of
                 the
                 
                   Ionian
                   sea
                
                 ,
                 looking
                 towards
                 the
                 west
                 of
                 
                   Asia
                   Minor
                
                 ,
                 of
                 old
                 a
                 city
                 of
                 great
                 traffique
                 ,
                 but
                 much
                 addicted
                 to
                 magick
                 Arts
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 superstition
                 ,
                 there
                 being
                 the
                 Temple
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 goddesse
                 
                   Diana
                   ,
                   Act.
                
                 19
                 ,
                 Paul
                 came
                 to
                 Ephesus
                 at
                 first
                 ,
                 and
                 reasoned
                 with
                 the
                 Jewes
                 in
                 their
                 Synagogues
                 ,
                 but
                 tarried
                 not
                 there
                 at
                 that
                 time
                 ,
                 because
                 he
                 hasted
                 to
                 keep
                 the
                 
                   feast
                   at
                   Ierusalem
                
                 ,
                 Acts
                 18
                 ,
                 19
                 ,
                 20
                 ,
                 21.
                 
                 After
                 that
                 he
                 came
                 a
                 second
                 time
                 to
                 Ephesus
                 ,
                 and
                 continued
                 there
                 preaching
                 and
                 disputing
                 for
                 two
                 years
                 and
                 three
                 moneths
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 planted
                 a
                 famous
                 Church
                 there
                 ,
                 Act.
                 19.1
                 ,
                 8
                 ,
                 10.
                 &c.
                 
                 1
                 Cor.
                 16.9
                 ,
                 till
                 by
                 the
                 uproare
                 at
                 Ephesus
                 he
                 was
                 necessitated
                 to
                 depart
                 ,
                 Act.
                 
                 20.1
                 .
                 yet
                 after
                 his
                 departure
                 into
                 Macedonia
                 ,
                 Act.
                 19.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 he
                 committed
                 the
                 care
                 and
                 inspection
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 at
                 Ephesus
                 unto
                 Timothy
                 ,
                 1
                 Tim.
                 1.3
                 ,
                 4.
                 &c.
                 
                 And
                 Paul
                 being
                 afterwards
                 at
                 Miletus
                 ,
                 called
                 thither
                 the
                 Elders
                 of
                 Ephesus
                 ,
                 exhorting
                 and
                 encouraging
                 them
                 in
                 their
                 charge
                 ,
                 knowing
                 they
                 should
                 see
                 his
                 face
                 no
                 more
                 ,
                 Acts
                 20.17
                 .
                 
                   to
                   the
                   end
                
                 .
                 After
                 Timothy
                 ,
                 it
                 is
                 supposed
                 
                   Iohn
                   the
                   Evangelist
                
                 was
                 Bishop
                 of
                 this
                 Church
                 .
              
               
                 
                   When
                   and
                   Whence
                
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 See
                 in
                 Table
                 before
                 
                   Epistle
                   to
                   Romans
                
                 .
              
               
                 Occasion
                 of
                 Pauls
                 writing
                 to
                 the
                 Ephesians
                 ,
                 was
                 not
                 Schismes
                 and
                 Scandals
                 ,
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 Corinth
                 ;
                 nor
                 false
                 doctrine
                 supplanting
                 justification
                 by
                 faith
                 ,
                 that
                 fundamentall
                 point
                 ,
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 Galatia
                 ;
                 But
                 the
                 Apostles
                 singular
                 tendernesse
                 and
                 provident
                 care
                 of
                 this
                 Church
                 ,
                 (
                 he
                 being
                 not
                 now
                 farre
                 from
                 his
                 death
                 ,
                 )
                 lest
                 they
                 should
                 faint
                 or
                 be
                 discouraged
                 by
                 his
                 bonds
                 at
                 Rome
                 ,
                 and
                 be
                 weary
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 through
                 the
                 Crosse.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Scope
                   ,
                   To
                   encourage
                   the
                   Ephesians
                   to
                   
                   constancy
                   in
                   faith
                   and
                   piety
                   ,
                   and
                   growth
                   therein
                   ,
                   notwithstanding
                   all
                   his
                   or
                   their
                   tribulations
                   for
                   the
                   Gospel
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   Parts
                
                 ,
                 To
                 this
                 end
                 ,
                 are
                 ▪
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       The
                       Inscription
                       or
                       Exordi●in
                    
                     of
                     the
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     c.
                     1
                     ,
                     1
                     ,
                     2.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       Body
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     being
                     Doctrinall
                     and
                     Hortatory
                     .
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         Doctrinall
                         ,
                         wherein
                         he
                         laid
                         down
                         Gods
                         benefits
                         to
                         them
                         and
                         us
                         ,
                         or
                         the
                         causes
                         of
                         salvation
                         .
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             Gods
                             eternall
                             and
                             free
                             Predestination
                             of
                             us
                             to
                             adoption
                             in
                             Christ
                             ,
                             through
                             faith
                             ,
                             c.
                             1.
                             
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             Redemption
                             by
                             the
                             bloud
                             of
                             Christ
                             ,
                             and
                             effectuall
                             vocation
                             by
                             his
                             grace
                             ,
                             c.
                             2.
                             
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             Publication
                             of
                             the
                             riches
                             of
                             Christ
                             by
                             the
                             Gospel
                             ,
                             especially
                             by
                             his
                             ministery
                             to
                             the
                             Gentiles
                             .
                             c.
                             3.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         Hortatory
                         ,
                         wherein
                         by
                         way
                         of
                         gratitude
                         for
                         former
                         benefits
                         ,
                         he
                         stirs
                         them
                         up
                         to
                         divers
                         Christian
                         duties
                         ,
                         which
                         are
                         either
                         ,
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             More
                             generall
                             and
                             common
                             to
                             all
                             Christians
                             ,
                             c.
                             4.
                             and
                             c.
                             5
                             ,
                             1.
                             to
                             22.
                             
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             More
                             speciall
                             and
                             peculiar
                             to
                             some
                             particular
                             relations
                             ,
                             as
                             to
                             ,
                             
                               
                                 1.
                                 
                                 Husbands
                                 and
                                 wives
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 5.21
                                 .
                                 
                                   to
                                   the
                                   end
                                
                                 .
                              
                               
                                 
                                 2.
                                 
                                 Parents
                                 and
                                 children
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 6
                                 ,
                                 1.
                                 to
                                 5.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 3.
                                 
                                 Masters
                                 and
                                 servants
                                 ,
                                 c.
                                 6
                                 ,
                                 5.
                                 to
                                 10.
                                 
                              
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       The
                       Conclusion
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     ,
                     wherein
                     he
                     encourages
                     them
                     to
                     be
                     strong
                     and
                     constant
                     against
                     all
                     temptations
                     ,
                     through
                     the
                     help
                     of
                     
                       the
                       compleat
                       Armour
                       of
                       God
                    
                     ,
                     described
                     ;
                     showes
                     why
                     he
                     sent
                     Tychicus
                     to
                     them
                     ,
                     and
                     so
                     concludes
                     ,
                     c.
                     6
                     ,
                     10.
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                    
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 Philippi
                 :
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   Epistle
                   of
                   Paul
                   the
                   Apostle
                   to
                   the
                
                 PHILIPPIANS
                 .
                 So
                 intituled
                 because
                 written
                 by
                 Paul
                 to
                 the
                 Saints
                 ,
                 Bishops
                 and
                 Deacons
                 at
                 Philippi
                 ,
                 Phil.
                 1.1
                 .
                 PHILIPPI
                 was
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 two
                 cities
                 ,
                 viz.
                 one
                 in
                 Thessalie
                 ,
                 at
                 first
                 called
                 Dathos
                 ,
                 but
                 after
                 Philippi
                 from
                 
                   Philip
                   of
                   Macedo
                
                 who
                 repaired
                 it
                 .
                 
                   Alsted
                   .
                   Praecog
                   .
                   Theol.
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 124.
                 
                 Another
                 a
                 city
                 of
                 Macedonia
                 ,
                 situate
                 in
                 the
                 confines
                 of
                 Thracia
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 fields
                 whereof
                 Pompey
                 was
                 overcome
                 by
                 Caesar
                 ;
                 and
                 after
                 
                 
                   Brutus
                   and
                   Cassius
                
                 ,
                 by
                 
                   Anthony
                   and
                   O●●avi●s
                
                 .
                 This
                 latter
                 Philippi
                 ,
                 is
                 here
                 meant
                 to
                 this
                 
                   Philippi
                   ,
                   Paul
                
                 came
                 ,
                 being
                 warned
                 by
                 vision
                 to
                 go
                 into
                 Macedonia
                 ,
                 Act.
                 16.9
                 .
                 
                   to
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   chapt
                   .
                
                 Here
                 Lydia
                 and
                 the
                 Iailor
                 were
                 converted
                 ,
                 and
                 Paul
                 here
                 laid
                 the
                 foundation
                 of
                 a
                 slourishing
                 Church
                 ,
                 
                   Calv.
                   Argum.
                   in
                   Ep.
                   ad
                   Philip.
                   
                
              
               
                 When
                 and
                 Whence
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 see
                 in
                 former
                 Table
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 Occasion
                 ,
                 the
                 Church
                 at
                 Philippi
                 sent
                 their
                 bounty
                 to
                 Paul
                 now
                 Prisoner
                 at
                 Rome
                 ,
                 to
                 support
                 him
                 and
                 supply
                 his
                 wants
                 there
                 ,
                 by
                 Epaphroditus
                 their
                 Pastor
                 ,
                 who
                 doubtlesse
                 coming
                 to
                 Paul
                 ,
                 disclosed
                 to
                 him
                 the
                 spirituall
                 stare
                 of
                 that
                 Church
                 ,
                 whereupon
                 Paul
                 writes
                 this
                 Epistle
                 from
                 Rome
                 ,
                 by
                 
                   Epaphrodit
                   us
                
                 Phil.
                 2.25
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   To
                   confirme
                   the
                   Philippians
                   in
                   faith
                   and
                   Godlinesse
                   ,
                   to
                   warne
                   them
                   against
                   Seducers
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   testify
                   his
                   thankfulnesse
                   for
                   their
                   bountifull
                   remembrance
                   of
                   him
                   ,
                   in
                   his
                   distresses
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   Parts
                
                 ,
                 to
                 this
                 ●nd
                 are
                 
                   
                   
                     I.
                     
                       An
                       Exordium
                       or
                       Preface
                    
                     to
                     his
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     c.
                     1
                     ,
                     1
                     ,
                     2.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       Substance
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     ,
                     wherein
                     he
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         Confirmes
                         them
                         in
                         the
                         faith
                         ,
                         by
                         Promising
                         to
                         them
                         Gods
                         perfecting
                         grace
                         ,
                         Praising
                         their
                         zeal
                         ,
                         Testifying
                         his
                         love
                         to
                         them
                         ,
                         Removing
                         the
                         Scandall
                         of
                         the
                         Crosse
                         ,
                         and
                         Intimating
                         his
                         great
                         desire
                         for
                         the
                         furtherance
                         and
                         joy
                         of
                         their
                         faith
                         ,
                         c.
                         1
                         ,
                         3
                         ,
                         to
                         27.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         Exhorts
                         them
                         to
                         Piety
                         ,
                         viz.
                         to
                         bearing
                         the
                         Crosse
                         ,
                         unity
                         ,
                         humility
                         of
                         minde
                         ,
                         and
                         purity
                         of
                         life
                         ,
                         c.
                         1
                         ,
                         27.
                         to
                         c.
                         2
                         ,
                         19.
                         
                      
                       
                         3.
                         
                         Commends
                         their
                         faithfull
                         Ministers
                         ,
                         
                           Timothy
                           and
                           Epaphroditus
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         2
                         ,
                         19.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                      
                       
                         4.
                         
                         Warnes
                         them
                         of
                         the
                         false
                         Doctrine
                         of
                         false
                         Apostles
                         ,
                         that
                         would
                         mingle
                         works
                         with
                         faith
                         in
                         Justification
                         ,
                         opposing
                         against
                         them
                         his
                         owne
                         example
                         ,
                         desiring
                         the
                         Philippians
                         to
                         imitate
                         him
                         ,
                         c.
                         3.
                         
                      
                       
                         5.
                         
                         Encourages
                         them
                         in
                         divers
                         particular
                         and
                         generall
                         duties
                         ,
                         c.
                         4
                         ,
                         1.
                         to
                         10.
                         
                      
                       
                         6.
                         
                         
                           Gratefully
                           commemorates
                        
                         their
                         bounty
                         to
                         him
                         ,
                         c.
                         4
                         ,
                         10.
                         to
                         21.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       The
                       Conclusion
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     ,
                     with
                     salutations
                     and
                     a
                     valediction
                     ,
                     c.
                     4
                     ,
                     21
                     ,
                     22
                     ,
                     23.
                     
                  
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 Colossians
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   Epistle
                   of
                   the
                   Apostle
                   Paul
                   to
                   the
                
                 COLOSSIANS
                 .
                 So
                 intituled
                 from
                 the
                 Colossians
                 to
                 whom
                 Paul
                 wrote
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 
                   to
                   the
                   Saints
                   and
                   faithfull
                   Brethren
                   in
                   Christ
                   ,
                   which
                   are
                   at
                   Colosse
                   ,
                
                 Col.
                 1.2
                 .
                 These
                 Colossians
                 were
                 not
                 that
                 people
                 dwelling
                 in
                 Rodes
                 (
                 called
                 Colossians
                 from
                 that
                 huge
                 Colossus
                 or
                 
                   Image
                   of
                   the
                   Sunne
                
                 70
                 
                   Cubites
                   high
                
                 ,
                 there
                 erected
                 :
                 But
                 rather
                 those
                 inhabitants
                 of
                 Colosse
                 a
                 chiefe
                 City
                 in
                 Phrygia
                 in
                 
                   Asia
                   Minor
                
                 ,
                 neere
                 unto
                 Hierapolis
                 and
                 Laodicea
                 ;
                 as
                 Hierome
                 and
                 Chrysostome
                 thinke
                 .
                 And
                 this
                 Epistle
                 it selfe
                 seemes
                 to
                 intimate
                 thus
                 much
                 ,
                 wherein
                 he
                 mentions
                 Epaphr●s
                 his
                 zeale
                 for
                 them
                 at
                 
                   Colosse
                   ,
                   Laodicea
                   ,
                   and
                   Hierapolis
                   ,
                
                 Col.
                 4.13
                 .
                 Bids
                 them
                 salu●e
                 the
                 brethren
                 in
                 Laodicea
                 ,
                 ver
                 .
                 15.
                 and
                 that
                 
                   this
                   Epistle
                   be
                   read
                   in
                   the
                   Church
                   of
                   the
                   Laodiceans
                   ,
                
                 ver
                 .
                 16.
                 
                 Now
                 Laodicea
                 and
                 Hierapolis
                 are
                 neere
                 Colosse
                 ,
                 but
                 
                 farre
                 distant
                 from
                 Rhodes
                 ,
                 as
                 learned
                 writers
                 import
                 .
                 
                   Xenophon
                   in
                
                 1.
                 
                   de
                   expedit
                   .
                   Cyri
                
                 ;
                 writes
                 ,
                 That
                 after
                 he
                 entred
                 into
                 Phrygia
                 ,
                 he
                 went
                 streight
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   Vnto
                   Colosse
                   a
                   City
                   of
                   universall
                   resort
                   ,
                   rich
                   ,
                   and
                   great
                   .
                
                 Euseb.
                 in
                 Chronic
                 .
                 saith
                 ,
                 
                   That
                   three
                   Cities
                   of
                   Asia
                   ,
                   Laodicea
                   ,
                   Hierapolis
                   and
                   Colosse
                   fell
                   with
                   one
                   and
                   the
                   same
                   earthquake
                   .
                
                 And
                 Plin.
                 in
                 
                   Nat.
                   Hist.
                   l.
                
                 5.
                 c.
                 32.
                 
                 Seates
                 not
                 Colosse
                 in
                 any
                 Iland
                 ,
                 but
                 among
                 the
                 Cities
                 of
                 the
                 Continent
                 .
              
               
                 When
                 and
                 whence
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 see
                 in
                 the
                 former
                 Table
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Occasion
                   .
                   Epaphras
                
                 fellow-labourer
                 with
                 the
                 Apostles
                 ,
                 had
                 in
                 Colosse
                 with
                 other
                 Ministers
                 planted
                 a
                 Church
                 .
                 The
                 Faith
                 preached
                 to
                 the
                 Colossians
                 was
                 impugned
                 ,
                 Partly
                 by
                 some
                 converted
                 out
                 of
                 Iudaisme
                 who
                 urged
                 the
                 Ceremonies
                 of
                 the
                 Law
                 as
                 necessary
                 to
                 Salvation
                 ,
                 confounding
                 Christ
                 and
                 Moses
                 together
                 :
                 Partly
                 by
                 some
                 converted
                 out
                 of
                 Gentilisme
                 ,
                 who
                 obtruded
                 Philosophicall
                 subtilties
                 upon
                 them
                 ,
                 counting
                 the
                 simplicity
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 too
                 much
                 below
                 wise
                 men
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 blended
                 Theology
                 
                 with
                 Philosophy
                 ,
                 The
                 Apostle
                 therefore
                 being
                 prisoner
                 at
                 Rome
                 ,
                 writes
                 to
                 them
                 to
                 instruct
                 and
                 stablish
                 them
                 in
                 the
                 true
                 Doctrine
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 taught
                 them
                 by
                 Epaphras
                 against
                 all
                 the
                 impostures
                 of
                 false
                 Teachers
                 .
              
               
                 Scope
                 .
                 To
                 shew
                 ,
                 
                   That
                   all
                   hope
                   of
                   mans
                   Salvation
                   is
                   grounded
                   in
                   Christ
                   alone
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   therefore
                   we
                   should
                   fully
                   rest
                   our selves
                   in
                   the
                   Faith
                   of
                   Christ
                   ,
                   and
                   live
                   according
                   to
                   Gospel
                   Rules
                   ,
                   rejecting
                   all
                   Mosaicall
                   Ceremonies
                   ,
                   and
                   Philosophicall
                   speculations
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 .
                 In
                 this
                 Epistle
                 are
                 ,
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       The
                       Preface
                    
                     ,
                     containing
                     ,
                     1.
                     
                     The
                     Inscription
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.1
                     ,
                     2
                     ,
                     3.
                     2.
                     
                     The
                     Entrance
                     into
                     the
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     wherein
                     he
                     commends
                     their
                     Faith
                     and
                     other
                     graces
                     ,
                     and
                     wishes
                     their
                     growth
                     therein
                     ,
                     v.
                     3.
                     to
                     12.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       body
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     consisting
                     of
                     matters
                     Doctrinall
                     and
                     Practicall
                     .
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         Doctrinall
                         ,
                         where
                         he
                         ,
                         1.
                         
                         
                           Describes
                           Iesus
                           Christ
                           and
                           his
                           benefits
                        
                         most
                         lively
                         ▪
                         that
                         he
                         is
                         the
                         true
                         sonne
                         of
                         God
                         ,
                         head
                         and
                         Saviour
                         of
                         his
                         Church
                         most
                         al-sufficient
                         ,
                         c.
                         1.12
                         ,
                         to
                         c.
                         2.8
                         .
                         2.
                         
                         
                           Confutes
                           Seducers
                        
                         that
                         obtruded
                         on
                         the
                         Colossians
                         either
                         Philosophicall
                         notions
                         ,
                         or
                         Mosaicall
                         
                         antiquated
                         Ceremonies
                         ,
                         c.
                         2.8
                         .
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         Practicall
                         ,
                         where
                         he
                         instructs
                         and
                         exhorts
                         them
                         in
                         Practicall
                         duties
                         either
                         1.
                         
                         Generall
                         ,
                         common
                         to
                         all
                         Christians
                         ,
                         c.
                         3.1
                         ,
                         to
                         18.
                         2.
                         
                         Speciall
                         ,
                         peculiar
                         to
                         some
                         Relations
                         ,
                         Husbands
                         ,
                         Wives
                         ,
                         Parents
                         ,
                         Children
                         ,
                         Masters
                         and
                         Servants
                         ,
                         c.
                         3.18
                         .
                         to
                         c.
                         4.2
                         .
                         where
                         he
                         annexes
                         some
                         generall
                         exhortations
                         ver
                         .
                         2.
                         to
                         7.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     III.
                     Conclusion
                     of
                     the
                     whole
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     contayning
                     some
                     private
                     Affairs
                     and
                     Salutations
                     ,
                     c.
                     4.7
                     .
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                    
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 I
                 Thessal
                 :
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   first
                   Epistle
                   of
                   Paul
                   the
                   Apostle
                   to
                   the
                
                 THESSALONIANS
                 .
                 So
                 denominated
                 ,
                 because
                 written
                 by
                 Paul
                 to
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 the
                 Thessalonians
                 .
                 1
                 Thes.
                 1
                 1.
                 
                 And
                 they
                 from
                 their
                 City
                 Thess.
                 which
                 was
                 the
                 Metropolis
                 or
                 mother
                 City
                 in
                 Macedonia
                 ,
                 Scituate
                 on
                 the
                 edge
                 of
                 the
                 Macedonian
                 shore
                 :
                 Anciently
                 it
                 was
                 called
                 Thermae
                 ,
                 and
                 thence
                 the
                 
                   Thermaick
                   Haven
                
                 .
                 
                 Some
                 give
                 this
                 reason
                 of
                 the
                 
                 change
                 of
                 the
                 name
                 ;
                 Philip
                 King
                 of
                 Macedonia
                 in
                 a
                 memorable
                 Battle
                 in
                 these
                 parts
                 overcame
                 the
                 People
                 of
                 Thessaly
                 .
                 For
                 monument
                 of
                 which
                 Victory
                 ,
                 the
                 neighbouring
                 City
                 was
                 reedified
                 and
                 enlarged
                 ,
                 and
                 named
                 Thessalonica
                 ;
                 as
                 it
                 were
                 ,
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   put
                   the
                   victory
                   to
                   another
                
                 .
                 It
                 was
                 sold
                 by
                 Andronicus
                 to
                 the
                 Venetians
                 ,
                 but
                 they
                 did
                 not
                 long
                 enjoy
                 it
                 ;
                 for
                 it
                 was
                 ;
                 as
                 other
                 parts
                 of
                 Greece
                 ,
                 quickly
                 possessed
                 by
                 the
                 Turks
                 .
                 Is
                 now
                 a
                 famous
                 Empory
                 for
                 
                   Indian
                   Marchandice
                
                 ,
                 (
                 but
                 under
                 the
                 Dominion
                 and
                 Idolatry
                 of
                 the
                 Turks
                 )
                 known
                 by
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 
                   Saloniki
                   .
                   Maginus
                   in
                   Geograph
                
                 .
              
               
                 In
                 Thessalonica
                 God
                 pleased
                 to
                 plant
                 a
                 Church
                 by
                 the
                 Ministry
                 of
                 
                   Paul
                   and
                   Silas
                
                 ,
                 converting
                 both
                 Jewes
                 and
                 Greeks
                 .
                 See
                 the
                 History
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 Act.
                 17.1
                 .
                 &c.
                 There
                 the
                 unbelieving
                 Jewes
                 mov'd
                 with
                 envy
                 ,
                 raised
                 tumults
                 against
                 Paul
                 and
                 Silas
                 ,
                 and
                 also
                 against
                 the
                 Saint●
                 that
                 entertained
                 them
                 ,
                 Iason
                 &c.
                 
                 5
                 ,
                 6
                 ,
                 7
                 ,
                 8
                 ,
                 9.
                 
                 So
                 that
                 Paul
                 and
                 Silas
                 were
                 glad
                 to
                 fly
                 away
                 by
                 night
                 to
                 Berea
                 ver
                 .
                 10.
                 
              
               
                 Occasion
                 (
                 as
                 may
                 appeare
                 from
                 Act.
                 
                 17.
                 
                 And
                 1
                 Thes.
                 2.
                 
                 &
                 3
                 ,
                 1.2
                 ,
                 )
                 was
                 this
                 .
                 Paul
                 being
                 forced
                 by
                 tumults
                 to
                 depart
                 from
                 Thessalonica
                 ,
                 and
                 fearing
                 least
                 the
                 Church
                 there
                 newly
                 collected
                 should
                 be
                 hazzarded
                 through
                 feare
                 of
                 troubles
                 and
                 persecutions
                 ;
                 and
                 going
                 to
                 Athens
                 ,
                 he
                 sends
                 Timothy
                 back
                 to
                 confirme
                 the
                 Thessalonians
                 in
                 the
                 Faith
                 ,
                 and
                 report
                 their
                 stare
                 to
                 him
                 .
                 Where●●on
                 Timothy
                 informing
                 him
                 of
                 their
                 constancy
                 notwithstanding
                 persecutions
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 all
                 their
                 affaires
                 ,
                 from
                 
                   Athenes
                   Paul
                
                 wrote
                 this
                 Epistle
                 to
                 them
                 for
                 their
                 encouragement
                 .
                 when
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 see
                 in
                 Table
                 above
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   To
                   encourage
                   the
                   Thessalonians
                   both
                   to
                   constant
                   perseverance
                   in
                   Faith
                   and
                   Grace
                   received
                   ,
                   notwithstanding
                   all
                   tribulations
                   befalling
                   him
                   or
                   them
                   ;
                   As
                   also
                   to
                   make
                   progresse
                   and
                   go
                   on
                   therein
                   unto
                   perfection
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 ,
                 To
                 this
                 end
                 are
                 ,
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       The
                       Inscription
                    
                     of
                     the
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.1
                     .
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       substance
                    
                     or
                     Subject
                     matter
                     of
                     the
                     Epistle
                     is
                     Hortatory
                     .
                     He
                     Exhorteth
                     ,
                     
                       
                         I.
                         
                           To
                           constancy
                           and
                           perseverance
                           in
                           the
                           Faith
                           ,
                        
                         c
                         ,
                         1.2
                         .
                         to
                         c.
                         4.
                         
                         Whereunto
                         he
                         urges
                         them
                         .
                         
                           
                           
                             1.
                             
                             From
                             the
                             consideration
                             of
                             God
                             ;
                             rich
                             grace
                             bestowed
                             on
                             them
                             by
                             the
                             Apostles
                             Ministry
                             ,
                             and
                             the
                             generall
                             fame
                             thereof
                             in
                             the
                             Churches
                             of
                             Christ
                             ,
                             c.
                             1.2
                             .
                             
                               to
                               the
                               end
                            
                             .
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             From
                             the
                             graciousnesse
                             of
                             the
                             instrument
                             whereby
                             they
                             were
                             converted
                             ,
                             viz.
                             Paul
                             whose
                             Boldnesse
                             ,
                             Sincerity
                             ,
                             Meeknes
                             and
                             Amiable
                             behaviour
                             to
                             them
                             is
                             declared
                             c.
                             2.10
                             .
                             to
                             13.
                             
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             From
                             their
                             own
                             experience
                             of
                             the
                             efficacy
                             of
                             the
                             Doctrine
                             of
                             Faith
                             ,
                             c.
                             2.13
                             .
                             
                               to
                               the
                               end
                            
                             .
                          
                           
                             4.
                             
                             From
                             the
                             Apostles
                             care
                             and
                             tendernesse
                             over
                             them
                             ,
                             who
                             (
                             though
                             he
                             could
                             not
                             come
                             himselfe
                             to
                             them
                             ,
                             yet
                             )
                             sent
                             Timothy
                             to
                             them
                             to
                             comfort
                             and
                             establish
                             them
                             ,
                             c.
                             3.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                       
                         II.
                         
                           To
                           progresse
                           in
                           grace
                        
                         towards
                         perfection
                         therein
                         1.
                         
                         In
                         generall
                         ,
                         c.
                         4.1
                         ,
                         2
                         ,
                         3.2
                         .
                         In
                         particular
                         ,
                         he
                         exhorts
                         them
                         to
                         certaine
                         duties
                         (
                         wherein
                         perhaps
                         they
                         were
                         Defective
                         ,
                         or
                         Endangered
                         )
                         as
                         1
                         Chastity
                         ,
                         c.
                         4.4
                         ,
                         5.
                         2
                         
                         Justice
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         6
                         ,
                         7
                         ,
                         8.
                         3
                         
                         Brotherly
                         love
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         9
                         ,
                         10.
                         4
                         
                         Care
                         of
                         quiet
                         and
                         peaceable
                         living
                         together
                         in
                         Christian
                         Society
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         11
                         ,
                         12.
                         5
                         
                         Moderation
                         of
                         sorrow
                         and
                         lamentation
                         for
                         the
                         dead
                         in
                         Christ
                         ;
                         declaring
                         what
                         shall
                         become
                         of
                         the
                         Dead
                         ,
                         what
                         of
                         the
                         Living
                         at
                         Christs
                         second
                         coming
                         ,
                         v.
                         13.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                         After
                         this
                         he
                         meets
                         
                         with
                         that
                         curious
                         question
                         that
                         might
                         be
                         moved
                         ,
                         but
                         when
                         shall
                         these
                         things
                         be
                         ?
                         Shewing
                         it
                         shall
                         be
                         sudden
                         ,
                         though
                         the
                         particular
                         time
                         when
                         ,
                         is
                         not
                         known
                         ;
                         therefore
                         they
                         should
                         alwayes
                         be
                         prepared
                         ,
                         c.
                         5.1
                         ,
                         to
                         12.
                         6
                         
                         Due
                         respect
                         to
                         the
                         publique
                         Ministry
                         over
                         them
                         c.
                         5.12
                         ,
                         13.
                         7
                         
                         And
                         he
                         shuts
                         up
                         his
                         Exhortation
                         with
                         an
                         heap
                         of
                         Christian
                         duties
                         concisely
                         couched
                         together
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         14.
                         to
                         23.
                         
                      
                       
                         III.
                         
                           The
                           conclusion
                           of
                           the
                           Epistle
                        
                         ,
                         with
                         Supplications
                         for
                         them
                         ,
                         Salutations
                         ,
                         and
                         Valediction
                         ver
                         .
                         23.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 II
                 Thessal
                 .
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   second
                   Epistle
                   of
                   Paul
                   the
                   Apostle
                   to
                   the
                
                 THESSALONIANS
                 .
                 So
                 stiled
                 for
                 the
                 Reason
                 above
                 .
                 When
                 and
                 Whence
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 See
                 in
                 former
                 Table
                 .
              
               
                 Occasion
                 seems
                 to
                 be
                 some
                 information
                 ,
                 or
                 Reports
                 which
                 the
                 Apostle
                 had
                 received
                 ;
                 touching
                 their
                 Persecutions
                 for
                 the
                 Gospel
                 ;
                 Touching
                 false
                 teachers
                 ,
                 who
                 insinuated
                 to
                 them
                 (
                 perhaps
                 
                 taking
                 occasion
                 by
                 some
                 passages
                 of
                 the
                 former
                 Epistle
                 about
                 Christs
                 second
                 coming
                 )
                 that
                 Christs
                 second
                 coming
                 wo●ld
                 be
                 speedily
                 ,
                 in
                 that
                 age
                 ;
                 and
                 touching
                 exorbitant
                 walking
                 of
                 some
                 ,
                 in
                 idlenesse
                 ;
                 Church-discipline
                 mean
                 while
                 sleeping
                 .
                 The
                 whole
                 current
                 of
                 the
                 Epistle
                 intimates
                 this
                 occasion
                 .
              
               
                 Scope
                 .
                 1
                 
                   To
                   comfort
                   the
                   Church
                   of
                   Thessalonians
                   against
                   all
                   Persecutions
                   for
                   Christ.
                
                 2
                 
                   To
                   informe
                   them
                   of
                   their
                   mistake
                   about
                   the
                   second
                   coming
                   of
                   Christ
                   ,
                   that
                   it
                   could
                   not
                   be
                   presently
                   .
                   And
                
                 3
                 
                   to
                   exhort
                   them
                   to
                   divers
                   Christian
                   duties
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 ,
                 to
                 these
                 ends
                 .
              
               
                 
                   I.
                   Inscription
                   and
                   salutation
                   ,
                   c.
                   1.1
                   ,
                   2.
                   
                
                 
                   II.
                   Body
                   Of
                   the
                   Epistle
                   ,
                   being
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Consolatory
                       against
                       all
                       sufferings
                       and
                       persecutions
                       c.
                       1.3
                       .
                       
                         to
                         the
                         end
                      
                       .
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       Monitory
                       ,
                       warning
                       them
                       against
                       that
                       erroneous
                       Doctrine
                       which
                       any
                       false
                       Teachers
                       might
                       suggest
                       unto
                       them
                       ,
                       ●s
                       if
                       Christs
                       Second
                       coming
                       were
                       at
                       hand
                       :
                       wherein
                       he
                       prophetically
                       assures
                       them
                       that
                       before
                       Christs
                       coming
                       ,
                       there
                       will
                       be
                       an
                       Apostacy
                       ,
                       and
                       a
                       Revelation
                       of
                       Antichrist
                       that
                       man
                       of
                       sin
                       ,
                       c.
                       2.
                       
                    
                     
                       3.
                       
                       Hortatory
                       ,
                       wherein
                       he
                       peremptorily
                       
                       prescribes
                       Reformation
                       of
                       certain
                       corruptions
                       in
                       manners
                       &
                       practice
                       among
                       them
                       ,
                       interlacing
                       divers
                       sharp
                       reproofs
                       thereof
                       .
                       Because
                       he
                       deales
                       somewhat
                       sharply
                       with
                       them
                       ,
                       1.
                       
                       He
                       premiseth
                       an
                       insinuative
                       preface
                       wherein
                       ,
                       1
                       ▪
                       He
                       begs
                       their
                       prayers
                       .
                       2
                       Perswades
                       himself
                       confidently
                       of
                       their
                       obedience
                       .
                       3
                       And
                       Prayes
                       for
                       them
                       ,
                       c.
                       3.1
                       .
                       to
                       6.2
                       .
                       He
                       prescribes
                       the
                       Reformation
                       of
                       two
                       evils
                       ,
                       viz.
                       1
                       The
                       remissenesse
                       of
                       Church-discipline
                       towards
                       inordinate
                       walkers
                       ,
                       ver
                       .
                       6.
                       to
                       11.
                       2
                       
                       The
                       neglect
                       of
                       manuall
                       labour
                       by
                       some
                       contrary
                       to
                       the
                       Apostles
                       Rule
                       ,
                       ver
                       .
                       11.
                       to
                       16.
                       
                    
                  
                
                 
                   III.
                   
                     The
                     conclusion
                  
                   of
                   the
                   whole
                   Epistle
                   ,
                   with
                   Supplications
                   ,
                   Salutations
                   and
                   Valediction
                   ,
                   ver
                   .
                   16.
                   
                     to
                     the
                     end
                  
                   .
                
              
               
                 Thus
                 farre
                 of
                 
                   Pauls
                   nine
                   generall
                   Epistles
                
                 ,
                 written
                 to
                 whole
                 Churches
                 :
                 Next
                 come
                 to
                 be
                 considered
                 
                   Pauls
                   foure
                   particular
                   Epistles
                
                 ,
                 directed
                 to
                 certaine
                 particular
                 persons
                 ,
                 viz.
                 Two
                 to
                 Timothy
                 ,
                 and
                 one
                 to
                 Titus
                 about
                 affairs
                 Ecclesiasticall
                 ;
                 and
                 one
                 to
                 Philemon
                 about
                 matters
                 Oeconomicall
                 .
                 Those
                 Epistles
                 to
                 Timothy
                 and
                 
                   Titus
                   ,
                   Augustine
                
                 would
                 have
                 him
                 that
                 is
                 a
                 Teacher
                 in
                 the
                 Church
                 to
                 have
                 alwayes
                 before
                 his
                 
                 eyes
                 ▪
                 
                   Augustin
                   .
                   de
                   Doctrin
                   Christian.
                   l.
                
                 4
                 ▪
                 c.
                 16.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 I
                 Timothy
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   first
                   Epistle
                   of
                   the
                   Apostle
                   Paul
                   to
                
                 TIMOTHY
                 .
                 So
                 denominated
                 from
                 Timothy
                 to
                 whom
                 Paul
                 wrote
                 .
              
               
                 TIMOTHY
                 Is
                 a
                 Greek
                 name
                 ;
                 Signifies
                 ,
                 
                   An
                   Honourer
                   of
                   God.
                
                 Probably
                 his
                 Godly
                 Parents
                 desired
                 he
                 might
                 be
                 such
                 an
                 one
                 when
                 they
                 gave
                 him
                 this
                 name
                 :
                 and
                 he
                 proved
                 an
                 excellent
                 instrument
                 of
                 
                   Honour
                   to
                   God
                
                 both
                 in
                 Doctrine
                 and
                 conversation
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 happy
                 Omen
                 and
                 presage
                 of
                 his
                 name
                 .
                 He
                 is
                 supposed
                 to
                 be
                 of
                 Lycaoni●
                 ,
                 in
                 Asia
                 .
                 His
                 Father
                 was
                 a
                 Greek
                 ,
                 his
                 Mother
                 a
                 Jewesse
                 who
                 believed
                 ,
                 Act.
                 16.1
                 .
                 her
                 name
                 Eunice
                 ,
                 daughter
                 of
                 Lois
                 his
                 Grandmother
                 ;
                 both
                 sincere
                 believers
                 ,
                 2
                 Tim.
                 1.5
                 .
                 From
                 a
                 child
                 they
                 trayned
                 him
                 up
                 in
                 the
                 Scriptures
                 ,
                 2
                 Tim.
                 3.14
                 ,
                 15.
                 
                 Whence
                 Paul
                 is
                 perswaded
                 that
                 the
                 like
                 Faith
                 
                 dwelt
                 in
                 him
                 ,
                 as
                 did
                 in
                 his
                 mother
                 and
                 Grandmother
                 ,
                 2
                 Tim.
                 1.5
                 .
                 His
                 Father
                 being
                 a
                 Greek
                 ,
                 he
                 was
                 not
                 Circumcised
                 after
                 the
                 custome
                 of
                 the
                 Jewes
                 ,
                 but
                 being
                 come
                 to
                 maturity
                 ,
                 Paul
                 circumcised
                 him
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 gaining
                 of
                 the
                 Jewes
                 by
                 his
                 Ministry
                 ,
                 Act.
                 16.3
                 .
                 And
                 having
                 good
                 commendation
                 of
                 him
                 by
                 the
                 brethren
                 of
                 Lystra
                 and
                 
                   Iconium
                   ,
                   Paul
                
                 made
                 him
                 his
                 companion
                 in
                 travels
                 throughout
                 the
                 Churches
                 ,
                 Act.
                 16.2
                 ,
                 3
                 ,
                 4.
                 &c.
                 
                 Sometimes
                 Paul
                 sent
                 him
                 as
                 a
                 Messenger
                 to
                 the
                 Churches
                 ;
                 whereupon
                 Paul
                 makes
                 such
                 an
                 honourable
                 mention
                 of
                 him
                 and
                 his
                 workes
                 ,
                 Act.
                 19.22
                 .
                 Rom.
                 16.21
                 .
                 1
                 Cor.
                 4.17
                 .
                 And
                 16.10
                 .
                 Phil.
                 2.19
                 ,
                 20
                 ,
                 21
                 ,
                 22.
                 1
                 
                 Thes.
                 3.2
                 ,
                 6.
                 
                 Gives
                 him
                 divers
                 excellent
                 Titles
                 ,
                 cals
                 him
                 
                   his
                   brother
                
                 ,
                 1
                 Thes.
                 3.2
                 .
                 Heb.
                 13.23
                 .
                 His
                 
                   beloved
                   son
                   and
                   faithfull
                   in
                   the
                   Lord
                   ,
                
                 1
                 Cor.
                 4.17
                 .
                 His
                 
                   natural
                   son
                   in
                   the
                   Faith
                
                 ,
                 1
                 Tim.
                 1.2
                 .
                 His
                 
                   dearely
                   beloved
                   sonne
                
                 ,
                 2
                 Tim.
                 1.2
                 .
                 The
                 
                   Minister
                   of
                   God
                   ;
                   and
                   his
                   fellow-labourer
                   in
                   the
                   Gospel
                   of
                   Christ
                   ,
                
                 1
                 Thes.
                 3.2
                 .
                 
                   His
                   work-fellow
                
                 ,
                 Rom.
                 16.21
                 .
                 Yea
                 Paul
                 joynes
                 Timothy
                 with
                 himselfe
                 in
                 the
                 inscriptions
                 of
                 divers
                 Epistles
                 
                 to
                 the
                 Churches
                 ,
                 that
                 so
                 he
                 might
                 both
                 commend
                 Timothies
                 worth
                 and
                 authority
                 to
                 the
                 Churches
                 ,
                 as
                 also
                 propound
                 him
                 as
                 an
                 exemplary
                 pattern
                 to
                 all
                 faithfull
                 Ministers
                 .
                 See
                 2
                 Cor.
                 1.1
                 .
                 Phil.
                 1.1
                 .
                 Col.
                 1.1
                 .
                 1
                 Thes.
                 1.1
                 .
                 2
                 Thes.
                 1.1
                 .
                 Philem.
                 1.
                 
                 At
                 last
                 after
                 many
                 travels
                 with
                 Paul
                 by
                 Sea
                 and
                 Land
                 ,
                 Paul
                 returning
                 into
                 Asia
                 committed
                 the
                 care
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 Ephesus
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 whom
                 he
                 knew
                 to
                 be
                 so
                 able
                 and
                 trusty
                 ,
                 1
                 Tim.
                 1.3
                 .
                 &c.
                 Which
                 he
                 happily
                 taught
                 ,
                 and
                 governed
                 about
                 fifteen
                 yeers
                 ;
                 but
                 at
                 last
                 more
                 grievously
                 inveighing
                 against
                 the
                 Idolatrous
                 worships
                 of
                 Diana
                 ;
                 under
                 Nero
                 the
                 Christians
                 cruel
                 Enemy
                 ,
                 he
                 was
                 slain
                 of
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 with
                 Arrowes
                 and
                 Stones
                 ,
                 as
                 is
                 testified
                 by
                 
                   Eusebius
                   Hist.
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 14.
                 
                 Some
                 thinke
                 that
                 his
                 bones
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 the
                 reliques
                 of
                 Andrew
                 and
                 Luke
                 were
                 translated
                 to
                 Constantinople
                 by
                 Constantine
                 the
                 Emperour
                 .
                 As
                 Hieronym
                 .
                 and
                 Nicephorus
                 .
              
               
                 When
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 see
                 in
                 the
                 Table
                 above
                 .
              
               
                 Occasion
                 and
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   The
                   Apostle
                   being
                   to
                   depart
                   into
                   Macedonia
                   ,
                   left
                   Timothy
                   
                   at
                   Ephesus
                   ,
                   that
                   he
                   might
                   prevent
                   unsound
                   Doctrine
                   ,
                   and
                   ordaine
                   Elders
                   for
                   that
                   Church
                   .
                   Compare
                   Act.
                
                 20.
                 1
                 
                 Tim.
                 1.3
                 .
                 
                   &c.
                   That
                   therefore
                
                 Timothy
                 
                   might
                   the
                   better
                   know
                   how
                   to
                   behave
                   himselfe
                   in
                   that
                   Church
                   in
                   all
                   Ecclesiasticall
                   affairs
                   ,
                   he
                   writes
                   to
                   him
                   this
                   Epistle
                   ,
                   not
                   knowing
                   how
                   long
                   he
                   should
                   be
                   absent
                   from
                   him
                   .
                
                 1
                 Tim.
                 3.14
                 ,
                 15.
                 
                 So
                 that
                 this
                 Epistle
                 may
                 not
                 unfitly
                 be
                 stiled
                 ▪
                 
                   S
                   
                   t.
                   Pauls
                   Directory
                   for
                   right
                   mannaging
                   of
                   the
                   Office
                   of
                   the
                   Ministery
                   in
                   the
                   Church
                   of
                   God.
                   
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 ,
                 to
                 this
                 end
                 ;
                 are
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       The
                       Inscription
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                       ,
                       c.
                    
                     1
                     ,
                     1
                     ,
                     2.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       matter
                       or
                       Substance
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                       ,
                    
                     which
                     is
                     chiefly
                     by
                     way
                     of
                     practicall
                     instruction
                     or
                     direction
                     .
                     He
                     directs
                     Timothy
                     ,
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         
                           Touching
                           ●aith
                        
                         how
                         to
                         maintaine
                         against
                         the
                         teachers
                         of
                         the
                         Law
                         ,
                         the
                         truth
                         of
                         the
                         Gospel
                         wonderfully
                         committed
                         to
                         Paul
                         )
                         notwithstanding
                         all
                         impediments
                         ,
                         and
                         to
                         adde
                         to
                         faith
                         a
                         good
                         conscience
                         ,
                         c.
                         1
                         ,
                         3.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         
                           Touching
                           Ecclesiasticall
                           worship
                        
                         ,
                         for
                         whom
                         they
                         should
                         pray
                         ,
                         c.
                         2.1
                         .
                         to
                         8.
                         
                         How
                         men
                         and
                         women
                         should
                         behave
                         themselves
                         in
                         prayer
                         ,
                         and
                         in
                         publick
                         assemblies
                         ,
                         
                         c.
                         2
                         ,
                         8.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                      
                       
                         3.
                         
                         
                           Touching
                           Church
                           officers
                        
                         .
                         1
                         How
                         Bishops
                         and
                         Deacons
                         with
                         their
                         wives
                         ought
                         to
                         be
                         qualified
                         ,
                         c.
                         3
                         1.
                         to
                         14.
                         
                         To
                         which
                         he
                         annects
                         ,
                         the
                         end
                         or
                         Scope
                         of
                         his
                         writing
                         this
                         Epistle
                         to
                         Timothy
                         ,
                         viz.
                         
                           That
                           he
                           might
                           know
                           how
                           to
                           governe
                           the
                           Church
                           ,
                           the
                           house
                           of
                           God
                           ,
                           the
                           pillar
                           of
                           truth
                           ,
                        
                         giving
                         an
                         Epitome
                         of
                         Gospel-truth
                         ,
                         c.
                         3
                         ,
                         14.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                         which
                         he
                         amplifies
                         by
                         a
                         Propheticall
                         prediction
                         of
                         the
                         Apostacy
                         ,
                         from
                         the
                         faith
                         which
                         should
                         come
                         to
                         passe
                         in
                         the
                         latter
                         times
                         ,
                         c.
                         4.1
                         .
                         to
                         6.
                         2
                         
                         How
                         Timothy
                         should
                         behave
                         himselfe
                         both
                         in
                         his
                         doctrine
                         and
                         conversation
                         ,
                         c.
                         4.6
                         .
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                         How
                         in
                         private
                         reproofs
                         ,
                         c.
                         5
                         ,
                         1
                         ,
                         2.
                         
                         How
                         towards
                         widows
                         ,
                         c.
                         5
                         ,
                         3
                         ,
                         to
                         17.
                         
                         How
                         towards
                         Elders
                         ▪
                         c.
                         5
                         ,
                         17.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                         What
                         duties
                         he
                         should
                         teach
                         servants
                         ,
                         and
                         how
                         he
                         should
                         carry
                         himselfe
                         towards
                         them
                         that
                         teach
                         otherwise
                         ,
                         and
                         count
                         Gaine
                         godlinesse
                         ,
                         c.
                         6.
                         to
                         17.
                         
                         And
                         how
                         he
                         should
                         instruct
                         rich
                         men
                         ,
                         c.
                         6
                         ,
                         17
                         ,
                         18
                         ,
                         19.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       The
                       Conclusion
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     ,
                     exhorting
                     Timothy
                     to
                     keep
                     that
                     which
                     was
                     committed
                     to
                     him
                     ,
                     and
                     to
                     avoid
                     prophane
                     and
                     vaine
                     bablings
                     ,
                     and
                     oppositions
                     of
                     science
                     ,
                     &c.
                     c.
                     6
                     ,
                     20.21
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 II
                 Timoth
                 :
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   second
                   Epistle
                   of
                   Paul
                   the
                   Apostle
                   to
                
                 TIMOTHY
                 .
                 So
                 denominated
                 from
                 Timothy
                 to
                 whom
                 Paul
                 wrote
                 .
                 A
                 Description
                 of
                 this
                 Timothy
                 ,
                 see
                 in
                 former
                 Epistle
                 .
              
               
                 Occasion
                 .
                 The
                 Apostle
                 having
                 left
                 Timothy
                 at
                 Ephesus
                 to
                 take
                 care
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 there
                 ,
                 1
                 Tim.
                 1.3
                 .
                 when
                 he
                 departed
                 from
                 the
                 Elders
                 of
                 Ephesus
                 ,
                 after
                 he
                 had
                 called
                 them
                 to
                 Miletus
                 ,
                 and
                 given
                 them
                 charge
                 of
                 the
                 flock
                 ,
                 
                   they
                   all
                   wept
                   sore
                
                 ,
                 Acts
                 20.36
                 ,
                 37.
                 probably
                 ,
                 Timothy
                 was
                 one
                 of
                 those
                 that
                 powred
                 out
                 tears
                 ,
                 2
                 Tim.
                 1.4
                 .
                 and
                 perhaps
                 the
                 Apostle
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 might
                 comfort
                 Timothy
                 lamenting
                 him
                 ,
                 intimated
                 some
                 hopes
                 of
                 his
                 returne
                 unto
                 him
                 ,
                 1
                 Tim.
                 3.14
                 .
                 But
                 Paul
                 meane
                 while
                 being
                 carried
                 away
                 captive
                 to
                 Rome
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 his
                 bonds
                 hindred
                 from
                 coming
                 againe
                 to
                 Timothy
                 ,
                 thought
                 it
                 necessary
                 by
                 this
                 Epistle
                 to
                 stablish
                 and
                 comfort
                 him
                 ,
                 both
                 
                 against
                 the
                 Apostles
                 sufferings
                 and
                 martyrdome
                 approaching
                 as
                 also
                 against
                 all
                 the
                 pressures
                 and
                 persecutions
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 &
                 that
                 he
                 should
                 be
                 moved
                 by
                 none
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 to
                 desert
                 or
                 neglect
                 the
                 faithfull
                 ,
                 keeping
                 of
                 that
                 excellent
                 treasure
                 of
                 truth
                 ,
                 committed
                 of
                 trust
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 2
                 Tim.
                 1.8
                 ,
                 13.
                 and
                 2.1
                 ,
                 2
                 ,
                 3.4
                 .
                 and
                 4.1
                 ,
                 2
                 ,
                 5
                 ,
                 6.
                 &c.
                 and
                 that
                 they
                 might
                 more
                 effectually
                 be
                 comforted
                 in
                 one
                 another
                 ,
                 he
                 desires
                 him
                 to
                 
                   come
                   shortly
                   to
                   him
                
                 ,
                 2
                 Tim.
                 4.9
                 .
                 that
                 so
                 they
                 might
                 take
                 their
                 last
                 farewell
                 one
                 of
                 another
                 .
                 For
                 this
                 was
                 Pauls
                 last
                 Epistle
                 (
                 as
                 his
                 
                   Swan-like
                   Song
                
                 )
                 a
                 little
                 before
                 his
                 death
                 ,
                 2
                 Tim.
                 4.6
                 ,
                 7.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Scope
                   ,
                   To
                   stirre
                   up
                   and
                   strengthen
                
                 Timothy
                 ,
                 
                   to
                   constancy
                   and
                   fidelity
                   ,
                   in
                   discharge
                   of
                   his
                   ministeriall
                   office
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   keeping
                   and
                   asserting
                   of
                   the
                   truth
                   ,
                   deposited
                   and
                   committed
                   of
                   trust
                   to
                   him
                   ;
                   against
                   all
                   the
                   present
                   dangers
                   and
                   persecutions
                   impending
                   him
                   or
                   the
                   Apostle
                   for
                   the
                   same
                   ,
                   in
                   these
                   perillous
                   times
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 .
                 to
                 this
                 end
                 are
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       An
                       Inscription
                    
                     of
                     the
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     c.
                     1
                     ,
                     1
                     ,
                     2
                     ,
                     together
                     with
                     an
                     insinuative
                     patheticall
                     
                     proem
                     ,
                     testifying
                     his
                     singular
                     affection
                     to
                     Timothy
                     ,
                     v.
                     3
                     ,
                     4
                     ,
                     5.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       substance
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     ,
                     which
                     is
                     chiefly
                     Hortatory
                     and
                     Consolatory
                     .
                     Herein
                     he
                     ,
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         Exhorts
                         and
                         encourages
                         him
                         to
                         constancy
                         and
                         faithfulnesse
                         in
                         all
                         the
                         work
                         of
                         the
                         Ministry
                         committed
                         to
                         him
                         ,
                         notwithstanding
                         all
                         the
                         Apostles
                         afflictions
                         endured
                         for
                         the
                         truth
                         ,
                         all
                         the
                         troubles
                         Timothy
                         might
                         incurre
                         in
                         defence
                         of
                         the
                         truth
                         ,
                         and
                         the
                         unfaithfulnesse
                         of
                         some
                         revolting
                         from
                         the
                         truth
                         ,
                         c.
                         1
                         ,
                         6.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         ,
                         and
                         c.
                         2.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         Prophetically
                         forewarnes
                         him
                         of
                         the
                         perillousnesse
                         of
                         the
                         last
                         dayes
                         ,
                         especially
                         by
                         reason
                         of
                         wicked
                         hypocrites
                         and
                         Seducers
                         ,
                         c.
                         3
                         ,
                         1.
                         to
                         14.
                         
                      
                       
                         3.
                         
                         Most
                         earnestly
                         incites
                         and
                         charges
                         him
                         to
                         be
                         constant
                         in
                         the
                         faith
                         ,
                         according
                         to
                         the
                         Scriptures
                         which
                         he
                         knew
                         from
                         a
                         child
                         ,
                         and
                         to
                         be
                         instant
                         in
                         preaching
                         the
                         word
                         ,
                         against
                         all
                         discouragements
                         ,
                         after
                         the
                         Apostles
                         example
                         ,
                         who
                         had
                         finished
                         his
                         course
                         ,
                         and
                         now
                         shortly
                         was
                         to
                         receive
                         his
                         Crown
                         ,
                         c.
                         3
                         ,
                         14.
                         to
                         c.
                         4
                         ,
                         9.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     III.
                     Conclusion
                     of
                     the
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     with
                     1
                     Some
                     particular
                     directions
                     ,
                     c.
                     4
                     ,
                     9.
                     to
                     16.
                     2
                     
                     Narration
                     of
                     his
                     owne
                     affairs
                     ,
                     v.
                     16
                     ,
                     17
                     ,
                     18.
                     3
                     
                     Salutations
                     ,
                     v.
                     18.
                     to
                     22.
                     and
                     4
                     Valediction
                     ,
                     v.
                     22.
                     
                  
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 Titus
                 .
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   Epistle
                   of
                   Paul
                   to
                
                 TITUS
                 .
                 So
                 intituled
                 from
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 the
                 person
                 to
                 whom
                 he
                 wrote
                 ,
                 Tit.
                 1.1
                 ,
                 4.
                 
                 Titus
                 is
                 evidently
                 a
                 Greek
                 name
                 ,
                 either
                 derived
                 from
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Titus
                 ,
                 i.
                 e
                 ,
                 A
                 Dove
                 ;
                 (
                 as
                 Ionah
                 in
                 Hebrew
                 hath
                 his
                 name
                 from
                 a
                 Dove
                 ,
                 )
                 or
                 rather
                 from
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Tio
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   to
                   honour
                   ,
                   esteem
                
                 ,
                 &c.
                 thence
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 ,
                 Titos
                 i.
                 e.
                 Honoured
                 ;
                 a
                 fit
                 name
                 for
                 him
                 ,
                 that
                 was
                 truely
                 
                   honoured
                   both
                   by
                   God
                   and
                   man.
                   Titus
                
                 was
                 by
                 Nation
                 a
                 Grecian
                 ,
                 a
                 Gentile
                 ,
                 &
                 uncircumcised
                 probably
                 till
                 his
                 death
                 ,
                 Gal.
                 2.3
                 .
                 yet
                 effectually
                 converted
                 by
                 Paul
                 to
                 the
                 faith
                 ,
                 hence
                 called
                 his
                 
                   naturall
                   sonne
                   after
                   the
                   common
                   faith
                   ,
                   Tit.
                
                 1.4
                 .
                 yea
                 he
                 cals
                 him
                 his
                 Partner
                 and
                 fellow-helper
                 .
                 2
                 Cor.
                 8.23
                 .
                 and
                 his
                 brother
                 ,
                 2
                 Cor.
                 2.13
                 .
                 having
                 enjoyed
                 him
                 as
                 a
                 companion
                 of
                 his
                 travels
                 ,
                 Gal.
                 2.1
                 .
                 
                   a
                   comfort
                   in
                   his
                   sorrows
                
                 ,
                 2
                 Cor.
                 7.6
                 .
                 and
                 having
                 used
                 him
                 as
                 a
                 Legate
                 or
                 messenger
                 unto
                 divers
                 Churches
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 betrusted
                 him
                 with
                 the
                 Collections
                 for
                 the
                 poor
                 Saints
                 in
                 Iudea
                 ,
                 2
                 Tim.
                 4.10
                 .
                 2
                 Cor.
                 8.6
                 ,
                 16
                 ,
                 17.
                 
                 Paul
                 having
                 planted
                 a
                 Church
                 in
                 the
                 Isle
                 of
                 Creta
                 ,
                 now
                 called
                 Candy
                 ,
                 he
                 left
                 Titus
                 there
                 behind
                 him
                 to
                 finish
                 the
                 work
                 ,
                 appointing
                 him
                 to
                 
                   set
                   in
                   order
                   things
                   that
                   were
                   wanting
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   ordaine
                   Elders
                   in
                   every
                   city
                   ,
                
                 Tit.
                 1.5
                 .
                 and
                 there
                 it
                 is
                 thought
                 ,
                 he
                 died
                 and
                 was
                 buried
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Occasion
                   and
                   Scope
                
                 ,
                 Paul
                 
                   having
                   left
                
                 Titus
                 in
                 Creet
                 
                   to
                   order
                   things
                   wanting
                   ,
                   &c.
                   in
                   the
                   Church
                   now
                   planted
                   there
                   ,
                   and
                   perceiving
                   that
                   in
                   his
                   absence
                   false
                   Teachers
                   ,
                   erroneous
                   in
                   judgement
                   ,
                   and
                   scandalous
                   in
                   life
                   ,
                   crept
                   in
                   ,
                   seeking
                   to
                   destroy
                   the
                   faith
                   ,
                   by
                   mingling
                   Christ
                   and
                
                 Moses
                 
                   together
                   ,
                   to
                   disturbe
                   Church-Government
                   planted
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   disjoyne
                   the
                   practice
                   from
                   the
                   profession
                   of
                   piety
                   .
                
                 Paul
                 
                   therefore
                   sollicitous
                   for
                   the
                   Church
                   ,
                   writes
                   this
                   Epistle
                   to
                
                 Titus
                 ,
                 
                   both
                   to
                   strengthen
                   and
                   gaine
                   Authority
                   to
                   his
                   ministery
                   there
                   against
                   all
                   contempt
                   ;
                   as
                   also
                   to
                   direct
                   him
                   ,
                   how
                   to
                   order
                   and
                   stablish
                   things
                   wanting
                   in
                   the
                   Church
                   ,
                   how
                   to
                   represse
                   distempers
                   and
                   disorders
                   arising
                   ,
                   and
                   how
                   to
                   demeane
                   himselfe
                   ,
                   both
                   in
                   doctrine
                   and
                   conversation
                   ,
                   towards
                   
                   severall
                   sorts
                   of
                   Persons
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 to
                 this
                 end
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       An
                       Inscription
                       ,
                       c.
                    
                     1
                     ,
                     1
                     ,
                     to
                     5.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       Substance
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     ,
                     (
                     of
                     like
                     nature
                     to
                     the
                     I.
                     
                       To
                       Timothy
                    
                     )
                     wherein
                     he
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         Declareth
                         for
                         what
                         ends
                         he
                         left
                         
                           Titus
                           in
                           Creet
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         1
                         ,
                         5.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         Directeth
                         him
                         in
                         reference
                         to
                         these
                         ends
                         .
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             What
                             qualifications
                             are
                             requisite
                             in
                             Bishops
                             ,
                             or
                             Elders
                             both
                             for
                             life
                             and
                             doctrine
                             ,
                             c.
                             1
                             ,
                             6.
                             
                               to
                               the
                               end
                            
                             .
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             How
                             Titus
                             should
                             accordingly
                             approve
                             himselfe
                             in
                             the
                             ministry
                             ,
                             both
                             in
                             his
                             doctrine
                             and
                             life
                             ,
                             and
                             that
                             towards
                             both
                             aged
                             men
                             and
                             women
                             ,
                             as
                             also
                             towards
                             servants
                             ,
                             c.
                             2.
                             and
                             generally
                             towards
                             all
                             Christians
                             ,
                             how
                             he
                             should
                             teach
                             them
                             to
                             behave
                             themselvs
                             ,
                             both
                             towards
                             magistrates
                             ,
                             and
                             mutually
                             towards
                             one
                             another
                             ,
                             backing
                             the
                             same
                             with
                             ●ogent
                             Arguments
                             ,
                             c.
                             3
                             ,
                             1.
                             to
                             12.
                             
                          
                        
                      
                       
                         III.
                         
                           A
                           Conclusion
                        
                         of
                         the
                         whole
                         Epistle
                         consisting
                         of
                         more
                         private
                         directions
                         ,
                         salutations
                         ,
                         and
                         his
                         Apostolicall
                         valediction
                         ,
                         c.
                         3
                         ,
                         12.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Thus
                   of
                
                 Pauls
                 
                   Epistles
                   written
                   to
                
                 particular
                 persons
                 about
                 Ecclesiasticall
                 
                   affairs
                   .
                   Now
                   of
                   his
                   Epistles
                   written
                   to
                
                 particular
                 
                 persons
                 ,
                 
                   yea
                   to
                   a
                
                 Church
                 ,
                 Philem.
                 1.2
                 .
                 about
                 Oeconomicall
                 or
                 Houshold
                 affairs
                 .
                 viz.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 Philemon
                 .
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   Epistle
                   of
                
                 Paul
                 to
                 Philemon
                 .
                 So
                 called
                 because
                 peculiarly
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 place
                 directed
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 Philem.
                 1.2
                 .
                 PHILEMON
                 ,
                 as
                 some
                 thinke
                 sounds
                 like
                 an
                 Hebrew
                 name
                 ,
                 and
                 signifies
                 ,
                 
                   The
                   mouth
                   of
                   bread
                
                 ,
                 so
                 denoting
                 his
                 beneficence
                 and
                 bounty
                 relieving
                 them
                 with
                 bread
                 ,
                 &c.
                 that
                 were
                 poore
                 and
                 needy
                 ,
                 See
                 v.
                 7.
                 
                 Hieron
                 .
                 Others
                 rather
                 taking
                 this
                 Etymon
                 to
                 be
                 uncertain
                 ,
                 count
                 Philemon
                 a
                 Greek
                 name
                 ,
                 signifying
                 Kissing
                 ,
                 from
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Philema
                 .
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   A
                   kisse
                
                 ,
                 So
                 intimating
                 his
                 kindnesse
                 .
              
               
                 This
                 is
                 not
                 that
                 ancient
                 Comick
                 poet
                 ,
                 called
                 Philemon
                 ,
                 which
                 Paul
                 seems
                 to
                 have
                 read
                 ,
                 by
                 some
                 expressions
                 in
                 his
                 Epistles
                 ,
                 as
                 1
                 Tim.
                 2.12
                 .
                 and
                 5.23
                 .
                 Tit.
                 2.3
                 .
                 The
                 fragments
                 of
                 which
                 poet
                 are
                 extant
                 ,
                 collected
                 by
                 
                   Henr.
                   Steph.
                
                 
                 But
                 this
                 Philemon
                 is
                 supposed
                 to
                 be
                 by
                 Countrey
                 a
                 Phrygian
                 ,
                 as
                 Theophylact.
                 and
                 in
                 particular
                 a
                 minister
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 at
                 Colosse
                 ,
                 an
                 eminent
                 towne
                 in
                 Phrygia
                 .
                 Paul
                 here
                 cals
                 him
                 fellow-labourer
                 ,
                 Phil●m
                 .
                 v.
                 1.
                 viz.
                 in
                 preaching
                 the
                 Gospel
                 ;
                 and
                 a
                 Partner
                 ,
                 v.
                 17
                 ▪
                 compare
                 Philem.
                 v.
                 1
                 ,
                 2.
                 with
                 Col.
                 4.17
                 ,
                 He
                 is
                 called
                 a
                 Bishop
                 by
                 Anselme
                 ,
                 an
                 Evangelist
                 by
                 Hierom.
                 And
                 here
                 is
                 mention
                 of
                 the
                 
                   Church
                   in
                   his
                   house
                   ,
                   v.
                
                 2.
                 
                 Probably
                 ,
                 Philemon
                 was
                 converted
                 or
                 much
                 edified
                 by
                 Pauls
                 ministry
                 ,
                 from
                 that
                 intimation
                 ,
                 v.
                 19.
                 was
                 deare
                 to
                 Paul
                 ▪
                 he
                 cals
                 him
                 brother
                 v.
                 7
                 ,
                 20.
                 his
                 
                   dearly
                   beloved
                   .
                   v.
                
                 1.
                 
                 He
                 is
                 commended
                 for
                 his
                 
                   faith
                   in
                   Christ
                   ,
                   and
                   bountifull
                   love
                   to
                   all
                   the
                   Saints
                   ,
                
                 vers
                 .
                 5.7
                 .
                 Though
                 rich
                 ,
                 yet
                 is
                 suspected
                 to
                 be
                 sornewhat
                 too
                 covetous
                 ,
                 from
                 that
                 expression
                 ,
                 v.
                 18
                 ,
                 19.
                 
                 We
                 find
                 no
                 mention
                 of
                 him
                 in
                 Scripture
                 ,
                 but
                 only
                 in
                 this
                 Epistle
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Occasion
                   .
                   Onesimus
                
                 servant
                 to
                 Philemon
                 ,
                 had
                 much
                 wronged
                 him
                 in
                 purloyning
                 his
                 goods
                 ,
                 (
                 it
                 is
                 probably
                 thought
                 he
                 stole
                 some
                 money
                 from
                 him
                 )
                 and
                 so
                 ranne
                 away
                 from
                 him
                 to
                 
                 Rome
                 ,
                 where
                 (
                 providence
                 so
                 ordered
                 things
                 ,
                 )
                 hearing
                 Paul
                 preach
                 he
                 was
                 converted
                 ,
                 and
                 ministred
                 to
                 Paul
                 in
                 prison
                 .
                 But
                 Paul
                 understanding
                 the
                 cause
                 of
                 his
                 depar●ing
                 from
                 his
                 Master
                 ,
                 sends
                 Onesimus
                 back
                 again
                 to
                 his
                 master
                 with
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 perswading
                 him
                 to
                 forgive
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 entertaine
                 him
                 again
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   To
                   reconcile
                
                 Onesimus
                 ,
                 
                   now
                   converted
                   ,
                   to
                
                 Philemon
                 
                   his
                   master
                   ,
                   whom
                   he
                   had
                   much
                   wronged
                   formerly
                   ,
                   being
                   unconverted
                   ,
                   and
                   had
                   runne
                   away
                   from
                   him
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 ,
                 of
                 this
                 most
                 elegant
                 and
                 patheticall
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 to
                 this
                 end
                 ,
                 are
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       The
                       Preface
                    
                     or
                     Exordium
                     to
                     the
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     containing
                     1.
                     
                     The
                     inscription
                     ,
                     v.
                     1
                     ,
                     2
                     ,
                     3.
                     2.
                     
                     The
                     Apostles
                     Gratulation
                     at
                     Philemons
                     faith
                     in
                     Christ
                     ,
                     and
                     liberall
                     love
                     to
                     the
                     Saints
                     ,
                     v.
                     4.
                     to
                     8
                     ,
                     hereby
                     he
                     indears
                     both
                     himselfe
                     and
                     his
                     request
                     to
                     Philemon
                     .
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       Proposall
                       of
                       his
                       request
                       to
                    
                     Philemon
                     ,
                     more
                     generally
                     ,
                     and
                     after
                     more
                     particularly
                     ,
                     viz.
                     that
                     he
                     would
                     againe
                     receive
                     Onesimus
                     ,
                     whom
                     he
                     had
                     sent
                     to
                     him
                     ,
                     v.
                     8.
                     to
                     13.
                     
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       Cogent
                       Arguments
                    
                     ,
                     pressing
                     this
                     request
                     ,
                     (
                     every
                     word
                     almost
                     being
                     an
                     Argument
                     )
                     some
                     of
                     which
                     are
                     couched
                     in
                     the
                     Proposall
                     
                     of
                     his
                     request
                     ;
                     As
                     1.
                     
                     Onesimus
                     is
                     converted
                     ,
                     v.
                     10.
                     2.
                     
                     Now
                     he
                     will
                     be
                     a
                     profitable
                     servant
                     ,
                     v.
                     11.
                     3.
                     
                     Onesimus
                     was
                     dear
                     to
                     Paul
                     ▪
                     as
                     his
                     
                       own
                       bowels
                    
                     ,
                     v.
                     12
                     ,
                     4.
                     
                     Pauls
                     prizing
                     Onesimus
                     his
                     service
                     ,
                     v.
                     13.14
                     .
                     5.
                     
                     Providence
                     seemed
                     so
                     to
                     over-rule
                     his
                     departure
                     by
                     converting
                     him
                     in
                     the
                     interim
                     ,
                     as
                     if
                     God
                     would
                     prepare
                     him
                     for
                     constant
                     service
                     ,
                     v.
                     15.
                     6.
                     
                     He
                     is
                     now
                     
                       not
                       a
                       servant
                       ,
                       so
                       much
                       as
                       a
                       brother
                    
                     in
                     Christ
                     ,
                     v.
                     16.
                     7.
                     
                     Paul
                     that
                     makes
                     this
                     request
                     ,
                     is
                     
                       Philemons
                       Partner
                    
                     ,
                     v.
                     17.
                     8.
                     
                     Philemon
                     shall
                     not
                     loose
                     by
                     receiving
                     him
                     ,
                     v.
                     18
                     ,
                     19.
                     9.
                     
                     Paul
                     shall
                     reap
                     the
                     fruit
                     of
                     sweet
                     refreshing
                     in
                     the
                     grant
                     of
                     this
                     request
                     ,
                     v
                     ,
                     20.
                     
                  
                   
                     IIII.
                     
                       The
                       Conclusion
                    
                     of
                     the
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     containing
                     1.
                     
                     Pauls
                     hope
                     of
                     Philemons
                     gratifying
                     him
                     .
                     2.
                     
                     His
                     request
                     to
                     prepare
                     himselfe
                     a
                     lodging
                     .
                     3.
                     
                     Salutations
                     .
                     4.
                     
                     And
                     the
                     Apostolicall
                     valediction
                     ,
                     v.
                     21.
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                    
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Hitherto
                   of
                   the
                   Epistles
                   written
                   to
                   the
                   
                   believing
                   Gentiles
                   ,
                   and
                   all
                
                 by
                 Paul
                 :
                 
                   Now
                   of
                   the
                   Epistles
                   written
                   to
                   the
                   believing
                   Iews
                   by
                   severall
                   Apostles
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 Hebrews
                 .
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   Epistle
                   of
                
                 Paul
                 
                   the
                   Apostle
                   to
                   the
                
                 HEBREWS
                 .
                 So
                 intituled
                 in
                 the
                 
                   Greek
                   Copies
                
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 Penman
                 writing
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 parties
                 to
                 whom
                 he
                 wrote
                 .
                 The
                 
                   Syriack
                   version
                
                 hath
                 it
                 ,
                 
                   The
                   Epistle
                   to
                   the
                   Hebrews
                
                 .
              
               
                 HEBREWS
                 .
                 So
                 denominated
                 not
                 from
                 
                   Heber
                   ,
                   Selah's
                
                 son
                 ,
                 Sem's
                 grandechild
                 mentioned
                 Gen.
                 10.24
                 .
                 But
                 rather
                 from
                 Abram
                 the
                 father
                 of
                 the
                 faithfull
                 .
                 and
                 that
                 not
                 from
                 the
                 name
                 Abram
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 written
                 with
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 whereas
                 Hebrews
                 ,
                 is
                 written
                 originally
                 with
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 viz.
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Hhhibri
                 .
                 but
                 from
                 the
                 Epithet
                 given
                 first
                 to
                 Abram
                 ,
                 viz.
                 
                   Abram
                   the
                   Hebrew
                
                 ,
                 Gen.
                 14.13
                 .
                 Abram
                 being
                 called
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 i.
                 e.
                 the
                 Hebrew
                 from
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 
                   To
                   passe
                   over
                   or
                   passe
                   thorough
                   ,
                
                 Gen.
                 12.6
                 .
                 because
                 from
                 Mesopotamia
                 he
                 passed
                 over
                 Euphrates
                 into
                 Canaan
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 passed
                 thorough
                 the
                 land
                 .
                 compare
                 Gen.
                 12.1
                 .
                 to
                 7.
                 with
                 Act.
                 7.2
                 ,
                 3
                 ,
                 4.
                 
                 So
                 that
                 
                   Abram
                   
                   the
                   Hebrew
                
                 ,
                 sounds
                 as
                 much
                 as
                 
                   Abram
                   the
                   Passenger
                
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   the
                   Passer-thorough
                
                 .
                 Hence
                 Abrams
                 posterity
                 are
                 called
                 Hebrews
                 ,
                 which
                 name
                 seems
                 somwhat
                 more
                 worthy
                 then
                 the
                 name
                 Iews
                 ,
                 because
                 the
                 name
                 Iews
                 came
                 but
                 from
                 
                   Iudah
                   ,
                   Iacobs
                
                 son
                 the
                 kingly
                 stock
                 .
                 To
                 Hebre●s
                 by
                 nation
                 ,
                 but
                 now
                 become
                 Christians
                 by
                 profession
                 ,
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 .
                 Some
                 think
                 the
                 Apostle
                 wrote
                 only
                 to
                 those
                 Hebrews
                 that
                 dwelt
                 in
                 Ierusalem
                 and
                 Iudea
                 ,
                 because
                 he
                 promises
                 to
                 see
                 them
                 ,
                 Heb.
                 13.23
                 .
                 but
                 Peter
                 seems
                 to
                 testify
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 to
                 the
                 dispersed
                 Hebrews
                 ;
                 compare
                 2
                 Pet.
                 3.15
                 .
                 and
                 3.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 with
                 1
                 Pet.
                 1.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 Why
                 might
                 not
                 the
                 Epistle
                 be
                 written
                 to
                 them
                 all
                 ?
              
               
                 Penman
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 is
                 not
                 so
                 infallibly
                 agreed
                 upon
                 by
                 learned
                 men
                 .
                 Some
                 of
                 old
                 ascribed
                 it
                 to
                 Luke
                 ,
                 or
                 Barnabas
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Clement
                   ,
                   Euseb.
                   Hist.
                   l.
                
                 6.
                 
                 
                   Platin
                   .
                   in
                   vit
                   .
                   Petri
                   ,
                   p.
                
                 10.
                 and
                 Hieronymus
                 .
                 Some
                 to
                 
                   Barnabas
                   ,
                   Tertullian
                   .
                   See
                   Erasin
                   .
                   Annot.
                   in
                   Act.
                
                 1.
                 p.
                 199.
                 
                 Some
                 to
                 
                   Apollos
                   ,
                   Luther
                   in
                   Gen.
                
                 48.
                 fol.
                 643.
                 
                 
                   De
                   Luc.
                   Osiander
                   in
                   Praefat.
                   ad
                   Hebr.
                   Calvin
                
                 himselfe
                 ,
                 though
                 in
                 his
                 Argument
                 ,
                 before
                 
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 he
                 saith
                 ,
                 
                   he
                   cannot
                   be
                   brought
                   to
                   think
                   it
                   was
                
                 Pauls
                 ,
                 yet
                 after
                 seems
                 to
                 incline
                 to
                 that
                 opinion
                 ,
                 that
                 Paul
                 wrote
                 it
                 ,
                 
                   Calv.
                   Com.
                   in
                   Heb.
                
                 13
                 ,
                 13.
                 
                 But
                 that
                 Paul
                 was
                 Penman
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 was
                 the
                 unanimous
                 opinion
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 ancient
                 Greek
                 writers
                 ,
                 (
                 except
                 Caius
                 mentioned
                 by
                 
                   Nicephorus
                   l.
                
                 4.
                 c.
                 34.
                 )
                 and
                 of
                 divers
                 
                   Latin
                   Authors
                
                 ,
                 ancient
                 and
                 moderne
                 .
                 See
                 
                   Gerh.
                   loc
                   .
                   com
                   .
                   de
                   Script
                   .
                   sacr
                   .
                   loc
                   .
                
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Exeges
                   .
                   Sect.
                
                 275.
                 and
                 
                   D.
                   Pareus
                   Proem
                   in
                   ep
                   .
                   ad
                   Hebr.
                   Sect.
                
                 1.
                 
                 
                   G.
                   Whitaker
                   disp
                   .
                   de
                   sacr
                   .
                   script
                   .
                   q.
                
                 1.
                 
                   c.
                   ult
                
                 .
                 That
                 the
                 Apostle
                 Paul
                 was
                 Penman
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 may
                 be
                 evinced
                 by
                 divers
                 considerable
                 Arguments
                 ,
                 As
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     All
                     the
                     Greek
                     Copies
                     of
                     the
                     Epistle
                     to
                     the
                     Hebrews
                     ,
                     (
                     except
                     one
                     wherein
                     the
                     Title
                     was
                     only
                     ,
                     
                       〈◊〉
                       〈◊〉
                       〈◊〉
                       〈◊〉
                       〈◊〉
                    
                     
                       i.
                       e.
                       To
                       the
                       Hebrews
                    
                     )
                     have
                     this
                     Title
                     
                       〈◊〉
                       〈◊〉
                       〈◊〉
                       〈◊〉
                       〈◊〉
                    
                     i.
                     e.
                     
                       The
                       Epistle
                       of
                    
                     Paul
                     
                       the
                       Apostle
                       to
                       the
                       Hebrews
                    
                     .
                     Th.
                     Bez.
                     in
                     Annot.
                     ante
                     ep
                     .
                     ad
                     Hebr.
                     
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     The
                     Testimony
                     of
                     Peter
                     is
                     most
                     considerable
                     ;
                     
                       As
                       our
                       beloved
                       brother
                    
                     Paul
                     
                       also
                       ,
                       according
                       to
                       the
                       wisedome
                       given
                       unto
                       
                       him
                       ,
                       hath
                       written
                       unto
                       you
                       .
                       As
                       also
                       in
                       all
                       his
                       Epistles
                       ,
                       speaking
                       in
                       them
                       of
                       these
                       things
                       ,
                       in
                       which
                       are
                       some
                       things
                       hard
                       to
                       be
                       understood
                       ,
                       &c.
                       
                    
                     2
                     Pet.
                     3.15
                     ,
                     16.
                     wherein
                     note
                     with
                     
                       Gerh.
                       Piscat
                    
                     .
                     and
                     others
                     ,
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         That
                         Paul
                         
                           wrote
                           to
                           them
                           also
                           to
                           whom
                           Peter
                           wrote
                           ,
                        
                         But
                         Peter
                         wrote
                         to
                         the
                         Hebrews
                         ,
                         both
                         his
                         Epistles
                         ,
                         1
                         Pet.
                         1.1
                         ,
                         2.
                         2
                         
                         Pet.
                         3.1
                         ,
                         2.
                         
                         Therefore
                         Paul
                         wrote
                         to
                         the
                         Hebrews
                         ,
                         either
                         this
                         Epistle
                         is
                         that
                         which
                         Paul
                         wrote
                         to
                         the
                         Hebrews
                         ,
                         or
                         it
                         s
                         lost
                         .
                         That
                         it
                         should
                         be
                         lost
                         ,
                         is
                         unlikely
                         ,
                         when
                         Gods
                         providence
                         hath
                         preserved
                         such
                         a
                         small
                         Epistle
                         ,
                         and
                         of
                         private
                         concernment
                         ,
                         as
                         his
                         
                           Epistle
                           to
                           Philemon
                        
                         ,
                         for
                         the
                         use
                         of
                         the
                         Church
                         ,
                         but
                         doubtlesse
                         what
                         Paul
                         wrote
                         to
                         the
                         Hebrews
                         ,
                         was
                         more
                         large
                         and
                         full
                         ,
                         and
                         touching
                         the
                         mystery
                         of
                         salvation
                         by
                         Christ
                         crucifyed
                         ,
                         as
                         most
                         necessary
                         to
                         them
                         who
                         stuck
                         too
                         much
                         to
                         the
                         
                           Leviticall
                           Priesthood
                        
                         ,
                         as
                         if
                         it
                         should
                         be
                         perpetuated
                         ,
                         and
                         stumbled
                         at
                         Christ
                         c●ucified
                         ;
                         and
                         this
                         is
                         the
                         Argument
                         of
                         this
                         Epistle
                         .
                      
                       
                         
                         2.
                         
                         
                           That
                           Paul
                           wrote
                           to
                           them
                           of
                           the
                           same
                           things
                           that
                           Peter
                           wrote
                           .
                        
                         Herein
                         Peters
                         Epistle
                         ,
                         and
                         this
                         to
                         the
                         Hebrews
                         ,
                         agree
                         ,
                         as
                         That
                         
                           by
                           Christ
                           are
                           given
                           to
                           us
                           ,
                           all
                           things
                           pertaining
                           to
                           life
                           and
                           godlinesse
                           ,
                        
                         2
                         Pet.
                         1.3
                         ,
                         4.
                         
                         That
                         Iesus
                         Christ
                         is
                         
                           the
                           son
                           of
                           God
                           in
                           whom
                           the
                           father
                           is
                           well
                           pleased
                           with
                           us
                           ,
                           of
                           whom
                           the
                           Prophets
                           spoke
                           ,
                        
                         2
                         Pet.
                         1.16
                         ,
                         17
                         ,
                         18.19
                         .
                         So
                         these
                         things
                         are
                         largely
                         handled
                         ,
                         Heb.
                         1.1
                         .
                         to
                         c.
                         10.19
                         Peter
                         exhorts
                         them
                         to
                         faith
                         and
                         holinesse
                         ,
                         2
                         Pet.
                         1.5
                         .
                         to
                         16.
                         and
                         3.1
                         .
                         to
                         15.
                         
                         So
                         the
                         Epistle
                         to
                         the
                         Hebrews
                         ,
                         c.
                         2
                         ,
                         1.
                         to
                         5.
                         and
                         3.1
                         ,
                         6.
                         
                           to
                           the
                           end
                        
                         and
                         c.
                         4.
                         and
                         6.11
                         ,
                         12.
                         and
                         c.
                         10
                         ,
                         19.
                         to
                         c.
                         13
                         ,
                         20
                         ▪
                         Peter
                         shews
                         the
                         
                           danger
                           of
                           Apostacy
                        
                         ,
                         2
                         Pet.
                         2.20
                         ,
                         21
                         ,
                         22.
                         
                         So
                         the
                         Epistle
                         to
                         the
                         Hebrews
                         ,
                         c.
                         6
                         ,
                         4.
                         to
                         9.
                         and
                         10.26
                         ,
                         to
                         32.
                         
                      
                       
                         3.
                         
                         That
                         Paul
                         
                           wrote
                           wisely
                        
                         ,
                         much
                         wisedome
                         appears
                         both
                         in
                         words
                         ,
                         matter
                         and
                         method
                         of
                         this
                         Epistle
                         to
                         the
                         Hebrews
                         .
                      
                       
                         4.
                         
                         
                           That
                           herein
                           are
                           some
                           things
                           hard
                           to
                           be
                           understood
                           ,
                        
                         as
                         about
                         Apostates
                         ,
                         
                         Heb.
                         6.
                         and
                         Heb.
                         10.
                         as
                         about
                         predestination
                         ,
                         Rom.
                         9.
                         c.
                         11.
                         and
                         Eph.
                         1.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     3.
                     
                     Pauls
                     zeale
                     and
                     affection
                     was
                     great
                     to
                     the
                     Hebrews
                     ,
                     Rom.
                     9.1
                     ,
                     2
                     ,
                     3
                     ,
                     4.
                     &c.
                     and
                     can
                     we
                     thinke
                     he
                     should
                     never
                     write
                     to
                     them
                     that
                     were
                     so
                     exceeding
                     deare
                     to
                     him
                     ,
                     and
                     what
                     could
                     he
                     write
                     more
                     proper
                     and
                     necessary
                     for
                     them
                     ,
                     then
                     touching
                     the
                     abrogation
                     of
                     the
                     
                       Leviticall
                       Priesthood
                    
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     excellency
                     of
                     Christs
                     person
                     and
                     office
                     ;
                     which
                     this
                     Epistle
                     treats
                     of
                     ,
                     above
                     any
                     other
                     ?
                  
                   
                     4.
                     
                     Mention
                     is
                     here
                     made
                     of
                     
                       Timothy
                       his
                       brother
                    
                     ,
                     and
                     that
                     he
                     is
                     
                       set
                       at
                       liberty
                    
                     ,
                     Heb.
                     13.23
                     .
                     elsewhere
                     Paul
                     cals
                     
                       Timothy
                       his
                       brother
                    
                     ,
                     1
                     Thes.
                     3.
                     2.
                     
                     Philem.
                     1.
                     and
                     in
                     what
                     account
                     Timothy
                     ,
                     (
                     Pauls
                     companion
                     )
                     was
                     with
                     
                       Paul
                       ,
                       See
                       Annot.
                       in
                    
                     1
                     
                       Tim.
                       before
                    
                     .
                  
                   
                     5.
                     
                     The
                     Author
                     of
                     this
                     Epistle
                     mentions
                     his
                     bonds
                     ,
                     Heb.
                     ●0
                     .
                     34
                     .
                     and
                     13.23
                     .
                     and
                     this
                     is
                     Pauls
                     manner
                     in
                     his
                     Epistles
                     ,
                     Rom.
                     16.21
                     .
                     1
                     Cor.
                     16.10
                     ,
                     11.
                     2
                     
                     Cor.
                     1.1
                     .
                     Col.
                     1.1
                     .
                     1
                     Thes.
                     1.1
                     .
                     and
                     3.2
                     .
                     2
                     Thes.
                     1.
                     1.
                     
                     Philem.
                     1.9.10
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                     6.
                     
                     The
                     character
                     of
                     the
                     stile
                     and
                     language
                     in
                     this
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     seems
                     so
                     plainly
                     to
                     be
                     the
                     same
                     with
                     Pauls
                     in
                     his
                     other
                     Epistles
                     ,
                     that
                     they
                     indigitate
                     Paul
                     to
                     be
                     the
                     Penman
                     Well
                     consider
                     and
                     parallel
                     the
                     ensuing
                     places
                     .
                     
                       
                         Heb.
                         1
                         ,
                         2
                         ,
                         3.
                         —
                         with
                         Col.
                         1.14
                         ,
                         15
                         ,
                         16
                         ,
                         17.
                         
                      
                       
                         Heb.
                         5
                         ,
                         12
                         ,
                         13.
                         —
                         with
                         1
                         Cor.
                         3.1
                         ,
                         2.
                         
                      
                       
                         Heb.
                         9.15
                         .
                         —
                         with
                         Rom.
                         3.25
                         .
                      
                       
                         Heb
                         ,
                         10.34
                         .
                         —
                         with
                         Phil.
                         1.13
                         .
                         and
                         Philem.
                         v.
                         1
                         ,
                         9
                         ,
                         10.
                         
                      
                       
                         Heb.
                         10.34
                         .
                         —
                         with
                         1
                         Thes.
                         2.14
                         .
                      
                       
                         Heb.
                         10.36
                         .
                         —
                         with
                         Gal
                         3.22
                         .
                      
                       
                         Heb.
                         11.11
                         ,
                         12.
                         —
                         with
                         Rom.
                         4.18
                         ,
                         19.
                         
                      
                       
                         Heb.
                         12.1
                         .
                         —
                         with
                         1
                         Cor
                         9.24
                         .
                      
                       
                         Heb.
                         13.7
                         .
                         —
                         with
                         Philip.
                         2.25.29
                         .
                      
                       
                         Heb.
                         13.9
                         .
                         —
                         with
                         Eph.
                         4.14
                         .
                      
                       
                         Heb.
                         13.15
                         ,
                         16.
                         —
                         with
                         Rom.
                         12.1
                         ,
                         2.
                         
                      
                       
                         Heb.
                         13.17
                         .
                         —
                         with
                         1
                         Thes.
                         5.12
                         ,
                         13.
                         
                      
                       
                         Heb.
                         13.18
                         —
                         with
                         2
                         Cor.
                         1.11
                         ,
                         12.
                         
                         Act.
                         23.1.24.16
                         .
                      
                       
                         Heb.
                         13.20
                         ,
                         21.
                         —
                         with
                         1
                         Thes.
                         5.23
                         .
                         Rom.
                         15.23
                         .
                         and
                         16.20
                         .
                         2
                         Cor.
                         23.13
                         .
                         Phil.
                         49.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     7.
                     
                     Finally
                     ,
                     that
                     which
                     the
                     Apostle
                     himselfe
                     counts
                     as
                     it
                     were
                     the
                     character
                     and
                     seale
                     of
                     all
                     his
                     Epistles
                     ,
                     his
                     Token
                     ,
                     2
                     Thes.
                     3.17
                     ,
                     18.
                     
                     
                       The
                       Grace
                       of
                       our
                       Lord
                       Iesus
                       Christ
                       be
                       with
                       you
                       all
                       .
                       Amen
                    
                     ;
                     is
                     the
                     valedictory
                     close
                     of
                     this
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     Heb.
                     13.25
                     .
                  
                
              
               
               
                 These
                 Arguments
                 may
                 strongly
                 perswade
                 that
                 the
                 Apostle
                 Paul
                 was
                 Pen-man
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 and
                 consequently
                 ,
                 that
                 this
                 Epistle
                 is
                 of
                 Apostolicall
                 ,
                 yea
                 of
                 
                   divine
                   Authority
                
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 his
                 other
                 Epistles
                 .
                 Nor
                 are
                 the
                 objections
                 usually
                 brought
                 to
                 the
                 contrary
                 ,
                 of
                 such
                 difficulty
                 ,
                 but
                 that
                 they
                 may
                 easily
                 receive
                 satisfactory
                 Answers
                 .
                 And
                 are
                 answered
                 by
                 
                   Bez.
                   Pareus
                   and
                   Piscator
                   in
                   their
                   Prologue
                   before
                   this
                   Epistle
                   .
                   Gerh.
                   exeges
                   .
                   loc
                   .
                   Com.
                
                 1.
                 
                   de
                   script
                   .
                   sacr
                   .
                   cap.
                
                 10.
                 
                 Sect.
                 277.
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 When
                 and
                 Whence
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 
                   See
                   in
                   former
                   Table
                
                 .
              
               
                 That
                 it
                 was
                 not
                 written
                 in
                 Hebrew
                 by
                 
                   P●ul
                   ,
                   an
                   Hebrew
                
                 to
                 the
                 Hebrews
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 translated
                 into
                 Greek
                 ,
                 by
                 Luke
                 or
                 Barnabas
                 as
                 some
                 think
                 ,
                 viz.
                 
                   Clem
                   Alexan.
                   S●rom
                   .
                   l.
                
                 4.
                 
                 
                   Euseb.
                   Hist.
                   Eccles.
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 3●
                 .
                 
                   Hieronym
                   .
                   in
                   Catal.
                   script
                   .
                   illustr
                   .
                
                 &c.
                 But
                 rather
                 that
                 Paul
                 wrote
                 this
                 Epistle
                 at
                 first
                 in
                 Greek
                 ,
                 may
                 be
                 probably
                 believed
                 upon
                 these
                 ensuing
                 grounds
                 ,
                 
                   vid.
                   Fran.
                   Iunium
                   paral
                   .
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 
                   in
                   c.
                
                 9.
                 
                   hujus
                   Epist.
                   p.
                
                 479.
                 
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 stile
                 and
                 phrase
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 
                 seems
                 rather
                 to
                 Grecize
                 ,
                 then
                 to
                 Hebraize
                 ,
                 there
                 being
                 fewer
                 Hebraismes
                 in
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 then
                 in
                 Pauls
                 other
                 Epistles
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 places
                 alledged
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 old
                 Testament
                 ,
                 are
                 not
                 alledged
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 Hebrew
                 originall
                 ,
                 but
                 the
                 
                   Greek
                   version
                   of
                   the
                
                 LXXII
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 The
                 Hebrew
                 names
                 are
                 interpreted
                 ,
                 as
                 
                   Melchi-zedek
                   ,
                   King
                   of
                   righteousnesse
                   ,
                   and
                   Salem
                   ,
                   peace
                   ,
                
                 Heb.
                 7.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 Most
                 Iewes
                 then
                 understood
                 the
                 Greek
                 tongue
                 ,
                 especially
                 those
                 that
                 lived
                 in
                 
                   Asia
                   Minor.
                
                 
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 Peter
                 and
                 Iames
                 wrote
                 their
                 Epistles
                 to
                 the
                 dispersed
                 Iewes
                 in
                 Greek
                 ,
                 and
                 Paul
                 wrote
                 all
                 his
                 other
                 Epistles
                 to
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 in
                 Greek
                 ;
                 why
                 then
                 should
                 we
                 imagine
                 this
                 to
                 be
                 written
                 in
                 Hebrew
                 ?
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 The
                 Ancient
                 writers
                 testifie
                 not
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 have
                 seen
                 any
                 originall
                 Hebrew
                 Copy
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 .
              
               
                 Occasion
                 ,
                 seemes
                 to
                 be
                 the
                 infirmity
                 and
                 affliction
                 of
                 the
                 believing
                 Hebrews
                 .
                 For
                 the
                 whole
                 current
                 of
                 the
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 seems
                 to
                 intimate
                 ,
                 That
                 though
                 
                 they
                 had
                 entertained
                 Christ
                 ,
                 yet
                 they
                 adhered
                 too
                 much
                 to
                 Moses
                 and
                 the
                 Leviticall
                 Priesthood
                 ,
                 and
                 perhaps
                 some
                 of
                 them
                 had
                 some
                 hesitancy
                 about
                 Christ
                 ,
                 whether
                 he
                 were
                 the
                 promised
                 Messiah
                 :
                 and
                 yet
                 for
                 their
                 entertaining
                 of
                 Christ
                 so
                 farre
                 as
                 they
                 did
                 ,
                 they
                 seem
                 not
                 only
                 to
                 be
                 reproached
                 by
                 their
                 Countreymen
                 ,
                 as
                 Apostates
                 from
                 the
                 Law
                 ,
                 but
                 were
                 greatly
                 persecuted
                 for
                 Christ
                 ;
                 the
                 Apostle
                 understanding
                 this
                 their
                 s●ate
                 ,
                 wrote
                 to
                 instruct
                 and
                 support
                 them
                 herein
                 ;
                 
                   vid.
                   Athanas.
                   in
                   Synops.
                
                 
              
               
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   For
                   confirmation
                   and
                   comfort
                   ,
                   of
                   the
                   weak
                   and
                   afflicted
                   Hebrews
                   ,
                   to
                   evidence
                   that
                   Iesus
                   Christ
                   is
                   true
                   God
                   and
                   man
                   ,
                   like
                   us
                   in
                   all
                   things
                   ,
                   (
                   only
                   sin
                   excepted
                   ,
                   )
                   and
                   therefore
                   the
                   only
                   true
                
                 Messiah
                 ,
                 
                   promised
                   in
                   the
                   Old
                   Testament
                   ,
                   and
                   exhibited
                   in
                   the
                   New
                   ;
                   that
                   he
                   is
                   the
                   Churches
                   only
                   King
                   ,
                   Prophet
                   and
                   Priest
                   ,
                   able
                   to
                   save
                   all
                   that
                   come
                   to
                   him
                   to
                   the
                   uttermost
                   ,
                   having
                   by
                   offering
                   up
                   himselfe
                   once
                   ,
                   for
                   ever
                   perfected
                   them
                   that
                   are
                   sanctified
                   ,
                   and
                   abrogated
                   the
                   Leviticall
                   Priesthood
                   and
                   law
                   ,
                   and
                   therefore
                   that
                   they
                   ought
                   to
                   believe
                   in
                   him
                   ,
                   persevere
                   in
                   
                   faith
                   ,
                   and
                   walk
                   worthy
                   of
                   Christ
                   and
                   his
                   Gospel
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 .
                 to
                 this
                 end
                 .
                 This
                 Epistle
                 is
                 partly
                 Doctrinall
                 ,
                 partly
                 Practicall
                 .
              
               
                 
                   I.
                   Doctrinall
                   and
                   Informatory
                   touching
                   Christ
                   himselfe
                   ,
                   viz.
                   In
                   respect
                   of
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       
                         His
                         Person
                      
                       ;
                       That
                       he
                       is
                       1.
                       
                       The
                       eternall
                       sonne
                       of
                       God
                       ,
                       c.
                       1.
                       2.
                       
                       True
                       man
                       ,
                       taking
                       flesh
                       of
                       the
                       seed
                       of
                       
                         Abraham
                         ,
                         c.
                      
                       2.
                       
                       And
                       therefore
                       his
                       Doctrine
                       to
                       be
                       more
                       hearkned
                       to
                       then
                       the
                       word
                       of
                       Moses
                       or
                       Angels
                       .
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       
                         His
                         Office
                      
                       ,
                       viz.
                       
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           Propheticall
                           ,
                           Wherein
                           he
                           farre
                           surpassed
                           Moses
                           ,
                           whom
                           therefore
                           we
                           must
                           believe
                           and
                           obey
                           lest
                           we
                           lose
                           the
                           eternall
                           ,
                           as
                           Israel
                           the
                           temporall
                           Canaan
                           c.
                           3
                           ,
                           4.
                           
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           Sacerdotall
                           or
                           Priestly
                           ,
                           wherein
                           Christ
                           is
                           asserted
                           by
                           the
                           Apostle
                           ,
                           to
                           be
                           out
                           great
                           High-priest
                           ,
                           To
                           this
                           end
                           ,
                           
                             
                               1.
                               
                               
                                 He
                                 compares
                              
                               him
                               to
                               Aaron
                               in
                               his
                               call
                               to
                               his
                               Office
                               ,
                               c.
                               5.1
                               .
                               to
                               6.
                               
                            
                             
                               2.
                               
                               
                                 He
                                 preferres
                              
                               him
                               before
                               Aaron
                               ,
                               c.
                               5
                               ,
                               6.
                               to
                               11
                               ,
                               (
                               and
                               being
                               to
                               speake
                               further
                               of
                               this
                               mystery
                               ,
                               by
                               way
                               of
                               digression
                               he
                               taxes
                               their
                               dulnesse
                               in
                               understanding
                               ,
                               and
                               warnes
                               them
                               against
                               Apostacy
                               ,
                               c.
                               5.11
                               .
                               
                                 to
                                 the
                                 end
                              
                               ,
                               &
                               c.
                               6.
                               )
                               Christ
                               is
                               preferred
                               
                               before
                               Aaron
                               ,
                               1.
                               
                               In
                               excellency
                               of
                               order
                               ,
                               being
                               of
                               Melchisedeck's
                               order
                               ,
                               who
                               was
                               above
                               Levi
                               ,
                               Christ
                               also
                               being
                               made
                               of
                               this
                               order
                               by
                               an
                               Oath
                               ,
                               and
                               that
                               for
                               ever
                               .
                               c.
                               7.
                               2.
                               
                               In
                               Excellency
                               of
                               Sacrifice
                               and
                               Ministry
                               beyond
                               Aarons
                               ,
                               he
                               being
                               Mediator
                               of
                               the
                               New
                               and
                               lasting
                               Covenant
                               ,
                               the
                               old
                               being
                               antiquated
                               ,
                               c.
                               8.
                               
                               He
                               entring
                               into
                               heaven
                               ,
                               not
                               an
                               earthly
                               Tabernacle
                               ,
                               with
                               his
                               own
                               blood
                               ,
                               not
                               blood
                               of
                               beasts
                               ;
                               Once
                               ,
                               and
                               not
                               often
                               ;
                               hath
                               purged
                               the
                               Conscience
                               not
                               onely
                               the
                               flesh
                               ;
                               and
                               this
                               not
                               for
                               a
                               season
                               ,
                               but
                               for
                               ever
                               c.
                               9
                               ,
                               and
                               10
                               ,
                               1.
                               to
                               19.
                               
                            
                          
                        
                         
                           3.
                           
                           Regall
                           in
                           divers
                           places
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
                 
                   II.
                   Practicall
                   and
                   Hortatory
                   to
                   Christians
                   ,
                   Whom
                   he
                   exhorts
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       
                         To
                         Faith
                      
                       and
                       constancy
                       therein
                       ,
                       1.
                       
                       From
                       the
                       perill
                       of
                       Apostacy
                       ;
                       and
                       the
                       great
                       reward
                       ,
                       c.
                       10.19
                       .
                       
                         to
                         the
                         end
                      
                       .
                       2.
                       
                       From
                       the
                       cloud
                       of
                       faithfull
                       examples
                       to
                       be
                       followed
                       ,
                       c.
                       11.
                       
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       
                         To
                         divers
                         Religious
                         exercises
                      
                       .
                       1.
                       
                       To
                       patience
                       and
                       constancy
                       under
                       the
                       crosse
                       ,
                       c.
                       12.1
                       .
                       to
                       14.
                       2.
                       
                       To
                       Peace
                       and
                       holinesse
                       ,
                       14.
                       to
                       18.
                       3.
                       
                       To
                       entertainment
                       of
                       the
                       Gospel
                       ,
                       v.
                       18.
                       
                         to
                         the
                         end
                      
                       .
                       4.
                       
                       To
                       Charity
                       ,
                       c.
                       12.1
                       ,
                       2
                       ,
                       3.
                       5.
                       
                       To
                       Marriage-chastity
                       ver
                       .
                       4.
                       6.
                       
                       To
                       Contentment
                       
                       ver
                       .
                       5.6
                       .
                       7.
                       
                       To
                       follow
                       the
                       Faith
                       and
                       constancy
                       of
                       their
                       teachers
                       ,
                       ver
                       .
                       7.
                       to
                       16
                       ,
                       8.
                       
                       To
                       Benisicence
                       ,
                       ver
                       .
                       16.
                       9.
                       
                       To
                       due
                       respect
                       to
                       Church-governours
                       ver
                       .
                       17.
                       
                       And
                       so
                       concludes
                       his
                       Epistle
                       ver
                       .
                       18.
                       
                         to
                         the
                         end
                      
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Thus
                   of
                   the
                   Epistle
                   of
                   the
                   Apostle
                   Paul
                   to
                   the
                   believing
                   Hebrewes
                   .
                
              
               
                 Now
                 follow
                 seven
                 other
                 Epistles
                 ,
                 some
                 of
                 them
                 evidently
                 ,
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 them
                 probably
                 ,
                 written
                 to
                 
                   believing
                   Hebrews
                   .
                   viz.
                
                 The
                 Epistle
                 of
                 Iames
                 ,
                 Jam.
                 1.1
                 .
                 The
                 two
                 Epistles
                 of
                 Peter
                 ;
                 compare
                 1
                 Pet.
                 1.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 with
                 2
                 Pet.
                 1.1.2
                 .
                 &
                 3.1
                 .
                 The
                 first
                 Epistle
                 of
                 Iohn
                 seems
                 probably
                 written
                 to
                 al
                 the
                 
                   believing
                   Hebrews
                
                 ,
                 especially
                 in
                 
                   Asia
                   Minor
                
                 ;
                 for
                 1.
                 the
                 Greek
                 title
                 cals
                 it
                 a
                 Catholique
                 or
                 generall
                 Epistle
                 
                   Zanch.
                   Prolegom
                   .
                   in
                
                 1
                 
                   Ioan.
                   Ep.
                   p.
                
                 6
                 ,
                 
                   Bez.
                   Annot.
                   in
                
                 1
                 Ioan.
                 Because
                 generally
                 written
                 to
                 al
                 the
                 Jewes
                 .
                 (
                 Though
                 some
                 think
                 it
                 was
                 written
                 to
                 the
                 Parthians
                 ,
                 among
                 whom
                 were
                 many
                 Jewes
                 of
                 the
                 old
                 Captivity
                 and
                 dispersion
                 of
                 the
                 tenne
                 Tribes
                 ,
                 whence
                 Parthians
                 are
                 thought
                 to
                 be
                 named
                 in
                 the
                 first
                 place
                 ,
                 Act.
                 2.9
                 .
                 
                   Possilius
                   in
                   Indic
                   .
                   operum
                   Augustin
                   .
                   August
                   .
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Q.
                   Evang.
                   c.
                
                 39.
                 )
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 
                 very
                 matter
                 of
                 the
                 Epistle
                 being
                 directed
                 against
                 the
                 blasphemous
                 errou●s
                 broached
                 among
                 the
                 Iewes
                 ,
                 especially
                 those
                 of
                 Ebion
                 and
                 Cerinthus
                 against
                 the
                 Divinity
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 seemes
                 to
                 imply
                 that
                 it
                 was
                 principally
                 written
                 to
                 the
                 Iewe●
                 .
                 The
                 second
                 Epistle
                 of
                 Iohn
                 is
                 to
                 an
                 
                   Elect
                   Lady
                
                 ,
                 probably
                 a
                 believing
                 Hebrew
                 ,
                 of
                 great
                 wealth
                 and
                 worth
                 .
                 For
                 he
                 warns
                 both
                 her
                 and
                 her
                 children
                 of
                 the
                 Heresies
                 and
                 seducers
                 that
                 opposed
                 the
                 person
                 of
                 Christ
                 after
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 his
                 first
                 Epistle
                 .
                 And
                 he
                 intimates
                 his
                 intention
                 of
                 visiting
                 them
                 shortly
                 .
                 Gaius
                 ,
                 ●o
                 whom
                 he
                 wrote
                 his
                 
                   third
                   Epistle
                
                 ,
                 is
                 not
                 obscurely
                 intimated
                 there
                 to
                 be
                 a
                 believing
                 Jew
                 ,
                 3
                 Ioh.
                 v.
                 1
                 ,
                 2
                 ,
                 6
                 ,
                 7.
                 
                 As
                 
                   Piscat
                   .
                   in
                   loc
                   .
                   notes
                   .
                
                 Finally
                 the
                 Epistle
                 of
                 Iude
                 seemes
                 written
                 to
                 the
                 dispersed
                 believing
                 Iewes
                 .
                 1
                 In
                 the
                 Greek
                 title
                 it
                 being
                 called
                 Catholike
                 or
                 Generall
                 .
                 2
                 And
                 for
                 the
                 matter
                 of
                 it
                 being
                 of
                 like
                 nature
                 with
                 2
                 
                   of
                   Pet.
                
                 even
                 as
                 an
                 
                   Abstract
                   of
                   it
                
                 ;
                 against
                 the
                 Seducers
                 of
                 those
                 times
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 samenesse
                 of
                 words
                 and
                 phrase
                 import
                 .
              
               
                 These
                 seven
                 Epistles
                 are
                 by
                 some
                 called
                 ,
                 Catholique
                 ;
                 by
                 some
                 Canonicall
                 .
              
               
               
                 Catholique
                 ,
                 or
                 Generall
                 ;
                 not
                 in
                 respect
                 of
                 the
                 universall
                 concernment
                 of
                 the
                 matters
                 contayned
                 in
                 them
                 ,
                 for
                 such
                 is
                 the
                 matter
                 of
                 Pauls
                 Epistles
                 also
                 :
                 but
                 in
                 respect
                 of
                 the
                 parties
                 to
                 whom
                 these
                 Epistles
                 are
                 written
                 ,
                 viz.
                 Not
                 to
                 any
                 particular
                 Church
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Epistle
                 to
                 the
                 
                   Romanes
                   ,
                   Corinth
                
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Nor
                 to
                 particular
                 persons
                 as
                 the
                 Epistle
                 to
                 
                   Timothy
                   ,
                   Titus
                   ,
                   Philemon
                
                 :
                 But
                 generally
                 to
                 the
                 believing
                 Iewes
                 dispersed
                 in
                 severall
                 Countries
                 .
                 In
                 this
                 respect
                 divers
                 Latin
                 ,
                 especially
                 Greek
                 writers
                 call
                 them
                 Catholique
                 ,
                 viz.
                 Greek
                 Scholiast
                 .
                 
                   (
                   as
                   Bez.
                   Annot.
                   ante
                   Epist.
                   Iac.
                   observes
                   .
                   )
                   Origen
                   apud
                   Euseb.
                   Hist.
                   l.
                
                 6.
                 c.
                 19.
                 
                 
                   Dionys.
                   Alexandrin
                   .
                   apud
                   Euseb.
                   l.
                
                 7.
                 c.
                 20.
                 
                 
                   Eusebiu●
                   Hist.
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 22.
                 
                 
                   Cyril
                   Hierosolym
                   .
                   Catech.
                
                 17.
                 
                 
                   Hieronym
                   ▪
                   in
                   Catal.
                   Script
                
                 .
                 &c.
                 Though
                 properly
                 the
                 
                   second
                   and
                   third
                   Epistle
                   of
                   Iohn
                
                 cannot
                 be
                 called
                 Catholique
                 ,
                 yet
                 being
                 joyned
                 to
                 
                   Iohn's
                   first
                   Epistle
                
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 Catholique
                 ,
                 by
                 use
                 they
                 come
                 to
                 be
                 so
                 called
                 ,
                 though
                 abusively
                 .
              
               
                 Canonicall
                 ;
                 not
                 that
                 these
                 seven
                 Epistles
                 onely
                 ,
                 or
                 peculiarly
                 ,
                 among
                 al●
                 others
                 are
                 Canonicall
                 and
                 A●thentique
                 ;
                 
                 that
                 were
                 to
                 derogate
                 from
                 other
                 Epistles
                 of
                 Paul
                 ;
                 but
                 because
                 they
                 contain
                 Canons
                 or
                 Rules
                 of
                 Christian
                 life
                 .
                 
                   Ger.
                   loc
                   .
                   ●om
                   .
                   exeg
                   .
                   loc
                   .
                
                 1.
                 c.
                 10.
                 
                 §
                 .
                 291.
                 
                 Beza
                 thinks
                 they
                 were
                 by
                 mistake
                 called
                 Canonicall
                 (
                 perhaps
                 for
                 Catholicall
                 )
                 for
                 1.
                 why
                 should
                 not
                 also
                 Pauls
                 Epistles
                 be
                 called
                 Canonicall
                 ?
                 2.
                 
                 Greek
                 writers
                 do
                 not
                 so
                 call
                 them
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 Latins
                 have
                 ,
                 though
                 groundlesly
                 ,
                 doubted
                 of
                 the
                 authority
                 of
                 the
                 Epistle
                 of
                 Iames
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   second
                   of
                   Peter
                
                 .
                 Therefore
                 it
                 s
                 not
                 probable
                 they
                 would
                 call
                 them
                 
                   Canonicall
                   .
                   Bez.
                   Annot.
                   ante
                   Epist.
                   Iacob
                   .
                   &
                   D.
                   Pareus
                   in
                   prolegom
                   .
                   in
                   Epist.
                   Iacobi
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 James
                 .
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   Catholique
                   Epistle
                   of
                
                 JAMES
                 
                   the
                   Apostle
                
                 .
                 So
                 stiled
                 in
                 the
                 Greek
                 Copies
                 .
                 Bez.
                 
              
               
                 Penman
                 hereof
                 was
                 Iames.
                 Iam.
                 ●
                 .
                 1
                 .
                 Iames
                 in
                 Greek
                 and
                 Latine
                 is
                 the
                 same
                 with
                 the
                 Hebrew
                 Iakob
                 ,
                 which
                 signifies
                 A
                 supplanter
                 .
                 Gen.
                 25.25.27
                 .
                 
                 36.
                 
                 But
                 what
                 Iames
                 this
                 was
                 ,
                 is
                 not
                 so
                 easily
                 determined
                 .
                 There
                 were
                 three
                 of
                 that
                 name
                 (
                 as
                 some
                 learned
                 Authors
                 are
                 of
                 opinion
                 )
                 two
                 of
                 them
                 Apostles
                 ,
                 and
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 70
                 Disciples
                 ,
                 viz.
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Iames
                   the
                   sonne
                   of
                   Zebedee
                
                 ,
                 brother
                 to
                 Iohn
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 4.21.22
                 .
                 &
                 10.2
                 .
                 He
                 was
                 with
                 Christ
                 at
                 his
                 transfiguration
                 ,
                 Mat.
                 17.1
                 .
                 He
                 was
                 called
                 
                   Iames
                   the
                   greater
                
                 ,
                 either
                 in
                 respect
                 of
                 his
                 age
                 ,
                 or
                 of
                 his
                 stature
                 ,
                 or
                 of
                 his
                 calling
                 to
                 the
                 Apostleship
                 .
                 The
                 Syriack
                 interpreter
                 seems
                 to
                 ascribe
                 this
                 Epistle
                 to
                 this
                 Iames
                 ,
                 as
                 Tremellius
                 renders
                 it
                 ,
                 
                   Tres
                   Epistolae
                
                 ,
                 &c.
                 i.
                 e
                 ▪
                 
                   Three
                   Epistles
                   of
                   three
                   Apostles
                   before
                   whose
                   eyes
                   our
                   Lord
                   did
                   trans-fi-gure
                   himselfe
                   ,
                
                 viz.
                 
                   Of
                   Iames
                   ,
                   Peter
                   ,
                   and
                   Iohn
                   .
                
                 But
                 (
                 as
                 Pareus
                 notes
                 ,
                 
                   Proem
                   .
                   in
                   Epist.
                   Iac.
                
                 )
                 the
                 Kings
                 edition
                 translated
                 by
                 
                   G.
                   Fabritius
                
                 hath
                 it
                 thus
                 ,
                 
                   In
                   nomine
                   Domini
                   I●shua
                   Meschicho
                   sigillamus
                   tres
                   Epistolas
                   :
                   Iaakoub
                   ,
                   &
                   Petri
                   ,
                   &
                   Iouchanon
                   .
                
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   In
                   the
                   name
                   of
                   the
                   Lord
                   Iesus
                   the
                   Messiah
                   ,
                   we
                   Seale
                   the
                   three
                   Epistles
                   of
                   Iames
                   ,
                   and
                   Peter
                   ,
                   and
                   Iohn
                   .
                
                 This
                 speakes
                 not
                 particularly
                 of
                 Iames
                 the
                 greater
                 .
                 Besides
                 ,
                 this
                 Iames
                 was
                 pu●
                 to
                 death
                 by
                 
                   Herod
                   Agrippa
                
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 second
                 
                 yeare
                 of
                 Claudius
                 .
                 See
                 Act.
                 12.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 but
                 this
                 Epistle
                 seemes
                 to
                 be
                 writt●n
                 afterwards
                 to
                 the
                 convert
                 Iewes
                 dispersed
                 ,
                 afte●
                 Claudius
                 had
                 cast
                 both
                 Iewes
                 and
                 Christians
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 Rome
                 ,
                 Act.
                 18.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Su●ton
                   in
                   Claud.
                   c.
                
                 25.2
                 .
                 
                   Iames
                   the
                   sonne
                   of
                   Alpheus
                
                 ,
                 an
                 Apostle
                 also
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 10.3
                 .
                 Act.
                 1.3
                 .
                 Brother
                 of
                 I●de
                 ,
                 Iud.
                 1.
                 
                 Called
                 sometimes
                 
                   Iames
                   the
                   lesse
                
                 ,
                 for
                 distinction
                 from
                 the
                 former
                 Iames
                 ,
                 Mark.
                 15.40
                 .
                 and
                 
                   the
                   brother
                   of
                   the
                   Lord
                
                 ,
                 Gal.
                 1.19
                 .
                 Matth.
                 13.55
                 .
                 Mark.
                 6.3
                 .
                 Either
                 1
                 because
                 he
                 was
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Ioseph
                 (
                 the
                 supposed
                 Father
                 of
                 Christ
                 )
                 by
                 a
                 former
                 wife
                 ,
                 as
                 divers
                 both
                 Greeke
                 and
                 Latin
                 Fathers
                 think
                 
                   See
                   Iacob
                   .
                   Laurentii
                   Com.
                   in
                   la.
                
                 1.1
                 .
                 p.
                 1●
                 .
                 12
                 .
                 Or
                 rather
                 ●
                 he
                 is
                 called
                 the
                 
                   Lords
                   brother
                
                 (
                 after
                 the
                 Hebrewes
                 manner
                 of
                 speaking
                 )
                 because
                 he
                 was
                 Cousin
                 germane
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 his
                 Mother
                 being
                 that
                 Mary
                 wife
                 of
                 Cleophas
                 ,
                 (
                 as
                 some
                 thinke
                 )
                 which
                 was
                 Sister
                 to
                 the
                 blessed
                 Virgin
                 ,
                 Mark.
                 16.1
                 .
                 
                   Hieronym
                   .
                   advers
                   .
                   He●uid
                   .
                   lib.
                   Theodoret.
                   in
                   Epist.
                   ad
                   Gal.
                   cap.
                
                 1.
                 
                 Ignatius
                 thinks
                 he
                 was
                 called
                 the
                 
                   Lords
                   Brother
                
                 because
                 he
                 so
                 exactly
                 resembled
                 Christ
                 in
                 countenance
                 ,
                 and
                 conversation
                 ,
                 
                 as
                 if
                 they
                 had
                 been
                 twins
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 he
                 was
                 surnamed
                 
                   Iustus
                   .
                   Ignat
                   .
                   in
                   Epist.
                
                 2
                 
                   ad
                   Ioan.
                   Seniorem
                
                 .
                 This
                 Iames
                 is
                 conceived
                 to
                 be
                 Penman
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 it
                 being
                 most
                 suitable
                 to
                 an
                 Apostle
                 of
                 unlimited
                 Commission
                 to
                 take
                 care
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Tribes
                 dispersed
                 .
                 The
                 matter
                 of
                 the
                 Epistle
                 becomes
                 an
                 Apostolicall
                 Spirit
                 .
                 Nor
                 (
                 saith
                 Pareus
                 )
                 doth
                 any
                 thing
                 solidly
                 contradict
                 this
                 opinion
                 ;
                 who
                 there
                 answers
                 objections
                 against
                 it
                 .
                 Therefore
                 if
                 the
                 Epistle
                 be
                 Apostolicall
                 ,
                 it
                 is
                 questionlesse
                 of
                 Divine
                 Authority
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 As
                 for
                 the
                 
                   third
                   Iames
                
                 called
                 Oblias
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 the
                 seventy
                 Disciples
                 ,
                 Bishop
                 of
                 Ierusalem
                 ,
                 some
                 question
                 whether
                 there
                 were
                 such
                 an
                 one
                 ;
                 others
                 count
                 it
                 most
                 unlikly
                 that
                 he
                 should
                 be
                 Penman
                 of
                 this
                 Generall
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 that
                 was
                 confined
                 him selfe
                 to
                 a
                 Particular
                 charge
                 .
              
               
                 Occasion
                 and
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   Iames
                
                 taking
                 notice
                 that
                 the
                 twelve
                 Tribes
                 dispersed
                 were
                 under
                 great
                 Temptations
                 and
                 tryalls
                 of
                 affliction
                 ;
                 and
                 also
                 that
                 too
                 many
                 among
                 them
                 contented
                 themselves
                 with
                 a
                 fruitlesse
                 profession
                 of
                 Faith
                 without
                 the
                 concurrent
                 practice
                 of
                 Holinesse
                 :
                 
                 w●ites
                 unto
                 them
                 ,
                 
                   principally
                   to
                   comfort
                   and
                   support
                   them
                   under
                   their
                   present
                   sharp
                   tryals
                   and
                   tribulations
                   ,
                   Iam.
                
                 1.2
                 .
                 &c.
                 5.7
                 ,
                 to
                 12.
                 
                 
                   As
                   also
                   to
                   exhort
                   them
                   to
                   joyne
                   good
                   works
                   and
                   an
                   holy
                   life
                   to
                   their
                   Faith
                   ,
                   without
                   which
                   their
                   Faith
                   was
                   but
                   a
                   dead
                   carkasse
                   ,
                   c.
                
                 2.14
                 .
                 
                   to
                   the
                   end
                
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 .
                 In
                 this
                 Epistle
                 are
                 ,
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       A
                       superscription
                       ,
                       c.
                    
                     1.1
                     .
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       Substance
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     ,
                     which
                     is
                     chiefly
                     Hortatory
                     (
                     here
                     and
                     there
                     some
                     few
                     Doctrinals
                     being
                     inserted
                     .
                     )
                     They
                     are
                     exhorted
                     ,
                     1.
                     
                     To
                     Patience
                     and
                     Prayer
                     under
                     the
                     outward
                     Tentations
                     of
                     the
                     crosse
                     c.
                     1.2
                     ,
                     to
                     13.
                     2.
                     
                     To
                     ascribe
                     the
                     inward
                     Tentations
                     to
                     sin
                     ,
                     to
                     themselves
                     ,
                     not
                     to
                     God
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.
                     ver
                     .
                     13.
                     to
                     19.
                     3.
                     
                     To
                     right
                     hearing
                     of
                     the
                     word
                     c.
                     1.19
                     .
                     to
                     26.
                     4.
                     
                     To
                     true
                     Religion
                     and
                     undefiled
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.26
                     ,
                     27
                     ,
                     5.
                     
                     To
                     avoid
                     respect
                     of
                     persons
                     ,
                     c.
                     2.1
                     ,
                     to
                     14.
                     6.
                     
                     To
                     joyn
                     unto
                     Faith
                     the
                     proper
                     fruits
                     of
                     good-works
                     ,
                     without
                     which
                     Faith
                     is
                     but
                     false
                     and
                     dead
                     ,
                     and
                     not
                     that
                     Faith
                     that
                     justifieth
                     ,
                     c.
                     2.14
                     .
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                    
                     .
                     7.
                     
                     To
                     avoid
                     the
                     sinfull
                     abuses
                     of
                     the
                     tongue
                     ,
                     c.
                     3.
                     8.
                     
                     To
                     restrain
                     their
                     corrupt
                     lusts
                     and
                     the
                     pernicious
                     fruits
                     thereof
                     ,
                     c.
                     4.1
                     ,
                     to
                     8.
                     9.
                     
                     To
                     walk
                     penitently
                     and
                     holily
                     ,
                     c.
                     4.
                     8.
                     to
                     13.
                     10.
                     
                     Not
                     to
                     undertake
                     humane
                     Actions
                     
                     with
                     vaine
                     confidence
                     ,
                     but
                     with
                     dependence
                     upon
                     Gods
                     providence
                     ,
                     c.
                     4.13
                     .
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                    
                     .
                     11.
                     
                     Not
                     to
                     abuse
                     riches
                     ,
                     &c.
                     c.
                     5
                     ,
                     1.
                     to
                     7.
                     12.
                     
                     That
                     the
                     Godly
                     patiently
                     beare
                     the
                     injuries
                     of
                     the
                     rich
                     ,
                     c.
                     5.
                     vers
                     .
                     7.
                     to
                     12.
                     13.
                     
                     To
                     take
                     heed
                     of
                     all
                     rash
                     swearing
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     12.
                     14.
                     
                     To
                     use
                     Prayer
                     ,
                     especially
                     as
                     an
                     Antidote
                     against
                     afflictions
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     13.
                     to
                     19.
                     15.
                     
                     To
                     reduce
                     an
                     erring
                     brother
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     19
                     ,
                     20.
                     
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 I
                 Peter
                 .
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   first
                   Catholique
                   Epistle
                   of
                
                 PETER
                 
                   the
                   Apostle
                
                 .
                 So
                 called
                 ,
                 partly
                 in
                 reference
                 to
                 the
                 dispersed
                 Jewes
                 to
                 whom
                 generally
                 this
                 Epistle
                 is
                 directed
                 (
                 as
                 was
                 fore
                 noted
                 )
                 ;
                 partly
                 in
                 respect
                 of
                 Peter
                 the
                 Apostle
                 Penman
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 1
                 Pet.
                 1.1
                 .
              
               
                 PETER
                 [
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 ]
                 a
                 Greek
                 name
                 .
                 Not
                 the
                 
                   Proper
                   name
                
                 ,
                 but
                 rather
                 the
                 Surname
                 of
                 this
                 Apostle
                 ,
                 Act.
                 10.5
                 .
                 His
                 proper
                 name
                 was
                 Simon
                 ,
                 an
                 Hebrew
                 name
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   An
                   hearer
                
                 .
                 From
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 
                   To
                   Heare
                
                 .
                 Act.
                 10.5
                 .
                 Ioh.
                 1.43
                 .
                 Christ
                 surnamed
                 him
                 Peter
                 .
                 This
                 surname
                 was
                 1
                 
                   Promised
                   to
                   him
                
                 by
                 Christ
                 when
                 he
                 was
                 first
                 called
                 to
                 be
                 Christs
                 Disciple
                 ,
                 
                 Ioh.
                 1.43
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Given
                   to
                   him
                
                 by
                 Christ
                 when
                 he
                 called
                 him
                 to
                 the
                 Apostleship
                 ,
                 &c.
                 Mark.
                 10.16
                 .
                 Luk.
                 6.14
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 Confirmed
                 to
                 him
                 by
                 Christ
                 also
                 ,
                 upon
                 Peters
                 firme
                 and
                 excellent
                 confession
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 Matt.
                 16.17
                 .
                 Peter
                 in
                 Greek
                 is
                 the
                 same
                 with
                 Kephas
                 or
                 Kipha
                 in
                 Syriack
                 ,
                 both
                 signifie
                 
                   a
                   Stone
                
                 .
                 Christ
                 gave
                 him
                 this
                 name
                 by
                 Anticipation
                 ,
                 in
                 reference
                 to
                 that
                 firm
                 and
                 solid
                 Confession
                 of
                 Faith
                 touching
                 Christ
                 ,
                 which
                 Peter
                 should
                 ,
                 yea
                 did
                 make
                 ;
                 and
                 on
                 which
                 Faith
                 confessed
                 ,
                 as
                 on
                 a
                 Rock
                 ,
                 Christ
                 did
                 promise
                 to
                 build
                 his
                 Church
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
                 Matth.
                 16.16
                 .
                 &c.
                 Which
                 was
                 fulfilled
                 ,
                 Peter
                 preaching
                 the
                 first
                 Sermons
                 whereby
                 both
                 Iewes
                 and
                 Gentiles
                 were
                 converted
                 to
                 Christ
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 first
                 foundation
                 of
                 the
                 Christian
                 Church
                 after
                 Christ
                 was
                 laid
                 ,
                 Act.
                 2.14
                 .
                 &c.
                 10
                 34.
                 &c.
                 Which
                 was
                 the
                 Priviledge
                 conferred
                 by
                 Christ
                 upon
                 Peter
                 peculiarly
                 above
                 all
                 the
                 Apostles
                 .
                 Peter
                 was
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Iona
                 ,
                 and
                 brother
                 of
                 Andrew
                 ;
                 by
                 trade
                 they
                 were
                 Fishers
                 ,
                 whence
                 Christ
                 called
                 them
                 to
                 be
                 Fishers
                 of
                 men
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 4.18
                 .
                 ●eter
                 had
                 his
                 notable
                 Eminencies
                 ;
                 As
                 1.
                 〈◊〉
                 
                 singular
                 courage
                 ,
                 zeale
                 ,
                 and
                 boldnesse
                 for
                 expressing
                 himselfe
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 26.3
                 .
                 Luke
                 22
                 ,
                 23.
                 
                 Act.
                 2.14
                 .
                 Hereupon
                 counted
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 three
                 pillers
                 of
                 the
                 Primitive
                 Church
                 ,
                 Gal.
                 2.9
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 He
                 made
                 that
                 admirable
                 Confession
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 16.16
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 He
                 was
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 three
                 which
                 Christ
                 took
                 up
                 into
                 the
                 Mount
                 to
                 see
                 his
                 glorious
                 transfiguration
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 17.1
                 .
                 &c.
                 Mark.
                 9.2
                 .
                 Luk.
                 9.28
                 .
                 4.
                 
                 He
                 was
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 three
                 which
                 Christ
                 took
                 out
                 from
                 his
                 Apostles
                 to
                 accompany
                 him
                 in
                 his
                 bitter
                 Agony
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 26.36
                 ,
                 37.
                 &c.
                 5.
                 
                 Christ
                 after
                 his
                 resurrection
                 eminently
                 restored
                 him
                 to
                 the
                 exercise
                 of
                 his
                 Pastorall
                 office
                 ,
                 by
                 his
                 threefold
                 profession
                 of
                 his
                 sincere
                 love
                 to
                 Christ
                 ,
                 after
                 his
                 threefold
                 denyall
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 Ioh.
                 21.15
                 ,
                 16
                 ,
                 17.
                 
                 He
                 had
                 also
                 his
                 remarkable
                 Infirmities
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 Inconsiderately
                 cut
                 off
                 Malchus
                 his
                 Eare
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 26.51
                 .
                 &c.
                 2.
                 
                 Self-confidently
                 presumed
                 against
                 denying
                 Christ
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 26.31
                 .
                 to
                 36.
                 3.
                 
                 Shamefully
                 denyed
                 Christ
                 thrice
                 ,
                 and
                 every
                 time
                 worse
                 then
                 other
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 26.69
                 ,
                 to
                 75
                 ▪
                 4.
                 
                 And
                 walked
                 not
                 with
                 a
                 right
                 foot
                 in
                 the
                 beginning
                 of
                 his
                 Ministry
                 ,
                 
                 drawing
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 to
                 Iudaize
                 among
                 the
                 Iewes
                 ,
                 &c.
                 Gal.
                 2.14
                 .
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 When
                 and
                 Whence
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 .
                 It
                 's
                 more
                 then
                 probable
                 Peter
                 wrote
                 this
                 Epistle
                 by
                 Sylvanus
                 to
                 the
                 Iewes
                 of
                 the
                 dispersion
                 while
                 he
                 was
                 now
                 at
                 Babylon
                 ,
                 1
                 Pet.
                 5.12
                 ,
                 13.
                 
                 There
                 was
                 a
                 Babylon
                 in
                 Chaldea
                 ,
                 Psal.
                 137.
                 
                 A
                 Babylon
                 in
                 Egypt
                 .
                 And
                 in
                 resemblance
                 hereunto
                 the
                 mysticall
                 Babylon
                 ,
                 viz.
                 Rome
                 ,
                 Rev.
                 14.1
                 .
                 &
                 16.19
                 .
                 &
                 17.5
                 .
                 &
                 18.2
                 ▪
                 10
                 ,
                 21.
                 
                 Now
                 Papists
                 themselves
                 upon
                 this
                 place
                 generally
                 contend
                 ,
                 that
                 here
                 by
                 Babylon
                 is
                 meant
                 Rome
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 may
                 prove
                 Peter
                 was
                 at
                 Rome
                 ,
                 
                   Fenardent
                   .
                   in
                   loc
                
                 .
                 But
                 they
                 forget
                 how
                 herein
                 they
                 confesse
                 Rome
                 to
                 be
                 that
                 wicked
                 Babylon
                 destined
                 to
                 destruction
                 ,
                 Rev.
                 17.
                 and
                 18.
                 
                 Luther
                 leaves
                 every
                 man
                 to
                 abound
                 in
                 his
                 own
                 sense
                 which
                 Babylon
                 it
                 was
                 .
                 Pareus
                 thinks
                 that
                 Babylon
                 in
                 Chaldea
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 here
                 understood
                 ,
                 where
                 Peter
                 the
                 Apostle
                 of
                 the
                 Circumcision
                 preached
                 to
                 the
                 Iewes
                 :
                 and
                 that
                 no
                 one
                 reason
                 can
                 be
                 given
                 why
                 Peter
                 should
                 conceale
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 Rome
                 ,
                 had
                 he
                 intended
                 Rome
                 .
                 
                   D.
                   Par.
                   Com.
                   in
                
                 1
                 Pet.
                 5.13
                 .
                 From
                 that
                 
                 phrase
                 ,
                 
                   if
                   any
                   man
                   suffer
                   as
                   a
                   Christian
                   ,
                
                 1
                 Pet.
                 4.16
                 .
                 intimates
                 that
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 after
                 Antioch
                 ,
                 had
                 received
                 the
                 faith
                 ,
                 for
                 there
                 the
                 disciples
                 were
                 first
                 called
                 
                   Christians
                   ,
                   Act.
                
                 11.26
                 .
                 and
                 it
                 was
                 about
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 ,
                 that
                 Iames
                 was
                 crowned
                 with
                 Martyrdome
                 ,
                 Act.
                 12.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 
              
               
                 Occasion
                 .
                 The
                 strangers
                 that
                 came
                 up
                 to
                 Ierusalem
                 at
                 Pentecost
                 ,
                 were
                 many
                 of
                 them
                 converted
                 by
                 Peters
                 Sermon
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 baptized
                 Acts
                 2.
                 to
                 whom
                 therefore
                 Peter
                 here
                 writes
                 ,
                 as
                 to
                 
                   new
                   borne
                   babes
                
                 ,
                 1
                 Pet.
                 2.2
                 .
                 weak
                 ,
                 and
                 as
                 yet
                 unsetled
                 in
                 the
                 faith
                 ,
                 and
                 upon
                 their
                 returne
                 into
                 their
                 owne
                 countreys
                 ,
                 much
                 exercised
                 for
                 Christs
                 sake
                 with
                 afflictions
                 and
                 crosses
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 current
                 of
                 the
                 Epistle
                 manifests
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   That
                   therefore
                   the
                   Apostle
                   as
                   a
                   spirituall
                   father
                   ,
                   might
                   confirme
                   these
                   his
                   children
                   in
                   faith
                   ,
                   against
                   all
                   troubles
                   and
                   persecution
                   ,
                   he
                   writes
                   to
                   them
                   all
                   this
                   Epistle
                   ,
                   assuring
                   them
                   ,
                   that
                   the
                   faith
                   or
                   doctrine
                   of
                   grace
                   wherein
                   they
                   stood
                   ,
                   was
                   the
                   true
                   grace
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                   and
                   cons●quently
                   he
                   exhorts
                   and
                   stirs
                   them
                   up
                   to
                   persevere
                   therein
                   .
                   To
                   grow
                   and
                   abound
                   
                   in
                   grace
                   and
                   godlinesse
                   .
                   This
                   the
                   great
                   drift
                   of
                   both
                   his
                   Epistles
                   ,
                
                 See
                 1
                 Pet.
                 5.12
                 .
                 and
                 2
                 Pet.
                 3.1
                 .
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 of
                 the
                 Epistle
                 to
                 this
                 end
                 ,
                 are
                 ,
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       The
                       Inscription
                    
                     ,
                     c.
                     1
                     ,
                     1
                     ,
                     2.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       Substance
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     it selfe
                     ,
                     which
                     is
                     principally
                     Hortatory
                     ,
                     in
                     reference
                     to
                     that
                     grace
                     of
                     God.
                     He
                     incites
                     them
                     ,
                     1.
                     
                     To
                     the
                     constant
                     exercise
                     and
                     improvement
                     of
                     that
                     grace
                     of
                     God
                     ,
                     whereby
                     they
                     are
                     brought
                     into
                     a
                     regenerate
                     and
                     sanctified
                     state
                     ;
                     and
                     this
                     concernes
                     them
                     all
                     in
                     their
                     generall
                     calling
                     as
                     Christians
                     ,
                     c.
                     1
                     ,
                     3.
                     to
                     c.
                     2.
                     v.
                     13.
                     2.
                     
                     To
                     the
                     due
                     exercise
                     of
                     grace
                     ,
                     in
                     respect
                     of
                     their
                     respective
                     conditions
                     and
                     relations
                     wherein
                     they
                     stand
                     towards
                     others
                     .
                     And
                     this
                     exhortation
                     concernes
                     them
                     severally
                     ,
                     according
                     to
                     their
                     respective
                     particular
                     callings
                     and
                     conditions
                     .
                     viz.
                     How
                     1.
                     
                     Subjects
                     are
                     to
                     behave
                     themselves
                     towards
                     magistrates
                     ,
                     c.
                     2
                     ,
                     13.
                     to
                     18.
                     2.
                     
                     Servants
                     towards
                     their
                     masters
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     18.
                     
                       to
                       end
                    
                     .
                     3.
                     
                     Wives
                     towards
                     their
                     husbands
                     ,
                     and
                     husbands
                     towards
                     their
                     wives
                     ,
                     c.
                     3
                     ,
                     1.
                     to
                     8.
                     4.
                     
                     All
                     brethren
                     towards
                     one
                     another
                     ,
                     v.
                     8.
                     5.
                     
                     Distressed
                     and
                     afflicted
                     ones
                     towards
                     oppressours
                     and
                     Persecutors
                     ,
                     c
                     3
                     ,
                     9.
                     to
                     c.
                     5
                     ,
                     1.
                     6.
                     
                     Presbyters
                     towards
                     their
                     flocks
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     younger
                     towards
                     the
                     Elder
                     ,
                     c.
                     5
                     ,
                     1.
                     
                       to
                       middle
                       of
                       v.
                    
                     5.
                     7.
                     
                     How
                     all
                     of
                     
                     them
                     should
                     carry
                     themselves
                     towards
                     others
                     ,
                     themselves
                     ,
                     and
                     God
                     ,
                     v.
                     5.
                     to
                     10.
                     
                     And
                     so
                     he
                     sweetly
                     closes
                     up
                     the
                     whole
                     series
                     of
                     his
                     exhortations
                     ,
                     with
                     a
                     patheticall
                     prayer
                     to
                     the
                     God
                     of
                     all
                     grace
                     ,
                     for
                     their
                     stablishment
                     and
                     perfection
                     in
                     grace
                     after
                     their
                     short
                     afflictions
                     :
                     concluding
                     it
                     with
                     a
                     gratefull
                     doxology
                     unto
                     God
                     ,
                     v.
                     10
                     ,
                     11.
                     
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       Conclusion
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     ,
                     containing
                     an
                     intimation
                     of
                     his
                     Scope
                     in
                     writing
                     ,
                     salutations
                     ,
                     and
                     a
                     valediction
                     ,
                     c.
                     5
                     ,
                     12
                     ,
                     13
                     ,
                     14.
                     
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 II
                 Peter
                 :
              
               
                 THe
                 II.
                 
                   Catholique
                   Epistle
                   of
                
                 PETER
                 
                   the
                   Apostle
                
                 .
                 The
                 Apostle
                 himselfe
                 cals
                 this
                 his
                 
                   Second
                   Epistle
                
                 .
                 He
                 writes
                 it
                 to
                 the
                 same
                 people
                 ,
                 to
                 whom
                 he
                 wrote
                 his
                 first
                 ,
                 viz.
                 To
                 the
                 believing
                 Jews
                 dispersed
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 effect
                 to
                 the
                 same
                 end
                 ,
                 2
                 Pet.
                 3.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 and
                 1.12
                 ,
                 13
                 ,
                 14
                 ,
                 15.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Some
                   few
                   writers
                   have
                   doubted
                   of
                   the
                   Authority
                   of
                   this
                   Epistle
                   ,
                
                 (
                 as
                 also
                 of
                 that
                 of
                 Iames
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 second
                 and
                 third
                 of
                 Iohn
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 Epistle
                 of
                 Iude
                 ,
                 )
                 as
                 
                   Eusebius
                   
                   intimates
                   ,
                   Eccles.
                   Hist.
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 22.
                 
                 
                   Hieronym
                   .
                   in
                   Catal.
                   vir
                   .
                   illustr
                   .
                   in
                   Petro.
                
                 Nor
                 is
                 it
                 found
                 in
                 the
                 
                   Syriack
                   version
                
                 .
              
               
                 B●t
                 divers
                 cogent
                 Arguments
                 perswade
                 us
                 that
                 this
                 is
                 an
                 Apostolicall
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 and
                 written
                 by
                 
                   Peter
                   ,
                   As
                
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 inscription
                 mentions
                 the
                 same
                 Penman
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 with
                 the
                 first
                 ,
                 viz.
                 
                   Simon
                   Peter
                   a
                   servant
                   and
                   an
                   Apostle
                   of
                   Iesus
                   Christ.
                
                 2
                 Pet.
                 1.1
                 .
                 He
                 that
                 wrote
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 testifies
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 
                   must
                   shortly
                   put
                   off
                   this
                   his
                   Tabernacle
                   ,
                   as
                   our
                   Lord
                   Iesus
                   Christ
                   hath
                   shewed
                   him
                   ,
                
                 2
                 Pet.
                 1.14
                 .
                 to
                 whom
                 did
                 Christ
                 shew
                 this
                 but
                 to
                 Peter
                 ?
                 Iohn
                 21.17
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 He
                 that
                 wrote
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 was
                 with
                 Christ
                 upon
                 the
                 Mount
                 at
                 his
                 transfiguration
                 ,
                 beheld
                 his
                 majesty
                 ,
                 —
                 and
                 heard
                 that
                 voice
                 of
                 the
                 father
                 from
                 heaven
                 ,
                 when
                 he
                 was
                 with
                 Christ
                 on
                 the
                 holy
                 Mount
                 ,
                 
                   This
                   is
                   my
                   beloved
                   sonne
                   in
                   whom
                   I
                   am
                   well
                   pleased
                   ,
                
                 2
                 Pet.
                 1.16
                 ,
                 17
                 ,
                 18.
                 
                 Now
                 there
                 were
                 only
                 three
                 ,
                 
                   viz.
                   Peter
                   ,
                   Iames
                   and
                   Iohn
                
                 in
                 the
                 Mount
                 with
                 Christ
                 ,
                 at
                 his
                 transfiguration
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 17.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 therefore
                 it
                 must
                 be
                 written
                 by
                 one
                 of
                 them
                 three
                 ,
                 (
                 and
                 by
                 whomsoever
                 of
                 
                 them
                 ,
                 it
                 is
                 of
                 Apostolicall
                 ,
                 yea
                 of
                 divine
                 Authority
                 ,
                 )
                 but
                 unto
                 Iames
                 or
                 Iohn
                 none
                 ever
                 yet
                 ascribed
                 it
                 ,
                 nor
                 is
                 there
                 any
                 reason
                 so
                 to
                 do
                 ,
                 but
                 many
                 to
                 the
                 contrary
                 :
                 therefore
                 it
                 must
                 needs
                 be
                 confessed
                 to
                 be
                 written
                 by
                 Peter
                 .
                 4.
                 
                 He
                 that
                 writes
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 cals
                 it
                 
                   his
                   Second
                   Epistle
                
                 ,
                 and
                 intimates
                 he
                 wrote
                 them
                 both
                 to
                 the
                 same
                 persons
                 ,
                 viz.
                 the
                 dispersed
                 believing
                 Jews
                 .
                 compare
                 2
                 Pet.
                 1.1
                 .
                 and
                 3.1
                 .
                 with
                 1
                 Pet.
                 1.1
                 .
                 5.
                 
                 He
                 that
                 wrote
                 this
                 Epistle
                 cals
                 
                   Paul
                   his
                   beloved
                   brother
                
                 ,
                 commends
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 approves
                 the
                 Authority
                 of
                 his
                 Epistles
                 ,
                 2
                 Pet.
                 3.15
                 ,
                 16.
                 which
                 were
                 too
                 much
                 for
                 any
                 ,
                 but
                 for
                 an
                 Apostolicall
                 pen.
                 6.
                 
                 An
                 holy
                 Apostolicall
                 spirit
                 breathes
                 throughout
                 this
                 whole
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 both
                 in
                 his
                 exhortations
                 to
                 holy
                 duties
                 ,
                 monitions
                 against
                 false-teachers
                 and
                 Apostacy
                 ,
                 and
                 predictions
                 of
                 things
                 to
                 come
                 .
                 7.
                 
                 The
                 stile
                 and
                 phrase
                 Apostolicall
                 and
                 consonant
                 enough
                 to
                 that
                 of
                 Peters
                 first
                 Epistle
                 .
                 
                   Hist.
                   Magd.
                   Cent.
                
                 1.
                 l.
                 2.
                 c.
                 4.
                 8.
                 
                 To
                 all
                 these
                 may
                 be
                 added
                 the
                 consent
                 of
                 ancient
                 Writers
                 ,
                 that
                 count
                 this
                 Epistle
                 Canonicall
                 and
                 Apostolicall
                 ,
                 
                   Concil
                   .
                   Laodicen
                   .
                   Can.
                
                 59.
                 
                 Carthaginens
                 .
                 
                 3.
                 
                 
                   Athanas.
                   in
                   Synops.
                   Damascen
                   .
                   l.
                
                 4.
                 c.
                 18.
                 
                 
                   Epiphan
                   .
                   Heres
                
                 .
                 76.
                 
                 
                   August
                   .
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 
                 
                   De
                   Doctrin
                   .
                   Christian.
                   c.
                
                 8.
                 
                 
                   And
                   Beda
                   in
                   Comment
                
                 .
                 wonders
                 how
                 any
                 should
                 doubt
                 of
                 the
                 Authority
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 Penman
                 hath
                 put
                 his
                 name
                 in
                 the
                 beginning
                 ,
                 and
                 testifies
                 he
                 was
                 with
                 the
                 Lord
                 in
                 the
                 holy
                 mount
                 .
              
               
                 So
                 that
                 this
                 Epistle
                 is
                 of
                 unquestionable
                 authority
                 .
              
               
                 Peter
                 made
                 this
                 Epistle
                 a
                 little
                 before
                 his
                 death
                 ,
                 2
                 Pet.
                 1.14
                 .
              
               
                 Occasion
                 &
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   Peter
                
                 considering
                 ,
                 that
                 shortly
                 he
                 must
                 put
                 off
                 the
                 Tabernacle
                 of
                 his
                 body
                 2
                 Pet.
                 1.14
                 .
                 that
                 some
                 were
                 too
                 negligent
                 of
                 making
                 their
                 calling
                 and
                 election
                 sure
                 ;
                 that
                 there
                 then
                 were
                 ,
                 and
                 afterwards
                 would
                 be
                 false
                 teachers
                 and
                 seducers
                 in
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 and
                 scoffers
                 against
                 the
                 second
                 comming
                 of
                 Christ
                 ;
                 Therefore
                 Peter
                 
                   wrote
                   this
                   Epistle
                   to
                   stirre
                   them
                   up
                   ,
                   by
                   putting
                   them
                   in
                   remembrance
                   of
                   those
                   things
                   which
                   had
                   been
                   preached
                   among
                   them
                   ,
                
                 2
                 Pet.
                 1.12
                 ,
                 13
                 ,
                 14.
                 
                 &
                 3.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                   specially
                   inciting
                   them
                   to
                   progresse
                   in
                   grace
                   ,
                   to
                   watchfulnesse
                   against
                   false
                   teachers
                   and
                   scoffers
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   a
                   preparednesse
                   for
                   the
                   comming
                   of
                   
                   Christ
                   ,
                   as
                   the
                   whole
                   current
                   of
                   the
                   Epistle
                   evidences
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 .
              
               
                 
                   I.
                   Inscription
                   of
                   the
                   Epistle
                   ,
                   c.
                   1
                   ,
                   1
                   ,
                   2.
                   
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     Substance
                     of
                     the
                     Epistle
                  
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   1.
                   
                   Hortatory
                   ,
                   exhorting
                   them
                   to
                   progresse
                   and
                   perseverance
                   in
                   grace
                   and
                   piety
                   ,
                   c.
                   1.
                   2.
                   
                   Monitory
                   ,
                   warning
                   them
                   to
                   take
                   heed
                   of
                   those
                   hereticall
                   and
                   blasphemous
                   seducers
                   which
                   should
                   creep
                   into
                   the
                   Church
                   ,
                   threatning
                   destruction
                   to
                   them
                   ,
                   c.
                   2.
                   3.
                   
                   Propheticall
                   ,
                   foretelling
                   of
                   sensuall
                   scoffers
                   against
                   Christs
                   comming
                   in
                   the
                   last
                   days
                   :
                   and
                   of
                   the
                   day
                   of
                   judgement
                   ,
                   the
                   new
                   heavens
                   and
                   new
                   earth
                   ;
                   whereunto
                   they
                   should
                   prepare
                   themselves
                   by
                   piety
                   ,
                   c.
                   3
                   ,
                   1.
                   to
                   17.
                   
                
                 
                   III.
                   
                     Conclusion
                     of
                     the
                     Epistle
                  
                   ,
                   with
                   a
                   summary
                   recitall
                   of
                   his
                   former
                   exhortations
                   ,
                   and
                   with
                   a
                   doxology
                   unto
                   our
                   Lord
                   Jesus
                   Christ
                   ,
                   c.
                   3
                   ,
                   17
                   ,
                   18.
                   
                
              
            
             
               
                 I
                 John.
                 
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   first
                   Catholique
                   Epistle
                   of
                
                 JOHN
                 
                   the
                   Apostle
                
                 .
                 This
                 Epistle
                 hath
                 this
                 Title
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 ancient
                 manuscript
                 Copies
                 .
                 
                   Bez.
                   Annot.
                   ante
                   hanc
                   
                   Ep.
                
                 Which
                 as
                 Beza
                 there
                 well
                 advertiseth
                 us
                 ,
                 we
                 are
                 thus
                 to
                 understand
                 ,
                 viz.
                 The
                 first
                 Epistle
                 of
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Apostle
                 
                   which
                   is
                
                 Catholick
                 ;
                 for
                 of
                 all
                 Iohn's
                 Epistles
                 ,
                 this
                 only
                 is
                 Catholique
                 or
                 Generall
                 ,
                 the
                 other
                 two
                 being
                 particular
                 .
                 viz.
                 The
                 2
                 d
                 to
                 the
                 Elect
                 Lady
                 and
                 her
                 children
                 ;
                 The
                 3
                 d
                 to
                 Gaius
                 ,
                 and
                 therefore
                 it
                 were
                 improper
                 to
                 call
                 it
                 the
                 first
                 Generall
                 Epistle
                 in
                 any
                 other
                 sense
                 .
              
               
                 Penman
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 is
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Apostle
                 ,
                 as
                 is
                 evident
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 Greek
                 Title
                 ,
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   The
                   first
                   Catholique
                   Epistle
                   of
                
                 John
                 
                   the
                   Apostle
                
                 ;
                 thus
                 all
                 ancient
                 Greek
                 Copies
                 have
                 it
                 .
                 Bez.
                 2.
                 
                 From
                 his
                 manner
                 of
                 speaking
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 asserting
                 his
                 divinity
                 in
                 divers
                 passages
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 as
                 1
                 Iohn
                 1.1
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 &
                 2.22.23
                 ,
                 24.
                 
                 &
                 5.5
                 ,
                 6
                 ,
                 7.
                 &c.
                 and
                 calling
                 him
                 the
                 Word
                 1
                 Iohn
                 1.1
                 .
                 and
                 1
                 Iohn
                 5.7
                 .
                 Iohn
                 being
                 most
                 sublime
                 in
                 asserting
                 the
                 Godhead
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 Iohn
                 1.1
                 ,
                 2
                 ,
                 3.
                 &c.
                 and
                 Rev.
                 often
                 ;
                 and
                 no
                 writers
                 in
                 the
                 New
                 Testament
                 ,
                 stiling
                 Christ
                 the
                 Word
                 but
                 Iohn
                 in
                 his
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 Iohn
                 1.1
                 ,
                 14.
                 in
                 his
                 Revelation
                 ,
                 Rev.
                 1.2
                 .
                 and
                 19.13
                 .
                 and
                 here
                 in
                 this
                 Epistle
                 .
                 
                 3.
                 
                 From
                 that
                 eminent
                 and
                 singular
                 Character
                 of
                 Iohns
                 spirit
                 .
                 
                   viz.
                   The
                   spirit
                   of
                   love
                
                 ,
                 most
                 predominant
                 and
                 conspicuous
                 all
                 along
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 as
                 in
                 his
                 Gospel
                 and
                 Revelation
                 .
                 Iohn
                 was
                 the
                 disciple
                 whom
                 Jesus
                 loved
                 above
                 all
                 his
                 disciples
                 .
                 Iohn
                 13.23
                 .
                 &
                 19.26
                 .
                 and
                 20.2
                 .
                 and
                 21.7
                 ,
                 20.
                 
                 
                   He
                   was
                   a
                   meer
                   compound
                   of
                   sweetest
                   love
                
                 ;
                 in
                 all
                 his
                 writings
                 ,
                 breaths
                 nothing
                 in
                 a
                 manner
                 but
                 love
                 ▪
                 Hence
                 excellently
                 
                   Calvin
                   ,
                   Haec
                   Epistola
                   ,
                   prorsus
                   digna
                   est
                   ejus
                   discipuli
                   spiritu
                   ,
                   qui
                   prae
                   aliis
                   ideò
                   a
                   Christo
                   dilectus
                   fuit
                   ,
                   ut
                   ipsum
                   nobis
                   familiarem
                   redderet
                   .
                
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   This
                   Epistle
                   is
                   altogether
                   worth
                   the
                   Spirit
                   of
                   that
                   disciple
                   ,
                   which
                   was
                   therefore
                   beloved
                   of
                   Christ
                   above
                   the
                   rest
                   ,
                   that
                   he
                   might
                   render
                   him
                   familiar
                   unto
                   us
                   .
                
                 Calv.
                 Argum.
                 in
                 1.
                 
                 Ioan.
                 Of
                 
                   Iohn
                   ,
                   see
                   more
                   in
                   Annot
                   .
                   on
                   Gosp.
                   of
                
                 Iohn
                 .
                 Iohn
                 therefore
                 being
                 the
                 undoubted
                 Penman
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 it
                 is
                 of
                 unquestionable
                 Authority
                 ,
                 Eusebius
                 and
                 Hieronymus
                 testify
                 ,
                 That
                 there
                 never
                 was
                 doubt
                 in
                 the
                 Church
                 about
                 the
                 Author
                 or
                 Authority
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 .
                 
                   Euseb
                   .
                   Hist.
                   Eccles.
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 25.
                 
                 
                   Hieronym
                   ,
                   in
                   Catalog
                   .
                   Augustin
                
                 cals
                 it
                 
                   satis
                   dulcem
                   &
                   satis
                   memorabilem
                   in
                   Ecclesia
                   dei
                   ,
                   quód
                   in
                   
                   ipsa
                   charitas
                   maximé
                   commendetur
                   .
                
                 i.
                 e.
                 A
                 most
                 sweet
                 Epistle
                 and
                 most
                 memorable
                 in
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 because
                 love
                 is
                 especially
                 commended
                 therin
                 .
                 
                   Aug.
                   Praef.
                   in
                
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Ioan.
                   Ep.
                
                 and
                 saith
                 that
                 
                   orbem
                   ter●arum
                   ipsa
                   edificavit
                
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   It
                   hath
                   edified
                   the
                   world
                
                 ,
                 Aug.
                 Tract
                 .
                 7.
                 
              
               
                 When
                 and
                 Whence
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 Iohn
                 wrote
                 his
                 Gosp.
                 at
                 
                   Ephesus
                   ,
                   Iraen
                   .
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 1.
                 
                   advers
                   .
                   haeres
                
                 .
                 This
                 Epistle
                 seemes
                 to
                 be
                 written
                 after
                 his
                 Gospel
                 .
                 He
                 wrote
                 it
                 when
                 he
                 was
                 now
                 old
                 ;
                 thinks
                 Hierome
                 .
                 And
                 being
                 old
                 ,
                 he
                 departed
                 not
                 from
                 Asia
                 ,
                 therefore
                 is
                 probable
                 he
                 wrote
                 it
                 at
                 
                   Ephesus
                   ,
                   Zauch
                   .
                   Prolegom
                   .
                   in
                
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Ioan.
                   p.
                
                 6.
                 
                 Iohn
                 lived
                 after
                 the
                 other
                 Apostles
                 and
                 wrote
                 after
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 Occasions
                 .
                 I.
                 Iohn
                 observed
                 that
                 in
                 his
                 daies
                 there
                 were
                 many
                 hereticall
                 Teachers
                 ,
                 Seducers
                 ,
                 which
                 he
                 cals
                 Anti-christs
                 ,
                 (
                 and
                 by
                 a
                 propheticall
                 spirit
                 foresaw
                 that
                 afterwards
                 there
                 would
                 arise
                 many
                 more
                 .
                 )
                 Epiphanius
                 reckon●
                 up
                 these
                 before
                 and
                 in
                 Iohn's
                 dayes
                 ,
                 viz.
                 1.
                 
                 Simonians
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 Menandrians
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 Saturnilians
                 .
                 4.
                 
                 Basilidians
                 .
                 5.
                 
                 
                   Nicolaitanes
                   ▪
                
                 of
                 whom
                 Rev.
                 2.
                 6.
                 
                 Gnosticks
                 .
                 7.
                 
                 Carpocratians
                 ,
                 
                 from
                 Carpocrates
                 in
                 Asia
                 ;
                 who
                 taught
                 men
                 must
                 sinne
                 ,
                 and
                 do
                 the
                 will
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 devils
                 ;
                 otherwise
                 they
                 could
                 not
                 enter
                 into
                 heaven
                 .
                 8.
                 
                 Cerinthians
                 and
                 Merinthians
                 ,
                 from
                 Cerinthus
                 and
                 Morinthus
                 ,
                 who
                 denyed
                 Christs
                 divinity
                 ,
                 said
                 he
                 was
                 not
                 before
                 Mary
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 was
                 a
                 meere
                 man.
                 9.
                 
                 Habionits
                 ,
                 who
                 held
                 the
                 same
                 heresie
                 .
                 10.
                 
                 Nazaraei
                 ,
                 that
                 urged
                 Moses
                 law
                 ,
                 See
                 
                   Epiphan
                   .
                   in
                   Panario
                   .
                   l.
                
                 1.
                 
                 Tom.
                 2.
                 
                 II.
                 Iohn
                 took
                 notice
                 of
                 divers
                 carnall
                 believers
                 ,
                 who
                 made
                 great
                 profession
                 of
                 knowledge
                 ,
                 faith
                 and
                 piety
                 towards
                 God
                 ,
                 who
                 yet
                 lived
                 ungodly
                 to
                 the
                 scandall
                 of
                 the
                 Gospel
                 .
                 III.
                 Finally
                 ,
                 Iohn
                 considered
                 how
                 necessary
                 it
                 was
                 to
                 encourage
                 true
                 believers
                 in
                 faith
                 ,
                 and
                 promote
                 them
                 to
                 assurance
                 of
                 their
                 interest
                 in
                 eternall
                 life
                 .
                 These
                 gave
                 
                   Iohn
                   Occasion
                
                 of
                 writing
                 this
                 Epistle
                 by
                 way
                 of
                 remedy
                 .
              
               
                 Scope
                 .
                 The
                 blessed
                 Apostle
                 Iohn
                 in
                 this
                 Epistle
                 principally
                 levels
                 at
                 these
                 three
                 ends
                 .
              
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   
                     To
                     detect
                     and
                     confute
                     hereticall
                     and
                     Anti-Christian
                     Seducers
                     ,
                     and
                     warne
                     the
                     believers
                     against
                     them
                     and
                     their
                     false
                     Doctrine
                     .
                     
                     These
                     things
                     have
                     I
                     written
                     to
                     you
                     ,
                     concerning
                     them
                     that
                     seduce
                     you
                  
                   1
                   John
                   2.26
                   .
                   
                     particularly
                     and
                     especially
                     proving
                     ,
                     That
                     Christ
                     is
                     true
                     and
                     eternall
                     God
                     ,
                     against
                     Corinthians
                     and
                     Hebionites
                     ,
                     c.
                  
                   1.
                   
                   
                     That
                     Christ
                     is
                     true
                     man
                     ,
                     and
                     assumed
                     true
                     flesh
                     ,
                     against
                     Cerdonians
                     ,
                     Manichees
                     ,
                     Priscillianists
                     and
                     Valentinians
                     ,
                     (
                     which
                     by
                     a
                     Propheticall
                     spirit
                     ,
                     he
                     foresaw
                     would
                     follow
                     ,
                     )
                  
                   c.
                   4.
                   
                   
                     That
                     Iesus
                     is
                     the
                     true
                     Christ
                     ,
                     the
                     promised
                  
                   Messiah
                   
                     against
                     Iew●
                     and
                     Nazarites
                  
                   ,
                   c.
                   2.
                   
                   
                     That
                     the
                     Father
                     ,
                     Word
                     and
                     holy
                     Ghost
                     ,
                     are
                     three
                     true
                     distinct
                     Persons
                     ,
                     of
                     one
                     essence
                     ;
                     against
                     Sabelli●ns
                     ,
                     &c.
                  
                   c.
                   5.
                   
                   
                     That
                     they
                     that
                     are
                     born
                     of
                     God
                     ought
                     not
                     ,
                     nay
                     ,
                     as
                     such
                     ,
                     cannot
                     commit
                     sin
                     ;
                     and
                     such
                     as
                     do
                     not
                     righteousnesse
                     are
                     of
                     the
                     devill
                     ,
                     not
                     of
                     God
                     ,
                     against
                     the
                     Carpocratians
                     ,
                  
                   c.
                   3.
                   
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   
                     To
                     stirre
                     up
                     all
                     that
                     professe
                     to
                     know
                     God
                     and
                     believe
                     in
                     him
                     ,
                     that
                     they
                     walk
                     in
                     light
                     ,
                     not
                     in
                     darknesse
                     ,
                  
                   1.
                   
                   Iohn
                   1.5
                   ,
                   6
                   ,
                   7.
                   
                     as
                     Christ
                     walked
                     ,
                     that
                     they
                     keep
                     the
                     Commandements
                     ,
                     especially
                     abound
                     in
                     love
                     ,
                  
                   1
                   Iohn
                   2.4
                   ,
                   5
                   ,
                   6.
                   
                     and
                     all
                     along
                     the
                     Epistle
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   3.
                   
                   
                     To
                     provoke
                     true
                     believers
                     to
                     growth
                     in
                     faith
                     and
                     grace
                     ;
                     and
                     to
                     help
                     forward
                     
                     their
                     assurance
                     of
                     their
                     interest
                     in
                     eternall
                     life
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 This
                 last
                 end
                 is
                 clearly
                 professed
                 in
                 1
                 Iohn
                 5.13
                 .
                 
                   These
                   things
                   have
                   I
                   written
                   unto
                   you
                   ,
                   that
                   believe
                   on
                   the
                   name
                   of
                   the
                   Sonne
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                   that
                   yee
                   may
                   know
                   that
                   yee
                   have
                   eternall
                   life
                   .
                
                 —
                 And
                 therefore
                 it
                 is
                 most
                 singularly
                 observable
                 of
                 this
                 
                   sweet
                   and
                   precious
                   Epistle
                
                 ,
                 what
                 a
                 multitude
                 of
                 
                   Marks
                   ,
                   Signs
                   or
                   Discoveries
                   of
                   believer's
                   spirituall
                   State
                   ,
                
                 are
                 here
                 plainly
                 and
                 purposely
                 laid
                 downe
                 for
                 this
                 end
                 ,
                 more
                 then
                 in
                 any
                 other
                 so
                 short
                 a
                 piece
                 of
                 Scripture
                 in
                 the
                 whole
                 Bible
                 .
                 Which
                 Signes
                 are
                 here
                 reduced
                 to
                 severall
                 heads
                 ,
                 and
                 set
                 downe
                 for
                 the
                 help
                 and
                 comfort
                 of
                 the
                 Readers
                 ,
                 in
                 some
                 of
                 which
                 ,
                 at
                 least
                 the
                 weakest
                 (
                 if
                 a
                 sincere
                 Christian
                 ▪
                 )
                 may
                 find
                 abundant
                 soule-refreshing
                 ,
                 and
                 heart-establishment
                 .
              
               
                 
                   I.
                   
                     Evidences
                     ,
                     Signes
                     or
                     Discoveries
                     of
                     Gods
                     love
                     to
                     us
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Christs
                       being
                       sent
                       to
                       lay
                       down
                       his
                       life
                       for
                       us
                       ,
                       that
                       we
                       might
                       live
                       by
                       him
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       3.16
                       .
                       and
                       4.9
                       ,
                       10.
                       
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       Adoption
                       ,
                       That
                       we
                       should
                       be
                       called
                       the
                       sonnes
                       of
                       God
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       3.1
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                       3.
                       
                       Our
                       not
                       loving
                       the
                       world
                       ,
                       nor
                       the
                       things
                       of
                       the
                       world
                       inordinately
                       ,
                       1
                       John
                       2.15
                       ,
                       16
                       ,
                       17.
                       
                    
                     
                       4.
                       
                       Our
                       love
                       to
                       God
                       ,
                       which
                       is
                       an
                       effect
                       ,
                       or
                       reflexive
                       beame
                       of
                       Gods
                       love
                       to
                       us
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       4.19
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     Evidences
                     or
                     Signes
                     of
                     our
                     Regeneration
                     ,
                     Sonneship
                     ,
                     &c.
                     
                  
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       That
                       the
                       world
                       knoweth
                       us
                       not
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       3.1
                       .
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       True
                       believing
                       that
                       Jesus
                       is
                       the
                       Christ
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       5.1
                       .
                    
                     
                       3.
                       
                       Not
                       committing
                       sin
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       3.9
                       .
                       and
                       5.18
                       .
                       Especially
                       in
                       respect
                       of
                       that
                       great
                       sin
                       of
                       sins
                       ,
                       
                         The
                         wicked
                         one
                         toucheth
                         him
                         not
                         ,
                      
                       1
                       John
                       5.18
                       .
                    
                     
                       4.
                       
                       Hope
                       (
                       if
                       not
                       assurance
                       )
                       that
                       we
                       shall
                       be
                       conforme
                       to
                       God
                       in
                       his
                       glorious
                       appearing
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       3.2
                       ,
                       3.
                       
                    
                     
                       5.
                       
                       In
                       hope
                       of
                       glory
                       ,
                       purifying
                       our selves
                       as
                       God
                       is
                       pure
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       2.3
                       .
                    
                     
                       6.
                       
                       Overcoming
                       erroneous
                       hereticall
                       spirits
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       4.1
                       ,
                       4.
                       
                    
                     
                       7.
                       
                       Overcoming
                       the
                       world
                       by
                       faith
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       5.4
                       ,
                       5.
                       
                    
                     
                       8.
                       
                       Doing
                       of
                       righteousnesse
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       2.29
                       .
                       and
                       3.10
                       .
                    
                     
                       9.
                       
                       True
                       love
                       of
                       the
                       brethren
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       3.10.14
                       .
                       and
                       4.7
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   III.
                   
                     Evidences
                     or
                     Signes
                     that
                     
                     we
                     are
                     of
                     the
                     truth
                     ,
                     of
                     the
                     true
                     number
                     of
                     Gods
                     people
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Having
                       an
                       unction
                       from
                       the
                       holy
                       one
                       teaching
                       us
                       all
                       things
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       2.19
                       ,
                       20
                       ,
                       27.
                       
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       The
                       Testimony
                       of
                       an
                       upright
                       heart
                       or
                       conscience
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       3.19
                       ,
                       20
                       ,
                       21.
                       
                    
                     
                       3.
                       
                       Perseverance
                       with
                       the
                       faithfull
                       in
                       Christ
                       and
                       the
                       truth
                       1
                       Iohn
                       2.19.27
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   IIII.
                   
                     Evidences
                     or
                     Signes
                     of
                     being
                     in
                     light
                     ,
                     not
                     in
                     darknesse
                     ;
                     in
                     life
                     ,
                     not
                     in
                     death
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Having
                       the
                       Sonne
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       5.11.12
                       .
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       Loving
                       ,
                       and
                       not
                       hating
                       our
                       brother
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       2.9
                       ,
                       10
                       ,
                       11.
                       and
                       3.14
                       ,
                       15.
                       
                    
                  
                
                 
                   V.
                   
                     Evidences
                     or
                     Signes
                     of
                     the
                     true
                     knowledge
                     of
                     God.
                     
                  
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Keeping
                       his
                       Commandements
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       2.3
                       ,
                       4.
                       
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       Denyall
                       of
                       sinne
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       .
                       3.6
                       .
                    
                     
                       3.
                       
                       Mutuall
                       love
                       of
                       one
                       another
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       4.7
                       ,
                       8.
                       
                    
                  
                
                 
                   VI.
                   
                     Evidences
                     or
                     Signes
                     of
                     our
                     love
                     to
                     God
                     and
                     Iesus
                     Christ.
                     
                  
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       The
                       casting
                       out
                       of
                       base
                       feare
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       4.18
                       .
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       Not
                       loving
                       the
                       world
                       ,
                       and
                       things
                       in
                       the
                       world
                       inordinately
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       2.15.16
                       .
                    
                     
                       
                       3.
                       
                       Keeping
                       of
                       his
                       Commandements
                       and
                       his
                       Word
                       chearfully
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       2.5
                       .
                       and
                       5.3
                       .
                    
                     
                       4.
                       
                       Opening
                       our
                       bowels
                       of
                       compassion
                       to
                       brethren
                       in
                       need
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       3.17
                       .
                       and
                       1
                       Iohn
                       5.1
                       .
                       1
                       Iohn
                       4.11
                       ,
                       12
                       ,
                       20
                       ,
                       21.
                       
                    
                  
                
                 
                   VII
                   .
                   
                     Evidences
                     or
                     Signes
                     of
                     our
                     Communion
                     with
                     God
                     and
                     Iesus
                     Christ.
                     
                  
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       His
                       spirit
                       given
                       us
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       3.24
                       .
                       and
                       4.13
                       .
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       The
                       Truth
                       's
                       abiding
                       in
                       us
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       2.24
                       .
                    
                     
                       3.
                       
                       Confessing
                       that
                       Jesus
                       is
                       the
                       Son
                       of
                       God
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       4.15
                       .
                    
                     
                       4.
                       
                       Not
                       doing
                       sinne
                       1
                       Iohn
                       3.6
                       ,
                       8.
                       
                    
                     
                       5.
                       
                       Love
                       to
                       God
                       and
                       dwelling
                       therein
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       4.16
                       .
                    
                     
                       6.
                       
                       Walking
                       in
                       light
                       ,
                       not
                       in
                       darknesse
                       .
                       1
                       Iohn
                       1.5
                       ,
                       6
                       7.
                       
                    
                     
                       7.
                       
                       Walking
                       as
                       Christ
                       walked
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       2.6
                       .
                    
                     
                       8.
                       
                       Keeping
                       his
                       Words
                       and
                       Commandements
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       2.3
                       ,
                       4
                       ,
                       5.
                       and
                       3.23
                       ,
                       24.
                       
                    
                     
                       9.
                       
                       Brotherly
                       love
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       .
                       4.12
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   VIII
                   .
                   Finally
                   ,
                   
                     Evidences
                     or
                     Signs
                     of
                     true
                     brotherly
                     love
                     ,
                     or
                     love
                     of
                     Gods
                     children
                     .
                  
                   1
                   Joh.
                   5.1
                   ▪
                   2.
                   
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Knowing
                       of
                       God
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       4.7
                       ,
                       8.
                       
                    
                     
                     
                     
                     
                     
                       
                       2.
                       
                       Loving
                       of
                       God
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       5.1
                       ,
                       2.
                       
                    
                     
                       3.
                       
                       Keeping
                       Gods
                       Commandements
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       5.2
                       .
                    
                     
                       4.
                       
                       Not
                       loving
                       in
                       word
                       and
                       in
                       tongue
                       ,
                       but
                       in
                       deed
                       and
                       in
                       truth
                       ,
                       1
                       Iohn
                       3.18
                       .
                    
                     
                       5.
                       
                       Reall
                       compassion
                       to
                       our
                       brother
                       in
                       need
                       ,
                       yea
                       even
                       hazzarding
                       our
                       life
                       for
                       him
                       in
                       some
                       cases
                       1
                       Iohn
                       3.16
                       ,
                       17.
                       
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   By
                   these
                
                 Evidences
                 ,
                 Signes
                 or
                 Characters
                 of
                 our
                 spirituall
                 Estate
                 ,
                 
                   clearly
                   laid
                   downe
                   in
                   this
                   Excellent
                   Epistle
                   ,
                   the
                   weak
                   in
                   faith
                   may
                   become
                   strong
                   in
                   Assurance
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   strong
                   may
                   become
                   stronger
                   :
                   yea
                   all
                   that
                   truly
                   believe
                   in
                   the
                   name
                   of
                   the
                   Son
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                   (
                   if
                   the
                   fault
                   be
                   not
                   their
                   owne
                   )
                   may
                   hereby
                   come
                   to
                
                 know
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 have
                 eternall
                 life
                 .
                 
                   All
                   which
                   Evidences
                   I
                   shall
                   indeavour
                   very
                   shortly
                   (
                   God
                   willing
                   ,
                   )
                   more
                   fully
                   to
                   open
                   and
                   unfold
                   in
                   a
                   distinct
                   Treatise
                   ,
                   called
                   ,
                
                 
                 
                   Believers
                   Evidences
                   for
                   eternall
                   life
                   .
                   A
                   subject
                   which
                   ,
                   I
                   hope
                   ,
                   to
                   gracious
                   hearts
                   will
                   be
                   most
                   welcome
                   and
                   seasonable
                   ,
                   in
                   these
                   sad
                   afflicting
                   dayes
                   ;
                   To
                   help
                   forward
                   their
                   Assurance
                   for
                   heaven
                   ,
                   when
                   they
                   can
                   have
                   no
                   assurance
                   of
                   any
                   thing
                   on
                   earth
                   ,
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 .
                 in
                 reference
                 to
                 these
                 excellent
                 ends
                 are
                 .
              
               
                 
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     Proem
                  
                   to
                   the
                   whole
                   Epistle
                   ,
                   declaring
                   ,
                   1.
                   
                   What
                   the
                   Apostle
                   treats
                   of
                   .
                   viz.
                   Of
                   Christ
                   the
                   word
                   of
                   life
                   .
                   viz.
                   His
                   person
                   ,
                   God-man
                   :
                   and
                   his
                   office
                   .
                   2.
                   
                   What
                   he
                   is
                   about
                   to
                   say
                   of
                   Christ
                   ;
                   not
                   any
                   novelty
                   ,
                   but
                   what
                   
                     was
                     from
                     the
                     beginning
                  
                   ;
                   not
                   any
                   uncertainty
                   ,
                   but
                   that
                   whereof
                   they
                   were
                   infallible
                   witnesses
                   .
                   3.
                   
                   To
                   what
                   purpose
                   he
                   will
                   treat
                   of
                   these
                   things
                   ,
                   
                     that
                     they
                     may
                     have
                     Communion
                     with
                     God
                     ,
                     and
                     so
                     their
                     joy
                     be
                     full
                     ,
                  
                   they
                   become
                   happy
                   ,
                   c.
                   1.1.2.3
                   ,
                   4.
                   
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     The
                     Substance
                     of
                     the
                     Epistle
                     it selfe
                     ,
                     which
                     is
                     either
                     ,
                  
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Practicall
                       ,
                       full
                       of
                       heavenly
                       exhortations
                       .
                       viz.
                       
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           To
                           holinesse
                           of
                           life
                           and
                           conversation
                           .
                           viz.
                           1.
                           
                           Not
                           to
                           walk
                           in
                           darknesse
                           ,
                           but
                           in
                           light
                           ,
                           c.
                           1.
                           v.
                           5
                           ,
                           6
                           ,
                           7.
                           2.
                           
                           Not
                           to
                           deny
                           sin
                           to
                           be
                           in
                           us
                           ,
                           but
                           penitently
                           to
                           confesse
                           it
                           ,
                           c.
                           1
                           ,
                           8
                           ,
                           9
                           ,
                           10.
                           3.
                           
                           To
                           avoid
                           sinne
                           ,
                           and
                           yet
                           if
                           sinne
                           overtake
                           us
                           to
                           repaire
                           to
                           Christ
                           our
                           Propitiation
                           c.
                           2
                           ,
                           1
                           ,
                           2.
                           4.
                           
                           To
                           adde
                           to
                           our
                           knowledge
                           of
                           God
                           ,
                           true
                           obedience
                           to
                           his
                           Word
                           ,
                           c.
                           2
                           ,
                           3.
                           to
                           9.
                           5.
                           
                           To
                           brotherly
                           love
                           ,
                           c.
                           2
                           ,
                           9.
                           to
                           15.
                           6.
                           
                           To
                           take
                           heed
                           of
                           inordinate
                           love
                           of
                           the
                           world
                           .
                           c.
                           2
                           ,
                           15
                           ,
                           16
                           ,
                           17
                           ,
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           To
                           beware
                           of
                           the
                           dangerous
                           Anti-Christs
                           ,
                           and
                           hereticall
                           Seducers
                           ,
                           abounding
                           
                           in
                           the
                           world
                           ,
                           especially
                           ●orinthians
                           and
                           Ebionites
                           denying
                           Christs
                           Godhead
                           ,
                           c.
                           2
                           ,
                           18.
                           
                             to
                             the
                             end
                          
                           .
                        
                         
                           3.
                           
                           To
                           abandon
                           practising
                           of
                           sinne
                           ,
                           as
                           inconsistent
                           with
                           the
                           state
                           of
                           grace
                           ,
                           contrary
                           to
                           the
                           wicked
                           seducements
                           of
                           the
                           Carpocratians
                           forementioned
                           ,
                           who
                           taught
                           men
                           to
                           sin
                           ,
                           c.
                           3
                           ,
                           1.
                           to
                           11.
                           
                        
                         
                           4.
                           
                           To
                           sincere
                           reall
                           brotherly
                           love
                           ,
                           by
                           many
                           Arguments
                           ,
                           c.
                           3
                           ,
                           11.
                           
                             to
                             the
                             end
                          
                           .
                           and
                           c.
                           4
                           ,
                           7.
                           
                             to
                             the
                             end
                          
                           .
                        
                         
                           5.
                           
                           To
                           take
                           heed
                           of
                           
                             believing
                             every
                             spirit
                             ,
                             but
                             to
                             try
                             them
                             ,
                          
                           especially
                           such
                           as
                           deny
                           Christs
                           Manhood
                           ,
                           (
                           as
                           after
                           did
                           the
                           
                             Cerdonians
                             ,
                             Manich●es
                             ,
                             Priscillianists
                          
                           and
                           Valentinians
                           ,
                           )
                           c.
                           4
                           ,
                           1.
                           to
                           7.
                           
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       Dogmaticall
                       ,
                       wherein
                       he
                       asserts
                       
                         that
                         Iesus
                         is
                         the
                         Christ
                         the
                         Son
                         of
                         God
                         ,
                         and
                         true
                         man
                         ,
                      
                       and
                       this
                       from
                       divers
                       Arguments
                       and
                       Testimonies
                       which
                       we
                       should
                       believe
                       ,
                       
                         that
                         we
                         may
                         have
                         eternall
                         life
                         begun
                         ,
                      
                       c.
                       5
                       ,
                       1.
                       to
                       14.
                       for
                       perfecting
                       whereof
                       we
                       should
                       pray
                       ;
                       where
                       he
                       directs
                       us
                       how
                       ,
                       and
                       for
                       whom
                       to
                       pray
                       ,
                       c.
                       5.14
                       .
                       to
                       21.
                       
                    
                  
                
                 
                   III.
                   Conclusion
                   ,
                   with
                   a
                   serious
                   monition
                   against
                   
                     idolatry
                     ,
                     c.
                  
                   5
                   ,
                   21.
                   
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 II
                 John.
                 
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   second
                   Epistle
                   of
                
                 JOHN
                 
                   the
                   Apostle
                
                 .
                 This
                 Epistle
                 of
                 Iohn
                 is
                 nor
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 
                   first
                   ,
                   Catholique
                
                 or
                 Generall
                 :
                 but
                 Particular
                 ,
                 being
                 written
                 to
                 particular
                 persons
                 ,
                 viz.
                 The
                 
                   Elect
                   Lady
                   ,
                   and
                   her
                   children
                   .
                
                 Who
                 she
                 was
                 ,
                 is
                 not
                 known
                 ;
                 Some
                 think
                 that
                 ELECT
                 was
                 her
                 prop●r
                 name
                 :
                 but
                 that
                 's
                 improbable
                 ,
                 for
                 then
                 Iohn
                 would
                 not
                 have
                 said
                 ,
                 
                   To
                   the
                   Elect
                   Lady
                
                 ;
                 but
                 ,
                 
                   To
                   the
                   Lady
                   ELECT
                
                 .
                 Some
                 turne
                 this
                 into
                 an
                 Allegory
                 ,
                 and
                 say
                 that
                 by
                 
                   the
                   Elect
                   Lady
                
                 Iohn
                 intended
                 the
                 whole
                 Christian
                 Church
                 :
                 But
                 this
                 is
                 most
                 unlikely
                 ,
                 and
                 plainly
                 repugnant
                 to
                 this
                 Epistle
                 it selfe
                 ,
                 for
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 To
                 write
                 to
                 the
                 whole
                 Christian
                 Church
                 under
                 the
                 Notion
                 of
                 an
                 
                   Elect
                   Lady
                
                 is
                 so
                 unusuall
                 ,
                 that
                 we
                 find
                 no
                 such
                 thing
                 done
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 New-Testament
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 This
                 Epistle
                 not
                 onely
                 mentions
                 this
                 
                   Lady
                   and
                   her
                   children
                
                 ,
                 v.
                 1.4
                 .
                 But
                 also
                 sends
                 her
                 salutations
                 from
                 the
                 
                   children
                   of
                   her
                   Elect
                   
                   Sister
                   ,
                
                 v.
                 13.
                 3.
                 
                 The
                 Apostle
                 speakes
                 of
                 his
                 intention
                 
                   to
                   come
                   and
                   see
                   her
                   ,
                   and
                   speake
                   face
                   to
                   face
                   .
                
                 Which
                 cannot
                 be
                 understood
                 of
                 the
                 whole
                 Christian
                 Church
                 ,
                 ver
                 .
                 12.
                 
                 She
                 is
                 thought
                 to
                 be
                 some
                 eminent
                 religious
                 Matron
                 of
                 great
                 Estate
                 ,
                 who
                 much
                 relieved
                 and
                 supported
                 the
                 members
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 in
                 her
                 dayes
                 .
                 
                   Bez.
                   Annot.
                   in
                
                 2
                 
                   Ioan.
                   Piscat
                   .
                   in
                
                 2
                 Ioan.
                 
              
               
                 Penman
                 .
                 Some
                 thinke
                 was
                 another
                 Iohn
                 then
                 the
                 Apostle
                 ,
                 as
                 is
                 testifyed
                 by
                 
                   Euseb.
                   Eccles.
                   Hist.
                   l.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 39.
                 
                 But
                 this
                 seems
                 to
                 be
                 a
                 plain
                 mistake
                 ,
                 for
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 Greek
                 Copies
                 call
                 it
                 in
                 the
                 Title
                 ,
                 
                   The
                   second
                   Epistle
                   of
                   Iohn
                   the
                   Apostle
                   .
                
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 matter
                 of
                 the
                 Epistle
                 is
                 not
                 only
                 Divine
                 and
                 Apostolicall
                 ;
                 but
                 notably
                 owns
                 Iohn
                 to
                 be
                 the
                 writer
                 ,
                 wherein
                 
                   Christian
                   love
                   ,
                   walking
                   in
                   the
                   truth
                   ,
                   and
                   taking
                   heed
                   of
                   Seducers
                   and
                   Antichrists
                   ,
                
                 are
                 pressed
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 
                   first
                   Epistle
                   of
                   Iohn
                
                 .
                 So
                 that
                 this
                 is
                 Iohns
                 genuine
                 language
                 .
                 Compare
                 these
                 passages
                 among
                 others
                 ,
                 viz.
                 1
                 Ioh.
                 2
                 ▪
                 7.
                 with
                 2
                 Ioh.
                 5.
                 —
                 and
                 1
                 Ioh.
                 2.23
                 .
                 with
                 2
                 Ioh.
                 9.
                 —
                 and
                 1
                 Ioh.
                 4.1
                 ,
                 2
                 ,
                 3.
                 with
                 2
                 Ioh.
                 7.
                 —
                 and
                 1
                 Ioh.
                 5.3
                 .
                 with
                 2
                 Ioh.
                 
                 6.
                 &c.
                 3.
                 
                 The
                 Salutation
                 is
                 plainly
                 Apostolicall
                 .
                 ver
                 .
                 1
                 ,
                 2
                 ,
                 3.
                 
                 And
                 notably
                 relisheth
                 of
                 Iohn's
                 Spirit
                 .
                 4.
                 
                 Both
                 ancient
                 and
                 modern
                 Writers
                 ,
                 account
                 this
                 Epistle
                 Canonicall
                 ,
                 and
                 ascribe
                 it
                 unto
                 
                   Iohn
                   the
                   Apostle
                   ,
                   Concil
                   .
                   Carthagin
                   .
                
                 3.
                 
                 Can.
                 4.7
                 .
                 
                   Concil
                   .
                   Laodic
                   .
                   c.
                   ult
                   .
                   Hieronym
                   ,
                   in
                   Epist.
                
                 85.
                 
                   ad
                   Euagrium
                   .
                   August
                   .
                   de
                   Doctrin
                   .
                   Christian
                   ,
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 8.
                 
                 
                   Sentent
                   .
                   Episcoporum
                   Concil
                   .
                   Carthaginens
                   .
                   apud
                   Cyprian
                   .
                   Sent.
                
                 81.
                 
                 
                   Cyprian
                   op
                   .
                   edit
                
                 .
                 1593.
                 p.
                 449.
                 
                 
                   Beda
                   .
                   Piscat
                   .
                   Bez.
                   in
                
                 2
                 Iohan.
                 So
                 that
                 this
                 Epistle
                 being
                 written
                 by
                 
                   Iohn
                   the
                   Apostle
                
                 ,
                 is
                 of
                 unquestionable
                 authority
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Occasion
                   .
                   Some
                
                 thinke
                 that
                 Iohns
                 familiar
                 Christian
                 acquaintance
                 with
                 this
                 
                   Elect
                   Lady
                
                 ,
                 gave
                 him
                 Occasion
                 of
                 writing
                 this
                 Epistle
                 .
                 Others
                 rather
                 think
                 it
                 was
                 written
                 against
                 the
                 Antichristian
                 Heresie
                 of
                 
                   Basilidis
                   and
                   his
                   followers
                
                 ,
                 who
                 taught
                 that
                 Christ
                 was
                 not
                 a
                 true
                 man
                 but
                 a
                 phantasm
                 ,
                 and
                 therfore
                 that
                 he
                 neither
                 did
                 ,
                 nor
                 suffer'd
                 those
                 things
                 which
                 he
                 is
                 said
                 to
                 do
                 and
                 suffer
                 .
                 
                   Epiphan
                   .
                   Heres
                
                 .
                 24.
                 
                 Compare
                 2
                 Ioh.
                 7.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   To
                   incite
                
                 the
                 Elect
                 Lady
                 and
                 her
                 children
                 ,
                 
                   To
                   persevere
                   in
                   the
                   truth
                   ,
                   
                   and
                   carefully
                   to
                   shun
                   all
                   hereticall
                   Seducers
                   ,
                   that
                   bring
                   not
                   Christs
                   Doctrine
                   .
                   A●
                   also
                   to
                   adorne
                   the
                   truth
                   ,
                   with
                   love
                   and
                   good
                   workes
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 .
                 To
                 this
                 end
                 ,
                 are
                 ,
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       The
                       inscription
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     ,
                     containing
                     ▪
                     1.
                     
                     The
                     writer
                     .
                     2.
                     
                     Persons
                     written
                     to
                     .
                     3.
                     
                     A
                     testification
                     of
                     the
                     Apostle's
                     and
                     other
                     's
                     sincere
                     love
                     to
                     the
                     
                       Lady
                       and
                       her
                       children
                    
                     .
                     4.
                     
                     His
                     pious
                     wish
                     o●
                     supplication
                     for
                     them
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     1
                     ,
                     2
                     ,
                     3.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       substance
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     ,
                     wherein
                     the
                     Apostle
                     ,
                     1.
                     
                     Congratulates
                     with
                     the
                     Lady
                     ,
                     that
                     some
                     of
                     her
                     children
                     walked
                     in
                     the
                     truth
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     4.
                     2.
                     
                     Exhorts
                     to
                     constancy
                     in
                     the
                     ancient
                     Doctrine
                     of
                     love
                     and
                     truth
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     5
                     ,
                     6.
                     3.
                     
                     Warnes
                     them
                     against
                     Seducers
                     ,
                     denying
                     Christs
                     incarnation
                     ,
                     shewing
                     the
                     danger
                     of
                     them
                     ,
                     and
                     forbidding
                     all
                     fellowship
                     with
                     them
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     7.
                     to
                     12.
                     
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       The
                       conclusion
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     with
                     ,
                     1.
                     
                     Intimation
                     that
                     he
                     omits
                     writing
                     many
                     other
                     things
                     ,
                     hoping
                     to
                     come
                     to
                     them
                     and
                     speak
                     them
                     by
                     word
                     of
                     mouth
                     ,
                     verse
                     12.
                     2.
                     
                     Salutations
                     from
                     her
                     Sisters
                     children
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     13.
                     
                  
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 III
                 John.
                 
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   third
                   Epistle
                   of
                
                 IOHN
                 
                   the
                   Apostle
                
                 .
                 This
                 Epistle
                 is
                 not
                 Generall
                 ,
                 but
                 Particular
                 ;
                 written
                 to
                 Gaius
                 .
              
               
                 Penman
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 also
                 was
                 
                   Iohn
                   the
                   Apostle
                
                 ,
                 and
                 therefore
                 it
                 is
                 Authentique
                 and
                 Canonicall
                 .
                 Both
                 these
                 are
                 ev●dent
                 by
                 all
                 the
                 foure
                 Reasons
                 alleadged
                 touching
                 
                   Iohn's
                   second
                   Epistle
                
                 .
                 And
                 the
                 word
                 ,
                 phrases
                 ,
                 and
                 method
                 of
                 these
                 two
                 Epistles
                 harmoniously
                 agree
                 ,
                 as
                 an
                 in●entive
                 Reader
                 may
                 well
                 observe
                 .
                 Iohn
                 directs
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 
                   To
                   the
                   well-beloved
                   Gaius
                
                 ,
                 but
                 what
                 Gaius
                 this
                 was
                 is
                 not
                 so
                 evident
                 .
                 Scripture
                 mentions
                 three
                 persons
                 of
                 this
                 name
                 ,
                 viz.
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Gaius
                   of
                   Macedonia
                
                 ,
                 Act.
                 19.21
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Gaius
                   of
                   Derbe
                
                 ,
                 Act.
                 20.4
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 
                   Gaius
                   of
                   Corinth
                
                 ,
                 1
                 Cor.
                 1.14
                 .
                 Whom
                 Paul
                 cals
                 ,
                 
                   Gaius
                   mine
                   host
                   ,
                   and
                   of
                   the
                   whole
                   Church
                   ,
                
                 writing
                 from
                 Corinth
                 to
                 the
                 Romanes
                 .
                 Rom.
                 
                 16.23
                 .
                 This
                 Gaius
                 was
                 a
                 man
                 eminent
                 for
                 Hospitality
                 ,
                 especially
                 to
                 the
                 Ministers
                 and
                 members
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 Christ.
                 Perhaps
                 this
                 Gaius
                 of
                 Corinth
                 was
                 the
                 Gaius
                 to
                 whom
                 here
                 Iohn
                 also
                 writes
                 ,
                 for
                 1.
                 
                 He
                 is
                 singularly
                 commended
                 here
                 for
                 his
                 charity
                 and
                 hospitality
                 ,
                 3
                 Ioh.
                 ver
                 .
                 5
                 ,
                 6.
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 consent
                 of
                 writers
                 subscribes
                 hereunto
                 .
                 See
                 
                   Lorin
                   .
                   Comment
                   .
                   in
                
                 3
                 
                   Iohan.
                   Epist.
                   ver
                
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 However
                 he
                 was
                 a
                 very
                 eminent
                 man
                 in
                 the
                 Church
                 .
              
               
                 When
                 or
                 where
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 is
                 not
                 certainly
                 known
                 .
              
               
                 Occasion
                 .
                 The
                 bountifulnesse
                 and
                 Hospitablenesse
                 of
                 Gaius
                 ,
                 which
                 Iohn
                 had
                 some
                 occasion
                 to
                 improve
                 towards
                 some
                 Ministers
                 that
                 went
                 to
                 preach
                 to
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 ,
                 who
                 seeme
                 to
                 have
                 brought
                 this
                 Epistle
                 from
                 Iohn
                 to
                 Gaius
                 ,
                 See
                 ver
                 .
                 6
                 ,
                 7
                 ,
                 8.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Scope
                   ,
                   To
                   request
                   Gaius
                   ,
                   according
                   to
                   his
                   wonted
                   bounty
                   and
                   benevolence
                   to
                   the
                   Saints
                   ,
                   to
                   bring
                   forward
                   on
                   their
                   journey
                   certain
                   Ministers
                   that
                   went
                   to
                   preach
                   the
                   Gospel
                   to
                   the
                   Gentiles
                   .
                   To
                   brand
                   Diotrephes
                   ,
                   and
                   commend
                   to
                   him
                   Demetrius
                   .
                
              
               
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 .
              
               
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     Inscription
                  
                   ,
                   mentioning
                   ,
                   1.
                   
                   Who
                   wrote
                   this
                   Epistle
                   .
                   2.
                   
                   To
                   whom
                   .
                   3.
                   
                   The
                   wel-wishing
                   Prayer
                   for
                   him
                   ,
                   verse
                   1
                   ,
                   2.
                   
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     The
                     Substance
                     of
                     the
                     Epistle
                  
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   partly
                   ,
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Gratulatory
                       ,
                       wherein
                       he
                       rejoyceth
                       at
                       Gaius
                       his
                       1.
                       
                       W●lking
                       in
                       the
                       truth
                       ,
                       ver
                       .
                       3
                       ,
                       4.
                       2.
                       
                       Charity
                       and
                       Hospitality
                       to
                       the
                       Brethren
                       and
                       strangers
                       ,
                       ver
                       .
                       5
                       ,
                       6.
                       
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       Hortatory
                       ,
                       wherein
                       by
                       divers
                       Arguments
                       insinuated
                       ,
                       he
                       exhorts
                       him
                       to
                       bring
                       on
                       their
                       journey
                       certaine
                       brethren
                       that
                       went
                       to
                       preach
                       the
                       Gospel
                       to
                       the
                       Gentiles
                       ,
                       ver
                       .
                       6
                       ,
                       7
                       ,
                       8.
                       
                       Intimating
                       that
                       he
                       wrote
                       to
                       the
                       Church
                       about
                       this
                       matter
                       also
                       ,
                       but
                       feares
                       it
                       would
                       be
                       to
                       little
                       effect
                       ,
                       because
                       of
                       Diotrephes
                       his
                       pride
                       ,
                       contemning
                       the
                       Apostle
                       ;
                       neither
                       receiving
                       the
                       brethren
                       himselfe
                       ,
                       nor
                       suffering
                       others
                       to
                       do
                       it
                       ,
                       whom
                       therefore
                       he
                       threatens
                       ,
                       ver
                       .
                       9
                       ,
                       10
                       ,
                       11.
                       
                       But
                       contrariwise
                       commends
                       
                         Demetrius
                         ,
                         ver
                      
                       .
                       13.
                       
                    
                  
                
                 
                   III.
                   
                     Conclusion
                     of
                     the
                     Epistle
                  
                   ,
                   with
                   1.
                   
                   An
                   Apology
                   for
                   his
                   writing
                   so
                   short
                   an
                   Espistle
                   ,
                   because
                   he
                   trusted
                   shortly
                   to
                   see
                   him
                   .
                   2.
                   
                   Salutations
                   ,
                   ver
                   .
                   13
                   ,
                   14.
                   
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 Jude
                 .
              
               
                 
                   THe
                   Catholique
                
                 (
                 or
                 generall
                 )
                 
                   Epistle
                   of
                   the
                   Apostle
                
                 JUDAS
                 .
                 Thus
                 denominated
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 Penman
                 who
                 wrote
                 it
                 ,
                 and
                 from
                 the
                 persons
                 to
                 whom
                 it
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 viz.
                 the
                 same
                 to
                 whom
                 Peter
                 wrote
                 his
                 second
                 Epistle
                 ;
                 For
                 substance
                 being
                 both
                 the
                 same
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Penman
                   .
                   Iudas
                   the
                   brother
                   of
                   Iames
                   ,
                
                 Jud.
                 1.
                 
                 This
                 is
                 Originally
                 an
                 Hebrew
                 name
                 ,
                 
                   viz.
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   Iehudah
                
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 Praise
                 ;
                 from
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 Hodah
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 
                   He
                   hath
                   confessed
                   ,
                   he
                   hath
                   praised
                   .
                
                 This
                 name
                 was
                 first
                 given
                 to
                 the
                 fourth
                 sonne
                 of
                 Iakob
                 ,
                 because
                 at
                 his
                 birth
                 his
                 mother
                 
                   praised
                   the
                   Lord.
                
                 Gen.
                 29.35
                 .
                 Matth.
                 2.6
                 .
                 There
                 were
                 two
                 Apostles
                 that
                 had
                 this
                 name
                 ,
                 viz.
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Iudas
                   Iscariot
                
                 that
                 had
                 the
                 bag
                 ,
                 and
                 betrayed
                 Christ
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 10.4
                 .
                 And
                 afterwards
                 in
                 some
                 sort
                 
                   repented
                   ,
                   Restored
                   the
                   thirty
                   peeces
                   ,
                   hanged
                   himselfe
                   ,
                
                 Matth.
                 27.3
                 ,
                 4
                 ,
                 5.
                 
                 So
                 that
                 he
                 
                   burst
                   asunder
                   in
                   the
                   middest
                   ,
                   and
                   
                   all
                   his
                   bowels
                   gushed
                   out
                   ,
                
                 and
                 so
                 
                   he
                   went
                   to
                   his
                   own
                   place
                   ,
                
                 Act.
                 1.18
                 ,
                 25.
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Iudas
                   the
                   brother
                   of
                   Iames
                
                 ,
                 Luk.
                 6.16
                 .
                 Act.
                 1.13
                 .
                 viz.
                 Of
                 
                   Iames
                   the
                   sonne
                   of
                   Alpheus
                
                 ,
                 who
                 was
                 famous
                 at
                 Ierusalem
                 among
                 the
                 Apostles
                 ,
                 Act.
                 15.
                 
                 And
                 21.28
                 .
                 Where
                 he
                 is
                 conceived
                 to
                 keep
                 his
                 chief
                 abode
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 might
                 teach
                 the
                 Iewes
                 that
                 resorted
                 thither
                 out
                 of
                 all
                 Nations
                 ;
                 unto
                 which
                 Iewes
                 especially
                 Iudas
                 here
                 seemes
                 principally
                 to
                 write
                 ,
                 and
                 therefore
                 mentions
                 
                   Iames.
                   Bez.
                   Annot.
                   in
                   Iud.
                
                 1.
                 
                 This
                 Iudas
                 is
                 also
                 called
                 Lebbeus
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
                 Hearty
                 ;
                 and
                 surnamed
                 Thaddaeus
                 which
                 is
                 in
                 Syriack
                 the
                 same
                 with
                 Iudas
                 in
                 Hebrew
                 ,
                 Matth.
                 10.3
                 .
                 This
                 Iudas
                 is
                 supposed
                 to
                 preach
                 the
                 Gospel
                 in
                 
                   Mesopotamia
                   ,
                   Pontus
                   ,
                   Aegypt
                
                 and
                 Persia
                 ,
                 where
                 the
                 Magi
                 slew
                 him
                 for
                 his
                 free
                 and
                 faithfull
                 reproving
                 of
                 their
                 superstitions
                 .
              
               
                 Authority
                 of
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 (
                 though
                 suspected
                 heretofore
                 by
                 some
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 upon
                 very
                 inconsiderable
                 grounds
                 ;
                 
                   Euseb.
                   Eccles.
                   Hist.
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 23.
                 
                 Yet
                 )
                 is
                 now
                 generally
                 acknowledged
                 to
                 be
                 Divine
                 ;
                 especially
                 considering
                 that
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Iudas
                   the
                   brother
                   of
                   Iames
                
                 ,
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 
                 Apostles
                 wrote
                 it
                 ,
                 Iude
                 1.
                 2
                 
                 Pet.
                 1.21
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 matter
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 yea
                 and
                 most
                 of
                 the
                 very
                 phrases
                 and
                 words
                 ,
                 are
                 the
                 same
                 with
                 those
                 of
                 the
                 
                   second
                   Epistle
                   of
                   Peter
                
                 ,
                 if
                 diligently
                 compared
                 .
                 See
                 
                   the
                   Parallel
                   by
                   P.
                   Pareus
                   Com.
                   in
                   Iude.
                
                 3.
                 
                 Antiquity
                 have
                 received
                 this
                 Epistle
                 as
                 Authentique
                 ,
                 and
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 Divine
                 Canon
                 .
                 
                   Euseb.
                   Eccles.
                   Hist.
                   l.
                
                 2.
                 c.
                 23.
                 
                   and
                   lib.
                
                 3.
                 c.
                 22.
                 
                 
                   Hieronym
                   .
                   in
                   Catal.
                   vir
                   Illustr
                   .
                   Concil
                   .
                   Laodicens
                   .
                   Concil
                   .
                   Carthaginens
                   .
                   Athanasus
                   ,
                   Augustine
                
                 and
                 others
                 who
                 recite
                 the
                 Catalogue
                 of
                 the
                 Books
                 of
                 Scripture
                 ,
                 reckon
                 
                   Iudes
                   Epistle
                
                 among
                 the
                 rest
                 .
              
               
                 Arguments
                 or
                 Objections
                 to
                 the
                 contrary
                 are
                 invalid
                 .
                 These
                 the
                 principall
                 .
              
               
                 Object
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 
                   This
                   Epistle
                   recites
                   Histories
                   no
                   where
                   else
                   to
                   be
                   found
                   in
                   Scripture
                   ,
                   as
                   the
                   contending
                   of
                   Michael
                   the
                   Archangel
                   ,
                   with
                   the
                   Devil
                   about
                   the
                   body
                   of
                   Moses
                   ,
                   Iude
                
                 9.
                 
              
               
                 Answ.
                 1.
                 
                 Divers
                 stories
                 are
                 pointed
                 at
                 in
                 New
                 Testament
                 .
                 Which
                 we
                 find
                 not
                 in
                 the
                 Old
                 Testament
                 .
                 As
                 that
                 Iannes
                 and
                 
                   Iambres
                   withstood
                   Moses
                
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 Tim.
                 3.8
                 .
                 That
                 at
                 Mount
                 Sinai
                 ,
                 
                   Moses
                   said
                   ,
                   I
                   exceedingly
                   feare
                   and
                   quake
                   ,
                
                 
                 Heb.
                 12.21
                 .
                 Shall
                 therefore
                 these
                 Epistles
                 Authority
                 be
                 suspected
                 ?
                 2.
                 
                 These
                 stories
                 (
                 though
                 formerly
                 unwritten
                 ,
                 but
                 happily
                 derived
                 by
                 tradition
                 from
                 hand
                 to
                 hand
                 ,
                 yet
                 )
                 now
                 are
                 written
                 by
                 guidance
                 of
                 the
                 Spirit
                 of
                 God.
                 And
                 the
                 writing
                 of
                 them
                 rather
                 assures
                 us
                 of
                 the
                 truth
                 of
                 these
                 Histories
                 ,
                 then
                 detracts
                 from
                 the
                 Authority
                 of
                 the
                 Books
                 wherein
                 they
                 are
                 recorded
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 This
                 story
                 hath
                 some
                 footsteps
                 in
                 Deut.
                 34.9
                 .
                 Whereupon
                 some
                 say
                 ,
                 
                   The
                   Angel
                   would
                   have
                   buried
                   Moses
                   ,
                   but
                   the
                   Devil
                   challenged
                
                 Moses
                 
                   to
                   be
                   his
                   own
                   ,
                   because
                   of
                   his
                   killing
                   the
                   Aegyptian
                   ,
                   and
                   therefore
                   withstood
                   him
                   .
                
                 But
                 others
                 better
                 ;
                 
                   God
                   knowing
                   Israels
                   pronenesse
                   to
                   Idolatry
                   ,
                   least
                   they
                   should
                   commit
                   Idolatry
                   with
                
                 Moses
                 
                   dead
                   body
                   (
                   as
                   after
                   they
                   did
                   with
                   the
                   brazen
                   Serpent
                   )
                   buried
                   him
                   no
                   man
                   knowing
                   where
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   Devil
                   ,
                   endeavouring
                   to
                   discover
                   it
                   ,
                   the
                   Angell
                   withstood
                   him
                   .
                
              
               
                 Obj.
                 2.
                 
                 Iude
                 
                   mentions
                   the
                   Prophesie
                   of
                
                 Enoch
                 ,
                 ver
                 .
                 14
                 ,
                 15.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Old
                   Testament
                   hath
                   no
                   such
                   Prophecie
                   .
                
              
               
                 Ans.
                 1.
                 
                 Some
                 thinke
                 in
                 Iudes
                 time
                 there
                 was
                 a
                 Canonicall
                 Book
                 of
                 Enoch
                 
                 extant
                 ,
                 as
                 
                   Tertull.
                   lib.
                   de
                   Habit
                   muliebr
                   .
                   Beda
                   com
                   .
                   in
                   Ep.
                   Iud.
                
                 2.
                 
                 Others
                 say
                 better
                 then
                 they
                 ,
                 suppose
                 Enoch's
                 Book
                 were
                 Apocryphall
                 ,
                 yet
                 in
                 Apocryphall
                 Books
                 ther
                 's
                 some
                 truth
                 ,
                 and
                 why
                 may
                 not
                 this
                 Apostle
                 alleadge
                 this
                 passage
                 out
                 of
                 
                   Enochs
                   Prophecie
                
                 ,
                 without
                 approving
                 that
                 whole
                 Book
                 ,
                 or
                 disvesting
                 this
                 Epistle
                 of
                 its
                 Authority
                 ;
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 the
                 Author
                 to
                 the
                 Hebrew
                 ,
                 alleadge
                 some
                 passages
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Book
                 of
                 Maccabees
                 ,
                 Heb.
                 11.
                 
                 Or
                 Paul
                 some
                 Sentences
                 out
                 of
                 
                   Heathen
                   Authors
                   and
                   Poets
                
                 ,
                 1
                 Cor.
                 15.32
                 .
                 Tit.
                 1.12
                 .
                 Act.
                 17.28
                 .
                 1
                 Tim.
                 2.12
                 .
                 &
                 5.23
                 .
                 Tit.
                 1.3
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 Others
                 think
                 this
                 
                   Prophecy
                   of
                   Enoch
                
                 was
                 rather
                 reall
                 then
                 
                   verball
                   ,
                   viz.
                
                 Respecting
                 the
                 Order
                 of
                 the
                 Patriarchs
                 ,
                 that
                 as
                 Death
                 by
                 reason
                 of
                 sinne
                 had
                 Reigned
                 over
                 the
                 six
                 first
                 Fathers
                 ,
                 
                   Adam
                   Seth
                   ,
                   Enos
                   ,
                   Cainan
                   ,
                   Mahalelel
                   ,
                   Iared
                   ,
                
                 but
                 could
                 not
                 touch
                 the
                 seventh
                 ,
                 Enoch
                 :
                 so
                 death
                 shall
                 Reigne
                 ove●
                 the
                 world
                 6000
                 yeeres
                 ,
                 (
                 which
                 shall
                 so
                 long
                 continue
                 )
                 but
                 in
                 the
                 7000.
                 yeeres
                 ,
                 eternall
                 life
                 shall
                 begin
                 ;
                 and
                 
                   death
                   shall
                   be
                   swallowed
                   up
                   in
                   Victory
                   .
                
                 4.
                 
                 But
                 others
                 best
                 of
                 all
                 understand
                 here
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Text
                 seems
                 
                 evidently
                 to
                 carry
                 it
                 ,
                 
                   Enochs
                   verbal
                   Prophecie
                
                 ,
                 which
                 though
                 not
                 written
                 ,
                 yet
                 Iude
                 received
                 by
                 Tradition
                 ,
                 or
                 rather
                 by
                 Revelation
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 spirit
                 of
                 God
                 by
                 which
                 Enoch
                 prophecyed
                 ,
                 and
                 here
                 recorded
                 as
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 
                   Divine
                   Canon
                
                 .
              
               
                 Obj.
                 3.
                 
                 Jude
                 
                   alleadges
                   other
                   Apostles
                   sayings
                
                 ,
                 ver
                 .
                 17.
                 
                 
                   Therefore
                   seemes
                   rather
                   to
                   be
                   a
                   Disciple
                   of
                   the
                   Apostles
                   ,
                   then
                   an
                   Apostle
                   himselfe
                   ,
                   especially
                   seeing
                   he
                   cals
                   not
                   himselfe
                   an
                   Apostle
                   ,
                   but
                
                 the
                 servant
                 of
                 Jesus
                 Christ
                 ,
                 ver
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 
                   And
                   therefore
                   this
                   Epistle
                   not
                   authenticall
                   .
                
              
               
                 Ans.
                 1.
                 
                 Though
                 it
                 could
                 be
                 proved
                 Iude
                 was
                 no
                 Apostle
                 ,
                 yet
                 it
                 therefore
                 followes
                 not
                 ,
                 his
                 Epistle
                 is
                 not
                 Authenticall
                 .
                 Mark
                 and
                 Luke
                 ,
                 not
                 Apostles
                 ,
                 yet
                 the
                 three
                 Books
                 they
                 wrote
                 are
                 of
                 unquestionable
                 authority
                 .
                 The
                 authority
                 of
                 Books
                 of
                 Scriptur
                 are
                 not
                 from
                 the
                 Penmen
                 writing
                 them
                 ,
                 but
                 from
                 the
                 
                   Spirit
                   of
                   God
                
                 inditing
                 them
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 Daniel
                 cites
                 Ieremiah
                 ,
                 Dan.
                 9.2
                 .
                 Ezekiel
                 cites
                 Daniel
                 ,
                 Ezek.
                 14.19
                 .
                 Were
                 they
                 therefore
                 not
                 Prophets
                 ,
                 but
                 Prophets
                 Disciples
                 ?
                 Peter
                 alleadgeth
                 Pauls
                 Epistles
                 ,
                 2
                 Pet.
                 3.15
                 ,
                 16.
                 
                 Was
                 Peter
                 therefore
                 no
                 Apostle
                 but
                 onely
                 a
                 
                 Disciple
                 ?
                 3.
                 
                 Iudes
                 alleadging
                 the
                 other
                 Apostles
                 deroga●es
                 not
                 from
                 the
                 authority
                 of
                 his
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 but
                 proves
                 that
                 Iude
                 wrote
                 after
                 both
                 Paul
                 and
                 Peter
                 ,
                 in
                 whose
                 Epistle
                 these
                 predictions
                 are
                 extant
                 ,
                 1
                 Tim.
                 4.1
                 .
                 &c.
                 2
                 Tim.
                 3.1
                 .
                 2
                 Pet.
                 2.1
                 .
                 &c.
                 4.
                 
                 Finally
                 ,
                 though
                 Iudas
                 here
                 call
                 not
                 himselfe
                 an
                 Apostle
                 ,
                 that
                 argues
                 not
                 therefore
                 he
                 was
                 not
                 an
                 Apostle
                 .
                 Iames
                 in
                 his
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 Iohn
                 in
                 his
                 three
                 Epistles
                 ,
                 Paul
                 in
                 his
                 Epistle
                 to
                 the
                 Philippians
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 both
                 his
                 Epistles
                 to
                 the
                 Thessalonians
                 superscribe
                 not
                 themselves
                 Apostles
                 ▪
                 were
                 they
                 therefore
                 no
                 Apostles
                 ?
                 But
                 Iudas
                 here
                 stiles
                 himselfe
                 
                   the
                   brother
                   of
                   Iames
                
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 's
                 full
                 as
                 much
                 as
                 if
                 he
                 had
                 stiled
                 himselfe
                 
                   an
                   Apostle
                
                 ,
                 for
                 the
                 texts
                 are
                 expresse
                 that
                 Iudas
                 the
                 Brother
                 of
                 Iames
                 was
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 twelve
                 Apostles
                 .
                 See
                 Luk.
                 6.16
                 .
                 Act.
                 1.13
                 .
              
               
                 Obj.
                 4.
                 
                 But
                 Iude
                 
                   the
                   Apostle
                   taught
                   in
                   Persia
                   ,
                   and
                   therefore
                   had
                   he
                   written
                   this
                   Epistle
                   ,
                   he
                   would
                   rather
                   have
                   written
                   it
                   in
                   the
                   Persian
                   ,
                   then
                   Grecian
                   tongue
                   .
                
              
               
                 Ans.
                 1.
                 
                 It
                 s
                 not
                 infallibly
                 certain
                 that
                 Iude
                 was
                 in
                 Persia
                 when
                 he
                 wrote
                 this
                 Epistle
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 No
                 necessity
                 of
                 the
                 
                 Apostles
                 writing
                 in
                 the
                 language
                 of
                 the
                 people
                 with
                 whom
                 they
                 then
                 lived
                 .
                 Matthew
                 lived
                 among
                 the
                 
                   Ethiopians
                   ,
                   Paul
                
                 at
                 Rome
                 when
                 he
                 wrote
                 some
                 of
                 his
                 Epistles
                 ,
                 yet
                 they
                 wrote
                 not
                 in
                 Ethiopick
                 or
                 Latin
                 ,
                 but
                 in
                 Greek
                 .
                 Greek
                 being
                 then
                 the
                 most
                 common
                 language
                 in
                 the
                 world
                 ,
                 the
                 Holy
                 Ghost
                 would
                 have
                 Greek
                 to
                 be
                 the
                 Originall
                 language
                 for
                 New
                 Testament
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Hebrew
                 especially
                 for
                 the
                 Old.
                 And
                 Iudes
                 Epistle
                 is
                 Catholique
                 or
                 Generall
                 ,
                 and
                 therefore
                 was
                 written
                 in
                 
                   Greek
                   the
                   generall
                   tongue
                
                 .
              
               
                 When
                 and
                 Where
                 this
                 Epistle
                 was
                 written
                 is
                 uncertaine
                 .
                 Some
                 think
                 this
                 Apostle
                 was
                 in
                 Persia
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Asia
                   Minor
                
                 when
                 he
                 wrote
                 it
                 ,
                 viz.
                 A
                 yeere
                 before
                 he
                 dyed
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 he
                 there
                 dyed
                 ,
                 anno
                 68.
                 after
                 Christ.
                 
                   Niceph.
                   l.
                
                 4.
                 c.
                 40.44
                 .
                 Probably
                 he
                 wrote
                 after
                 both
                 Paul
                 and
                 Peter
                 ,
                 to
                 whose
                 writings
                 he
                 seems
                 to
                 have
                 reference
                 ,
                 v.
                 17.
                 the
                 whole
                 Epistle
                 is
                 as
                 an
                 
                   Abstract
                   of
                
                 Peters
                 
                   second
                   Epistle
                
                 .
              
               
                 Occasion
                 ,
                 seems
                 from
                 the
                 current
                 of
                 the
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 to
                 be
                 those
                 abominable
                 heresies
                 of
                 the
                 
                   Simonians
                   ,
                   Nicolaitanes
                   ,
                   Gnosticks
                   ,
                   &c.
                
                 abounding
                 in
                 those
                 times
                 
                 times
                 who
                 held
                 
                   Sin
                   to
                   be
                   indifferent
                   ,
                   womē
                   &
                   al
                   things
                   to
                   be
                   common
                   ,
                   &c.
                
                 Oecumen
                 .
                 
                   Epiphan
                   .
                   in
                   Haeres
                   .
                   Gnostic
                   .
                   Sec.
                   Iud.
                
                 3.4
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Scope
                   .
                   To
                   warne
                   all
                   the
                   faithfull
                   in
                   those
                   times
                   of
                   the
                   cursed
                   and
                   detestable
                   Hereticks
                   and
                   Seducers
                   that
                   were
                   cunningly
                   crept
                   in
                   among
                   them
                   ,
                   that
                   they
                   contend
                   earnestly
                   for
                   the
                   truth
                   against
                   all
                   their
                   damnable
                   errours
                   and
                   Heresies
                   ;
                   and
                   for
                   purity
                   and
                   holinesse
                   of
                   life
                   ,
                   against
                   all
                   their
                   impure
                   lustfull
                   licentious
                   and
                   ungodly
                   p●actices
                   .
                   Iude
                
                 3
                 ,
                 4
                 ,
                 8
                 ,
                 10
                 ,
                 20
                 ,
                 21.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Principall
                   parts
                
                 .
                 To
                 this
                 end
                 are
                 ,
                 
                   
                     I.
                     
                       Inscription
                       of
                       the
                       whole
                       Epistle
                    
                     ,
                     expressing
                     ,
                     1.
                     
                     Penman
                     who
                     wrote
                     this
                     Epistle
                     .
                     2.
                     
                     Parties
                     to
                     whom
                     it
                     was
                     written
                     .
                     3.
                     
                     The
                     Salutation
                     of
                     them
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     1
                     ,
                     2.
                     
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       The
                       substance
                       of
                       the
                       Epistle
                    
                     ,
                     wherein
                     are
                     laid
                     down
                     ,
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         The
                         maine
                         Proposition
                         or
                         
                           Exhortation
                           ,
                           To
                           contend
                           earnestly
                           for
                           the
                           Faith
                           once
                           delivered
                           to
                           the
                           Saints
                        
                         ver
                         .
                         3.
                         
                         There
                         being
                         so
                         many
                         lascivious
                         hereticall
                         men
                         crept
                         in
                         among
                         them
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         4.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         Arguments
                         enforcing
                         this
                         exhortation
                         upon
                         them
                         ,
                         against
                         these
                         lascivious
                         Heritiques
                         ,
                         demonstrating
                         the
                         damnablenesse
                         
                         and
                         destructivenesse
                         of
                         their
                         wayes
                         ,
                         
                           
                             
                               1.
                               
                               
                                 By
                                 examples
                              
                               of
                               Gods
                               vengeance
                               for
                               like
                               impieties
                               and
                               impurities
                               in
                               former
                               times
                               ,
                               viz.
                               Upon
                               Israel
                               for
                               unbeliefe
                               ,
                               ver
                               .
                               5.
                               
                               Upon
                               Angels
                               for
                               Apostacy
                               ,
                               ver
                               .
                               Upon
                               Sodom
                               and
                               Gomorrha
                               &c.
                               
                               For
                               their
                               lusts
                               ,
                               ver
                               .
                               7.
                               
                            
                             
                               These
                               examples
                               he
                               applyes
                               to
                               these
                               Seducers
                               ,
                               
                                 
                                   1.
                                   
                                   
                                     Describing
                                     them
                                  
                                   by
                                   their
                                   ,
                                   1.
                                   
                                   Uncleannesse
                                   ,
                                   ver
                                   .
                                   8.
                                   2.
                                   
                                   Despising
                                   and
                                   reproaching
                                   Magistrates
                                   ,
                                   ver
                                   .
                                   8
                                   ,
                                   9.
                                   3.
                                   
                                   Impudency
                                   in
                                   reviling
                                   what
                                   they
                                   know
                                   not
                                   ,
                                   ver
                                   .
                                   10.
                                   4.
                                   
                                   Bruitish
                                   intemperance
                                   in
                                   carnall
                                   pleasures
                                   ,
                                   ver
                                   .
                                   10.
                                   5.
                                   
                                   Cruelty
                                   to
                                   their
                                   brethren
                                   .
                                   6.
                                   
                                   Covetousnesse
                                   .
                                   7.
                                   
                                   Seditiousnesse
                                   ,
                                   ver
                                   .
                                   11.
                                   8.
                                   
                                   Epicurisme
                                   in
                                   meats
                                   and
                                   drinks
                                   ,
                                   ver
                                   .
                                   12.
                                   9.
                                   
                                   Hypocrisie
                                   .
                                   10.
                                   
                                   Instability
                                   .
                                   11.
                                   
                                   Deadnesse
                                   and
                                   Barrennesse
                                   to
                                   all
                                   good
                                   fruit
                                   ,
                                   ver
                                   .
                                   12.
                                   12.
                                   
                                   Wrathfulnesse
                                   .
                                   13.
                                   
                                   Shamefull
                                   uncleannesse
                                   .
                                   14.
                                   
                                   Levity
                                   and
                                   inconstancy
                                   ,
                                   ver
                                   .
                                   13.
                                   
                                
                                 
                                   2.
                                   
                                   
                                     Threatning
                                     them
                                  
                                   ,
                                   in
                                   generall
                                   with
                                   woe
                                   ,
                                   ver
                                   .
                                   11
                                   ,
                                   in
                                   particular
                                   with
                                   eternall
                                   destruction
                                   ,
                                   ver
                                   .
                                   13.
                                   
                                
                              
                            
                          
                           
                             2.
                             
                             
                               By
                               Testimonies
                            
                             ,
                             
                               
                                 1.
                                 
                                 Of
                                 
                                   Enoch
                                   .
                                   ver
                                
                                 .
                                 14.15
                                 .
                                 To
                                 which
                                 he
                                 adds
                                 further
                                 descriptions
                                 of
                                 
                                 their
                                 viciousnesse
                                 ,
                                 ver
                                 .
                                 16.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 2.
                                 
                                 Of
                                 the
                                 Apostles
                                 themselves
                                 .
                                 v.
                                 17
                                 ,
                                 18.
                                 where
                                 he
                                 further
                                 describes
                                 these
                                 Heretiques
                                 by
                                 their
                                 
                                   Separation
                                   from
                                   Church
                                   assemblies
                                
                                 ,
                                 by
                                 their
                                 want
                                 of
                                 Gods
                                 Spirit
                                 .
                                 v.
                                 9.
                                 
                              
                            
                          
                           
                             3.
                             
                             Hortatory
                             Directions
                             by
                             way
                             of
                             Remedy
                             ,
                             for
                             1.
                             
                             Mutuall
                             edification
                             .
                             2.
                             
                             Prayer
                             ,
                             v.
                             20.
                             3.
                             
                             Love
                             of
                             God
                             ,
                             ver
                             .
                             21.
                             4.
                             
                             Different
                             course
                             to
                             be
                             taken
                             by
                             them
                             in
                             recovering
                             severall
                             persons
                             from
                             seducements
                             ,
                             v.
                             22
                             ,
                             23.
                             5.
                             
                             Zeale
                             against
                             all
                             impurity
                             ,
                             v.
                             23
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     III.
                     
                       Conclusion
                       of
                       the
                       whole
                       Epistle
                    
                     with
                     adoxology
                     to
                     God
                     ,
                     
                       who
                       is
                       able
                       to
                       keep
                       them
                       without
                       spot
                       and
                       blamelesse
                       ,
                    
                     &c.
                     v.
                     24
                     ,
                     25.
                     
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             
               III.
               THE
               PROPHETICAL
               BOOK
               ,
               Viz.
               THE
               Revelat.
               
            
             
               THE
               PROPHETICAL
               BOOK
               of
               the
               New
               Testament
               ,
               prophetically
               foretelling
               what
               shall
               be
               the
               future
               condition
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               Christ
               in
               all
               ages
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               is
               the
               REVELATION
               OF
               JOHN
               THE
               
               DIVINE
               .
               This
               may
               well
               be
               called
               a
               
                 Propheticall
                 Book
              
               ;
               For
               1
               The
               Holy
               Ghost
               himselfe
               divers
               times
               stiles
               it
               
                 A
                 Prophecy
              
               ,
               Rev.
               1.3
               .
               and
               7.10
               ,
               18.19
               .
               2
               And
               the
               nature
               of
               the
               Book
               is
               chiefly
               Propheticall
               ,
               as
               the
               Series
               of
               the
               Book
               implyes
               ;
               and
               also
               some
               passages
               plainly
               testify
               ,
               that
               it
               treats
               of
               
                 things
                 ,
                 which
                 must
                 shortly
                 come
                 to
                 passe
                 ,
              
               Rev.
               1.1
               .
               
                 and
                 things
                 which
                 shall
                 be
                 hereafter
                 ,
              
               Rev.
               1.19
               .
            
             
               Title
               ,
               This
               book
               in
               Greek
               is
               called
               [
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ]
               i.
               e.
               
                 The
                 Apocalypse
              
               (
               or
               Revelation
               ,
               )
               of
               John
               
                 the
                 Divine
              
               ▪
               whereby
               are
               indigitated
               to
               us
               ,
               both
               the
               nature
               of
               the
               Book
               ,
               and
               the
               Penman
               of
               it
               .
            
             
               
                 Nature
                 of
                 the
                 Book
                 ,
                 A
                 Revelation
                 .
              
               so
               called
               ,
               because
               it
               Reveals
               and
               makes
               known
               unto
               us
               secret
               hidden
               mysteries
               ,
               and
               future
               events
               .
               It
               s
               true
               ,
               this
               Revelation
               ,
               is
               not
               without
               mixture
               of
               much
               intricatenesse
               and
               obscurity
               ,
               (
               as
               all
               prophecies
               are
               enigmaticall
               and
               ambiguous
               to
               men
               ,
               till
               they
               be
               effected
               ,
               but
               when
               the
               time
               prophecied
               is
               come
               ,
               then
               they
               have
               a
               more
               clear
               ,
               and
               certaine
               exposition
               .
               So
               
                 Iraen
                 .
                 Advers
                 .
                 Haeres
                 .
                 l.
              
               4.
               c.
               43.
               )
               And
               this
               to
               exercise
               the
               
               Reader
               to
               search
               out
               the
               truth
               ,
               as
               
                 August
                 .
                 de
                 Civitat
                 .
                 dei
                 ,
              
               l.
               20.
               c.
               17.
               hath
               well
               observed
               .
            
             
               Penman
               or
               instrumentall
               Author
               of
               it
               ,
               
                 viz.
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Theologue
              
               or
               Divine
               .
               What
               Iohn
               this
               was
               ,
               some
               question
               .
               Eusebius
               mentions
               two
               Iohns
               ,
               whose
               monuments
               were
               to
               be
               seen
               at
               Ephesus
               ,
               viz.
               
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Evangelist
              
               ,
               who
               wrote
               the
               Gospel
               ,
               and
               1
               
                 Epistle
                 of
              
               John
               :
               and
               
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Presbyter
              
               ,
               who
               wrote
               2.
               and
               3.
               
               
                 Epistle
                 of
              
               Iohn
               ,
               and
               the
               
                 Revelation
                 ,
                 Euseb.
                 Eccles.
                 Hist.
                 l.
              
               3.
               c.
               39.
               
               To
               him
               also
               seems
               to
               incline
               ,
               
                 Dionys.
                 Alexandrinus
                 in
                 lib.
                 de
                 Repromissionibus
                 ,
              
               But
               that
               this
               is
               a
               great
               mistake
               ,
               and
               that
               IOHN
               
                 the
                 Evangelist
                 and
                 Apostle
              
               was
               Penman
               of
               this
               Revelation
               ,
               may
               be
               cleared
               by
               these
               considerations
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               This
               Title
               attributes
               it
               to
               
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Divine
              
               .
               This
               Epithet
               we
               read
               no
               where
               to
               be
               given
               to
               
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Presbyter
              
               ,
               but
               belongs
               to
               
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Apostle
              
               and
               Evangelist
               ,
               [
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ]
               by
               way
               of
               peculiar
               emphasis
               ,
               because
               like
               an
               Eagle
               he
               soares
               aloft
               ,
               writes
               more
               sublimely
               of
               the
               
                 Divinity
                 of
                 Iesus
                 Christ
              
               ,
               both
               in
               this
               Book
               ,
               (
               in
               which
               
                 D.
                 Par●us
              
               hath
               observed
               
               XLVIII
               .
               Arguments
               of
               Christs
               Divinity
               )
               as
               also
               in
               his
               
                 Gospel
                 ,
                 Iohn
              
               1.1
               .
               &c.
               and
               in
               his
               1.
               
               Epistle
               .
               And
               the
               
                 King
                 of
              
               Spaines
               Bible
               ,
               of
               Montanus
               Edition
               ,
               hath
               this
               Greek
               Title
               before
               the
               Revelation
               ,
               [
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               ]
               i.
               e.
               
                 The
                 Revelation
                 of
                 the
                 Holy
                 Apostle
                 ,
                 and
                 Evangelist
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Divine
                 ,
              
               which
               Title
               clears
               this
               matter
               ,
               and
               is
               consonant
               to
               Rev.
               1.1
               ,
               2.
               (
               whether
               it
               were
               prefixed
               by
               Iohn
               ,
               or
               after
               by
               the
               Church
               ,
               )
               nor
               is
               it
               any
               way
               probable
               that
               
                 Christ
                 sent
                 his
                 Angel
              
               to
               any
               other
               Iohn
               ,
               then
               to
               the
               Apostle
               with
               this
               Revelation
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Iohn
               the
               Penman
               of
               this
               Book
               is
               so
               descr●bed
               ,
               that
               
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Apostle
                 and
                 Evangelist
              
               seemes
               plainly
               to
               be
               indigitated
               ,
               Revel
               .
               1.1
               ,
               2.
               
               
                 His
                 servant
                 Iohn
                 :
                 Who
                 bare
                 record
                 of
                 the
                 word
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 Testimony
                 of
                 Iesus
                 Christ.
              
               Now
               how
               notably
               did
               Iohn
               beare
               record
               of
               the
               word
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               testimony
               of
               Iesus
               Christ
               ?
               see
               Iohn
               .
               1.1.2.14
               .
               and
               1
               Iohn
               1
               ,
               1.
               and
               5.9
               .
               compared
               with
               Revel
               .
               19.13
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               style
               much
               resembles
               that
               of
               
                 Iohns
                 Gospel
              
               and
               Epistles
               .
               As
               for
               instance
               ;
               It
               is
               peculiar
               to
               Iohn
               to
               stile
               Christ
               ,
               
                 The
                 
                 word
              
               .
               compare
               Iohn
               1.1.14
               .
               1
               Iohn
               1.1
               .
               and
               5.7
               .
               with
               Revel
               .
               1.2
               .
               In
               his
               Gospell
               he
               stiles
               Christ
               
                 the
                 Lamb
                 of
                 God
                 Iohn
              
               ,
               1.29.36
               .
               so
               in
               the
               Revelation
               Christ
               is
               called
               the
               Lamb
               at
               least
               28.
               times
               .
            
             
               4
               That
               Iohn
               who
               wrote
               this
               Revelation
               ,
               had
               it
               in
               the
               I
               le
               Patmos
               made
               known
               to
               him
               ,
               who
               was
               there
               
                 for
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 God
                 and
                 Testimony
                 of
                 Iesus
                 Christ
                 Rev.
              
               1.9
               .
               And
               Histories
               mention
               no
               other
               Iohn
               ,
               but
               only
               
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Apostle
              
               to
               be
               in
               Patmos
               .
               Banished
               thither
               by
               Domitian
               the
               Emperour
               for
               the
               Gospel's
               sake
               ,
               neer
               to
               period
               of
               his
               Reigne
               ,
               (
               as
               Funccius
               computes
               )
               about
               the
               ninety
               seventh
               year
               after
               Christ.
               See
               
                 Euseb.
                 Hist.
                 Eccles.
                 l.
              
               3.
               c.
               16.
               and
               18.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               To
               these
               might
               be
               added
               the
               Harmonious
               consent
               of
               ancient
               Fathers
               ,
               who
               unanimously
               conclude
               ,
               that
               
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Apostle
              
               penned
               this
               Book
               .
               
                 Dionys.
                 Areopag
              
               .
               who
               was
               Pauls
               disciple
               ,
               Act.
               17.
               who
               wrote
               about
               the
               sixtieth
               year
               after
               Christ
               ,
               in
               those
               writings
               ascribed
               to
               him
               ,
               calleth
               the
               
                 Apocalypse
                 ,
                 A
                 secret
                 and
                 mysticall
                 vision
                 of
                 the
                 beloved
                 Disciple
                 ,
              
               Dionys.
               Eccles.
               Hierarch
               .
               c.
               3.
               
               
               
                 Iustin
                 Martyr
              
               ,
               who
               wrote
               in
               the
               one
               hundred
               and
               fiftieth
               year
               after
               Christ
               ,
               ascribes
               the
               
                 Apocalypse
                 to
              
               Iohn
               ,
               
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 Apostles
                 of
                 Christ.
              
               Iustin.
               in
               Dial.
               ad
               Tryphon
               .
               To
               which
               passage
               Eusebius
               relating
               ,
               saith
               ,
               
                 Iustin
                 mentions
                 the
                 Apocalypse
                 of
              
               Iohn
               ,
               
                 plainly
                 saying
                 it
                 is
                 the
                 Apostles
                 ,
              
               Euseb.
               Hist.
               Eccles.
               l.
               4.
               c.
               18.
               
               Irenaeus
               ,
               who
               wrote
               in
               the
               eightieth
               year
               after
               Christ
               ,
               saith
               ,
               
                 And
                 what
                 things
                 soever
                 Iohn
                 the
                 disciple
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 saw
                 in
                 the
                 Apocylapse
              
               —
               Iraen
               .
               Advers
               .
               Haeres
               ▪
               l.
               4
               c.
               50.
               and
               l.
               4.
               c.
               37.
               p.
               373.
               A.
               Coloniae
               1596.
               
               To
               these
               might
               be
               added
               the
               suffrage
               of
               many
               more
               ,
               as
               of
               Greek
               Fathers
               ,
               
                 Clem.
                 Alexand.
                 Paedag.
                 l.
              
               2.
               c.
               12.
               
               
                 Athanas.
                 in
                 Synops.
                 Epiphan
                 .
                 Haeres
                 .
              
               51.54
               ,
               76.
               
               
                 Chrysost.
                 Hom.
              
               5.
               
                 in
                 Psal.
              
               91.
               of
               Latin
               fathers
               ,
               as
               
                 Tertull.
                 contra
                 Marcion
                 l.
              
               4.
               
               
                 Cyprian
                 .
                 de
                 e●hort
                 .
                 Martyr
                 .
                 c.
              
               8.10.11.12
               .
               
                 Ambros.
                 in
                 Psal
              
               50
               
                 &
                 l.
              
               3.
               
                 de
                 spir
                 .
                 sanct
                 .
                 c.
              
               21.
               
               
                 August
                 .
                 de
                 Civi●
                 .
                 dei
                 l.
              
               20.
               c.
               7.
               
                 &
                 de
                 Haeres
                 .
                 c.
              
               30.
               
                 &
                 de
                 Doct.
                 Christ.
                 l.
              
               2.
               c.
               18.
               
                 videantur
                 Annot.
                 in
                 Irenae
                 .
                 l.
              
               5.
               c.
               30.
               p.
               490.
               
               Colon.
               1596.
               but
               in
               so
               plaine
               a
               case
               these
               may
               suffice
               .
            
             
               So
               that
               by
               all
               this
               ,
               it
               s
               plainly
               evident
               
               that
               the
               Penman
               of
               the
               Revelation
               was
               
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Apostle
              
               ,
               that
               wrote
               the
               Gospel
               ,
               and
               the
               Epistles
               .
               The
               unfolding
               of
               his
               name
               ,
               and
               who
               he
               was
               more
               particularly
               ,
               See
               in
               Annot.
               to
               
                 Iohn's
                 Gospel
              
               .
            
             
               
                 Authority
                 of
                 this
                 Book
              
               ,
               is
               not
               Humane
               ,
               but
               Divine
               .
               For
               ,
            
             
               1.
               
               This
               book
               was
               indited
               by
               
                 Iesus
                 Christ
                 himselfe
                 the
                 faithfull
                 and
                 true
                 witnesse
                 ,
              
               who
               sent
               his
               Angel
               to
               testifie
               the
               same
               to
               Iohn
               the
               Apostle
               ,
               and
               by
               him
               to
               the
               Churches
               .
               
                 The
                 Revelation
                 of
                 Iesus
                 Christ
                 which
                 God
                 gave
                 unto
                 him
                 ,
                 to
                 shew
                 unto
                 his
                 servants
                 things
                 which
                 must
                 shortly
                 come
                 to
                 passe
                 ;
                 and
                 he
                 sent
                 and
                 signified
                 it
                 by
                 his
                 Angel
                 unto
                 his
                 servant
              
               Iohn
               —
               Rev.
               1.1
               .
               and
               towards
               the
               close
               of
               the
               book
               he
               saith
               ,
               
                 I
                 Iesus
                 have
                 sent
                 mine
                 Angel
                 to
                 testify
                 unto
                 you
                 these
                 things
              
               in
               the
               Churches
               ,
               Rev.
               22.16
               .
               Note
               ,
               this
               Revelation
               was
               given
               by
               Iohn
               the
               Apostle
               to
               the
               Churches
               ,
               by
               an
               Angel
               to
               Iohn
               ,
               by
               Iesus
               Christ
               to
               that
               Angel
               ,
               by
               God
               to
               Iesus
               Christ
               :
               How
               punctually
               then
               is
               the
               
                 Divine
                 Authority
              
               of
               it
               asserted
               ?
            
             
               2.
               
               It
               was
               penned
               by
               
                 Iohn
                 the
                 Apostle
                 of
                 Christ
              
               (
               who
               was
               divinly
               inspired
               &
               acted
               by
               the
               Holy
               Ghost
               )
               as
               hath
               bin
               formerly
               
               manifested
               ,
               and
               therefore
               it
               is
               of
               divine
               Authority
               ,
               especially
               considering
               that
               this
               blessed
               Apostle
               was
               commanded
               by
               Iesus
               Christ
               to
               write
               this
               Book
               ,
               
                 Saying
                 I
                 am
              
               Alpha
               and
               Omega
               ,
               
                 the
                 first
                 and
                 the
                 last
                 :
                 and
                 wh●●
                 thou
                 seest
                 write
                 in
                 a
                 Book
                 ,
                 —
                 write
                 the
                 things
                 which
                 thou
                 hast
                 s●en
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 things
                 which
                 are
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 thing●
                 which
                 shall
                 b●
                 hereafter
                 ,
              
               Rev.
               1.11
               19.
               
               See
               also
               Rev.
               2.1.8.12.18
               .
               and
               3.1
               ,
               7
               ,
               14.
               and
               14.13
               .
               and
               19.9
               .
               and
               21.5
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               nature
               of
               the
               book
               imports
               the
               divine
               Authority
               of
               it
               .
               For
               1.
               
               It
               is
               eminently
               Propheticall
               ,
               speaking
               of
               things
               that
               shall
               be
               hereafter
               ,
               Rev.
               1.1
               ,
               19.
               and
               22.7
               ,
               10
               ,
               18
               ,
               19.
               and
               the
               prophecies
               of
               this
               book
               ,
               are
               touching
               future
               events
               in
               reference
               to
               the
               Church
               to
               the
               end
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               till
               the
               Church
               ,
               
                 the
                 Lambs
                 wife
              
               ,
               shall
               be
               fully
               ready
               for
               compleat
               marriage
               with
               the
               Lamb
               ,
               Rev.
               19.7
               ,
               8
               ,
               9.
               
               So
               that
               neither
               ancient
               writers
               nor
               any
               other
               ,
               but
               such
               as
               were
               inspired
               with
               a
               spirit
               of
               prophecy
               from
               the
               al-knowing
               God
               ,
               could
               foretell
               these
               things
               to
               come
               ,
               Isa●
               .
               41.22
               .
               2.
               
               In
               the
               propheticall
               expressions
               of
               it
               ,
               
               it
               is
               consonant
               to
               other
               propheticall
               books
               ,
               and
               gives
               light
               to
               them
               ,
               
                 Daniel
                 ,
                 Zechariah
              
               ,
               especially
               Ezekiel
               ,
               As
               in
               the
               particulars
               of
               
                 eating
                 up
                 the
                 Book
              
               ,
               Rev.
               10.9
               ,
               10.
               with
               Ezek.
               2.8
               .
               and
               3.3
               .
               of
               
                 sealing
                 Gods
                 promise
              
               ,
               Rev.
               7.2
               ,
               3.
               with
               Ezek.
               9.
               of
               the
               
                 foure
                 living
                 Creatures
              
               ,
               Rev.
               4.6
               ,
               7.
               with
               Ezek.
               1.5.6
               .
               of
               Gog
               and
               Magog
               ,
               Rev.
               20.8
               .
               with
               Ezek
               .
               38.2
               .
               and
               39.1
               .
               of
               the
               
                 measuring
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 and
                 City
                 ,
              
               Rev.
               21.15
               .
               with
               Ezek.
               40.3
               .
               &c.
               
                 Of
                 the
                 two
                 olive
                 trees
              
               ,
               &c.
               Rev.
               11.4
               .
               with
               Zech.
               4.3
               ,
               11
               ,
               14.
               &c.
               3.
               
               Many
               things
               foretold
               in
               this
               Book
               prophetically
               ,
               are
               fulfilled
               and
               come
               to
               passe
               actually
               ,
               As
               Interpreters
               have
               observed
               in
               many
               particulars
               .
               Therefore
               this
               Book
               is
               of
               divine
               Authority
               ,
               Ierem.
               28.9.4
               .
               Promise
               of
               explaining
               how
               long
               the
               Idolatrous
               and
               Tyrannicall
               Kingdome
               of
               Anti-Christ
               should
               last
               ,
               was
               made
               to
               Daniel
               the
               Prophet
               ,
               Dan.
               12.4
               ,
               9.
               which
               some
               conceive
               to
               be
               fulfilled
               in
               these
               
                 Apocalypticall
                 visions
              
               ,
               Rev.
               c.
               11.
               and
               12.
               and
               13.
               and
               17.
               &c.
               
               And
               had
               not
               Christ
               under
               the
               New
               Testament
               left
               his
               Church
               some
               propheticall
               Record
               ,
               
               for
               her
               comfort
               against
               the
               horrid
               cruelty
               ,
               idolatry
               and
               darknesse
               of
               the
               Anti-christian
               Dominion
               ,
               showing
               when
               it
               should
               have
               an
               end
               ,
               and
               how
               happy
               at
               last
               the
               Church
               should
               be
               ,
               all
               her
               enemies
               being
               universally
               made
               the
               footstool
               of
               the
               Lambe
               ;
               she
               were
               in
               a
               worse
               condition
               then
               under
               the
               Old
               Testament
               ;
               which
               were
               absurd
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               As
               the
               Holy
               Ghost
               by
               Moses
               ,
               the
               
                 first
                 Penman
              
               of
               the
               Canon
               of
               the
               
                 Old
                 Testament
              
               warned
               the
               Jewes
               against
               adding
               to
               or
               diminishing
               from
               the
               word
               of
               God
               ,
               
                 yee
                 shall
                 not
                 adde
                 unto
                 the
                 word
                 which
                 I
                 command
                 you
                 ,
                 neither
                 shall
                 you
                 diminish
                 from
                 it
                 ,
              
               Deut.
               9.2
               .
               and
               12.32
               .
               So
               by
               the
               Apostle
               Iohn
               the
               
                 last
                 Penman
                 of
                 the
                 Canon
                 of
                 the
                 New
                 Testament
                 ,
              
               Iesus
               Christ
               warneth
               all
               persons
               that
               heare
               the
               words
               of
               this
               Prophecy
               ;
               
                 If
                 any
                 man
                 shall
                 adde
                 unto
                 these
                 things
                 ,
                 God
                 shall
                 adde
                 unto
                 him
                 the
                 plagues
                 that
                 are
                 written
                 in
                 this
                 Book
                 :
                 And
                 if
                 any
                 man
                 shall
                 take
                 away
                 from
                 the
                 words
                 of
                 the
                 Book
                 of
                 this
                 Prophecy
                 ,
                 God
                 shall
                 take
                 away
                 his
                 part
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Book
                 of
                 Life
                 ,
                 and
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Holy
                 City
                 ,
                 and
                 from
                 the
                 things
                 which
                 are
                 written
                 in
                 this
                 Book
                 ,
              
               Rev.
               22.18
               ,
               
               19.
               
               By
               which
               severe
               Commination
               ,
               the
               integrity
               and
               divine
               Authority
               of
               this
               Book
               is
               asserted
               by
               Christ
               ,
               against
               all
               whom
               Christ
               foresaw
               ,
               would
               either
               indeavour
               to
               infringe
               the
               Authority
               of
               it
               ,
               or
               corrupt
               the
               purity
               of
               it
               .
               Hereby
               then
               the
               whole
               divine
               Canon
               is
               sealed
               up
               ,
               as
               fully
               now
               compleat
               ,
               and
               divinely
               Authenticall
               ,
               after
               which
               we
               are
               to
               expect
               no
               more
               Scripture
               from
               God.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               The
               generall
               current
               of
               best
               Antiquity
               ,
               except
               some
               few
               particular
               persons
               ,
               and
               divers
               of
               them
               guilty
               of
               such
               heresies
               as
               this
               Book
               condemnes
               ,
               hath
               embraced
               this
               Book
               ,
               and
               accounted
               it
               of
               divine
               Authority
               .
               As
               those
               formerly
               cited
               ,
               to
               prove
               Iohn
               the
               Apostle
               to
               be
               Penman
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               many
               more
               that
               might
               be
               enumerated
               .
               As
               that
               ancient
               
                 Ancyran
                 Councel
              
               ,
               held
               before
               the
               
                 Nicene
                 .
                 in
                 Append.
              
               as
               also
               the
               
                 third
                 Councell
                 of
              
               Carthage
               ,
               Can.
               47.
               
               Cyprian
               frequently
               alledges
               the
               Revelation
               among
               the
               other
               Canonicall
               bookes
               ,
               as
               
                 De
                 exhort
                 .
                 martyrum
              
               ,
               c.
               8.
               c.
               11.
               c.
               12.
               
               
                 Testimon
                 .
                 Advers
                 .
                 Iudaeos
                 l.
              
               2.
               c.
               1.
               
               Sect.
               3.6
               ,
               11.
               &c.
               
            
             
               6.
               
               The
               
                 Cavils
                 and
                 Objections
              
               ,
               against
               
               the
               divine
               Authority
               of
               this
               Book
               ,
               reckoned
               up
               by
               Erasmus
               or
               others
               ,
               how
               weak
               and
               unsatisfactory
               they
               are
               ,
               may
               appeare
               in
               severall
               writers
               ,
               who
               have
               confuted
               them
               .
               Especially
               
                 vid.
                 Bez.
                 Prolegom
                 .
                 in
                 Apocylaps
                 .
                 Ioannis
                 .
              
               and
               
                 Gerh.
                 loc
                 .
                 Com.
                 De
                 scrip
                 .
                 sac
                 .
                 in
                 exeges
                 .
                 cap.
              
               10.
               
               Sect.
               294.
               
                 ad
                 sin
                 .
                 cap.
              
               
            
             
               
                 Excellency
                 of
                 this
                 Book
              
               is
               most
               considerable
               For
               ,
            
             
               1.
               
               
                 The
                 conveyance
                 of
                 it
                 at
                 first
                 to
                 the
                 Church
                 is
                 singular
                 .
              
               From
               God
               to
               Iesus
               Christ
               ;
               From
               Iesus
               Christ
               to
               an
               Angel
               ;
               From
               the
               Angel
               to
               Iohn
               ,
               whom
               Jesus
               peculiarly
               loved
               above
               all
               his
               Apostles
               and
               Disciples
               ,
               Rev.
               1.1
               .
               And
               this
               to
               Iohn
               when
               in
               exile
               for
               Christ
               in
               the
               Isle
               Patmos
               ;
               and
               that
               not
               on
               a
               common
               day
               ▪
               
                 but
                 on
                 the
                 Lords
                 day
                 ,
                 the
                 Queen
                 of
                 dayes
              
               ;
               and
               ●o
               Iohn
               in
               Patmos
               ,
               on
               the
               
                 Lords
                 day
              
               ,
               not
               in
               an
               ordinary
               but
               extraordinary
               composure
               and
               elevation
               of
               his
               soule
               ,
               when
               
                 he
                 was
                 in
                 the
                 spirit
              
               ,
               caught
               up
               (
               as
               it
               were
               )
               and
               transported
               in
               an
               holy
               extasie
               and
               spirituall
               Rapture
               ,
               that
               he
               might
               the
               more
               attend
               to
               these
               mysteries
               revealed
               ,
               and
               have
               more
               immediate
               un-interrupted
               Communion
               
               with
               Jesus
               Christ
               the
               Revealer
               ,
               Rev.
               1
               ,
               9
               ,
               10.
               &c.
               what
               can
               all
               this
               import
               ,
               
                 but
                 some
                 singularly
                 eminent
                 treasure
                 for
                 the
                 Church
                 in
                 this
                 book
                 ,
                 whereby
                 the
                 Church
                 in
                 her
                 deepest
                 tribulation
                 ,
                 may
                 be
              
               (
               with
               Iohn
               )
               
                 spiritually
                 intransed
                 and
                 ravished
                 with
                 many
                 surpassing
                 grounds
                 of
                 joy
                 ,
                 and
                 consolation
                 ?
              
            
             
               2.
               
               
                 The
                 stile
                 is
                 stately
                 and
                 sublime
                 ,
              
               and
               may
               wonderfully
               take
               the
               highest
               notion
               ;
               The
               expressions
               quick
               ,
               piercing
               and
               patheticall
               ,
               and
               may
               pleasingly
               penetrate
               the
               dullest
               affection
               .
               The
               whole
               contexture
               is
               so
               full
               of
               divine
               majesty
               ,
               that
               it
               commands
               an
               awfull
               Reverence
               in
               all
               gracious
               hearts
               that
               read
               it
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               
                 The
                 matter
                 of
                 it
                 is
                 most
                 heavenly
                 and
                 spirituall
                 ,
              
               and
               that
               in
               exceeding
               great
               variety
               ,
               notably
               describing
               the
               Divinity
               of
               Christ
               ,
               His
               offices
               and
               the
               benefits
               of
               them
               ,
               clearly
               pointing
               out
               
                 Anti-Christs
                 Seate
                 ,
                 Tyranny
                 ,
                 Rise
                 ,
                 Growth
                 ,
                 Power
                 ,
                 Acts
                 and
                 Fall
                 ,
              
               and
               most
               lively
               delineating
               the
               Churches
               condition
               ,
               what
               it
               was
               in
               the
               Primitive
               times
               after
               Christ
               ,
               and
               what
               it
               should
               be
               afterwards
               till
               the
               worlds
               end
               ;
               how
               sad
               ,
               
               yet
               s●fe
               under
               Anti-christs
               dominion
               ;
               how
               sweet
               and
               happy
               after
               Anti-Christs
               destruction
               ;
               how
               comfortable
               at
               the
               day
               of
               judgement
               ;
               and
               how
               glorious
               in
               heaven
               with
               Iesus
               Christ
               for
               evermore
               .
               What
               Saint
               would
               not
               thirst
               much
               to
               read
               and
               here
               ,
               more
               to
               understand
               ,
               but
               most
               of
               all
               to
               enjoy
               these
               things
               ?
               Some
               of
               them
               are
               laid
               downe
               most
               mystically
               in
               abstruse
               visions
               ,
               to
               exercise
               the
               judgements
               of
               the
               wisest
               ;
               some
               more
               familiarly
               to
               succour
               the
               infirmity
               even
               of
               the
               weakest
               .
               
                 In
                 some
                 places
                 the
                 Lamb
                 may
                 wade
                 ,
                 in
                 others
                 the
                 Elephant
                 may
                 swim
                 .
              
               Those
               prevent
               contempt
               ,
               these
               anticipate
               discouragement
               .
               
                 Ioao●imus
                 Abbas
              
               prefers
               this
               Prophecy
               ,
               before
               the
               Prophecy
               of
               all
               other
               Prophets
               .
               Beza
               saith
               ,
               
                 That
                 those
                 things
                 in
                 other
                 Prophets
                 ,
                 which
                 were
                 not
                 fulfilled
                 after
                 Christs
                 coming
                 ,
                 the
                 holy
                 spirit
                 hath
                 heaped
                 them
                 all
                 together
                 in
                 this
                 precious
                 book
                 ,
                 and
                 also
                 added
                 others
                 so
                 farre
                 as
                 was
                 needfull
                 or
                 usefull
                 for
                 the
                 Church
                 to
                 know
                 them
                 ,
              
               Bez.
               Prolegom
               .
               in
               Apoc.
               Oecolampadius
               cals
               this
               book
               ,
               
                 The
                 best
                 Paraphrast
                 of
                 all
                 the
                 Prophets
                 .
              
               Ioh.
               Oecolamp
               .
               Praefat.
               in
               Dani●l
               .
               Hierome
               
               saith
               ,
               
                 Apocalypsis
                 tot
                 habet
                 sacramenta
                 quot
                 verba
                 .
                 Parum
                 dixi
                 ,
                 pro
                 merito
                 voluminis
                 ,
                 laus
                 omnis
                 inferior
                 est
                 ;
                 in
                 verbis
                 singulis
                 multiplices
                 latent
                 intelligentiae
                 ,
              
               i.
               e.
               
                 The
                 Revelation
                 hath
                 as
                 many
                 mysteries
                 as
                 words
                 .
                 It
                 s
                 but
                 a
                 little
                 I
                 say
                 ,
                 all
                 praise
                 is
                 too
                 low
                 for
                 the
                 merit
                 of
                 this
                 volume
                 ;
                 manifold
                 understandings
                 lie
                 hid
                 in
                 every
                 word
                 .
              
               Hieron
               .
               in
               Epist.
               ad
               Paulin.
               
            
             
               4.
               
               
                 The
                 Book
                 it selfe
                 is
                 compleat
              
               ,
               capable
               of
               no
               Addition
               or
               Detraction
               ,
               but
               upon
               severest
               Penalties
               ,
               Rev.
               22.18.19
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               
                 The
                 Penman
                 Eminent
                 ,
                 viz.
              
               John
               that
               beloved
               disciple
               ,
               that
               sweet
               compound
               of
               love
               .
               It
               was
               Moses
               his
               honour
               who
               was
               Gods
               peculiar
               favourite
               ,
               to
               be
               
                 Penman
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 Book
              
               of
               the
               
                 Old
                 Testament
              
               .
               And
               it
               was
               Iohn's
               honour
               who
               was
               Christs
               peculiar
               favourite
               ,
               to
               be
               
                 Penman
                 of
                 the
                 last
                 Book
              
               of
               the
               
                 New
                 Testament
              
               ;
               oh
               what
               divine
               love
               and
               favour
               is
               made
               known
               unto
               the
               Church
               ,
               in
               all
               the
               volumes
               between
               the
               Armes
               of
               these
               
                 two
                 favourites
              
               !
            
             
               6.
               
               Finally
               ,
               God
               counts
               them
               blessed
               soules
               ,
               that
               read
               ,
               heare
               and
               keepe
               the
               words
               of
               this
               Prophecy
               .
               
                 Blessed
                 is
                 
                 he
                 that
                 readeth
                 ,
                 and
                 they
                 that
                 heare
                 the
                 words
                 of
                 this
                 Prophecy
                 ,
                 and
                 keep
                 these
                 things
                 that
                 are
                 written
                 therein
                 ,
              
               Rev.
               1.3
               .
               A
               blessed
               Book
               ,
               that
               renders
               them
               blessed
               ,
               who
               are
               practically
               versed
               in
               it
               .
            
             
               
                 The
                 time
                 when
              
               this
               Revelation
               was
               written
               ,
               was
               when
               Iohn
               was
               banished
               into
               the
               
                 I
                 le
                 that
                 is
                 called
              
               Patmos
               ,
               
                 for
                 the
                 word
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 for
                 the
                 Testimony
                 of
                 Iesus
                 Christ
                 ,
              
               Rev.
               1.9.10
               .
               Iohn
               was
               banished
               into
               Patmos
               ,
               by
               that
               cruell
               persecutor
               Domitian
               ,
               in
               the
               fourteenth
               yeare
               of
               his
               Reigne
               ,
               saith
               
                 Hieron
                 .
                 Catal
                 .
                 illustr
                 .
                 vir
                 .
                 in
                 vit
                 .
                 Ioan.
                 Domitian
              
               reigned
               in
               all
               but
               fifteen
               years
               ,
               as
               Helvic
               .
               observes
               ,
               and
               his
               fourteenth
               yeare
               was
               in
               the
               ninety
               fourth
               yeare
               after
               Christ
               ,
               
                 Helvic
                 .
                 in
                 Chronol
              
               ▪
               in
               the
               ninety
               sixth
               after
               Christ
               ,
               saith
               
                 Pareus
                 Prolegom
                 .
                 in
                 Apocal.
                 c.
              
               5.
               
               This
               Book
               is
               conceived
               to
               be
               written
               after
               all
               the
               Books
               of
               the
               New
               Testament
               .
            
             
               Occasion
               of
               this
               Revelation
               seemes
               to
               be
               this
               .
               Iohn
               being
               banished
               into
               the
               I
               le
               Patmos
               ,
               Rev.
               1.9
               ,
               10.
               doubtless
               gave
               himselfe
               to
               prayer
               ,
               and
               sacred
               meditations
               about
               the
               affairs
               of
               Christ
               
               and
               his
               Church
               ,
               whereupon
               Iesus
               Christ
               appeared
               to
               his
               beloved
               disciple
               ,
               in
               a
               spirituall
               ravishment
               ,
               showing
               him
               what
               was
               his
               pleasure
               ,
               both
               touching
               the
               present
               Churches
               of
               Asia
               ,
               and
               touching
               his
               whole
               Church
               to
               the
               end
               of
               the
               world
               ;
               thus
               comforting
               him
               :
               and
               commanding
               Iohn
               to
               write
               his
               visions
               ,
               for
               the
               comforting
               of
               them
               .
            
             
               Scope
               of
               this
               book
               is
               ,
            
             
               Generally
               ,
               
                 To
                 make
                 knowne
                 by
              
               Iohn
               
                 unto
                 the
                 Churches
                 both
                 the
                 things
                 that
                 then
                 were
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 should
                 be
                 thereafter
                 ,
              
               Rev.
               1.19
               .
            
             
               Particularly
               .
               1
               
                 To
                 informe
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 the
                 many
                 sharp
                 conflicts
                 she
                 should
                 have
                 with
                 Satan
                 and
                 his
                 instruments
                 ,
                 especially
                 Hereticks
                 ,
                 persecuting
                 Tyrants
                 ,
                 and
                 Anti-Christ
                 himselfe
                 ,
                 that
                 so
                 she
                 might
                 not
                 dream
                 only
                 of
                 Halcyon
                 dayes
                 ,
                 but
                 might
                 prepare
                 more
                 and
                 more
                 for
                 the
                 worst
                 of
                 stormes
              
               ▪
               2
               
                 To
                 discover
                 and
                 point
                 out
                 in
                 lively
                 Colours
                 that
                 grand
                 Anti-christ
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Church
                 might
                 run
                 and
                 read
                 ,
                 and
                 most
                 infallibly
                 know
                 who
                 he
                 is
                 .
              
               3
               
                 As
                 also
                 to
                 support
                 and
                 comfort
                 the
                 Church
                 and
                 all
                 the
                 faithfull
                 ,
                 over
                 all
                 
                 their
                 tribulations
                 ,
                 with
                 the
                 hopes
                 of
                 the
                 utter
                 overthrow
                 of
                 Anti-christ
                 and
                 all
                 their
                 enemies
                 ;
                 of
                 their
                 owne
                 joyfull
                 triumphs
                 over
                 them
                 ;
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 happy
                 condition
                 which
                 the
                 Church
                 shall
                 afterwards
                 enjoy
                 ,
                 partly
                 in
                 this
                 world
                 ,
                 but
                 chiefly
                 in
                 the
                 world
                 to
                 come
                 .
              
            
             
               Though
               this
               book
               be
               most
               obscure
               and
               intricate
               ,
               yet
               these
               things
               may
               somewhat
               facilitate
               the
               understanding
               of
               i●
               ,
               If
               we
               shall
               ,
            
             
               1.
               
               Keep
               the
               maine
               scope
               of
               the
               Book
               ,
               still
               in
               our
               eye
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Compare
               the
               passages
               and
               phrases
               of
               the
               Revelation
               ,
               with
               those
               of
               other
               Prophecies
               ,
               as
               Rev.
               11.4
               .
               with
               Zech.
               4.3
               ,
               11
               ,
               14.
               
               Rev.
               10.9
               ,
               10.
               with
               Ezek.
               2.8
               .
               and
               3.3
               .
               —
               Rev.
               4.6
               ,
               7
               ,
               8.
               with
               Ezek.
               1.5
               ,
               6
               ,
               7
               ,
               8.
               —
               Rev.
               20.8
               .
               with
               Ezek.
               18.2
               .
               and
               39.1
               .
               —
               Rev.
               21.15
               .
               with
               Ezek.
               40.3
               .
               &c.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               Parallel
               with
               this
               Prophecy
               ,
               the
               subsequent
               Histories
               after
               Iohn's
               time
               ,
               the
               Histories
               of
               the
               Roman
               Empire
               and
               Church
               ,
               which
               testify
               clearly
               what
               cruelty
               and
               persecutions
               the
               Romane
               Emperours
               successively
               raised
               up
               against
               
               Christians
               :
               with
               what
               subtilty
               and
               fraud
               the
               
                 B.
                 of
              
               Rome
               did
               by
               degrees
               ,
               (
               through
               the
               folly
               ,
               cowardise
               ,
               negligence
               ,
               &c.
               of
               the
               Emperours
               ,
               )
               step
               up
               into
               their
               throne
               ,
               and
               subjugate
               not
               onely
               Rome
               ,
               the
               Seate
               of
               the
               Empire
               ,
               but
               also
               the
               whole
               Empire
               it selfe
               to
               his
               dominion
               and
               pleasure
               ,
               whence
               we
               may
               derive
               not
               a
               little
               light
               ,
               to
               see
               what
               is
               meant
               by
               
                 the
                 opening
                 of
                 the
                 Seals
                 .
                 The
                 Stars
                 falling
                 from
                 heaven
                 to
                 earth
                 .
                 The
                 beast
                 speaking
                 great
                 and
                 blasphemous
                 things
                 .
                 The
                 beast
                 and
                 false
                 Prophet
                 .
                 The
                 image
                 of
                 the
                 beast
                 .
                 And
                 the
                 whore
                 riding
                 upon
                 the
                 beast
                 with
                 seven
                 heads
                 and
                 ten
                 hornes
                 ,
                 and
                 ruling
                 in
                 the
                 city
                 on
                 the
                 seven
                 hils
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               4.
               
               Consider
               prudently
               the
               experience
               of
               later
               and
               present
               times
               ;
               how
               accurately
               doth
               the
               description
               of
               the
               
                 Beast
                 and
                 scarlet
                 whore
              
               agree
               ,
               to
               the
               Papacy
               ?
               of
               the
               Locusts
               ,
               to
               the
               
                 Romane
                 Clergy
              
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               
                 Frogs
                 comming
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 mouth
                 of
                 the
                 Dragon
                 ,
                 the
                 beast
                 and
                 the
                 false
                 Prophet
                 ,
              
               to
               the
               Iesuites
               and
               
                 Romane
                 Emissaries
              
               ,
               compassing
               sea
               and
               land
               ,
               and
               creeping
               into
               Kings
               palaces
               ,
               to
               gather
               them
               together
               ,
               to
               the
               warre
               of
               the
               great
               day
               of
               God
               almighty
               .
            
             
             
               5.
               
               Finally
               ,
               if
               we
               shall
               diligently
               read
               ,
               meditate
               and
               pray
               ,
               that
               the
               holy
               spirit
               ,
               who
               revealed
               these
               things
               to
               Iohn
               ,
               would
               reveale
               their
               sense
               and
               meaning
               to
               us
               ,
               
                 These
                 things
                 may
                 help
                 us
                 to
                 untie
                 many
                 knots
                 ,
                 and
                 render
                 many
                 difficulties
                 easie
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Principall
                 parts
              
               .
               In
               the
               Book
               of
               Revelation
               are
               chiefly
               considerable
               ,
               1
               The
               Preface
               ,
               2
               The
               Substance
               of
               the
               Book
               ,
               and
               3
               The
               Conclusion
               .
            
             
               
                 The
                 Preface
              
               ,
               which
               is
               
                 ●
                 .
                 Generall
              
               ,
               in
               
               reference
               to
               the
               whole
               Prophecy
               ,
               noting
               the
               
                 Matter
                 ,
                 Author
                 ,
                 Penman
                 ,
                 and
                 Profit
                 of
                 this
                 Book
                 ,
                 c.
              
               1.
               ver
               .
               1
               ,
               2
               ,
               3.
               2.
               
               Speciall
               or
               particular
               ,
               in
               reference
               to
               the
               
                 seven
                 Churches
                 of
                 Asia
                 Minor
              
               ,
               and
               in
               them
               to
               the
               whole
               Catholick
               Church
               ,
               figured
               by
               them
               ,
               wherein
               are
               ,
               1.
               
               
                 A
                 Nomination
              
               of
               persons
               writing
               and
               written
               to
               .
               2.
               
               
                 The
                 Salutation
              
               .
               3.
               
               
                 And
                 a
                 glorious
                 Description
              
               of
               Jesus
               Christ
               ,
               ver
               .
               4.
               to
               9.
               
            
             
               
                 The
                 Substance
                 or
                 Body
                 of
                 this
                 Propheticall
                 
                 Book
                 .
                 c.
              
               1.
               v.
               9.
               
                 to
                 c.
              
               22.
               v.
               6.
               
               Wherein
               is
               contained
               a
               Narration
               of
               the
               State
               of
               the
               Church
               .
               I.
               
                 Militant
                 on
                 earth
              
               .
               c.
               1.
               v.
               9.
               to
               c.
               20.
               v.
               11.
               
               II.
               
                 Triumphant
                 in
                 heaven
              
               ,
               c.
               20.
               v.
               11.
               to
               c.
               22.
               v.
               6.
               
            
             
               
                 The
                 Condition
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 Militant
                 is
                 declared
              
               1.
               
               
                 For
                 present
              
               ,
               what
               it
               was
               when
               
               Iohn
               wrote
               the
               Revelation
               ,
               c.
               1.
               v.
               9.
               to
               c.
               4.
               v.
               1.
               2.
               
               
                 For
                 future
              
               ,
               what
               it
               should
               be
               till
               the
               judgement
               day
               .
               c.
               4.
               v.
               1.
               
                 to
                 c.
              
               20.
               v.
               11.
               
            
             
               
                 I.
                 Uision
                 .
              
               
                 I.
                 
                   Touching
                   the
                   State
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   then
                   present
                   .
                   viz.
                
                 The
                 Asian
                 Churches
                 principally
                 ;
                 are
                 laid
                 downe
                 two
                 things
                 ,
                 viz.
                 
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     
                       A
                       Preparation
                    
                     to
                     the
                     discovery
                     of
                     it
                     ,
                     by
                     
                       A
                       Vision
                       of
                       seven
                       Golden
                       Candlesticks
                       and
                       seven
                       Starres
                       .
                    
                     This
                     is
                     
                       Iohn's
                       first
                       vision
                    
                     .
                     And
                     here
                     we
                     have
                     a
                     description
                     ,
                     both
                     of
                     Iohn
                     who
                     had
                     the
                     vision
                     :
                     as
                     also
                     of
                     the
                     vision
                     it selfe
                     ;
                     both
                     in
                     respect
                     of
                     the
                     1
                     Forme
                     of
                     it
                     .
                     The
                     2
                     Effect
                     it
                     had
                     upon
                     Iohn
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     3
                     Consequents
                     ensuing
                     thereupon
                     .
                     viz.
                     The
                     Comforting
                     of
                     John
                     ,
                     Command
                     to
                     write
                     the
                     vision
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     Interpretation
                     of
                     the
                     vision
                     ,
                     c.
                     1.
                     v.
                     9.
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                       of
                       the
                       chapter
                       .
                    
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     A
                     Narration
                     or
                     Description
                     of
                     the
                     Condition
                     of
                     Christs
                     Church
                     then
                     present
                     ,
                     and
                     this
                     in
                     Seven
                     distinct
                     Epistles
                     ,
                     directed
                     to
                     the
                     seven
                     Angels
                     of
                     those
                     seven
                     Asian
                     Churches
                     .
                     viz.
                     1.
                     
                     
                       Of
                       Ephesus
                    
                     ,
                     c.
                     2.
                     v.
                     1.
                     to
                     8.
                     2.
                     
                     Of
                     Smyrna
                     ,
                     c.
                     2.
                     v.
                     8.
                     to
                     12.
                     3.
                     
                     Of
                     Pergamus
                     ,
                     c.
                     2.
                     v.
                     12.
                     to
                     18.
                     4.
                     
                     Of
                     Thyatira
                     ,
                     c.
                     2.
                     v.
                     18.
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                       of
                       the
                       chapter
                       .
                    
                     5.
                     
                     Of
                     
                       Sardis
                       ,
                       c.
                    
                     3
                     ,
                     1.
                     to
                     7.
                     6.
                     
                     Of
                     Philadelphia
                     ,
                     c.
                     3.
                     v.
                     7.
                     to
                     14.
                     7.
                     
                     Of
                     Laodicea
                     ,
                     c.
                     3.
                     v.
                     14.
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                       of
                       the
                       chapter
                    
                     ▪
                     In
                     all
                     which
                     Seven
                     Epistles
                     ▪
                     the
                     same
                     method
                     
                     is
                     generally
                     observed
                     by
                     the
                     spirit
                     of
                     Christ
                     ,
                     viz.
                     Every
                     Epistle
                     ,
                     containing
                     1.
                     
                     
                       A
                       Description
                    
                     of
                     Jesus
                     Christ
                     ,
                     suitable
                     to
                     the
                     vision
                     of
                     him
                     ,
                     in
                     c.
                     1.
                     formerly
                     .
                     2.
                     
                     
                       A
                       Narratio●
                    
                     of
                     the
                     Good
                     commendable
                     ;
                     or
                     Evill
                     condemnable
                     in
                     the
                     Angel
                     of
                     every
                     Church
                     ,
                     and
                     so
                     in
                     every
                     Church
                     .
                     3.
                     
                     
                       Promises
                       or
                       Threats
                    
                     ,
                     proportionable
                     to
                     their
                     vertues
                     or
                     vices
                     ,
                     4.
                     
                     
                       Hortatory
                       Conclusions
                    
                     ,
                     inciting
                     to
                     attention
                     ,
                  
                
              
               
                 II.
                 
                   Touching
                   the
                   state
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   for
                   the
                   future
                   ,
                
                 especially
                 the
                 
                   European
                   Churches
                
                 ,
                 This
                 is
                 insisted
                 upon
                 more
                 largely
                 and
                 more
                 mystically
                 .
                 Which
                 in
                 sum
                 amounts
                 to
                 thus
                 much
                 ,
                 viz.
                 To
                 Pre-monish
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 her
                 great
                 tribulations
                 in
                 this
                 world
                 ,
                 1
                 By
                 persecuting
                 Tyrants
                 ,
                 2
                 Then
                 by
                 persecuting
                 Hereticks
                 ,
                 3
                 At
                 length
                 by
                 Anti-Christs
                 most
                 cruell
                 Oppressions
                 both
                 corporall
                 and
                 spirituall
                 .
                 Against
                 all
                 which
                 the
                 holy-Ghos●
                 intermingles
                 many
                 comforts
                 to
                 the
                 Church
                 ,
                 as
                 that
                 1
                 God
                 will
                 be
                 with
                 her
                 in
                 all
                 her
                 distresses
                 and
                 not
                 forsake
                 her
                 .
                 2
                 Her
                 troubles
                 shall
                 not
                 be
                 endlesse
                 ,
                 nor
                 over-long
                 .
                 3.
                 
                 Her
                 enemies
                 shall
                 all
                 of
                 them
                 at
                 last
                 be
                 utterly
                 destroyed
                 .
                 4.
                 
                 The
                 Church
                 shall
                 at
                 last
                 be
                 set
                 in
                 a
                 safe
                 and
                 happy
                 condition
                 in
                 this
                 world
                 ,
                 but
                 especially
                 in
                 the
                 world
                 to
                 come
                 .
                 Now
                 all
                 these
                 things
                 are
                 laid
                 down
                 visionally
                 ,
                 in
                 six
                 other
                 visions
                 ,
                 remarkably
                 distinct
                 from
                 one
                 another
                 ,
                 viz.
                 II.
                 
                   Vision
                   .
                   c.
                
                 4
                 ,
                 5
                 ,
                 6
                 ,
                 7.
                 
                 III.
                 
                   Vision
                   .
                   c.
                
                 7
                 ,
                 8
                 ,
                 9
                 ,
                 10
                 ,
                 11
                 ,
                 IIII.
                 
                   Vision
                   .
                   c.
                
                 12
                 ,
                 13
                 ,
                 
                 14.
                 
                 V.
                 
                   Vision
                   .
                   c.
                
                 15
                 ,
                 16.
                 
                 VI.
                 
                   Vision
                   .
                   c.
                
                 17
                 ,
                 18
                 ,
                 19.
                 
                 VII
                 .
                 
                   Vision
                   .
                   c.
                
                 20
                 ,
                 21
                 ,
                 22.
                 to
                 v.
                 6.
                 
                 All
                 which
                 Visions
                 seem
                 to
                 be
                 comprized
                 in
                 
                   two
                   distinct
                   Prophecies
                
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Systemes
                   of
                   Visions
                
                 ,
                 parallel
                 and
                 contemporary
                 to
                 one
                 another
                 .
                 Both
                 revealing
                 the
                 mysteries
                 for
                 substance
                 ,
                 but
                 the
                 later
                 proceeding
                 more
                 punctually
                 to
                 particulars
                 ,
                 
                   as
                   some
                   are
                   of
                   opinion
                
                 ;
                 Others
                 rather
                 think
                 the
                 former
                 Prophecy
                 comprehends
                 the
                 destinies
                 of
                 the
                 
                   Romane
                   Empire
                
                 ,
                 under
                 seven
                 Seals
                 and
                 seven
                 Trumpets
                 ;
                 The
                 later
                 Prophecy
                 ,
                 the
                 destinies
                 of
                 
                   the
                   Church
                
                 ,
                 or
                 of
                 Christian
                 Religion
                 .
                 The
                 I.
                 Prophecy
                 beginning
                 with
                 the
                 
                   B.
                   Sealed
                   with
                
                 7.
                 
                 
                   Seals
                   c.
                
                 4.
                 v.
                 1.
                 
                   ending
                   c.
                
                 11.
                 
                 II.
                 Prophecy
                 ,
                 beginning
                 c.
                 12.
                 v.
                 1.
                 (
                 yet
                 so
                 as
                 to
                 take
                 in
                 some
                 passages
                 mentioned
                 in
                 the
                 
                   fifth
                   Trumpet
                
                 ,
                 as
                 
                   the
                   Little
                   book
                   ,
                   the
                   measuring
                   of
                   the
                   Temple
                   ,
                   the
                   outer
                   Court
                   ,
                   the
                   two
                   Witnesses
                
                 )
                 continuing
                 
                   to
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   Book
                   .
                
                 Now
                 the
                 sober
                 considering
                 ,
                 and
                 wise
                 comparing
                 of
                 these
                 two
                 distinct
                 Prophecies
                 with
                 one
                 another
                 ,
                 may
                 (
                 as
                 some
                 think
                 ,
                 )
                 singularly
                 serve
                 to
                 clear
                 many
                 difficulties
                 throughout
                 this
                 Book
                 ,
              
            
             
               
                 II.
                 Uision
                 .
              
               
                 
                   THE
                   I.
                   PROPHECY
                   BEGINNETH
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     The
                     State
                     of
                     the
                     Church
                     future
                     is
                     revealed
                     to
                  
                   JOHN
                   ,
                   in
                   a
                   mysterious
                   vision
                   of
                   
                     A
                     Book
                     sealed
                     with
                     seven
                     Seals
                     ,
                  
                   (
                   All
                   the
                   particular
                   mysteries
                   in
                   which
                   Book
                   ,
                   what
                   man
                   on
                   earth
                   can
                   certainly
                   and
                   infallibly
                   open
                   ,
                   unlesse
                   
                   he
                   had
                   
                     Iohn's
                     Apocalypticall
                     Key
                  
                   ?
                   )
                   Here
                   consider
                   the
                   
                     
                       I.
                       
                         Preparatorys
                         to
                         the
                         opening
                         of
                         the
                         Seals
                         ,
                      
                       viz.
                       
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           
                             The
                             Vision
                             of
                             God
                             sitting
                             upon
                             a
                             glorious
                             Throne
                             in
                             heaven
                             ,
                             c.
                          
                           4.
                           wherein
                           are
                           ●
                           .
                           The
                           Transition
                           to
                           this
                           vision
                           ,
                           v.
                           1.
                           2.
                           
                           The
                           Description
                           of
                           God
                           enthroned
                           in
                           heaven
                           ,
                           v.
                           2
                           ,
                           3.
                           3.
                           
                           Em●le●es
                           of
                           Majesty
                           about
                           the
                           Throne
                           ,
                           viz.
                           1
                           
                             Twen●y
                             ●oure
                             Elders
                          
                           ,
                           2
                           
                             Lightnings
                             ,
                             Thunders
                             ,
                             Voices
                          
                           ,
                           3
                           
                             Seven
                             Lamps
                          
                           ,
                           i.
                           e.
                           
                             the
                             seven
                             Spirits
                             of
                             God
                          
                           ,
                           4
                           
                             A
                             Sea
                             of
                             glasse
                          
                           ,
                           5
                           
                             Foure
                             living
                             Creatures
                          
                           ,
                           6
                           
                             The
                             Songs
                             of
                             Prayse
                             ,
                             presented
                             to
                             him
                             that
                             sate
                             on
                             the
                             Throne
                             by
                             the
                             foure
                             Beasts
                             ,
                             and
                             ●●enty
                             foure
                             Elders
                             ,
                          
                           vers
                           .
                           4.
                           to
                           the
                           end
                           of
                           the
                           chapter
                           .
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           
                             The
                             vision
                             of
                             a
                             Book
                             ,
                             in
                             the
                             hand
                             of
                             him
                             that
                             sate
                             on
                             the
                             Throne
                             ,
                             sealed
                             with
                             seven
                             Seales
                             ,
                          
                           c.
                           5.
                           
                           Here
                           note
                           1.
                           
                           The
                           sealed
                           Book
                           described
                           ,
                           v.
                           1.
                           2.
                           
                           The
                           inability
                           of
                           all
                           creatures
                           to
                           open
                           the
                           book
                           ,
                           v.
                           2
                           ,
                           3
                           ,
                           4.
                           3.
                           
                           The
                           Lambs
                           ability
                           to
                           open
                           it
                           ,
                           who
                           stood
                           before
                           the
                           Throne
                           ,
                           v.
                           5
                           ,
                           6
                           ,
                           7.
                           4.
                           
                           The
                           foure
                           beasts
                           and
                           twenty
                           foure
                           Elders
                           Gratulation
                           ,
                           with
                           Adoration
                           to
                           the
                           Lamb
                           for
                           opening
                           it
                           ▪
                           vers
                           .
                           8.
                           
                             to
                             the
                             end
                             of
                             the
                             chapter
                             .
                          
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       II.
                       
                         The
                         Opening
                         of
                         the
                         seven
                         Seals
                         themselves
                         in
                         Order
                         ,
                         c.
                      
                       6
                       ,
                       7
                       ,
                       8.
                       
                       In
                       the
                       opening
                       of
                       which
                       Seals
                       is
                       revealed
                       to
                       Iohn
                       ,
                       what
                       shall
                       be
                       the
                       future
                       State
                       of
                       the
                       Church
                       of
                       God
                       ,
                       
                       from
                       that
                       time
                       to
                       the
                       end
                       of
                       the
                       world
                       .
                       In
                       the
                       Seventh
                       of
                       which
                       Seales
                       are
                       brought
                       in
                       seven
                       Trumpets
                       ;
                       &
                       in
                       the
                       Seventh
                       of
                       which
                       Trumpets
                       ,
                       are
                       brought
                       in
                       Seven
                       vials
                       of
                       the
                       wrath
                       of
                       God
                       ,
                       full
                       of
                       the
                       Seven
                       last
                       plagues
                       .
                       More
                       particularly
                       consider
                       here
                       the
                       
                         
                           I.
                           Seale
                           opened
                           ,
                           where
                           1
                           The
                           attention
                           required
                           ,
                           2
                           The
                           matter
                           revealed
                           in
                           it
                           ,
                           viz.
                           A
                           
                             white
                             horse
                          
                           &c.
                           c.
                           6.
                           verse
                           1.2
                           .
                        
                         
                           II.
                           Seale
                           opened
                           ,
                           where
                           1
                           Attention
                           called
                           for
                           .
                           2
                           The
                           mystery
                           revealed
                           ,
                           A
                           
                             Red
                             horse
                          
                           ,
                           &c.
                           c.
                           6.
                           v.
                           3.4
                           .
                        
                         
                           III.
                           Seale
                           opened
                           ,
                           where
                           1
                           Attention
                           is
                           incited
                           .
                           2
                           The
                           Mystery
                           revealed
                           ,
                           A
                           
                             Black
                             horse
                             ,
                             his
                             rider
                             having
                             Ballances
                             in
                             his
                             hand
                             ,
                          
                           A
                           spirituall
                           famine
                           threatned
                           ,
                           c.
                           6.
                           v.
                           5
                           ,
                           6.
                           
                        
                         
                           IV.
                           Seale
                           opened
                           ,
                           where
                           1
                           Attention
                           is
                           stirred
                           up
                           2
                           Matter
                           Revealed
                           ,
                           
                             A
                             pale
                             horse
                             and
                             his
                             rider
                             Death
                             ,
                             hell
                             following
                             ,
                          
                           &c.
                           c.
                           6.
                           ver
                           .
                           7.8
                           .
                        
                         
                           V.
                           Seale
                           opened
                           ,
                           where
                           note
                           1
                           What
                           was
                           seen
                           ,
                           
                             soules
                             under
                             the
                             Altar
                          
                           ,
                           martyred
                           .
                           2.
                           
                           What
                           these
                           soules
                           did
                           ,
                           
                             cryed
                             for
                             vengeance
                          
                           .
                           3.
                           
                           What
                           they
                           obtained
                           ,
                           1
                           
                             White
                             Robes
                          
                           for
                           present
                           ,
                           2
                           
                             Promise
                             of
                             compleat
                             glory
                          
                           with
                           their
                           fellow
                           martyrs
                           ,
                           c.
                           6.
                           v.
                           9.10.11
                           .
                        
                         
                           VI.
                           Seale
                           opened
                           ,
                           setting
                           forth
                           God●
                           dreadfull
                           judgements
                           upon
                           the
                           enemies
                           of
                           the
                           Church
                           ,
                           for
                           their
                           bloody
                           cruelties
                           exercised
                           to
                           death
                           upon
                           the
                           Saints
                           ,
                           as
                           was
                           intimated
                           in
                           the
                           
                             fifth
                             
                             Seale
                          
                           .
                           Here
                           are
                           considerable
                           ,
                           1.
                           
                           The
                           Signes
                           seen
                           by
                           
                             Iohn
                             ,
                             viz.
                             A
                             great
                             earthquake
                             ,
                             The
                             Sunne
                             became
                             black
                             ,
                          
                           &c.
                           c.
                           6
                           ,
                           v.
                           12
                           ,
                           13
                           ,
                           14.
                           2.
                           
                           The
                           things
                           signified
                           ,
                           
                             viz.
                             Kings
                             ,
                             great
                             men
                          
                           ,
                           &c
                           
                             i.
                             e.
                          
                           all
                           sorts
                           and
                           degrees
                           of
                           Persecutors
                           ,
                           in
                           horrour
                           and
                           despaire
                           at
                           their
                           vvits
                           ends
                           ,
                           by
                           reason
                           of
                           Gods
                           judgements
                           coming
                           upon
                           them
                           from
                           Christ
                           so
                           terribly
                           ,
                           as
                           if
                           the
                           very
                           judgement-day
                           were
                           come
                           ,
                           c.
                           6.
                           vers
                           .
                           15.16.17
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 III.
                 Uision
                 .
              
               
                 VII
                 .
                 Seale
                 opened
                 .
                 Here
                 consider
                 1
                 
                   Preparatories
                   to
                   it
                
                 ,
                 2
                 
                   Mysterious
                   Contents
                   of
                   it
                
                 .
              
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   Preparatories
                   to
                   it
                   ,
                   are
                   in
                   c.
                   7.
                   fore-arming
                   the
                   Church
                   with
                   previous
                   consolations
                   against
                   all
                   ensuing
                   miseries
                   that
                   were
                   to
                   come
                   upon
                   it
                   :
                   Against
                   which
                   evils
                   the
                   Holy
                   Ghost
                   here
                   comforts
                   the
                   Church
                   .
                   1.
                   
                   By
                   that
                   security
                   ,
                   which
                   the
                   Angel
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                   
                     sealing
                     the
                     servants
                     of
                     God
                     in
                     their
                     foreheads
                     ,
                  
                   shall
                   afford
                   them
                   in
                   midst
                   of
                   troubles
                   ,
                   c.
                   7
                   ,
                   1.
                   to
                   9.
                   2.
                   
                   By
                   that
                   
                     triumphant
                     victory
                  
                   ,
                   which
                   after
                   their
                   great
                   tribulation
                   ,
                   all
                   the
                   faithfull
                   shall
                   have
                   over
                   all
                   their
                   miseries
                   and
                   enemies
                   ,
                   c.
                   7.
                   v.
                   9.
                   
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     the
                     chapter
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   Mysteries
                   revealed
                   in
                   the
                   opening
                   of
                   this
                   
                     seventh
                     Seale
                  
                   ;
                   being
                   farre
                   more
                   ,
                   and
                   those
                   more
                   intricate
                   to
                   understand
                   ,
                   then
                   in
                   the
                   opening
                   of
                   any
                   of
                   
                   the
                   other
                   six
                   Seals
                   .
                   Events
                   following
                   the
                   opening
                   of
                   the
                   
                     seventh
                     Seale
                  
                   ,
                   are
                   either
                   I.
                   Preparatory
                   ,
                   as
                   1.
                   
                   
                     Silence
                     in
                     heaven
                     for
                     halfe
                     an
                     houre
                     ,
                  
                   portending
                   great
                   things
                   to
                   follow
                   ,
                   c.
                   8.1
                   .
                   2.
                   
                   
                     Vision
                     of
                     seven
                     Angels
                     with
                     seven
                     Trumpets
                     ,
                     v.
                  
                   2.
                   3.
                   
                   
                     Vision
                     of
                     another
                     Angel
                  
                   ,
                   and
                   his
                   actions
                   ,
                   
                     viz.
                     offering
                     up
                     of
                     incense
                     ;
                     and
                     casting
                     the
                     fire
                     of
                     the
                     Altar
                     into
                     the
                     earth
                     ,
                  
                   c.
                   8.
                   v.
                   3.
                   4
                   ,
                   5.
                   4.
                   
                   Preparation
                   of
                   the
                   
                     seven
                     Angels
                  
                   to
                   sound
                   their
                   Trumpets
                   v.
                   6.
                   
                   II.
                   
                     Executory
                     ,
                     viz.
                  
                   the
                   Angels
                   actuall
                   sounding
                   of
                   their
                   
                     seven
                     Trumpets
                     .
                     c.
                  
                   8.
                   v.
                   7.
                   &c.
                   to
                   c.
                   12.1
                   .
                   
                     
                       I.
                       Trumpet
                       sounded
                       ,
                       where
                       consider
                       ,
                       1.
                       
                       The
                       Signe
                       following
                       ▪
                       
                         Haile
                         and
                         fire
                         mingled
                         with
                         bloud
                         cast
                         upon
                         the
                         earth
                         ,
                      
                       2
                       The
                       effect
                       thereof
                       ,
                       
                         viz.
                         The
                         third
                         part
                         of
                         trees
                         burnt
                         ,
                      
                       &c.
                       c.
                       8.
                       v.
                       7.
                       
                    
                     
                       II.
                       Trumpet
                       sounded
                       ,
                       where
                       1.
                       
                       The
                       Signe
                       following
                       ,
                       
                         viz.
                         A
                         great
                         mountaine
                         burning
                         with
                         fire
                         cast
                         into
                         the
                         sea
                         .
                      
                       2.
                       
                       The
                       effect
                       ensuing
                       ,
                       
                         the
                         third
                         part
                         of
                         the
                         sea
                         became
                         blood
                         ,
                      
                       &c.
                       c.
                       8.
                       v.
                       8.9
                       .
                    
                     
                       III.
                       Trumpet
                       sounded
                       ,
                       where
                       ,
                       1.
                       
                       The
                       Signe
                       ensuing
                       thereupon
                       .
                       
                         A
                         great
                         star
                         fell
                         from
                         heaven
                         —
                         called
                         worm-wood
                         ,
                      
                       2.
                       
                       The
                       effects
                       thereof
                       ,
                       
                         viz.
                         The
                         third
                         part
                         of
                         the
                         waters
                         became
                         bitter
                         ,
                         and
                         many
                         died
                         of
                         them
                         ,
                      
                       c.
                       8.
                       v.
                       10
                       ,
                       11.
                       
                    
                     
                       IV.
                       Trumpet
                       sounded
                       ,
                       where
                       1.
                       
                       The
                       
                       Signe
                       .
                       viz.
                       
                         The
                         third
                         part
                         of
                         sun
                         ,
                         moon
                         and
                         stars
                         smitten
                         .
                      
                       2.
                       
                       The
                       effects
                       thereupon
                       .
                       
                         viz.
                         day
                         and
                         night
                         shone
                         not
                         for
                         a
                         third
                         part
                         ,
                      
                       c.
                       8.
                       v.
                       12.
                       
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 Here
                 is
                 annexed
                 (
                 by
                 way
                 of
                 
                   Preparatory
                   Transition
                
                 to
                 the
                 other
                 
                   three
                   Trumpets
                
                 ,
                 )
                 John's
                 
                   vision
                   of
                   an
                   Angel
                   flying
                   through
                   the
                   midst
                   of
                   heaven
                   ,
                   denouncing
                   three
                   Woes
                   by
                   reason
                   of
                   the
                   three
                   last
                   Trumpets
                   ,
                
                 c.
                 8
                 ,
                 13.
                 
              
               
                 
                   I.
                   Woe
                   .
                
                 
                   V.
                   Trumpet
                   sounded
                   ,
                   where
                   note
                   1.
                   
                   The
                   Signe
                   appearing
                   ,
                   
                     viz.
                     A
                     starre
                     falling
                     from
                     heaven
                     to
                     earth
                     .
                  
                   2.
                   
                   The
                   foure
                   effects
                   of
                   this
                   starre
                   falling
                   ,
                   
                     viz.
                     He
                     opens
                     the
                     bottomlesse
                     pit
                     ,
                     Thence
                     raiseth
                     up
                     smoake
                     .
                     Darkens
                     Sunne
                     and
                     aire
                     with
                     the
                     smoake
                     ,
                     and
                     brings
                     Locusts
                     unto
                     the
                     earth
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     smoake
                     ,
                     which
                  
                   LOCUSTS
                   
                     are
                     variously
                     and
                     notably
                     described
                  
                   .
                   3.
                   
                   The
                   Conclusion
                   shutting
                   up
                   the
                   Calamities
                   of
                   this
                   Trumpet
                   ,
                   and
                   forewarning
                   of
                   them
                   that
                   follow
                   ,
                   c.
                   9.
                   1.
                   to
                   13.
                   
                
              
               
                 
                   II.
                   Woe
                   .
                
                 
                   VI.
                   Trumpet
                   sounded
                   ,
                   c.
                   9.
                   v.
                   13.
                   
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     the
                     chapter
                     .
                  
                   Herein
                   consider
                   ,
                   1.
                   
                   The
                   Command
                   
                     to
                     loose
                     the
                     foure
                     Angels
                     bound
                     in
                  
                   Euphrates
                   ,
                   v.
                   13
                   ,
                   14.
                   2.
                   
                   Execution
                   of
                   this
                   command
                   ,
                   v.
                   15.
                   3.
                   
                   The
                   Description
                   of
                   the
                   
                     large
                     Army
                     of
                     Euphratean
                     Horses
                     and
                     Horsemen
                     ,
                  
                   v.
                   15
                   ,
                   16
                   ,
                   17.
                   4.
                   
                   The
                   
                   Calamitous
                   effects
                   wrought
                   by
                   them
                   ,
                   v.
                   18
                   ,
                   19
                   ,
                   20
                   ,
                   21.
                   
                
                 
                   VII
                   .
                   Trumpet
                   ,
                   Concerning
                   which
                   note
                   .
                   1.
                   
                   Preparatories
                   to
                   it
                   .
                   2.
                   
                   Sounding
                   of
                   it
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     I.
                     Preparatoryes
                     to
                     it
                     (
                     it
                     being
                     the
                     Trumpet
                     of
                     highest
                     concernment
                     ,
                     because
                     when
                     that
                     shall
                     be
                     sounded
                     ,
                     
                       The
                       mystery
                       of
                       God
                       shall
                       be
                       finished
                       ▪
                       as
                       he
                       hath
                       declared
                       to
                       his
                       servants
                       the
                       Prophets
                       ,
                    
                     c.
                     10
                     ,
                     7.
                     )
                     are
                     very
                     largely
                     premised
                     ,
                     c.
                     10
                     ,
                     1
                     ,
                     to
                     c.
                     11.15
                     .
                     Which
                     seems
                     principally
                     to
                     be
                     Consolatory
                     to
                     the
                     Church
                     ,
                     against
                     all
                     her
                     former
                     and
                     future
                     tribulations
                     ,
                     and
                     this
                     by
                     the
                     Vision
                     of
                     a
                     mighty
                     Angel
                     come
                     down
                     from
                     heaven
                     ,
                     viz.
                     Jesus
                     Christ
                     himselfe
                     the
                     Angel
                     of
                     the
                     Covenant
                     .
                     Touching
                     whom
                     here
                     are
                     ,
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         
                           The
                           Angels
                           description
                           ,
                           c.
                        
                         10.
                         ver
                         .
                         1.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         
                           The
                           Angels
                           Actions
                        
                         ,
                         1.
                         
                         Held
                         a
                         little
                         Book
                         in
                         his
                         hand
                         ,
                         2.
                         
                         Set
                         his
                         right
                         foot
                         on
                         the
                         Sea
                         ,
                         his
                         left
                         on
                         the
                         land
                         .
                         3.
                         
                         Roared
                         as
                         a
                         Lyon
                         ;
                         7.
                         thunders
                         ecchoing
                         again
                         .
                         4.
                         
                         Swore
                         that
                         time
                         should
                         be
                         no
                         more
                         ,
                         but
                         
                           when
                           the
                        
                         7
                         th
                         
                           Angel
                           should
                           sound
                           ,
                           the
                           mystery
                           of
                           God
                           should
                           be
                           finished
                           ,
                        
                         c.
                         10.
                         v.
                         2.
                         to
                         8.
                         
                      
                       
                         3.
                         
                         
                           The
                           Angels
                           commands
                        
                         to
                         John
                         ,
                         1.
                         
                         To
                         eate
                         the
                         little
                         Book
                         in
                         the
                         Angels
                         hand
                         ,
                         that
                         he
                         might
                         Prophecy
                         ▪
                         c.
                         10.8
                         ,
                         9
                         ,
                         10
                         ,
                         11.
                         2.
                         
                         To
                         measure
                         the
                         Temple
                         ,
                         Altar
                         ,
                         and
                         
                         worshippers
                         ,
                         but
                         not
                         the
                         Court
                         ;
                         for
                         it
                         should
                         be
                         trodden
                         under
                         foot
                         of
                         the
                         Gentiles
                         42.
                         moneths
                         ,
                         c.
                         11.
                         v.
                         1
                         ,
                         ●
                         .
                      
                       
                         4.
                         
                         
                           The
                           Angels
                           promises
                        
                         concerning
                         his
                         
                           two
                           Winesses
                        
                         ,
                         and
                         their
                         Prophecy
                         ,
                         and
                         how
                         after
                         they
                         shall
                         be
                         killed
                         by
                         the
                         Beast
                         upon
                         the
                         finishing
                         of
                         their
                         testimony
                         .
                         They
                         shall
                         againe
                         Revive
                         ,
                         c.
                         11.
                         v.
                         3.
                         to
                         14.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                
                 
                   Thus
                   the
                   
                     Second
                     Woe
                  
                   is
                   ended
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   third
                   hastneth
                   ,
                   v.
                   14.
                   
                
              
               
                 
                   III.
                   Woe
                   .
                
                 
                   II.
                   Sounding
                   of
                   the
                   
                     seventh
                     Trumpet
                  
                   ,
                   wherein
                   the
                   
                     Mystery
                     of
                     God
                     is
                     finished
                  
                   .
                   And
                   the
                   Churches
                   Miseries
                   ended
                   ,
                   c.
                   ●
                   1.
                   v.
                   15.
                   
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     the
                     chap.
                  
                   where
                   consider
                   ,
                   I.
                   
                     Things
                     heard
                  
                   in
                   heaven
                   ,
                   viz.
                   1.
                   
                   
                     Great
                     voyces
                     ,
                     saying
                     ▪
                     The
                     Kingdomes
                     of
                     this
                     world
                     are
                     become
                     the
                     Lords
                     ,
                     and
                     his
                     Christs
                     ,
                  
                   &c.
                   ver
                   .
                   15.
                   2.
                   
                   The
                   triumphant
                   song
                   or
                   gratulation
                   of
                   the
                   24.
                   
                   Elders
                   unto
                   God
                   ,
                   for
                   honouring
                   himselfe
                   ,
                   and
                   for
                   the
                   coming
                   of
                   his
                   judgement
                   to
                   reward
                   the
                   Saints
                   ,
                   and
                   destroy
                   the
                   earth
                   ,
                   ver
                   .
                   16.
                   17
                   ,
                   18.
                   
                   II
                   
                     Things
                     seene
                  
                   &c.
                   
                   In
                   Gods
                   Temple
                   opened
                   in
                   heaven
                   ,
                   viz.
                   1.
                   
                   The
                   Saints
                   Rewards
                   ,
                   
                     The
                     Ark
                     of
                     his
                     Testament
                  
                   ,
                   i.
                   e.
                   Jesus
                   Christ.
                   2.
                   
                   The
                   wickeds
                   Rewards
                   ,
                   
                     Lightnings
                     ,
                     voices
                     ,
                     thundrings
                     ,
                     earthquakes
                     and
                     great
                     haile
                     ,
                  
                   ver
                   .
                   19.
                   
                
                 
                   
                     The
                     former
                     Prophecy
                     endeth
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 IV.
                 Uision
              
               
                 
                   THE
                   II
                   PROPHECY
                   BEGINNETH
                   .
                
                 
                   Hitherto
                   of
                   the
                   I.
                   Prophecy
                   ,
                   or
                   
                     Systeme
                     of
                     Visions
                  
                   ,
                   Denoting
                   (
                   as
                   is
                   thought
                   by
                   some
                   )
                   more
                   especially
                   the
                   
                     Condition
                     of
                     the
                     last
                     Empire
                  
                   viz.
                   
                     the
                     Romane
                  
                   :
                   Now
                   to
                   the
                   II
                   Prophecy
                   or
                   
                     Systeme
                     of
                     Visions
                  
                   ,
                   (
                   contemporary
                   with
                   the
                   former
                   both
                   in
                   the
                   Seales
                   and
                   Trumpets
                   )
                   foretelling
                   chiefly
                   the
                   future
                   condition
                   of
                   
                     the
                     Church
                     till
                     the
                     judgement
                     day
                     .
                  
                   Herein
                   chiefly
                   are
                   set
                   down
                   ,
                   1.
                   
                   
                     The
                     Tribulations
                     and
                     Persecutions
                  
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   by
                   severall
                   enemies
                   .
                   2.
                   
                   
                     The
                     deliverance
                  
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   by
                   her
                   enemies
                   destruction
                   .
                   3.
                   
                   
                     The
                     happy
                     condition
                     of
                     the
                     Church
                     ,
                  
                   upon
                   her
                   deliverance
                   .
                   Though
                   the
                   
                     common
                     opinion
                  
                   of
                   interpreters
                   (
                   who
                   take
                   not
                   any
                   notice
                   of
                   2
                   
                     contemporary
                     Prophesies
                  
                   ,
                   and
                   their
                   Synchronismes
                   ,
                   but
                   judge
                   these
                   Visions
                   to
                   be
                   
                     one
                     continued
                     Prophecy
                  
                   ,
                   )
                   bring
                   all
                   that
                   followes
                   under
                   the
                   
                     seventh
                     Trumpet
                  
                   ,
                   thus
                   .
                   viz.
                   The
                   sounding
                   of
                   the
                   
                     seventh
                     Trumpet
                  
                   is
                   propounded
                   ,
                   I.
                   Summarily
                   ,
                   c.
                   11.15
                   .
                   
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     the
                     chap.
                  
                   II.
                   Plenarily
                   ,
                   and
                   this
                   either
                   ,
                   1.
                   
                   
                     By
                     way
                     of
                     Recognition
                  
                   and
                   fuller
                   explaining
                   of
                   the
                   former
                   Seales
                   and
                   Trumpets
                   ,
                   in
                   a
                   digression
                   ,
                   c.
                   12
                   ,
                   13
                   ,
                   14.
                   2.
                   
                   
                     By
                     way
                     of
                     Prediction
                  
                   of
                   things
                   future
                   under
                   the
                   
                     seventh
                     Trumpet
                  
                   more
                   largely
                   ,
                   c.
                   15
                   ,
                   16
                   ,
                   17
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                   For
                   substance
                   these
                   will
                   come
                   much
                   to
                   one
                   .
                   (
                   But
                   le
                   ts
                   follow
                   the
                   former
                   .
                   )
                
                 
                 
                   I.
                   
                     The
                     Persecutions
                     of
                     the
                     Church
                  
                   by
                   severall
                   enemies
                   greatly
                   distressing
                   her
                   in
                   this
                   whole
                   fourth
                   
                     Vision
                     ,
                     c.
                  
                   12.
                   ver
                   .
                   1.
                   to
                   c.
                   15.
                   ver
                   .
                   1.
                   
                   More
                   particularly
                   here
                   note
                   ,
                   
                     
                       I.
                       
                         The
                         Persecution
                         of
                         the
                         woman
                      
                       that
                       brought
                       forth
                       the
                       man-child
                       ,
                       viz.
                       Both
                       Jesus
                       Christ
                       ,
                       and
                       the
                       Primitive
                       Church
                       of
                       the
                       Jewes
                       (
                       as
                       some
                       are
                       of
                       opinion
                       )
                       even
                       from
                       her
                       infancy
                       ;
                       and
                       this
                       by
                       Dragon
                       ,
                       i.
                       e
                       ,
                       (
                       as
                       is
                       expounded
                       c.
                       12.
                       ver
                       .
                       9.
                       )
                       
                         Satan
                         ▪
                         c.
                      
                       12.
                       v.
                       1.
                       to
                       17.
                       
                    
                     
                       II.
                       
                         The
                         Dragons
                         Persecution
                         of
                         ,
                         and
                         making
                         war
                         with
                         the
                         remnant
                         of
                         her
                         seed
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                   Viz.
                   (
                   
                     as
                     some
                     thinke
                  
                   )
                   with
                   the
                   Church
                   of
                   the
                   Gentiles
                   ,
                   where
                   consider
                   ,
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       
                         The
                         Dragons
                         Resolution
                      
                       and
                       endeavours
                       thus
                       to
                       persecute
                       ,
                       c.
                       12.
                       v.
                       17.
                       
                    
                     
                       2
                       ,
                       
                         The
                         instruments
                         of
                         Persecution
                      
                       ,
                       incited
                       and
                       imployed
                       by
                       the
                       great
                       Red
                       Dragon
                       ,
                       viz.
                       1.
                       
                       The
                       
                         Beast
                         rising
                         up
                         out
                         of
                         the
                         Sea
                      
                       having
                       seaven
                       heads
                       and
                       ten
                       hornes
                       ,
                       c.
                       13.
                       ver
                       .
                       1.
                       to
                       11.
                       2.
                       
                       
                         The
                         Beast
                         rising
                         out
                         of
                         the
                         earth
                         ,
                      
                       having
                       two
                       hornes
                       like
                       a
                       Lambe
                       ,
                       and
                       speaking
                       as
                       a
                       Dragon
                       ,
                       &c.
                       c.
                       13.
                       ver
                       .
                       11.
                       
                         to
                         the
                         end
                         of
                         the
                         chap.
                         
                      
                    
                     
                       3.
                       
                       
                         The
                         event
                         of
                         this
                         Persecution
                         ,
                         viz.
                      
                       The
                       Saints
                       Victory
                       through
                       their
                       constant
                       and
                       faithfull
                       confession
                       of
                       Christ
                       even
                       to
                       Martyrdom
                       ,
                       this
                       their
                       victory
                       being
                       exellently
                       amplifyed
                       
                       by
                       the
                       Causes
                       ,
                       and
                       Effects
                       of
                       it
                       ,
                       c.
                       14.
                       1.
                       
                         to
                         the
                         end
                         of
                         the
                         chap.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 V.
                 Uision
                 .
              
               
                 II.
                 
                   The
                   Deliverance
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 destruction
                 of
                 her
                 enemies
                 represented
                 in
                 the
                 Vision
                 of
                 the
                 7.
                 
                 
                   Vials
                   full
                   of
                   the
                   wrath
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                   the
                
                 7.
                 
                   last
                   plagues
                   ,
                   poured
                   out
                   upon
                   the
                   eart●
                   by
                
                 7.
                 
                 Angels
                 ,
                 Here
                 are
                 ,
                 the
                 
                   
                     I.
                     Preparatories
                     to
                     the
                     pouring
                     out
                     of
                     the
                     Vials
                     c.
                     15
                     ,
                     throughout
                     .
                  
                   
                     II.
                     
                       Pouring
                       out
                       of
                       the
                       Vials
                       of
                       the
                       wrath
                       of
                       God
                       upon
                       the
                       earth
                       ,
                    
                     c.
                     16.1
                     .
                     &c.
                     viz.
                     
                     
                       
                         I.
                         Vial
                         poured
                         out
                         ,
                         c.
                         16.
                         ver
                         .
                         2.
                         
                      
                       
                         II.
                         Vial
                         poured
                         out
                         ,
                         v.
                         3.
                         
                      
                       
                         III.
                         Vial
                         poured
                         out
                         ,
                         v.
                         4.
                         to
                         8.
                         
                      
                       
                         IV.
                         Vial
                         poured
                         out
                         ,
                         v.
                         8
                         ,
                         9.
                         
                      
                       
                         V.
                         Vial
                         poured
                         out
                         ,
                         v.
                         10
                         ,
                         11.
                         
                      
                       
                         VI.
                         Vial
                         poured
                         out
                         ,
                         v.
                         12.
                         to
                         17.
                         
                      
                       
                         VII
                         .
                         Vial
                         poured
                         out
                         ,
                         c.
                         16.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 This
                 pouring
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 VII
                 .
                 Vial
                 ,
                 is
                 laid
                 down
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 More
                 Summarily
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 More
                 Plenarily
                 .
              
               
                 I.
                 
                   More
                   Summarily
                
                 &
                 compendiously
                 c.
                 16.
                 ver
                 .
                 17.
                 
                   to
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   chap.
                   
                
              
            
             
               
                 VI
                 Uision
                 .
              
               
                 II.
                 
                   More
                   plenarily
                
                 and
                 copiously
                 ,
                 c.
                 17
                 ,
                 18
                 ,
                 19
                 ,
                 &
                 20
                 to
                 ver
                 .
                 11.
                 
                 Wherin
                 divers
                 mysteries
                 are
                 most
                 lively
                 explicated
                 ,
                 which
                 formerly
                 were
                 heretofore
                 more
                 obscurely
                 mentioned
                 .
                 Notably
                 pointing
                 out
                 the
                 
                 
                   Rise
                   ,
                   Seate
                   ,
                   Reigne
                   ,
                   Vassals
                   ,
                   Successe
                   ,
                   and
                   at
                   last
                   the
                   fatall
                   Ruine
                   of
                   Anti-christ
                   and
                   all
                   the
                   Churches
                   enemies
                   .
                
                 So
                 that
                 this
                 part
                 affords
                 no
                 small
                 light
                 to
                 the
                 
                   Prophetick
                   part
                
                 of
                 the
                 Revelation
                 .
                 Here
                 consider
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 judgement
                 of
                 the
                 
                   great
                   whore
                
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 event
                 thereupon
                 .
              
               
                 I.
                 
                   The
                   judgement
                   of
                   the
                   great
                   whore
                
                 c.
                 17
                 ,
                 18
                 ,
                 19.
                 
                 Where
                 are
                 ,
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     
                       A
                       notable
                       description
                       of
                       the
                       great
                       whore
                       ,
                    
                     that
                     is
                     to
                     be
                     judged
                     ;
                     By
                     Visionall
                     Representation
                     ,
                     c.
                     17.1
                     .
                     to
                     7.
                     
                     By
                     real
                     explanation
                     therof
                     ,
                     v.
                     7.
                     to
                     16.
                     
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     
                       The
                       instruments
                       that
                       shall
                       destroy
                       the
                       Whore.
                       viz.
                    
                     The
                     
                       ten
                       hornes
                    
                     ,
                     which
                     are
                     ten
                     Kings
                     ,
                     &c.
                     c.
                     17.
                     ver
                     .
                     16
                     ,
                     17
                     ,
                     18.
                     
                  
                   
                     3.
                     
                     
                       The
                       Emphatical
                       promulgation
                       of
                    
                     the
                     woful
                     ruine
                     of
                     Babylon
                     ,
                     the
                     Seate
                     of
                     the
                     great
                     whore
                     ,
                     This
                     is
                     done
                     by
                     three
                     Angels
                     ,
                     1.
                     
                     
                       The
                       first
                       Angel
                    
                     declares
                     the
                     inevitable
                     certainty
                     of
                     Babylons
                     ruine
                     ,
                     c.
                     18..1
                     ,
                     2
                     ,
                     3.
                     2.
                     
                     The
                     second
                     warning
                     all
                     God's
                     people
                     to
                     come
                     out
                     of
                     her
                     ,
                     sets
                     forth
                     the
                     grievousnesse
                     of
                     her
                     destruction
                     ,
                     with
                     the
                     sad
                     lamentations
                     of
                     all
                     her
                     friends
                     and
                     vassals
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     4.
                     to
                     21.
                     3.
                     
                     
                       The
                       third
                       Angel
                    
                     ,
                     under
                     the
                     
                     type
                     of
                     a
                     great
                     Milstone
                     cast
                     into
                     the
                     Sea
                     ,
                     as
                     it
                     were
                     seales
                     up
                     the
                     irrecoverablenesse
                     of
                     her
                     ruine
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     21
                     ,
                     22
                     ,
                     23
                     ,
                     24.
                     
                  
                   
                     4.
                     
                     
                       The
                       gratulatory
                       exaltations
                    
                     of
                     the
                     heavenly
                     company
                     1
                     for
                     the
                     judgement
                     of
                     the
                     whore
                     ,
                     2
                     for
                     the
                     preparation
                     of
                     the
                     Lamb's
                     wife
                     for
                     marriage
                     with
                     him
                     ,
                     c.
                     19.
                     ver
                     .
                     1.
                     to
                     11.
                     
                  
                   
                     5.
                     
                     
                       The
                       finall
                       and
                       totall
                       conquest
                    
                     of
                     the
                     Lamb
                     and
                     his
                     Armies
                     ,
                     over
                     the
                     beast
                     and
                     false
                     Prophet
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     Kings
                     of
                     the
                     earth
                     and
                     their
                     Armies
                     ,
                     c.
                     19.
                     v.
                     11.
                     
                       to
                       the
                       end
                       of
                       the
                       chap.
                       Hitherto
                    
                     of
                     the
                     judgement
                     of
                     the
                     
                       great
                       Whore.
                    
                     
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 VII
                 .
                 
                   Or
                   last
                   Uision
                
                 .
              
               
                 II.
                 
                   The
                   event
                   following
                
                 after
                 the
                 judgement
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Whore
                 ;
                 which
                 is
                 chiefly
                 three-fold
                 ,
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     
                       The
                       safety
                       of
                       the
                       Saints
                    
                     (
                     surviving
                     the
                     ruine
                     of
                     Babylon
                     )
                     from
                     the
                     seducements
                     of
                     the
                     Dragon
                     ,
                     the
                     Devil
                     and
                     Satan
                     ,
                     being
                     chained
                     up
                     1000
                     yeares
                     ,
                     c.
                     20.1.2
                     ,
                     3.
                     
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     
                       The
                       reviving
                       of
                       the
                       Martyrs
                    
                     ,
                     and
                     raigning
                     with
                     Christ
                     1000.
                     yeares
                     ,
                     the
                     rest
                     of
                     the
                     dead
                     not
                     living
                     again
                     till
                     the
                     1000.
                     yeares
                     were
                     finished
                     ,
                     c
                     ,
                     20.
                     v.
                     4
                     ,
                     5
                     ,
                     6.
                     
                  
                   
                     
                     3.
                     
                     
                       The
                       Saints
                       miraculous
                       deliverance
                       from
                       ,
                       and
                       victory
                       over
                       Gog
                       and
                       Magog
                    
                     ;
                     (
                     Satan
                     ,
                     after
                     the
                     1000.
                     yeares
                     expired
                     ,
                     being
                     loosed
                     out
                     of
                     prison
                     .
                     )
                     c.
                     20.
                     v.
                     7.
                     to
                     11.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Hitherto
                   (
                   as
                   is
                   conceived
                   )
                   hath
                   been
                   Revealed
                   the
                   future
                   state
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   as
                   Militant
                   on
                   earth
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   The
                   condition
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   as
                   triumphant
                   in
                   heaven
                   ,
                
                 is
                 described
                 both
                 in
                 respect
                 of
                 the
                 1.
                 
                 Inchoation
                 ▪
                 and
                 2.
                 
                 Duration
                 of
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   The
                   Inchoation
                   or
                   beginning
                   of
                   the
                   Churches
                   triumph
                   ,
                   shall
                   be
                   at
                   the
                   last
                   and
                   generall
                   judgement
                   :
                   which
                   is
                   pathetically
                   described
                   ,
                   c.
                   20.
                   v.
                   11.
                   
                     to
                     the
                     end
                     of
                     the
                     chapt
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   The
                   Duration
                   or
                   Continuance
                   of
                   it
                   ;
                   viz.
                   Eternal
                   happinesse
                   in
                   Heaven
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   most
                   gloriously
                   set
                   forth
                   ,
                   c.
                   21.
                   throughout
                   &c.
                   
                   22.
                   ver
                   .
                   1.
                   to
                   6.
                   
                
              
               
                 
                   The
                   Conclusion
                   of
                   this
                   whole
                   Prophecy
                
                 ;
                 which
                 
                 is
                 either
                 ,
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     Principal
                     ,
                     containing
                     a
                     confirmation
                     of
                     the
                     whole
                     Prophecy
                     of
                     this
                     Revelation
                     ,
                     by
                     the
                     Testimony
                     ,
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         Of
                         the
                         Angel
                         ,
                         by
                         whom
                         the
                         Lord
                         shewed
                         these
                         things
                         to
                         John
                         ,
                         c.
                         22.
                         v.
                         6.
                         
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         Of
                         Christ
                         himselfe
                         ,
                         who
                         gave
                         this
                         Revelation
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         7.
                         
                      
                       
                         3.
                         
                         Of
                         Iohn
                         that
                         received
                         this
                         Revelation
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         8
                         ,
                         9.
                         
                      
                       
                         
                         4.
                         
                         Of
                         Christ
                         againe
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         10
                         to
                         18.
                         
                      
                       
                         5.
                         
                         Of
                         Iohn
                         denouncing
                         heavie
                         judgements
                         upon
                         all
                         that
                         shall
                         adde
                         to
                         ,
                         or
                         take
                         from
                         this
                         Prophecy
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         18
                         ,
                         19.
                         
                      
                       
                         6.
                         
                         Of
                         Christ
                         testifying
                         these
                         things
                         ,
                         Promising
                         his
                         speedy
                         coming
                         ;
                         amplified
                         by
                         Iohn's
                         earnest
                         request
                         in
                         his
                         own
                         and
                         the
                         Churches
                         behalfe
                         ,
                         ver
                         .
                         20.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     2.
                     
                     
                       Lesse
                       Principall
                    
                     ,
                     containing
                     the
                     Apostolicall
                     Salutation
                     to
                     all
                     the
                     7.
                     
                     Churches
                     and
                     faithfull
                     Saints
                     to
                     whom
                     this
                     Revelation
                     was
                     written
                     ,
                     ver
                     .
                     21.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     He
                     that
                     testifieth
                     these
                     things
                     ,
                     saith
                     ;
                     I
                     come
                     quickly
                     .
                  
                   Amen
                   .
                   
                     Even
                     so
                     ,
                     Come
                     LORD
                     JESUS
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   Rev.
                   22.20
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     D.
                     Bernard
                     .
                     Medit.
                     Devot
                     .
                     c.
                     4.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   Praemium
                   est
                   videre
                   deum
                   ,
                   vivere
                   cum
                   Deo
                   ,
                   vivere
                   de
                   Deo
                   ;
                   esse
                   cum
                   Deo
                   esse
                   ,
                   in
                   Deo
                   ,
                   quierit
                   omnia
                   in
                   omnibus
                   :
                   habere
                   Deum
                   qui
                   est
                   Summum
                   Bonum
                   .
                   Et
                   ubi
                   est
                   summum
                   bonum
                   ,
                   ibi
                   est
                   summa
                   felicitas
                   ,
                   summa
                   jucunditas
                   ,
                   vera
                   libe●tas
                   ,
                   perfecta
                   charitas
                   ,
                   aeterna
                   securitas
                   ,
                   &
                   secura
                   aeternitas
                   :
                   ibi
                   est
                   vera
                   laetitia
                   ,
                   plena
                   scientia
                   ,
                   omnis
                   plenitudo
                   ,
                   &
                   omnis
                   Beatitudo
                   .
                
                 
                   Sic
                   cum
                   Deo
                   homo
                   Beatus
                   erit
                   ,
                   in
                   cujus
                   conscientia
                   peccatum
                   inventum
                   non
                   fuerit
                   .
                   Videbit
                   Deum
                   ad
                   voluntatem
                   ,
                   habebit
                   ad
                   voluptatem
                   ,
                   fruetur
                   ad
                   jucunditatem
                   .
                   In
                   aeternitate
                   vigebit
                   ,
                   in
                   veritate
                   fulgebit
                   ,
                   in
                   bonitate
                   gaudebit
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     1
                     Tim.
                     1.17
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           The
           
             Holy
             Scriptures
          
           are
           contained
           in
           the
           Books
           of
           the
           
             Old
             &
             New
             Testament
          
           .
           
             
               I.
               The
               Books
               of
               the
               
                 Old
                 Testament
              
               ,
               are
               
                 
                   I
                   Moses
                   .
                   He
                   wrote
                   the
                   Law
                   of
                   God
                   in
                   five
                   Books
                   called
                   the
                   Pentateuch
                   i.
                   e.
                   
                     The-five
                     fold-volumne
                  
                   .
                   These
                   Books
                   according
                   to
                   the
                   Greek
                   are
                   called
                   
                     
                       Genesis
                       .
                    
                     
                       Exodus
                       .
                    
                     
                       Leviticus
                       .
                    
                     
                       Numbers
                       .
                    
                     
                       Deuteronomie
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   II.
                   
                     The
                     Prophets
                  
                   ,
                   their
                   Books
                   are
                   either
                   
                     
                       I.
                       Historicall
                       ;
                       containing
                       the
                       History
                       ,
                       of
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           
                             Israel's
                             entrance
                          
                           into
                           the
                           promised
                           Land
                           ,
                           viz.
                           —
                           
                             
                               Ioshua
                               .
                            
                          
                        
                         
                           2
                           
                             Israels
                             Condition
                             and
                             Government
                             after
                             their
                             entrance
                          
                           into
                           Canaan
                           ,
                           
                             
                               1
                               ●efore
                               their
                               carrying
                               away
                               into
                               Babylon
                               ,
                               either
                               under
                               
                                 
                                   1.
                                   
                                   Iudges
                                   .
                                   And
                                   here
                                   we
                                   have
                                   ●he
                                   
                                     
                                       1.
                                       
                                       Generall
                                       Hist.
                                       
                                       
                                         
                                           Iudges
                                           .
                                        
                                      
                                    
                                     
                                       2.
                                       
                                       Particular
                                       Hist.
                                       
                                       
                                         
                                           Ruth
                                           .
                                        
                                      
                                    
                                  
                                
                                 
                                   2
                                   Kings
                                   ,
                                   and
                                   this
                                   as
                                   th●
                                   Stat●
                                   of
                                   the
                                   Kingdome
                                   was
                                   
                                     
                                       I.
                                       Vnited
                                       under
                                       Kings
                                       by
                                       
                                         
                                           1.
                                           
                                           Election
                                           .
                                           
                                             
                                               I.
                                               Samuel
                                               .
                                            
                                          
                                        
                                         
                                           2.
                                           
                                           Succession
                                           .
                                           
                                             
                                               II.
                                               Samuel
                                               .
                                            
                                          
                                        
                                      
                                    
                                     
                                       II.
                                       Divided
                                       ,
                                       and
                                       that
                                       according
                                       to
                                       the
                                       
                                         
                                           1.
                                           
                                           Beginnings
                                           of
                                           this
                                           Division
                                           ,
                                           in
                                           
                                             
                                               I.
                                               Kings
                                               .
                                            
                                          
                                        
                                         
                                           2.
                                           
                                           Progresse
                                           of
                                           this
                                           Division
                                           ,
                                           in
                                           
                                             
                                               II.
                                               Kings
                                               .
                                            
                                          
                                        
                                      
                                    
                                     
                                       III.
                                       
                                         Vnited
                                         and
                                         Divided
                                      
                                       ,
                                       as
                                       in
                                       
                                         
                                           I.
                                           Chronicles
                                           .
                                        
                                         
                                           II.
                                           Chronicles
                                           .
                                        
                                      
                                    
                                  
                                
                              
                            
                             
                               2.
                               
                               After
                               their
                               Captivity
                               ;
                               Here
                               their
                               returne
                               from
                               Captivity
                               is
                               declared
                               ,
                               According
                               to
                               the
                               
                                 
                                   1.
                                   
                                   Truth
                                   and
                                   manner
                                   of
                                   it
                                   ,
                                   in
                                   
                                     
                                       Ezra
                                       .
                                    
                                  
                                
                                 
                                   2.
                                   
                                   Fruit
                                   and
                                   event
                                   of
                                   it
                                   ,
                                   in
                                   
                                     
                                       Nehemiah
                                       .
                                    
                                  
                                
                              
                            
                             
                               3.
                               
                               Vnder
                               their
                               Captivity
                               in
                               Babylon
                               ,
                               and
                               elsewhere
                               ;
                               in
                               
                                 
                                   Esther
                                   .
                                
                              
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       II.
                       Doctrinall
                       ,
                       or
                       poeticall
                       containing
                       Doctrines
                       ,
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           
                             Of
                             more
                             speciall
                             reference
                             to
                          
                           A
                           particular
                           person
                           ,
                           viz.
                           —
                           
                             
                               Iob.
                               
                            
                          
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           
                             Of
                             more
                             Generall
                             reference
                          
                           to
                           all
                           sorts
                           of
                           persons
                           ,
                           in
                           
                             
                               1.
                               
                               Dauid●
                               Book
                               ,
                               principally
                               penned
                               by
                               him
                               ,
                               viz.
                               
                               
                                 
                                   Psalmes
                                   .
                                
                              
                            
                             
                               2.
                               
                               Solomons
                               Books
                               which
                               are
                               ,
                               either
                               
                                 
                                   1.
                                   
                                   Proverbiall
                                   .
                                   —
                                   
                                     
                                       Proverbes
                                       .
                                    
                                  
                                
                                 
                                   2.
                                   
                                   Penitentiall
                                   .
                                   —
                                   
                                     
                                       Ecclesiastes
                                       .
                                    
                                  
                                
                                 
                                   3.
                                   
                                   Nuptiall
                                   ,
                                   viz.
                                   
                                   
                                     
                                       
                                         Song
                                         of
                                         Songs
                                      
                                       .
                                    
                                  
                                
                              
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       III.
                       Prophetical
                       written
                       either
                       by
                       ,
                       the
                       
                         
                           1.
                           
                           
                             Greater
                             Prophets
                          
                           who
                           wrote
                           ,
                           either
                           
                             
                               1.
                               
                               Before
                               the
                               Captivity
                               of
                               Babylon
                               ,
                               viz.
                               
                               
                                 
                                   Isaiah
                                   ,
                                
                                 
                                   Ieremiah
                                   ,
                                
                                 
                                   Lamentations
                                   .
                                
                              
                            
                             
                               2.
                               
                               
                                 Neer●
                                 upon
                                 ,
                                 and
                                 under
                              
                               the
                               Captivity
                               ,
                               viz.
                               
                               
                                 
                                   Ezekiel
                                
                                 
                                   Daniel
                                
                              
                            
                          
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           
                             Lesser
                             Prophets
                          
                           ,
                           who
                           Prophesied
                           and
                           wrote
                           ,
                           either
                           
                             
                               1.
                               
                               Before
                               Israel's
                               transportation
                               into
                               Babylon
                               ,
                               viz
                               
                                 
                                   Hosea
                                
                                 
                                   Ioel
                                
                                 
                                   Amos
                                
                                 
                                   Obadiah
                                
                                 
                                   Ionab
                                
                                 
                                   Micah
                                
                                 
                                   Nahum
                                
                                 
                                   Habakkuk
                                
                                 
                                   Zephaniah
                                   .
                                
                              
                            
                             
                               2.
                               
                               Afte●
                               Israels
                               returne
                               from
                               Babylons
                               Captivity
                               .
                               viz.
                               
                               
                                 
                                   Haggai
                                
                                 
                                   Zechariah
                                
                                 
                                   Malachi
                                   .
                                
                              
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               II.
               The
               Books
               of
               the
               
                 New
                 Testament
              
               ,
               See
               in
               the
               Table
               ,
               at
               p.
               140.
               
            
          
        
         
         
           ☞
           The
           Bookes
           of
           the
           New-Testament
           ,
           are
           either
           
             
               I.
               Historicall
               ,
               describing
               unto
               us
               the
               History
               of
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   Christ
                   the
                   Head
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   ;
                   whose
                   Genealogy
                   ,
                   Birth
                   ,
                   Life
                   Doctrine
                   ,
                   Miracles
                   ,
                   D●ath
                   and
                   Resurrection
                   ,
                   are
                   recorded
                   by
                   foure
                   Evangelists
                   .
                   
                     
                       Matthew
                       .
                    
                     
                       Marke
                       .
                    
                     
                       Luke
                       .
                    
                     
                       Iohn
                       .
                    
                  
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   
                     The
                     Church
                  
                   ,
                   Christs
                   body
                   ,
                   whose
                   primitive
                   plantatio●
                   ,
                   state
                   and
                   augmentation
                   both
                   among
                   Jewes
                   and
                   Gentiles
                   ,
                   is
                   delcared
                   in
                   the
                   
                     
                       
                         Acts
                         of
                         the
                         Apostles
                      
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               II.
               Epistolicall
               ,
               as
               all
               the
               Epistles
               written
               by
               the
               Apostles
               ,
               either
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   To
                   believing
                   Gentiles
                   ,
                   as
                   Pauls
                   Epistles
                   ,
                   
                     
                       1
                       Generall
                       ,
                       which
                       Paul
                       wrote
                       unto
                       whole
                       Churches
                       about
                       matters
                       of
                       generall
                       and
                       publ●ke
                       concernment
                       ,
                       as
                       ●he
                       Epistles
                       to
                       the
                       
                         
                           Romanes
                           .
                        
                         
                           I.
                           Corinthians
                           .
                        
                         
                           II.
                           Corinthians
                           .
                        
                         
                           Galatians
                        
                         
                           Ephesians
                        
                         
                           Philippians
                        
                         
                           Colossians
                        
                         
                           I.
                           Thessalonians
                        
                         
                           II.
                           Thessalonians
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       2
                       Particular
                       ,
                       to
                       particular
                       persons
                       touching
                       
                         
                           1
                           Publique
                           Ecclesiasticall
                           affaires
                           ,
                           as
                           the
                           Epistles
                           to
                           
                             
                               I.
                               Timothy
                               .
                            
                             
                               II.
                               Timothy
                               .
                            
                             
                               Titus
                               .
                            
                          
                        
                         
                           2.
                           
                           Private
                           Oeconomicall
                           affaires
                           ,
                           as
                           his
                           Epistle
                           to
                           
                             
                               Philemon
                               .
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   To
                   the
                   believing
                   Iewes
                   ,
                   as
                   it
                   is
                   probable
                   al
                   these
                   Epistles
                   were
                   ,
                   viz.
                   
                   
                     
                       1
                       The
                       Epistle
                       (
                       probably
                       written
                       by
                       Paul
                       )
                       to
                       the
                       
                         
                           Hebrewes
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       The
                       7.
                       
                       Epistles
                       commonly
                       called
                       ,
                       Generall
                       ,
                       or
                       the
                       
                         Catholique
                         Epistles
                      
                       of
                       
                         
                           Iames.
                           —
                           
                             
                               Iames
                            
                          
                        
                         
                           Peter
                           .
                           
                             
                               I.
                               Peter
                            
                             
                               II.
                               Peter
                               .
                            
                          
                        
                         
                           Iohn
                           
                             
                               General
                               .
                               —
                               
                                 
                                   I.
                                   Iohn
                                   .
                                
                              
                            
                             
                               Particular
                               .
                               
                                 
                                   II.
                                   Iohn
                                
                                 
                                   III.
                                   Iohn
                                
                              
                            
                          
                        
                         
                           Iude.
                           —
                           
                             
                               Iude
                               ,
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               III.
               Propheticall
               ,
               foretelling
               what
               shall
               be
               the
               future
               state
               and
               condition
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               Christ
               to
               the
               end
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               written
               by
               Iohn
               ,
               the
               Apost
               .
               viz.
               
               
                 
                   
                     The
                     Revelation
                     ▪
                  
                
              
            
          
        
      
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A57377-e270
           
             a
             John
             ●
             .
             39
             .
          
           
             b
             Col.
             3.16
             .
          
           
             c
             Psal
             ,
             40.8
             ,
          
           
             d
             ●sal
             .
             119.1
             .
          
           
             e
             August
             .
             Sacrae
             scripturae
             tuae
             sunt
             sanctae
             delitiae
             meae
             .
          
           
             f
             Longâ
             &
             assiduâ
             meditatione
             Scripturarum
             pectus
             suum
             fecerat
             Bibliothecam
             Christi
             .
             
               Hier.
               epistola
               ad
               Heliod
               .
               in
               Epitaphium
               Nepotiani
               .
            
          
           
             g
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             
               Pezelii
               Mellificium
               historicum
               in
               vita
               Iuliani
               .
            
          
           
             h
             1
             Pet.
             1.21
             ,
          
           
             i
             1
             Sam
             ▪
             21.9
             .
          
           
             k
             2
             Tim.
             3.15
             ,
             16.
             
          
           
             l
             Psal.
             1.1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             m
             Ps.
             116.92
             .
          
           
             n
             Psal.
             119.105
             .
          
           
             o
             Eph.
             6.13
             .
          
           
             p
             Jam.
             4.6
             .
          
           
             q
             Ps
             25.9
             .
          
           
             r
             Psal.
             119.18
             .
          
           
             s
             2
             Pet.
             3.16
             .
          
           
             t
             Job
             .
             7.17
             .
          
           
             u
             Rev.
             3.7
             .
          
           
             x
             Luk.
             ●●
             .
             45
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A57377-e1270
           
             a
             Act.
             7.38
             .
          
           
             b
             
               Chrysost
               :
               in
               Gal.
               Hom.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             c
             
               Chrysost.
               in
               Ep.
               ad
               Col.
               Hom.
            
             9.
             
          
           
             d
             Job
             .
             23.12
             .
          
           
             e
             Rom.
             7.22
             .
          
           
             f
             Psal.
             19.9
             .
             &
             119.103
             
          
           
             g
             Psal.
             119.162
             .
          
           
             h
             Ps.
             119.72
             .
          
           
             i
             Psal.
             119.14
             .
          
           
             k
             Psal.
             119
             111.
             
          
           
             l
             Psal.
             119.24
             .
          
           
             m
             Psal.
             119.50
             .
          
           
             n
             Psal.
             119.20
             .
          
           
             o
             Psal.
             1.1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             p
             
               August
               .
               de
               Civit.
               dei
               l.
            
             20.
             c.
             32.
             
               prope
               fin
            
             .
          
           
             q
             Act.
             8.30.31
             .
          
           
             r
             2
             Pet.
             3.16
             .
          
           
             s
             2
             Tim.
             3.16
             .
          
           
             t
             Rom.
             3.2
             .
          
           
             u
             Col.
             3.16
             .
          
           
             x
             Act.
             28.25
             .
          
           
             y
             2
             Pet.
             1.21
             .
          
           
             z
             Psal.
             19.7
             ,
             9.
             
          
           
             a
             Psal.
             19.7
             .
             and
             2
             Tim
             3.16
             ,
             17.
             
          
           
             b
             Psal.
             19.8
             .
          
           
             c
             Psal.
             119.140
             .
          
           
             d
             Numb
             .
             12.3
             .
          
           
             e
             Exod.
             33.11
             .
          
           
             f
             Deut.
             34.10
             .
          
           
             g
             Psal
             99.6
             .
             Jer.
             15.1
             .
             with
             1
             Sam.
             7.9
             ,
             10.
             
             &
             12.16
             ,
             17
             ,
             18.
             
          
           
             h
             Act.
             13.22
             .
          
           
             i
             1
             King.
             3.12
             .
             Neh.
             13.26
             .
          
           
             k
             2
             Sam.
             7.13
             .
          
           
             l
             Dan.
             9.12
             .
          
           
             m
             Dan.
             2.25
             ,
             28
             ,
             30
             ,
             47.
             
          
           
             n
             Joh.
             13.23
             .
          
           
             o
             Joh.
             21.7
             ,
             20.
             
          
           
             p
             2
             Cor.
             12.2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4.
             
          
           
             q
             
               Chrysost.
               de
               sacerd
               .
               l.
            
             4.
             
          
           
             r
             2
             Pet.
             1.21
             .
          
           
             s
             Gen.
             17.1
             .
          
           
             t
             ●am
             .
             1.17
             .
          
           
             u
             Psal
             90.2
             .
             &
             102.26
             ,
             27.
             
          
           
             x
             1
             King.
             8.27
             .
             Jer.
             23.24
             .
          
           
             y
             Psal.
             139.1
             ,
             12.
             
          
           
             z
             Psal
             147.
             
             ●
             .
          
           
             a
             Deut.
             6.4
             .
             1
             Cor.
             8.6
             .
          
           
             b
             1
             Joh.
             5
             7.
             
          
           
             c
             Rom.
             8.29
             ,
             30.
             
             Eph.
             1.4
             ,
             5
             ,
             6.
             
          
           
             d
             Is.
             9.6
             .
          
           
             e
             1
             Tim.
             2.5
             .
             and
             3.16
             .
          
           
             f
             Jer.
             31.31
             .
             to
             3●
             .
             Heb.
             8.8
             .
             &c.
             
          
           
             g
             1
             Tim.
             4.8
             .
          
           
             h
             2
             Pet.
             1.4
             .
          
           
             i
             2
             Cor.
             1.3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             Psal.
             94.19
             .
          
           
             k
             Rom.
             7.12
             .
          
           
             l
             
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               .
               
                 Chrysost.
                 in
                 Coloss.
                 Homil
              
               .
               9.
               
            
             
               Omnis
               Scriptura
               Divinitùs
               inspirata
               ,
               utilis
               est
               ad
               Docendum
               :
               H●c
               ipsa
               de
               causa
               a
               Spiritu
               Sancto
               scripta
               est
               ,
               ut
               veluti
               ex
               communi
               quodam
               sanitatis
               fonte
               ,
               omnes
               nobis
               ex
               hac
               remedia
               propriis
               p●ssionibus
               asssumamus
               
                 Aug.
                 in
                 Psalm
                 .
                 Pro.
                 egom
                 .
              
            
          
           
             m
             Eph.
             6
             ,
             17
             ▪
             
          
           
             n
             Adoro
             Scripturae
             plenitudinem
             .
             
               Tertull
               .
               Advers
               .
               Hermogen
            
             .
          
           
             p
             Auferantur
             de
             medio
             chartae
             nostrae
             ,
             procedat
             in
             medium
             codex
             Dei
             :
             Audi
             Christum
             dicentem
             ,
             Audi
             veritatem
             loquentem
             .
             
               August
               Enarrat
               .
               in
               Psal.
            
             57.
             
          
           
             *
             Sacra
             Scriptura
             est
             liber
             vit●e
             cujus
             origo
             eaterna
             ,
             cujus
             incorporalis
             essentia
             ,
             cujus
             cognitio
             Vita
             ,
             cujus
             scriptura
             indelebilis
             ,
             cujus
             inspectus
             desiderabilis
             ,
             cujus
             Doctrina
             facilis
             ,
             cujus
             scientia
             dulcis
             ,
             cujus
             profunditas
             inscrutabilis
             ,
             cujus
             verba
             innumerabili●
             ;
             &
             unum
             tantum
             verbum
             ,
             
               Omni●
               .
               Hug.
               de
               Arc.
               No●
               .
            
          
           
             q
             1
             Tim.
             1.17
             .
          
           
             r
             Psal.
             147
             5.
             
          
           
             s
             Rom
             11.33
             .
          
           
             t
             Ioh.
             1.5
             .
          
           
             u
             Humana
             omnia
             dicta
             argumentis
             &
             testibus
             egent
             :
             Dei
             autem
             sermo
             ipse
             sibitestis
             est
             .
             Quia
             necesse
             est
             quicquid
             incorrupta
             veritas
             loquitur
             ,
             incorruptum
             sit
             testimonium
             veritatis
             .
             
               Salvian
               .
               de
               Gubern
            
             .
             Dei.
             l.
             3.
             
          
           
             x
             Deus
             in
             Scripturis
             quasi
             amicus
             familiaris
             loquitur
             ad
             cor
             Doctorum
             &
             indoctorum
             .
             
               August
               .
               Epist.
            
             3
             
          
           
             y
             2
             Pet.
             3.16
             .
          
           
             z
             
               Magnisicè
               &
               salubriter
               spiritus
               Sanctus
               ita
               Scripturas
               Sanctas
               modificavit
               ,
               ut
               locis
               apertioribus
               ,
               fami
               occurrerer
               ,
               obscurio●ibus
               fastidia
               de●orgerer
               .
               Nihil
               enim
               fere
               de
               illis
               obscuritatibus
               eruitur
               ,
               quod
               non
               pla●●ssimè
               .
               dictum
               alibi
               reperiatur
               .
               
                 Aug.
                 de
                 Doct.
                 Christ.
                 l.
              
               2.
               c.
               6.
               
            
             
               In
               omni
               Copia
               Scripturarum
               Sanctarum
               ,
               pascimur
               apertis
               ,
               e●ercemur
               obscuris
               :
               illic
               fame●
               pellitur
               ,
               h●c
               fastidium
               .
               
                 Augdo
                 verb.
                 Dom.
                 Serm.
              
               11.
               
            
          
           
             a
             Verbi
             Dei
             altitudo
             exercet
             studium
             ,
             non
             denegat
             intellectum
             .
             Si
             enim
             omnia
             clausa
             essent
             ,
             nihil
             esset
             unde
             revelarentur
             obscura
             .
             Rursus
             si
             omnia
             tecta
             essent
             ,
             non
             esset
             unde
             alimentum
             anima
             perciperet
             ,
             &
             haberet
             vires
             quibus
             posset
             ad
             clausa
             pulsare
             .
             
               August
               .
               de
               verb.
               Apostoli
               .
               Serm.
            
             13.
             c.
             1.
             
               ad
               init
               .
               Tom.
            
             10.
             
          
           
             b
             2
             Tim.
             3.16
             ,
             17.
             
          
           
             c
             
               Lapidandi
               sunt
               Haeretici
               Sacrarum
               literarum
               Argumentis
               .
               
                 Athan
                 .
                 Cont.
                 Ari.
                 Or.
              
               2
            
             
               Haeretici
               sunt
               luci●ugae
               Scripturarum
               .
               
                 Tertull.
                 de
              
               resur
               .
               Carnis
               .
            
          
           
             d
             Rom.
             15.4
             .
          
           
             e
             Ioh.
             5.39
             .
          
           
             f
             Col.
             3.16
             .
          
           
             g
             2
             Tim.
             3.15
             .
          
           
             h
             Act.
             18.24
             .
          
           
             i
             Act.
             17.11
             
          
           
             k
             Psal.
             1.1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             l
             Heb.
             5.13
             .
          
           
             m
             Mark
             12.24
             .
             Mat.
             21.29
             .
          
           
             n
             Chrysost
             Hom.
             de
             Lazar.
             
          
           
             o
             
               Chrysost.
               in
               Epist.
               ad
               Coloss.
               Hom
            
             9.
             
          
           
             p
             Qui
             nescit
             Scripturas
             ,
             nescit
             Dei
             virturem
             ,
             ejus
             que
             sapientiam
             ▪
             ignoratio
             Scripturarum
             ignoratio
             Christi
             est
             .
             
               Hieron
               in
               
                 proem
              
               .
               Isa●
            
             .
          
           
             q
             Joh.
             13
             .
             1●
             
          
           
             r
             Act.
             8.28
             29.
             &c.
             
          
           
             s
             Tit.
             1.11
             
          
           
             t
             Verus
             cibus
             &
             potus
             qui
             ex
             verbo
             dei
             sumitur
             ,
             Scientia
             Scripturarum
             est
             .
             
               Hicron
               .
               in
               Eccle.
               c.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             u
             Congrua
             de
             testimoniis
             Scripturarum
             ligna
             quae●entes
             ,
             aedificemus
             domum
             sapien●ae
             in
             nobis
             .
             
               Hicronym
               .
               in
               Aggeum
               .
               ●
               .
            
             1.
             
          
           
             x
             Negant
             plerique
             nostros
             secundum
             Artem
             scripsisse
             .
             Nec
             nos
             obnitimur
             Non
             enim
             secundum
             Artem
             scripserunt
             sed
             secundum
             gratiam
             ,
             quae
             super
             omnem
             Artem
             est
             .
             (
             Scripserunt
             enim
             quae
             spiritus
             iis
             loqui
             dabat
             )
             Sed
             tamen
             ii
             qui
             de
             arte
             scripserunt
             ,
             de
             eorum
             .
             Scriptis
             artem
             invenerunt
             ;
             &
             condiderunt
             Commenta
             Artis
             &
             Magisteria
             ,
             &c.
             
               ●mbr
               .
               Ep.
               l.
            
             8.
             
             
               Epist.
               Lxiii
            
             .
          
           
             y
             Jam.
             1.5
             .
          
           
             z
             John
             4.11
             .
          
           
             a
             1
             Cor.
             13.9
             .
          
           
             b
             Ego
             cupio
             intrare
             in
             domūtuam
             ,
             i.
             e.
             Ecclesiam
             &
             volo
             intrare
             per
             viam
             tuam
             rectam
             .
             quae
             est
             ista
             via
             ?
             lectio
             Scripturarum
             .
             Dirige
             viam
             meam
             ne
             in
             Scripturis
             ●uis
             per
             quas
             ingredi
             cupio
             in
             Ecclesiam
             tuam
             ,
             corruam
             .
             Omnis
             qui
             ●alè
             intelligit
             scripturas
             ,
             in
             via
             dei
             corruit
             .
             
               Hi●ron
               .
               in
               Ps.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             c
             Rev.
             3.18
             .
          
           
             d
             Luk.
             24.45
             .
          
           
             e
             Ps.
             119.18
             .
          
           
             f
             Nunquam
             Pauli
             sensum
             ingredieris
             ,
             nisi
             Pauli
             spiritum
             imbiberis
             .
             
               Bernard
               ad
               ●ratr
               .
               de
               Mont.
               
            
          
           
             g
             Heb.
             10.32
             ,
             33
             ,
             34
             
          
           
             h
             1
             John
             2.27
             .
          
           
             i
             Psal.
             25.12
             ,
             14.
             
          
           
             k
             Joh.
             14.21
             ,
             22
             ,
             23.
             
          
           
             l
             1
             Cor.
             2.14.15
             ,
             16.
             
          
           
             m
             1
             Cor.
             8.2
             .
          
           
             n
             Deo
             meo
             gratias
             ago
             ,
             quod
             ignorantiam
             meam
             non
             igno
             .
             Pro
             ;
             
               said
               one
            
             .
          
           
             o
             Prov.
             3.34
             ●am
             4.6
             &
             1
             Pet.
             5.5
             .
          
           
             p
             Pro.
             11.2
             .
          
           
             q
             Psal.
             25.9
             .
          
           
             r
             Matth.
             11.25
             .
          
           
             s
             Homines
             clatos
             ,
             superbos
             ,
             qui
             suo
             judicio
             praesentes
             sunt
             ,
             &
             proprio
             ingenio
             multum
             tribuunt
             ,
             non
             assequi
             legitimum
             Scripturae
             sensum
             ▪
             &c.
             Becanus
             .
          
           
             t
             Psal.
             1.2
             .
          
           
             u
             Col.
             3.16
             .
          
           
             x
             Josh.
             1.8
             .
          
           
             y
             Deut.
             6.6
             ,
             7
             ,
             8
             ,
             9
             ,
             10.
             
          
           
             z
             Rom.
             12.6
             .
          
           
             a
             2
             Tim.
             1.13
             .
          
           
             b
             Matth.
             26.26
             ,
             28.
             
             Mark
             14.22
             ,
             24.
             
             Luk.
             22.19
             ,
             20.
             1
             
             Cor.
             11.24
             ,
             25.
             
          
           
             c
             Act.
             3.21
             .
          
           
             d
             John
             6.
             
          
           
             e
             Matth.
             5.29
             ,
             30.
             
          
           
             f
             Exod.
             20.13
             .
          
           
             g
             Eph.
             4.14
             .
          
           
             z
             Cum
             corde
             nostro
             nos
             concordemus
             :
             &
             Scriptura
             sancta
             in
             nulla
             parte
             discordat
             .
             
               Aug.
               De
               verb.
               Dom.
               Ser.
            
             16.
             
          
           
             a
             Ex
             verbis
             sensum
             sequamur
             ,
             &
             ex
             sensu
             rationem
             intelligamus
             ,
             &
             ex
             ratione
             veritatem
             apprehendamus
             .
             
               Hilar.
               de
               Trinit
               .
               l.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             b
             Phil.
             2.12
             .
          
           
             c
             1
             John
             4.18
             .
          
           
             d
             2
             King.
             17.32
             ,
             33
             with
             v
             34.
             
          
           
             e
             John
             8.51
             .
          
           
             f
             Heb.
             9.27
             .
          
           
             g
             Jer.
             17.5
             .
          
           
             h
             John.
             653.
             
          
           
             i
             Gen.
             2.3
             .
          
           
             k
             John
             5.17
             .
          
           
             l
             Luk.
             14.26
             .
          
           
             m
             Col.
             3.19
             .
          
           
             n
             Eph.
             5.29
             .
          
           
             o
             Rom.
             3.28
             .
          
           
             p
             Jam.
             2.24
             .
          
           
             q
             Joh.
             16.13
             
          
           
             r
             Ga●
             .
             2.11
             .
             &c.
             
          
           
             s
             ●
             King.
             2
             ▪
             ●1
             .
          
           
             t
             Mal.
             4.5
             .
          
           
             u
             Luke
             1.17
             .
          
           
             x
             Joh.
             1.21
             
          
           
             y
             Matt.
             11.14
             &
             17.11
             ,
             12.
             
             Mark.
             9
             11
             12
             ,
             13.
             
          
           
             z
             Rom.
             7
             18
             
          
           
             a
             Rom.
             7.22
             
          
           
             b
             Joh.
             14.28
             .
          
           
             c
             Phil.
             2.5
             ,
             6.
             
          
           
             d
             See
             Joh.
             1.14
             .
             1
             Tim
             3.16
             Gal.
             4.4
             .
          
           
             e
             Joh.
             5.31
             
          
           
             f
             Joh.
             8.14
             
          
           
             g
             1
             Joh.
             3.9
             
          
           
             h
             Joh.
             1.8.10
             .
          
           
             i
             
               See
               all
               these
               particulars
               largly
               opened
               in
               my
            
             Beleevers
             Evidences
             for
             eternal
             life
             .
             cap.
             2.
             p.
             38.
             &c
          
           
             k
             Mal.
             3.6
             .
          
           
             l
             Jer.
             18.8.10
             
          
           
             m
             Isai.
             9.7
             .
             Luk
             ,
             1.33
             .
          
           
             n
             1
             Cor.
             15
             24.
             
          
           
             o
             2
             King.
             15.33
             .
          
           
             p
             2
             King.
             15
             30.
             
          
           
             q
             Mat.
             17.1
             .
          
           
             r
             Luk.
             9.28
             
          
           
             s
             See
             Key
             of
             the
             Bible
             .
             p.
             137.
             
          
           
             t
             Act.
             13.19
             ,
             20.
             
          
           
             u
             
               ●ez
               .
               Annot
               .
               in
            
             Act.
             13.20
             .
             
               Ludovic
               .
               De
               Dieu
               Animadvers
               .
               in
               Act.
               Apost
               .
               c.
            
             13.
             v.
             20.
             
          
           
             x
             Beroaldus
             ,
             with
             others
             .
          
           
             y
             Ubi
             apertius
             sententiae
             ponuntur
             ,
             ibi
             discent
             dum
             est
             quomodo
             in
             locis
             intelligantur
             obscuris
             .
             
               Aug.
               de
               Doct.
               Christian.
               l.
            
             3.
             c.
             25.
             
          
           
             z
             Psal.
             16.10
             .
          
           
             a
             Act.
             2.
             
             ●5
             .
             to
             32.
             
          
           
             b
             
               Aug.
               de
               Doct.
               Chri.
               l.
            
             3.
             c.
             28.
             
          
           
             c
             
               Iren.
               l.
            
             4.
             c.
             63.
             
          
           
             d
             
               Chrysostom
               .
               in
               Gen.
               Hom.
            
             13.
             
          
           
             e
             
               Orig.
               in
               Matth.
               Hom.
            
             25.
             
          
           
             f
             
               Hilar.
               de
               Trinit
               .
               l.
            
             1.
             —
             Retulerit
             magis
             quam
             Attulerit
             .
             —
          
           
             g
             Joh
             5.39
             Act.
             3.18
             .
             &c.
             Act.
             7
             52.
             
             &
             10
             43.
             
             Rom.
             10.4
             .
             2
             Cor
             3.14
             ,
             16.
             
             Gal.
             3.24
             .
             1
             Cor.
             2.2
             .
             Revel
             .
             19.10
             .
          
           
             h
             2
             Cor.
             1.20
             .
          
           
             i
             Gal.
             3.20
             .
          
           
             k
             Joh
             10.4.5
             .
          
           
             l
             Rom.
             1.16
             .
             1
             Cor.
             1.18
             .
          
           
             m
             Mal.
             4.2
             
          
           
             n
             Ille
             qui
             cor
             habet
             ,
             quod
             praecisum
             est
             ju●gat
             Scripturae
             &
             legat
             superio●a
             vel
             inferiora
             ,
             &
             in
             vēiet
             sensum
             ,
             qu●m
             pravus
             vol●bat
             malé
             interpretari
             .
             
               Aug.
               de
               verb.
               Dom.
               Serm
            
             49.
             
          
           
             o
             Dictotum
             intelligentia
             ,
             aut
             ex
             praepositis
             ,
             aut
             ex
             consequentib●s
             expectetur
             .
             
               Hilar.
               de
               Trini●
               .
               l.
            
             6.
             
          
           
             p
             1
             Pet.
             4.18
             .
          
           
             q
             1
             Pet
             4.17
             .
          
           
             r
             Matth.
             13.3
             .
             &c.
             with
             v.
             18.
             &c.
             
          
           
             s
             Rev.
             1.12
             ,
             13
             ,
             16
             ,
             20.
             
          
           
             t
             Matth.
             5.21
             .
             
               to
               the
               end
               of
               the
               chapt
               .
            
          
           
             u
             In
             iis
             quae
             aperte
             in
             Scriptura
             posita
             sunt
             ,
             inveniuntur
             illa
             omnia
             quae
             continent
             sidem
             ,
             moresque
             vivendi
             .
             
               August
               .
               de
               doctrin
               .
               Christian.
               l.
            
             2.
             c.
             9.
             
             Ad
             obscuriores
             locutiones
             illustrandas
             de
             manifestioribus
             suman●ur
             exemplo
             .
             ibid.
             ubi
             apertiùs
             sententiae
             ponuntur
             ,
             ibi
             discendum
             est
             quomodo
             ,
             in
             locis
             intelligantur
             obscuris
             .
             
               Aug.
               de
               doct
               .
               Christian
               .
               l.
            
             3.
             c.
             25.
             
          
           
             x
             Num.
             21.9
             with
             Joh.
             3
             ,
             14
             15.16
             .
          
           
             y
             Exod.
             16
             15.
             &c.
             and
             17.6
             .
             with
             1
             Cor.
             10.3
             ,
             4.
             
             John
             6.
             
          
           
             z
             Is
             divinas
             Scripturas
             recte
             legir
             ,
             qui
             verba
             vertit
             in
             opera
             .
             
               Bernard
               .
               in
               Tract
               .
               de
               Ord.
               vitae
               .
            
          
           
             a
             ●ohn
             7.16
             ,
             17.
             
          
           
             b
             Ps.
             119.98.99
             100.
             
          
           
             c
             Isa.
             48.17
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A57377-e14250
           
             *
             Mose●
             is
             the
             seventh
             from
             Abraham
             ,
             a
             New
             Henoch
             ,
             who
             was
             the
             seventh
             from
             Adam
             .
             So
             was
             Eber
             the
             seventh
             from
             Enoch
             ;
             and
             Isaac
             the
             seventh
             from
             Eber.
             All
             excellent
             among
             ordinary
             men
             .
             As
             the
             Sabbath
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             six
             other
             daies
             .
             The
             
               view
               of
               Holy
               Script
               .
               p.
            
             133.
             
          
           
             *
             Haec
             autem
             animalia
             tria
             ,
             sive
             leo
             ,
             sive
             homo
             ,
             sive
             vitulus
             in
             terra
             gradiuntur
             :
             unde
             isti
             tres
             Evangelistae
             in
             his
             maximè
             occupati
             sunt
             ,
             quae
             Christus
             in
             carne
             operatus
             ,
             &
             quae
             precepta
             mortalis
             vitae
             exercendae
             carnem
             ▪
             portantibus
             tradidit
             .
             At
             vero
             Joannes
             super
             nubila
             infirmitat●s
             Humanae
             velut
             Aquila
             volat
             ,
             &
             lucem
             incommutabilis
             veritatis
             acutissimis
             atque
             firmissimis
             o●ulis
             cordit
             in●u●tur
             .
             
               Aug.
               de
               consens
               .
               Evang●
               de
            
             1.
             c.
             6.
             
             Tom.
             4.
             
          
           
             Suidas
             .
          
           
             ☞